Mercedes-Benz GLB 2019 SUV MBUX Owner's Manual PDF ...

Disclaimer

Das folgende PDF-Dokument für dieses Fahrzeugmodell bezieht sich in allen Sprachversionen nur auf die Fahrzeuge, die für den deutschen Markt bestimmt sind und die den deutschen Vorschriften entsprechen. Bitte wenden Sie sich an Ihren autorisierten Mercedes-Benz Servicestützpunkt, um ein gedrucktes Exemplar für andere Fahrzeugmodelle und Fahrzeugmodelljahre zu erhalten.

Dieses PDF-Dokument stellt die aktuelle Version dar. Mögliche Abweichungen zu Ihrem konkreten Fahrzeug könnten nicht berücksichtigt sein, da Mercedes-Benz seine Fahrzeuge ständig dem neuesten Stand der Technik anpasst, sowie Änderungen in Form und Ausstattung vornimmt. Bitte beachten Sie daher, dass dieses PDF-Dokument in keinem Fall das gedruckte Exemplar ersetzt, das mit dem Fahrzeug ausgeliefert wurde.

Internal use only

Disclaimer

All language versions of the following PDF document for this vehicle model relate solely to vehicles intended for sale on the German market and which correspond to German regulations.

Please contact your authorised Mercedes-Benz Service Centre to obtain a printed version for other vehicle models and vehicle model years. This PDF document is the latest version. Possible variations to your vehicle may not be taken into account as Mercedes-Benz constantly updates their vehicles to the state of the art and introduces changes in design and equipment. Please therefore note that this PDF document in no way replaces the printed version which was delivered with your vehicle.

Internal use only

Disclaimer

The following version of the Owner‘s Manual describes all models, series and special equipment of your vehicle. Country-specific language variations are possible. Please note that your vehicle might not be equipped with all the described functions. This also affects safety-relevant systems and functions. Please contact your authorised Mercedes-Benz dealership if you would like to receive a printed Owner‘s Manual for other vehicle models and vehicle model years.

The online Owner‘s Manual is the current and valid version. It is possible that deviations affecting your specific vehicle could not be taken into account as Mercedes-Benz constantly adapts its vehicles according to the latest technology and makes changes to the form and the equipment.

Please also read the printed Owner‘s Manual, supplementary documents and the digital Owner‘s Manual in the vehicle.

CopyrightAll rights reserved. All texts, images and graphics are subject to copyright and other laws for the protection of intellectual property. They may not be copied or changed for any commercial use or for the purpose of being passed on nor used on other webistes.

Thank you for purchasing a Mercedes-BenzBefore you first drive off, read this Owner's Man‐ual carefully and familiarise yourself with yourvehicle. For your own safety and a longer operat‐ing lifespan of the vehicle, follow the instructionsand warning notices in this Owner's Manual. Dis‐regarding them may lead to damage to the vehi‐cle or injury to people.The standard equipment and product descriptionof your vehicle may vary and depends on the fol‐lowing factors:R modelR orderR national versionR availability

The illustrations in this Owner's Manual show aleft-hand drive vehicle. On right-hand-drive vehi‐cles, the layout of car parts and control ele‐ments differs accordingly.Mercedes-Benz is constantly developing its vehi‐cles further.

Mercedes-Benz therefore reserves the right tointroduce changes in the following areas:R DesignR EquipmentR Technical features

The equipment in your vehicle may therefore dif‐fer from that shown in the descriptions and illus‐trations.The following documents are integral parts ofthe vehicle:R Digital Owner's ManualR printed Owner's ManualR service bookletR equipment-dependent Supplements

Keep these documents in the vehicle at alltimes. If you sell the vehicle, always pass all ofthe documents on to the new owner.

2475840703Z102

2475840703Z102

Symbols ........................................................ 5

At a glance .................................................... 6Cockpit ........................................................... 6Indicator and warning lamps (standard) ........ 10Indicator and warning lamps (widescreencockpit) ......................................................... 12Overhead control panel ................................ 14Door control panel and seat adjustment ....... 16Emergencies and breakdowns ...................... 18

Digital Owner's Manual ............................. 20Calling up the Digital Owner's Manual .......... 20

General notes ............................................. 21Protection of the environment ...................... 21Take-back of end-of-life vehicles ................... 21Mercedes-Benz GenuineParts ....................... 22Owner's Manual ........................................... 23Operating safety ........................................... 23Declaration of Conformity ............................. 24Diagnostics connection ................................ 29Qualified specialist workshop ....................... 30

Vehicle registration ....................................... 30Correct use of the vehicle ............................ 30Information on the REACH regulation ........... 31Implied warranty ........................................... 31QR code for rescue card ............................... 31Data storage ................................................. 31Copyright ...................................................... 34

Occupant safety ......................................... 35Restraint system ........................................... 35Seat belts ..................................................... 37Airbags .......................................................... 41PRE-SAFE® system ....................................... 49Safely transporting children in the vehi‐cle ................................................................ 50Notes on pets in the vehicle ......................... 80

Opening and closing .................................. 82Key ............................................................... 82Doors ............................................................ 86Load compartment ....................................... 92Side windows ............................................... 98Sliding sunroof ............................................ 102Anti-theft protection ................................... 107

Seats and stowing .................................... 110Notes on the correct driver's seat posi‐tion ............................................................. 110Notes on the height limit on the thirdrow of seats ................................................. 111Seats ........................................................... 111Steering wheel ............................................ 122Easy entry and exit feature ......................... 123Operating the memory function .................. 124Stowage areas ............................................ 126Cup holders ................................................ 142Ashtray and cigarette lighter ....................... 146Sockets ....................................................... 147Wireless charging of the mobile phoneand connection with the exterior aerial ....... 151Fitting/removing the floor mats ................. 153

Light and sight ......................................... 155Exterior lighting .......................................... 155Interior lighting ........................................... 163Changing bulbs (only for vehicles withhalogen headlamps) .................................... 165Windscreen wipers and windscreenwasher system ............................................ 167

2 Contents

Mirrors ........................................................ 171Operating the sun visors ............................. 174

Climate control ......................................... 175Overview of climate control systems .......... 175Operating the climate control system ......... 176

Driving and parking ................................. 185Driving ........................................................ 185DYNAMIC SELECT switch ............................ 198Manual transmission .................................. 201Automatic transmission .............................. 203Function of the 4MATIC .............................. 208Refuelling ................................................... 209Parking ........................................................ 215Driving and driving safety systems ............. 224Trailer hitch ................................................ 288Bicycle rack function .................................. 291Vehicle towing instructions ......................... 293

Instrument Display and on-boardcomputer .................................................. 294Instrument display overview ....................... 294

Overview of the buttons on the steeringwheel .......................................................... 295Operating the on-board computer .............. 296Adjusting the design of the instrumentdisplay ........................................................ 297Showing display content on the instru‐ment cluster ............................................... 298Overview of displays on the multifunc‐tion display ................................................. 299Adjusting the instrument lighting ............... 300Menus and submenus ................................ 300Head-up Display ......................................... 307

LINGUATRONIC ........................................ 309Notes on operating safety .......................... 309Operation .................................................... 310Using LINGUATRONIC effectively ................ 312Essential voice commands .......................... 313

MBUX multimedia system ...................... 329Overview and operation .............................. 329System settings .......................................... 363Fit & Healthy ............................................... 373Navigation ................................................... 378

Telephone ................................................... 423Online and Internet functions ..................... 459Media ......................................................... 468Radio .......................................................... 477Sound ......................................................... 480

Maintenance and care ............................. 484ASSYST PLUS service interval display ........ 484Engine compartment .................................. 485Cleaning and care ....................................... 491

Breakdown assistance ............................ 501Emergency .................................................. 501Flat tyre ...................................................... 503Battery (vehicle) ......................................... 509Tow-starting or towing away ........................ 514Electrical fuses ........................................... 520

Wheels and tyres ..................................... 524Notes on noise or unusual handling char‐acteristics ................................................... 524Notes on regularly inspecting wheels andtyres ........................................................... 524

Contents 3

Notes on snow chains ................................ 525Tyre pressure .............................................. 525Wheel change ............................................. 534Emergency spare wheel .............................. 544

Technical data .......................................... 548Notes on technical data .............................. 548On-board electronics .................................. 548Vehicle identification plate, VIN andengine number overview ............................ 550Operating fluids .......................................... 552Vehicle data ................................................ 561Trailer hitch ................................................ 563

Display messages and warning/indi‐cator lamps .............................................. 566Display messages ....................................... 566Warning and indicator lamps ...................... 623

Index ......................................................... 639

4 Contents

In this Owner's Manual, you will find the follow‐ing symbols:

& DANGER Danger due to not observingthe warning notices

Warning notices draw your attention to haz‐ards that may endanger your health or life, orthe health or life of others.# Observe the warning notices.

+ ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmentaldamage due to failure to observe envi‐ronmental notes

Environmental notes include information onenvironmentally responsible behaviour orenvironmentally responsible disposal.# Observe environmental notes.

* NOTE Damage to property due to failureto observe notes on material damage

Notes on material damage inform you ofrisks which may lead to your vehicle beingdamaged.

# Observe notes on material damage.

% Useful instructions or further informationthat could be helpful to you.

X Instruction(Q page) Further information on a topicDisplay Information on the multifunction dis‐

play/media display+ Highest menu level, which is to be

selected in the multimedia system* Corresponding submenus, which are

to be selected in the multimedia sys‐tem

* Marks a cause

Symbols 5

Left-hand drive vehicles

6 At a glance – Cockpit

1 Steering wheel gearshift paddles → 205

2 Combination switch → 157

3 Instrument display → 294

4 DIRECT SELECT lever → 203

5 Start/stop button → 186

ECO start/stop function → 197

6 Media display → 332

7 Climate control systems → 176

8 Hazard warning lights → 158

9 PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps → 46

A Glove compartment → 127

B Stowage compartment → 127

C Cup holder → 142

D Control knob for:

Volume and switching sound on/off → 329

Switching the MBUX multimedia systemon/off

→ 329

E Calls up navigation → 378

F Calls up the radio → 478

Calls up media → 471

G Calls up the telephone → 425

H Calls up favourites → 350

I Calls up vehicle functions → 342

J Active Parking Assist → 272

K DYNAMIC SELECT switch → 199

L Touchpad → 334

M Control panel for the MBUX multimedia sys‐tem

→ 295

N Adjusts the steering wheel → 122

O Switches the steering wheel heater on/off → 123

P Control panel:

On-board computer → 295

Cruise control or variable limiter → 239

Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC → 245

At a glance – Cockpit 7

Q Diagnostics connection → 29

R Opens the bonnet → 486

S Electric parking brake → 221

T Light switch → 155

8 At a glance – Cockpit

Instrument display (standard)

10 At a glance – Indicator and warning lamps (standard)

1 ! ABS malfunction → 634

2 #! Turn signal light → 157

3 h Tyre pressure monitor → 637

4 Speedometer → 294

5 Multifunction display → 299

6 # Electrical fault → 628

7L Distance warning → 633

8 J Brakes (yellow) → 631

9 J Brakes (red) → 631

A ! Electric parking brake (yellow) → 631

B ! Electric parking brake applied (red) → 631

C ; Engine diagnostics → 628

D % Diesel engine: preglow

E N Front fog lamps → 155

F R Rear fog light → 156

G K High beam → 157

L Low beam → 155

T Standing lights → 155

H å ESP® OFF → 634

÷ ESP® → 634

I 6 Restraint system → 625

J Fuel level indicator

K æ Fuel reserve with fuel filler cap locationindicator

→ 628

LÙ Electric power steering malfunction → 626

M ü Seat belt not fastened → 625

Nï Trailer hitch not operational → 626

At a glance – Indicator and warning lamps (standard) 11

Widescreen cockpit instrument display

12 At a glance – Indicator and warning lamps (widescreen cockpit)

1 Speedometer → 294

2 #! Turn signal lights → 157

3ï Trailer hitch not operational → 626

4 Multifunction display → 299

5 6 Restraint system → 625

6 Rev counter → 294

7 å ESP® OFF → 634

÷ ESP® → 634

8 R Rear fog light → 156

9 K High beam → 157

L Low beam → 155

T Standing lights → 155

A N Front fog lamps → 155

Bÿ Coolant too hot/cold → 628

C Coolant temperature display → 294

D ! Electric parking brake (yellow) → 631

E J Brakes (yellow) → 631

F # Electrical fault → 628

GL Distance warning → 633

H ! ABS malfunction → 634

IÙ Electric power steering malfunction → 626

J h Tyre pressure monitoring system → 637

K % Diesel engine: preglow

L æ Fuel reserve with fuel filler cap locationindicator

→ 628

M Fuel level indicator

N ! Electric parking brake applied (red) → 631

O ü Seat belt not fastened → 625

P J Brakes (red) → 631

Q ; Engine diagnostics → 628

Rä This indicator lamp has no function

At a glance – Indicator and warning lamps (widescreen cockpit) 13

14 At a glance – Overhead control panel

1 Sun visors → 174

2 p Switches the left-hand reading lampon/off

→ 163

3 | Switches automatic interior lighting con‐trol on/off

→ 163

4 c Switches the front interior lightingon/off

→ 163

5 u Switches the rear interior lightingon/off

→ 163

6 p Switches the right-hand reading lampon/off

→ 163

7; me button → 447

8 G SOS button → 447

9 3 Opens/closes the panorama slidingsunroof

→ 102

3 Opens/closes the roller sunblind → 102

A Inside rearview mirror → 172

At a glance – Overhead control panel 15

16 At a glance – Door control panel and seat adjustment

1 Operates the memory function → 124

2 Adjusts the seats electrically → 114

3 Switches the seat heating on/off → 120

4 Switches the seat ventilation on/off → 121

5 W Opens/closes the rear left side window → 98

6 W Opens/closes the left side window → 98

7 Operates the outside mirrors → 171

8 Opens/closes the tailgate → 92

9 W Opens/closes the right side window → 98

A W Opens/closes the rear right side win‐dow

→ 98

B Child safety lock for the rear side windows → 80

C Opens the door → 87

DßÜ Locks/unlocks the vehicle → 87

E Adjusts the head restraints → 118

F Configures the seat settings → 120

G Adjusts the seat backrest inclination → 113

H Adjusts the seat height → 113

I Adjusts the seat cushion inclination → 113

J Sets the seat fore-and-aft position → 113

K Adjusts the seat cushion length → 113

At a glance – Door control panel and seat adjustment 17

18 At a glance – Emergencies and breakdowns

1 Safety vests → 501

2 Fire extinguisher → 502

3 me button and SOS button → 447

4 Hazard warning lights → 158

5 Starting assistance → 513

6 To check and top up operating fluids → 552

7 To tow-start and tow away → 516

8 Flat tyre → 503

9 QR code for accessing the rescue card → 31

A To tow-start and tow away → 516

B TIREFIT kit → 505

C First-aid kit (soft sided) → 502

D Warning triangle → 501

E Fuel filler flap with instruction labels for tyrepressure, fuel type and QR code for accessingthe rescue card

→ 209

At a glance – Emergencies and breakdowns 19

Calling up the Digital Owner's ManualMultimedia system:4© 5 Info 5 Owner's Manual 5Õ

The Digital Owner's Manual describes the func‐tion and operation of:R the vehicleR the multimedia system

# Select one of the following menu items in theDigital Owner's Manual:R Search: search for keywords in order to find

quick answers to questions about the opera‐tion of the vehicle.

R Quick start: find the first steps towards set‐ting up your vehicle.R Tips: find information that prepares you for

certain everyday situations with your vehicle.R Messages: receive additional information

about the messages in the instrument dis‐play.R Bookmarks: gain access to your personally

saved bookmarks.R Language: select the language for the Digital

Owner's Manual.

Some sections in the Digital Owner's Manual,e.g. warning notes, can be opened and closed.Additional methods of calling up the DigitalOwner's Manual:Direct access: open the required content in theDigital Owner's Manual by pressing and holdingan entry on the tab bar in the multimedia sys‐tem:

Instrument display: call up brief information asdisplay messages in the instrument cluster.LINGUATRONIC: call up via the voice controlsystemGlobal search: call up search results for con‐tents of the Digital Owner's Manual in the homescreenFor safety reasons, the Digital Owner's Manual isdeactivated while driving.% The Owner's Manual can also be found in the

Mercedes-Benz Guides App in all commonapp stores.

20 Digital Owner's Manual

Protection of the environment

+ ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmentaldamage due to operating conditions andpersonal driving style

The pollutant emission of the vehicle isdirectly related to the way you operate thevehicle.Operate your vehicle in an environmentallyresponsible manner to help protect the envi‐ronment. Please observe the following rec‐ommendations on operating conditions andpersonal driving style.Operating conditions:# Make sure that the tyre pressure is cor‐

rect.# Do not carry any unnecessary weight

(e.g. roof luggage racks once you nolonger need them).

# Adhere to the service intervals.A regularly serviced vehicle will contrib‐ute to environmental protection.

# Always have maintenance work carriedout at a qualified specialist workshop.

Personal driving style:# Do not depress the accelerator pedal

when starting the engine.# Do not warm up the engine while the

vehicle is stationary.# Drive carefully and maintain a suitable

distance from the vehicle in front.# Avoid frequent, sudden acceleration

and braking.# Change gear in good time and use each

gear only up toÔ of its maximumengine speed.

# Switch off the engine in stationary traf‐fic, e.g. by using the ECO start/stopfunction.

# Drive fuel-efficiently. Observe the ECOdisplay for a fuel-efficient driving style.

Take-back of end-of-life vehicles

EU countries only:Mercedes-Benz will take back your end-of-lifevehicle for environment-friendly disposal inaccordance with the European Union (EU) End-of-Life Vehicles Directive.A network of vehicle take-back points and dis‐mantlers has been established for you to returnyour vehicle. You can leave it at any of thesepoints free of charge. This makes an importantcontribution to closing the recycling circle andconserving resources.For further information about the recycling anddisposal of end-of-life vehicles, and the take-back conditions, please visit the nationalMercedes-Benz website for your country.

General notes 21

Mercedes-Benz GenuineParts

+ ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmentaldamage caused by not using recycledreconditioned components

Daimler AG offers recycled reconditionedcomponents and parts with the same qualityas new parts. The same entitlement from theimplied warranty is valid as for new parts.# Use recycled reconditioned compo‐

nents and parts from Daimler AG.

* NOTE Impairment of the operating effi‐ciency of the restraint systems frominstalling accessory parts or from repairsor welding

Airbags and seat belt tensioners, as well ascontrol units and sensors for the restraintsystems, may be installed in the followingareas of your vehicle:R doorsR door pillars

R door sillsR seatsR cockpitR instrument clusterR centre consoleR lateral roof frame

# Do not install accessory parts such asaudio systems in these areas.

# Do not carry out repairs or welding.# Have accessories retrofitted at a quali‐

fied specialist workshop.

You could jeopardise the operating safety of yourvehicle if you use parts, tyres and wheels as wellas accessories relevant to safety which have notbeen approved by Mercedes-Benz. Safety-rele‐vant systems, e.g. the brake system, may mal‐function. Only use Mercedes-Benz Genuine Partsor parts of equal quality. Only use tyres, wheelsand accessories that have been specificallyapproved for your vehicle model.

Mercedes-Benz tests original parts and conver‐sion parts and accessories that have been spe‐cifically approved for your vehicle model for theirreliability, safety and suitability. Despite ongoingmarket research, Mercedes-Benz is unable toassess other parts. Mercedes-Benz thereforeaccepts no responsibility for the use of suchparts in Mercedes-Benz vehicles, even if theyhave been officially approved or independentlyapproved by a testing centre.Certain parts are only officially approved forinstallation or modification if they comply withlegal requirements. All Mercedes-Benz GenuineParts meet the approval requirements. The useof non-approved parts may invalidate the vehi‐cle's general operating permit.This is the case in the following situations:R the vehicle type is different from that for

which the vehicle's general operating permitwas granted.R other road users could be endangered.R the exhaust gas or noise level gets worse.

22 General notes

Always specify the vehicle identification number(VIN) (/ page 550) when ordering Mercedes-Benz Genuine Parts.

Owner's ManualThis Owner's Manual describes all models andall standard and optional equipment available foryour vehicle at the time of this Owner's Manualgoing to press. Country-specific differences arepossible. Note that your vehicle may not be fit‐ted with all features described. This is also thecase for systems and functions relevant tosafety. Therefore, the equipment on your vehiclemay differ from that in the descriptions and illus‐trations.The original purchase agreement for your vehiclecontains a list of all of the systems in your vehi‐cle.Should you have any questions concerningequipment and operation, please consult aMercedes-Benz Service Centre.The Owner's Manual and Service Booklet areimportant documents and should be kept in thevehicle.

Operating safety

& WARNING Risk of accident due to mal‐functions or system failures

If you do not have the prescribed service/maintenance work or any required repairscarried out, this could result in malfunctionsor system failures.# Always have the prescribed service/

maintenance work as well any requiredrepairs carried out at a qualified spe‐cialist workshop.

& WARNING Risk of accident and injury asa result of incorrect modifications toelectronic component parts

Modification to electronic components, theirsoftware or wiring could impair their functionand/or the function of other networked com‐ponent parts. In particular, systems relevantto safety could also be affected.

As a result, they may no longer function asintended and/or endanger the operatingsafety of the vehicle.# Never tamper with the wiring and elec‐

tronic component parts or their soft‐ware.

# You should have all work on electricaland electronic components carried outat a qualified specialist workshop.

If you modify the on-board electronics, the gen‐eral operating permit is rendered invalid.Observe the "On-board electronics" section in"Technical data".

& WARNING Risk of fire due to flammablematerials on hot parts of the exhaustsystem

Flammable material such as leaves, grass ortwigs may ignite if they come into contactwith hot parts of the exhaust system.

General notes 23

# When driving on unpaved roads or off-road, regularly check the vehicle under‐side.

# Remove trapped plants or other flam‐mable material, in particular.

# If there is damage, consult a qualifiedspecialist workshop immediately.

* NOTE Damage to the vehicle

In the following situations, in particular, thereis a risk of damage to the vehicle:R the vehicle becomes grounded, e.g. on a

high kerb or an unpaved roadR the vehicle is driven too fast over an

obstacle, e.g. a kerb, speed bump or pot‐holeR a heavy object strikes the underbody or

chassis components

In situations such as this, the body, theunderbody, chassis components, wheels ortyres could be damaged without the damagebeing visible. Components damaged in this

way can unexpectedly fail or, in the case ofan accident, may not absorb the loads thatarise as intended.If the underbody panelling is damaged, flam‐mable materials such as leaves, grass ortwigs can collect between the underbody andthe underbody panelling. These materialsmay ignite if they come into contact with hotparts on the exhaust system.# Have the vehicle checked and repaired

immediately at a qualified specialistworkshop.

or# If driving safety is impaired while con‐

tinuing your journey, pull over and stopthe vehicle immediately in accordancewith the traffic conditions, and contacta qualified specialist workshop.

Declaration of ConformityElectromagnetic compatibility

The electromagnetic compatibility of the vehiclecomponents has been checked and certifiedaccording to the currently valid version of Regu‐lation UN R10.

Wireless vehicle components

EU and EFTA countries only:The following information applies to all wirelesscomponents of the vehicle and of the informa‐tion systems and communication devices inte‐grated into the vehicle:The wireless components of this vehicle complywith the basic requirements and all other rele‐vant conditions of Directive 2014/53/EU. Youcan obtain further information from a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.Below are the addresses of the manufacturers ofwireless components. The addresses cannot bedisplayed on the equipment due to its size ortype.

24 General notes

Brazil only:Note on the two-way radio systems in the vehi‐cle:These systems are not protected from harmfulinterference and must not cause interference induly approved systems.

Nigeria only:The connection and use of two-way radios in thisvehicle is not permitted by the Nigerian Commu‐nications Commission.

Thailand only:The radio-based wireless components in thisvehicle meet the requirements of the NationalBroadcasting and Telecommunications Commis‐sion (NBTC).

Tyre pressure monitoring sensorsSchrader Electronics Ltd, 11 Technology Park,Belfast Road, Antrim BT41 1QS, Northern Ireland

Remote locking systemMarquardt GmbH, Schloßstraße 16, 78604 Rie‐theim, GermanyHuf Hülsbeck & Fürst GmbH & Co. KG, SteegerStraße 17, 42551 Velbert, Germany

Hella KGaA Hueck & Co., Rixbecker Straße 75,59552 Lippstadt, Germany

Remote locking system control unitMarquardt GmbH, Schloßstraße 16, 78604 Rie‐theim, GermanyLeopold Kostal GmbH & Co. KG, Hauert 11,44227 Dortmund, GermanyContinental Automotive GmbH, Siemens‐straße 12, 93055 Regensburg, Germany

Antenna modulesHirschmann Car Communication GmbH,Stuttgarter Straße 45-51, 72654 Neckartenzlin‐gen, GermanyKathrein Automotive GmbH & Co. KG, Römer‐ring 1, 31137 Hildesheim, Germany

Door handles with near-field communicationfunctionHuf Hülsbeck & Fürst GmbH & Co. KG, SteegerStraße 17, 42551 Velbert, Germany

Garage door openersGenteX Corporation, 600 North CentennialStreet, Zeeland MI 49464, USA

Sensor for interior monitoringMETA Systems, Via Galimberti 9, 42124 ReggioEmilia, Italy

Radar sensorsAutoliv Electronics ASP Inc., 26545 AmericanDrive, Southfield, MI 48034, USAADC Automotive Distance Control SystemsGmbH, Peter-Dornier-Strasse 10, 88131 Lindau,GermanyRobert Bosch GmbH, Daimlerstrasse 6,71229 Leonberg, Germany

Mobile communication and telematicsHarman Becker Automotive Systems GmbH,Postfach 2260, 76303 Karlsbad, GermanyPanasonic Automotive & Industrial SystemsEurope GmbH, Robert-Bosch-Strasse 27-29,63225 Langen, GermanyMitsubishi Electric Corporation, 2-3-33 Miwa,Sanda-City, 669-1513 Hyogo, Japan

Wireless headphonesHarman Becker Automotive Systems GmbH,Postfach 2260, 76303 Karlsbad, Germany

General notes 25

Remote controlRuwido Austria GmbH, Köstendorfer Strasse 8,5202 Neumarkt, AustriaValeo, 43 rue Bayen, 75017 Paris, France

Heater booster function remote controlDigades GmbH, Äußere Weberstrasse 20,02763 Zittau, Germany

Wireless applications in the vehicleBesides the typical frequencies for mobile com‐munications, Mercedes-Benz vehicles use thefollowing wireless applications.

Wireless applications in the vehicle

Technology Frequency range Transmission output/magnetic fieldstrength

Remote locking system 20 kHz (9–90 kHz) ≤ 72 dBμA/m at 10 m

Remote locking system 125 kHz (119–135 kHz) ≤ 42 dBμA/m at 10 m

Near-field communication 13.553–13.567 MHz ≤ 42 dBμA/m at 10 m

Remote locking system, garage door opener,tyre pressure monitor

433 MHz (433.05–434.79 MHz) ≤ 10 mW e.r.p.

Heater booster function remote control, garagedoor opener

868 MHz (868.0–868.6 MHz) ≤ 25 mW e.r.p.

Heater booster function remote control, garagedoor opener

869 MHz (868.7–869.2 MHz) ≤ 25 mW e.r.p.

Bluetooth®, Kleer, RLAN, remote controls, wire‐less headphones

2.4 GHz ISM band (2400–2483.5 MHz) ≤ 100 mW e.i.r.p.

26 General notes

Technology Frequency range Transmission output/magnetic fieldstrength

Sensor for interior monitoring, RLAN 5.8 GHz UNII-3 (5725–5875 MHz) ≤ 25 mW e.i.r.p.

24 GHz ISM radar 24.05–24.25 GHz* ≤ 100 mW e.i.r.p.

24 GHz UWB radar 24.25–26.65 GHz* ≤ -41.3 dBm/MHz e.i.r.p mean ≤ 0 dBm/50 MHze.i.r.p. peak

76 GHz radar 76–77 GHz ≤ 55 dBm peak e.i.r.p.

* Model series launched on the market beforeApril 2016.

Carsharing module NFC:13.553–13.567 MHzBluetooth:2402–2480 MHz

NFC:≤ 42 dBμA/m at 10 mBluetooth:≤ +4 dBm (power category 2)

General notes 27

Radio operating permit for antenna amplifier

Radio equipment approval number RKE213E1

Country Radio equipment approvalnumber

Argentina

Registrierungsnummer: H-15475Produktname: VerstärkerModell:RKE213E1Hersteller: "KATHREIN Automo‐tive GmbH"Adresse: Römerring 1, 31137 Hil‐desheim, GermanyFirma: "KATHREIN AutomotivePortugal, Sociedade Unipessoal,Lda"Adresse: Parque Industrial Con‐stantim, 5000-082 Vila Real, Por‐tugal

Jack

Copy and translation of the original declarationof conformity:EC declaration of conformity1.The signatory, as a representativeManufacturer:BRANO a.s.74741 Hradec nad Moravicí, Opavská 1000,Czech RepublicID No.: 64-387-5933VAT Reg. No.: CZ64-387-5933declares, as our sole responsibility, that theproduct:2. a)Designation:JackType, number:A) A 164 580 02 18, A 166 580 01 18B) A 240 580 00 18

C) A 639 580 02 18Year of manufacture: 2015Fulfils all relevant conditionsDirective No. 2006/42/ECb)Description and purpose of use:The jack is only intended for raising the specifiedvehicle in accordance with the operating instruc‐tions affixed to the jack.3.Reference data of the harmonised standards orspecificationsA) ISO 4063, EN ISO 14341-A, DBL 7382.20,MBN 10435, AS 2693B) ISO 4063, ISO 14341-A, DBL 7392.10, MBN10435C) DBL 7392.10, DBL 8230.10The technical documentation of the product isstored at the manufacturer's plant. Representa‐tive for the compilation of the technical docu‐mentation: Director of the Technical DepartmentBrano a.s.

28 General notes

4.Hradec nad MoravicíCity5.05.05.2015DateSigned byDirector of Quality

TIREFIT kit

Copy and translation of the original declarationof conformity:EC declaration of conformityIn accordance with EC Directive 2006/42/ECWe hereby declare that the productProduct designation: Daimler electric air pumpModel designation: 0851ve, DT/UW 200046MB part no.: A 000 583 8200complies with the following relevant regulations:2004/108/EC

Applied harmonised standards, in particular:DIN EN 55014-1DIN EN 55014-2:2009-06Manufacturer: Dunlop Tech GmbHAddress: Birkenhainerstrasse 77, 63450 Hanau,GermanyAuthorised representative: IMS dept.Date: June 2015Signature: IMS-AM, IMS-AE-L

Diagnostics connectionThe diagnostics connection is only intended forthe connection of diagnostic devices at a quali‐fied specialist workshop.

& WARNING Risk of accident due to con‐necting devices to the diagnostics con‐nection

If you connect equipment to a diagnosticsconnection in the vehicle, it may affect theoperation of vehicle systems.

As a result, the operating safety of the vehi‐cle could be affected.# Only connect the vehicle diagnostics

connection to devices which have beentested with regard to their use and areconsidered safe.

& WARNING Risk of accident due toobjects in the driver's footwell

Objects in the driver's footwell may impedepedal travel or block a depressed pedal.This jeopardises the operating and roadsafety of the vehicle.# Stow all objects in the vehicle securely

so that they cannot get into the driver'sfootwell.

# Always fit the floor mats securely andas prescribed in order to ensure thatthere is always sufficient room for thepedals.

# Do not use loose floor mats and do notplace floor mats on top of one another.

General notes 29

* NOTE Battery discharging from usingdevices connected to the diagnosticsconnection

Using devices at the diagnostics connectiondrains the battery.# Check the charge level of the battery.# If the charge level is low, charge the

battery, e.g. by driving a considerabledistance.

Connecting equipment to the diagnostics con‐nection can lead to emissions monitoring infor‐mation being reset, for example. This may leadto the vehicle failing to meet the requirements ofthe next emissions inspection during the maininspection.

Qualified specialist workshopA qualified specialist workshop has the neces‐sary special skills, tools and qualifications tocorrectly carry out any necessary work on yourvehicle. This particularly applies to safety-rele‐vant works.

Always have the following work carried out onyour vehicle at a qualified specialist workshop:R safety-relevant worksR service and maintenance workR repair workR modifications as well as installations and

conversionsR work on electronic components

Mercedes‑Benz recommends a Mercedes‑Benzservice centre.

Vehicle registrationMercedes-Benz may ask its service centres tocarry out technical inspections on certain vehi‐cles. The quality or safety of the vehicle isimproved as a result of the inspection.Mercedes-Benz can only inform you about vehi‐cle checks if Mercedes-Benz has your registra‐tion data.

It is possible that your vehicle has not yet beenregistered in your name in the following cases:R if your vehicle was not purchased at an

authorised specialist dealer.R if your vehicle has not yet been examined at

a Mercedes-Benz service centre.

It is advisable to register your vehicle with aMercedes-Benz service centre.Inform Mercedes-Benz as soon as possibleabout any change in address or vehicle owner‐ship. You can do this at a Mercedes-Benz servicecentre, for example.

Correct use of the vehicleIf you remove any warning stickers, you or otherscould fail to recognise certain dangers. Leavewarning stickers in position.Observe the following information in particularwhen driving your vehicle:R the safety notes in this manualR technical data for the vehicleR traffic rules and regulations

30 General notes

R laws and safety standards pertaining tomotor vehicles

Information on the REACH regulationEU and EFTA countries only:The REACH regulation (Regulation (EC) No.1907/2006, Article 33) stipulates a duty to sup‐ply information about substances of very highconcern (SVHCs).Daimler AG acts to the best of its knowledge toprevent these SVHCs from being used and toenable customers to safely handle these sub‐stances. There are SVHCs known to Daimler AG,according to supplier information and internalproduct information, found in individual compo‐nents of this vehicle in quantities of over 0.1 per‐cent by weight.Further information can be obtained at the fol‐lowing addresses:R https://reach.daimler.com/de/home/R https://reach.daimler.com/en/home/

Implied warranty

* NOTE Damage to the vehicle arisingfrom violation of these operating instruc‐tions.

Damage to the vehicle can arise from viola‐tion of these operating instructions.This damage is not covered either by theMercedes-Benz implied warranty or by theNew‑ or Used-Vehicle Warranty.# Follow the instructions in these operat‐

ing instructions on proper operation ofyour vehicle as well as on possible vehi‐cle damage.

QR code for rescue cardThe QR code is secured in the fuel filler flap andon the opposite side on the B-pillar. In the eventof an accident, rescue services can use the QRcode to quickly find the appropriate rescue cardfor your vehicle. The current rescue card con‐tains the most important information about your

vehicle in a compact form, e.g. the routing of theelectric lines.Further information can be obtained at https://www.mercedes-benz.de/qr-code.

Data storageElectronic control units

Electronic control units are fitted in your vehicle.Some of these are necessary for the safe opera‐tion of your vehicle, while some assist you whendriving (driver assistance systems). In addition,your vehicle provides comfort and entertainmentfunctions, which are also made possible by elec‐tronic control units.Electronic control units contain data memorieswhich can temporarily or permanently storetechnical information about the vehicle's operat‐ing state, component loads, maintenancerequirements and technical events or faults.

General notes 31

In general, this information documents the stateof a component part, a module, a system or thesurroundings such as:R operating status of system components (e.g.

fill levels, battery status, tyre pressure)R status messages concerning the vehicle or

its individual components (e.g. number ofwheel revolutions/speed, longitudinal accel‐eration, lateral acceleration, display of fas‐tened seat belts)R malfunctions or faults in important system

components (e.g. lights, brakes)R information on events leading to vehicle

damageR system reactions in special driving situations

(e.g. airbag deployment, intervention of sta‐bility control systems)R ambient conditions (e.g. temperature, rain

sensor)

In addition to providing the actual control unitfunction, this data assists the manufacturer indetecting and rectifying faults and optimisingvehicle functions. The majority of this data is

temporary and is only processed in the vehicleitself. Only a small portion of the data is storedin the event or fault memory.When your vehicle is serviced, technical datafrom the vehicle can be read out by service net‐work employees (e.g. workshops, manufactur‐ers) or third parties (e.g. breakdown services).Services include repair services, maintenanceprocesses, warranty claims and quality assur‐ance measures, for example. The read out is per‐formed via the legally prescribed port for thediagnostics connection in the vehicle. Therespective service network locations or thirdparties collect, process and use the data. Theydocument technical statuses of the vehicle,assist in finding faults and improving quality andare transmitted to the manufacturer, if neces‐sary. Furthermore, the manufacturer is subjectto product liability. For this, the manufacturerrequires technical data from vehicles.Fault memories in the vehicle can be reset by aservice outlet as part of repair or maintenancework.

Depending on the selected equipment, you canimport data into vehicle convenience and info‐tainment functions yourself.This includes, for example:R multimedia data such as music, films or pho‐

tos for playback in an integrated multimediasystemR address book data for use in connection with

an integrated hands-free system or an inte‐grated navigation systemR entered navigation destinationsR data about the use of internet services

This data can be saved locally in the vehicle or itis located on a device which you have connectedto the vehicle (e.g. a smartphone, USB flashdrive or MP3 player). If this data is stored in thevehicle, you can delete it at any time. This datais sent to third parties only at your request, par‐ticularly when you use online services in accord‐ance with the settings that you have selected.You can store or change convenience settings/individualisations in the vehicle at any time.

32 General notes

Depending on the equipment, this includes, forexample:R settings for the seat and steering wheel posi‐

tionsR suspension and climate control settingsR customisations such as interior lighting

If your vehicle is accordingly equipped, you canconnect your smartphone or another mobile enddevice to the vehicle. You can control this bymeans of the control elements integrated in thevehicle. Images and audio from the smartphonecan be output via the multimedia system. Cer‐tain information is simultaneously transferred toyour smartphone.Depending on the type of integration, this caninclude:R general vehicle dataR position data

This allows you to use selected apps on yoursmartphone, such as navigation or music play‐back. There is no further interaction between thesmartphone and the vehicle; in particular, vehi‐cle data is not directly accessible. Which type of

further data processing occurs is determined bythe provider of the specific app used. Which set‐tings you can make, if any, depends on the spe‐cific app and the operating system of yoursmartphone.

Online services

Wireless network connectionIf your vehicle has a wireless network connec‐tion, it enables data to be exchanged betweenyour vehicle and additional systems. The wire‐less network connection is enabled via the vehi‐cle's transmission and reception unit or via con‐nected mobile end devices (e.g. smartphones).Online functions can be used via the wirelessnetwork connection. This includes online serv‐ices and applications/apps provided by the man‐ufacturer or other providers.

Manufacturer's servicesRegarding online services of the manufacturer,the individual functions are described by themanufacturer in a suitable place (e.g. Owner'sManual, website of the manufacturer) along withthe relevant data protection information. Per‐

sonal data may be used for the provision ofonline services. Data is exchanged via a secureconnection, e.g. the manufacturer's designatedIT systems. Personal data is collected, pro‐cessed and used via the provision of servicesexclusively on the basis of legal permissions orwith prior consent.The services and functions (sometimes subjectto a fee) can usually be activated or deactivated.In some cases, this also applies to the entirevehicle's data connection. This excludes, in par‐ticular, legally prescribed functions and services.

Third party servicesIf it is possible to use online services from otherproviders, these services are the responsibilityof the provider in question and subject to thatprovider's data protection conditions and termsof use. The manufacturer has no influence onthe content exchanged.For this reason, please ask the service providerfor information about the type, extent and pur‐pose of the collection and use of personal datawhen services are provided by third parties.

General notes 33

CopyrightInformation on licences for free and open-sourcesoftware used in your vehicle can be found onthe data carrier in your vehicle document walletand with updates on the following website:https://www.mercedes-benz.com/opensource

34 General notes

Restraint systemProtection provided by the restraint system

The restraint system includes the following com‐ponents:R Seat belt systemR AirbagsR Child restraint systemR Child seat securing systems

The restraint system can help prevent the vehi‐cle occupants from coming into contact withparts of the vehicle interior in the event of anaccident. In the event of an accident, therestraint system can also reduce the forces towhich the vehicle occupants are subjected.A seat belt can only provide the best level of pro‐tection if it is worn correctly. Depending on thedetected accident situation, seat belt tensionersand/or airbags supplement the protectionoffered by a correctly worn seat belt. Seat belttensioners and/or airbags are not deployed inevery accident.

In order for the restraint system to provide theintended level of protection, each vehicle occu‐pant must observe the following information:R Fasten seat belts correctly.R Sit in an almost upright seat position with

their back against the seat backrest.R Sit with their feet resting on the floor, if pos‐

sible.R Always secure persons under 1.50 m tall in

an additional restraint system suitable forMercedes-Benz vehicles.

However, no system available today can com‐pletely eliminate injuries and fatalities in everyaccident situation. In particular, the seat beltand airbag generally do not protect againstobjects penetrating the vehicle from the outside.It is also not possible to completely rule out therisk of injury caused by the airbag deploying.

Reduced restraint system protection

& WARNING Risk of injury or death frommodifications to the restraint system

The restraint system can no longer functioncorrectly after alterations have been made.The restraint system may then not protectthe vehicle occupants as intended by failingin an accident or triggering unexpectedly, forexample# Never alter the parts of the restraint

system.# Never tamper with the wiring or any

electronic component parts or theirsoftware.

If it is necessary to modify the vehicle to accom‐modate a person with disabilities, contact aqualified specialist workshop.Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use driv‐ing aids which have been approved for your vehi‐cle by Mercedes-Benz.

Occupant safety 35

Restraint system functionality

When the ignition is switched on, a self-test isperformed, during which the 6 restraint sys‐tem warning lamp lights up. It goes out no laterthan a few seconds after the vehicle is started.The components of the restraint system are thenfunctional.

Malfunctioning restraint system

A malfunction has occurred in the restraint sys‐tem if:R the 6 restraint system warning lamp does

not light up when the ignition is switched onR the 6 restraint system warning lamp

lights up continuously or repeatedly during ajourney

& WARNING Risk of injury due to malfunc‐tions in the restraint system

If the restraint system is malfunctioning,restraint system components may be trig‐gered unintentionally or may not deploy as

intended during an accident. This may affectthe seat belt tensioner or airbag, for exam‐ple.# Have the restraint system checked and

repaired immediately at a qualified spe‐cialist workshop.

Function of the restraint system in an acci‐dent

How the restraint system works is determined bythe severity of the impact detected and the typeof accident anticipated:R Frontal impactR Rear impactR Side impactR Rollover

The activation thresholds for the components ofthe restraint system are determined based onthe evaluation of the sensor values measured atvarious points in the vehicle. This process is pre-emptive in nature. The triggering/deployment ofthe components of the restraint system must

take place in good time at the start of the colli‐sion.Factors which can only be seen and measuredafter a collision has occurred do not play a deci‐sive role in the deployment of an airbag. Nor dothey provide an indication of airbag deployment.The vehicle may be deformed significantly with‐out an airbag being deployed. This is the case ifonly parts which are relatively easily deformedare affected and the rate of vehicle decelerationis not high. Conversely, an airbag may bedeployed even though the vehicle suffers onlyminor deformation. If very rigid vehicle partssuch as longitudinal members are hit, for exam‐ple, this may result in sufficiently high levels ofvehicle deceleration.

36 Occupant safety

The components of the restraint system canbe activated or deployed independently ofeach other:

Component Detected deploy‐ment situation

Seat belt tensioners Frontal impact, rearimpact, side impact,rollover

Driver's airbag, frontpassenger airbag

Frontal impact

Knee airbag Frontal impact

Side airbag Side impact

Window airbag Side impact, rollover,frontal impact

The front passenger airbag can only be deployedin an accident if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFFindicator lamp is off. If the front passenger seatis occupied, make sure, both before and duringthe journey, that the status of the frontpassenger airbag is correct (/ page 46).

& WARNING Rick of burns from hot airbagcomponents

The airbag parts are hot after an airbag hasbeen deployed.# Do not touch the airbag parts.# Have a deployed airbag replaced at a

qualified specialist workshop as soonas possible.

Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have thevehicle towed to a qualified specialist workshopafter an accident. Take this into account, partic‐ularly if a seat belt tensioner is triggered or anairbag deployed.If the seat belt tensioners are triggered or an air‐bag is deployed, you will hear a bang, and asmall amount of powder may also be released:R The bang will not generally affect your hear‐

ing.R In general, the powder released is not haz‐

ardous to health but may cause short-termbreathing difficulties to persons sufferingfrom asthma or other pulmonary conditions.

Provided it is safe to do so, leave the vehicleimmediately or open the window in order toprevent breathing difficulties.

Seat beltsProtection provided by the seat belt

Always fasten your seat belt correctly beforestarting a journey. A seat belt can only providethe best level of protection if it is worn correctly.

& WARNING Risk of injury or death due toincorrectly fastened seat belt

If the seat belt is not worn correctly, it can‐not perform its intended protective function.In addition, an incorrectly fastened seat beltcan also cause injuries, for example, in theevent of an accident or when braking orchanging direction suddenly.# Always ensure that all vehicle occu‐

pants have their seat belts fastenedcorrectly and are sitting properly.

Occupant safety 37

Always observe the instructions about the cor‐rect driver's seat position and adjusting the seat(/ page 110).In order for the correctly worn seat belt to pro‐vide the intended level of protection, each vehi‐cle occupant must observe the following infor‐mation:R The seat belt must not be twisted and must

fit tightly and snugly across the body.R The seat belt must be routed across the

centre of the shoulder and as low downacross the hips as possible.R The shoulder section of the seat belt should

not touch your neck nor be routed underyour arm or behind your back.R Avoid wearing bulky clothing, e.g. a winter

coat.R Push the lap belt down as far as possible

across your hips and pull tight with the shoul‐der section of the belt. Never route the lapbelt across your abdomen.Pregnant women must also take particularcare with this.

R Never route the seat belt across sharp, poin‐ted, abrasive or fragile objects.R Only one person should use each seat belt at

any one time. Never allow babies and chil‐dren to travel sitting on the lap of anothervehicle occupant.R Never secure objects with a seat belt if the

seat belt is also being used by one of thevehicle's occupants. Always observe theinstructions for loading the vehicle whensecuring objects, luggage or loads(/ page 126).Also ensure that no objects, e.g. a cushion,are ever placed between a person and theseat.

If children are travelling in the vehicle, be sure toobserve the instructions and safety notes on"Children in the vehicle" (/ page 51).

Limitations of the protection provided by theseat belt

& WARNING Risk of injury or death due toincorrect seat position

The seat belt does not offer the intendedlevel of protection if you have not moved theseat backrest to an almost vertical position.When braking or in the event of an accident,you could slide underneath the seat belt andsustain abdominal or neck injuries, for exam‐ple.# Adjust the seat properly before begin‐

ning your journey.# Always ensure that the seat backrest is

in an almost vertical position and thatthe shoulder section of your seat belt isrouted across the centre of your shoul‐der.

38 Occupant safety

& WARNING Risk of injury or death whenadditional restraint systems are not usedfor persons with a smaller build

Persons under 1.50 m tall cannot wear theseat belt correctly without a suitable addi‐tional restraint system.If the seat belt is not worn correctly, it can‐not perform its intended protective function.In addition, an incorrectly fastened seat beltcan also cause injuries, for example, in theevent of an accident or when braking orchanging direction suddenly.# Always secure persons under 1.50 m

tall in a suitable restraint system.

& WARNING Risk of injury or death due todamaged or modified seat belts

Seat belts cannot provide protection in thefollowing situations:R the seat belt is damaged, has been modi‐

fied, is extremely dirty, bleached or dyed

R the seat belt buckle is damaged orextremely dirtyR modifications have been made to the seat

belt tensioner, seat belt anchorage orseat belt retractor

Seat belts may sustain non-visible damage inan accident, e.g. due to glass splinters.Modified or damaged seat belts could tear orfail in the event of an accident, for example.Modified belt tensioners may be deployedunintentionally or not function as intended.# Never modify the seat belts, seat belt

tensioners, seat belt anchorages orseat belt retractors.

# Make sure that the seat belts are notdamaged, are not worn and are clean.

# Always have the seat belts checkedimmediately after an accident at aqualified specialist workshop.

Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only useseat belts that are approved specifically for yourvehicle by Mercedes-Benz.

& WARNING Risk of injury or death fromdeployed pyrotechnic seat belt tension‐ers

Pyrotechnic seat belt tensioners that havebeen deployed are no longer operational andare unable to perform their intended protec‐tive function.# Therefore, have deployed pyrotechnic

seat belt tensioners immediatelyreplaced at a qualified specialist work‐shop.

Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have thevehicle towed to a qualified specialist workshopafter an accident.

* NOTE Damage caused by trapping theseat belt

If an unused seat belt is not fully retracted, itmay become trapped in the door or in theseat mechanism.# Always ensure that an unused seat belt

is fully retracted.

Occupant safety 39

Fastening seat belts

If the seat belt is pulled quickly or sharply, theseat belt retractor locks. The seat belt strap can‐not be pulled out any further.

# Always engage seat belt tongue2 of theseat belt into seat belt buckle1 of the cor‐responding seat.

Vehicles with automatic front passenger air‐bag shutoff:

* NOTE Deployment of the seat belt ten‐sioner and side impact airbag when thefront passenger seat is unoccupied

If the seat belt tongue is engaged in the seatbelt buckle of the unoccupied frontpassenger seat, the seat belt tensioner andthe side impact airbag may also deploy in theevent of an accident along with other sys‐tems.# Only one person should use each seat

belt at any one time.

Vehicles without automatic front passengerairbag shutoff:

* NOTE Deployment of the seat belt ten‐sioner when the front passenger seat isunoccupied

If the seat belt tongue is engaged in the seatbelt buckle of the unoccupied frontpassenger seat, the seat belt tensioner may

also deploy in the event of an accident alongwith other systems.# Only one person should use each seat


Seat belt adjustment function

Vehicles with PRE-SAFE®: if the front seat beltis not pulled tightly across your body, the seatbelt adjustment may automatically apply a cer‐tain tightening force. Do not hold the seat belttightly while it is adjusting.You can activate and deactivate the seat beltadjustment function using the multimedia sys‐tem (/ page 41).

Releasing a seat belt

# Press the release button in the seat beltbuckle and guide the seat belt back with theseat belt tongue.

40 Occupant safety

Activating/deactivating seat belt adjustmentvia the multimedia system

Multimedia system:4© 5 Settings 5 Vehicle# Activate or deactivate Belt adjustment.

Seat belt warning function for the driver andfront passenger

The ü seat belt warning lamp in the instru‐ment display is a reminder that all vehicle occu‐pants must wear their seat belts correctly.In addition, a warning tone may sound.As soon as the driver and front passenger fastentheir seat belts, the seat belt warning goes out.

Function of the rear seat belt status display

The rear seat belt status display is only availablefor certain countries.

When the ignition is switched on, the rear seatbelt status display informs you for a certainamount of time which rear seat belt is not fas‐tened.You can immediately dismiss the rear seat beltstatus display using the back button on the left-hand side of the steering wheel (/ page 296).If a vehicle occupant unfastens a seat belt in therear while the vehicle is motion, the rear seatbelt status display appears again.In addition, a warning tone may sound. In thiscase, the rear seat belt status display cannot behidden using the back button on the left-handside of the steering wheel.

AirbagsOverview of airbags

1 Knee airbag2 Driver's airbag3 Front passenger airbag4 Window airbag5 Side airbag

The installation location of an airbag is identifiedby the AIRBAG symbol.When enabled, an airbag can provide additionalprotection for the respective vehicle occupant.

Occupant safety 41

Potential protection from each airbag:

AIRBAG Potential protection for:

Knee airbag Thigh, knee and lower leg

Driver's airbag,front passengerairbag

Head and ribcage

Window airbag Head

Side airbag Ribcage and pelvis

& WARNING Risk of injury or fatal injuriesif the front passenger airbag is enabled

If the front passenger front airbag is enabled,a child on the front passenger seat may bestruck by the front passenger airbag duringan accident.NEVER use a rearward-facing child restraintsystem on a seat with an ENABLED FRONTAIRBAG, DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY to theCHILD can occur.

When fitting a child restraint system to the frontpassenger seat, observe the vehicle-specificinformation (/ page 77). Also, always observethe notes on rearward-facing or forward-facingchild restraint systems on the front passengerseat.Vehicles with automatic front passenger air‐bag shutoff:The front passenger airbag can only be deployedin an accident if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFFindicator lamp is off. If the front passenger seatis occupied, make sure, both before and duringthe journey, that the status of the frontpassenger airbag is correct (/ page 46).

* NOTE Important points to remember ifthe front passenger seat is unoccupied

In an accident, the components of therestraint system may deploy unnecessarilyon the front passenger side if:R There are heavy objects on the front

passenger seat.

R The seat belt tongue is engaged in theseat belt buckle of the front passengerseat and the front passenger seat isunoccupied.

# Stow objects in a suitable place.# Only one person should use each seat


Depending on the detected accident situation,the window airbag on the front passenger sidemay deploy. The airbag is deployed regardless ofwhether the front passenger seat is occupied.

Protection by the airbags

Depending on the accident situation, an airbagmay supplement the protection offered by a cor‐rectly fastened seat belt.


If you deviate from the correct seat position,the airbag cannot perform its intended pro‐

42 Occupant safety

tective function and deployment may evencause further injuries.In order to avoid risks, each vehicle occupantmust always make sure of the following:R Fasten seat belts correctly. Pregnant

women must take particular care toensure that the lap belt never lies acrossthe abdomen.R Adopt the correct seat position and keep

as far away as possible from the airbags.R Observe the following information.

# Always make sure that there are noobjects between the airbag and vehicleoccupant.

To avoid the risks resulting from the deploymentof an airbag, each vehicle occupant mustobserve the following information in particular:R Before starting your journey, adjust your seat

correctly; the driver's seat and frontpassenger seat should be moved as far backas possible.

When doing so, always observe the informa‐tion on the correct driver's seat position(/ page 110).R Only hold the steering wheel by the steering

wheel rim. This allows the airbag to be fullydeployed.R Always lean against the seat backrest when

the vehicle is in motion. Do not lean forwardsor against the door or side window. You mayotherwise be in the deployment area of theairbags.R Always keep your feet on the floor. Do not

put your feet on the cockpit, for example.Your feet may otherwise be in the deploy‐ment area of the airbag.R If children are travelling in the vehicle,

observe the additional notes (/ page 51).R Always stow and secure objects correctly.

Objects in the vehicle interior may prevent anairbag from functioning correctly. Each vehicleoccupant must always make sure of the follow‐ing in particular:R There are no people, animals or objects

between the vehicle occupants and an air‐bag.R There are no objects between the seat, door

and door pillar (B-pillar).R There are no hard objects, e.g. coat hangers,

hanging on the grab handles or coat hooks.R There are no accessory parts, such as mobile

navigation devices, mobile phones or cupholders, attached to the vehicle within thedeployment area of an airbag, e.g. on thecockpit, on the door, on the side window oron the side wall trim.In addition, no connecting cables, tensioningstraps or retaining straps must be routed orattached to the vehicle within the deploy‐ment area of an airbag. Always comply withthe accessory manufacturer's installationinstructions and, in particular, the notes onsuitable places for installation.

Occupant safety 43

R There are no heavy, sharp-edged or fragileobjects in the pockets of your clothing. Storesuch objects in a suitable place.

Limited protection provided by airbags

& WARNING Risk of injury due to modifi‐cations to the airbag cover

If you modify the cover of an airbag or affixobjects such as stickers to it, the airbag mayno longer function correctly.# Never modify the cover of an airbag and

do not affix objects to it.

The installation location of an airbag is identifiedby the AIRBAG symbol (/ page 41).

& WARNING Risk of injury or death due tothe use of unsuitable seat covers

Unsuitable seat covers can obstruct or pre‐vent the deployment of the airbags integra‐ted into the seats.

Consequently, the airbags cannot protectvehicle occupants as they are designed todo. In addition, the operation of the auto‐matic front passenger airbag shutoff couldbe restricted.# You should only use seat covers that

have been approved for the correspond‐ing seats by Mercedes-Benz.

& WARNING Risk of injury due to malfunc‐tions of the sensors in the door panelling

Sensors to control the airbags are located inthe doors. Modifications or work not per‐formed correctly to the doors or door panel‐ling, as well as damaged doors, can lead tothe function of the sensors being impaired.The airbags might therefore not functionproperly any more.Consequently, the airbags cannot protectvehicle occupants as they are designed todo.# Never modify the doors or parts of the

doors.

# Always have work on the doors or doorpanelling carried out at a qualified spe‐cialist workshop.

& WARNING Risk of injury due to deployedairbag

A deployed airbag no longer offers any pro‐tection and cannot provide the intended pro‐tective function in the event of an accident.# Have the vehicle towed to a qualified

specialist workshop in order to have thedeployed airbag replaced.

Have deployed airbags replaced immediately.

Status of the front passenger front airbag

Function of the automatic front passengerairbag shutoffThe automatic front passenger airbag shutoff isable to detect whether the front passenger seatis occupied by a person or a child restraint sys‐tem. The front passenger airbag is enabled ordisabled accordingly.

44 Occupant safety

When fitting a child restraint system to the frontpassenger seat, always make sure of the follow‐ing:R Ensure that the child restraint system is posi‐

tioned correctly (/ page 57).R Always observe the child restraint system

manufacturer's installation instructions.R Never place objects, e.g. cushions, under or

behind the child restraint system.R Fully retract the seat cushion length adjust‐

ment.R The entire base of the child restraint system

must always rest on the sitting surface of thefront passenger seat.R The backrest of the forward-facing child

restraint system must, as far as possible, beresting on the seat backrest of the frontpassenger seat.R The child restraint system must not touch the

roof or be put under strain by the headrestraints. Adjust the seat backrest inclina‐tion and the head restraint setting accord‐ingly.

& WARNING Risk of injury or death due toobjects between the seat surface andthe child restraint system

Objects between the seat surface and thechild restraint system could affect the func‐tion of the automatic front passenger frontairbag shutoff.This could result in the front passenger frontairbag not functioning as intended during anaccident.# Do not place any objects between the

sitting surface and the child restraintsystem.

# The entire base of the child restraintsystem must always rest on the sittingsurface of the front passenger seat.

# The backrest of the forward-facing childrestraint system must, as far as possi‐ble, be resting on the seat backrest ofthe front passenger seat.

# Always comply with the child restraintsystem manufacturer's installationinstructions.

A person on the front passenger seat mustobserve the following information:R Fasten seat belts correctly (/ page 37).R Sit in an almost upright seat position with

their back against the seat backrest.R Sit with their feet resting on the floor, if pos‐

sible.

The front passenger airbag may otherwise bedisabled by mistake, for example in the followingsituations:R The front passenger transfers their weight by

supporting themselves on a vehicle armrest.R The front passenger sits in such a way that

their weight is raised from the sitting sur‐face.

& WARNING Risk of injury or death due todeactivated front passenger airbag

If the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicatorlamp is lit, the front passenger airbag is disa‐bled. It will not be deployed in the event ofan accident and cannot perform its intendedprotective function.

Occupant safety 45

A person in the front passenger seat couldthen, for example, come into contact withthe vehicle interior, especially if the person issitting too close to the cockpit.If the front passenger seat is occupied,always ensure that:R The classification of the person in the

front passenger seat is correct and thefront passenger airbag is enabled or disa‐bled in accordance with the person in thefront passenger seat.R The front passenger seat has been moved

as far back as possible.R The person is seated correctly.

# Ensure, both before and during the jour‐ney, that the status of the frontpassenger airbag is correct.

If the front passenger seat is occupied, the clas‐sification of the person or child restraint systemon the front passenger seat takes place after thefront passenger airbag shutoff self-test. ThePASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps display thestatus of the front passenger airbag.

Always observe the notes on the function of thePASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps(/ page 46).

Function of the PASSENGER AIR BAG indica‐tor lamps

Vehicles without automatic front passenger air‐bag shutoff have a special sticker affixed to the

side of the cockpit on the front passenger side(/ page 76).

Self-test of automatic front passenger airbagshutoffWhen the ignition is switched on, a self-test isperformed during which the two PASSENGERAIR BAG ON and OFF indicator lamps light upsimultaneously.The status of the front passenger airbag is dis‐played after the self-test:R PASSENGER AIR BAG ON lights up for

60 seconds, subsequently both indicatorlamps are off (PASSENGER AIR BAG ON andOFF): the front passenger airbag is able todeploy in the event of an accident.R PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF lights up continu‐

ously: the front passenger airbag is disabled.It will then not be deployed in the event of anaccident.

If the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp isoff, only the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicatorlamp shows the status of the front passengerairbag. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicatorlamp may be lit continuously or be off.

46 Occupant safety

If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lampand the 6 restraint system warning lamplight up simultaneously, the front passenger seatmay not be used. Also in this case, do not fit achild restraint system to the front passengerseat. Have automatic front passenger airbagshutoff checked and repaired immediately at aqualified specialist workshop.

Status displayIf the front passenger seat is occupied, ensure,both before and during the journey, that the sta‐tus of the front passenger airbag is correct forthe current situation.After fitting a rearward-facing child restraintsystem to the front passenger seat:PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF must be lit continu‐ously.

& WARNING Risk of injury or death fromusing a rearward-facing child restraintsystem when the front passenger frontairbag is enabled

If you secure a child in a rearward-facingchild restraint system on the front passengerseat and the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indi‐cator lamp is off, the front passenger airbagcan deploy in the event of an accident.The child could be struck by the airbag.Always ensure that the front passenger air‐bag is disabled. The PASSENGER AIR BAGOFF indicator lamp must be lit.NEVER use a rearward-facing child restraintsystem on a seat protected by an ENABLEDFRONT AIRBAG in front of it, DEATH or SERI‐OUS INJURY to the CHILD can occur.

When fitting a child restraint system to the frontpassenger seat, observe the vehicle-specificinformation (/ page 77).Depending on the child restraint system and thestature of the child, the PASSENGER AIR BAGOFF indicator lamp may be off. In this case, do

not fit the rearward-facing child restraint systemto the front passenger seat.Instead, fit the rearward-facing child restraintsystem to a suitable rear seat.After fitting a forward-facing child restraintsystem to the front passenger seat: depend‐ing on the child restraint system and the statureof the child, PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF may be litcontinuously or be off. Always observe the fol‐lowing information.

& WARNING Risk of injury or death due toincorrect positioning of the forward-facing child restraint system

If you secure a child in a forward-facing childrestraint system on the front passenger seatand you position the front passenger seat tooclose to the dashboard, in the event of anaccident, the child could:R come into contact with parts of the vehi‐

cle's interior if the PASSENGER AIR BAGOFF indicator lamp is lit, for exampleR be struck by the airbag if the PASSENGER

AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is off

Occupant safety 47

# Always move the front passenger seatas far back as possible and fully retractthe seat cushion length adjustment.Always make sure that the shoulder beltstrap is correctly routed from the seatbelt outlet on the vehicle to the shoul‐der belt guide on the child restraint sys‐tem. The shoulder belt strap must berouted forwards and downwards fromthe seat belt outlet. If necessary, adjustthe front passenger seat accordingly.

# Always observe the child restraint sys‐tem manufacturer's installation instruc‐tions.

When fitting a child restraint system to the frontpassenger seat, observe the vehicle-specificinformation (/ page 77).If a person is sitting on the front passengerseat: PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF may be lit con‐tinuously or be off, depending on the person'sstature.

A person on the front passenger seat mustalways observe the following information:R If the front passenger seat is occupied by an

adult or a person with a stature correspond‐ing to that of an adult, the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp must be off. Thisindicates that the front passenger airbag isenabled.If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicatorlamp is lit continuously, an adult or personwith a build corresponding to that of an adultshould not use the front passenger seat.Instead, they should use a rear seat.R If the front passenger seat is occupied by a

person of smaller stature (e.g. a teenager orsmall adult), the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFFindicator lamp either lights up continuouslyor remains off, depending on the result of theclassification.- If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator

lamp is off: move the front passengerseat as far back as possible, or the per‐son of smaller stature should use a rearseat.

- If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicatorlamp is lit continuously: the person ofsmaller stature should not use the frontpassenger seat.

& WARNING Risk of injury or death whenthe PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicatorlamp is lit

If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicatorlamp remains lit after the system self-test,the front passenger airbag is disabled. It willnot be deployed in the event of an accident.In this case, the front passenger airbag can‐not perform its intended protective function,e.g. when a person is seated in the frontpassenger seat.That person could, for example, come intocontact with the vehicle interior, especially ifthe person is sitting too close to the cockpit.If the front passenger seat is occupied,always ensure that:R The classification of the person in the

front passenger seat is correct and the

48 Occupant safety

front passenger airbag is enabled or disa‐bled in accordance with the person in thefront passenger seat.R The person is seated properly with a cor‐

rectly fastened seat belt.R The front passenger seat has been moved

as far back as possible.

Be sure to also observe the following furtherrelated subjects:R Child restraint system on the front passenger

seat (/ page 77).R Suitable positioning of the child restraint sys‐

tem (/ page 57).

PRE-SAFE® systemPRE-SAFE® (anticipatory occupant protec‐tion)

PRE-SAFE® is able to detect certain critical driv‐ing situations and implement pre-emptive meas‐ures to protect the vehicle occupants.

PRE-SAFE® can implement the following meas‐ures independently of each other:R Tightening the seat belts on the driver's seat

and front passenger seat.R Closing the side windows.R Vehicles with sliding sunroof: close the

sliding sunroof.R Vehicles with memory function: move the

front passenger seat to a more favourableseat position.R PRE-SAFE® Sound: provided that the multi‐

media system is switched on, generates abrief noise signal to stimulate the innate pro‐tective mechanism of a person's hearing.

* NOTE Damage caused by objects in thefootwell or behind the seat

The automatic adjustment of the seat posi‐tion may result in damage to the seat and/orthe object.# Stow objects in a suitable place.

Reversing the PRE-SAFE® system measures

If an accident did not occur, the pre-emptivemeasures that were taken are reversed.You will need to perform certain settings your‐self.# If the seat belt pre-tensioning is not reduced,

move the seat backrest back slightly.The locking mechanism releases.

Function of PRE-SAFE® PLUS (anticipatoryoccupant protection plus)

PRE-SAFE® PLUS can detect certain impacts,particularly an imminent rear impact, and takepre-emptive measures to protect the vehicleoccupants. These measures cannot necessarilyprevent an imminent impact.

PRE-SAFE® PLUS can implement the followingmeasures independently of each other:R Tightening the seat belts on the driver's seat

and front passenger seat.R Activating the rear hazard warning lights at a

higher flashing frequency.

Occupant safety 49

R Increasing brake pressure when the vehicleis stationary. This brake application is cancel‐led automatically when the vehicle pullsaway.

If an accident did not occur, the pre-emptivemeasures that were taken are reversed.

System limitsThe system will not initiate any action in the fol‐lowing situations:R when reversing

orR when the vehicle is towing a trailer and there

is a risk of a rear impact

The system will not initiate any braking applica‐tion in the following situations:R whilst driving

orR when entering or exiting a parking space

while using Active Parking Assist

Safely transporting children in the vehicleAlways observe when children are travellingin the vehicle

% Also strictly observe the safety notes for thespecific situation. In this way you can recog‐nise potential risks and avoid dangers if chil‐dren are travelling in the vehicle(/ page 51).

Be diligentBear in mind that neglecting to secure a child inthe child restraint system may have serious con‐sequences. Always be diligent in securing a childcarefully before every journey.To improve protection for children younger than12 years old or under 1.50 m in height,Mercedes-Benz recommends you observe thefollowing information:R Always secure the child in a child restraint

system suitable for this Mercedes-Benz vehi‐cle.R The child restraint system must be appropri‐

ate to the age, weight and size of the child.

R The vehicle seat must be suitable for fitting achild restraint system (/ page 57).

Accident statistics show that children securedon the rear seats are generally safer than chil‐dren secured on the front seats. For this reason,Mercedes-Benz strongly advises that you fit achild restraint system to a rear seat.

Generic term "child restraint system"The generic term child restraint system is usedin this Owner's Manual. A child restraint systemis, for example:R a baby car seatR a rearward-facing child seatR a forward-facing child seatR a child booster seat with a backrest and seat

belt guideMercedes-Benz recommends using a childbooster seat with a backrest.

The child restraint system must be appropriateto the age, weight and size of the child.

50 Occupant safety

Observing laws and legal requirementsAlways observe the legal requirements whenusing a child restraint system in the vehicle.Make sure that the child restraint system isapproved in accordance with the valid test speci‐fications and guidelines. Further information canbe obtained at a qualified specialist workshop.Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use aMercedes-Benz Service Centre for this purpose.

Only use approved child restraint systemsOnly child restraint systems that meet the fol‐lowing UNECE standards are permitted for use inthe vehicle:R UN-R44R UN-R129 (i-Size child restraint systems)

Information on child restraint system approvalcategories and details on the approval label onthe child restraint system (/ page 58).

Detecting risks, avoiding danger

Securing systems for child restraint systemsin the vehicleOnly use the following securing systems for childrestraint systems:R the ISOFIX or i-Size mounting bracketsR the vehicle's seat belt systemR the Top Tether anchorages

Fitting an ISOFIX or an i-Size child restraint sys‐tem is preferred.Simply attaching to the securing rings on thevehicle can reduce the risk of fitting the childrestraint system incorrectly.When securing a child with the integrated seatbelt of the ISOFIX or i-Size child restraint sys‐tem, always comply with the permissible grossweight for the child and child restraint system(/ page 67).

Advantage of a rearward-facing childrestraint systemIt is preferable to transport a baby or a smallchild in a suitable rearward-facing child restraint

system. In this case, the child sits in the oppo‐site direction to the direction of travel and facesbackwards.Babies and small children have comparativelyweak neck muscles in relation to the size andweight of their head. The risk of injury to the cer‐vical spine during an accident can be reduced ina rearward-facing child restraint system.

Always secure a child restraint system cor‐rectly

& WARNING Risk of injury or death causedby incorrect installation of the childrestraint system

If the child restraint system is incorrectlyinstalled on a suitable seating position, itcannot perform its intended protective func‐tion.The child cannot be restrained in the event ofan accident, heavy braking or a suddenchange of direction.

Occupant safety 51

# Always comply with the manufacturer'sinstallation instructions for the childrestraint system and its correct use.

# Make sure that the entire base of thechild restraint system always rests onthe sitting surface of the seat.

# Never place objects under or behindthe child restraint system, e.g. cush‐ions.

# Always use child restraint systems withthe original cover designed for them.

# Always replace damaged covers withgenuine covers.

& WARNING Risk of injury or death fromunsecured child restraint systems in thevehicle

If the child restraint system is not correctlyinstalled or secured, it could release in theevent of an accident, sudden braking or asudden change in direction.The child restraint system could be flungaround and hit vehicle occupants.

# Always fit child restraint systems cor‐rectly, even when not in use.

# Always comply with the child restraintsystem manufacturer's installationinstructions.

R Always observe the child restraint systemmanufacturer's installation and operatinginstructions as well as the vehicle-specificinformation:- Fit the ISOFIX or i-Size child restraint sys‐

tem to the rear seat (/ page 67).- Secure the child restraint system with the

seat belt on the rear seat (/ page 75).- Secure the child restraint system with the

seat belt on the front passenger seat(/ page 78). Observe the specificinstructions for the rearward-facing andforward-facing child restraint systems(/ page 77).If the front passenger seat is occupied,ensure, both before and during the jour‐ney, that the status of the front

passenger airbag is correct for the cur‐rent situation (/ page 46).

R Observe the warning labels in the vehicleinterior and on the child restraint system.R Also secure Top Tether if present.

Do not alter the child restraint system

& WARNING Risk of injury due to altera‐tions to the child restraint system

The child restraint system may no longerfunction as it is supposed to if you makealterations or attach objects to it, e.g. toys orunsuitable accessories. This poses anincreased risk of injury!Never alter the child restraint system. Onlyattach accessories which the manufacturerof the child restraint system has authorisedespecially for this child restraint system.

Mercedes‑Benz recommends Mercedes-Benzcare products for cleaning child restraint sys‐tems recommended by Mercedes-Benz.

52 Occupant safety

Only use child restraint systems which are inproper working condition

& WARNING Risk of injury or death causedby the use of damaged child restraintsystems

Child restraint systems or their retaining sys‐tems that have been subjected to a load inan accident may then not be able to performtheir intended protective function.The child cannot be restrained in the event ofan accident, heavy braking or a suddenchange of direction.# Always replace child restraint systems

immediately that have been damaged orinvolved in an accident.

# Have the securing systems for the childrestraint systems checked at a qualifiedspecialist workshop before installing achild restraint system again.

Avoid direct sunlight

& WARNING Risk of burns when the childseat is exposed to direct sunlight

If the child restraint system is exposed todirect sunlight or heat, parts could heat up.Children could suffer burns on these parts,particularly on metallic parts of the childrestraint system.# Always make sure that the child

restraint system is not exposed todirect sunlight.

# Protect it with a blanket, for example.# If the child restraint system has been

exposed to direct sunlight, allow it tocool before securing a child into it.

# Never leave children unattended in thevehicle.

Observe when stopping or parking

& WARNING Risk of accident and injurydue to children left unattended in thevehicle

If children are left unattended in the vehicle,they could:R Open doors, thereby endangering other

persons or road users.R Get out and be struck by oncoming traf‐

fic.R Operate vehicle equipment and become

trapped, for example.

In addition, the children could also set thevehicle in motion, for example by:R Releasing the parking brake.R Changing the transmission position.R Starting the vehicle.


Occupant safety 53

# When leaving the vehicle, always takethe key with you and lock the vehicle.

# Keep the vehicle key out of reach ofchildren.

This also applies to the Digital Vehicle Key if the"Digital Vehicle Key" function is activated viaMercedes me connect.

& WARNING Risk of fatal injury due toexposure to extreme heat or cold in thevehicle

If people –particularly children – are exposedto extreme temperatures over an extendedperiod of time, there is a risk of serious oreven fatal injury!# Never leave anyone – particularly chil‐

dren – unattended in the vehicle.# Never leave animals in the vehicle unat‐

tended.

54 Occupant safety

Overview of recommended child restraint systems

Further information on the correct child restraint system can be obtained at a qualified specialist workshop. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you usea Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for this purpose.

Securing with ISOFIX

Weight categorySize category

Type1

Type approval numberOrder number2

1 Manufacturer: Britax Römer 2 With colour code 9H95

Category 0+:up to 13 kg and up to approx. 15 monthsSize category E

BABY SAFE plusE1 04 301 146

B6 6 86 8224

Category I:9 to 18 kgSize category B1

DUO plusE1 04 301 133

A 000 970 17 02

Occupant safety 55

Securing with the vehicle seat belt

Weight category Type1

Type approval numberOrder number2

1 Manufacturer: Britax Römer 2 With colour code 9H95

Category 0:up to 10 kg and up to approx. 6 months

BABY SAFE plus IIE1 04 301 146

A 000 970 13 02

Category 0+:up to 13 kg and up to approx. 15 months

BABY SAFE plus IIE1 04 301 146

A 000 970 13 02

Category I:9 to 18 kg and from approximately 9 months to4 years

DUO plusE1 04 301 133

A 000 970 17 02

Category II/III:15 to 36 kg and from approximately 4 to 12years

KIDFIX XPE1 04 301 304

A 000 970 23 02

56 Occupant safety

Overview of suitable seats in the vehicle for fitting a child restraint system

Securing systems for child restraint systems

Vehicle seat

Left/right rear seat (second seatrow)

Preferred securing system:® ISOFIX child seat securing system

(/ page 61)or

° i-Size child seat securing system(/ page 65)

¯ Also secure Top Tether if present(/ page 70)

Alternative securing system:R Vehicle seat belt (/ page 72).

Left/right rear seat (third seat row) Preferred securing system:® ISOFIX child seat securing system

(/ page 61)¯ Also secure Top Tether if present

(/ page 70)

Alternative securing system:R Vehicle seat belt (/ page 72)

Occupant safety 57

Vehicle seat

Front passenger seat Securing system:R Vehicle seat belt (/ page 72)

Be sure to observe:R If the front passenger seat is occupied, ensure,

both before and during the journey, that the sta‐tus of the front passenger airbag is correct for thecurrent situation (/ page 46).R Notes on automatic front passenger airbag shut‐

off (/ page 44).

Centre rear seat (second seat row) Securing system:R Vehicle seat belt (/ page 72)

Approval categories for child restraint sys‐tems

Only use approved child restraint systemsOnly child restraint systems that meet the fol‐lowing UNECE standards are permitted for use inthe vehicle:R UN-R44R UN-R129 (i-Size child restraint systems)

Identification on the child restraint systemInformation about the approval category, weightcategory and approval number, for example, ison the approval label on the child restraint sys‐tem.There may be further information such as theISOFIX size categories, depending on theapproval category of the child restraint system.

58 Occupant safety

Approval categories in accordance with UN-R44

Example of an approval label

R Universal: child restraint systems in the"Universal" category are approved for instal‐lation in vehicles. They can be used, inaccordance with overviews of the suitability

of seats for securing child restraint systems,on seats labelled U, UF or IUF.The identification IUF refers to ISOFIX childrestraint systems in the "Universal" category.These child restraint systems must also besecured using Top Tether or support points.R Semi-Universal: child restraint systems in

the "Semi-Universal" category may only beused if the vehicle and vehicle seat are listedin the child restraint system manufacturer'svehicle model list.R Vehicle-specific: child restraint systems in

the "vehicle-specific" category may only beused if the vehicle and vehicle seat are listedin the child restraint system manufacturer'svehicle model list.

Approval categories in accordance with UN-R129

Example of an approval label

R i‑Size: child restraint systems in the "i‑Size"category are approved for installation in vehi‐cles with i‑Size mounting brackets. They canbe used, in accordance with overviews of the

Occupant safety 59

suitability of seats for securing child restraintsystems, on seats labelled i‑U.The identification i‑U refers to i‑Size childrestraint systems in the "Universal" category.

Observe the suitability of vehicle seatsDepending on the approval category, there areforward-facing and rearward-facing childrestraint systems. Their use can be restricted forcertain vehicle seats:R Suitability of seats for securing ISOFIX child

restraint systems (/ page 61).R Suitability of seats for securing i‑Size child

restraint systems (/ page 65).R Suitability of seats for securing belt-secured

child restraint systems (/ page 72)

60 Occupant safety

Fitting the ISOFIX or i-Size child restraint system on the rear seat

Overview of suitability of the seats for attaching ISOFIX child restraint systems

ISOFIX identification

® ISOFIX is a standardised securing system for specially designed restraint systems.R The symbol indicates seats suitable for attaching an ISOFIX child restraint system in accordance with UN R44 (/ page 58).R Attach only child restraint systems that are approved in accordance with UN R44 as per the following ISOFIX tables.

Carry cot

Size class: Equipment: Left/right rear seat (second and third row of seats)

F ISO/L1 X

G ISO/L2 X

X Not suitable for an ISOFIX child restraint system in this weight group and/or size class.

Occupant safety 61

Weight group 0 (up to 10 kg and up to approx. 6 months)

Size class: Equipment: Left/right rear seat (second and third row of seats)

E ISO/R1 IL

IL Suitable for ISOFIX child restraint systems according to the table in "Overview of the recommended child restraint systems", or if the

vehicle and the seat are listed on the child restraint system manufacturer's vehicle model list.

Weight group 0+ (up to 13 kg and up to approx. 15 months) for second row of seats

Size class: Equipment: Left/right rear seat

E ISO/R1 IL

D ISO/R2, ISO/R2X IL

C ISO/R3 IL (1)



(1) When using a child restraint system of size class (ISO/R3), move the front seat into the highest position. Make sure that the seat

backrest of the front seat does not rest against the child restraint system.

62 Occupant safety

Weight group 0+ (up to 13 kg and up to approx. 15 months) for third row of seats

Size class: Equipment: Left/right rear seat

E ISO/R1 IL

D ISO/R2, ISO/R2X X

C ISO/R3 X




Weight group 1 (9–18 kg and approx. 9 months to 4 years)

Size class: Equipment: Left/right rear seat (second row of seats)

D ISO/R2, ISO/R2X IL

C ISO/R3 IL (1)

B ISO/F2 IUF

B1 ISO/F2X IUF

Occupant safety 63

Size class: Equipment: Left/right rear seat (second row of seats)

A ISO/F3 IUF



IUF Suitable for forward-facing ISOFIX child restraint systems of the "Universal" category in this weight group.

(1) When using a child restraint system of size class (ISO/R3), move the front seat into the highest position. Make sure that the seat

backrest of the front seat does not rest against the child restraint system.

Weight group 1 (9–18 kg and approx. 9 months to 4 years)

Size class: Equipment: Left/right rear seat (third row of seats)

D ISO/R2, ISO/R2X X

C ISO/R3 X

B ISO/F2 IUF

B1 ISO/F2X IUF

64 Occupant safety

Size class: Equipment: Left/right rear seat (third row of seats)

A ISO/F3 IUF


IUF Suitable for forward-facing ISOFIX child restraint systems of the "Universal" category in this weight group.

Overview of suitability of the seats for attaching i‑Size child restraint systems

i-Size identification

° i‑Size is a standardised securing system for specially designed restraint systems.R The symbol indicates seats suitable for attaching an i‑Size child restraint system in accordance with UN R129 (/ page 58).R It is possible to attach child restraint systems that are permitted in accordance with

- UN R44 as per the ISOFIX tables (/ page 61), or- UN R129 as per the following i‑Size tables

Occupant safety 65

Front passenger seat Centre rear seat

i-Size child restraint system(ISO/R2, ISO/F2X, ISO/B2,ISO/B3)

X X

X Not suitable for an i-Size child restraint system in the "Universal" category.

Left/right rear seat (second row of seats) Left/right rear seat (third row of seats)

i-Size child restraint system(ISO/R2, ISO/F2X, ISO/B2,ISO/B3)

i‑U X

i-U Suitable for forward-facing and rearward-facing i-Size child restraint systems

in the "Universal" category.

X Not suitable for an i-Size child restraint system in the "Universal" category.

66 Occupant safety

Fitting the ISOFIX or i‑Size child restraintsystem on the rear seat

& WARNING Risk of injury if the rearbench seat/rear seat and seat backrestare not engaged

If the rear bench seat/rear seat and seatbackrest are not engaged they could fold for‐wards, e.g. when braking suddenly or in theevent of an accident.R If this is the case, the vehicle occupant

would be forced into the seat belt by therear bench seat/rear seat or by the seatbackrest. The seat belt cannot protect asintended and could result in additionalinjury.R Objects or loads in the boot/load com‐

partment cannot be restrained by theseat backrest.

# Make sure that the seat backrest andthe rear bench seat/rear seat areengaged before every trip.

Ensure that the rear seat backrest is engaged. Todo so, pull forcefully on the seat backrest.

& WARNING ‑Risk of injury or death if thepermissible gross mass of the child andchild restraint system is exceeded

For ISOFIX or i‑Size child restraint systems inwhich the child is secured using the seat beltintegrated in the child restraint system, thepermissible gross mass of the child and childrestraint system is 33 kg.If the child and the child restraint systemtogether weigh more than 33 kg, the ISOFIXor i‑Size child restraint system with integra‐ted seat belt does not offer sufficient protec‐tion. Too much load may be placed on theISOFIX or i‑Size child restraint systems andthe child may not be restrained correctly inthe event of an accident, for example.# If the child and the child restraint sys‐

tem together weigh more than 33 kg,use only an ISOFIX or i‑Size childrestraint system with which the child issecured with the vehicle seat belt.

# Also secure the child restraint systemwith the Top Tether belt, if available.

Always comply with the information about themass of the child restraint system:R in the manufacturer's installation and operat‐

ing instructions for the child restraint systemusedR on a label on the child restraint system, if

present

Regularly check that the permissible gross massof the child and child restraint system is stillcomplied with.When fitting a child restraint system, observethe following:O Always observe the correct use of the seats

and consider their suitability for attaching achild restraint system.ISOFIX child seat securing system(/ page 61)or

Occupant safety 67

i‑Size child seat securing system(/ page 65)

O Always comply with the manufacturer'sinstallation and operating instructions forthe child restraint system used.

O Make sure that the child's feet do not comeinto contact with the front seat. If neces‐sary, move the front seat forward slightly.

®When fitting an ISOFIX child restraint sys‐tem, also observe the following:O When using a Group 0/0+ baby car seat

and a Group 1 rearward-facing childrestraint system on a rear seat: adjustthe front seat so that the seat does nottouch the child restraint system.

O When using a Group 1 forward-facingchild restraint system: remove the headrestraint from the respective seat, if possi‐ble. In addition, the backrest of the childrestraint system must, as far as possible, lieflat against the backrest of the vehicle seat.

Once the child restraint system has beenremoved, replace the head restraints imme‐diately and adjust them correctly.

O When using a child restraint system ona seat on the third row of seats: adjustthe front seat so that it does not touch thechild restraint system, and move the seatbackrest of the front seat into an uprightposition if necessary.

O For certain child restraint systems in weightgroup 2 or 3, there may be restrictions onthe maximum size setting, e.g. due to possi‐ble contact with the roof.

O The child restraint system must not be ten‐sioned between the roof and the seat cush‐ion and/or be fitted facing the wrong direc‐tion. Where possible, adjust the seat cush‐ion inclination accordingly.

O The child restraint system must not be putunder strain by the head restraints. Adjustthe head restraints accordingly.

° When fitting an i‑Size child restraint sys‐tem, also observe the following:O When using a rearward-facing child

restraint system: adjust the front seat sothat it does not touch the child restraint sys‐tem.

O When using a forward-facing childrestraint system: remove the headrestraint from the respective seat, if possi‐ble. In addition, the backrest of the childrestraint system must, as far as possible, lieflat against the backrest of the vehicle seat.Once the child restraint system has beenremoved, replace the head restraints imme‐diately and adjust them correctly.

# Before every journey, make sure that theISOFIX child restraint system or the i‑Sizechild restraint system is engaged correctly inboth mounting brackets in the vehicle.

68 Occupant safety

* NOTE Be careful not to damage the seatbelt for the centre seat when fitting thechild restraint system

# Make sure that the seat belt is not trap‐ped.

Rear bench seat (second row of seats):

1 ISOFIX mounting bracket2 i‑Size mounting bracket

# Attach the ISOFIX or i‑Size child restraint sys‐tem to both mounting brackets in the vehicle.

Vehicles with a third row of seats:

# Attach the ISOFIX child restraint system toboth ISOFIX mounting brackets1 in thevehicle.

Occupant safety 69

Securing a Top Tether

& WARNING Risk of injury or death if therear seat backrests are not locked afterfitting Top Tether belts

If the rear seat backrests are not locked, theycould fold forwards in the event of an acci‐dent, heavy braking or sudden changes ofdirection.As a result, child restraint systems cannotperform their intended protective function.Rear seat backrests that are not locked canalso cause additional injuries, e.g. in theevent of an accident.# Always lock rear seat backrests after

fitting Top Tether belts.# Observe the lock verification indicator.

Ensure that the rear seat backrest is engaged. Todo so, pull forcefully on the seat backrest.¯ If the child restraint system is equipped

with a Top Tether belt:The risk of injury can be reduced by a TopTether. The Top Tether belt facilitates an

additional connection between the childrestraint system attached with ISOFIX ori‑Size and the vehicle.

The Top Tether anchorages for the second row ofseats are located on the rear side of the twoouter rear seats on the second row of seats. Forthe third row of seats, use the Top Tetheranchorage on the rear side of the seat backreston the third row of seats.

Second row of seats

# If necessary, slide the head restraint1upwards (/ page 119).

# Fit the ISOFIX or i‑Size child restraint systemwith Top Tether. Comply with the childrestraint system manufacturer's installationinstructions when doing so.

70 Occupant safety

# Guide the Top Tether belt4 under the headrestraint1 between the two head restraintbars.

# Hook Top Tether hook3 into Top Tetheranchorage2 without twisting.

# Tension the Top Tether belt4. Comply withthe child restraint system manufacturer'sinstallation instructions when doing so.

# If necessary, slide the head restraint1downwards (/ page 119). Make sure thatyou do not interfere with the correct routingof the Top Tether belt4.

Occupant safety 71

Securing the child restraint system with the seat belt

Notes on the suitability of seats for attaching belt-secured child restraint systemsRear seats (second seat row)

Weight category Left/right rear seat Centre rear seat1

1 Child restraint systems with a supporting bracket are not suitable for this seat.

Category 0: up to 10 kg U, L U, L

Category 0+: up to 13 kg U, L U, L

Category I: 9 to 18 kg U, L U, L

Category II: 15 to 25 kg U, L U, L

Category III: 22 to 36 kg U, L U, L

U Suitable for child restraint systems of the "Universal" category in this weight category.

L Suitable for semi-universal child restraint systems according to the table in "Recommended child restraint systems", or if the vehicle and the seat are listed in the

child restraint system manufacturer's vehicle model list.

72 Occupant safety

Rear seats (third seat row)

Weight category Left/right rear seat

Category 0: up to 10 kg U, L

Category 0+: up to 13 kg U, L

Category I: 9 to 18 kg U, L

Category II: 15 to 25 kg U, L

Category III: 22 to 36 kg U, L

U Suitable for child restraint systems of the "Universal" category in this weight category.

L Suitable for semi-universal child restraint systems according to the table in "Recommended child restraint systems", or if the vehicle and the seat are listed in the


Occupant safety 73

Front passenger seat – Notes

Notes on child restraint systems on the front passenger seat

R If it is absolutely necessary for you to fit a child restraint system to the front passenger seat, be sure to observe the information on child restraintsystems on the front passenger seat (/ page 78).Observe the specific instructions for the rearward-facing and forward-facing child restraint systems. If the front passenger seat is occupied, ensure,both before and during the journey, that the status of the front passenger airbag is correct for the current situation (/ page 46).

Front passenger seat

Weight category Front passenger airbag enabled1 Front passenger airbag disabled1, 2

1 Adjust the seat cushion inclination so that the front edge of the seat cushion is

in the highest position and the rear edge of the seat cushion is in the lowest posi‐

tion.

2 The vehicle is equipped with automatic front passenger airbag shutoff. The

PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must be lit.

Category 0: up to 10 kg X U, L

Category 0+: up to 13 kg X U, L

Category I: 9 to 18 kg UF, L U, L

Category II: 15 to 25 kg UF, L U, L

74 Occupant safety

Weight category Front passenger airbag enabled1 Front passenger airbag disabled1, 2

Category III: 22 to 36 kg UF, L U, L

X Not suitable for children in this weight category.

UF Suitable for forward-facing child restraint systems of the "Universal" category

in this weight category.

L Suitable for semi-universal child restraint systems according to the table in "Rec‐

ommended child restraint systems", or if the vehicle and the seat are listed in the


U Suitable for child restraint systems of the "Universal" category in this weight cat‐

egory.

Securing the child restraint system with theseat belt on the rear seat



would be forced into the seat belt by the

rear bench seat/rear seat or by the seatbackrest. The seat belt cannot protect asintended and could result in additionalinjury.R Objects or loads in the boot/load com‐



Ensure that the rear seat backrest is engaged. Todo so, pull forcefully on the seat backrest.

When fitting a belt-secured child restraint sys‐tem, observe the following:O Always comply with the manufacturer's

installation and operating instructions forthe child restraint system used.

O For a child restraint system in the "Univer‐sal" or "Semi-Universal" category, makesure that the system has been approved forthe vehicle seat.Observe the notes under "Suitability ofseats for attaching belt-secured childrestraint systems" (/ page 72).

Occupant safety 75

O When using a category 0/0+ baby carseat and a category I rearward-facingchild restraint system on a rear seat:adjust the front seat so that the seat doesnot touch the child restraint system.

O When using a category I forward-facingchild restraint system: remove the headrestraint from the respective seat, if possi‐ble.After the child restraint system has beenremoved, replace the head restraints imme‐diately and adjust them correctly.

O The backrest of the forward-facing childrestraint system must, as far as possible, beresting on the seat backrest of the rearseat.

O For certain child restraint systems in weightcategory II or III, there may be restrictionson the maximum size setting, e.g. due topossible contact with the roof.

O The child restraint system must not be putunder strain between the roof and the seatcushion and/or be fitted facing the wrong

direction. Where possible, adjust the seatcushion inclination accordingly.

O The child restraint system must not be putunder strain by the head restraint. Adjustthe head restraints accordingly.

O Make sure that the child's feet do not touchthe front seat. If necessary, move the frontseat slightly forwards.

# Fit the child restraint system.The entire base of the child restraint systemmust always rest on the sitting surface of therear seat.

# Always make sure that the shoulder beltstrap is correctly routed from the seat beltoutlet of the vehicle to the shoulder beltguide on the child restraint system.The shoulder belt strap must be routed for‐wards and downwards from the seat belt out‐let.

Notes on vehicles without automatic frontpassenger airbag shutoff

Sticker visible when the front passenger dooris open

Vehicles without automatic front passenger air‐bag shutoff have a special sticker affixed to theside of the cockpit on the front passenger side.

76 Occupant safety

Make sure you observe the following informa‐tion:R Never fit a rearward-facing child restraint

system to the front passenger seatR Always fit a rearward-facing child restraint

system to a suitable rear seat- Suitability of seats for attaching belt-

secured child restraint systems(/ page 72)

- Secure the child restraint system with theseat belt on the rear seat (/ page 75).

R Notes on rearward-facing and forward-facingchild restraint systems on the frontpassenger seat (/ page 77)

Notes on rearward-facing and forward-facingchild restraint systems on the frontpassenger seat

& WARNING Risk of injury or death fromusing a rearward-facing child restraintsystem when the front passenger frontairbag is enabled

If you secure a child in a rearward-facingchild restraint system on the front passengerseat and the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indi‐cator lamp is off, the front passenger airbagcan deploy in the event of an accident.The child could be struck by the airbag.Always ensure that the front passenger air‐bag is disabled. The PASSENGER AIR BAGOFF indicator lamp must be lit.NEVER use a rearward-facing child restraintsystem on a seat protected by an ENABLEDFRONT AIRBAG in front of it, DEATH or SERI‐OUS INJURY to the CHILD can occur.

Observe the specific instructions for the rear‐ward-facing and forward-facing child restraintsystems (/ page 78).

Warning notice on the front passenger sun visor

Always observe the status of the front passengerairbag on the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indica‐tor lamp:R If it is absolutely necessary to fit a child

restraint system to the front passenger seat,always observe the information on automaticfront passenger airbag shutoff (/ page 44).R When using a rearward-facing child restraint

system on the front passenger seat, the front

Occupant safety 77

passenger airbag must always be disabled.This is only the case if the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp is lit continuously(/ page 46).R If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator

lamp is off, the front passenger airbag is ena‐bled. The front passenger airbag may deployduring an accident.

Securing the child restraint system with theseat belt on the front passenger seatWhen fitting a belt-secured child restraint sys‐tem on the front passenger seat, always observethe following:O Observe the child restraint system manufac‐

turer's installation and operating instruc‐tions.

O For a child restraint system in the "Univer‐sal" or "Semi-Universal" category, makesure that the system has been approved forthe vehicle seat.Observe the notes under "Suitability ofseats for attaching belt-secured childrestraint systems" (/ page 72).

O When using a forward-facing child restraintsystem in category I: remove the headrestraint from the respective seat, if possi‐ble.After the child restraint system has beenremoved, replace the head restraints imme‐diately and adjust them correctly.

O The backrest of the forward-facing childrestraint system must, as far as possible, beresting on the seat backrest of the frontpassenger seat.

O For certain child restraint systems in weightcategory II or III, there may be restrictionson the maximum size setting, e.g. due topossible contact with the roof.

O The child restraint system must not be ten‐sioned between the roof and the seat cush‐ion and/or be fitted facing the wrong direc‐tion.

O The child restraint system must not be putunder strain by the head restraints. Adjustthe head restraints accordingly.

O Never place objects under or behind thechild restraint system, e.g. cushions.

# Set the front passenger seat as far back aspossible and move the seat into the highestposition if possible.

# Adjust the seat cushion inclination so thatthe front edge of the seat cushion is in thehighest position and the rear edge of theseat cushion is in the lowest position.

# Set the seat backrest to the most verticalposition possible.

# Fit the child restraint system.The entire base of the child restraint systemmust always rest on the sitting surface of thefront passenger seat.

# Always make sure that the shoulder beltstrap is correctly routed from the seat beltoutlet of the vehicle to the shoulder beltguide on the child restraint system.The shoulder belt strap must be routed for‐wards and downwards from the seat belt out‐let.

# If necessary, adjust the front passenger seataccordingly.

78 Occupant safety

Child safety locks

Activating/deactivating the child safety lockfor the rear doors











& WARNING Risk of fatal injury due toexposure to extreme heat or cold in thevehicle

If people –particularly children – are exposedto extreme temperatures over an extendedperiod of time, there is a risk of serious oreven fatal injury!# Never leave anyone – particularly chil‐

dren – unattended in the vehicle.# Never leave animals in the vehicle unat‐

tended.


If children are travelling in the vehicle, theycould, in particular:R open doors, thereby endangering other

persons or road usersR get out and be struck by oncoming trafficR operate vehicle equipment and become

trapped, for example

# Always activate the child safety locksinstalled if children are travelling in thevehicle.


# When leaving the vehicle, always takethe key with you and lock the vehicle.This also applies to the Digital VehicleKey if the "Digital Vehicle Key" functionis activated via Mercedes me connect.

Occupant safety 79

Vehicles for the United Kingdom: observe theimportant safety notes in the "Notes on the addi‐tional door lock" section.There are child safety locks for the rear doorsand the rear side windows.The child safety lock on the rear doors secureseach door separately. The doors can no longerbe opened from the inside.

# Press the lever in direction1 (activate) or2 (deactivate).

# Make sure that the child safety locks areworking properly.

Activating/deactivating the child safety lockfor the rear side windows

# To activate/deactivate: press button2.The rear side window can be opened orclosed in the following cases:R With indicator lamp1 lit: via the switch

on the driver's door.R With indicator lamp1 off: via the switch

on the corresponding rear door or driv‐er's door.

Notes on pets in the vehicle

& WARNING Risk of accident and injurydue to animals left unsecured or unat‐tended in the vehicle

If you leave animals in the vehicle unatten‐ded or unsecured, they could possibly pressdown buttons or switches.Thereby an animal may:R activate vehicle equipment and become

trapped, for exampleR switch systems on or off and endanger

other road users

80 Occupant safety

Unsecured animals may be thrown around inthe vehicle in the event of an accident orsudden steering and braking manoeuvresand injure vehicle occupants in the process.# Never leave animals in the vehicle unat‐

tended.# Always correctly secure animals while

driving, e.g. using a suitable animal car‐rier.

Occupant safety 81

KeyOverview of key functions











* NOTE Damage to the key caused bymagnetic fields

# Keep the key away from strong mag‐netic fields.

% The key may vary from the one shown in thediagram, depending on the vehicle equip‐ment.

1 Locks2 Indicator lamp3 Unlocks4 Opens/closes the tailgate

% If indicator lamp2 does not light up afterpressing theÜ orß button, the bat‐tery is discharged.

Replacing the key battery (/ page 84).The key locks and unlocks the following compo‐nents:R the doorsR the fuel filler flap

82 Opening and closing

R the tailgate

If the vehicle is not opened within approximately40 seconds after unlocking, it locks again. Anti-theft protection is primed again.Do not keep the key together with electronicdevices or metal objects. This can affect thekey's functionality.

Indicator lamp of the vehicle lock

Indicator lamp1 in the trim on the driver's sideflashes when the vehicle is locked from outside.Indicator lamp1 remains off if the vehicle islocked from inside or while the vehicle is inmotion.

Activating/deactivating the acoustic lockingverification signal

Multimedia system:4© 5 Settings 5 Vehicle# Activate or deactivate Acoustic lock.% Please note:

The selected setting for the acoustic lockingverification signal must comply with the rele‐vant national road and traffic regulations. Insome countries, including Germany, usingthe acoustic locking verification signal is for‐bidden by traffic laws (in accordance with§16 Para. 1 and §30 Para. 1 of the Germannational road traffic regulations). The driverof the vehicle must comply with these regu‐lations. In countries where the use of thisfunction is forbidden, this function is not

activated in the vehicle and must not be acti‐vated.

Changing the unlocking settings

Possible unlocking functions of the key:R central unlockingR unlocking the driver's door and fuel filler flap

# To switch between settings: press theÜ andß buttons simultaneously forapproximately six seconds until the indicatorlamp flashes twice.

Options if the unlocking function for the driver'sdoor and fuel filler flap has been selected:R To unlock the vehicle centrally: press theÜ button twice.R Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: if you touch

the inner surface of the door handle on thedriver's door, only the driver's door and fuelfiller flap are unlocked.

Opening and closing 83

Deactivating the key functions

If you do not use the vehicle or a key for anextended period of time, you can reduce theenergy consumption of the respective key. To doso, deactivate the key functions.# To deactivate: press theß button on the

key twice in quick succession.The key indicator lamp flashes twice brieflyand lights up once.

# To activate: press any button on the key.% When the vehicle is started with the key in

the stowage compartment of the centre con‐sole, the key functions are automaticallyactivated (/ page 188).

Removing/inserting the emergency key

# To remove: press release knob1.Emergency key2 is pushed out slightly.

# Pull out emergency key2 until it engages inthe intermediate position.

# Press release knob1 again and fullyremove emergency key2.

# To insert: press release knob1.# Insert emergency key2 to the intermediate

position or fully until it engages.% You can use the intermediate position of

emergency key2 to attach the key to a keyring.

Replacing the key battery

& DANGER Serious damage to healthcaused by swallowing batteries

Batteries contain toxic and corrosive sub‐stances. Swallowing batteries may causeserious damage to health.There is a risk of fatal injury.# Keep batteries out of the reach of chil‐

dren.# If batteries are swallowed, seek medical

attention immediately.

+ ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmentaldamage due to improper disposal of bat‐teries

Batteries contain pollutants. It isillegal to dispose of them with the householdrubbish.


#

Dispose of batteries in anenvironmentally responsible manner.Take discharged batteries to a qualifiedspecialist workshop or to a collectionpoint for used batteries.

Requirements:R You require a CR 2032 3 V cell battery.

Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have thebattery replaced at a qualified specialist work‐shop.# Remove the emergency key (/ page 84).

# Press release knob2 down fully and slidecover1 in the direction of the arrow.

# Fold out cover1 in the direction of thearrow and remove.

# Remove battery compartment3 and takeout the discharged battery.

# Insert the new battery into battery compart‐ment3. Observe the positive pole markingin the battery compartment and on the bat‐tery when doing this.

# Push in battery compartment3.# Re-attach cover1 and push it until it

engages.


Problems with the key

Problem Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions

You can no longer lock or unlock thevehicle.

Possible causes:R The key battery is weak or discharged.R There is interference from a powerful radio signal source.R The key is faulty.

# Check the battery using the indicator lamp and replace if necessary (/ page 84).# Use the emergency key to lock or unlock (/ page 84).# Have the key checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

You have lost a key.# Have the key deactivated at a qualified specialist workshop.# If necessary, have the mechanical lock replaced as well.

DoorsNotes on the additional door lock

The additional door lock is only available forvehicles for the United Kingdom.

& WARNING Risk of injury to personsinside the vehicle when the additionaldoor lock is activated

If the additional door lock is activated, thedoors can no longer be opened from theinside.

If there are persons in the vehicle, they canno longer leave the vehicle, e.g. in hazardoussituations.# Never leave persons unattended in the

vehicle, particularly children, elderlypersons or persons in need of help.


# If there are persons in the vehicle, donot activate the additional door lock.

The additional door lock is automatically activa‐ted in the following situations:R The vehicle is locked using the key.R The vehicle is locked using KEYLESS-GO.

If the vehicle has been locked via Mercedes meconnect, the additional door lock is not activa‐ted.If the additional door lock is activated, the doorscannot be opened from the inside.% After locking you can issue a signal with the

horn.You can prevent the additional door lock frombeing activated by deactivating interior protec‐tion before locking the vehicle (/ page 109).

Unlocking/opening the doors from the inside

# United Kingdom only: observe the notes onthe additional door lock (/ page 86).

# Pull door handle1.

Centrally locking and unlocking the vehiclefrom the inside

# To unlock: press button1.# To lock: press button2.

The indicator lamp lights up.

This does not lock or unlock the fuel filler flap.


The vehicle is not unlocked:R If you have locked the vehicle using the key.R If you have locked the vehicle using KEY‐

LESS-GO.

Locking/unlocking the vehicle with a DigitalVehicle Key

Requirements:R one of the following versions of the Digital

Vehicle Key is available:- suitable mobile phone- Digital Vehicle Key stickerR the vehicle is equipped with the "Digital Vehi‐

cle Key" function.R the "Digital Vehicle Key" function is activated

via Mercedes me connect: https://www.mercedes.me.R the mobile phone is sufficiently charged.

% You can check the suitability of your mobilephone by entering the phone number athttps://www.mercedes.me.

Information about suitable mobile phonescan be obtained from your Mercedes-BenzService Centre or at https://www.mercedes-benz.com/connect.

% Mercedes-Benz recommends that you carrythe emergency key in case of functionrestrictions.

% The function is only available in combinationwith Mercedes me connect and only in cer‐tain countries.

% Protective cases around the mobile phonecan impair the functionality.

If the vehicle has been parked for longer thantwo weeks, the NFC aerial in the door handle isdeactivated.# Pull the door handle.

The NFC aerial is activated.

# Touch the door handle on the driver's door inthe area where NFC aerial1 is located withthe part of the Digital Vehicle Key where theNFC aerial is located.The vehicle is locked or unlocked alternately.

If you lose the Digital Vehicle Key, deactivate the"Digital Vehicle Key" service in Mercedes meconnect via https://www.mercedes.me.


Locking/unlocking the vehicle with KEY‐LESS-GO

Requirements:R The key is outside the vehicle.R The distance between the key and the vehicle

does not exceed 1 m.R The driver's door and the door at which the

door handle is used are closed.

# To unlock the vehicle: touch the inner sur‐face of the door handle.

# To lock the vehicle: touch sensor surface1 or2.

# Convenience closing: touch recessed sen‐sor surface2 until the closing process hasbeen completed.

% Further information on convenience closing(/ page 100).

If you open the tailgate from outside it is auto‐matically unlocked.


Problems with KEYLESS-GO


You can no longer lock or unlock thevehicle using KEYLESS-GO.

Possible causes:R The key functions have been deactivated (/ page 84).R The key battery is weak or discharged.R There is interference from a powerful radio signal source.R The key is faulty.

# Activate the key functions (/ page 84).# Check the battery using the indicator lamp and replace if necessary (/ page 84).# Use the emergency key to unlock or lock the vehicle (/ page 84).# Have the vehicle and key checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

Activating/deactivating the automatic lock‐ing feature

The vehicle is locked automatically when theignition is switched on and the wheels are turn‐ing faster than walking pace.


# To activate: press and hold button2 forapproximately five seconds until an acousticsignal sounds.

# To deactivate: press and hold button1 forapproximately five seconds until an acousticsignal sounds.

When the vehicle is locked automatically, theindicator lamp in button2 lights up.

In the following situations, there is a danger ofbeing locked out when the function is activated:R While the vehicle is being tow started/

pushed.R If the vehicle is being tested on a roller dyna‐

mometer.

Locking/unlocking the vehicle with theemergency key

Locking/unlocking the driver's door with theemergency key% If you wish to lock the vehicle entirely using

the emergency key, first press the button forlocking from the inside while the driver'sdoor is open. Then proceed to lock the driv‐er's door using the emergency key.

# Insert the emergency key as far as it will gointo opening1 in the cover.

# Pull and hold the door handle.# Pull the cover on the emergency key as

straight as possible away from the vehicleuntil it releases.

# Release the door handle.


# To unlock: turn the emergency key anti-clockwise to position1.

# To lock: turn the emergency key clockwise toposition1.

# Carefully press the cover onto the lock cylin‐der until it engages and is seated firmly.

Locking the front passenger door and reardoors with the emergency key

# Insert a suitable object, e.g. the emergencykey, into opening1 on the door lock.

# To lock the left-hand side of the vehicle:turn the emergency key anti-clockwise as faras it will go.

# To lock the right-hand side of the vehicle:turn the emergency key clockwise as far as itwill go.

If the locked door is then closed, it can no longerbe opened from outside.

Load compartmentOpening the tailgate

& DANGER Risk of exhaust gas poisoning

Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaustgases such as carbon monoxide. Exhaustgases can enter the vehicle interior if the tail‐gate is open when the engine is running,especially if the vehicle is in motion.# Always switch off the engine before

opening the tailgate.# Never drive with the tailgate open.


* NOTE Damage to the tailgate caused byobstacles above the vehicle

The tailgate swings rearwards and upwardswhen it is opened.# Make sure that there is sufficient space

behind and above the tailgate.

You have the following options for openingthe tailgate:# Pull the tailgate handle.# Vehicles with HANDS-FREE ACCESS: use

your foot to kick below the bumper(/ page 96).

Vehicles with an EASY-PACK tailgate

# Pull the remote opening switch1 for thetailgate.

# Press and hold thep button on the key.# If the tailgate is unlocked, pull the tailgate

handle and release it again immediately.

# For a tailgate stopped in an intermediateposition, pull it upwards and release it assoon as it starts to open.

The tailgate is equipped with an automaticobstruction detection function. If a solid objectblocks or restricts the tailgate during automaticopening, this process will be stopped. The auto‐matic obstruction detection function is only anaid. It is not a substitute for your attentivenesswhen you are opening the tailgate.

Closing the tailgate

& WARNING Risk of injury from unsecureditems in the vehicle

If objects, luggage or loads are not securedor not secured sufficiently, they could slip,tip over or be thrown around and thereby hitvehicle occupants.There is a risk of injury, particularly in theevent of sudden braking or a sudden changein direction.


# Always stow objects in such a way thatthey cannot be thrown around.

# Before the journey, secure objects, lug‐gage or loads against slipping or tippingover.

Observe the notes on loading the vehicle.To close the tailgate, the following optionsare available:# Pull the tailgate downwards with the handle

and let it drop into the lock.

Vehicles with an EASY-PACK tailgate

& WARNING Risk of becoming trappedduring automatic closing of the tailgate

Parts of the body could become trapped dur‐ing automatic closing of the tailgate. More‐over, people, e.g. children, may be standingin the closing area or may enter the closingarea during the closing process.# Make sure that nobody is in the vicinity

of the closing area during the closingprocess.

Use one of the following options to stop theclosing process:R press thep button on the key.R press or pull the remote operating switch

on the driver's door.R press the closing or locking button on the

tailgate.R Pull the tailgate handle.

# Vehicles with HANDS-FREE ACCESS: it isalso possible to stop the closing process bymaking a kicking movement below the rearbumper.

To close the tailgate, the following optionsare available:# Pull the tailgate downwards slightly. Release

it as soon as it begins to close.

# Switch on the power supply or the ignition.# Press the remote operating switch1 for the

tailgate.


# Press the closing button1 on the tailgate.

Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO# Press the locking button2 on the tailgate.

If a key is detected outside the vehicle, thetailgate will close and the vehicle will belocked.

# Press and hold thep button on the key(with the key in the vicinity of the vehicle).

Vehicles with HANDS-FREE ACCESS# Make a kicking movement with your foot

below the bumper (/ page 96).

Automatic reversing function for the tailgateThe tailgate is equipped with automatic obstruc‐tion detection with reversing function. If a solidobject blocks or restricts the tailgate when it isautomatically closing, the tailgate will automati‐cally open again slightly. Automatic obstructiondetection with reversing function is only an aid.It is not a substitute for your attentiveness whenyou are closing the tailgate.# During the closing process, make sure that

no body parts are in the closing area.

& WARNING Risk of becoming trappeddespite reversing function

The reversing function does not react:R to soft, light and thin objects, e.g. fingers.R over the last 8 mm of the closing path.

In these situations in particular, the reversingfunction cannot prevent someone being trap‐ped.

# When closing, make sure that no bodyparts are in the closing area.

If someone is trapped:R press thep button on the key, orR press or pull the remote operating switch

on the driver's door, orR press the closing or locking button on the

tailgate, orR Pull the tailgate handle.


HANDS-FREE ACCESS function

With HANDS-FREE ACCESS you can open, closeor stop the closing process of the tailgate byperforming a kicking movement under the rearbumper.The kicking movement triggers the opening orclosing process alternately.

Observe the notes when opening (/ page 92)and closing (/ page 93) the tailgate.% Two warning tones sound when the tailgate

is opening or closing.

& WARNING Risk of burns caused by a hotexhaust system

The vehicle exhaust system can become veryhot. If you use HANDS-FREE ACCESS, youcould burn yourself by touching the exhaustsystem.# Always ensure that you only make a

kicking movement within the detectionrange of the sensors.

* NOTE Vehicle damage due to uninten‐tional opening of the tailgate

R when using an automatic car washR when using a high pressure cleaner

# Deactivate KEYLESS-GO or make surethat the key located is at least 3 m

away from the vehicle in such situa‐tions.

When making the kicking movement, make surethat your feet are firmly on the ground, other‐wise you could lose your balance, e.g. on ice.Observe the following notes:R The key is behind the vehicle.R Stand at least 30 cm away from the vehicle

while performing the kicking movement.R Do not come into contact with the bumper

while making the kicking movement.R Do not carry out the kicking movement too

slowly.R The kicking movement must be towards the

vehicle and back again.


1 Detection range of the sensors

If several consecutive kicking movements arenot successful, wait ten seconds.

System limitsThe system may be impaired or may not functionin the following cases:R The area around the sensor is dirty, e.g. due

to road salt or snow.R The kicking movement is made using a pros‐

thetic leg.

The tailgate can open or close unintentionally inthe following situations:R If a person's arms or legs are moving in the

sensor detection range, e.g. when polishingthe vehicle or picking up objects.R If objects are moved or placed behind the

vehicle, e.g. tensioning straps or luggage.R If clamping straps, tarpaulins or other cover‐

ings are pulled over the bumper.R If a protective mat with a length reaching

over the boot sill down into the detectionrange of the sensors is used.R If the protective mat is not secured correctly.R When working on the trailer hitch, trailers or

rear bicycle racks.

Deactivate the key functions (/ page 84) or donot carry the key about your person in such sit‐uations.

Limiting the opening angle of the tailgate

Activating the opening angle limiterYou can limit the opening angle of the tailgate inthe top half of its opening range to approx‐imately 20 cm before the end position.# Stop the opening procedure of the tailgate at

the desired position.# Press and hold the closing button on the tail‐

gate until you hear a short acoustic signal.The opening angle limiter will be activated.The tailgate will then stop in the stored posi‐tion when opened.

To open the tailgate fully, pull the handle on theoutside of the tailgate again after it has stoppedautomatically.

Deactivating the opening angle limiter# Press and hold the closing button on the tail‐

gate until two short acoustic signals sound.

Unlocking the tailgate with the emergencykey

# Fold the rear seat backrest forward.


# Remove the load compartment cover(/ page 136).

# Insert the emergency key2 into the open‐ing1 in the trim and push it in.The tailgate will be unlocked.

Side windowsOpens and closes the side windows

& WARNING Risk of becoming trappedwhen opening a side window

When you open a side window, parts of thebody could be drawn in or become trappedbetween the side window and window frame.# When opening, make sure that nobody

is touching the side window.# If someone is trapped, release the but‐

ton immediately or pull it in order toclose the side window again.

& WARNING Risk of becoming trappedwhen closing a side window

When closing a side window, body partscould be trapped in the closing area in theprocess.# When closing, make sure that no body

parts are in the closing area.

# If someone is trapped, release the but‐ton immediately or press the button inorder to reopen the side window.

& WARNING Risk of becoming trappedwhen children operate the side windows

Children could become trapped if they oper‐ate the side windows, particularly when unat‐tended.# Activate the override feature for the

rear side windows.# When leaving the vehicle, always take

the key with you and lock the vehicle.# Never leave children unattended in the

vehicle.

Requirements:R The power supply or the ignition is switched

on.


1 Closing2 Opening

The buttons on the driver's door take prece‐dence.# To start automatic operation: press the

W button beyond the point of resistanceor pull and release it.

# To interrupt automatic operation: press orpull theW button again.

When the vehicle is switched off, the side win‐dows can continue being operated.This function is available for around four minutesor until a front door is opened.

Automatic reversing function of the side win‐dowsIf an object blocks a side window during theclosing process, the side window will open againautomatically. The automatic reversing functionis only an aid and is not a substitute for yourattentiveness.# During the closing process, make sure that


& WARNING Risk of becoming trappeddespite there being reversing protectionon the side window

The reverse function does not react:R to soft, light and thin objects, e.g. fingersR during resetting

This means that the reverse function cannotprevent someone from becoming trapped inthese situations.# When closing, make sure that no body

parts are in the closing area.# If someone becomes trapped, press the

W button to open the side windowagain.

Automatic function of the side windows

In the following cases, the side windows will beclosed automatically when the vehicle isswitched off:R if it starts to rain (detection by the rain sen‐

sor on the windscreen)R in extreme temperaturesR after six hoursR if there is a malfunction in the power supply

The side windows will be closed as far as theventilation position.


Vehicles with a sliding sunroof: the side win‐dows will be closed completely if the sliding sun‐roof is open.If the side windows are obstructed during auto‐matic closing, the side window concerned willopen again slightly. The automatic function forthe sliding sunroof and the side windows willthen be deactivated.

Convenience opening (ventilating the vehiclebefore starting a journey)

& WARNING Risk of entrapment whenopening a side window

When opening a side window, parts of thebody could be drawn in or become trappedbetween the side window and window frame.# When opening, make sure that nobody

is touching the side window.# Release the button immediately if

somebody becomes trapped.

# Press and hold theÜ button on the key.The following functions are performed:R The vehicle is unlockedR The side windows are opened.R The panoramic sliding sunroof is opened.R The seat ventilation of the driver's seat is

switched on.

% If the roller sunblinds of the panoramic slid‐ing sunroof are closed, the roller sunblindsare opened first.

# To interrupt convenience opening: releasetheÜ button.

# To continue convenience opening: pressand hold theÜ button again.

Convenience closing (closing the vehiclefrom outside)

& WARNING Risk of entrapment caused byinadvertent convenience closing

When the convenience closing feature isoperating, parts of the body could becometrapped in the closing area of the side win‐dow and the sliding sunroof.# Observe the complete closing proce‐

dure when using convenience closing.# When closing, make sure that no body

parts are in the closing area.

# Press and hold theß button on the key.The following functions are performed:R The vehicle is locked.R The side windows are closed.R The panoramic sliding sunroof is closed.

# To interrupt convenience closing: releasetheß button.

# To close the roller sunblinds: press andhold theß button again.


% Convenience closing can also be operatedwith KEYLESS-GO (/ page 89).

Problems with the side windows

& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped orfatally injured if reversing protection isnot activated

If you close a side window again immediatelyafter it has been blocked, the side window

will close with increased or maximum force.The reversing feature will then not be active.Parts of the body could become trapped inthe closing area in the process.# Make sure that no parts of the body are

in the closing area.# To stop the closing process, release the

button or press the button again to re-open the side window.


A side window cannot be closed andyou cannot see the cause.

# Check to see whether any objects are in the window guide.# Adjust the side windows.

Adjusting the side windowsIf a side window is obstructed during closing and reopens again immediately:# Immediately after this, pull the corresponding button again until the side window has closed, and hold

the button for at least one more second (re-adjustment).The side window is closed without the automatic reversing function.

If the side window is obstructed again and reopens again immediately:



# Immediately after this, pull the corresponding button again until the side window has closed, and holdthe button for at least one more second (follow-up adjustment).The side window is closed without the automatic reversing function.

The side windows cannot be opened orclosed using the convenience openingfeature.

The key battery is weak or discharged.# Check the battery using the indicator lamp and replace it if necessary (/ page 84).

Sliding sunroofOpening and closing the sliding sunroof

% The term "sliding sunroof" also refers to thepanorama sliding sunroof.

& WARNING Risk of becoming trappedwhile opening and closing the slidingsunroof

During opening and closing, parts of thebody could get caught in the sweep of thesliding sunroof.

# When opening or closing, make surethat no body parts are in the sweep.

# Release the button immediately ifsomebody becomes trapped.

or# Press the button in any direction during

the automatic opening/closing process.The opening/closing process is stop‐ped.

& WARNING Risk of entrapment if the slid‐ing sunroof is operated by children

Children operating the sliding sunroof couldget caught in the moving parts, particularly ifunattended.# Never leave children unattended in the

vehicle.# When leaving the vehicle, always take

the key with you and lock the vehicle.


& WARNING Risk of entrapment whileopening and closing the roller sunblinds

When opening or closing, make sure that nobody parts become trapped between theroller sunblind and frame or sliding sunroof.# When opening or closing, make sure

that no body parts are in the sweep ofthe roller sunblind.

# Release the switch immediately ifsomebody becomes trapped.

or# Press the switch in any direction during

the automatic opening/closing process.The opening/closing process is stop‐ped.

* NOTE Malfunction caused by snow andice

Snow and ice may lead to a malfunction ofthe sliding sunroof.# Only open the sliding sunroof if it is free

of snow and ice.

* NOTE Damage caused by protrudingobjects

Objects that protrude from the sliding sun‐roof may damage the sealing strips.# Do not allow anything to protrude from

the sliding sunroof.

* NOTE Important points to rememberwhen a roof rack is fitted

When a roof rack is fitted, raising or openingthe sliding sunroof may be limited.# Check whether the sliding sunroof can

be raised or opened when a roof rack isfitted.

# If in doubt, do not raise or open thesliding sunroof.

1 Raising2 Opening3 Closing/lowering

Use the3 button to operate the panoramicsliding sunroof and the roller sunblind.The panorama sliding sunroof can be operatedonly when the roller sunblind is open.


# Check whether the sliding sunroof can beraised or opened when a roof rack is fitted.

# To start automatic operation: press the3 button beyond the point of resistanceor pull and release it.

# To interrupt automatic operation: brieflypress the3 button in any direction.The opening/closing process will be stop‐ped.

Automatic reversing function of the slidingsunroofIf an object is obstructing the sliding sunroofduring the closing process, the sliding sunroofwill open again automatically. The automaticreversing function is only an aid and is not a sub‐stitute for your attentiveness.# During the closing process, make sure that


& WARNING Risk of entrapment even withthe reversing feature active

The reverse function does not react in partic‐ular:R to soft, light and thin objects, e.g. fingersR over the last 4 mm of the closing pathR during resetting

This means that the reverse function cannotprevent someone from becoming trapped inthese situations.# When closing, make sure that no body

parts are in the closing area.# Release the button immediately if

somebody becomes trapped.or# Briefly press the button in any direction

during automatic operation.The closing process is stopped.

Automatic reversing function of the rollersunblindIf an object is obstructing the roller sunblind dur‐ing the closing process, the roller sunblind willopen again automatically. The automatic revers‐ing function is only an aid and is not a substitutefor your attentiveness.# When closing the roller sunblind, make sure

that no body parts are in the range of move‐ment.

& WARNING Risk of becoming trappeddespite reversing function

In particular, the reversing function does notreact to soft, light and thin objects, e.g. fin‐gers.This means that the reversing function can‐not prevent entrapment in these situations.# When closing the roller sunblind, make

sure that no body parts are in the rangeof movement.

# Release the button immediately ifsomebody becomes trapped.


or# Press the button in any direction during

the automatic closing process.The closing process is stopped.

Automatic functions of the sliding sunroof


By pushing or pulling the3 button, you caninterrupt the automatic functions: "Rain closingfunction when driving" and "Automatic lower‐ing".The sliding sunroof will be closed automaticallywhen the vehicle has been switched off in thefollowing situations:R if it starts to rain (detection by the rain sen‐

sor on the windscreen)R in the event of extreme outside temperatures

R after six hoursR if there is a malfunction in the power supply

The sliding sunroof then rises at the rear in orderto continue ventilating the vehicle interior.If the sliding sunroof is obstructed during anautomatic closing procedure, the roof is openedslightly again. The automatic function for thesliding sunroof and the side windows will then bedeactivated.

Rain closing function when drivingVehicles with a panorama sliding sunroof: ifit starts to rain, the raised sliding sunroof willautomatically be lowered while the vehicle is inmotion.

Automatic lowering functionVehicles with a panorama sliding sunroof: ifthe sliding sunroof is raised at the rear, it willautomatically be lowered slightly at higher

speeds. At low speeds, it will be raised againautomatically.

& WARNING Risk of entrapment by auto‐matic lowering of the sliding sunroof

At high speeds the raised sliding sunroofautomatically lowers slightly at the rear.This could trap you or other persons.# Make sure that nobody reaches into the

sweep of the sliding sunroof whilst thevehicle is in motion.

# If somebody becomes trapped, brieflypush the sliding sunroof button for‐wards or backwards.The sliding sunroof lifts during opening.

Problems with the sliding sunroof




The sliding sunroof cannot be closedand you cannot see the cause.

& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped or fatal injury by closing the sliding sunroof again

If you close the sliding sunroof again immediately after it has been blocked or reset, the sliding sunroofcloses with increased force.Parts of the body could become trapped in the closing area in the process.# Make sure that no parts of the body are in the closing area.# Release the button immediately if somebody becomes trapped.or# Press the button in any direction during the automatic closing process.

The closing process is stopped.

If the sliding sunroof is obstructed during closing and reopens again slightly:# Immediately after automatic reversing, pull and hold the3 button down again to the point of resist‐

ance until the sliding sunroof is closed.The sliding sunroof will be closed with increased force.

If the sliding sunroof is obstructed again and reopens again slightly:# Repeat the previous step.

The sliding sunroof will be closed again with increased force.

# Pull and hold the3 button little by little until the sliding sunroof is fully closed.



Vehicles with a panoramic slidingsunroof: the sliding sunroof or theroller sunblind does not operatesmoothly.

# Pull and hold the3 button little by little until the roller sunblind is fully closed.# Use automatic operation to fully open and then close the sliding sunroof.

Anti-theft protectionFunction of the immobiliser

The immobiliser prevents your vehicle frombeing started without the correct key.The immobiliser is automatically activated whenthe ignition is switched off and deactivated whenthe ignition is switched on.

ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system)

Function of the ATA systemIf the ATA system is primed, a visual and audiblealarm is triggered in the following situations:R when a door is openedR when the tailgate is opened

R when the bonnet is openedR when interior protection is triggered

(/ page 109)R when tow-away protection is triggered

(/ page 108)

The ATA system is primed automatically afterapproximately ten seconds in the following situa‐tions:R after locking the vehicle with the keyR after locking the vehicle using KEYLESS-GO


Indicator lamp1 flashes when the ATA systemis primed.The ATA system is deactivated automatically inthe following situations:R after unlocking the vehicle with the keyR after unlocking the vehicle using KEYLESS-

GOR after pressing the start/stop button with the

key in the stowage compartment(/ page 188)

% When the Mercedes‑Benz emergency callsystem is active and the alarm stays on formore than 30 seconds, a message is auto‐matically sent to the Customer AssistanceCentre (/ page 454).

Deactivating the ATA# Press theÜ,ß orp button on the

key.or# Press the start/stop button with the key in

the stowage compartment (/ page 188)

Deactivating the alarm using KEYLESS-GO# Grasp the outside door handle with the key

outside the vehicle.

Function of tow-away protection

An audible and visual alarm is triggered if analteration to your vehicle's angle of inclination isdetected while tow-away protection is primed.Tow-away protection is automatically primedafter approximately 60 seconds:R after locking the vehicle with the keyR after locking the vehicle using KEYLESS-GO

Tow-away protection is only primed when the fol‐lowing components are closed:R the doorsR the tailgate

Tow-away protection is automatically deactiva‐ted:R after pressing theÜ orp button on

the key

R after pressing the start/stop button with thekey in the stowage compartment(/ page 188)R after unlocking the vehicle using KEYLESS-

GOR when using HANDS-FREE ACCESS

Information on detecting damage on a parkedvehicle (/ page 223).

Priming/deactivating tow-away protection

Multimedia system:4© 5 Settings 5 Quick access# Prime or deactivate Tow-away protection.Tow-away protection is primed again in the fol‐lowing cases:R The vehicle is unlocked again.R A door is opened.R The vehicle is locked again.

% If quick access is unavailable, select theVehicle submenu in the Settings main menuto prime or deactivate tow-away protection.


Function of interior protection

When interior protection is primed, a visual andaudible alarm is triggered if movement is detec‐ted in the vehicle interior.Interior protection is primed automatically afterapproximately ten seconds:R after locking the vehicle with the keyR after locking the vehicle using KEYLESS-GO

Interior protection is only primed when the fol‐lowing components are closed:R the doorsR the tailgate

Interior protection is automatically deactivated:R after pressing theÜ orp button on

the keyR after pressing the start/stop button with the

key in the stowage compartment(/ page 188)R after unlocking the vehicle using KEYLESS-

GOR when using HANDS-FREE ACCESS

The following situations can lead to a falsealarm:R moving objects such as mascots in the vehi‐

cle interiorR when the side window is openR when the panoramic sliding sunroof is open

Priming/deactivating interior protection

Multimedia system:4© 5 Settings 5 Quick access# Prime or deactivate Interior motion sensor.Interior protection is primed again in the follow‐ing cases:R The vehicle is unlocked again.R A door is opened.R The vehicle is locked again.

% If quick access is unavailable, select theVehicle menu under Settings to prime ordeactivate interior protection.


Notes on the correct driver's seat position

& WARNING Risk of injury through adjust‐ing vehicle settings while the vehicle is inmotion

You could lose control of the vehicle in thefollowing situations:R if you adjust the driver's seat, the head

restraints, the steering wheel or the mir‐ror while the vehicle is in motionR if you fasten your seat belt while the vehi‐

cle is in motion

# Before starting the engine: adjust thedriver's seat, the head restraints, thesteering wheel or the mirror and fastenyour seat belt.

Ensure the following when adjusting the steeringwheel1, seat belt2 and driver's seat3:R you are sitting as far away from the driver's

airbag as possible, taking the followingpoints into consideration.R you are sitting in an upright positionR your thighs are slightly supported by the seat

cushion

R your legs are not fully extended and you candepress the pedals properlyR the back of your head is supported at eye

level by the centre of the head restraintR you can hold the steering wheel with your

arms slightly bentR you can move your legs freelyR you can see all the displays on the instru‐

ment cluster clearlyR you have a good overview of the traffic con‐

ditionsR your seat belt sits snugly against your body

and passes across the centre of your shoul‐der and across your hips in the pelvic area

110 Seats and stowing

Notes on the height limit on the third rowof seats

& WARNING Risk of injury if height limit onthe third row is not observed

If a person exceeds the permissible heightfor the seats on the third row, they could suf‐fer an injury due to contact with the roof orparts of the vehicle interior in the event of anaccident, sudden braking or an abruptchange in direction, for example.For that reason, a person of the relevantheight must not use the seats on the thirdrow.

# Use a suitable vehicle seat.

The seats on the third row are approved only forpeople with a maximum height of 1.69 m.Observe the information regarding height on theinformation label.

SeatsAdjusting the front seat mechanically (with‐out Seat Comfort Package)

& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped ifthe seats are adjusted by children

Children could become trapped if they adjustthe seats, particularly when unattended.# When leaving the vehicle, always take

the key with you and lock the vehicle.This also applies to the digital vehiclekey if the "Digital Vehicle Key" functionis activated via Mercedes me connect.


& WARNING Risk of becoming trappedwhen adjusting the seats

When you adjust a seat, you or other vehicleoccupants could become trapped, e.g. on theseat guide rail.# When adjusting a seat, make sure that

no one has any body parts in the sweepof the seat.

Observe the safety notes on "Airbags" and "Chil‐dren in the vehicle".

& WARNING Risk of accident due to thedriver's seat not being engaged

If the driver's seat is not engaged, it couldmove unexpectedly while the vehicle is inmotion.This could cause you to lose control of thevehicle.# Always make sure that the driver's seat

is engaged before starting the vehicle.

Seats and stowing 111




cle is in motion


& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped ifthe seat height is adjusted carelessly

If you adjust the seat height carelessly, youor other vehicle occupants could be trappedand thereby injured.

Children in particular could accidentallypress the electrical seat adjustment buttonsand become trapped.# While moving the seats, make sure that

hands or other body parts do not getunder the lever assembly of the seatadjustment system.

& WARNING Risk of injury due to headrestraints which are not fitted or areadjusted incorrectly

If head restraints are not fitted or are adjus‐ted incorrectly, they cannot provide protec‐tion as intended.There is an increased risk of injury in thehead and neck area, e.g. in the event of anaccident or when braking.# Always drive with the head restraints

fitted.# Before driving off, make sure for every

vehicle occupant that the centre of thehead restraint supports the back of thehead at about eye level.

Do not interchange the head restraints of thefront and rear seats. Otherwise, you will not beable to adjust the height and angle of the headrestraints correctly.Adjust the head restraint fore-and-aft position sothat it is as close as possible to the back of yourhead.


The seat belt does not offer the intendedlevel of protection if you have not moved theseat backrest to an almost vertical position.When braking or in the event of an accident,you could slide underneath the seat belt andsustain abdominal or neck injuries, for exam‐ple.# Adjust the seat properly before begin‐

ning your journey.# Always ensure that the seat backrest is

in an almost vertical position and thatthe shoulder section of your seat belt isrouted across the centre of your shoul‐der.


# To adjust the seat fore-and-aft position:lift lever1 and slide the seat into thedesired position.

# Make sure that the seat is engaged.# To adjust the seat height: push or pull lever2 until the desired position has beenreached.

# To adjust the seat backrest inclination:turn handwheel3 forwards and backwardsuntil the desired position has been reached.

Adjusting the front seat mechanically (withSeat Comfort Package)

# To adjust the seat cushion length: lift lever1 and slide the front section of the seatcushion forwards or backwards.

# To adjust the seat fore-and-aft position:lift lever2 and slide the seat into thedesired position.

# Make sure that the seat is engaged in posi‐tion.

# To adjust the seat cushion inclination:turn the handwheel3 forwards and back‐wards until the desired position has beenreached.

# To adjust the seat height: push or pull lever4 until the desired position has beenreached.

# To adjust the seat backrest inclination:turn handwheel5 forwards and backwardsuntil the desired position has been reached.


Adjusting the front seat electrically

1 Seat backrest inclination2 Seat height3 Seat cushion inclination4 Seat fore-and-aft position

# Save the settings with the memory function(/ page 124).

Adjusting the 4-way lumbar support

1 Raise2 Soften3 Lower4 Harden

# Using buttons1 to4, adjust the contourof the backrest individually to suit your back.

Adjusting rear seats mechanically


When you adjust a seat, you may trap your‐self or a vehicle occupant.# When adjusting a seat, make sure that


& WARNING Risk of accident if seat andseat backrest are not engaged

If the seat and seat backrest are not engagedthey could fold forwards, e.g. when brakingor in the event of an accident.This poses the following risks in particular:R A seat or seat backrest that is not

engaged can push the vehicle occupantagainst the seat belt. The seat belt wouldthen not be able to provide the intendedprotection and could cause additionalinjury.


R A child restraint system would no longerbe supported correctly or positioned cor‐rectly and would no longer perform itsintended function.R The seat backrest cannot restrain objects

or goods in the luggage compartment.

Always ensure that the seat and seat back‐rest are engaged, especially:R before passengers travel on a seat with

the easy entry and exit feature.R after adjusting the seat.R after the easy entry and exit feature is

used.R after the load compartment enlargement

has been folded down.

& WARNING Risk of injury when adjustingthe rear seats while driving

If you adjust the rear seats carelessly whiledriving, you or other vehicle occupants couldbe trapped and potentially injured.

# Adjust the rear seats before starting theengine.

* NOTE Damage caused by objects in thefootwell or behind the rear seats

When adjusting the fore-and-aft position, therear seats and/or the object can be dam‐aged.# Stow objects in a suitable place.

This function is available only for vehicles with amovable rear bench seat.The components of the passenger bench seatcan be moved. You can move the right-hand andleft-hand part together with the centre part inde‐pendently of each other. This allows you to makethe footwell larger in either the second or thirdrow of seats.

# Lift release handle1 and slide the corre‐sponding part of the bench seat into thedesired position.

# Let go of release handle1.# Make sure that the seat is engaged.


Adjusting rear seat backrests mechanically

& WARNING Risk of injury due to seatbackrest folded forwards

If the rear seat backrest is folded forwards,persons in the third row of seats could col‐lide with parts of the seat adjustment mech‐anism, in particular in the event of an acci‐dent, sudden braking or an abrupt change ofdirection.# If there is a person in the third row of

seats, the rear seat in front of that per‐son must be folded back into the driv‐ing position before starting the journey.

# People in the third row of seats mustnot place their legs on a rear seat back‐rest that has been folded forwards.

Always ensure that all vehicle occupants havetheir seat belts fastened correctly and are sittingproperly. Particular attention must be paid tochildren.

If you no longer require the seat backrest to befolded down for loading or for getting in and out,fold it back into place.

& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped ifthe seat is not engaged

The seat does not engage when folded for‐wards. The seat can fold backwards unex‐pectedly, e.g. when accelerating, braking orin the event of an abrupt change of directionor an accident.People in the seat's sweep can become trap‐ped.# If a seat is folded forwards, always fold

it back before driving off.# Make sure that the seat is engaged.

Requirements:R The area into which the seat is folded is

clear.

You can fold the seat backrests on the secondrow of seats forwards for the following situa‐tions:R For easier access to the load compartmentR Vehicles with a third row of seats: for getting

in or out

You can move the seat backrest to differentangles.

# Setting the seat backrest: hold the seatbackrest in place with your hand or back.

# Gently pull one of the release loops1 andfold the seat backrest forwards or back‐wards.


# Ensure that the seat backrest is engaged.

Fold the seat backrest forwards to enter thevehicle (vehicles with a third row of seats)

& WARNING Risk of injury when foldingthe seat backrest on the second row ofseats forwards

If the handle for the seat backrest on thesecond row of seats is pulled from the thirdrow of seats, the seat backrest on the sec‐ond row of seats will fold forwards and willnot engage. People in the sweep of this seatbackrest can become trapped.# When getting out of the third row of

seats, do not hold the seat backrest onthe second row of seats.

Vehicles with EASY-ENTRY feature: If a seaton the second row of seats is located in theEASY-ENTRY area, this will be shown on the mul‐tifunction display on the instrument cluster.# If necessary, fold the seats on the third row

into position (/ page 133).

# To fold the seat backrest in the front posi‐tion : pull handle1.The seat backrest will fold forwards.

* NOTE Damage to the seat backrest han‐dle caused by pulling

The handle can be damaged if it is used topull the seat forwards.

# Move the seat forwards by the seatbackrest.

# Move the seat forwards by the seat backrest.Hold the seat firmly in place while doing so.

# To fold the seat backrest back into thedrive position: swivel the seat backrestback until it engages.The seat backrest will remain in the cargoposition.

# Slide the seat backwards.The seat stops in the front position.

# Move the seat into the desired position(/ page 114).

# If necessary, fold in the seats on the thirdrow (/ page 131).

% To increase the size of the luggage compart‐ment, you can move the rear seat backrestsinto the luggage compartment floor position(/ page 129).


Head restraints

Adjusting the front seat head restraintsmechanically




cle is in motion


& WARNING Risk of injury due to headrestraints which are not fitted or areadjusted incorrectly

If head restraints are not fitted or are adjus‐ted incorrectly, they cannot provide protec‐tion as intended.There is an increased risk of injury in thehead and neck area, e.g. in the event of anaccident or when braking.# Always drive with the head restraints

fitted.# Before driving off, make sure for every

vehicle occupant that the centre of thehead restraint supports the back of thehead at about eye level.

Do not interchange the head restraints of thefront and rear seats. Otherwise, you will not beable to adjust the height and angle of the headrestraints correctly.Adjust the head restraint fore-and-aft position sothat it is as close as possible to the back of yourhead.

# To raise: pull the head restraint up.# To lower: press release knob1 in the direc‐

tion of the arrow and push the head restraintdown.

# To move the driver's head restraint for‐wards: press release knob2 and pull thehead restraint forwards.


# To move the driver's head restraint back‐wards: press release knob2 and push thehead restraint backwards.

Adjusting the head restraints of the rearseats mechanically

# To raise: pull the head restraint up.

# To lower: press the release knob1 in thedirection of the arrow and push the headrestraint down.

# If the centre seat on the second row ofseats is not occupied: press the headrestraint down all the way.

Vehicles with a third row of seatsThe head restraints on the third row of seatshave a usage and non-usage position. The usageposition is the extended, top position in whichthe head restraint engages; the non-usage posi‐tion is the bottom, retracted position of the headrestraint. If the seats on the third row of seatsare being used, the head restraint must be in thetop, engaged usage position.# If the third row of seats is occupied: move

the head restraints to the very top and havethem engage there.

# If the third row of seats is not occupied:move the head restraints to the very bottom.

Fitting/removing the rear seat headrestraints

Removing

# Release the rear seat backrest and fold it for‐wards slightly (/ page 129).

# Pull the head restraint upwards as far as itwill go.


# Push the release knob1 in the direction ofthe arrow and pull out the head restraint.

Fitting# Insert the head restraint such that the

notches on the bar are on the left whenviewed in the direction of travel.

# Push the head restraint down until itengages.

# Fold the rear seat backrest back until itengages.

Configuring the seat settings

Multimedia system:4© 5 Comfort 5 Seat comfort

Adjusting the backrest contour in the lumbarregion of the seat backrest (lumbar)# Select Lumbar.# Select the settingsZ for the desired seat.# Adjust the air cushions.

Adjusting the backrest side bolsters# Select Side bolsters.# Adjust the air cushion for the desired seat.

Selecting the massage programme for thefront seats

Multimedia system:4© 5 Comfort 5 Massage# Select Wave Massage or Pulsating Massage.# Start the program for the desired seat;.# To set the massage intensity: switch High

intensity on or off .

Resetting seat settings

Multimedia system:4© 5 Comfort 5 Seat comfort# Select Reset.# Selectß for the desired seat.

The settings for the selected seat are reset.

Switching the seat heating on/off

& WARNING Risk of burns due to repeat‐edly switching on the seat heater

Repeatedly switching on the seat heater cancause the seat cushion and seat backrestpadding to become very hot.The health of persons with limited tempera‐ture sensitivity or a limited ability to react tohigh temperatures may be affected or theymay even suffer burn-like injuries.# Do not repeatedly switch on the seat

heater.

To protect against overheating, the seat heatingmay be temporarily deactivated after it isswitched on repeatedly.

* NOTE Damage to the seats caused byobjects or documents when the seatheater is switched on

When the seat heater is switched on, over‐heating may occur due to objects or docu‐


ments placed on the seats e.g. seat cushionsor child seats. This could cause damage tothe seat surface.# Make sure that no objects or docu‐

ments are on the seats when the seatheater is switched on.

Requirements:R The power supply is switched on.

# To switch on / increase the level: pressbutton1 repeatedly until the desired heat‐ing level is set.Depending on the heating level, up to threeindicator lamps will light up.

# To switch off / reduce the level: press but‐ton1 repeatedly until the desired heatinglevel is set.If all indicator lamps are off, the seat heatingis switched off.

% The seat heating will automatically switchdown from the three heating levels after 8,10 and 20 minutes until the seat heatingswitches off.

Switching the seat ventilation on/off

Requirements:R The power supply is switched on.

# To switch on / increase the level: pressbutton1 repeatedly until the desired venti‐lation level is set.Depending on the ventilation level, up tothree indicator lamps will light up.


# To switch off / reduce the level: press but‐ton1 repeatedly until the desired ventila‐tion level is set.If all indicator lamps are off, the seat ventila‐tion is switched off.

Steering wheelAdjusting the steering wheel mechanically




cle is in motion

# Before starting the engine: adjust thedriver's seat, the head restraints, the

steering wheel or the mirror and fastenyour seat belt.

& WARNING Risk of entrapment for chil‐dren when adjusting the steering wheel

Children could injure themselves if theyadjust the steering wheel.# Never leave children unattended in the


the key with you and lock the vehicle.This also applies to the digital vehiclekey if the "Digital Vehicle Key" functionis activated via Mercedes me connect.

# Push release lever1 down as far as it willgo.The steering column is unlocked.

# Adjust height2 and distance3 to thesteering wheel.

# Push release lever1 up as far as it will go.The steering column is locked.

# Check and make sure that the steering col‐umn is locked by moving the steering wheel.


Switching the steering wheel heater on/off

Requirements:R The ignition is switched on.

# Push the switch into position1 or2.If the indicator lamp3 lights up, the steer‐ing wheel heater is switched on.

When you switch the ignition off, the steeringwheel heater will switch off.

Easy entry and exit featureUsing the easy entry and exit feature

& WARNING Risk of accident when pullingaway during the adjustment process ofthe easy exit feature

‑ If you pull away while the easy entry andexit feature is making adjustments, you couldlose control of the vehicle.# Always wait until the adjustment proc‐

ess is complete before pulling away.

& WARNING Risk of becoming trappedwhile adjusting the easy entry and exitfeature

When the easy entry and exit feature adjuststhe driver's seat, you and other vehicle occu‐pants – particularly children – could becometrapped.

# During the adjustment process of theeasy entry and exit feature, make surethat no one has any body parts in thesweep of the driver's seat.

If there is a risk of becoming trapped by thedriver's seat:# Press the seat adjustment switch.

The adjustment process is stopped.# Never leave children unattended in the


the key with you and lock the vehicle.This also applies to the Digital VehicleKey if the "Digital Vehicle Key" functionis activated via Mercedes me connect.

You can stop the adjustment process by press‐ing one of the memory function positionswitches.


& WARNING Risk of becoming trappedduring activation of the easy entry andexit feature by children

If children activate the easy entry and exitfeature, they can become trapped, particu‐larly when unattended.# Never leave children unattended in the



This also applies to the Digital Vehicle Key if the"Digital Vehicle Key" function is activated viaMercedes me connect.When the easy entry and exit feature is active,the driver's seat will move backwards and thebackrest will be moved to a steeper positionwhen:R you switch the ignition off with the driver's

door openR you open the driver's door with the ignition

switched off

% The driver's seat will move backwards only ifit is not already in the rearmost position.The seat backrest will move forwards only ifit is not already in the frontmost position.

The driver's seat will move back to the last driveposition when:R you switch the ignition on with the driver's

door closedR you close the driver's door with the ignition

switched on

The last drive position will be stored when:R you switch the ignition offR you call up the seat settings via the memory

functionR you save the seat setting using the memory

function

Setting the easy entry and exit feature

Multimedia system:4© 5 Settings 5 Vehicle5 AUTO. SEAT ADJUSTMENT5 Easy Entry/Exit# Activate or deactivate the function.

Operating the memory function

& WARNING Risk of an accident if thememory function is used while driving

If you use the memory function on the driv‐er's side while driving, you could lose controlof the vehicle as a result of the adjustmentsbeing made.# Only use the memory function on the

driver's side when the vehicle is station‐ary.


& WARNING Risk of entrapment when set‐ting the seat with the memory function

When the memory function adjusts the seat,you and other vehicle occupants – particu‐larly children – could become trapped.# During the adjustment process of the

memory function, make sure that noone has any body parts in the sweep ofthe seat.

# If someone becomes trapped, press apreset position button or seat adjust‐ment switch immediately.

& WARNING Risk of entrapment if thememory function is activated by children

Children could become trapped if they acti‐vate the memory function, particularly whenunattended.# Never leave children unattended in the



This also applies to the Digital Vehicle Key if the"Digital Vehicle Key" function is activated viaMercedes me connect.The memory function can be used when the igni‐tion is switched off.

StoringSeat adjustments for up to three people can bestored and called up using the memory function.The following systems can be selected:R SeatR Seat contourR Outside mirrorsR Head-up display

# Set the seat, the seat contour, the head-updisplay and the outside mirrors to thedesired position.

# Press memory button M and then press pre‐set position button 1, 2 or 3 within three sec‐onds.


# To call up: press and briefly hold memoryposition switch 1, 2 or 3.After releasing the button, the front seat,head-up display, outside mirrors and seatcontour are moved into the stored positionautomatically.

Stowage areasNotes on loading the vehicle


Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaustgases such as carbon monoxide. Exhaustgases can enter the vehicle interior if the tail‐gate is open when the engine is running,especially if the vehicle is in motion.# Always switch off the engine before

opening the tailgate.# Never drive with the tailgate open.

& WARNING Risk of injury from unsecureditems in the vehicle

If objects, luggage or loads are not securedor not secured sufficiently, they could slip,tip over or be thrown around and thereby hitvehicle occupants.There is a risk of injury, particularly in theevent of sudden braking or a sudden changein direction.# Always stow objects in such a way that

they cannot be thrown around.# Before the journey, secure objects, lug‐

gage or loads against slipping or tippingover.

& WARNING Risk of injury from inade‐quate stowage of objects

If you do not adequately stow objects in thevehicle interior, they could slip or be tossedaround and thereby strike vehicle occupants.In addition, cup holders, open stowagespaces and mobile phone brackets cannot

always restrain the objects they contain inthe event of an accident.There is a risk of injury, particularly in theevent of sudden braking or a sudden changein direction.# Always stow objects in such a way that

they cannot be tossed around in theseor similar situations.

# Always make sure that objects do notproject from stowage spaces, luggagenets or stowage nets.

# Close all sealable stowage spacesbefore you start your journey.

# Stow and secure objects that are heavy,hard, pointed, sharp-edged, fragile ortoo large in the load compartment.

& WARNING Risk of burns from the tail‐pipe and tailpipe trims

The exhaust tailpipe and tailpipe trims canbecome very hot. If you come into contactwith these parts of the vehicle, you couldburn yourself.


# Always be particularly careful aroundthe tailpipe and the tailpipe trims andsupervise children especially closely inthis area.

# Allow vehicle parts to cool down beforetouching them.

The driving characteristics of your vehicle aredependent on the distribution of the load withinthe vehicle. You should bear the following inmind when loading the vehicle:R never exceed the permissible gross mass or

the permissible axle loads for the vehicle(including occupants).Information can be found on the vehicle iden‐tification plate (/ page 550).R the load must not protrude above the upper

edge of the seat backrests.R always use the partition net when transport‐

ing objects in the load compartment.R always place the load behind unoccupied

seats if possible.

R secure the load using the tie-down eyes anddistribute the load evenly.

Stowage spaces in the vehicle interior

Overview of the front stowage compart‐ments

1 Stowage space in the doors2 Stowage compartment in the armrest with a

multimedia and USB connectionDepending on the vehicle's equipment, theremay be a 12 V socket in the stowage com‐partment

3 Stowage compartment in the front centreconsole with a USB connection and chargingmodule for wireless charging of a mobilephone (not available in all countries)

4 Glove compartment

Locking/unlocking the glove compartment


# Turn the emergency key a quarter turn clock‐wise2 (to lock) or anti-clockwise1 (tounlock).

Expanding the load compartment by foldingthe front-passenger seat backrest forwards


When you adjust a seat, you or other vehicleoccupants could become trapped, e.g. on theseat guide rail.# When adjusting a seat, make sure that


Observe the safety notes on "Airbags" and "Chil‐dren in the vehicle".


If the front-passenger seat backrest is foldedforwards, persons in the rear compartment

could collide with parts of the seat adjust‐ment mechanism, particularly in the event ofan accident, sudden braking or an abruptchange of direction.# If there is a passenger in the vehicle

and the front-passenger seat backrestis folded forwards, the passenger mustsit on the rear seat behind the driver.

The backrest of the front-passenger seat can befolded forwards to increase the luggage com‐partment capacity.Requirements:R The rear seat behind the front-passenger

seat backrest that is folded forwards and therear centre seat are unoccupied.

# Folding forwards: pull the release handle1 and fold the seat backrest fully forwardsonto the sitting surface until it engages.

# Folding back: pull the release handle1and pivot the seat backrest backwards untilit engages.


Through-loading feature in the rear benchseat

Folding the rear seat backrest forwards





The seat does not engage when folded for‐wards. The seat can fold backwards unex‐pectedly, e.g. when accelerating, braking orin the event of an abrupt change of directionor an accident.People in the seat's sweep can become trap‐ped.

# If a seat is folded forwards, always foldit back before driving off.

# Make sure that the seat is engaged.

Always ensure that all vehicle occupants havetheir seat belts fastened correctly and are sittingproperly. Particular attention must be paid tochildren.If you no longer require the folded-down seatbackrest as a loading area, fold the backrestback into place.Requirements:R The area into which the seat is folded is

clear.R The area under the rear bench seat is clear.R The armrest on the second row of seats is

folded back and the cup holders are empty.

# Trap the seat belt strap on the seat belt2in the seat belt strap holder1.

When the left-hand seat backrest is folded for‐wards, the centre seat backrest will also be fol‐ded forwards.


# Move the driver's or front passenger seat for‐wards, if necessary.

# If necessary, release the head restraints forthe seat backrest and push them down(/ page 119).

# Left and right seat backrest: pull one ofrelease loops1.The seat backrest will automatically fold for‐wards.

# Centre seat backrest: pull release loops2.The seat backrest will automatically fold for‐wards.

% When the seat backrests on the second andthird rows of seats are folded forwards, youcan push the rear bench seat on the secondrow of seats back. This will then provide acontinuous load compartment surface.

Ensure that the area between the rows ofseats is clear.

Folding back the rear seat backrest






would be forced into the seat belt by the


rear bench seat/rear seat or by the seatbackrest. The seat belt cannot protect asintended and could result in additionalinjury.R Objects or loads in the boot/load com‐



* NOTE Damage caused by trapping theseat belt when folding back the seatbackrest

The seat belt could become trapped and thusbe damaged when the seat backrest is foldedback.# Make sure that the seat belt is not trap‐

ped when folding back the seat back‐rest.

Fold the left seat backrest forwards first if youwould like to fold both the left seat backrest andthe centre seat backrest forwards.

# Move the driver's or front passenger seat for‐wards, if necessary.

# Swivel seat backrest1 back until itengages.The seat backrest will remain in the cargoposition.

# After the seat backrest has been foldedback, check the position of the head restraintand set it to the correct position(/ page 119).

Folding the seat backrest on the third row ofseats forwards




& WARNING Risk of accident if seat andseat backrest are not engaged

If the seat and seat backrest are not engagedthey could fold forwards, e.g. when brakingor in the event of an accident.This poses the following risks in particular:R A seat or seat backrest that is not

engaged can push the vehicle occupantagainst the seat belt. The seat belt wouldthen not be able to provide the intended


protection and could cause additionalinjury.R A child restraint system would no longer

be supported correctly or positioned cor‐rectly and would no longer perform itsintended function.R The seat backrest cannot restrain objects

or goods in the luggage compartment.

Always ensure that the seat and seat back‐rest are engaged, especially:R before passengers travel on a seat with

the easy entry and exit feature.R after adjusting the seat.R after the easy entry and exit feature is

used.R after the load compartment enlargement

has been folded down.


If the rear seat backrest is folded forwards,persons in the third row of seats could col‐lide with parts of the seat adjustment mech‐anism, in particular in the event of an acci‐dent, sudden braking or an abrupt change ofdirection.# If there is a person in the third row of

seats, the rear seat in front of that per‐son must be folded back into the driv‐ing position before starting the journey.

# People in the third row of seats mustnot place their legs on a rear seat back‐rest that has been folded forwards.

Always ensure that all vehicle occupants havetheir seat belts fastened correctly and are sittingproperly. Particular attention must be paid tochildren.If you no longer require the folded-down seatbackrest as a loading area, fold the backrestback into place.

You can fold the front seat backrests and theseat backrests on the second row of seats for‐wards to get in or out.


The seat does not engage when folded for‐wards. The seat can fold backwards unex‐pectedly, e.g. when accelerating, braking orin the event of an abrupt change of directionor an accident.People in the seat's sweep can become trap‐ped.# If a seat is folded forwards, always fold

it back before driving off.# Make sure that the seat is engaged.

Requirements:R The area into which the seat is folded is

clear.R The area under the third row of seats is clear.


R The cup holders are empty when the seatbackrests on the third row of seats are fol‐ded forwards.R The load compartment cover is removed

when the seat backrests on the second rowof seats are folded forwards.

# Trap the seat belt strap on the seat belt2in the seat belt strap holder1.

* NOTE Damage to the release loops as aresult of attaching objects

The rear seat backrest release loops can bedamaged when objects are attached.

# Attach objects only to the tie-downeyes.

The release loops are located in the load com‐partment to the side of the bottom part of theseat backrests.

Release loops on the rear sides

# Move the second row of seats forwards andmove the seat backrests into the cargo posi‐tion (/ page 134).

# Release the head restraints on the third rowof seats and push them down (/ page 119).

# Pull one of the red release loops1.The seat backrest will automatically fold for‐wards.

# Push the seat backrest down until it engages.% When the seat backrests on the second and

third rows of seats are folded forwards, youcan push the rear bench seat on the secondrow of seats back. This will then provide acontinuous load compartment surface.Ensure that the area between the rows ofseats is clear.

Folding back the seat backrest on the thirdrow of seats







would be forced into the seat belt by therear bench seat/rear seat or by the seatbackrest. The seat belt cannot protect asintended and could result in additionalinjury.R Objects or loads in the boot/load com‐



* NOTE Damage caused by trapping theseat belt when folding back the seatbackrest

The seat belt could become trapped and thusbe damaged when the seat backrest is foldedback.# Make sure that the seat belt is not trap‐

ped when folding back the seat back‐rest.

Requirements:R The seats and the seat backrests on the sec‐

ond row of seats have been moved forwardssufficiently.

* NOTE Damage to the release loops as aresult of attaching objects

The rear seat backrest release loops can bedamaged when objects are attached.# Attach objects only to the tie-down

eyes.

Loops on the rear sides

# Briefly pull one of the red release loops2.# Pull one of the black release loops1 to fold

back the left- or right-hand seat backrest.

Adjusting the angle of the rear seat backr‐ests (cargo position)To enlarge the load compartment, you can movethe seat backrests on the second row of seatsinto a steeper angle (cargo position).


# Setting the seat backrest: hold the seatbackrest1 in place with your hand or back.

# Gently pull one of the release loops2 andfold the seat backrest forwards.

Load compartment cover

Notes on the load compartment cover

& WARNING Risk of injury or death due toobjects being poorly secured

On its own, the load compartment cover can‐not secure or restrain heavy objects, items ofluggage and heavy loads.You could be hit by an unsecured load duringsudden changes in direction, braking or inthe event of an accident.# Always stow objects in such a way that

they cannot be thrown around.# Secure objects, luggage or loads

against slipping or tipping over, e.g. byusing lashing material, even if you areusing the load compartment cover.

* NOTE Damage to the load compartmentcover when loading the vehicle

The load compartment cover may be dam‐aged when loading the vehicle.

# Do not place any objects above thelower edge of the side windows or onthe load compartment cover.

Vehicles with a third row of seats: when the thirdrow of seats is in use, the load compartmentcover on the seat backrests on the second rowof seats is removed.


Extending/retracting the load compartmentcover

# To extend: pull the load compartment coverback by grab handle1 and clip it into theholders on the left and right2.

Retracting# Unhook the load compartment cover from

holders on the left and right2 and guide it

forwards by grab handle1 until it is fullyretracted.

Fitting or removing the load compartmentcoverRequirements:R The load compartment cover is rolled up.

Removing the load compartment cover

# Press in the end cap of the load compart‐ment cover1 on the right- and left-handside in the direction of the arrow using thehandle on the lower edge3.

# Push the load compartment cover1 intothe anchorage2 on the opposite side.

# Take the load compartment cover1 out bypulling it upwards.


Fitting the load compartment cover

# Place the load compartment cover1 in theanchorage2 on the right- or left-hand side.

# Press in the end cap of the load compart‐ment cover1 on the opposite side andinsert the load compartment cover1 intothe other anchorage2.

Attaching/removing the partitioning net

& WARNING Risk of injury or death due toobjects being poorly secured

On its own, the partition net cannot secureor restrain heavy objects, items of luggageand heavy loads.You could be hit by an unsecured load duringsudden changes in direction, braking or inthe event of an accident.# Always stow objects in such a way that

they cannot be thrown around.# Secure objects, luggage or loads

against slipping or tipping over, e.g. byusing lashing material, even when youare using the partition net.

For safety reasons, always use a partitioning netwhen transporting a load.Damaged partitioning nets can no longer fulfiltheir functions and must be replaced. Visit aqualified specialist workshop.

Partitioning net without load compartment enlarge‐ment


Partitioning net with load compartment enlarge‐ment

# To attach: Attach the partition net to thebrackets1 on the left and right of the rooflining.

# Without load compartment enlargement:attach the hooks2 to the tie-down eyes3

on the left and right in such a way that thehooks2 point backwards.

# With load compartment enlargement: attachthe hooks2 to the tie-down eyes3 on theleft and right in such a way that the hooks2 point to the door.

# Pull on the loose ends of the lashing strapsuntil the partitioning net is tight.

# To remove: turn the buckle of the tie-downstrap in the direction of arrow5.

# Slide the loose end of the tie-down strap intothe buckle in the direction of arrow4 untilthe tie-down straps are loose.

# Remove the hooks2 from the tie-downeyes3 on the left and right.

# Remove the partition net from the holders1 on the roof lining on the left and right.

Overview of the tie-down eyes

Observe the notes on loading the vehicle(/ page 126).

* NOTE Damage to the release loops dueto the attachment of objects

The release loops of the seat backrests inthe rear may be damaged due to the attach‐ment of objects.# Only attach objects to the tie-down

eyes.


1 Tie-down eyes (vehicles with through-loadingfeature in the rear bench seat)

Overview of bag hooks

& WARNING Risk of injury when using baghooks with heavy objects

The bag hooks cannot restrain heavy objectsor items of luggage.Objects or items of luggage could be thrownaround and thereby hit vehicle occupantswhen braking or abruptly changing direc‐tions.# Only hang light objects on the bag

hooks.# Never hang hard, sharp-edged or fragile

objects on the bag hooks.

Observe the notes on loading the vehicle(/ page 126).The bag hooks can bear a maximum load of3 kg. Do not use them to secure a load.

1 Bag hook

Overview of coat hooks on the tailgate

Observe the notes on loading the vehicle(/ page 126).


1 Coat hook

Coat hooks are not suitable for hanging heavyobjects as this can cause the tailgate to lowerautomatically. Use the coat hooks only for lightobjects such as jackets.

Opening or closing the stowage space underthe load compartment floor

& WARNING Risk of injury due to an openload compartment floor

If you drive when the load compartment flooris open, objects could be thrown around andthereby strike vehicle occupants. There is arisk of injury, particularly in the event of sud‐den braking or a sudden change in direction.# Always close the load compartment

floor before a journey.

& WARNING Risk of burns due to hotaudio amplifier

The audio amplifier and the area around theaudio amplifier in the stowage space underthe load compartment floor can get very hot.If you touch these car parts, you may sufferburns.# Always take special care when the load

compartment floor in the area aroundthe audio amplifier is open.

# Allow the car parts to cool down beforetouching them.

* NOTE Damage to heat-sensitive objectsdue to hot audio amplifier

Heat-sensitive objects, e.g. clothing or itemsof luggage, may be damaged if they comeinto contact with the audio amplifier.# Ensure that heat-sensitive objects do

not come into contact with the audioamplifier.


# To open: pull handle1 upwards.# Lift the load compartment floor upwards

using handle1.# To close: fold the load compartment floor

downwards and then press handle1 downuntil it engages.

Adjustable load compartment floor

The load compartment can be made larger orsmaller depending on requirements. To this end,you can lock the load compartment floor at twodifferent heights. The higher position provides aflat surface when the rear seat backrests are fol‐ded forward. Furthermore, you can remove abracket at the rear to create additional spacelengthways.

Load compartment floor (example in the lower posi‐tion)

# Adjusting the height: Lift the load compart‐ment floor1 only slightly using the handle3 and pull it towards you.

# Insert the load compartment floor1 intothe rear fixtures2.

# Fold the load compartment floor1 down‐wards.

# Adjusting the length: Fold the seat backr‐ests in the rear forward slightly.

# Make sure that the load compartment floor1 is engaged in the lower position.

# Press a release catch5 and remove thebracket4 upwards.


* NOTE Damage to the load compartmentfloor

If the load compartment floor is loaded in theupper position and the bracket has beenremoved, the load compartment floor may bedamaged.# Make sure that the load compartment

floor is not loaded in the upper positionwhen the bracket has been removed.

Attaching a roof rack

& WARNING Risk of injury if the maximumroof load is exceeded

When you load the roof, the centre of gravityof the vehicle rises and the usual drivingcharacteristics as well as the steering andbraking characteristics change. During cor‐nering, the vehicle tilts more strongly andmay react more sluggishly to steering move‐ments.

If you exceed the maximum roof load, thedriving characteristics, as well as the steer‐ing and braking characteristics, will begreatly impaired.# Always comply with the maximum roof

load and adjust your driving style.

You will find information on the maximum roofload in the "Technical data" section.

* NOTE Damage to the panorama slidingsunroof caused by a non-approved roofrack

The panorama sliding sunroof may be dam‐aged by the roof rack if you attempt to openit when using a roof rack not tested andapproved for Mercedes-Benz.# When a roof rack is fitted, open the

panorama sliding sunroof only if thishas been tested and approved forMercedes-Benz.

In order to allow ventilation of the vehicleinterior, you can raise the panorama slidingsunroof.

# Secure the roof rack to the roof railing.# Observe the manufacturer's installation

instructions.

Cup holdersInstalling the cup holder in or removing itfrom the centre console (automatic trans‐mission)

& WARNING ‑ Risk of accident or injurywhen using the cup holder while thevehicle is in motion

The cup holder cannot hold a containersecure while the vehicle is in motion.If you use a cup holder while the vehicle is inmotion, the container may be flung aroundand liquids could be spilled. The vehicleoccupants may come into contact with the


liquid and if it is hot, they could be scalded.You could be distracted from traffic condi‐tions and you may lose control of the vehicle.# Only use the cup holder when the vehi‐

cle is stationary.# Only use the cup holder for containers

of the right size.# Always close the container, particularly

if the liquid is hot.

Depending on the vehicle's equipment, the fol‐lowing cup holders will be available:R In the front stowage compartment of the

centre consoleR In the armrests of the rear seatsR Between the seats on the third row of seats

Cup holder in the stowage compartment with cover Cup holder in the stowage compartment withoutcover

# To remove: slide snap-in brackets1 of thecup holder inwards until they are unlocked.

# Move the cup holder upwards out of thestowage compartment.


% The cup holder and the rubber mat beneathit can be removed for cleaning, e.g. withclean, lukewarm water.

Cup holder in the stowage compartment with cover

Cup holder in the stowage compartment withoutcover

# To fit: if necessary, open the stowage com‐partment cover and insert the cup holder, asshown, into the stowage compartment withthe imprint facing the vehicle interior.

# Slide the cup holder onto the bars in thestowage compartment.

# Slide snap-in brackets1 outwards until theyengage.

# Cup holder in the stowage compartmentwith cover: press button2.

or# Cup holder in the stowage compartment

without cover: press button2 and/or4.The wings3 will fold upwards.

% The cup holder wings can be folded down‐wards and locked. The cup holder's holdingfunction will then not be available.

Fitting the cup holder in and removing itfrom the centre console (manual transmis‐sion)

& WARNING ‑ Risk of accident or injurywhen using the cup holder while thevehicle is in motion

The cup holder cannot hold a containersecure while the vehicle is in motion.If you use a cup holder while the vehicle is inmotion, the container may be flung around


and liquids could be spilled. The vehicleoccupants may come into contact with theliquid and if it is hot, they could be scalded.You could be distracted from traffic condi‐tions and you may lose control of the vehicle.# Only use the cup holder when the vehi‐

cle is stationary.# Only use the cup holder for containers

of the right size.# Always close the container, particularly

if the liquid is hot.

# To remove: slide snap-in brackets1 of thecup holder inwards until they are unlocked.

# Move the cup holder upwards out of thestowage compartment.

% The cup holder and the rubber mat beneathit can be removed for cleaning, e.g. withclean, lukewarm water.

# To fit: insert the cup holder, as shown, intothe stowage compartment with the imprintfacing the vehicle interior.

# Slide the cup holder onto the bars in thestowage compartment.

# Slide snap-in brackets1 outwards until theyengage.

# Press button2 and/or4.The wings3 will fold upwards.


% The cup holder wings can be folded down‐wards and locked. The cup holder's holdingfunction will then not be available.

Opening or closing the cup holders in therear armrest

* NOTE Damage to the rear armrest due tobody weight

When folded out, the rear armrest can bedamaged by body weight.# Do not sit or support yourself on the

rear seat armrest.

* NOTE Damage to the cup holder

When the rear armrest is folded back the cupholder could become damaged.# Only fold the rear armrest back when

the cup holder is closed.

% Depending on its equipment, your vehiclewill have a rear armrest with a cup holder.

# To open: press cup holder1 or2.Cup holder1 or2 will extend automati‐cally.

# To close: push cup holder1 or2 backuntil it engages.

Ashtray and cigarette lighterUsing the ashtray

# While driving: place the closed ashtray inthe front door stowage compartment whiledriving.

# Check that it is secure.# Comply with the notes on loading the vehicle

(/ page 126).


# To open: fold lid1 upwards.% Twist the top part of the ashtray to remove it

for cleaning, e.g. with clean, lukewarm water,or for emptying.

Using the cigarette lighter in the front centreconsole

& WARNING ‑ Risk of fire and injury fromthe hot cigarette lighter

You can burn yourself if you touch the hotheating element or the socket of the ciga‐rette lighter.In addition, flammable materials may igniteif:R you drop the hot cigarette lighterR a child holds the hot cigarette lighter to

objects, for example

# Always hold the cigarette lighter by theknob.

# Always make sure that the cigarettelighter is out of reach of children.



# Press in cigarette lighter1.The cigarette lighter will pop out automati‐cally when the heating element is red-hot.

SocketsUsing the 12 V socket in the front centreconsole

Requirements:R Only devices up to a maximum of 180 W

(15 A) are permissible.

# Lift up socket cap1.# Insert the plug of the device.

12 V socket in the stowage compartmentwith cover: if you have connected a device tothe 12 V socket, leave the cover of the stowagecompartment open.


Using the 12 V socket under the armrest

Requirements:R Only connect devices up to a maximum of

180 watts (15 A).

# Lift up socket cap1.# Insert the plug of the device.

Vehicles with automatic transmission: the12 V socket under the armrest in the stowagecompartment is only available with the smallSmoker Package.

Using the 115 V socket in the rear

& DANGER Risk of fatal injury due to dam‐aged connecting cables or sockets

If a suitable device is connected, the 115 Vsocket will be carrying a high voltage. If theconnecting cable or the 115 V socket ispulled out of the trim or is damaged or wet,you could receive an electric shock.# Use only connecting cables that are dry

and free of damage.# When the ignition is switched off,

ensure that the 115 V socket is dry.# If the 115 V socket is damaged or gets

pulled out of the trim, immediately havethe socket checked or replaced at aqualified specialised workshop.

# Never plug the connecting cable into a115 V socket that is damaged or hasbeen pulled out of the trim.

& DANGER Risk of fatal injury due to incor‐rect handling of the socket

You could receive an electric shock:R if you reach into the socket.R if you insert unsuitable devices or objects

into the socket.

# Do not reach into the socket.# Only connect suitable devices to the

socket.

Requirements:R Devices are equipped with a suitable plug

which conforms to the standards specific tothe country you are in.R A device up to a maximum of 150 W is used.R Do not use multiple socket outlets.


# Open flap3.# Insert the plug of the device into 115 V

socket1.When the on-board electrical system voltageis sufficient, indicator lamp2 lights up.

Using the 230 V socket in the rear passengercompartment

& DANGER Risk of fatal injury due to dam‐aged connecting cables or sockets

When a suitable device is connected, the230 V power socket will be carrying a highvoltage. You could receive an electric shockif the connecting cable or the 230 V powersocket is pulled out of the trim or is damagedor wet.# Use only connecting cables that are dry

and free of damage.# When the ignition is switched off, make

sure that the 230 V power socket is dry.# Immediately have the 230 V power

socket checked or replaced at a quali‐fied specialised workshop if it is dam‐aged or has been pulled out of the trim.

# Never plug the connecting cable into a230 V power socket that is damaged orhas been pulled out of the trim.

& DANGER Risk of fatal injury due to incor‐rect handling of the socket

You could receive an electric shock:R if you reach into the socket.R if you insert unsuitable devices or objects

into the socket.

# Do not reach into the socket.# Only connect suitable devices to the

socket.

Requirements:R Devices are equipped with a suitable plug

which conforms to the standards specific tothe country you are in.R A device up to a maximum of 150 W (0.65 A)

is used.R Do not use multiple socket outlets.


# Open flap3.# Insert the plug of the device into 230 V

socket1.When the on-board electrical system voltageis sufficient, indicator lamp2 lights up.

Using the 12 V socket in the load compart‐ment

Requirements:R Only connect devices up to a maximum of

180 W (15 A).

# Lift up cap1 of the socket and insert theplug of the device.

Overview of USB ports

Depending on the vehicle equipment, the vehiclehas the following USB ports:R in the stowage compartment of the cockpit

armrest (/ page 127)R in the front centre console next to the mobile

phone stowage compartmentR in the rear centre consoleR vehicles with three seat rows: in the side

stowage compartment of the load compart‐ment

% Depending on the vehicle equipment, thedesign of the stowage compartment and thenumber of USB ports in the rear centre con‐sole may vary.


Example: USB ports in the rear centre console USB ports in the load compartment of vehicles withthree seat rows

If the ignition is switched on, you can charge aUSB device, e.g. a mobile phone, at USB ports1 using a suitable charging cable.

Wireless charging of the mobile phone andconnection with the exterior aerialNotes on wirelessly charging the mobilephone

& WARNING Risk of injury due to objectsbeing stowed incorrectly

If objects in the vehicle interior are stowedincorrectly, they can slide or be thrownaround and hit vehicle occupants. In addi‐tion, cup holders, open stowage spaces andmobile phone receptacles cannot alwaysretain all objects they contain.There is a risk of injury, particularly in theevent of sudden braking or a sudden changein direction.# Always stow objects so that they can‐

not be thrown around in such situa‐tions.

# Always make sure that objects do notprotrude from stowage spaces, luggagenets or stowage nets.


# Close the lockable stowage spacesbefore starting a journey.

# Always stow and secure heavy, hard,pointed, sharp-edged, fragile or bulkyobjects in the boot/load compartment.

Observe the notes on loading the vehicle.

& WARNING Risk of fire from placingobjects in the mobile phone stowagecompartment

There is a risk of fire, in particular, if youplace more than one mobile phone in themobile phone stowage compartment.# Apart from a mobile phone, do not

place any other objects in the mobilephone stowage compartment, espe‐cially those made of metal.

* NOTE Damage to objects caused byplacing them in the mobile phone stow‐age compartment

If objects are placed in the mobile phonestowage compartment, they may be dam‐aged by electromagnetic fields.# Do not place credit cards, storage

media or other objects sensitive toelectromagnetic fields in the mobilephone stowage compartment.

* NOTE Damage to the mobile phonestowage compartment caused by liquids

If liquids enter the mobile phone stowagecompartment, the compartment may bedamaged.# Ensure that no liquids enter the mobile

phone stowage compartment.

R Depending on the vehicle equipment, themobile phone is connected to the vehicle'sexterior aerial via the charging module.

R The charging function and wireless connec‐tion of the mobile phone to the vehicle'sexterior aerial are only available if the ignitionis switched on.R Small mobile phones may not be able to be

charged in every position of the mobilephone stowage compartment.R Large mobile phones which do not rest flat in

the mobile phone stowage compartment maynot be able to be charged or connected withthe vehicle's exterior aerial.R The mobile phone may heat up during the

charging process. This may particularlydepend on the applications (apps) currentlyopen in the background.R To ensure more efficient charging and con‐

nection with the vehicle's exterior aerial,remove the protective cover from the mobilephone. Protective covers which are neces‐sary for wireless charging are excluded.

Wirelessly charging a mobile phone

Requirements:


R The mobile phone is suitable for wirelesscharging. You can find a list of compatiblemobile phones at:https://www.mercedes-benz-mobile.com

# Place the mobile phone as close to thecentre of the marked surface on mat1 aspossible with the display facing upwards.When a message is shown in the multimediasystem, the mobile phone is being charged.Malfunctions during the charging process areshown in the media display.

% The mat can be removed for cleaning, e.g.using clean, lukewarm water.

Stowage compartment without coverMake sure the mobile phone is properly storedand secured to prevent it from falling out whileyou are driving.

# To secure the mobile phone: swing lever2 out.

Radio type approval numbers for BrazilThis device operates on a secondary basis, thatis to say it has no protection against harmfulinterference, not even from the same type ofstations, and must not cause interference withsystems operating on a primary basis.This product is permitted in accordance with theprocedure defined in Directive 242/2000 by the

Brazilian telecommunications agency ANATELand meets the applicable technical require‐ments.Further information is available on the ANATELwebsite. www.anatel.gov.br# Further information on the declaration of

conformity for wireless vehicle components(/ page 24).

Fitting/removing the floor mats




# Always fit the floor mats securely andas prescribed in order to ensure that


there is always sufficient room for thepedals.


# To fit: slide the corresponding seat back‐wards and lay the floor mat in the footwell.

# Press the studs1 onto the holders2.

# Adjust the corresponding seat.# To remove: pull the floor mat off the holders2.

# Remove the floor mat.


Exterior lightingNotes on adjusting the lights when drivingabroad

It is not necessary to adjust the headlamps. Thelegal requirements are also met in countries inwhich traffic drives on the other side of the road.

Information about lighting systems and yourresponsibility

The various lighting systems of the vehicle areonly aids. The driver of the vehicle is responsiblefor correct vehicle illumination in accordancewith the prevailing light and visibility conditions,legal requirements and traffic situation.

Light switch

Operating the light switch

1 W Left-hand parking lights2 X Right-hand parking lights3 T Standing lights and licence plate light‐

ing4 Ã Automatic driving lights (preferred light

switch position)

5 L Low beam / high beam6 R Switches the rear fog light on/off7 N Switches the front fog lamp on/off

When low beam is activated, the indicator lampfor the standing lights T is deactivated andreplaced by the low beam indicator lamp L.# Always park your vehicle safely using suffi‐

cient lighting, in accordance with the rele‐vant legal stipulations.

* NOTE Battery discharging by operatingthe standing lights

Operating the standing lights over a period ofhours puts a strain on the battery.# Where possible, switch on the

right X or left W parking light.

In the event of severe battery discharging, thestanding lights or parking lights are automati‐cally switched off to facilitate the next enginestart.

Light and sight 155

The exterior lighting (except standing and park‐ing lights) will switch off automatically when thedriver's door is opened.R Observe the notes on surround lighting

(/ page 163).

Automatic driving lights functionThe standing lights, low beam and daytime run‐ning lights will be switched on automaticallydepending on the ignition status and the lightconditions.

& WARNING Risk of accident when thedipped beam is switched off in poor visi‐bility

When the light switch is set toÃ, thedipped beam may not be switched on auto‐matically if there is fog, snow or other causesof poor visibility such as spray.# In such cases, turn the light switch to

L.

The automatic driving lights are only an aid. Youare responsible for vehicle lighting.

Switching the rear fog lights on or offRequirements:R The light switch is in the L orÃ posi‐

tion.

# Press the R button.

Please observe the country-specific laws on theuse of rear fog lamps.

Adjusting the headlamp range (halogenheadlamps)The headlamp range adjuster allows you toadjust the cone of light from the headlamps inrelation to the vehicle's load condition.

g Driver's seat and front passenger seat occu‐pied

1 Driver's seat, front passenger seat and rearseats occupied

2 Driver's seat, front passenger seat and rearseats occupied, load compartment laden

3 Driver's seat and front passenger seat occu‐pied and maximum permissible rear axleload utilised

156 Light and sight

# Turn the headlamp range adjuster to theposition that corresponds to the load condi‐tion of your vehicle.

Operating the combination switch for thelights

1 High beam2 Turn signal light, right

3 Headlamp flashing4 Turn signal light, left

# Use the combination switch to activate thedesired function.

High beam# To switch on: turn the light switch to the

L orÃ position.# Push the combination switch in the direction

of arrow1.When the high beam is activated, the indica‐tor lamp for low beam L will be deactiva‐ted and replaced by the indicator lamp forhigh beam K.

# To switch off: push the combination switchin the direction of arrow1 or pull it in thedirection of arrow3.

Headlamp flashing# Pull the combination switch in the direction

of arrow3.

Turn signal light# To indicate briefly: push the combination

switch briefly to the point of resistance in thedirection of arrow2 or4.The corresponding turn signal light will flashthree times.

# To indicate permanently: push the combi‐nation switch beyond the point of resistancein the direction of arrow2 or4.Vehicles with Active Lane Change Assist:R Indicator operation activated by the driver

can extend for the duration of the lanechange.R If the driver indicated directly beforehand

but a lane change was not immediatelypossible, the turn signal indicator mayactivate automatically.

Light and sight 157

Activating/deactivating the hazard warninglamps

# Press button1.The hazard warning lamps will switch on auto‐matically if:R the airbag has been deployed.R the vehicle is heavily braked from a speed of

more than 70 km/h to a standstill.

When you pull away again, the hazard warninglamps will switch off automatically at approx‐imately 10 km/h. You can also switch off thehazard warning lamps using button1.

Adaptive functions, MULTIBEAM LED

Functions of the Intelligent Light SystemThe MULTIBEAM LED headlamps adapt to thedriving and weather situation and provide exten‐ded functions for improved illumination of theroad.The system comprises the following functions:R Active headlamps (/ page 158)R Cornering light (/ page 159)R Motorway mode (/ page 159)R City lighting (/ page 159)R Off-road light (/ page 159)

System limitsR The system is active only when it is dark.

Active headlamps function

Functions of the active headlamps:R The headlamps follow the steering move‐

ments.R Relevant areas are better illuminated during

a journey.

The functions are active when the high beam isswitched on.

158 Light and sight

Cornering light function

The cornering light function improves the illumi‐nation of the carriageway over a wide angle inthe turning direction, enabling better visibility ontight bends, for example. It can be activated onlywhen the low beam is switched on.The function is active in the following cases:R at speeds below 40 km/h when the turn sig‐

nal indicator is switched on or the steeringwheel is turnedR at speeds between 40 km/h and 70 km/h

when the steering wheel is turned

Roundabout and intersection function: thecornering light will be activated on both sidesbased on an evaluation of the current GPS posi‐tion of the vehicle. It will remain active until afterthe vehicle has left the roundabout or the inter‐section.

Motorway mode functionMotorway mode increases the range and bright‐ness of the cone of light, enabling better visibil‐ity.

The function is enabled if a motorway journey isdetected by:R the vehicle's speed

R the multifunction cameraR the GPS

The function will not be enabled in the followingcases:R at speeds below 80 km/h.

City lighting functionCity lighting improves the illumination of road‐sides within built-up areas using a broad distri‐bution of light.The function is active in the following cases:R at low speedsR in illuminated parts of built-up areas

Function of the off-road lightThe off-road light improves illumination duringoff-road driving. The low beam is distributedsymmetrically and across a wide angle. Thismakes it easier to find your way when drivingoff-road and to detect obstacles at an earlystage. The active headlamps function is deacti‐vated during this time so that steering move‐ments do not change the illumination.

Light and sight 159

The function is active when the low beam isswitched on if you are not driving at a speedgreater than 50 km/h and theF (Offroad) orG (Offroad Plus) drive program has beenselected.

Switching the Intelligent Light Systemon/offRequirements:R the ignition is switched on.

Multimedia system:4© 5 Settings 5 Lights5 Intelligent Light System# Activate or deactivate the function.

Adaptive Highbeam Assist

Adaptive Highbeam Assist function

& WARNING Risk of accident despiteAdaptive Highbeam Assist

Adaptive Highbeam Assist does not recog‐nise the following road users:R Road users without lights, e.g. pedes‐

triansR Road users with poor lighting, e.g.

cyclistsR Road users whose lighting is obstructed,

e.g. by a barrier

On very rare occasions, Adaptive HighbeamAssist may fail to recognise other road userswith their own lighting, or may recognisethem too late.In this, or in similar situations, the automaticmain beam will not be deactivated or will beactivated despite the presence of other roadusers.

# Always observe the traffic carefully andswitch off the main beam in good time.

Adaptive Highbeam Assist cannot take intoaccount road, weather or traffic conditions.Detection may be restricted in the followingcases:R In poor visibility, e.g. fog, heavy rain or snowR If there is dirt on the sensors or the sensors

are obscured

Adaptive Highbeam Assist is only an aid. You areresponsible for adjusting the vehicle's lighting tothe prevailing light, visibility and traffic condi‐tions.% Adaptive Highbeam Assist is available only in

vehicles with LED high performance head‐lamps.

160 Light and sight

The Adaptive Highbeam Assist automaticallyswitches between the following types of light:R Low beamR High beam

At speeds greater than 30 km/h:R If no other road users are detected, the high

beam will be switched on automatically.

The high beam switches off automatically in thefollowing cases:R At speeds below 25 km/h.R If other road users are detected.R If street lighting is sufficient.

At speeds greater than approximately 50 km/h:R The headlamp range of the low beam is regu‐

lated automatically based on the distance toother road users.

The system's optical sensor is located behindthe windscreen near the overhead control panel.

Switching Adaptive Highbeam Assist on/off# To switch on: turn the light switch to the

Ã position.# Switch on the main beam using the combina‐

tion switch.When the main beam is switched on auto‐matically in the dark, the _ indicatorlamp on the multifunction display comes on.

# To switch off: switch off the main beamusing the combination switch.

Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus

Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus function

& WARNING Risk of accident despiteAdaptive Highbeam Assist Plus

Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus does not rec‐ognise the following road users:R Road users without lights, e.g. pedes‐

triansR Road users with poor lighting, e.g.

cyclistsR Road users whose lighting is obstructed,

e.g. by a barrier

On very rare occasions, Adaptive HighbeamAssist Plus may fail to recognise other roadusers that have lights, or may recognisethem too late.In this, or in similar situations, the automaticmain beam will not be deactivated or will beactivated despite the presence of other roadusers.

Light and sight 161

# Always observe the traffic carefully andswitch off the main beam in good time.

Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus cannot take intoaccount road, weather or traffic conditions.Detection may be restricted in the followingcases:R In poor visibility, e.g. fog, heavy rain or snowR If there is dirt on the sensors or the sensors

are obscured

Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus is only an aid.You are responsible for adjusting the vehicle'slighting to the prevailing light, visibility and traf‐fic conditions.% Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus is available

only in vehicles with Intelligent Light System.The Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus automati‐cally switches between the following types oflight:R Low beamR Partial high beamR High beam

Partial high beam uses the high beam to shinepast other road users rather than dazzling them.

The vehicle in front will be illuminated by the lowbeam.At speeds greater than 30 km/h:R If no other road users are detected, the high

beam will be switched on automatically.R If other road users are detected, the partial

high beam will be switched on automatically.

At speeds below 25 km/h or when there is suffi‐cient street lighting:R The high beam will switch off automatically.R The partial high beam will switch off auto‐

matically.

The system's optical sensor is located behindthe windscreen near the overhead control panel.

Switching Adaptive Highbeam Assist Pluson/off# To switch on: turn the light switch to the

Ã position.# Switch on the main beam using the combina‐

tion switch.When the main beam is switched on auto‐matically in the dark, the _ indicator

162 Light and sight

lamp on the multifunction display will lightup.

# To switch off: switch off the main beamusing the combination switch.

Setting the exterior lighting switch-off delaytime

Requirements:R The light switch is in theÃ position.

Multimedia system:4© 5 Settings 5 Lights5 Ext. light. del. sw. off# Set the switch-off delay time.

The exterior lighting is activated for the settime when the vehicle is parked.

Switching the surround lighting on/off

Multimedia system:4© 5 Settings 5 Lights5 Surround lightingWhen Surround lighting is active, the exteriorlighting lights up for 40 seconds after the vehicleis unlocked. When you start the vehicle, the sur‐round lighting is deactivated and the automaticdriving lights are activated.# Activate or deactivate the function.

Interior lightingAdjusting the interior lighting

Front overhead control panel

1 p Front left reading lamp2 | Automatic interior lighting control3 c Front interior lighting4 u Rear interior lighting5 p Front right reading lamp

# To switch on or off: press button1 –5accordingly.

Light and sight 163

Control panel in the grab handle

1 p Rear reading lamp

# To switch on or off: press button1.

Adjusting the ambient lighting

Multimedia system:4© 5 Comfort 5 Ambient lighting

Setting the colour# Select Colour.# Set the desired colour.% There are 64 colours available.

Adjusting the brightness# Select Brightness.# Adjust the brightness.

Activating the brightness for zones# Select Brightness.# Select Brightness zones.# Activate or deactivate the function.

The EMPHASIS, AMBIENT and VENTS zonescan be set separately.

Activating multi-coloured lighting# Select Colour.# Select Multi-colour.

There are ten preset colour combinationsavailable.

# Select a colour combination.

Activating multi-coloured animation# Select Colour.# Select Multi-colour animat..

The chosen colour combination will changeat predefined intervals.

Activating welcome lighting# Select Colour.# Select Welcome.

When the vehicle is unlocked, a special ambi‐ent lighting sequence will run.

Activating dependency on air conditioningsettings# Select Colour.# Select Climate.

If changes are made to the temperature set‐ting in the vehicle, the colour of the ambientlighting will change briefly.

164 Light and sight

Switching the interior lighting switch-offdelay time on/off

Multimedia system:4© 5 Settings 5 Lights5 Int. light. del. sw. off# Switch the lighting switch-off delay time on

or off.When this function is active, the interior light‐ing is lit up for short time after the vehiclehas been locked.

Changing bulbs (only for vehicles with halo‐gen headlamps)Notes on changing bulbs

& WARNING Risk of burns from hot com‐ponent parts whilst replacing a bulb

Bulbs, lamps and plugs can become very hotduring operation.When replacing a bulb, you could burn your‐self on these component parts.

# Allow the component parts to cooldown before replacing the bulb.

R Do not use a bulb if it has been dropped or ifits glass has been scratched. The bulb mayotherwise explode.R Do not touch the glass bulb with your bare

hands.R Protect bulbs from moisture and do not allow

bulbs to come into contact with liquids.

Overview of the bulbs to be changed

Halogen headlamps

1 High beam: H7 55 W bulb2 Low beam: H7 55 W bulb

Light and sight 165

Tail lamps

1 Turn signal light: PY 21 W bulb2 Reversing light: W 16 W bulb

Changing the front bulbs (vehicles with halo‐gen headlamps)

Fitting/removing the cover on the frontwheel archRequirements:R The lighting system is switched off.R The appropriate front wheel is turned

inwards.

# To remove: turn cover1 to the left andremove it from the wheel arch liner.

# To install: insert cover1 into the wheelarch liner and turn it to the right until itengages.

Replacing light sources in the halogen head‐lampRequirements:R Low beam: an H7 55 W light source is avail‐

able.R High beam: an H7 55 W light source is avail‐

able.

166 Light and sight

1 Low beam housing cover2 High beam housing cover

% When the bonnet is open, you can reachhousing cover2.

# Switch the lighting system off.# Remove the cover in the front wheel arch

(/ page 166).# Turn the relevant housing cover anti-clock‐

wise and remove it.# Turn the socket anti-clockwise and remove it.# Pull the light source out of the socket.

# Insert the new light source into the socketsuch that the entire base of the light sourceis resting on the bottom of the socket.

# Insert the socket and turn it clockwise.# Press on the housing cover and turn it clock‐

wise.# Replace the cover in the front wheel arch

(/ page 166).

Changing the rear bulbs (vehicles with halo‐gen headlamps)

Replacing the tail lamp bulbs# Due to their locations, have the bulbs for the

turn signal light and reversing light changedat a qualified specialist workshop.

Windscreen wipers and windscreen washersystemSwitching the windscreen wipers on/off

1 g Windscreen wipers off2 Ä Automatic wiping, normal3 Å Automatic wiping, frequent

Light and sight 167

4 ° Continuous wiping, slow5 ¯ Continuous wiping, fast

# Turn the combination switch to the correctposition1 -5.

# Single wipe/washing: push the button onthe combination switch in the direction ofarrow1.R í Single wipeR î Wipes with washer fluid

Switching the rear window wiper on/off

1 ô Single wipe/washing2 è Intermittent wiping

# Single wipe: press button1 to the point ofresistance.

# Wiping with washer fluid: press button1beyond the point of resistance.

# Switching intermittent wiping on/off:press button2.The è symbol will appear on the instru‐ment cluster when the rear window wiper isswitched on.

Replacing the windscreen wiper blades

& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped ifthe windscreen wipers are switched onwhile wiper blades are being replaced

If the windscreen wipers begin to move whileyou are changing the wiper blades, you canbe trapped by the wiper arm.# Always switch off the windscreen wip‐

ers and ignition before changing thewiper blades.

Moving the wiper arms into the replacementposition# Switch the ignition on and switch off again

immediately.

168 Light and sight

# Within around 15 seconds, press the îbutton on the combination switch for approx‐imately three seconds(/ page 167).The wiper arms will move into the replace‐ment position.

Removing the wiper blades# Fold the wiper arms away from the wind‐

screen.

# Hold the wiper arm with one hand. With theother hand, turn the wiper blade in the direc‐tion of arrow1 away from the wiper arm asfar as it will go.

# Slide catch2 in the direction of arrow3until it engages in the removal position.

# Remove the wiper blade from the wiper armin the direction of arrow4.

Fitting the wiper blades

# Insert the new wiper blade into the wiperarm in the direction of arrow1.

# Slide catch2 in the direction of arrow3until it engages in the locking position.

# Make sure that the wiper blade is seated cor‐rectly.

Light and sight 169

# Fold the wiper arms back onto the wind‐screen.

# Switch on the ignition.# Press the î button on the combination

switch (/ page 167).The wiper arms will move into the originalposition.

# Switch the ignition off.

Maintenance display

# Remove the protective film1 from themaintenance display on the tip of the newlyfitted wiper blades.

If the colour of the maintenance display changesfrom black to yellow, the wiper blades should bereplaced.

% The duration until the colour changes variesdepending on the usage conditions.

Replacing the rear window wiper blade

& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped ifthe windscreen wipers are switched onwhile wiper blades are being replaced

If the windscreen wipers begin to move whileyou are changing the wiper blades, you canbe trapped by the wiper arm.# Always switch off the windscreen wip‐

ers and ignition before changing thewiper blades.

Removing the wiper blade# Switch off the ignition.

170 Light and sight

# Fold wiper arm2 away from the rear win‐dow until it engages in the replacement posi‐tion.

# Unclip wiper blade1 from wiper arm2and remove it in the direction of arrow3.

Fitting the wiper blade

# Position wiper blade1 with both lugs3 onholder2 on the wiper arm.

# Push wiper blade1 in the direction of arrow4 until it engages in holder2.

# Make sure that wiper blade1 is seated cor‐rectly.

# Fold the wiper arm from the replacementposition back onto the rear window.

MirrorsOperating the outside mirrors




cle is in motion


Light and sight 171

& WARNING Risk of accident due to mis‐judgement of distances when using theoutside mirror

The outside mirrors reflect objects on asmaller scale. The objects in view are in factcloser than they appear.As a result, you may misjudge the distancebetween you and the road user drivingbehind you, e.g. when changing lanes.# Therefore, always look over your shoul‐

der in order to ensure that you areaware of the actual distance betweenyou and the road users driving behindyou.

# To fold in or out: briefly press button2.# To set: press button1 or3 to select the

outside mirror to be adjusted.# Press button4 to adjust the position of the

mirror glass.

% If the battery has been disconnected or com‐pletely discharged, you will have to reset the

outside mirrors. Only then will the automaticmirror folding function work properly.

# To adjust: briefly press button2.An outside mirror that has been pushed out ofposition can be engaged in position again as fol‐lows:# Vehicles without electrically folding out‐

side mirrors: manually move the outsidemirror into the correct position.

# Vehicles with electrically folding outsidemirrors: press and hold button2.You will hear a click and the mirror will audi‐bly engage in position. The outside mirror willnow be set to the correct position.

Automatic anti-dazzle mirrors function

& WARNING Risk of acid burns and poi‐soning due to the anti-dazzle mirror elec‐trolyte

Electrolyte may escape if the glass in anautomatic anti-dazzle mirror breaks.

172 Light and sight

The electrolyte is hazardous to health andcauses irritation. It must not come into con‐tact with your skin, eyes, respiratory organsor clothing or be swallowed.# If you come into contact with electro‐

lyte, observe the following:R Immediately rinse the electrolyte

from your skin with water and seekmedical attention.R If electrolyte comes into contact

with your eyes, immediately rinsethem thoroughly with clean waterand seek medical attention.R If the electrolyte is swallowed,

immediately rinse your mouth outthoroughly. Do not induce vomiting.Seek medical attention immediately.R Immediately change out of clothing

which has been contaminated withelectrolyte.R If an allergic reaction occurs, seek

medical attention immediately.

The inside rearview mirror and the outside mir‐ror on the driver's side will automatically go intoanti-dazzle mode if light from a headlamp hitsthe sensor on the inside rearview mirror.

System limitsThe system will not go into anti-dazzle mode if:R The engine is switched off.R Reverse gear is engaged.R The interior lighting is switched on.

Front-passenger outside mirror parking posi‐tion function

% The parking position is available only in vehi‐cles with a memory function.

The parking position makes parking easier.The front-passenger outside mirror will swiveldownwards in the direction of the rear wheel onthe front passenger's side when:R the parking position is stored (/ page 174).R the front-passenger mirror is selected.R reverse gear is engaged.

The front-passenger outside mirror will moveback to its original position when:R you shift the transmission to another trans‐

mission position.R you are travelling at a speed greater than

15 km/h.R you press the button for the outside mirror

on the driver's side.

Light and sight 173

Storing the parking position of the front-passenger outside mirror using reverse gear

Storing

# Press button1 to select the front-passenger outside mirror.

# Engage reverse gear.# Move the front-passenger outside mirror into

the desired parking position using button2.

Calling up# Press button1 to select the front-

passenger outside mirror.# Engage reverse gear.

The front-passenger outside mirror will moveinto the stored parking position.

Activating/deactivating the automatic mirrorfolding function

Multimedia system:4© 5 Settings 5 Vehicle# Switch Automatic fold-in on or off.

Operating the sun visors

# Glare from the front: fold sun visor1down.

# Glare from the side: swing sun visor1 tothe side.

174 Light and sight

Overview of climate control systemsNotes on climate control

An interior air filter in combination with the pre‐filter in the engine compartment must always beused so that the air conditioning system, pollu‐tion level monitoring and the air filtration workcorrectly. Make sure that the filter is installedcorrectly and the filter housing in the enginecompartment is closed correctly using the capand always tightly sealed when in operation. Usefilters recommended and approved byMercedes-Benz. Always have service work car‐ried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

THERMATIC control panel overview

The indicator lamps in the buttonsÃ,¬,¤,g,¿ and& indicate that thecorresponding function is activated.

1 w Sets the temperature2 Vehicles with a stationary heater only:A

calls up the air conditioning menu3H Sets the airflow or switches off climate

control4 Ã Sets climate control to automatic

(/ page 177)5 ¬ Defrosts the windscreen6 ¤ Switches the rear window heater

on/off7 g Switches air-recirculation mode on/

off(/ page 178)8 ¿ Switches the A/C function on/

off(/ page 176)

9 Vehicles with a stationary heater only:&switches the stationary heater on/off(/ page 179)

A _ Sets the air distribution

THERMOTRONIC control panel overview

The indicator lamps in the buttonsÃ,¬,¤,g,Á,0 and& indicate thatthe corresponding function is activated.

Climate control 175

1 w Sets the temperature on the driver'sside

2 Vehicles without a stationary heater:_sets the air distributionVehicles with a stationary heater:A callsup the air conditioning menu

3H Sets the airflow or switches off climatecontrol

4 Ã Sets climate control to automatic(/ page 177)

5 ¬ Defrosts the windscreen6 ¤ Switches the rear window heater

on/off7 g Switches air-recirculation mode on/

off(/ page 178)8 Á Switches the A/C function on/

off(/ page 176)Switches residual heat on/off (/ page 178)

9 Vehicles without a stationary heater:0activates/deactivates synchronisation(/ page 178)Vehicles with a stationary heater:&switches the stationary heater on/off(/ page 179)

A w Sets the temperature on the frontpassenger side

Operating the climate control systemSwitching climate control on/off

# To switch on: set the airflow to level 1 orhigher using theH button.

# To switch off: set the airflow to level 0 usingtheH button.

% If climate control is switched off, the win‐dows may mist up more quickly. Switch offclimate control only briefly.

Switching the A/C function on or off via thecontrol panel

The A/C function heats, cools and dehumidifiesthe vehicle's interior air.# Press the¿Á button.

Switch off the A/C function only briefly; other‐wise, the windows may mist up more quickly.Condensation may drip from the underside ofthe vehicle when cooling mode is active. This isnot a sign that there is a fault.

176 Climate control

Calling up the air conditioning menu

Calling up the air conditioning menu usingthe multimedia system# Select one of the temperature displays at the

lower edge of the media display.

Calling up the air conditioning menu usingthe button on the control panel# Press theA button on the control panel.

Activating/deactivating the A/C function viathe multimedia system

The A/C function heats, cools and dehumidifiesthe vehicle's interior air.# Call up the air conditioning menu

(/ page 177).# Select First row of seats.# Select A/C.

Depending on the previous status, the func‐tion is activated or deactivated.

Setting climate control to automatic mode

In automatic mode, the set temperature is con‐trolled and maintained at a constant level by theair supply.# Press the Ã button.# To switch to manual mode: press the _

orÃ button.

In automatic mode, you can choose between fivedifferent air quantities using theH button.Automatic mode is retained.

Overview of air distribution settings

The symbols on the display indicate which ventsthe airflow is being directed through:¯ defroster and side air ventsP centre and side air ventsO footwell and side air ventsS centre, side and footwell ventsa defroster, footwell and side air vents_ all vents

b defroster, middle and side air ventsW automatic air distribution

Setting the air distribution

# Call up the air conditioning menu(/ page 177).

# Select First row of seats or Second row ofseats.

# To set the air distribution: select¯,P orO.

# Set the airflow.% Several air distribution options can be selec‐

ted at the same time, for example to set thetemperature/air conditioning for the wind‐screen and the footwells simultaneously.The¯ climate control for the windscreencan only be selected for the first seat row.

Climate control 177

Activating/deactivating the climate controlsynchronisation function via the controlpanel

Climate control can be set centrally using thesynchronisation function. The temperature andair distribution settings for the driver's side areadopted automatically for the front passengerside.# Press the0 button.

The synchronisation function is deactivated ifthe settings for one of the other climate zonesare changed.

Activating/deactivating the climate controlsynchronisation function using the multime‐dia system

Climate control can be set centrally using thesynchronisation function. The driver's settingsfor temperature, air quantity and air distributionare adopted automatically for all climate zones.# Call up the air conditioning menu

(/ page 177).

# Select First row of seats.# Select SYNC.


Demisting the windows

Windows misted up on the inside# Press theÃ button.# If the windows continue to mist up: press the

¬ button.

Windows misted up on the outside# Switch on the windscreen wipers.# Press theÃ button.

Switching air-recirculation mode on/off

# Press theg button.The interior air will be recirculated.

Air-recirculation mode automatically switches tofresh air mode after some time.

% If air-recirculation mode is switched on, thewindows may mist up more quickly. Switchon air-recirculation mode only briefly.

Switches the residual heat on/off

Requirements:R The vehicle is parked.

It is possible to make use of the residual heatfrom the engine to continue heating or ventilat‐ing the front compartment of the vehicle forapproximately 30 minutes, depending on thetemperature set.# To switch on: press theÁ button.

Residual heat is switched off automatically.

Stationary heater/ventilation

Stationary heater/stationary ventilationfunctionR The air inside the vehicle is heated or ventila‐

ted to the set temperature.

178 Climate control

R The air inside the vehicle cannot be cooleddown to temperatures below the outsidetemperature.R If the outside temperature changes, ventila‐

tion mode automatically switches to heatingmode or heating mode automaticallyswitches to ventilation mode.

The stationary heater and the exhaust gas outletare situated in front of the right-hand frontwheel.

Switching the stationary heater/stationaryventilation on/off via the control panel

& DANGER Risk of fatal injury due to poi‐sonous exhaust gases

If the tailpipe is blocked or sufficient ventila‐tion is not possible, poisonous exhaust gasessuch as carbon monoxide may enter the vehi‐cle. This is the case in enclosed spaces or ifthe vehicle gets stuck in snow, for example.# Always switch the stationary heater off

in enclosed spaces without an airextraction systems, e.g. in garages.

# Keep the tailpipe and the area aroundthe vehicle free from snow when theengine or the stationary heater are run‐ning.

# Open a window on the windward side ofthe vehicle to ensure an adequate sup‐ply of fresh air.

& WARNING Risk of fire due to hot station‐ary heater components

When the stationary heater is switched on,parts of the vehicle can become very hot,e.g. the stationary heater exhaust system.Flammable materials such as leaves, grass ortwigs may ignite if they come into contactwith:R hot parts of the stationary heater exhaust

systemR the exhaust gas itself

There is a risk of fire.# When the stationary heater is switched

on, make sure that:

R hot vehicle parts do not come intocontact with flammable materials.R the exhaust gas can flow out of the

stationary heater exhaust pipeunhindered.R the exhaust gas does not come into

contact with flammable materials.

* NOTE Battery discharge caused by sta‐tionary heater or stationary ventilationoperation

Operating the stationary heater or stationaryventilation drains the battery.# After heating or ventilating the vehicle

twice, drive for a longer period of time.

Requirements:R The fuel tank has been filled to at leastÕ.

Climate control 179

# Set the desired temperature using thewbutton.

# Press button 1.The red or blue indicator lamp on button1will light up or go out.

The colours of the indicator lamp have the fol‐lowing meaning:R Blue: stationary ventilation is switched on.

R Red: the stationary heater is switched on.R Yellow: the departure time is preselected.

The stationary heater/stationary ventilation willswitch off automatically after 50 minutes.Operation using the app: the stationaryheater/stationary ventilation can also be oper‐ated via the Mercedes me connect app. Furtherinformation can be found in the separate Own‐er's Manual under http://manuals.daimler.com/baix/cars/connectme/en_GB/index.html.

Setting the stationary heater / stationaryventilation via the multimedia system# Call up the air conditioning menu

(/ page 177).# Select Auxiliary heating.

Selecting the departure time# Select the time TIME A: XX, TIME B: XX or

TIME C: XX.

Setting the departure time# Select the time TIME A: XX, TIME B: XX or

TIME C: XX.# Select the pen beside the time.# Set a time.

Setting the stationary heater/stationary ven‐tilation via remote controlRequirements:R The fuel tank has been filled to at leastÕ.

180 Climate control

Switching on immediately

# Press and hold theu button.

Setting the departure time# Briefly press theu switch.# Press the, or. button repeatedly

until the time to be changed appears on thedisplay.

# Press theu and^ buttons simultane‐ously.TheÎ symbol will flash on the remote con‐trol display.

# Press the, and. buttons to set thedesired departure time.

# Press theu and^ buttons simultane‐ously.The new departure time will be stored.

Up to three departure times can be stored.# To activate the departure time: select the

desired departure time and press and holdtheu button.TheÍ symbol, the departure time and,depending on the selected departure time,the letter A, B or C will appear on the display.

# To deactivate the departure time: selectthe desired departure time and press andhold the^ button.OFF will appear on the display.

# To check the status of the stationaryheater: briefly press theu button.

Switching off immediately# Press and hold the^ button.

Overview of the remote control displays (sta‐tionary heater/stationary ventilation)

1 Stationary ventilation switched on2 Stationary heater switched on3 Selected departure time4 Remaining time for the stationary heater/

stationary ventilation (in minutes)5 Stationary heater/stationary ventilation

active6 Departure time activated7 Signal strength

Climate control 181

Further possible displays:R Time: activated departure time.R Zero minutes: the running time for the sta‐

tionary heater is increased, as the engine hasnot yet reached operating temperature whenit is started.R OFF: the stationary heater/stationary venti‐

lation is switched off.

Replacing the remote control battery (sta‐tionary heater)

& DANGER Serious damage to healthcaused by swallowing batteries

Batteries contain toxic and corrosive sub‐stances. Swallowing batteries may causeserious damage to health.There is a risk of fatal injury.# Keep batteries out of the reach of chil‐

dren.# If batteries are swallowed, seek medical

attention immediately.


Batteries contain toxic and corro‐sive substances.#

Take discharged batteries to aqualified specialist workshop or to acollection point for used batteries.

Requirements:R a CR2450 lithium battery

# Push a pointed object into recess1.# Slide battery cover2 backwards in the

direction of the arrow.# Insert new battery3 with the lettering

facing upwards.# Slide battery cover2 in the opposite direc‐

tion to the arrow onto the remote controluntil the battery cover engages.

182 Climate control

Problems with the remote control for the stationary heater/stationary ventilation


FAIL¨The signal transmission between the transmitter and the vehicle is faulty.# Change your position in relation to the vehicle, moving closer if necessary.

FAILThe starter battery is not sufficiently charged.# Charge the starter battery.

The fuel tank content is below the reserve fuel level.# Refuel at the nearest filling station.

FAIL¯The stationary heater is malfunctioning.# Have the stationary heater checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

Air vents

Adjusting the front air vents

& WARNING ‑ Risk of burns/frostbite dueto not maintaining a sufficient distanceto the air vents

Very hot or very cold air can flow from the airvents.

This could result in burns or frostbite in theimmediate vicinity of the air vents.# Always ensure that all vehicle occu‐

pants maintain a sufficient distance tothe air vents.

# If necessary, redirect the airflow toanother area of the vehicle interior.

To guarantee the flow of fresh air through the airvents into the vehicle interior, comply with thefollowing:R Always keep the vents and the ventilation

grille in the vehicle interior free.R Keep the air inlet free of deposits

(/ page 491).

Climate control 183

# To open or close: hold air vent1 in thecentre and turn it to the left (open) or right(closed) as far as it will go.

# To adjust the air direction: hold air vent1in the centre and move it up or down or tothe left or right.

Adjusting the rear air vents

# To open or close: hold air vent1 in thecentre and turn it to the left (open) or right(closed) as far as it will go.

# To adjust the air direction: hold air vent1in the centre and move it up or down or tothe left or right.

184 Climate control

DrivingNotes on Mercedes-AMG vehicles

Observe the notes on the following topics in theSupplement, as you may otherwise fail to recog‐nise dangers:R Emotion StartR AMG exhaust systemR RACE STARTR AMG RIDE CONTROLR AMG steering-wheel buttons

Switching on the power supply or the igni‐tion (without engine start)










Also observe the "Notes on pets in the vehicle".This also applies to the Digital Vehicle Key if the"Digital Vehicle Key" function is activated viaMercedes me connect.Requirements:R the key is in the vehicle and has been recog‐

nised.R or: a Digital Vehicle Key is located in the

marked space (/ page 187).R Vehicles with automatic transmission: the

brake pedal is not depressed.R Vehicles with manual transmission: the

clutch pedal is not depressed.

Driving and parking 185

# To switch on the power supply: press but‐ton1 once.You can activate the windscreen wiper, forexample.

The power supply is switched off again if the fol‐lowing conditions are met:R you open the driver's door.R you press button1 twice more.

# To switch on the ignition: press button1twice.The indicator lamps in the instrument clusterlight up.

The ignition is switched off again if one of thefollowing conditions is met:R vehicles with automatic transmission:you

do not start the vehicle within 15 minutesand the transmission is in positionj or theelectric parking brake is applied.R Vehicles with manual transmission: you

do not start the vehicle within 15 minutesand the electric parking brake is applied.R you press button1 once.

Starting the vehicle

Starting the vehicle with the start/stop but‐ton

& DANGER Risk of death caused byexhaust gases

Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaustgases such as carbon monoxide. Inhalingthese exhaust gases is hazardous to healthand leads to poisoning.# Never leave the engine or, if present,

the auxiliary heating running in anenclosed space without sufficient venti‐lation.

& WARNING Risk of fire due to flammablematerial in the engine compartment orthe exhaust system

Flammable materials brought in by either ani‐mals or environmental influences may igniteif they come into contact with hot parts ofthe engine or exhaust system.

186 Driving and parking

# Therefore, check regularly that thereare no flammable materials in theengine compartment or on the exhaustsystem.

Requirements:R the key is in the vehicle and is recognised.R or: a Digital Vehicle Key is located in the

marked space and is recognised(/ page 187).

# Vehicles with manual transmission:depress the clutch pedal.

# Vehicles with automatic transmission:shift the transmission to positionj ori.

# depress the brake pedal and press button1once.

# If the vehicle does not start: switch off non-essential consumers and press button1once.

If the vehicle still does not start, one of the fol‐lowing display messages appears in the multi‐function display:

# Place the key in the marked space See Own-er's Manual: start the vehicle in emergencyoperation mode (/ page 188).

or# Key not detected Place smartphone in charg-

ing bracket: place the mobile phone in themarked space (/ page 152).

% You can switch off the engine while drivingby pressing button1 for about three sec‐onds or by pressing button1 three timeswithin three seconds. Be sure to observe thesafety notes under "Driving tips"(/ page 191).

Starting the vehicle with a Digital VehicleKeyRequirements:R one of the following versions of the Digital

Vehicle Key is available:- suitable mobile phone- Digital Vehicle Key stickerR the vehicle is equipped with the "Digital Vehi‐

cle Key" function.

R the "Digital Vehicle Key" function is activatedvia Mercedes me connect: https://www.mercedes.me.R the mobile phone is sufficiently charged.

% You can check the suitability of your mobilephone by entering the phone number athttps://www.mercedes.me.Information about suitable mobile phonescan be obtained from your Mercedes-BenzService Centre or at https://www.mercedes-benz.com/connect.

% Mercedes-Benz recommends that you carrythe emergency key in case of functionrestrictions.

% The function is only available in connectionwith Mercedes me connect and only in cer‐tain countries.

% Protective cases around the mobile phonecan impair the range of functions.


Using the Digital Vehicle Key for the firsttime

# Deactivate the key2 (/ page 84).# Place the key2 in the marked space3 on

the symbol4.# Place the mobile phone or the Digital Vehicle

Key sticker in the marked space1.# Start the vehicle using the start/stop button.

Any further starts with the Digital VehicleKeyThe key is not needed for any further starts.# Place the mobile phone or the Digital Vehicle

Key sticker in the marked space1.# Start the vehicle using the start/stop button.

The "Digital Vehicle Key" service can be deacti‐vated in Mercedes me connect at https://www.mercedes.me. The function is then deacti‐vated in the mobile phone via an online connec‐tion. If connection to the Internet is not possible,e.g. after the mobile phone or the Digital VehicleKey sticker has been stolen, the key function canbe deactivated at a Mercedes-Benz servicecentre.

Starting the vehicle with key in the markedspace (emergency operation mode)If the vehicle does not start and the Place thekey in the marked space See Owner's Manualmessage appears in the multifunction display,you can start the vehicle in emergency operationmode.

Marked space (example with cup holder withoutcover)

# Open the cover of the marked space2 ifnecessary.

# Make sure that the marked space2 isempty.

# Remove the key1 from the key ring.


# Place the key1 in the marked space2 onthe symbol3.The vehicle will start after a short time.If you remove the key1 from the markedspace2 the engine continues running. Forfurther engine starts however, the key1must be located in the marked space2 onsymbol3 during the entire journey.

# Have the key1 checked at a qualified spe‐cialist workshop.

If the vehicle does not start:# place the key1 in the marked space2

and leave it there.# Vehicles with manual transmission:

depress the clutch pedal.# Depress the brake pedal and start the vehi‐

cle using the start/stop button.% You can also switch on the power supply or

the ignition with the start/stop button.

Starting the vehicle via Remote Online serv‐ices

Cooling or heating the vehicle interior beforecommencing your journey% This function is not available in all countries.If you start the vehicle via your smartphone, thepreviously selected air conditioning adjustmentis active.Ensure the following before starting the engine:R the legal stipulations in the area where your

vehicle is parked allow engine starting viasmartphone.R it is safe to start and run the engine where

your vehicle is parked.R the fuel tank is sufficiently filled.R the starter battery is sufficiently charged.

% You can also set the temperature with yoursmartphone. Information on Mercedes meconnect and other services: https://www.mercedes.meThis function is not available for all models.

Charging the battery before commencingyour journeyIf the vehicle battery is discharged, you receive amessage on your smartphone. You can thenstart the vehicle with the smartphone to chargethe battery. The vehicle is automaticallyswitched off after ten minutes.Ensure the following before starting the engine:R the legal stipulations in the area where your

vehicle is parked allow engine starting viasmartphone.R it is safe to start and run the engine where

your vehicle is parked.R the fuel tank is sufficiently filled.

Starting the vehicle (Remote Online)

& WARNING Risk of crushing or entrap‐ment due to unintentional starting of theengine

Limbs could be crushed or trapped if theengine is started unintentionally duringservice or maintenance work.


# Always secure the engine against unin‐tentional starting before carrying outmaintenance or repair work.

Requirements:R park positionj is selected.R the anti-theft alarm system is not activated.R the panic alarm is not activated.R the hazard warning light system is switched

off.R The bonnet is closed.R the doors are closed and locked.R the windows and sliding sunroof are closed.

# Start the vehicle using the smartphone.After every vehicle start, the engine runs forten minutes.

You can carry out a maximum of two consecu‐tive starting attempts. The vehicle must be star‐ted once with the key before trying to start thevehicle again with the smartphone. you can stopthe vehicle again at any time.

% Further information can be found in thesmartphone app.

Securing the engine against starting beforecarrying out maintenance or repair work:# switch on the hazard warning light system.or# unlock the doors.or# open a side window or the sliding sunroof.

Running-in notes

Mercedes-AMG vehicles: observe the notes inthe Supplement. Otherwise, you may fail to rec‐ognise dangers.To preserve the engine during the first 1,500 km:R drive at varying road speeds and engine

speeds.R drive the vehicle in drive programA

or;.R shift to the next highest gear at the very lat‐

est when the needle reaches the last thirdbefore the red area in the rev counter.

R do not shift down a gear manually in order tobrake.R avoid overstraining the vehicle, e.g. driving at

full throttle.R vehicles with automatic transmission: do

not depress the accelerator pedal beyond thepressure point (kickdown).R only increase the engine speed gradually and

accelerate the vehicle to full speed after1,500 km.

This also applies when the engine or parts of thedrivetrain have been replaced.Please also observe the following running-innotes:R in certain driving and driving safety systems,

the sensors adjust automatically while a cer‐tain distance is being driven after the vehiclehas been delivered or after repairs. Full sys‐tem effectiveness is not reached until theend of this teach-in process.R brakepads, brake discs and tyres that are

either new or have been replaced only ach‐ieve optimum braking effect and grip after


several hundred kilometres of driving. Com‐pensate for the reduced braking effect byapplying greater force to the brake pedal.

Notes on driving




# Always fit the floor mats securely andas prescribed in order to ensure thatthere is always sufficient room for thepedals.


& WARNING Risk of accident due tounsuitable footwear

Operating the pedals may be impaired bywearing unsuitable footwear, e.g.:R platform shoesR high-heeled shoesR slippers

# Always wear suitable footwear whendriving so that you can operate the ped‐als safely.

& WARNING Risk of accident when switch‐ing off the ignition when driving

If you switch off the ignition while driving,safety functions are restricted or no longeravailable. This may affect the power steeringsystem and the brake force boosting, forexample.You will then need to use considerably moreforce to steer and brake.

# Do not switch off the ignition while driv‐ing.


Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaustgases such as carbon monoxide. Inhalingthese exhaust gases is hazardous to healthand leads to poisoning.# Never leave the engine or, if present,

the auxiliary heating running in anenclosed space without sufficient venti‐lation.

& WARNING Risk of skidding and of anaccident due to shifting down on slipperyroad surfaces

If you shift down on slippery road surfaces toincrease the engine braking effect, the drivewheels may lose traction.# Do not shift down on slippery road sur‐

faces to increase the engine brakingeffect.


& DANGER Risk of fatal injury due to poi‐sonous exhaust gases

If the tailpipe is blocked or sufficient ventila‐tion is not possible, poisonous exhaust gasessuch as carbon monoxide may enter the vehi‐cle. This is the case when the vehiclebecomes stuck in snow, for example.# Keep the tailpipe and the area around

the vehicle free from snow when theengine or the stationary heater are run‐ning.

# Open a window on the side of the vehi‐cle facing away from the wind to ensurean adequate supply of fresh air.

& WARNING Risk of accident due to thebrake system overheating

If you leave your foot on the brake pedalwhen driving, the brake system may over‐heat.This increases the braking distance and thebrake system may even fail.

# Never use the brake pedal as a footrest.# Do not depress the brake pedal and the

accelerator pedal at the same timewhile driving.

* NOTE Causing wear to the brake liningsby permanently depressing the brakepedal

# Do not permanently depress the brakepedal while driving.

# To use braking effect of the engine,shift to a lower gear in good time.

* NOTE Damage to the drivetrain andengine when pulling away

# Do not warm up the engine while thevehicle is stationary. Pull away immedi‐ately.

# Avoid high engine speeds and driving atfull throttle until the engine has reachedits operating temperature.

* NOTE Damage to the catalytic converterdue to non-combusted fuel

The engine is not running smoothly and ismisfiring.Non-combusted fuel may get into the cata‐lytic converter.# Only depress the accelerator pedal

slightly.# Have the cause rectified immediately at

a qualified specialist workshop.

Notes on driving on salt-treated roadsThe braking effect is limited on salt-treatedroads.Therefore, observe the following notes:R due to salt build-up on the brake disks and

brakepads, the braking distance can increaseconsiderably or result in braking only on onesideR maintain a much greater safe distance to the

vehicle in front


To remove salt build-up:R brake occasionally while paying attention to

the traffic conditionsR carefully depress the brake pedal at the end

of the journey and when starting the nextjourney

Notes on aquaplaningAquaplaning can take place once a certainamount of water has accumulated on the roadsurface.Observe the following notes during heavy precip‐itation or in conditions in which aquaplaning mayoccur:R reduce speedR avoid tyre rutsR avoid sudden steering movementsR brake carefully

% Also observe the notes on regularly checkingwheels and tyres (/ page 524).

Notes on driving through water on the roadsurfaceWater which has entered into the vehicle candamage the engine, electrics and transmission.Water can also enter the air intake of the engineand cause engine damage.Observe the following if you must drive throughwater:R observe the maximum permissible fording

depth (/ page 562)R drive at walking pace at most, otherwise

water can enter the vehicle interior or enginecompartmentR vehicles travelling in front, or oncoming vehi‐

cles, can create waves which may exceed themaximum permissible height of the water

The braking effect of the brakes is reduced afterfording. Brake carefully while paying attention tothe traffic conditions until braking power hasbeen fully restored.

Notes on off-road driving

& WARNING Risk of accident if you do notkeep to line of fall on inclines

If you drive at an angle or turn on an incline,the vehicle could slip sideways, tip and roll‐over.# Always drive on inclines in the line of

fall (straight up or down) and do notturn.

& WARNING Risk of fire due to flammablematerials on hot parts of the exhaustsystem

Flammable material such as leaves, grass ortwigs may ignite if they come into contactwith hot parts of the exhaust system.# When driving on unpaved roads or off-

road, regularly check the vehicle under‐side.

# Remove trapped plants or other flam‐mable material, in particular.



When driving off-road, substances such as sand,mud and water or water mixed with oil may getinto the brakes. This may lead to a reduction inbraking effect or total brake failure as a result ofincreased wear. The braking characteristics willvary depending on the material that has enteredthe system. Clean the brakes after driving off-road. If you then notice reduced braking effector hear scraping noises, have the brake systemchecked at a qualified specialist workshop.Adjust your driving style to the changed brakingcharacteristics.

* NOTE Damage caused by driving overobstacles

The vehicle can be damaged by:R driving up on high kerbs or unpaved

roads.R quickly driving over obstacles such as

kerbs, speed bumps or potholes.

R heavy objects hitting the underbody orchassis components.

# Do not drive over obstacles that coulddamage the vehicle.

# Check the vehicle regularly for damageduring off-road driving.

# Adjust the vehicle speed to suit theroad surface conditions.


+ ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmentaldamage due to non-observance of pro‐hibition signs

Environmental protection has priority. Treatnature with respect.# Be sure to observe prohibition signs.

% The vehicle is designed for easily negotiableand medium off-road terrain. With off-roaduse, make sure there is the necessaryground clearance.

Checklist before driving off-roadCheck the following points before driving off-road:R Fuel levelR Vehicles with a diesel engine: AdBlue®

levelR Engine oil level: fill engine oil up to the maxi‐

mum level to ensure full gradeability(/ page 488).R Tyre-change tool kit and spare wheelR Tyres and wheels

Off-road drivingRead this section before driving your vehicle off-road. Practise by driving over more gentle off-road terrain first.R Observe the notes on the cross-country ABS

(/ page 226).R If necessary, select theF (/ page 199)

drive program before driving off-road.

R Always keep the engine running and in gearwhen driving on downhill gradients and


slopes. Observe the notes on driving inmountainous terrain.R Do not drive on unknown terrain that is not

easily visible and stay on marked routes.R Always keep the doors and windows closed

while the vehicle is in motion.R Deactivate Active Distance Assist

DISTRONIC, cruise control and the variablelimiter.R Adapt your driving style to the terrain.R Do not use the HOLD function on steep

downhill or uphill gradients with slippery orloose surfaces.

Driving on sandWhen driving on sand, also observe the followinginstructions:R Select theF drive program.R Shift to a lower gear.R Drive quickly to overcome the rolling resist‐

ance, otherwise the vehicle may dig itself in.

R Drive in the tracks of other vehicles if possi‐ble. Make sure that the following prerequi‐sites are met:- the tyre ruts are not too deep- the sand is firm enough- the ground clearance is sufficient

Mercedes-AMG vehicles: observe the notes inthe Supplement. You could otherwise fail to rec‐ognise dangers.FordingAlso observe the following information whenfording:R Drive at no more than 10 km/h.R Observe the maximum permissible fording

depth (/ page 562).R Switch off automatic climate control

(/ page 177).R Vehicles with stationary heater/ventila‐

tion: switch the stationary heater/ventilationoff (/ page 179).R Ensure that a bow wave does not form as you

drive.

R Do not stop in the water and do not switchoff the engine. Ensure the ECO start/stopfunction is switched off (/ page 197).

Driving in mountainous terrainAlso observe the following information whendriving in mountainous terrain:R Observe the values of the approach/depar‐

ture angle and of the maximum gradient(/ page 562).R Avoid high engine speeds.R Use the braking power of the engine when

driving downhill.R Shift to a lower gear on uphill gradients and

on long, steep downhill gradients.R Activate DSR before driving downhill, if nec‐

essary (/ page 241).

Checklist after driving off-roadDriving off-road places greater demands on yourvehicle than driving on normal roads. Check theentire vehicle for damage and foreign bodiesevery time after driving off-road. Foreign bodiesin the wheels or drivetrain can lead to imbalan‐ces and therefore vibrations.


R If theF drive program is selected: selectanother drive program.R Switch DSR off.R Apply the brakes to dry them after fording.R Check that the service brake is working nor‐

mally after a long downhill stretch.R Clean the following components every time

after driving off-road:- licence plate number- headlamps and tail lamps- tyres, wheels and wheel arches- underbodyR After driving through sand, mud, water or

gravel, have the following componentschecked and cleaned:- brake discs and brakepads- Tyres and wheels- axle joints

ECO start/stop function

Operation of the ECO start/stop functionMercedes-AMG vehicles: observe the notes inthe Supplement. You could otherwise fail to rec‐ognise dangers.The engine is switched off automatically in thefollowing situations if all vehicle conditions foran automatic engine stop are met:R vehicles with manual transmission: you

brake the vehicle, shift into neutrali whentravelling at a low speed and then release theclutch pedal.R vehicles with automatic transmission:

you brake the vehicle to a standstill in trans‐mission positionh ori.

Vehicles with automatic transmission:if you switch on the HOLD function in transmis‐sion positionh ori, the engine will automati‐cally stop in the following situations:R you stop behind a vehicle that is pulling

away.R you stop at a stop sign when there is no vehi‐

cle in front of you.

R you turn the steering wheel hard at a lowspeed.

% In transmission positionk, the engine isnot switched off automatically even whenthe HOLD function is switched on.

The engine is restarted automatically if:R vehicles with automatic transmission: in

transmission positionh, you release thebrake pedal when the HOLD function is notactive.R vehicles with automatic transmission:

you shift into transmission positionh ork.R you depress the accelerator pedal.R you engage drive programB orF.R an automatic engine start is required by the

vehicle.

ECO start/stop function symbols in the multi‐function display:R the symbolè (green) appears when the

vehicle is at a standstill: the engine wasswitched off by the ECO start/stop function.


R the symbolç (yellow) appears when thevehicle is at a standstill: not all vehicle condi‐tions for an engine stop have been met.R neither the symbolè norç appears

when the vehicle is at a standstill: an intelli‐gent stop inhibitor was detected, e.g. a stopsign.R the symbolèOFF appears: the ECO

start/stop function is deactivated or there isa malfunction.

% If, in spite of an intelligent stop inhibitor, theengine should be switched off by the ECOstart/stop function, you have the followingoptions:R switch on the HOLD function in transmis‐

sion positionh ori.R you engage transmission positionj.

If the engine was switched off by the ECO start/stop function and you leave the vehicle, a warn‐ing tone sounds and the engine is not restarted.The display message Vehicle is operationalSwitch off ignition before exitingalso appears inthe multifunction display. If you do not switch off

the ignition, the ignition is automaticallyswitched off after three minutes.

Deactivating or activating the ECO start/stop function

# Press button1.A display appears in the instrument clusterwhen switching the ECO start/stop functionoff/on.

% A continuous display appears in the instru‐ment cluster while the ECO start/stop func‐tion is deactivated.

ECO display function

The ECO display summarises your driving char‐acteristics from the start of the journey to itscompletion and assists you in achieving themost economical driving style.You can influence consumption if you:R drive with particular careR Vehicles with automatic transmission:

drive in drive program;.R Vehicles with manual transmission: drive

in drive programA.R observe the gearshift recommendations


The lettering in the segment will light up brightly,the outer edge will light up and the segment willfill up when the following driving style is adop‐ted:R 1 Steady speedR 2 Gentle deceleration and rollingR 3 Moderate acceleration

The lettering in the segment will be grey, theouter edge will be dark and the segment willempty when the following driving style is adop‐ted:R 1 Fluctuations in speedR 2 Heavy braking

R 3 Sporty acceleration

The ECO display will show you when you havedriven economically:R The three segments will fill up completely at

the same timeR The edge around all three segments will light

up

The additional range achieved as a result of yourdriving style in comparison with a driver with avery sporty driving style will be shown in thecentre of the display4. The range displayeddoes not indicate a fixed reduction in consump‐tion.

DYNAMIC SELECT switchFunction of the DYNAMIC SELECT switch

Mercedes-AMG vehicles: observe the notes inthe Supplement. You could otherwise fail to rec‐ognise dangers.

Use the DYNAMIC SELECT switch to changebetween the following drive programs:= (Individual): individual settingsC (Sport): sporty driving styleA (Comfort): comfortable and economical

driving style; (Eco): particularly economical driving

style (vehicles with automatic transmis‐sion)

F Offroad: driving on less demanding off-road terrain

% The drive program selected appears in themultifunction display of the on-board com‐puter.

Depending on the drive program, the followingsystems change their characteristics:R drive

- engine and transmission management- Active Distance Assist DISTRONICR ESP®


R vehicles with adaptive damping adjust‐ment: suspensionR electric power steering

Notes on the roof load display

Certain drive programs and ESP® settings areunsuitable for transporting a roof load.If one of these drive programs is set or selected,

the symbol is shown as a warning. Whenthis symbol is shown, the selected drive programis not suitable for transporting a load on theroof.The following drive programs are affected:R Sport drive programR Individual drive program with the Sport

ESP® setting

% The symbol is also shown in the following sit‐uations:R Within the themes if a corresponding

drive program is saved

For more information on themes see(/ page 346).R Within the reset display if the previously

active drive program is unsuitable for thetransport of a roof loadFor further information on the reset dis‐play, see (/ page 200).

Selecting the drive program

% Depending on the equipment, the vehicle isfitted with either a switch or a button.

# Press DYNAMIC SELECT switch1 forwardsor backwards.The drive program selected appears in themultifunction display.


# Press DYNAMIC SELECT button2.The DYNAMIC SELECT menu appears in themultifunction display.

# Press DYNAMIC SELECT button2 again.The chosen drive program appears.

Configuring DYNAMIC SELECT (multimediasystem)

Multimedia system:4© 5 Settings 5 Vehicle5 DYNAMIC SELECT

Setting drive program I# Select Individual config..# Select and set a category.

Switching the reset display on/off# Switch Ask when starting on or off.

Function on: the next time the vehicle is starteda prompt appears asking whether the last activedrive program should be restored. If the ECOstart/stop function was deactivated, an addi‐tional prompt appears asking if the functionshould remain deactivated.% The prompt appears only if the previously

active settings deviate from the standardsettings.

Function off: the next time the vehicle is star‐ted theA drive program is set automatically.

The ECO start/stop function is activated auto‐matically.% This function must be activated for each user

profile separately. Only when this function isactivated will the drive program and Ecostart/stop setting for the previous journeybe saved for the respective user profile.

Displaying vehicle data

Multimedia system:4© 5 Info# Select Vehicle.

The vehicle data is displayed.

Displaying engine data

Multimedia system:4© 5 Info# Select Engine.

The engine data is displayed.


% The actual (maximum) values that can beachieved for engine output and engine tor‐que may deviate from the certified valueswithin the country-specific guidelines forpermissible tolerances (basis: UN-ECE No.85 or country-specific guidelines).Factors that can influence this are, for exam‐ple:R Sea levelR Fuel gradeR Outside temperature

% The values displayed serve only as orienta‐tion. The values for engine output andengine torque shown in the media displaymay deviate from the actual values.

Calling up fuel consumption indicator

Multimedia system:4© 5 Info# Select Consumption.

The current and average fuel consumption isdisplayed.

Manual transmissionOperating the gearshift lever











* NOTE Damage to the engine and trans‐mission by shifting to a gear that is toolow

# When changing between gears5 and6 push the gearshift lever to the right.

# Do not shift down at high speeds.

* NOTE Damage of the coupling due toimproper use

Holding the vehicle on inclines with a slippingclutch can damage it.# Do not allow the clutch to slip in order

to hold the vehicle on inclines.


* NOTE Damage to the transmission byshifting to reverse geark while thevehicle is in motion

# Only shift into reverse geark whenthe vehicle is stationary.

k Reverse gear1 -6 Forward gearsi Neutral

# Engaging forward gears1 -6 or neu‐trali :R depress the clutch pedal completely.R turn the gearshift lever to the desired

position.

# Engaging reverse geark :R depress the clutch pedal completely.R pull the gearshift lever up, push it to the

left and then pull it back.

Gearshift recommendation

The gearshift recommendation assists you inadopting an economical driving style.

# If gearshift recommendation message1appears on the multifunction display, shift tothe recommended gear.


Automatic transmissionDIRECT SELECT lever

Function of the DIRECT SELECT lever

& WARNING Risk of accident due to incor‐rect gearshifting

If the engine speed is higher than the idlespeed and you engage the transmission posi‐tionh ork, the vehicle may acceleratesharply.# If you engage the transmission position

h ork when the vehicle is at astandstill, always depress the brakepedal firmly and do not accelerate atthe same time.










This also applies to the Digital Vehicle Key if the"Digital Vehicle Key" function is activated viaMercedes me connect.Use the DIRECT SELECT lever to shift the trans‐mission position. The current transmission posi‐tion is displayed in the multifunction display.


j Park positionk Reverse geari Neutralh Drive position

Engaging reverse gear R# Depress the brake pedal and push the

DIRECT SELECT lever upwards past the firstpoint of resistance.The transmission position displayk isshown in the multifunction display.

Engaging neutral N# Depress the brake pedal and push the

DIRECT SELECT lever up or down to the firstpoint of resistance.The transmission position displayi isshown in the multifunction display.

Subsequently releasing the brake pedal willallow you to move the vehicle freely, e.g. to pushit or tow it away.

Proceed as follows if you want the automatictransmission to remain in neutralii even ifthe ignition is switched off or the driver'sdoor is opened:# Start the vehicle.# Depress the brake pedal and engage neutral

i when the car is stationary.# Release the brake pedal.

# Switch the ignition off.% If you then exit the vehicle leaving the key in

the vehicle, the automatic transmissionremains in neutrali.

Engaging park position P# Observe the notes on parking the vehicle

(/ page 215).# Depress the brake pedal until the vehicle is

stationary.# When the vehicle is stationary, press button

j.Park position is only engaged when thetransmission position displayj is shown inthe multifunction display. If no transmissionposition displayj appears, secure the vehi‐cle to prevent it from rolling away.

Park positionj is engaged automatically if oneof the following conditions is met:R you switch off the ignition when the vehicle

is stationary and the transmission is in posi‐tionh ork.R you open the driver's door when the vehicle

is stationary or when driving at a very low


speed and the transmission is in positionhork.

% To manoeuvre with an open driver's door,open the driver's door while stationary andengage transmission positionh orkagain.

% At very low outside temperatures belowapprox. -20 °C, you may not be able to shiftthe transmission fromj to another trans‐mission position when the engine isswitched off. If this is the case, only changethe transmission position while the engine isrunning.

Engaging drive position D# Depress the brake pedal and push the

DIRECT SELECT lever down past the firstpoint of resistance.The transmission position displayh isshown in the multifunction display.

When the automatic transmission is in transmis‐sion positionh, it shifts the gears automati‐cally. This depends, among other things, on thefollowing factors:R the selected drive programR the position of the accelerator pedalR the driving speed

Manual gearshifting

& WARNING Risk of skidding and of anaccident due to shifting down on slipperyroad surfaces

If you shift down on slippery road surfaces toincrease the engine braking effect, the drivewheels may lose traction.# Do not shift down on slippery road sur‐

faces to increase the engine brakingeffect.

When the automatic transmission is shifted topositionh, you can manually shift it with thesteering wheel gearshift paddle. If permitted, theautomatic transmission shifts to a higher orlower gear depending on the steering wheelgearshift paddle being pulled.You have two options to manually shift the auto‐matic transmission:R temporary settingR permanent setting

The gears shift automatically when manual gear‐shifting is deactivated.Temporary setting:


# to activate: pull steering wheel gearshiftpaddle1 or2.Manual gearshifting is activated for a shorttime. Transmission positionp and the cur‐rent gear appear in the multifunction display.

% How long the manual gearshifting stays acti‐vated is dependant on various factors. Man‐ual shifting can be deactivated automaticallywhen changing the drive program, restartingthe vehicle when the transmission position isengaged againh or due to the driving style.

# To shift up: pull steering wheel gearshiftpaddle2.

# To shift down: pull steering wheel gearshiftpaddle1.If you pull and hold the steering wheel gear‐shift paddle1, the transmission shifts tothe lowest possible gear.

# To deactivate: pull steering wheel gearshiftpaddle2 and hold it in place.The transmission positionh appears in themultifunction display.

Permanent setting:

# change to drive program=(/ page 199).# Select drive settingp (/ page 200).

Mercedes-AMG vehicles: observe the notes inthe Supplement. Otherwise, you may fail to rec‐ognise dangers.

Gearshift recommendation

Mercedes-AMG vehicles: observe the notes inthe Supplement. Otherwise, you may fail to rec‐ognise dangers.The gearshift recommendation assists you inadopting an economical driving style.

# If gearshift recommendation message1 isshown on the multifunction display, shift tothe recommended gear.

Using kickdown

Mercedes-AMG vehicles: observe the notes inthe Supplement. Otherwise, you may fail to rec‐ognise dangers.# Maximum acceleration: depress the accel‐

erator pedal beyond the pressure point.

The automatic transmission shifts up to the nextgear when the maximum engine speed isreached to protect the engine from overrevving.

Glide mode function

Mercedes-AMG vehicles: observe the notes inthe Supplement. Otherwise, you may fail to rec‐ognise dangers.With an anticipatory driving style, Glide modehelps you to reduce fuel consumption.


Glide mode is characterised by the following:R the combustion engine is disconnected from

the drivetrain and continues to run in neutral.R the transmission positionh is displayed in

green in the multifunction display.

Glide mode is activated if the following condi‐tions are met:R drive program; is selected.R the speed is within a suitable range.R the road's course is suitable, e.g. no steep

uphill or downhill inclines or tight bends.R there is no trailer coupled to the trailer hitch,

and no bicycle rack fitted.R you do not depress the accelerator or brake

pedal (except for light brake applications).

% Glide mode can also be activated if you haveselected the "Eco" setting for the drive in thedrive program=.

Glide mode is deactivated again if one of theconditions is no longer met.Vehicles with Active Distance AssistDISTRONIC: when Active Distance Assist

DISTRONIC is active, the glide mode function isnot available.Glide mode can also be prevented by the follow‐ing parameters:R InclineR Downhill gradientR temperatureR heightR SpeedR operating status of the engineR traffic situation

% Glide mode can be ended by pressing asteering wheel gearshift paddle(/ page 205).


Problems with the transmission


The transmission has a faulty gearshift.

The transmission is losing oil.# Have the transmission checked at a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

The acceleration characteristics aredeteriorating.The transmission no longer shifts gear.

The transmission is in emergency operation mode.# Pull over and stop the vehicle, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.# Switch the transmission to positionj.# Switch off the engine.# Wait at least ten seconds before restarting the engine.# Switch the transmission to positionh.# Have the transmission checked at a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

Function of the 4MATIC4MATIC ensures that all four wheels are drivenwhen needed. Together with ESP® and 4ETS,4MATIC improves the traction of your vehiclewhenever a driven wheel spins due to insuffi‐cient traction.

If you fail to adapt your driving style, 4MATIC canneither reduce the risk of an accident nor over‐ride the laws of physics. 4MATIC cannot takeaccount of road, weather and traffic conditions.4MATIC is only an aid. You are responsible espe‐cially for maintaining a safe distance from thevehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for braking ingood time and for staying in lane.

% In wintry road conditions, the maximumeffect of 4MATIC can be achieved only if youuse winter tyres (M+S tyres), with snowchains if necessary.


RefuellingRefuelling the vehicle

& WARNING Risk of fire or explosion fromfuel

Fuels are highly flammable.# Fire, naked flames, smoking and crea‐

tion of sparks must be avoided.# Switch off the ignition and, if available,

the stationary heater, before and whilerefuelling the vehicle.

& WARNING Risk of injury from fuels

Fuels are poisonous and hazardous to yourhealth.# Do not swallow fuel or let it come into

contact with skin, eyes or clothing.# Do not inhale fuel vapour.# Keep children away from fuel.# Keep doors and windows closed during

the refuelling process.

If you or other people come into contact withfuel, observe the following:# Immediately rinse fuel off your skin with

soap and water.# If fuel comes into contact with your

eyes, immediately rinse them thor‐oughly with clean water. Seek medicalattention immediately.

# If you swallow fuel, seek medical atten‐tion immediately. Do not induce vomit‐ing.

# Change immediately out of clothing thathas come into contact with fuel.

& WARNING Risk of fire and explosion dueto electrostatic charge

Electrostatic charge can create sparks andthereby ignite fuel vapours.

# Before you open the fuel filler cap ortake hold of the pump nozzle, touch themetallic vehicle body.This discharges any electrostatic chargethat may have built up.

# Do not get into the vehicle again duringthe refuelling process.Otherwise, electrostatic charge canbuild up again.

& WARNING Risk of fire from fuel mixture

Vehicles with a diesel engine:If you mix diesel fuel with petrol, the flashpoint of the fuel mixture is lower than that ofpure diesel fuel.While the engine is running, componentparts in the exhaust system may overheatwithout warning.# Never refuel using petrol.# Never mix petrol with diesel fuel.


* NOTE Damage caused by the wrong fuel

Vehicles with a petrol engine:Even small amounts of the wrong fuel couldresult in damage to the fuel system, theengine and the emission control system.# Only refuel using unleaded, sulphur-free

fuel that conforms to European EN 228,or an equivalent specification.

# The RON requirement is located in thefuel filler flap.

Fuel of this specification may contain up to10% ethanol. Your vehicle is suitable for usewith E10 fuel.Never refuel using any of the following fuels:R dieselR regular petrol with an octane number

lower than 91 RONR petrol with more than 10% ethanol by vol‐

ume, e.g. E15, E30, E85, E100

R petrol with more than 3% methanol byvolume, e.g. M15, M30R petrol with additives containing metal

If you accidentally refuel with the wrong fuel:# Do not switch the ignition on.# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.


Vehicles with a diesel engine:Even small amounts of the wrong fuel couldresult in damage to the fuel system, theengine and the emission control system.# Only refuel using sulphur-free diesel

fuel that conforms to European stand‐ard EN 590, or an equivalent specifica‐tion.In countries without sulphur-free dieselfuel, refuel using only low-sulphur dieselfuel with a sulphur content less than50 ppm.

Never refuel using any of the following fuels:R petrolR marine dieselR heating oilR pure bio-diesel fuel or vegetable oilR paraffin or kerosene

If you accidentally refuel with the wrong fuel:# Do not switch the ignition on.# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

* NOTE Do not use diesel to refuel vehi‐cles with a petrol engine

If you have accidentally refuelled with thewrong fuel:R do not switch the ignition on. Otherwise

fuel can enter the engine.Even small amounts of the wrong fuelcould result in damage to the fuel systemand the engine. The repair costs are high.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.


# Have the fuel tank and fuel linesdrained completely.

* NOTE Do not use petrol to refuel vehi‐cles with a diesel engine

If you have accidentally refuelled with thewrong fuel:R do not switch the ignition on. Otherwise,

fuel can enter the fuel system.Even small amounts of the wrong fuelcould result in damage to the fuel systemand the engine. The repair costs are high.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.# Have the fuel tank and fuel lines

drained completely.

* NOTE Damage to the fuel system causedby overfilled fuel tanks

# Only fill the fuel tank until the pumpnozzle switches off.

If you have added too much fuel because of adefective filling pump, for instance:# Do not switch the ignition on.# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

* NOTE Fuel may spray out when youremove the fuel pump nozzle

# Only fill the fuel tank until the pumpnozzle switches off.

Requirements:R The vehicle is unlocked (/ page 83).

% Do not get into the vehicle again during therefuelling process. Otherwise, electrostaticcharge could build up again.

Observe the notes on operating fluids(/ page 552).

1 Fuel filler flap2 Bracket for fuel filler cap3 Fuel type4 Tyre pressure table5 QR code for rescue card

# Press on the back area of fuel filler flap1.# Turn the fuel filler cap anti-clockwise and

remove it.


# Insert the fuel filler cap from above intobracket2.

# Completely insert the pump nozzle into thetank filler neck, hook in place and refuel.

# Only fill the fuel tank until the pump nozzleswitches off.

% Vehicles with a diesel engine: the tankfiller neck is designed for refuelling at dieselfilling pumps.

% Vehicles with a diesel engine: when thefuel tank is completely empty, top up with atleast 5 litres of diesel.

% Vehicles with a diesel engine: use a fillerneck with a large diameter for vehicles witha diesel engine when topping up fuel from afuel can. Otherwise, the filler neck cannotslide into the tank.

# Replace the cap on the filler neck and turnclockwise until it engages audibly.

# Close fuel filler flap1.% Close the fuel filler flap before locking the

vehicle.

AdBlue® (vehicles with a diesel engine only)

Notes on refilling AdBlue®

* NOTE Small amounts of ammonia vapourmay be released when opening theAdBlue® tank

# Only fill the AdBlue® tank in well-venti‐lated areas.

# Do not let AdBlue® come into contactwith skin, eyes or clothes.

# Keep AdBlue® away from children.

* NOTE Do not ingest AdBlue®

If AdBlue® is swallowed:# Immediately rinse out your mouth thor‐

oughly.# Drink plenty of water.# Seek medical attention immediately.


AdBlue® is a water-soluble fluid for the NOxexhaust gas aftertreatment of diesel engines. Inorder for the exhaust gas aftertreatment to func‐tion properly, only use AdBlue® in accordancewith ISO 22241.

AdBlue® is characterised by the following:R non-toxicR colourless and odourlessR non-flammable

AdBlue® is available here:R AdBlue® can be topped up by fast service at

a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. aMercedes-Benz Service Centre.R AdBlue® is available at many filling stations

from AdBlue® filling pumps.R Alternatively, AdBlue® is available at qualified

specialist workshops, e.g. Mercedes-BenzService Centres, and at many filling stationsin AdBlue® refill canisters or AdBlue® refillbottles.


% Ensure the connection between the refillcontainer and vehicle filler neck does notdrip.

Topping up AdBlue®

* NOTE Engine damage due to AdBlue®being in the fuel

# AdBlue® must not be used to fill thefuel tank.

# Only use AdBlue® to fill the AdBlue®tank.

# Do not overfill the AdBlue® tank.

* NOTE Contamination of the vehicle inte‐rior due to AdBlue® leakage

# After topping up, carefully close theAdBlue® refill container.

# Avoid carrying AdBlue® refill containerspermanently in the vehicle.

Requirements:R The vehicle is unlocked.

The following messages appear in order in themultifunction display when the AdBlue® tankrequires topping up:R Refill AdBlue See Owner’s ManualThe

AdBlue® level has fallen below the reserverange. Top up with at least 5 l of AdBlue®.R Top up AdBlue Emergency op. in XXX miles

See Owner's ManualThe low AdBlue® levelwill lead to limited performance after theremaining distance displayed has beendriven. Top up with at least 5 l of AdBlue®.R XX,X l Top up AdBlue Emer. op.: max. XXX

km/h Start not poss. in XXX kmThe lowAdBlue® level will lead to limited perform‐ance from the speed displayed. After theremaining distance displayed has been cov‐ered, it will no longer be possible to start theengine. Top up with at least the amount ofAdBlue® displayed.R XX,X l Top up AdBlue Switch on ignition, wait

60 sec. or eng. start not poss.. The AdBlue®tank is empty. You can no longer start theengine. Top up with at least the amount of

AdBlue® displayed. Switch on the ignitionand wait for approximately 60 seconds. Startthe engine.

You can see the AdBlue® range and level in themultifunction display (/ page 300).% The AdBlue® range shown depends strongly

on the driving style and operating condi‐tions. The actual range can therefore deviatefrom the calculated range.


Opening the AdBlue® filler cap

# Press on the back area of fuel filler flap1.# Turn AdBlue® filler cap2 anti-clockwise and

remove it.% You can also store the AdBlue® filler cap in

the fuel filler cap holder in the fuel filler flaphinge arm.

Preparing the AdBlue® refill canister

# Screw on the fastener of AdBlue® refill canis‐ter2.

# Screw disposable hose1 onto the openingof AdBlue® refill canister2 until hand-tight.

Topping up AdBlue®

# Screw disposable hose1 onto the fillerneck of the vehicle until hand-tight.

# Lift up and tip AdBlue® refill canister2.The filling process stops when the AdBlue®tank is completely full.

AdBlue® refill canister2 can be removedwhen it has been only partially emptied.


# Unscrew and close disposable hose1 andAdBlue® refill canister2 in reverse order.

# Replace the AdBlue® filler cap and turn itclockwise.

# Close the fuel filler flap.# Switch on the ignition for at least 60 sec‐

onds.

% If the vehicle could not be started as theAdBlue® tank was empty, it can take up to60 seconds for the refill to be detected.

# Start the vehicle.% Avoid storing AdBlue® refill containers per‐

manently in the vehicle.

ParkingParking the vehicle

& WARNING Risk of accident and injurycaused by an insufficiently secured vehi‐cle rolling away.

If the vehicle is not securely parked suffi‐ciently, it can roll away in an uncontrolledway even at a slight downhill gradient.# Ensure that the parked vehicle is always

properly secured against rolling away asfollows:R on uphill or downhill gradients, turn

the front wheels so that the vehiclerolls towards the kerb if it startsmoving.R apply the parking brake.R vehicles with automatic transmis‐

sion: shift the transmission to posi‐tionj.R vehicles with manual transmission:

engage first1 or reverse geark.

& WARNING Risk of fire caused by hotexhaust system parts

Flammable material such as leaves, grass ortwigs may ignite if they come into contactwith hot parts of the exhaust system orexhaust gas flow.# Park the vehicle so that no flammable

material can come into contact with hotvehicle components.

# In particular, do not park on dry grass‐land or harvested grain fields.




fic.


R Operate vehicle equipment and becometrapped, for example.






* NOTE Damage to the vehicle due to itrolling away

# Always secure the vehicle against roll‐ing away.

# Bring the vehicle to a standstill by applyingthe brake pedal.

# On uphill or downhill gradients, turn the frontwheels so that the vehicle rolls towards thekerb if it starts moving.

# Apply the electric parking brake.# Vehicles with manual transmission:

engage first1 or reverse geark.

# Vehicles with automatic transmission:engage transmission positionj in a station‐ary vehicle with the brake pedal applied(/ page 204).

# Switch off the engine and the ignition bypressing the1 button.

# Release the service brake slowly.# Get out of the vehicle and lock it.% When you park the vehicle, you can still

operate the side windows and the panoramicsliding sunroof for approximately fiveminutes if the driver's door is closed.

Garage door opener

Programming buttons for the garage dooropener


Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaustgases such as carbon monoxide. Inhalingthese exhaust gases is hazardous to healthand leads to poisoning.


# Never leave the engine or, if present,the auxiliary heating running in anenclosed space without sufficient venti‐lation.

& WARNING Risk of injury when openingor closing a door with the garage dooropener

When you operate or program the door withthe integrated garage door opener, people inthe range of movement of the door maybecome trapped or struck by the door.# When using the integrated garage door

opener, always make sure that nobodyis within the range of movement of thedoor.

Requirements:R The vehicle has been parked outside the

garage or outside the range of movement ofthe door.R The engine is switched off.R The ignition is switched on.

% The garage door opener function is alwaysavailable when the ignition is switched on.

# Press and hold button1,2 or3 that youwish to program.Indicator lamp4 flashes yellow.

% It can take up to 20 seconds before the indi‐cator lamp flashes yellow.

# Release the previously pressed button.Indicator lamp4 continues to flash yellow.

# Point remote control5 from a distance of1 cm to 8 cm towards button1,2 or3.

# Press and hold button6 of remote control5 until one of the following signals appears:R Indicator lamp4 lights up green contin‐

uously. Programming is complete.R Indicator lamp4 flashes green. Pro‐

gramming was successful. Additionally,synchronisation of the rolling code withthe door system must also be carried out.

# If indicator lamp4 does not light up or flashgreen: repeat the procedure.

# Release all of the buttons.% The remote control for the door drive is not

included in the scope of delivery of thegarage door opener.

Synchronising the rolling codeRequirements:R The door system uses a rolling code.R The vehicle must be within range of the

garage door or door drive.


R The vehicle as well as persons and objects,are located outside the range of movementof the door.

# Press the programming button on the doordrive unit.Initiate the next step within approximately30 seconds.

# Press previously programmed button1,2or3 repeatedly until the door closes.When the door closes, programming is com‐pleted.

% Please also read the operating instructionsfor the door drive.

Troubleshooting when programming theremote control

# Check if the transmitter frequency of remotecontrol5 is supported.

# Replace the batteries in remote control5.# Hold remote control5 at various angles

from a distance of 1 cm to 8 cm in front of

the inside rearview mirror. You should testevery position for at least 25 seconds beforetrying another position.

# Hold remote control5 at the same anglesat various distances in front of the inside rearview mirror. You should test every positionfor at least 25 seconds before trying anotherposition.

# Note that some remote controls transmitonly for a limited period, press button6 onremote control5 again before transmissionends.

# Align the aerial line of the door opener unitwith the remote control.

% Support and additional information on pro‐gramming:R On the HomeLink® Hotline on (0) 08000

466 354 65 or +49 (0) 6838 907-277.R On the Internet at https://

www.homelink.com.

Opening or closing the doorRequirements:


R The corresponding button is programmed tooperate the door.

# Press and hold buttons1,2 or3 untilthe door opens or closes.

# If indicator lamp4 flashes yellow afterapproximately 20 seconds: press and holdthe previously pressed button again until thedoor opens or closes.

Clearing the garage door opener memory

# Press and hold buttons1 and3.Indicator lamp4 lights up yellow.

# If indicator lamp4 flashes green: releasebuttons1 and3.The entire memory has been deleted.

Radio equipment approval numbers for thegarage door opener

Radio equipment approval numbers

Brazil

Este equipamento opera em caráter secundário,isto é, não tem direito à proteção contra interfer‐ência prejudicial, mesmo de estações do mesmotipo, e não pode causar interferência a sistemasoperando em caráter primário.Para maiores informações acessarwww.anatel.gov.br




Egypt TAC.2511151293.WIR

Andorra CE

Australia R-NZ

Barbados MED1578

Chile 2488/DFRS20576/F-74

EuropeanUnion

CE

Gibraltar CE

Iceland CE

Jordan TRC/LPD/2015/299

Canada IC: 4112A-MUAHL5

Kuwait CE

Liechten‐stein

CE


Mexico RCPGEMU15-0448

Monaco CE

New Zea‐land

R-NZ

Norway CE

RussianFedera‐tion

Not required

Saudi Ara‐bia

TA 10525

Switzer‐land

CE

SouthAfrica

TA-2015/1386


Turkey Not required

UnitedArab Emi‐rates

ER41849/15Dealer No: DA35176/14

UnitedStates

FCC ID: NZLMUAHL5

Further information on the declaration of con‐formity for wireless vehicle components(/ page 24).


Electric parking brake

Electric parking brake function (applyingautomatically)










This also applies to the Digital Vehicle Key if the"Digital Vehicle Key" function is activated viaMercedes me connect.Vehicles with manual transmission:If you have previously driven at a speed above3 km/h and the vehicle then comes to a stand‐still, the electric parking brake is applied if oneof the following conditions is fulfilled:R The engine is switched off.R The driver's door is opened.

The electric parking brake is also applied whilethe vehicle is kept stationary by the HOLD func‐tion if one of the following conditions is fulfilled:R The engine is switched off.

R The seat belt tongue is not inserted in theseat belt buckle of the driver's seat and thedriver's door is opened.R There is a system malfunction.R The power supply is insufficient.R The vehicle is stationary for a lengthy period.

When the electric parking brake is applied, thered! indicator lamp appears in the instru‐ment cluster.If the electric parking brake is not applied whenthe driver's door is opened, the Risk of vehiclerolling away Apply parking brake See Owner'sManual message appears.The electric parking brake is not automaticallyapplied if the engine is switched off by the ECOstart/stop function.% To prevent application: pull the handle of the

electric parking brake.Vehicles with automatic transmission:


The electric parking brake is applied if the trans‐mission is in positionj and one of the follow‐ing conditions is fulfilled:R The engine is switched off.R The seat belt tongue is not inserted in the

seat belt buckle of the driver's seat and thedriver's door is opened.

% To prevent application: pull the handle of theelectric parking brake.

In the following situations, the electric parkingbrake is also applied:R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is bringing

the vehicle to a standstill.R The HOLD function is keeping the vehicle sta‐

tionary.R Active Parking Assist is keeping the vehicle

stationary.

This is the case if one of the following conditionsis also fulfilled:R The engine is switched off.

R The seat belt tongue is not inserted in theseat belt buckle of the driver's seat and thedriver's door is opened.R There is a system malfunction.R The power supply is insufficient.R The vehicle is stationary for a lengthy period.

When the electric parking brake is applied, thered! indicator lamp appears in the instru‐ment cluster.The electric parking brake is not automaticallyapplied if the engine is switched off by the ECOstart/stop function.

Electric parking brake function (releasingautomatically)The electric parking brake is released when thefollowing conditions are fulfilled:R The driver's door is closed.R The engine is running.R Vehicles with manual transmission: a gear

has been selected, you release the clutchpedal and depress the accelerator pedal.R The driver's door is closed.

R You apply the brakes and shift from neutrali into reverse geark or a forward gear(1 -6) when on level ground.R Vehicles with automatic transmission: the

transmission is in positionh ork and youdepress the accelerator pedal or you shiftfrom transmission positionj toh orkwhen on level ground with the driver's doorclosed.R If the transmission is in positionk, the tail‐

gate must be closed.R The seat belt tongue is inserted into the seat

belt buckle of the driver's seat.

Vehicles with automatic transmission: if the seatbelt tongue is not inserted into the seat beltbuckle of the driver's seat, the following condi‐tions must be fulfilled:R You shift from transmission positionj.R You have previously driven at speeds greater

than 3 km/h

When the electric parking brake is released, thered! indicator lamp in the instrument clus‐ter goes out.


Applying/releasing the electric parkingbrake manually

Applying

# Push handle1.The red! indicator lamp appears in theinstrument cluster.

% The electric parking brake is only securelyapplied if the indicator lamp is lit continu‐ously.

Releasing# Switch on the ignition.# Pull handle1.

The red! indicator lamp in the instru‐ment cluster goes out.

Emergency braking# Press and hold handle1.

As long as the vehicle is driving, the Releaseparking brake message is displayed.When the vehicle has been braked to astandstill, the electric parking brake isapplied. The red! indicator lamp appearsin the instrument cluster.

Information on detecting damage on aparked vehicle

If a collision is detected when the tow-away pro‐tection is primed on a locked vehicle, you will

receive a notification in the multimedia systemwhen you switch on the ignition.You will receive information about the followingpoints:R The area of the vehicle that may have been

damaged.R The force of the impact.

The following situations can lead to inadvertentactivation:R The parked vehicle is moved, e.g. in a two-

storey garage.

% Deactivate tow-away protection in order toprevent inadvertent activation. If you deacti‐vate tow-away protection, damage detectionwill also be deactivated.

System limitsDetection may be restricted in the following sit‐uations:R The vehicle is damaged without impact, e.g.

if an outside mirror is torn off or the paint isdamaged by a key.R Impact occurs at low speed.


R The electric parking brake is not applied.

Notes on parking up the vehicle

If you leave the vehicle parked up for longer thansix weeks, it may suffer damage through disuse.The 12 V battery may also be impaired or dam‐aged by heavy discharging.% Further information can be obtained at a

qualified specialist workshop.

Standby mode (extension of the starter bat‐tery's period out of use)

Standby mode function% This function is not available for all models.If standby mode is activated, energy loss will beminimised during extended periods of non-oper‐ation.Standby mode is characterised by the following:R the starter battery is preserved.R the maximum non-operational time appears

in the media display.

R the connection to online services is interrup‐ted.R the ATA (anti-theft alarm system) is not avail‐

able.R the interior protection and tow-away protec‐

tion functions are not available.R the function for detecting damage on a

parked vehicle is not available.

If the following conditions are fulfilled, standbymode can be activated or deactivated using themultimedia system:R the engine is switched off.R the ignition is switched on.

Exceeding the vehicle's displayed non-opera‐tional time may cause inconvenience, i.e. it can‐not be guaranteed that the starter battery willreliably start the engine.The starter battery must be charged first in thefollowing situations:R The vehicle's non-operational time must be

extended.

R The Battery charge insufficient for standbymode message appears in the media display.

% Standby mode is automatically deactivatedwhen the ignition is switched on.

Activating/deactivating standby mode (park‐ing up the vehicle)Requirements:R The engine is switched off.

Multimedia system:4© 5 Settings 5 Vehicle# Switch Standby mode on or off.

When you activate the function, a promptappears.

# Select Yes.Standby mode is activated.

Driving and driving safety systemsDriving systems and your responsibility

Your vehicle is equipped with driving systemswhich assist you in driving, parking and manoeu‐vring the vehicle. The driving systems are aids


and do not relieve you of your responsibility per‐taining to road traffic law. Pay attention to thetraffic conditions at all times and intervenewhen necessary. Be aware of the limitationsregarding the safe use of these systems.

Information on radar and ultrasonic sensors

Some driving and driving safety systems useradar or ultrasonic sensors to monitor the areain front of, behind or next to the vehicle (depend‐ing on the vehicle's equipment).Depending on the vehicle's equipment, the radarsensors are integrated behind the bumpersand/or behind the radiator grille. The ultrasonicsensors are located in the front and rear bump‐ers. Keep these parts free of dirt, ice and slush(/ page 497). The sensors must not be cov‐ered, for example by bicycle racks, overhangingloads, stickers, foil or foils to protect againststone chipping. Additional licence plate bracketscan likewise impair the function of the ultrasonicsensors. In the event of damage to the bumpersor radiator grille, or following a collision impact‐ing the bumpers or radiator grille, have the func‐

tion of the sensors checked at a qualified spe‐cialist workshop. If the sensors are damaged,some driving systems and driving safety systemsmay no longer function properly.

Overview of driving systems and drivingsafety systems

In this section, you will find information aboutthe following driving systems and driving safetysystems:R 360° Camera (/ page 267)R ABS (Anti-lock Braking System)

(/ page 226)R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC

(/ page 243)R Adaptive Brake Lights (/ page 237)R Active Brake Assist (/ page 231)R Active Lane Keeping Assist (/ page 285)R Start-off assist (/ page 257)R ATTENTION ASSIST (/ page 277)R BAS (Brake Assist System) (/ page 226)R Hill Start Assist (/ page 255)

R DSR (Downhill Speed Regulation)(/ page 241)R Suspension with adaptive damping adjust‐

ment (/ page 257)R EBD (Electronic Brakeforce Distribution)

(/ page 231)R ESP® (Electronic Stability Program)

(/ page 227)R Off-road ESP® (/ page 230)R ESP® Crosswind Assist (/ page 230)R ESP® trailer stabilisation (/ page 230)R Speed Limit Assist (/ page 278)R Active Speed Limit Assist (/ page 246)R HOLD function (/ page 255)R STEER CONTROL (/ page 231)R Active Steering Assist with emergency corri‐

dor function (/ page 249)R Limiter (/ page 238)R Active Emergency Stop Assist (/ page 253)R Active Parking Assist (/ page 270)R Parking Assist PARKTRONIC (/ page 258)


R Reversing camera (/ page 263)R Active Lane Change Assist (/ page 251)R Cruise control (/ page 237)R Blind Spot Assist and Active Blind Spot Assist

with exit warning (/ page 282)R Traffic Sign Assist (/ page 280)

Function of ABS

The Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) regulates thebrake pressure in critical driving situations:R During braking, e.g. at full brake application

or insufficient tyre traction, the wheels areprevented from locking.R Vehicle steerability while braking is ensured.

If ABS intervenes when braking, you will feel apulsing in the brake pedal. The pulsating brakepedal can be an indication of hazardous roadconditions and can serve as a reminder to takeextra care while driving.

System limitsR ABS is active from speeds of approx.

8 km/h.

R ABS may be impaired or may not function if amalfunction has occurred and the yel‐low ! ABS warning lamp lights up contin‐uously in the instrument cluster after theengine is started.

Functions of Off-road ABS

% Off-road ABS is activated automatically whenyou select theF drive program.

Off-road ABS is specially adapted for driving off-road:R The front wheels lock cyclically during brak‐

ing.R The braking distance is shortened due to the

digging-in effect.

System limitsR Off-road ABS functions at speeds below

40 km/h.R If Off-road ABS intervenes, the ability to steer

may be restricted.

Function of BAS (Brake Assist System)

& WARNING Risk of an accident caused bya malfunction in BAS (Brake Assist Sys‐tem)

If BAS is malfunctioning, the braking distancein an emergency braking situation isincreased.# Depress the brake pedal with full force

in emergency braking situations. ABSprevents the wheels from locking.

BAS supports your emergency braking situationwith additional brake force.If you depress the brake pedal quickly, BAS isactivated:R BAS automatically boosts the brake pres‐

sure.R BAS can shorten the braking distance.R ABS prevents the wheels from locking.

The brakes will function as usual once yourelease the brake pedal. BAS is deactivated.


Functions of ESP® (Electronic Stability Pro‐gram)

& WARNING Risk of skidding if ESP® ismalfunctioning

If ESP® is malfunctioning, ESP® cannot carryout vehicle stabilisation. In addition, otherdriving safety systems are switched off.# Drive on carefully.# Have ESP® checked at a qualified spe‐

cialist workshop.

& WARNING Risk of skidding if ESP® isdeactivated

If you deactivate ESP®, ESP® cannot carryout vehicle stabilisation.# ESP® should only be deactivated in the

following situations.

ESP® can monitor and improve driving stabilityand traction in the following situations, withinphysical limits:R When pulling away on wet or slippery carria‐

geways.R When braking.R Vehicles with trailer hitch: in trailer opera‐

tion from speeds of 65 km/h, if the vehicle/trailer combination begins to sway from sideto side.R In strong side winds when you are driving

faster than 75 km/h.

If the vehicle deviates from the direction desiredby the driver, ESP® can stabilise the vehicle byintervening in the following ways:R One or more wheels are braked.R The engine output is adapted according to

the situation.

ESP® is deactivated if the å ESP® OFF warn‐ing lamp lights up continuously in the instrumentcluster:R Driving stability will no longer be improved.

R Vehicles with trailer hitch: stabilisation ofthe vehicle/trailer combination is no longeractive.R Crosswind Assist is no longer active.R The drive wheels could spin.R ETS/4ETS traction control is still active.

% When ESP® is deactivated, you are still assis‐ted by ESP® when braking.

If the ÷ ESP® warning lamp flashes in theinstrument cluster, one or several vehicle wheelshas reached its grip limit:R Adapt your driving style to suit the current

road and weather conditions.R Do not deactivate ESP®.R Only depress the accelerator pedal as far as

is necessary when pulling away.

It can be advantageous to deactivate ESP® in thefollowing situations to improve traction:R When using snow chains.R In deep snow.R On sand or gravel.


% Spinning the wheels results in a cuttingaction, which enhances traction.

If the ÷ ESP® warning lamp lights up continu‐ously, ESP® is not available due to a malfunction.Observe the following information:R Warning and indicator lamps (/ page 623)R Display messages (/ page 566)

ETS/4ETS (Electronic Traction System)ETS/4ETS traction control is part of ESP® andmakes it possible to pull away and accelerate ona slippery carriageway.

If you select theF drive program, a specialETS system specifically suited to off-road terrainis automatically activated.ETS/4ETS can improve the vehicle's traction byintervening in the following ways:R The drive wheels are braked individually if

they spin.R More drive torque is transferred to the wheel

or wheels with traction.

Influence of drive programs on ESP®

The drive programs enable ESP® to adapt to dif‐ferent weather and road conditions as well asthe driver's preferred driving style. You canselect the drive programs using the DYNAMICSELECT switch (/ page 199).


ESP® characteristics per drive program

Drive program ESP® mode Characteristics

A (Comfort); (Economy)

ESP® Comfort These drive programs provide the ideal balancebetween traction and stability.Select drive programA or; both in dryand particularly in difficult road conditions, suchas snow or ice, or when the road is wet fromrain.

C (Sport) ESP® Sport This drive program continues to offer stabilitybut with a sporty setup which allows the enthu‐siastic driver a more active driving style.Select drive programC in good road condi‐tions, for example on dry roads and clearstretches of road.

F (Off-road) Off-road ESP® This drive program assists you in driving off-road.Select theF drive program for easily nego‐tiable off-road terrain, e.g. dirt tracks, gravel orsandy surfaces.


Function of Off-road ESP®

Off-road ESP® is activated automatically whenyou select theF drive program. It interveneslater if there is oversteering or understeering,thus improving traction. A special ETS systemspecifically suited to off-road terrain is also acti‐vated.

Activating/deactivating ESP® (Electronic Sta‐bility Program)

Multimedia system:4© 5 Settings 5 Quick access% ESP® can only be activated/deactivated

using quick access when at least one otherfunction is available in quick access. ESP®can otherwise be found in the Assistancemenu.

Mercedes‑AMG vehicles: observe the notes inthe Supplement. Otherwise, you may fail to rec‐ognise dangers.# Select ESP.

A prompt appears.

# Select On or å Off.

ESP® is deactivated if the å ESP® OFF warn‐ing lamp lights up continuously in the instrumentcluster.Observe the information on warning lamps anddisplay messages which may be shown in theinstrument cluster.

Function of ESP® Crosswind Assist

ESP® Crosswind Assist detects sudden gusts ofside wind and helps the driver to keep the vehi‐cle in the lane:R ESP® Crosswind Assist is active at vehicle

speeds between approx. 75 km/h and200 km/h when driving straight ahead orcornering slightly.R The vehicle is stabilised by means of a targe‐

ted and individual brake application on oneside.

Function of ESP® trailer stabilisation

& WARNING Risk of accident in poor roadand weather conditions

In poor road and weather conditions, thetrailer stabilisation cannot prevent lurching ofthe vehicle/trailer combination. Trailers witha high centre of gravity may tip over beforeESP® detects this.# Always adapt your driving style to suit

the current road and weather condi‐tions.

When driving with a trailer, ESP® can stabiliseyour vehicle if the trailer begins to swerve fromside to side:R ESP® trailer stabilisation is active above

speeds of 65 km/h.R Slight swerving is reduced by means of a tar‐

geted, individual brake application on oneside.


R In the event of severe swerving, the engineoutput is also reduced and all wheels arebraked.

ESP® trailer stabilisation may be impaired ormay not function if:R The trailer is not connected correctly or is

not detected properly by the vehicle.

Function of EBD (Electronic Brake force Dis‐tribution)

EBD is characterised by the following:R Monitoring and regulating the brake pressure

on the rear wheels.R Improved driving stability when braking,

especially on bends.

Function of STEER CONTROL

STEER CONTROL helps you by transmitting anoticeable steering force to the steering wheel inthe direction required for vehicle stabilisation.

This steering recommendation is given particu‐larly in the following situations:R both right wheels or both left wheels are on a

wet or slippery road surface when you brakeR the vehicle starts to skid

System limitsSTEER CONTROL may be impaired or may notfunction in the following situations:R ESP® is deactivated.R ESP® is malfunctioning.R The steering is malfunctioning.

If ESP® is malfunctioning, you will be assistedfurther by the electric power steering.

Function of Active Brake Assist

Active Brake Assist consists of the followingfunctions:R Distance warning functionR Autonomous braking functionR Situation-dependent braking assistance

R Vehicles with Driving Assistance Pack‐age: Evasive Steering Assist and corneringfunction

Active Brake Assist can help you to minimise therisk of a collision with vehicles, cyclists orpedestrians, or reduce the effects of such a colli‐sion.If Active Brake Assist has detected a risk of colli‐sion, a warning tone sounds and theL dis‐tance warning lamp lights up in the instrumentcluster.

Vehicles with PRE-SAFE®: depending on thecountry, an additional haptic warning occurs inthe form of slight, repeated tensioning of theseat belt.If you do not react to the warning, autonomousbraking can be initiated in critical situations.In especially critical situations, Active BrakeAssist can initiate autonomous braking directly.In this case, the warning lamp and warning toneoccur simultaneously with the braking applica‐tion.


If you apply the brake yourself in a critical situa‐tion or apply the brake during autonomous brak‐ing, situation-dependent braking assistanceoccurs. The brake pressure increases up to max‐imum full-stop braking if necessary.

If autonomous braking or situation-dependentbraking assistance has occurred, display1appears in the multifunction display and thenautomatically goes out after a short time.If the autonomous braking function or the situa‐tion-dependent braking assistance is triggered,additional preventive measures for occupantprotection (PRE-SAFE®) may also be initiated.

& WARNING Risk of an accident caused bylimited detection performance of ActiveBrake Assist

Active Brake Assist cannot always clearlyidentify objects and complex traffic situa‐tions.In such cases, Active Brake Assist might:R Give a warning or brake without reasonR Not give a warning or not brake

# Always pay careful attention to the traf‐fic situation; do not rely on Active BrakeAssist alone. Active Brake Assist is onlyan aid. The driver is responsible formaintaining a suitable distance to thevehicle in front, vehicle speed and forbraking in good time.

# Be prepared to brake or swerve if nec‐essary.

% If the system is unavailable, theæ displayappears in the multifunction display.

Also observe the system limits of Active BrakeAssist.

The individual subfunctions are available inthe following speed ranges:The distance warning function issues a warningin the following situations:R From approximately 30 km/h, if over several

seconds the distance maintained to the vehi‐cle travelling in front is too small for thedriven speed, theL distance warninglamp lights up in the instrument cluster.R From approximately 7 km/h, if your vehicle

is critically close to a vehicle or pedestrian,you will hear an intermittent warning toneand theL distance warning lamp lightsup in the instrument cluster.

Vehicles with PRE-SAFE®: depending onthe country, an additional haptic warningoccurs in the form of slight, repeated ten‐sioning of the seat belt.

Brake immediately or take evasive action, provi‐ded it is safe to do so and the traffic situationallows this.


The distance warning function can aid you in the following situations with an intermittent warning tone and a warning lamp:

Vehiclestravelling infront

Stationaryvehicles

Crossingvehicles

Movingpedestrians

Stationarypedestrians

Crossingcyclists

Cyclists travel‐ling in front

Stationarycyclists

Vehicleswithout Driv‐ing Assis‐tance Pack‐age

Up to approx.250 km/h


No reaction Up to approx.80 km/h



No reaction

Vehicles withDriving Assis‐tance Pack‐age










The autonomous braking function may intervene at speeds starting from approximately 7 km/h in the following situations:


Stationaryvehicles

Crossingvehicles

Movingpedestrians


Crossingcyclists


Stationarycyclists







No reaction











Situation-dependent braking assistance may intervene at speeds starting from approximately 7 km/h in the following situations:


Stationaryvehicles

Crossingvehicles

Movingpedestrians


Crossingcyclists


Stationarycyclists







No reaction










Cancelling a brake application of ActiveBrake AssistYou can cancel a brake application of ActiveBrake Assist at any time by:R Fully depressing the accelerator pedal or

with kickdown.R Releasing the brake pedal.

Active Brake Assist may cancel the brake appli‐cation when one of the following conditions isfulfilled:R You manoeuvre to avoid the obstacle.R There is no longer a risk of collision.R An obstacle is no longer detected in front of

your vehicle.

Evasive Steering Assist (only vehicles withDriving Assistance Package)Evasive Steering Assist has the following charac‐teristics:R The ability to detect stationary or moving

pedestrians.R Assistance through power-assisted steering if

it detects a swerving manoeuvre.


R Activation by an abrupt steering movementduring a swerving manoeuvre.R Assistance during swerving and straightening

of the vehicle.R Reaction from a speed of approximately

20 km/h up to a speed of approximately70 km/h.

You can prevent the assistance at any time byactively steering.

Cornering function (only vehicles with Driv‐ing Assistance Package)If a danger of collision from an oncoming vehicleis detected when turning across an oncominglane, autonomous braking can be initiated atspeeds below 15 km/h before you have left thelane in which you are driving.

& WARNING Risk of an accident despiteEvasive Steering Assist

Evasive Steering Assist cannot always clearlyidentify objects and complex traffic situa‐tions.

In addition, the steering support of EvasiveSteering Assist is generally not sufficient toavoid a collision.In such cases Evasive Steering Assist can:R give an unnecessary warning or provide

assistanceR not give a warning or not provide assis‐

tance

# Always pay careful attention to the traf‐fic situation; do not rely on EvasiveSteering Assist alone.

# Be ready to brake and take evasiveaction, if necessary.

# Prevent the assistance by activelysteering in non-critical driving situa‐tions.

# Drive at an appropriate speed if pedes‐trians are close to the path of your vehi‐cle.

System limitsFull system performance is not available for afew seconds after switching on the ignition orafter driving off.The system may be impaired or may not functionin the following situations:R In snow, rain, fog, heavy spray, if there is

glare, in direct sunlight or in greatly varyinglight conditions.R If the sensors are dirty, misted up, damaged

or covered.R If the sensors are impaired due to interfer‐

ence from other radar sources, e.g. strongradar reflections in multi-storey car parks.R If a loss of tyre pressure or a defective tyre

has been detected and displayed.R If DSR is activated.R In complex traffic situations where objects

cannot always be clearly identified.R If pedestrians or vehicles move quickly into

the sensor detection range.R If pedestrians are hidden by other objects.


R If the typical outline of a pedestrian cannotbe distinguished from the background.R If a pedestrian is not detected as such, e.g.

due to special clothing or other objects.R On bends with a tight radius.

% The Active Brake Assist sensors adjust auto‐matically while a certain distance is beingdriven after the vehicle has been delivered.Active Brake Assist is unavailable or onlypartially available during this teach-in period.

Setting Active Brake Assist


Multimedia system:4© 5 Settings 5 Assistance5 Active Brake AssistThe following settings are available:R EarlyR MediumR Late

# Select a setting.The setting is retained when the engine isnext started.

Deactivating Active Brake Assist% It is recommended that you always leave

Active Brake Assist activated.# Select Off.

The distance warning function, the autono‐mous braking function and the Evasive Steer‐ing Assist are deactivated.When the vehicle is next started, the middlesetting is automatically selected.

% If Active Brake Assist is deactivated, theæ symbol appears in the status bar of themultifunction display.

Function of Adaptive Brake Lights

Adaptive Brake Lights warn following traffic in anemergency braking situation with the followingactions:R By flashing the brake lampsR By activating the hazard warning lights

If the vehicle is braked sharply from speedsabove 50 km/h, the brake lamps flash rapidly.This provides traffic travelling behind you with aneven more noticeable warning.If the vehicle is travelling at speeds of more than70 km/h at the beginning of the brake applica‐tion, the hazard warning lights switch on oncethe vehicle is stationary. When you pull awayagain, the hazard warning lights will switch offautomatically at approximately 10 km/h. Youcan also switch off the hazard warning lightsusing the hazard warning button.

Cruise control and limiter

Function of cruise controlCruise control regulates the speed to the valueselected by the driver.If you accelerate to overtake, for example, thestored speed is not deleted. If you remove yourfoot from the accelerator pedal after overtaking,cruise control will resume speed regulation backto the stored speed.Cruise control is operated using the correspond‐ing steering wheel buttons. You can store any


speed above 20 km/h up to the maximum speedor up to the set winter tyre limit.If you fail to adapt your driving style, cruise con‐trol can neither reduce the risk of an accidentnor override the laws of physics. It cannot takeinto account road, weather or traffic conditions.Cruise control is only an aid. The driver isresponsible for the distance to the vehicle infront, for vehicle speed, for braking in good timeand for staying in lane.Mercedes‑AMG vehicles: cruise control is avail‐able up to a maximum speed of 250 km/h.

Displays in the multifunction displayThe status of cruise control and the storedspeed are shown in the multifunction display.

1 Cruise control is selected2 Speed is saved, cruise control is deactivated3 Speed is saved, cruise control is activated

% The segments extending from the currentstored speed to the end of the scale, or tothe set winter tyre limit, light up in thespeedometer.

System limitsCruise control may be unable to maintain thestored speed on uphill gradients. The storedspeed is resumed when the gradient evens out.Change into a lower gear in good time on longand steep downhill gradients. Take particular

note of this when driving a laden vehicle. Bydoing so, you will make use of the engine's brak‐ing effect. This relieves the load on the brakesystem and prevents the brakes from overheat‐ing and wearing too quickly.Do not use cruise control in the following situa‐tions:R In traffic situations which require frequent

changes of speed, e.g. in heavy traffic, onwinding roads.R On slippery roads. Accelerating can cause

the drive wheels to lose traction and thevehicle could then skid.R If you are driving when visibility is poor.

Function of the limiterThe limiter restricts the speed of the vehicle. Toreduce the speed to the set speed, the limiterapplies the brakes automatically.You can limit the speed as follows:R Variable: for speed restrictions, e.g. in built-

up areas.R Permanent: for long-term speed restrictions,

e.g. when driving in winter tyre mode.


The variable limiter is operated using the corre‐sponding steering wheel buttons. You can storeany speed above 20 km/h up to the maximumspeed or up to the set winter tyre limit. You canalso perform settings while the vehicle is station‐ary if the vehicle has been started.If you fail to adapt your driving style, the limitercan neither reduce the risk of an accident noroverride the laws of physics. It cannot take intoaccount road, weather or traffic conditions. Thelimiter is only an aid. The driver is responsiblefor the distance to the vehicle in front, for vehi‐cle speed, for braking in good time and for stay‐ing in lane.Mercedes‑AMG vehicles: the limiter is availableup to a maximum speed of 250 km/h.

Displays on the multifunction displayThe status of the variable limiter and the storedspeed are shown in the multifunction display.

1 Variable limiter is selected2 Speed is stored, variable limiter is deactiva‐

ted3 Speed is stored, variable limiter is activated

% The segments in the speedometer light up,up to the currently stored speed.When the driving speed is greater than thestored speed, display3 flashes.

KickdownIf you depress the accelerator pedal beyond thepressure point (kickdown), the variable limiterswitches to passive mode. The Limiter passivemessage appears in the multifunction display.

After completion of kickdown, the variable lim‐iter is activated again in the following situations:R If the driven speed drops below the stored

speed.R If the stored speed is called up.R If you store a new speed.

Operating cruise control or the variable lim‐iter

& WARNING Risk of accident due to storedspeed

If you call up the stored speed and this islower than your current speed, the vehicledecelerates.# Take into account the traffic situation

before calling up the stored speed.

Requirements:Cruise controlR Cruise control is selected.R ESP® must be activated, but not intervening.R The driven speed is at least 20 km/h.


R The transmission is in positionh.

Variable limiterR The vehicle has been started.R The variable limiter is selected.

Switching between cruise control and thevariable limiter

# To select cruise control: press rockerswitch1 up.

# To select the variable limiter: press rockerswitch1 down.

% Vehicles with Active Distance AssistDISTRONIC: the variable limiter is selectedby a different button (/ page 245).

Activating cruise control or the variable lim‐iter# Press rocker switch2 up (SET+) or down

(SET-).The current driven speed is stored and thevehicle maintains this speed (cruise control)or does not exceed it (limiter).

or# Press rocker switch3 up (RES).

The last stored speed is called up and thevehicle maintains this speed (cruise control)or does not exceed it (variable limiter).If the last stored speed has previously beendeleted, the currently driven speed is stored.

% When you switch off the vehicle, the lastspeed stored is cleared.

When you activate cruise control or ActiveDistance Assist DISTRONIC, the last speedstored for the variable limiter is cleared.

Increasing/decreasing the stored speed# Press rocker switch2 up (SET+) or down

(SET-) to the pressure point.The stored speed is increased or reduced by1 km/h.

or# Press rocker switch2 up (SET+) or down

(SET-) to the pressure point and hold.The stored speed is increased or reduced inincrements of 1 km/h.


(SET-) beyond the pressure point.The stored speed is increased or reduced by10 km/h.


(SET-) and hold beyond the pressure point.The stored speed is increased or reduced inincrements of 10 km/h.


or# Accelerate the vehicle to the desired speed.# Press rocker switch2 up (SET+).

Adopting the detected speedIf cruise control/the variable limiter is activatedand Speed Limit Assist or Traffic Sign Assist hasdetected a speed restriction sign with a maxi‐mum permissible speed and this is displayed inthe instrument cluster, you can choose betweenthe following options:# Press rocker switch3 up (RES).

The maximum permissible speed shown bythe traffic sign is stored and the vehiclemaintains or does not exceed this speed.

# To deactivate cruise control: press rockerswitch3 down (CNCL).

# To deactivate cruise control: press rockerswitch1 down.

Deactivating cruise control or the variablelimiter# Press rocker switch3 down (CNCL).

% If you brake, deactivate ESP® or if ESP®intervenes, cruise control is deactivated. Thevariable limiter is not deactivated.

Permanent limiterIf the vehicle should never exceed a specificspeed (e.g. for driving in winter tyre mode), youcan set this speed with the permanent limiter.You do this by limiting the speed to a valuebetween 160 km/h and 240 km/h in the multi‐media system (/ page 241).Shortly before the set speed is reached, itappears in the multifunction display. When youconfirm the message with%, display mes‐sages no longer appear until you switch off thevehicle. The speed will only be displayed againonce the vehicle has been restarted or if the setspeed is changed.The permanent limiter does not switch to pas‐sive mode even during kickdown and the drivenspeed remains below the set speed.

Setting the speed limitation for winter tyresMultimedia system:4© 5 Settings 5 Vehicle5 Winter tyres limit# Select a speed or deactivate the function.

DSR (Downhill Speed Regulation)

Function of DSR (Downhill Speed Regulation)DSR is an aid to assist you when driving down‐hill. It keeps the speed of travel at the selectedtarget speed. The steeper the downhill gradient,the greater the DSR braking effect on the vehi‐cle. On flat stretches of road and uphill gradi‐ents, the DSR brakes the vehicle minimally ornot at all.When DSR is activated and the transmission is inpositionh,k ori, DSR controls the drivingspeed. The target speed can be set to a valuebetween 2 km/h and 18 km/h. By braking oraccelerating, you can drive at a higher or lowerspeed than the target speed at any time.DSR is deactivated automatically if you drive atspeeds greater than 45 km/h or select drive


programC. Theî off message thenappears in the multifunction display. The statusindicator in the multifunction display disappears.You also hear a warning tone.

Information on DSR

& WARNING Risk of skidding and havingan accident when DSR is activated onslippery road surfaces

If the speed driven and the target speed dif‐fer, and you activate DSR on a slippery roadsurface, the wheels may lose traction.# Take into account the road surface and

the difference between the drivingspeed and target speed before activat‐ing DSR.

If you fail to adapt your driving style, DSR canneither reduce the risk of an accident nor over‐ride the laws of physics. It cannot take intoaccount road, weather or traffic conditions. DSRis only an aid. You are responsible for maintain‐ing a safe distance to the vehicle in front, for

vehicle speed, for braking in good time and forstaying in lane.You are always responsible for keeping control ofthe vehicle and for assessing whether the down‐hill gradient can be managed. Depending onroad surface and tyres, DSR may not always beable to keep to the target speed. Select a targetspeed suitable for the environmental conditionsand also apply the brakes yourself if required.

Activating/deactivating DSR (Downhill SpeedRegulation)Requirements:R You are driving at 40 km/h or slower.

If the current vehicle speed is too high, theMax. speed 40 km/h message appears inthe multifunction display.R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is deacti‐

vated.

Multimedia system:4© 5 Settings 5 Quick access# Selectî.

A status display appears in the multifunctiondisplay when the function is activated.

Changing the target speed

# To increase or decrease the target speed:press rocker switch1 up to the point ofresistance for a higher target speed anddown for a lower target speed.The selected target speed increases ordecreases by 1 km/h and appears with theDSR symbol in the multifunction display.


% The target speed always adjusts in 1 km/hincrements. This is regardless of whetheryou press the rocker switch to or beyond thepoint of resistance.

Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC

Function of Active Distance AssistDISTRONIC

Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC maintains theset speed on free-flowing roads. If vehicles infront are detected, the set distance is main‐tained, if necessary, until the vehicle comes to ahalt. The vehicle accelerates or brakes depend‐ing on the distance to the vehicle in front and

the set speed. The speed and distance to thevehicle in front are set and saved on the steeringwheel on vehicles without the Driving AssistancePackage, in the range between 20 km/h and200 km/h and, on vehicles with the DrivingAssistance Package, in the range between20 km/h and 210 km/h.Other features of Active Distance AssistDISTRONIC:R Adjusts the driving style depending on the

selected drive program (fuel efficient, com‐fortable or dynamic) (/ page 198)R Vehicles with Driving Assistance Pack‐

age: reacts to stationary vehicles detected inurban speed ranges (except bicycles andmotorcycles)R Initiates acceleration to the stored speed if

the turn signal indicator is switched on tochange to the overtaking laneR Vehicles with Driving Assistance Pack‐

age: takes one-sided overtaking restrictionsinto account on motorways or on multi-laneroads with separate carriageways (country-dependent)

Vehicles with Active Parking Assist and Driv‐ing Assistance Package: if the vehicle hasbeen braked to a standstill on multi-lane, sepa‐rate carriageways by Active Distance AssistDISTRONIC, it can automatically follow the vehi‐cle in front driving off again within 30 seconds. Ifa critical situation is detected when driving off, avisual and acoustic warning is given indicatingthat the driver must now take control of the vehi‐cle. The vehicle is not accelerated any further.Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is only an aid.The driver is responsible for keeping a safe dis‐tance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speedand for braking in good time.

System limitsThe system may be impaired or may not functionin the following situations:R In snow, rain, fog, heavy spray, if there is

glare, in direct sunlight or in greatly varyinglight conditions.R If there is swirling dust, e.g. when driving off-

road or on sandy surfaces.


R The windscreen in the area of the camera isdirty, misted up, damaged or covered.R If the radar sensors are dirty or covered.R In multi-storey car parks or on roads with

steep uphill or downhill gradients.R If there are narrow vehicles in front, such as

bicycles or motorcycles.

In addition, on slippery roads, braking or accel‐erating can cause one or several wheels to losetraction and the vehicle could then skid.Do not use Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC inthese situations.

& WARNING Risk of accident from acceler‐ation or braking by Active DistanceAssist DISTRONIC

Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC may accel‐erate or brake in the following cases, forexample:R If the vehicle pulls away using Active Dis‐

tance Assist DISTRONIC.

R If the stored speed is called up and isconsiderably faster or slower than thecurrently driven speed.R If Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC no

longer detects a vehicle in front or doesnot react to relevant objects.

# Always carefully observe the traffic con‐ditions and be ready to brake at alltimes.

# Take into account the traffic situationbefore calling up the stored speed.

& WARNING Risk of accident due to insuf‐ficient deceleration by Active DistanceAssist DISTRONIC

Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC brakesyour vehicle with up to 50 % of the maximumpossible deceleration. If this deceleration isnot sufficient, Active Distance AssistDISTRONIC alerts you with a visual andacoustic warning.

# In these cases, adjust your speed andkeep a sufficient distance.

# Brake the vehicle yourself and/or takeevasive action.

& WARNING Risk of accident if detectionfunction of Active Distance AssistDISTRONIC is impaired

Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC does notreact or has a limited reaction:R when driving on a different lane or when

changing lanesR to pedestrians, animals, bicycles or sta‐

tionary vehicles, or unexpected obstaclesR to complex traffic conditionsR to oncoming vehicles and crossing traffic

As a result, Active Distance AssistDISTRONIC may neither give warnings norintervene in such situations.# Always observe the traffic conditions

carefully and react accordingly.


Operating Active Distance Assist DISTRONICRequirements:R The vehicle has been started.R The electric parking brake is released.R ESP® is activated and is not intervening.R The transmission is in positionh.R The driver's door is closed.R Check of the radar sensor system has been

successfully completed.R Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is not being

used to park the vehicle or to exit from aparking space.R DSR is deactivated.R The vehicle does not skid.

Switching between Active Distance AssistDISTRONIC and the limiter

# Press button1.

Activating the variable limiter or Active Dis‐tance Assist DISTRONIC# To activate without a stored speed: press

rocker switch3 up (SET+) or down (SET-),or press rocker switch4 up (RES). Remove

your foot from the accelerator pedal (ActiveDistance Assist DISTRONIC).The current driven speed is stored and main‐tained (Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC) orlimited (variable limiter) by the vehicle.

or# To activate with a stored speed: press

rocker switch4 up (RES). Remove your footfrom the accelerator pedal (Active DistanceAssist DISTRONIC).

% By pressing rocker switch4 up again, thespeed limitation shown in the instrumentcluster will be adopted by Active DistanceAssist DISTRONIC or variable limiter.

Accepting the displayed speed restrictionwhen Distance Assist DISTRONIC or the lim‐iter is activated# Press rocker switch4 up (RES).

The speed limit displayed in the instrumentcluster is adopted as the stored speed. Thevehicle adapts its speed to that of the vehiclein front, but only up to the stored speed.


Pulling away with Active Distance AssistDISTRONIC# Remove your foot from the brake pedal and

activate Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC.# Press rocker switch4 up (RES).or# Depress the accelerator pedal briefly and

firmly.The functions of Active Distance AssistDISTRONIC continue to be carried out.

Deactivating Active Distance AssistDISTRONIC

& WARNING Risk of accident due to ActiveDistance Assist DISTRONIC still beingactivated when you leave the driver'sseat

If you leave the driver's seat while the vehicleis being braked by Active Distance AssistDISTRONIC only, the vehicle can roll away.# Always deactivate Active Distance

Assist DISTRONIC and secure the vehi‐

cle to prevent it from rolling awaybefore you leave the driver's seat.

# Press rocker switch4 down (CNCL).% If you brake, deactivate ESP® or if ESP®

intervenes, Active Distance AssistDISTRONIC is deactivated.

Increasing or reducing the speed# Press rocker switch3 up (SET+) or down

(SET-) to the pressure point.The stored speed is increased or reduced by1 km/h.


(SET-) to the pressure point and hold.The stored speed is increased or reduced inincrements of 1 km/h.


(SET-) beyond the pressure point.The stored speed is increased or reduced by10 km/h.

or

# Press rocker switch3 up (SET+) or down(SET-) and hold beyond the pressure point.The stored speed is increased or reduced inincrements of 10 km/h.

Reducing or increasing the specified dis‐tance from the vehicle in front# Press rocker switch2 up or down.

Function of Active Speed Limit Assist

% The following function is country-dependentand only available in conjunction with theDriving Assistance Package.


If a change in the speed limit is detected andautomatic adoption of speed limits is activated,the new speed is automatically adopted as thestored speed (/ page 282).The driven speed is adjusted when the vehicle islevel with the traffic sign at the latest. In thecase of signs indicating entry into an urban area,the speed is adapted according to the speedpermitted within the urban area. The speed limit

display in the Instrument Display is always upda‐ted when the vehicle is level with the traffic sign.If there is no speed restriction on an unlimitedstretch of road (e.g. on a motorway), the recom‐mended speed is automatically adopted as thestored speed. The system uses the speed storedon an unlimited stretch of road as the recom‐mended speed. If you do not alter the storedspeed on an unlimited stretch of road, the rec‐ommended speed is 130 km/h.If Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC has beenput into passive mode by pressing the accelera‐tor pedal, only speed limits which are higherthan the set speed are adopted.Active Speed Limit Assist is only an aid. Thedriver is responsible for keeping a safe distancefrom the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed andfor braking in good time. The maximum permissi‐ble speed also depends on factors such as theroad surface and traffic conditions.

System limitsTemporary speed restrictions (e.g. for a certaintime or due to weather conditions) cannot beproperly detected by the system. The maximum

permissible speed applying to a vehicle with atrailer is not detected by the system. In these sit‐uations you must adjust your speed yourself.

& WARNING Risk of accident due to ActiveSpeed Limit Assist adapting the vehicle'sspeed

The speed adopted by Active Speed LimitAssist may be too high or incorrect in someindividual cases, such as:R In the wet or in fogR When towing a trailer

# Ensure that the driven speed complieswith traffic regulations.

# Adjust the driving speed to suit currenttraffic and weather conditions.

Function of route-based speed adaptation

% The following function is country-dependentand only available in conjunction with theDriving Assistance Package.


When Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is acti‐vated, the vehicle speed will be adjusted accord‐ingly to the route events ahead. Depending onthe drive program selected, the vehicle negoti‐ates a route event ahead in a fuel-saving, com‐fortable or dynamic manner. When the routeevent has been passed, the vehicle acceleratesagain to the stored speed. The set distance tothe vehicle in front, vehicles detected ahead andspeed restrictions ahead are taken into account.Route-based speed adaptation can be config‐ured in the multimedia system (/ page 249).The following route events are taken intoaccount:R BendsR T-junctions, roundabouts and toll stationsR Turns and exitsR Traffic jams ahead (only with Live Traffic

(/ page 404))

% When the toll station is reached, Active Dis‐tance Assist DISTRONIC adopts the speed asthe stored speed.

Also, the speed is reduced if the turn signal indi‐cator to change lanes is switched on and one ofthe following situations is detected:R Turning off at junctionsR Driving on slowing-down lanesR Driving on lanes adjacent to slowing-down

lanes

The driver is responsible for choosing the rightspeed and observing other road users. Thisapplies in particular to junctions, roundaboutsand traffic lights, as route-based speed adapta‐tion does not brake the vehicle to a standstill.When route guidance is active, the first speedadjustment is carried out automatically. If theturn signal indicator is switched on, the selectedroute is confirmed and further speed adjustmentis activated.Speed adjustment is cancelled in the followingcases:R If the turn signal indicator is switched off

before the route event.R If the driver depresses the accelerator or

brake pedal during the process.

System limitsRoute-based speed adaptation does not takeright of way regulations into account. The driveris responsible for complying with road trafficregulations and driving at a suitable speed.In difficult conditions, for example unclear roads,lane narrowing, wet road surfaces, snow or ice,or when driving with a trailer, the speed adjust‐ment made by the system may not always besuitable. In these situations the driver mustintervene accordingly.

& WARNING Risk of accident in spite ofroute-based speed adjustment

Route-based speed adjustment might mal‐function or be temporarily unavailable in thefollowing situations:R If the driver does not follow the calcula‐

ted routeR If map data is not up to date or availableR In road construction areasR In bad weather or road conditions


R If the accelerator pedal is depressedR In the event of electronically displayed

speed limitations

# Adjust the speed to the traffic situation.

Setting route-based speed adaptation

Requirements:R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is activa‐

ted.

Multimedia system:4© 5 Settings 5 Assistance5 Route-based speed adapt.# Activate or deactivate the function.

When the function is active, the vehiclespeed is adjusted depending on the routeevents ahead.

% Further information on the route-basedspeed adaptation (/ page 247).

Active Steering Assist

Function of Active Steering Assist% The following function is country-dependent

and only available in conjunction with theDriving Assistance Package.

Active Steering Assist is only available up to aspeed of 210 km/h. The system helps you tostay in the centre of the lane by means of mod‐erate steering interventions. Depending on thespeed driven, Active Steering Assist uses thevehicles ahead and lane markings as a refer‐ence.% Depending on the country, in the lower

speed range Active Steering Assist can usethe surrounding traffic as a reference. If nec‐essary, Active Steering Assist can then alsoprovide assistance when driving outside thecentre of the lane to form a rescue lane, forexample.

When the system is actively steering, theàsymbol is shown in green in the multifunctiondisplay.If the detection of lane markings and vehiclesahead is impaired, Active Steering Assist

switches to passive mode. The system providesno support in this case. During the transitionfrom active to passive status, theà symbol isshown as enlarged and flashing. Once the sys‐tem is passive, theà symbol is shown asgrey in the multifunction display.

Steering and touch detectionThe driver is required to keep their hands on thesteering wheel at all times and be able to inter‐vene at any time to correct the course of thevehicle and keep it in lane. The driver mustexpect a change from active to passive mode orvice versa at any time.


If the system detects that the driver has notsteered the vehicle for a considerable period oftime or has removed their hands from the steer‐ing wheel, an optical warning is given first. Dis‐play1 appears in the multifunction display. Ifthe driver still does not steer the vehicle, orgives no confirmation to the system, a warningtone sounds in addition to the visual warningmessage.The warning is not issued, or is stopped, whenthe driver gives confirmation to the system:R The driver steers the vehicle.R The driver presses a steering wheel button or

operates Touch Control.

If Active Steering Assist detects that a systemlimit has been reached, a visual warning isissued and a warning tone sounds.Active Steering Assist is only an aid. The driver isresponsible for the distance to the vehicle infront, for vehicle speed, for braking in good timeand for staying in lane. Before changing lanes,the driver must make sure that the neighbouringlane is free (glance over the shoulder).

System limitsActive Steering Assist has a limited steering tor‐que for lateral guidance. In some cases, thesteering intervention is not sufficient to keep thevehicle in the lane or to drive through exits.The system may be impaired or may not functionin the following instances:R There is poor visibility, e.g. due to snow, rain,

fog, heavy spray, greatly varying light condi‐tions or strong shadows on the carriageway.R There is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic,

direct sunlight or reflections.R Insufficient road illumination.R The windscreen is dirty, misted up, damaged

or covered in the vicinity of the camera, e.g.by a sticker.R No, or several, unclear lane markings are

present for one lane, or the markings changequickly, e.g. in a construction area or junc‐tions.R The lane markings are worn away, dark or

covered up, e.g. by dirt or snow.

R The distance to the vehicle in front is toosmall and the lane markings thus cannot bedetected.R The road is narrow and winding.R There are obstacles on the lane or projecting

out into the lane, such as object markers.

The system does not provide assistance in thefollowing conditions:R On tight bends and when turning.R When crossing junctions.R At roundabouts or toll stations.R When towing a trailer.R When actively changing lane without switch‐

ing on the turn signal indicator.R When the tyre pressure is too low.

Depending on the selected vehicle settings,Active Steering Assist may be unavailable.Observe the status display of Active SteeringAssist in the multifunction display(/ page 253).


& WARNING Risk of accident if ActiveSteering Assist unexpectedly stops func‐tioning

If the system limits of Active Steering Assistare reached there is no guarantee that thesystem will remain active or will keep thevehicle in lane.# Always keep your hands on the steering

wheel and observe the traffic carefully.# Always steer the vehicle paying atten‐

tion to traffic conditions.

& WARNING Risk of accident if ActiveSteering Assist unexpectedly intervenes

A malfunction in the detection of lane mark‐ings and objects can occur.This could cause unexpected steering inter‐vention.# Steer according to traffic conditions.

Activating/deactivating Active SteeringAssistRequirements:

R ESP® is activated, but is not intervening.R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is activa‐

ted.

Multimedia system:4© 5 Settings 5 Quick access# Selecta Act. Steer. Asst.

Function of Active Lane Change Assist% The following function is country-dependent

and only available in conjunction with theDriving Assistance Package.

Active Lane Change Assist supports the driverwhen changing lanes by applying steering torqueif the driver operates a turn signal indicator.Assistance when changing lanes is provided if allthe following conditions are met:R You are driving on a motorway or road with

multiple lanes in the direction of travel.R The neighbouring lane is separated by a bro‐

ken lane marking.R No vehicle is detected in the adjacent lane.

R The driven speed is between 80 km/h and180 km/h.R Active Lane Change Assist is switched on in

the multimedia system.R Active Steering Assist is switched on and

active.

If no vehicle is detected in the adjacent lane anda lane change is permitted, the lane changebegins after the driver has activated the turn sig‐nal indicator. This is shown to the driver with agreen arrow2 next to the steering wheel sym‐bol. The Lane change to the left message alsoappears, for example. If Active Lane ChangeAssist has been activated with the turn signal


indicator but a lane change is not immediatelypossible, a grey arrow1 appears next to thesteering wheel symbol, which remains green.When the lane change assistance starts, the turnsignal indicator is automatically activated alongwith the display in the multifunction display.If the assistance graphic is shown when chang‐ing lanes, the lane change display appears withan additional arrow pointing towards the adja‐cent lane (/ page 253).If a lane change is not possible, the arrow fadesout after a few seconds and a new lane changemust be initiated. An immediate lane change isonly possible on motorway sections withoutspeed limits.If the system is impaired, Active Lane ChangeAssist may be cancelled. If it is cancelled, theLane change cancelled message appears in themultifunction display and a warning tone sounds.

& WARNING Risk of accident from chang‐ing lane to an occupied adjacent lane

Lane Change Assist cannot always detectclearly if the adjacent lane is free.

The lane change might be initiated althoughthe adjacent lane is not free.# Before changing lanes, make sure that

the neighbouring lane is free and thereis no danger to other road users.

# Monitor the lane change.

& WARNING Risk of accident if LaneChange Assist unexpectedly stops func‐tioning

If the system limitations for Lane ChangeAssist have been reached, there is no guar‐antee that the system will remain active.Lane Change Assist cannot then assist youby applying steering torques.# Always monitor the lane change and

keep your hands on the steering wheel.Observe the traffic conditions and steerand/or brake if necessary.

System limitsThe system limitations of Active Steering Assistapply to Active Lane Change Assist(/ page 249).The system may also be impaired or may notfunction in the following situations:R The sensors in the rear bumper are dirty,

damaged or covered by a sticker or ice andsnow, for example.R The exterior lighting is malfunctioning.

% The Active Lane Change Assist sensorsadjust automatically while a certain distanceis being driven after the vehicle has beendelivered. Active Lane Change Assist isunavailable or only partially available duringthis teach-in process, no arrow appears nextto theØ Active Steering Assist symbolwhen the turn signal indicator is activated.


Activating/deactivating Active Lane ChangeAssistMultimedia system:4© 5 Settings 5 Assistance5 Active Lane Change Assist# Activate or deactivate the function.

Function of Active Emergency Stop AssistIf the driver continually ignores the visual oracoustic warning to put their hands on the steer‐ing wheel, the Beginning emergency stop mes‐sage appears in the multifunction display. If thedriver still does not respond, Active DistanceAssist DISTRONIC reduces the speed. The vehi‐cle is decelerated in stages to a standstill.Depending on the country, at speeds below60 km/h the hazard warning lights switch onautomatically.When the vehicle is stationary, the followingactions are carried out:R the vehicle is secured with the electric park‐

ing brakeR Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is endedR the vehicle is unlocked

R if possible, an emergency call is placed tothe Mercedes-Benz emergency call centre

The driver can cancel the deceleration at anytime by performing one of the following actions:R steeringR braking or acceleratingR pressing a steering-wheel buttonR operating Touch ControlR activating or deactivating Active Distance

Assist DISTRONIC

Overview of Active Distance AssistDISTRONIC displays in the instrument clus‐ter

The assistance graphic and the status displayshow the status of the following functions in theinstrument cluster:R Active Distance Assist DISTRONICR Route-based speed adaptationR Active Steering Assist

Assistant display

1 Route-based speed adaptation: type of routeevent

2 Vehicle in front3 Distance indicator4 Set specified distance5 Active Lane Change Assist lane change dis‐

play


Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC status dis‐play and route-based speed adaptation

1 Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC selected,set specified distance (number of segmentsbelow the vehicle)

2 Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC deactiva‐ted, speed stored

3 Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC active,speed stored, no vehicle detected (brightvehicle symbol)

4 Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC active,speed stored, vehicle detected (green vehi‐cle symbol)

5 Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC and route-based speed adaptation active, speed stored

% On motorways or high-speed major roads,the greenç vehicle symbol is displayedcyclically when the vehicle is ready to pullaway.

% If you depress the accelerator pedal beyondthe setting of the Active Distance AssistDISTRONIC, the system is switched to pas‐sive mode. Theç suspended messageappears in the multifunction display.

SpeedometerThe stored speed is highlighted on the speedom‐eter. If the speed of the vehicle in front or thespeed adjustment is less than the stored speeddue to the route event ahead, the segments inthe speedometer light up. Deactivation of ActiveDistance Assist DISTRONIC, as well as altera‐

tions to the speed due to manual or automaticadoption of the speed limit, are displayed in thecontrol feedback of the multifunction display ona single line.

Active Steering Assist status display

1 Grey steering wheel: Active Steering Assistswitched on and passive

2 Green steering wheel: Active Steering Assistswitched on and active

3 Flashing steering wheel: prompt to the driverto actively confirm or transition from activeto passive status, system limits detected


During the transition from active to passive sta‐tus, symbol3 is shown as enlarged and flash‐ing. Once the system is passive, symbol1 isshown as grey in the multifunction display.

Function of Hill Start Assist

Hill Start Assist holds the vehicle for a shorttime when pulling away on a hill under the fol‐lowing conditions:R Vehicles with automatic transmission: the

transmission is in positionh ork.R The electric parking brake is released.

This gives you enough time to move your footfrom the brake pedal to the accelerator pedaland depress it before the vehicle begins to rollaway.

& WARNING Risk of accident and injurydue to the vehicle rolling away

After a short time, Hill Start Assist no longerholds the vehicle and it can roll away.# Therefore, swiftly move your foot from

the brake pedal to the accelerator

pedal. Never attempt to leave the vehi‐cle if it is being held by Hill Start Assist.

HOLD function

HOLD functionThe HOLD function holds the vehicle at a stand‐still without requiring you to depress the brakepedal, e.g. while waiting in traffic.The HOLD function is only an aid. The responsi‐bility for the vehicle safely standing still remainswith the driver.

System limitsThe HOLD function is only intended to provideassistance when driving and is not a sufficientmeans of safeguarding the vehicle against rollingaway when stationary.R The incline must not be greater than 30%.

Activating/deactivating the HOLD function

& WARNING Risk of an accident due to theHOLD function being activated when youleave the vehicle

If you leave the vehicle while only the HOLDfunction is braking the vehicle, the vehiclecan roll away in the following situations:R If there is a malfunction in the system or

in the power supply.R If the HOLD function is deactivated by

depressing the accelerator pedal or brakepedal, e.g. by a vehicle occupant.

# Always deactivate the HOLD functionand secure the vehicle against rollingaway before leaving the vehicle.


* NOTE Damage from automatic braking

If one of the following functions is switchedon, the vehicle brakes automatically in cer‐tain situations:R Active Brake AssistR Active Distance Assist DISTRONICR HOLD functionR Active Parking Assist

To avoid damage to the vehicle, deactivatethese systems in the following or similar sit‐uations:# During towing# In a car wash

Requirements:R The vehicle is stationary.R The driver's door is closed or the seat belt on

the driver's side is fastened.R The engine is running or has been automati‐

cally switched off by the ECO start/stopfunction.

R The electric parking brake is released.R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is deacti‐

vated.R Vehicles with automatic transmission: the

transmission is in positionh,k ori

Activating the HOLD function# Depress the brake pedal and after a short

time quickly depress further until theëdisplay appears in the multifunction display.

# Release the brake pedal.

Deactivating the HOLD function# Depress the accelerator pedal to pull away.or# Depress the brake pedal until theë dis‐

play disappears from the multifunction dis‐play.

The HOLD function is deactivated in the follow‐ing situations:R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is activa‐

ted.R Vehicles with automatic transmission: the

transmission is switched to positionj.

R The vehicle is secured with the electric park‐ing brake.

In the following situations, the vehicle is held bytransmission positionj and/or by the electricparking brake:R The seat belt is unfastened and the driver's

door is opened.R The vehicle is switched off.R There is a malfunction in the system or the

power supply is insufficient.

Vehicles with manual transmission:The Brake immediately message may alsoappear in the multifunction display:# Immediately depress the brake pedal firmly

until the warning message disappears.The HOLD function is deactivated.

A horn sounds at regular intervals if, despite theBrake immediately message, you turn off theengine, remove your seat belt and open the driv‐er's door. If you attempt to lock the vehicle, thehorn tone becomes louder. The vehicle cannotbe locked until you have deactivated the HOLDfunction.


% Once you have switched off the engine, youcannot restart the engine until you havedeactivated the HOLD function.

Start-off assist

Function of the start-off assistThe start-off assist enables optimal vehicleacceleration from a standstill. For this, a suitablyhigh-grip road surface is required, the tyres andvehicle must also be in good condition.Do not activate the start-off assist on publicroads.Be sure to observe the safety notes and informa‐tion on ESP® (/ page 227).

Activating the start-off assist

& WARNING Risk of skidding and havingan accident from wheels spinning

When you use start-off assist, individualwheels could spin and you could lose controlof the vehicle.

If ESP® is deactivated, there is a risk of skid‐ding and accident!# Make sure that no persons or obstacles

are in the close vicinity of your vehicle.

# Deactivating ESP® (/ page 230).# Move the steering wheel to the straight-

ahead position.# Depress the brake pedal firmly with your left

foot and keep it depressed.# Engage theh drive position (/ page 205).# Select the sportiest available drive programB orC(/ page 199).

# Rapidly depress the accelerator pedal fully.# Take your foot off the brake, but keep the

accelerator pedal depressed.The vehicle pulls away at maximum accelera‐tion.

# Switch on ESP® once the acceleration proce‐dure is complete. ESP® will otherwise not beable to stabilise the vehicle if the vehiclestarts to skid or a wheel starts to spin.

Cancelling the start-off assist# Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal.# Reactivate the ESP®.

Function of adaptive damping adjustment

Suspension with adaptive damping adjustmentcontinuously adjusts the characteristics of thesuspension dampers to the current operatingand driving conditions.The damping is set individually for each wheeland is affected by the following factors:R the road surface conditionsR vehicle loadR the drive program selectedR the driving style

The drive program can be adjusted using theDYNAMIC SELECT switch.


Parking Assist PARKTRONIC

Function of Parking Assist PARKTRONIC

Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is an electronicparking assistance system with ultrasound. Itmonitors the area around your vehicle using mul‐tiple sensors1 on the front bumper and on therear bumper. Parking Assist PARKTRONIC showsyou the distance between your vehicle and adetected obstacle visually and audibly.Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is only an aid. It isnot a substitute for your attention to the sur‐roundings. The responsibility for safe manoeu‐vring and parking remains with you. Make surethat there are no persons, animals or objects in

the manoeuvring area while manoeuvring andparking in/exiting parking spaces.In the standard setting, an intermittent warningtone sounds from a distance of approximately0.3 m to an obstacle in front and approximately1.0 m to an obstacle behind. A continuous warn‐ing tone sounds from a distance of approx‐imately 0.2 m. Using the Warn early all-roundsetting in the multimedia system, the warningtones for front and side impact protection canbe set to sound at a greater distance of approx‐imately 1.0 m in front and 0.6 m on the sides(/ page 263).% The Warn early all-round setting is always

active in the rear of the vehicle.If Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is deactivated,Active Parking Assist is unavailable.

Parking Assist PARKTRONIC display in themultimedia system

Vehicles with Active Parking Assist without a360° Camera


Vehicles with Active Parking Assist and a 360°Camera

If Active Parking Assist is deactivated and anobstacle is detected in the path of the vehicle, apop-up window for Parking Assist PARKTRONIC1 appears in the multimedia system at speedsbelow 10 km/h.The colour of the individual segments of thewarning display is based on the distance to thedetected obstacle:R Yellow segments: obstacles at a distance

between approx. 0.6 m and 1.0 m

R Orange segments: obstacles at a distancebetween approx. 0.3 m and 0.6 mR Red segments: obstacles at a very short

distance of approx. 0.3 m or less

Display of Active Parking Assist PARKTRONICin the head-up display

Optionally, obstacles detected by Active ParkingAssist PARKTRONIC from a distance of approx‐imately 1.0 m in front2 and 0.6 m on the sides3 can also be displayed in the head-up display.

System limitsParking Assist PARKTRONIC does not necessa‐rily take into account the following obstacles:R Obstacles below the detection range, e.g.

persons, animals or objects.R Obstacles above the detection range, e.g.

overhanging loads, overhangs or loadingramps of lorries.

The sensors must be free of dirt, ice and slush.Otherwise, they may not function correctly.Clean the sensors regularly, especially after driv‐ing off-road, taking care not to scratch or dam‐age them.Vehicles with trailer hitch: Parking AssistPARKTRONIC is deactivated for the rear zonewhen you establish an electrical connectionbetween your vehicle and a trailer.


Problems with Parking Assist PARKTRONIC

Vehicles without 360° Camera

Vehicles with 360° Camera


Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is malfunctioning and has been deactivated due to signal interference.# Start the vehicle again.



Rear1 or all-round2 segments lightup red. Theé symbol appears inthe multifunction display.

# Check if Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is working at a different location.

Rear1 or all-round2 segments lightup red. At the same time, a warningtone sounds for approximately two sec‐onds every time the vehicle is started.Theé symbol appears in the multi‐function display.

The sensors are dirty.# Clean the sensors and observe the notes on care of vehicle parts (/ page 497).

Parking Assist PARKTRONIC has been deactivated due to a malfunction.# Start the vehicle again.# If the problem persists, consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Function of the passive side impact protec‐tionPassive side impact protection is an additionalParking Assist PARKTRONIC function whichwarns the driver about obstacles at the side ofthe vehicle. A warning is issued when obstaclesare detected between the front and rear detec‐tion range. In order for an object on the side tobe detected, the sensors in the front and rearbumper must first detect the object while youare driving past it.

During the parking procedure or manoeuvring,objects are detected as the vehicle drives past.If you steer in the direction of a detected obsta‐cle and there is a risk of a lateral collision, awarning is issued. The segments on the sideslight up yellow or red, depending on the distanceto the obstacle.

Segment colour depending on distance

Colour Lateral distance

Yellow Approx. 30 - 60 cm

Red Approx. < 30 cm

In order for lateral front or rear segments to bedisplayed, the vehicle must first travel a distanceof at least half of the vehicle length. Once thevehicle has travelled the length of the vehicle, all


of the lateral front and rear segments can be dis‐played.

Parking Assist PARKTRONIC display: vehicleswithout a 360° Camera

1 Operational front and rear2 Operational front, rear and sides3 Obstacle detected at the front right (yellow)

and rear (red)

Parking Assist PARKTRONIC display: vehicleswith a 360° Camera

1 Operational front and rear2 Operational front, rear and sides3 Obstacles detected at the front right (red)

Saved obstacles on the sides are deleted in thefollowing situations, for example:R You park the vehicle and switch off the igni‐

tion.R You open the doors.

After the engine is restarted, obstacles on thesides must be detected again before a newwarning can be issued.

System limitsThe system limits for Parking AssistPARKTRONIC apply to passive side impact pro‐tection.The following objects are not detected, for exam‐ple:R Pedestrians who approach the vehicle from

the sideR Objects placed next to the vehicle

Activating/deactivating Parking AssistPARKTRONIC

* NOTE Risk of an accident from objectsat close range

Parking Assist PARKTRONIC may not detectcertain objects at close range.# When parking or manoeuvring the vehi‐

cle, pay particular attention to anyobjects which are above or below thesensors, e.g. flowerpots or drawbars.The vehicle or other objects could oth‐erwise be damaged.


If theé symbol is shown in the multifunctiondisplay, Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is notactive.Multimedia system:4 Settings 5 Quick access5 PARKTRONIC# Activate or deactivate the function.% Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is automatically

activated when the vehicle is started.

Adjusting the warning tones of ParkingAssist PARKTRONICMultimedia system:4© 5 Settings 5 Assistance5 Camera & parking

Adjusting the volume of the warning tones# Select Warning tone volume.# Set a value.

Adjusting the pitch of the warning tones# Select Warning tone pitch.# Set a value.

Specifying the starting point for the warningtonesYou can specify whether the Parking AssistPARKTRONIC warning tones should commencewhen the vehicle is further away from an obsta‐cle.# Select Warn early all-round.# Activate or deactivate the function.

Activating/deactivating audio fadeoutYou can specify whether the volume of a mediasource in the multimedia system is to bereduced when Parking Assist PARKTRONICsounds a warning tone.# Select Audio fadeout during warning tones.# Activate or deactivate the function.

Reversing camera

Function of the reversing camera

If you have activated the function in the multime‐dia system (/ page 270), the image fromreversing camera1 is shown in the media dis‐play when the reverse gear is engaged. Dynamicguide lines show the path the vehicle will takewith the steering wheel in its current position.


This helps you to orient yourself and to avoidobstacles when reversing.The reversing camera is only an aid. It is not asubstitute for your attention to the surroundings.The responsibility for safe manoeuvring andparking remains with you. Make sure that thereare no persons, animals or objects etc., in themanoeuvring area while manoeuvring and park‐ing.The guide lines in the media display show thedistances to your vehicle. The distances dis‐played only apply to road level.Depending on the vehicle equipment, you canselect from the following views:R Normal viewR Wide-angle viewR Trailer view

The area behind the vehicle is displayed as amirror image, as in the inside rearview mirror.

Vehicles without Active Parking AssistThe following camera views are available in themultimedia system:

Normal view1 Yellow guide line, vehicle width (driven sur‐

face) depending on the current steeringwheel angle (dynamic)

2 Yellow guide line at a distance of approx‐imately 1.0 m from the rear area

3 Yellow lane marking the course the tyres willtake at the current steering wheel angle(dynamic)

4 Bumper5 Red guide line at a distance of approximately

0.3 m from the rear area

Wide-angle view

Trailer view (vehicles with a trailer hitch)1 Yellow guide line, locating aid


2 Red guide line at a distance of approximately0.3 m from the ball head of the trailer hitch

3 Ball head of the trailer hitch

Vehicles with Active Parking AssistThe following camera views are available in themultimedia system:

Normal view1 Yellow lane marking the course the tyres will

take at the current steering wheel angle(dynamic)

2 Yellow guide line, vehicle width (driven sur‐face) depending on the current steeringwheel angle (dynamic)

3 Red guide line at a distance of approximately0.3 m from the rear area

4 Yellow warning indicator of Parking AssistPARKTRONIC: obstacles at a distancebetween approximately 0.6 m and 1.0 m

5 Red warning display of Parking AssistPARKTRONIC: obstacles are very close(approximately 0.3 m or less)

6 Orange warning display of Parking AssistPARKTRONIC: obstacles are a medium dis‐tance away (between approximately 0.3 mand 0.6 m)

% If the entire system fails, the segments ofthe warning display are shown in red. Theindicator lamp on the PARKTRONIC buttonlights up and theé symbol appears inthe multifunction display.If the system fails at the rear, the display ofthe segments changes as follows:R The rear segments are shown in red

when reversing.R The rear segments are hidden when driv‐

ing forwards.

If Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is deactivated,the warning display fades out (/ page 260).

Wide-angle view


Trailer view (vehicles with a trailer hitch)1 Yellow guide line, locating aid2 Red guide line at a distance of approximately

0.3 m from the ball head of the trailer hitch3 Ball head of the trailer hitch

System failure

If the reversing camera is not operational, amessage appears in the multimedia system.

System limitsThe reversing camera will not function or willonly partially function in the following situations:R The tailgate is open.R There is heavy rain, snow or fog.R The light conditions are poor, e.g. at night.R The camera lens is obstructed, dirty or mis‐

ted up. Observe the notes on cleaning thereversing camera (/ page 497).

R The camera or rear of your vehicle is dam‐aged. In this case, have the camera and itsposition and setting checked at a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

% Do not use the reversing camera in thesetypes of situation. You could otherwise injureothers or collide with objects when parkingthe vehicle.

The field of vision and other functions of thereversing camera may be restricted due to addi‐tional accessories on the rear of the vehicle (e.g.licence plate bracket or bicycle rack).% The contrast of the display may be impaired

by direct sunlight or by other light sources,e.g. when driving out of a garage. In thiscase, pay particular attention.

% Have the display repaired or replaced if, forexample, pixel errors considerably restrict itsuse.


360° Camera

Function of the 360° CameraThe 360° Camera is a system that consists offour cameras. The cameras cover the immediatevehicle surroundings. The system assists you,e.g. when parking or at exits with reduced visibil‐ity.The views of the 360° Camera are always availa‐ble when driving forwards up to a speed ofapproximately 16 km/h and when reversing.The 360° Camera is only an aid and may show adistorted view of obstacles, show them incor‐rectly or not show them at all. It is not a substi‐tute for your attention to the surroundings. Theresponsibility for safe manoeuvring and parkingremains with you. Make sure that there are nopersons, animals or objects etc., in the manoeu‐vring area while manoeuvring and parking.The system evaluates images from the followingcameras:R Reversing cameraR Front cameraR Two side cameras in the outside mirrors

Views of the 360° CameraYou can select from different views:

1 Wide-angle view, front2 Top view with image from the front camera3 Top view with images from the side cameras

in the outside mirrors4 Wide-angle view, rear5 Top view with image from the reversing cam‐

era6 Top view with trailer view (vehicles with a

trailer hitch)

Top view

1 Lane indicating the route the vehicle willtake at the current steering wheel angle

2 Warning display of Parking AssistPARKTRONIC

3 Your vehicle from above

The colour of the individual segments of warningdisplay2 is based on the distance to the detec‐ted obstacle:R Yellow segments: obstacles at a distance

between approx. 0.6 m and 1.0 mR Orange segments: obstacles at a distance

between approx. 0.3 m and 0.6 m


R Red segments: obstacles at a very shortdistance of approx. 0.3 m or less

When Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is operationaland no object is detected, the segments of thewarning display are shown in grey.% If the entire system fails, the segments of

the warning display are shown in red. Theindicator lamp on the PARKTRONIC buttonlights up and theé symbol appears inthe multifunction display.If the system fails at the rear, the display ofthe segments changes as follows:R The rear segments are shown in red

when reversing.R The rear segments are hidden when driv‐

ing forwards.

If Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is deactivated,the warning display fades out (/ page 260).

Guide lines

1 Yellow lane marking the course the tyres willtake at the current steering wheel angle(dynamic)

2 Yellow guide line, vehicle width (driven sur‐face) depending on the current steeringwheel angle (dynamic)

3 Red guide line at a distance of approximately0.3 m from the rear area

4 Mark at a distance of approx. 1.0 m

% When Active Parking Assist is active, lanemarkings1 are displayed in green.

The guide lines in the media display showthe distances to your vehicle. The distancesapply to road level.In trailer mode, the guide lines are shown atthe level of the trailer hitch.

Trailer view (vehicles with a trailer hitch)If you select trailer view and no trailer is coupledto the vehicle, the following display appears:

1 Yellow guide line, locating aid2 Red guide line at a distance of approximately

0.3 m to the ball head of the trailer hitch3 Ball head of the trailer hitch


When the electrical connection is establishedbetween the vehicle and the trailer, the displaychanges to the side camera view.This view supports manoeuvring procedures witha trailer.

Side view of the mirror camerasThe sides of the vehicle can be seen in this view.

1 Guide line of external vehicle dimensionswith outside mirrors folded out

2 Marker of the wheel contact points

System failureIf the 360° Camera is not ready for operation,the following message appears in the multimediasystem:

System limitsThe 360° Camera will not function or will onlypartially function in the following situations:R The doors are open.R The side mirrors are folded in.R The tailgate is open.R There is heavy rain, snow or fog.R The light conditions are poor, e.g. at night.R The camera lens is obstructed, dirty or mis‐

ted up.R If cameras or vehicle components in which

the cameras are fitted are damaged. In thisevent, have the cameras, their positions and


their setting checked at a qualified specialistworkshop.

% Do not use the 360° Camera under such cir‐cumstances. You could otherwise injure oth‐ers or collide with objects when parking thevehicle.

If the vehicle is carrying a heavy load, leaving thestandard height can result in inaccuracies in theguide lines and in the display of the generatedimages, depending on technical conditions.The field of vision and other functions of thecamera system may be restricted due to addi‐tional attachments on the vehicle (e.g. licenceplate bracket, bicycle rack).% The contrast of the display may be impaired

by abrupt direct sunlight or by other lightsources, e.g. when driving out of a garage. Inthis case, pay particular attention.

% Have the display repaired or replaced if, forexample, pixel errors considerably restrict itsuse.

See the notes on cleaning the 360° Camera(/ page 497).

Selecting a view for the 360° CameraRequirements:R The Auto reversing camera function is activa‐

ted in the multimedia system (/ page 270).

# Engage reverse gear.# Select the desired view in the multimedia

system (/ page 267).

Switching reversing camera automatic modeon/offThe reversing camera is only an aid. It is not asubstitute for your attention to the surroundings.The responsibility for safe manoeuvring andparking remains with you. Make sure that nopersons, animals or objects etc. are in themanoeuvring range. Pay attention to your sur‐roundings and be ready to brake at all times.Multimedia system:4© 5 Settings 5 Assistance5 Camera & parking# Switch Auto reversing camera on or off.

Opening the camera cover of the reversingcameraMultimedia system:4© 5 Settings 5 Assistance5 Camera & parking# Select Open camera cover.% The camera cover closes automatically after

some time or after an ignition cycle.

Active Parking Assist

Function of Active Parking AssistActive Parking Assist is an electronic parkingassistance system which uses ultrasound and isautomatically activated during forward travel.The system is operational at speeds belowapproximately 35 km/h.If all requirements are met, theÇ displayappears in the multifunction display. The systemthen independently locates and measures paral‐lel and perpendicular parking spaces on bothsides of the vehicle.When Active Parking Assist has detected parkingspaces, theÈ display appears in the multi‐


function display. The arrows show on which sideof the road detected parking spaces are located.They are then shown in the media display. Theparking space and, if necessary, the parkingdirection can be selected as desired. ActiveParking Assist calculates a suitable vehicle path,switches on the turn signal indicator and assistsyou in parking and exiting the parking space.Vehicles with automatic transmission: ActiveParking Assist provides assistance when chang‐ing gear, accelerating, braking and steering thevehicle.Vehicles with manual transmission: the activebrake application and automatic gear change areonly available on vehicles with automatic trans‐mission. You must therefore brake the vehicleand change gear yourself when parking or exit‐ing a parking space.Active Parking Assist is only an aid. It is not asubstitute for your attention to the surroundings.The responsibility for safe manoeuvring andparking remains with you. Make sure that nopersons, animals or objects etc. are in themanoeuvring range.

Active Parking Assist is cancelled if, amongother things, one of the following actions is car‐ried out:R Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is deactivated.R Active Parking Assist is deactivated.R You begin steering.R You apply the parking brake.R Vehicles with automatic transmission:

you engage transmission positionj.R ESP® intervenes.R You open the doors or the tailgate while driv‐

ing.

System limitsObjects located above or below the detectionrange of Parking Assist PARKTRONIC or ActiveParking Assist are not detected when the park‐ing space is being measured. These are also nottaken into account when the parking manoeuvreis calculated, e.g. overhanging loads, overhangsor loading ramps of lorries, or the boundaries ofparking spaces. In some circumstances, ActiveParking Assist may therefore guide you into theparking space prematurely.

& WARNING Risk of accident due toobjects located above or below thedetection range of Active Parking Assist

If there are objects above or below thedetection range, the following situations mayarise:R Active Parking Assist may steer too early.R Vehicles with automatic transmis‐

sion: The vehicle may not stop in front ofthese objects.

This could cause a collision.# In these situations, do not use Active

Parking Assist.

Snowfall or heavy rain may lead to a parkingspace being measured inaccurately. Parkingspaces that are partially occupied by trailerdrawbars might not be identified as such or bemeasured incorrectly. Only use Active ParkingAssist on level, high-grip ground.


Do not use Active Parking Assist in the followingsituations:R In extreme weather conditions such as ice,

packed snow or in heavy rain.R When transporting a load that protrudes

beyond the vehicle.R If the parking space is on a steep downhill or

uphill gradient.R When snow chains are fitted.

Active Parking Assist may also display parkingspaces that are not suitable for parking, e.g. thefollowing:R Parking spaces where parking is prohibited.R Parking spaces on unsuitable surfaces.

Active Parking Assist will not assist you withparking spaces at right angles to the direction oftravel in the following situations:R If two parking spaces are located immedi‐

ately next to each other.R If the parking space is immediately next to a

low obstacle such as a kerb.

Active Parking Assist will not assist you withparking spaces parallel or at right angles to thedirection of travel in the following situations:R If the parking space is on a kerb.R If the parking space is bordered by an obsta‐

cle, e.g. a tree, a post or a trailer.

Parking with Active Parking Assist% Depending on the vehicle's equipment, the

button may also be located at a differentposition in the centre console.

# Press button1.


The media display shows the view of Active Park‐ing Assist. Area2 displays detected parkingspaces4 and vehicle path3.% Vehicle path3 shown on the media display

may differ from the actual vehicle path.# If you have driven past a parking space: bring

the vehicle to a standstill.# Select desired parking space4.# Where necessary, select the parking direc‐

tion: forwards or reverse.Vehicle path3 is shown, depending onselected parking space4 and the parkingdirection.

# Confirm selected parking space4.

% The turn signal indicator is switched on auto‐matically when the parking procedurebegins. The turn signal indicator is switchedoff automatically when you switch toh.

You are responsible for selecting the turn signalindicator in accordance with the traffic condi‐tions. If necessary, select the turn signal indica‐tor accordingly.

& WARNING Risk of accident due to vehi‐cle swinging out while parking or pullingout of a parking space

While parking or exiting a parking space, thevehicle swings out and can drive onto areasof the oncoming lane.This could cause you to collide with objectsor other road users.# Pay attention to objects and other road

users.# Where necessary, stop the vehicle or

cancel the parking procedure withActive Parking Assist.

# If, for example, the Please engage reversegear message appears in the media display:select the corresponding transmission posi‐tion.Vehicles with automatic transmission: thevehicle drives into the selected parkingspace.

# Vehicles with manual transmission: stopas soon as Parking Assist PARKTRONICsounds the continuous warning tone, if notbefore. Depending on the message or asrequired, engage forward or reverse gear.

On completion of the parking procedure, theParking Assist finished, take control of vehicledisplay message appears. Further manoeuvringmay still be necessary.# After completion of the parking procedure,

safeguard the vehicle against rolling away.When required by legal requirements or localconditions: turn the wheels towards the kerb.


% You can stop the vehicle and change thetransmission position during the parking pro‐cedure. The system then calculates a newvehicle path. The parking procedure canthen be continued. If no new vehicle path isavailable, the transmission position will bechanged again. If the vehicle has not yetreached the parking space, the parking pro‐cedure will be cancelled, should a gear bechanged.

Exiting a parking space with Active ParkingAssistRequirements:R The vehicle has been parked with Active

Parking Assist.

Please note that you are responsible for the vehi‐cle and surroundings during the entire parkingprocedure.# Start the vehicle.

# Press button1.The media display shows the view of ActiveParking Assist.

# If the vehicle has been parked at right anglesto the direction of travel: in area2, selectdirection of travel3, left or right.

% The vehicle path shown on the media displaymay differ from the actual vehicle path.

# Confirm direction of exit3 to drive out ofthe parking space.

% The turn signal indicator is switched on auto‐matically when the exiting procedure begins.

You are responsible for selecting the turn signalindicator in accordance with the traffic condi‐tions. If necessary, select the turn signal indica‐tor accordingly.


& WARNING Risk of accident due to vehi‐cle swinging out while parking or pullingout of a parking space

While parking or exiting a parking space, thevehicle swings out and can drive onto areasof the oncoming lane.This could cause you to collide with objectsor other road users.# Pay attention to objects and other road

users.# Where necessary, stop the vehicle or

cancel the parking procedure withActive Parking Assist.

# If, for example, the Please engage forwardgear message appears in the media display:select the corresponding transmission posi‐tion.The vehicle moves out of the parking space.The turn signal indicator is switched off auto‐matically.

After the exiting procedure has been completed,the Parking Assist finished, take control of vehi-

cle message appears in the media display. Awarning tone and the following display in themedia display prompt you to take over control ofthe vehicle:

You have to accelerate, brake, steer and changegear yourself again.

Function of Drive Away Assist% Drive Away Assist is only available for vehi‐

cles with automatic transmission.Drive Away Assist can reduce the severity of animpact when pulling away. If an obstacle isdetected in the direction of travel, the vehicle'sspeed is briefly reduced to approx. 2 km/h. If acritical situation is detected, theÉ symbolappears in the media display.

& WARNING Risk of accident caused bylimited detection performance of DriveAway Assist

Drive Away Assist cannot always clearly iden‐tify objects and traffic situations.In such cases, Drive Away Assist might:R Warn you without reason and limit the

vehicle speed.R Not warn you or not limit the vehicle

speed.

# Always pay careful attention to the traf‐fic situation; do not rely on Drive AwayAssist alone.

# Be prepared to brake or swerve as nec‐essary, provided the traffic situationpermits and that it is safe to take eva‐sive action.

Drive Away Assist is only an aid. It is not a sub‐stitute for your attention to the surroundings.The responsibility for safe manoeuvring andparking remains with you. Make sure that no


persons, animals or objects etc. are in themanoeuvring range.A risk of a collision may arise in the following sit‐uations, for example:R If the driver mixes up the accelerator and

brake pedals.R If the wrong gear is selected.

Drive Away Assist is active under the followingconditions:R If Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is activated.R Every time the gear is changed tok orh

when the vehicle is at a standstill.R If the detected obstacle is less than approx.

1.0 m away.R If the manoeuvring assistant function is acti‐

vated in the multimedia system.

System limitsThe performance of Drive Away Assist is limitedon inclines.When driving with a trailer, Drive Away Assist isnot available.

% Also observe the system limits of ParkingAssist PARKTRONIC (/ page 258).

Function of Cross Traffic Alert% Also read the instructions on Blind Spot

Assist (/ page 282).

Vehicles with Blind Spot Assist: Cross TrafficAlert can warn drivers of any crossing trafficwhen reversing out of a parking space. The radarsensors in the bumper also monitor the areaadjacent to the vehicle. If a critical situation isdetected, symbol1 appears in the media dis‐play. If the driver does not respond to the warn‐ing, the vehicle's brakes can be applied automat‐ically.

If the radar sensors are obstructed by vehiclesor other objects, detection is not possible.Cross Traffic Alert is active under the followingconditions:R if Blind Spot Assist is activated.R if the vehicle is reversing at walking pace.R If the manoeuvring assistant function is acti‐

vated in the multimedia system.

System limitsCross Traffic Alert is not available on inclines.Cross Traffic Alert is not available when drivingwith a trailer.% Also observe the system limits of Active

Blind Spot Assist (/ page 282).

Activating/deactivating manoeuvring assis‐tanceMultimedia system:4© 5 Settings 5 Assistance5 Camera & parking# Activate or deactivate Manoeuvring assis-

tance.


% Manoeuvring assistance must be active forthe function of Drive Away Assist(/ page 275) and Cross Traffic Alert(/ page 276).

ATTENTION ASSIST

Function of ATTENTION ASSISTATTENTION ASSIST assists you on long, monoto‐nous journeys, e.g. on motorways and trunkroads. If ATTENTION ASSIST detects indicatorsof fatigue or increasing lapses in concentrationon the part of the driver, it suggests taking abreak.ATTENTION ASSIST is only an aid. It cannotalways detect fatigue or lapses in concentrationin time. The system is not a substitute for a well-rested and attentive driver. On long journeys,take regular breaks in good time that allow foradequate recuperation.You can choose between two settings:R Standard: normal system sensitivity.R Sensitive: higher system sensitivity. The

driver is warned earlier and the attention

level detected by ATTENTION ASSIST is adap‐ted accordingly.

If drowsiness or increasing lapses in concentra‐tion are detected, the ATTENTION ASSIST: Takea break! warning appears in the Instrument Dis‐play. You can acknowledge the message andtake a break where necessary. If you do not takea break and ATTENTION ASSIST continues todetect increasing lapses in concentration, youwill be warned again after a minimum of15 minutes.

You can have the following status information forATTENTION ASSIST displayed in the assistancemenu of the on-board computer:R The length of the journey since the last

break.R The attention level determined by ATTENTION

ASSIST:- the fuller the circle, the higher the atten‐

tional level determined- as your attention wanes, the circle in the

centre of the display becomes smaller

If ATTENTION ASSIST is unable to calculate theattention level and cannot issue a warning, theSystem suspended message appears.If a warning is given in the Instrument Display,the multimedia system offers to search for a restarea. You can select a rest area and start naviga‐tion to this rest area. This function can be activa‐ted and deactivated in the multimedia system.If ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated, theÛsymbol appears in the assistance graphic in theInstrument Display when the engine is running.ATTENTION ASSIST is activated automatically


when the engine is re-started. The last selectedsensitivity level remains stored.

System limitsATTENTION ASSIST is active in the 60 km/h to200 km/h speed range.The functionality of ATTENTION ASSIST isrestricted, and warnings may be delayed or notoccur at all in the following situations:R If you have been driving for less than approx‐

imately 30 minutes.R If the road condition is poor (uneven road

surface or potholes).R If there is a strong side wind.R If you adopt a sporty driving style (high cor‐

nering speeds or high rates of acceleration).R If the Steering Assist function of Active Dis‐

tance Assist DISTRONIC is active.R If the time has been set incorrectly.R In active driving situations, if you change

lanes and vary your speed frequently.

The ATTENTION ASSIST tiredness or alertnessassessment is deleted and restarted when con‐tinuing the journey in the following situations:R If you switch off the engine.R If you unfasten your seat belt and open the

driver's door (e.g. changing drivers or takinga break).

Setting ATTENTION ASSISTMultimedia system:4© 5 Settings 5 Assistance5 Attention Assist

Setting options# Select Standard, Sensitive or Off.

Suggesting a rest area# Select Suggest rest area.# Activate or deactivate the function.

If ATTENTION ASSIST detects fatigue orincreasing lack of attention, it suggests arest area in the vicinity.

# Select the suggested rest area.You are guided to the selected rest area.

Speed Limit Assist

Function of Speed Limit Assist% The availability of the following function is

country-dependent.

Speed Limit Assist detects speed limits withmultifunction camera1 and displays them inthe instrument cluster and optionally in thehead-up display. The camera also detects speedlimits with a restriction indicated by an addi‐tional sign (e.g. when wet). The system detectsstop signs, thereby preventing the engine frombeing switched off by the ECO start/stop func‐tion.


Speed Limit Assist is only an aid. The driver isresponsible for keeping a safe distance to thevehicle in front, for vehicle speed and for brakingin good time.

Warning when the maximum permissiblespeed is exceededThe system can warn you if you unintentionallyexceed the maximum permissible speed. To dothis, you can specify in the multimedia systemby how much the maximum permissible speedcan be exceeded before a warning is issued. Youcan specify whether the warning is to be just avisual warning or an acoustic one as well.

Display in the Instrument Display% The illustrations show the Instrument Display

in the widescreen cockpit.

1 Permissible speed2 Permissible speed when there is a restriction3 Additional sign with restriction

Speed Limit Assist is not available in all coun‐tries. If it is unavailable, the following display isshown in the speedometer:

System limitsThe system may be impaired or may not functionin the following situations:R If there is poor visibility, e.g. due to insuffi‐

cient illumination of the road, if there arehighly variable shade conditions or in rain,snow, fog or heavy spray.R If there is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic,

direct sunlight or reflections.R If the windscreen in the area of the multi‐

function camera is dirty, or if the camera ismisted up, damaged or covered.R If the traffic signs are hard to detect, e.g. due

to dirt or snow, or because they are coveredor due to insufficient lighting.R If you turn sharply, when passing traffic signs

outside the camera's field of vision.


Setting Speed Limit AssistMultimedia system:4© 5 Settings 5 Assistance5 Speed Limit Assist

Adjusting the type of warning# Select Visual & audible, Visual or None.

Adjusting the warning thresholdThis value determines the speed at which awarning is issued when exceeded.# Select Warning threshold.# Set the desired speed.% If one of the following systems is activated,

the speed detected can be manually adoptedas the speed limit:R Active Distance Assist DISTRONICR Cruise controlR Variable limiter

Further information (/ page 245).

Traffic Sign Assist

Function of Traffic Sign Assist

Traffic Sign Assist detects traffic signs with mul‐tifunction camera1. It assists you by display‐ing detected speed limits and overtaking restric‐tions in the instrument cluster and optionally inthe head-up display or central display.Since Traffic Sign Assist also uses the datastored in the navigation system, it can updatethe display in the following situations withoutdetecting traffic signs:R When the vehicle changes roads, e.g. slip

road or motorway exit.

R When a village or town boundary which isstored in the digital map is passed.

If the system detects that you are driving onto asection of road in the wrong direction of travel, ittriggers a warning.The camera also detects traffic signs with arestriction indicated by an additional sign (e.g.when wet).Traffic Sign Assist is only an aid. The driver isresponsible for keeping a safe distance from thevehicle in front, for vehicle speed and for brakingin good time.

Warning when the maximum permissiblespeed is exceededThe system can warn you if you unintentionallyexceed the maximum permissible speed. To dothis, you can specify in the multimedia systemby how much the maximum permissible speedcan be exceeded before a warning is issued. Youcan specify whether the warning is to be just avisual warning or an acoustic one as well.


Display in the Instrument Display

Instrument Display in the widescreen cockpit1 Permissible speed2 Permissible speed when there is a restriction3 Additional sign with restriction

% Vehicles with a standard Instrument Dis‐play: a + symbol next to a traffic sign in theInstrument Display indicates that additionaltraffic signs have been detected. These canalso be displayed in the media display andoptionally in the head-up display.

If Traffic Sign Assist cannot determine the cur‐rent maximum permissible speed (e.g. due to

missing signs), the following display appears inthe Instrument Display:

This is displayed continuously if the vehicle is ina country where Traffic Sign Assist is not sup‐ported. Traffic Sign Assist is not available in allcountries.% Also observe the information on display mes‐

sages in Traffic Sign Assist (/ page 566).

Warning when approaching pedestrian cross‐ings (vehicles with Driving Assistance Pack‐age)The system can warn you if you approach apedestrian crossing with your vehicle. A mes‐sage appears in the instrument cluster.

The warning occurs if appropriate traffic signs orroad markings are recognised and pedestriansare present in the danger zone.

System limitsThe system may be impaired or may not functionin the following situations:R If there is poor visibility, e.g. due to insuffi‐


direct sunlight or reflections.


R If the windscreen in the area of the multi‐function camera is dirty, or if the camera ismisted up, damaged or covered.R If the traffic signs are hard to detect, e.g. due

to dirt or snow, or because they are coveredor due to insufficient lighting.R If the information in the navigation system's

digital map is incorrect or out-of-date.R If the signs are ambiguous, e.g. traffic signs

on construction sites or in adjacent lanes.R If you turn sharply, when passing traffic signs

outside the camera's field of vision.

Setting Traffic Sign AssistRequirements:R Only vehicles with Driving Assistance

Package:Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC must beactivated for the automatic adoption ofspeed limits.

Multimedia system:4© 5 Settings 5 Assistance5 Traffic Sign Assist

Activating/deactivating automatic adoptionof speed limits (only vehicles with DrivingAssistance Package)# Select Adopt limit.# Activate or deactivate the function.

The speed limits detected by Traffic SignAssist are automatically adopted by ActiveDistance Assist DISTRONIC.

% If one of the following systems is activated,the speed detected can be manually adoptedas the speed limit:R Active Distance Assist DISTRONICR Cruise controlR Variable limiter

Further information (/ page 245).

Displaying detected traffic signs in themedia display# Select Display in head unit.

# Activate or deactivate the function.

Adjusting the type of warning# Select Visual & audible, Visual or Off.

Adjusting the warning thresholdThis value determines the speed at which awarning is issued when exceeded.# Select Warning threshold.# Set the desired speed.

Blind Spot Assist and Active Blind SpotAssist with exit warning

Function of Blind Spot Assist and ActiveBlind Spot Assist with exit warningBlind Spot Assist and Active Blind Spot Assistuse two lateral, rear-facing radar sensors tomonitor the area up to 40 m behind and 3 mnext to your vehicle.If a vehicle is detected at speeds above approx‐imately 12 km/h and this vehicle subsequentlyenters the monitoring range directly next to yourvehicle, the warning lamp in the outside mirrorlights up red.


If a vehicle is detected close to the side of yourvehicle, the red warning lamp in the outside mir‐ror flashes. If you switch on the turn signal indi‐cator in the corresponding direction, a warningtone sounds once. If the turn signal indicatorremains switched on, all other detected vehiclesare indicated only by the flashing of the redwarning lamp.If you overtake a vehicle quickly, no warning isgiven.

& WARNING Risk of accident despite BlindSpot Assist

Blind Spot Assist does not react to vehiclesapproaching and overtaking you at a greatlydifferent speed.As a result, Blind Spot Assist cannot warndrivers in this situation.# Always pay careful attention to the traf‐

fic situation and maintain a safe dis‐tance at the side of the vehicle.

Blind Spot Assist and Active Blind Spot Assistare only aids. They may fail to detect some vehi‐

cles and are no substitute for attentive driving.Always ensure that there is sufficient distance tothe side for other road users and obstacles.

Exit warningThe exit warning is an additional function ofBlind Spot Assist and can warn vehicle occu‐pants about approaching vehicles when leavingthe vehicle when stationary.

& WARNING Risk of accident despite exitwarning

The exit warning reacts neither to stationaryobjects nor to vehicles approaching you at agreatly different speed.As a result, the exit warning cannot warndrivers in these situations.# Always pay particular attention to the

traffic situation when opening the doorsand make sure there is sufficient clear‐ance.

If there is a vehicle in the monitoring range, thisis indicated in the outside mirror. If a vehicleoccupant opens the door on the side with the

warning, a warning tone sounds and the warninglamp in the outside mirror starts to flash.This additional function is only available whenBlind Spot Assist is activated and up to a maxi‐mum of three minutes after the ignition hasbeen switched off. The exit warning is no longeravailable once the warning lamp in the outsidemirror flashes three times.The exit warning is only an aid and not a substi‐tute for the attention of vehicle occupants. Theresponsibility for opening and closing the doorsand for leaving the vehicle remains with the vehi‐cle occupants.

System limitsBlind Spot Assist and Active Blind Spot Assistmay be limited in the following situations:R if there is dirt on the sensors or the sensors

are obscuredR in poor visibility, e.g. due to fog, heavy rain or

snowR if there are narrow vehicles, e.g. bicycles or

motorbikesR if the road has very wide or narrow lanes


R if vehicles are not driving in the middle oftheir lane

Warnings may be issued in error when drivingclose to crash barriers or similar solid lane bor‐ders. Always make sure that there is sufficientdistance to the side for other traffic or obsta‐cles.Warnings may be interrupted when driving along‐side long vehicles, for example lorries, for a pro‐longed time.Blind Spot Assist is not operational when reversegear is engaged.Blind Spot Assist is not operational when atrailer is coupled to the vehicle and the electricalconnection has been correctly established.The exit warning may be limited in the followingsituations:R when the sensors are covered by adjacent

vehicles in narrow parking spacesR when people approach the vehicleR in the event of stationary or slowly moving

objects

Function of brake application (Active BlindSpot Assist)% The brake application function is only availa‐

ble for vehicles with a Driving AssistancePackage.

If Active Blind Spot Assist detects a risk of a sideimpact in the monitoring range, a course-cor‐recting brake application is carried out. This isdesigned to help you avoid a collision.The course-correcting brake application is availa‐ble in the speed range between approximately30 km/h and 200 km/h.

& WARNING Risk of accident despitebrake application of Active Blind SpotAssist

A course-correcting brake application cannotalways prevent a collision.# Always steer, brake or accelerate your‐

self, especially if Active Blind SpotAssist warns you or makes a course-correcting brake application.

# Always maintain a safe distance at thesides.

& WARNING Risk of accident despiteActive Blind Spot Assist

Active Blind Spot Assist does not react to thefollowing:R if vehicles overtake too closely on the

side, placing them in the blind spot areaR vehicles approaching and overtaking you

at a greatly different speed

As a result, Active Blind Spot Assist may nei‐ther give warnings nor intervene in such sit‐uations.# Always pay careful attention to the traf‐

fic situation and maintain a safe dis‐tance at the side of the vehicle.


If a course-correcting brake application occurs,the red warning lamp flashes in the outside mir‐ror and a warning tone sounds. In addition, a dis‐play1 indicating the danger of a side collisionappears in the multifunction display.In rare cases, the system may make an inappro‐priate brake application. This brake applicationmay be interrupted at any time if you steerslightly in the opposite direction or accelerate.

System limitsEither a course-correcting brake applicationappropriate to the driving situation, or none atall, may occur in the following situations:R Vehicles or obstacles, e.g. crash barriers, are

located on both sides of your vehicle.R A vehicle approaches too closely on the side.R You have adopted a sporty driving style with

high cornering speeds.R You brake or accelerate significantly.R A driving safety system intervenes, e.g. ESP®

or Active Brake Assist.R ESP® is deactivated.R A loss of tyre pressure or a defective tyre is

detected.R You are driving with a trailer and the electri‐

cal connection to the trailer hitch has beencorrectly established.

Activating/deactivating Blind Spot Assist orActive Blind Spot AssistMultimedia system:4© 5 Settings 5 Assistance# Activate or deactivate Blind Spot Assist.or# Activate or deactivate Act. Blind Spot Assist.% Depending on the vehicle's equipment, Blind

Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist isavailable.

Active Lane Keeping Assist

Function of Active Lane Keeping Assist


Active Lane Keeping Assist monitors the area infront of your vehicle by means of multifunctioncamera1. It serves to protect you against unin‐tentionally leaving your lane. You will be warnedby vibration pulses in the steering wheel and gui‐ded by a course-correcting brake applicationback into your lane.You are warned by vibration pulses in the steer‐ing wheel in the following circumstances:R Active Lane Keeping Assist detects a lane

marking.R A front wheel drives over this lane marking.

You will also be guided back into your lane bymeans of a course-correcting brake applicationif the following conditions are met:R Active Lane Keeping Assist detects lane

markings on both edges of the lane.R A front wheel drives over a solid lane mark‐

ing.

You can activate or deactivate the Active LaneKeeping Assist warning.

The status of Active Lane Keeping Assist is dis‐played in the on-board computer:Rð (green): Active Lane Keeping Assist is

activated and operating.Rð (grey): Active Lane Keeping Assist is

activated, but not operating.Rï: Active Lane Keeping Assist is deactiva‐

ted or there is a malfunction.

Active Lane Keeping Assist can neither reducethe risk of an accident if you fail to adapt yourdriving style nor override the laws of physics. Itcannot take into account road, weather or trafficconditions. Active Lane Keeping Assist is only anaid. You are responsible for maintaining a safedistance to the vehicle in front, for vehiclespeed, for braking in good time and for stayingin lane.Active Lane Keeping Assist can bring the vehicleback into the lane with a lane-correcting brakeapplication. In the case of a broken lane markingbeing detected, a brake application will only bemade if a vehicle has been detected in the adja‐cent lane. Oncoming traffic can be detected.

Vehicles with Driving Assistance Package orDriving Assistance Plus Package: overtakingvehicles and vehicles in adjacent lanes can alsobe detected.Vehicles without Driving Assistance Pack‐age or Driving Assistance Plus Package: alane-correcting brake application also takesplace when, in addition to a broken lane mark‐ing, the edge of a firm road surface is detected(e.g. central reservation).Active Lane Keeping Assist is available in thespeed range between 60 km/h and 200 km/h.

If a lane-correcting brake application occurs, dis‐play1 appears in the multifunction display.


Sensitivity of Active Lane Keeping Assist% The availability of the following function is

country-dependent.A lane-correcting brake application also occursin the Sensitive setting in the following situa‐tions:R Active Lane Keeping Assist detects a solid

lane marking.R A front wheel drives over this lane marking.

System limitsNo lane-correcting brake application occurs inthe following situations:R You clearly and actively steer, brake or accel‐

erate.R You have switched on the turn signal indica‐

tor (situation-dependent).R A driving safety system intervenes, such as

ESP®, Active Brake Assist or Active BlindSpot Assist.R You have adopted a sporty driving style with

high cornering speeds or high rates of accel‐eration.

R When ESP® is deactivated.R When driving with a trailer, the electrical con‐

nection to the trailer has been correctlyestablished.R If a loss of tyre pressure or a defective tyre

has been detected and displayed.

The system may be impaired or may not functionin the following situations:R If there is poor visibility, e.g. due to insuffi‐


the sun or reflections.R If the windscreen in the area of the multi‐

function camera is dirty, or if the camera ismisted up, damaged or covered.R If there are no lane markings, or several

unclear lane markings are present for onelane, e.g. around roadworks.R If the lane markings are worn, dark or cov‐

ered.

R If the distance to the vehicle in front is tooshort and thus the lane markings cannot bedetected.R If the lane markings change quickly, e.g.

lanes branch off, cross one another ormerge.R If the carriageway is very narrow and wind‐

ing.

Vehicles without Driving Assistance Pack‐age: Active Lane Keeping Assist uses radar sen‐sors to monitor several areas around the vehicle.If the radar sensors in the rear bumper are dirtyor covered with snow, the system may beimpaired or may not function. If an obstacle inthe lane in which you are driving has been detec‐ted, no lane-correcting brake application occurs.

Activating/deactivating Active Lane KeepingAssistMultimedia system:4© 5 Settings 5 Quick access5 Active Lane Keeping Assist# Activate or deactivate the function.


Setting Active Lane Keeping AssistMultimedia system:4© 5 Settings 5 Assistance5 Active Lane Keeping Assist

Setting the sensitivity% The availability of this function is dependent

on the country.# Select Standard, Sensitive or Off.

Activating/deactivating the haptic warning# Select Warning.

Activate or deactivate the function.

Trailer hitchNotes on trailer operation

Mercedes‑AMG vehicles: be sure to observethe notes in the Supplement. Otherwise, youmay fail to recognise dangers.Observe the following notes on the tongueweight:R Do not use a tongue weight that exceeds or

falls below the permissible tongue weight

R Use a tongue weight as close as possible tothe maximum tongue weight

Do not exceed the following values:R Permissible trailer loadR Permissible rear axle load of the towing vehi‐

cleR Permissible gross mass of the towing vehicleR Permissible gross mass of the trailerR Maximum permissible speed of the trailer

Ensure the following before starting a journey:R The tyre pressure on the rear axle of the tow‐

ing vehicle is set for a maximum loadR The lighting of the connected trailer is opera‐

tionalR Vehicles without LED headlamps or MUL‐

TIBEAM LED headlamps: the headlampshave been set correctly

In the event of increased rear axle load, the car/trailer combination may not exceed a maximumspeed of 100 km/h for reasons concerning theoperating permit. This also applies in countries

in which the permissible maximum speed forcar/trailer combinations is above 100 km/h.

Folding the ball neck out/in

& WARNING Risk of accident due to theball neck not being engaged

If the ball neck is not engaged, the trailermay come loose.# Always engage the ball neck as descri‐

bed.

& WARNING Risk of injury from ball neckswinging outwards

The ball neck may swing outwards whenunlocking or when it has not been properlyengaged.There is a risk of injury within the ball neck'srange of movement!# Unlock the ball neck only when its

range of movement is unobstructed.


# Always be sure the ball neck is engagedwhen folding inwards.

Requirements:R The vehicle is secured against rolling away.R The swivel range is clear.R The trailer cables or adapter plugs have been

removed.

Folding the ball neck out

# Pull release switch2 until the ball neckunlocks.The ball neck will fold out from under therear bumper.Indicator lamp1 will flash.

# Pull the ball neck in the direction of thearrow until it engages audibly in a verticalposition.Indicator lamp1 on the ball neck releaseswitch will go out.If the ball neck is not securely locked inplace, the Trailer coupling Check lock displaymessage will appear on the multifunction dis‐play.


# Remove the cover cap from the ball head andstore it in a safe place.

Make sure that the ball on the ball neck is clean.Check that it is either greased or dry (grease-free), depending on the instructions for thetrailer.

Folding the ball neck in# Pull release switch2 until the ball neck

unlocks.The ball neck will fold up under the rearbumper.Indicator lamp1 will flash.

# Push the ball neck in the direction of thearrow until it engages audibly behind thebumper.Indicator lamp1 will go out and the mes‐sage on the multifunction display will disap‐pear.

Observe the information on the displays on theinstrument cluster:R Indicator and warning lamps (/ page 623)R Display messages (/ page 566)

Coupling up / uncoupling a trailer

Requirements:R The ball neck is extended and engaged in a

securely locked position

Trailers with a 7-pin plug can be connected tothe vehicle with the following adapters:R Adapter plugR Adapter cable

The trailer will be correctly detected by the vehi‐cle only if the following conditions are met:R The trailer is connected correctlyR The trailer lighting system is in working order

The functions of the following systems are affec‐ted by a correctly connected trailer:R Active Lane Keeping AssistR ESP® trailer stabilisationR Parking Assist PARKTRONICR Active Parking AssistR Blind Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot AssistR Drive Away Assist

R Cross Traffic AlertR Reversing cameraR 360° camera

Coupling up a trailer

* NOTE Damage to the battery due to fulldischarge

Charging the trailer battery using the powersupply of the trailer can damage the vehiclebattery.# Do not use the vehicle's power supply

to charge the trailer battery.

# Remove the cover from the ball head andstore it in a safe place (/ page 126).

# Position the trailer on a level surface behindthe vehicle and couple it up to the vehicle.


# Open the socket cap.# Insert the plug with lug1 in groove3 on

the socket.# Turn the bayonet coupling2 to the right as

far as it will go.# Let the cap engage.# Secure the cable to the trailer with cable ties

(only if you are using an adapter cable).# Make sure that the cable is always slack for

ease of movement during cornering.

Under the following conditions, a message mayappear on the multifunction display even if thetrailer has been connected correctly:R LEDs have been installed in the trailer light‐

ing systemR The current has fallen below the trailer light‐

ing system's minimum current (50 mA)

% Accessories can be connected to the perma‐nent power supply up to 180 W and to thepower supply that is switched on via the igni‐tion lock.

Uncoupling a trailer

& WARNING Risk of being crushed andbecoming trapped when uncoupling atrailer

When uncoupling a trailer with an engagedinertia-activated brake, your hand maybecome trapped between the vehicle and thetrailer drawbar.# Do not uncouple trailers with an

engaged overrun brake.

* NOTE Damage when uncoupling in astate of overrun

Uncoupling in a state of overrun can damagethe vehicle.# Do not uncouple trailers with an

engaged overrun brake.

# Secure the trailer against rolling away.# Disconnect the electrical connection

between the vehicle and the trailer.# Uncouple the trailer.# Place the cover on the ball head.

Bicycle rack function

& WARNING Risk of an accident whenusing the bicycle rack incorrectly

The bicycle rack may become detached fromthe vehicle in the following cases:R the permissible load capacity of the

trailer hitch is exceeded.


R the bicycle rack is used incorrectly.R the bicycle rack is secured to the ball

neck beneath the ball head.

Observe the following for your own safetyand that of other road users:# always adhere to the permissible load

capacity of the trailer hitch.# only use the bicycle rack to transport

bicycles.# always properly secure the bicycle rack

by attaching it to the ball head.# only use bicycle racks approved by

Mercedes-Benz.# always observe the bicycle rack operat‐

ing instructions.

* NOTE Damage to, or cracks on, thetrailer hitch due to unsuitable bicycleracks or bicycle racks being used incor‐rectly

# use only bicycle racks approved byMercedes-Benz.

Depending on the bicycle rack's design, up tothree bicycles can be transported on the bicyclerack.When mounted by attaching to ball head1, themaximum load capacity is 75 kg.The load capacity is calculated from the weightof the bicycle rack and the bicycle rack load.The vehicle's driving characteristics will changewhen a bicycle rack is fitted. Adapt your driving

style accordingly. Drive carefully and maintain asafe distance.When using a bicycle rack, set the tyre pressurefor maximum loading on the rear axle of thevehicle. Further information on the tyre pressurecan be found in the tyre pressure table(/ page 526).

Notes on loadingThe larger the distance between the load'scentre of gravity and the ball head, the greaterthe load on the trailer hitch.Therefore, observe the following notes:R mount heavy bicycles as close to the vehicle

as possibleR always distribute the load on the bicycle rack

as evenly as possible across the vehicle'slongitudinal axis

Mercedes-Benz recommends removing alldetachable parts from bicycles (e.g. baskets,child seats, rechargeable batteries) before load‐ing them onto the bicycle rack. This will improvethe aerodynamic resistance and centre of gravityof the bicycle rack.


Always secure the bicycles to prevent them frommoving around and check them at regular inter‐vals to ensure that they are secure.Do not use tarpaulins or other covers. The driv‐ing characteristics and rear view may beimpaired. In addition, aerodynamic resistanceand the load on the trailer hitch will increase.

Load distribution on the bicycle rack1 Vertical distance between centre of gravity

and ball head2 Horizontal distance between centre of grav‐

ity and ball head3 The centre of gravity is on the vehicle's

centre axis

Observe the following information when you areloading the bicycle rack with up to three bicy‐cles:

Loading the bicycle rack

Total weightof bicyclerack andload

Max. dis‐tance11

Max. dis‐tance22

Up to 75 kg 420 mm 300 mm

Vehicle towing instructionsThe vehicle is not suitable for the use of tow barsystems that are used for flat towing or dinghytowing, for example. Attaching and using tow barsystems can lead to damage on the vehicle.When you are towing a vehicle with tow bar sys‐tems, safe driving characteristics cannot beguaranteed for the towing vehicle or the towedvehicle. The vehicle-trailer combination mayswerve from side to side. Comply with the per‐mitted towing methods (/ page 514) and theinstructions for towing with both axles on theground (/ page 516).


Instrument display overviewMercedes-AMG vehicles: be sure to observethe notes in the Supplement. Otherwise, youmay fail to recognise dangers.

& WARNING Risk of accident due to aninstrument display malfunction

If the Instrument Display has failed or mal‐functioned, you may not recognise functionrestrictions applying to safety relevant sys‐tems.The operating safety of your vehicle may beimpaired.# Drive on carefully.# Have the vehicle checked immediately

at a qualified specialist workshop.

If the operating safety of your vehicle isimpaired, park the vehicle immediately andsafely. Contact a qualified specialist workshop.

Instrument display (standard)

1 Speedometer (example)2 Multifunction display3 Fuel level and fuel filler flap location indica‐

tor

Further content can be shown on the multifunc‐tion display2:R Assistant displayR TelephoneR NavigationR TripR Radio

R MediaR Vehicle dynamicsR Service

Instrument display in the widescreen cockpit

1 Speedometer (example)2 Multifunction display3 Rev counter (example)4 Coolant temperature display5 Fuel level, fuel filler flap location indicator,

range

294 Instrument Display and on-board computer

% In addition to the multifunction display2,further content can be shown on displays1and3 (/ page 298).

The segments on speedometer1 indicate thesystem status for the following:R Cruise control(/ page 237)R Limiter (/ page 238)R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC

(/ page 243)

* NOTE Engine damage due to excessivelyhigh engine speeds

The engine will be damaged if you drive withthe engine in the overrevving range.# Do not drive with the engine in the over‐

revving range.

The fuel supply will be interrupted to protect theengine when the red mark on the rev counter(overrevving range) is reached.Vehicles with a widescreen cockpit: duringnormal operating conditions, coolant tempera‐ture display4 may rise to 120 °C.

& WARNING Danger of burns when open‐ing the bonnet

If you open the engine bonnet when theengine has overheated or during a fire in theengine compartment, you could come intocontact with hot gases or other escapingoperating fluids.# Before opening the bonnet, allow the

engine to cool down.# In the event of a fire in the engine com‐

partment, keep the engine bonnetclosed and call the fire service.

Overview of the buttons on the steeringwheel

1P Back/Home button, on-board com‐puterPress and hold: shows standard display

2 Touch Control, on-board computer3 Control panel for cruise control/limiter or

Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC4 Control panel for MBUX multimedia system:£ LINGUATRONICß Displays favouritesVOL: control knob, adjusts the volume orswitches the sound off8 (press)

Instrument Display and on-board computer 295

6 Makes/accepts a call~ Rejects/ends a call

5 ò Calls up the home screen6 Touch Control multimedia system7 % Back button

Operating the on-board computerMercedes-AMG vehicles: observe the notes inthe Supplement. Otherwise, you may fail to rec‐ognise dangers.

& WARNING Risk of distraction from infor‐mation systems and communicationsequipment

If you operate information and communica‐tion equipment integrated in the vehiclewhen driving, you will be distracted from thetraffic situation. This could also cause you tolose control of the vehicle.# Only operate this equipment when the

traffic situation permits.# If you cannot be sure of this, stop the

vehicle whilst paying attention to road

and traffic conditions and operate theequipment with the vehicle stationary.

Observe the legal requirements for the countryin which you are currently driving when operat‐ing the on-board computer.% The on-board computer displays will appear

on the multifunction display (/ page 299).

The on-board computer is operated using theleft-hand Touch Control2 and the left-handback/home button1.When the on-board computer is being operated,different acoustic signals will sound as operatingfeedback, e.g. when the end of a list is reachedor when you are scrolling through a list.The following menus are available:R AssistanceR TelephoneR NavigationR TripR RadioR MediaR Styles & displayR Service

The menus can be called up from the menu baron the multifunction display.# To call up the menu bar: press the back

button on the left1 until the menu bar isdisplayed.


% Vehicles without Active Distance AssistDISTRONIC: press theò button to callup the menu bar of the on-board computer.

% The illustration shows the instrument displayin the widescreen cockpit.

# To scroll in the menu bar: swipe left orright on the left-hand Touch Control2.

# To call up a menu or confirm a selection:press the left-hand Touch Control2.

# To scroll through displays or lists on themenu: swipe upwards or downwards on theleft-hand Touch Control2.

# To call up a submenu or confirm a selec‐tion: press the left-hand Touch Control2.

# To exit a submenu: press the back buttonon the left1.

Selecting the head-up display# To switch on the head-up display: switch

on the head-up display via the multimediasystem or activate it in the menu bar by swip‐ing upwards on the left-hand Touch Control2.The head-up display menu has been selectedon the head-up display.

# To switch to the head-up display: pressthe left-hand Touch Control2 or swipeupwards on the left-hand Touch Control2.

# To select what the head-up displayshows: swipe upwards or downwards on theleft-hand Touch Control2.

Full-surface menuVehicles with an instrument display in thewidescreen cockpit: the following menus canbe shown in full on the instrument display:R Assistance

R TripR Navigation# On the corresponding menu, use the left-

hand Touch Control2 to scroll to the end ofthe list.

# Press the left-hand Touch Control2.The selected menu will be displayed in full.

Adjusting the design of the instrument dis‐playOn-board computer:4 Styles & display

Setting the design# Swipe upwards or downwards on the left-

hand Touch Control.# Press the left-hand Touch Control.

The instrument display will be shown in theselected design.

The following designs can be selected, depend‐ing on the vehicle equipment:R Classic


R SportR ProgressiveR UnderstatedR Standard displays

Showing display content on the instrumentclusterVehicles with an instrument display in thewidescreen cockpit: additional display contentcan be shown on the instrument cluster.% The display content on the instrument clus‐

ter adapts to the topic selected on the multi‐media system.

# To select display content: swipe to theright or left on the left-hand Touch Control.

# Swipe upwards or downwards on the left-hand Touch Control to select the requireddisplay content.When the display content is selected, it willbriefly be highlighted.

1 The index points show the selected displaycontent.

2 Display content, left (example: speedometer)

When the display content is selected2, it willbriefly be highlighted.Display content selection, left:R SpeedometerR Time/dateR Trip computer From start and From resetR RangeR Audio

3 Display content, centre (example: mediamenu)The index points show the selected menucontent

The display content in the centre shows themenu content of the respective menus from themenu bar on the multifunction display.Display content menu selection, centre:R AssistanceR TelephoneR NavigationR Trip


R RadioR MediaR Styles and displayR Service

4 Display content, right (example: rev counter)

Display content selection, right:R Rev counterR Average fuel consumptionR ECO displayR NavigationR G-meter

R Assistant display

Overview of displays on the multifunctiondisplay

1 Outside temperature2 Time3 Digital speedometer

4 Display section5 Drive program6 Transmission position

% Vehicles with standard instrument dis‐play: the position of the displays differs fromthose shown here.

Further displays on the multifunction display:Z Gearshift recommendation (/ page 206)u Active Parking Assist (/ page 272)é Parking Assist PARKTRONIC deactivated

(/ page 262)h Cruise control (/ page 237)È Limiter (/ page 238)ç Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC

(/ page 243)ê Active Brake Assist (/ page 237)à Active Steering Assist (/ page 249)ð Active Lane Keeping Assist (/ page 285)± Active Lane Change Assist (/ page 251)è ECO start/stop function (/ page 196)


ë HOLD function (/ page 255)_ Adaptive Highbeam Assist (/ page 160)

Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus(/ page 161)

ð Maximum permissible speed exceeded(for certain countries only)

Vehicles with Speed Limit Assist: detectedinstructions and traffic signs (/ page 278).Vehicles with Traffic Sign Assist: detectedinstructions and traffic signs (/ page 280).

Adjusting the instrument lighting

# Turn brightness control1 up or down.The lighting of the instrument display and inthe control elements of the vehicle interior isadjusted.

Menus and submenusCalling up functions on the Service menu ofthe on-board computer

On-board computer:4 Service# To select a function: swipe upwards or

downwards on the left-hand Touch Control.# Press the left-hand Touch Control.Functions on the Service menu:R Message memory (/ page 566)R AdBlue: Adblue® range and fill levelR Tyres:

- Restart the tyre pressure loss warningsystem (/ page 533)

- Check the tyre pressure with the tyrepressure monitor (/ page 528)

- Restart the tyre pressure monitor(/ page 528)

R ASSYST PLUS: call up the service due date(/ page 484)R Coolant: coolant temperature display


R Engine oil level: engine oil levelR Consumption info: fuel life cycle consump‐

tion

Calling up displays on the Assistance menu

On-board computer:4 AssistanceThe following displays are available on the Assis‐tance menu:R AssistanceR Attention level (/ page 277)R Vehicles with an instrument display in

the widescreen cockpit: full screen

# To switch between the displays: swipeupwards or downwards on the left-handTouch Control.

% The illustration shows the instrument displayin the widescreen cockpit.

Status displays on the assistant display:RÛ ATTENTION ASSIST: deactivatedR Grey lane markings: Active Lane Keeping

Assist activatedR Green lane markings: Active Lane Keeping

Assist activeR¸ Grey radar waves next to vehicle: Blind

Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist ena‐bled

R¸ Green radar waves next to vehicle:Blind Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot AssistactiveR Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC displays

(/ page 243)

Calling up displays on the Trip menu

On-board computer:4 Trip# To select a display: swipe upwards or down‐

wards on the left-hand Touch Control.Trip menu in the standard cockpit:R SpeedometerR Rev counterR Range and current fuel consumptionR ECO display (/ page 197)R Trip computer From start and From reset

Trip menu in the widescreen cockpit:R Standard displayR Current fuel consumption


R ECO display (/ page 197)R Trip computer From start and From resetR Full screen

Standard display (example)1 Trip distance2 Total distance

Trip computer (example)1 Total distance2 Driving time3 Average speed4 Average fuel consumption

% The illustrations show the instrument displayin the widescreen cockpit.

Resetting values on the Trip menu of the on-board computer

On-board computer:4 TripYou can reset the values of the following func‐tions:R Trip distanceR Trip computer From start and From resetR ECO display (/ page 197)

# To select the function to be reset: swipeupwards or downwards on the left-handTouch Control.

# Press the left-hand Touch Control.# Select Yes .# Press the left-hand Touch Control.

If you press and hold the left-hand Touch Con‐trol, the values of the function will be resetimmediately.


Calling up navigation instructions on the on-board computer

On-board computer:4 NavigationThe following displays are available in the naviga‐tion menu:R Navigation viewR Map viewR Full-surface map view

Example: no change of direction announced1 Distance to the next change of direction2 Distance to the next destination

3 Estimated arrival time at next destination4 Current road

Example: change of direction announced1 Distance to the change of direction2 Road to which the change of direction leads3 Change-of-direction symbol4 Recommended lane (white)5 Possible lane6 Lane not recommended (dark grey)

Further possible displays on the Navigationmenu:R Direction of travel: display of direction of

travel and road currently being travelled on.R New route... or Calculating route…: a new

route is being calculated.R Road not mapped: the road is unknown, e.g.

it has only recently been built.R No route: no route could be calculated to the

selected destination.R Off map: the map for the current location is

not available.R Area of dest. reached: when an intermediate

destination is reached, the intermediate des‐tination flag will be displayed with the num‐ber of the intermediate destinationÎ.After this, route guidance will continue. Oncethe destination is reached, the chequeredflagÍ will be displayed. Route guidancewill now be complete

# To exit the menu: press the back button onthe left.


Vehicles with the MBUX multimedia system:You can also start navigation to one of therecent destinations on the Navigation menu:# Press the left-hand Touch Control.# To select a destination: swipe upwards or

downwards on the left-hand Touch Control.# Press the left-hand Touch Control.

Route guidance will start.If route guidance has already been activated,a query will appear asking whether you wishto end the current route guidance.

# Select Yes.# Press the left-hand Touch Control.

Route guidance will start.

Selecting radio stations using the on-boardcomputer

On-board computer:4 Radio

1 Frequency range2 Station3 Name of track

% The illustration shows the Instrument Displayin the Widescreen Cockpit

When you select a station from the memory pre‐sets, the preset will appear next to the stationname. When you select a saved station in the

frequency range, an asterisk will appear next tothe station name.# To select a radio station: swipe upwards or

downwards on the left-hand Touch Control.

Selecting the frequency range or memorypreset# Press the left-hand Touch Control.# Swipe upwards or downwards on the left-

hand Touch Control.# Press the left-hand Touch Control.


Operating media playback using the on-board computer

On-board computer:4 Media

1 Media source2 Track number and current track3 Name of artist (example)

% The illustration shows the Instrument Displayin the Widescreen Cockpit

# To change tracks on an active mediasource: swipe upwards or downwards on theleft-hand Touch Control.

Changing a media source# Press the left-hand Touch Control.# To select a media source: swipe upwards

or downwards on the left-hand Touch Con‐trol.

# Press the left-hand Touch Control.

Dialling telephone numbers using the on-board computer




vehicle whilst paying attention to road

and traffic conditions and operate theequipment with the vehicle stationary.

When using the phone, observe the legalrequirements for the country in which you arecurrently driving.Requirements:R The mobile phone is connected to the multi‐

media system.

On-board computer:4 TelephoneThe most recent telephone calls (dialled,received and missed calls) are displayed on theTelephone menu.# To select an entry: swipe upwards or down‐

wards on the left-hand Touch Control.# Press the left-hand Touch Control.

If there is only one telephone numbersaved to an entry: the telephone numberwill be selected.

# If there are multiple telephone numberssaved to an entry: swipe upwards or down‐


wards on the left-hand Touch Control toselect the desired telephone number.

# Press the left-hand Touch Control.The telephone number will be dialled.

The following displays may appear instead of thetelephone numbers dialled:R Please wait: the application is starting. If a

Bluetooth® connection to the mobile phoneis not established, the menu for authorisingand connecting a mobile phone will be dis‐played on the multimedia system(/ page 426).R Updating data: the call list is being updated.R Importing contacts: contacts are being

imported from the mobile phone or a storagemedium.

Accepting/rejecting an incoming callVehicles with head-up display: when youreceive a call, the Incoming call message willappear on the head-up display.# Swipe upwards or downwards on the left-

hand Touch Control and select6 (accept)or~ (reject).

# Press the left-hand Touch Control.

You may accept or reject the call using the6or~ button on the steering wheel.

Setting the head-up display using the on-board computer

On-board computer:4 HEAD-UP DISPLAYThe following head-up display settings can beselected:R PositionR BrightnessR DisplaysR MessagesR Assistance statusR TelephoneR AudioR LINGUATRONIC

# To choose a setting: swipe to the right onthe left-hand Touch Control.The Settings menu5 is selected.

# To call up the Settings menu: press theleft-hand Touch Control.

# To adjust the position: swipe upwards ordownwards on the left-hand Touch Control.

# To adjust the brightness: swipe to the leftor right on the left-hand Touch Control.

# To set messages, assistance status, tele‐phone, audio and LINGUATRONIC: pressthe left-hand Touch Control.The list of setting options will be displayed.

# Swipe upwards or downwards on the left-hand Touch Control and select a setting bypressing the left-hand Touch Control.


Selecting what the head-up display shows

(Example)1 To switch the head-up display on/off2 Left display area

Navigation systemAverage consumptionG-meter

3 Central display areaSet speed in the driver assistance system,e.g. cruise controlWarnings from driver assistance systems,e.g. distance warning

4 Right display area

Traffic Sign AssistAssistant display

5 To select the settings6 Index points

Display areas2 to4 that are not required canbe hidden.% In audio mode, the station name, track or

last calls will be shown temporarily when theaudio source is being actively operated.

# To select a display: swipe upwards or down‐wards on the left-hand Touch Control.

Head-up DisplayFunction of the head-up display

The head-up display projects information abovethe cockpit into the driver's field of vision, e.g.the speed of the vehicle, information from thenavigation system or driver assistance systemsand some warning messages.Depending on the vehicle's equipment, differentcontent can be shown in the three display areasof the head-up display (/ page 306).

Display elements

1 Navigation instructions2 Current speed3 Detected instructions and traffic signs4 Set speed in the driver assistance system

(e.g. cruise control)

System limitsThe visibility of the displays will be affected bythe following conditions:R Seat positionR image position settingR light conditions


R wet carriagewaysR objects on the display coverR polarisation in sunglasses

% In extreme sunlight, sections of the displaymay appear washed out. You can correct thisby deactivating and reactivating the head-updisplay.

Switching the head-up display on/off via themultimedia system

Multimedia system:4© 5 Settings 5 Quick access# Select HUD.

The head-up-display is activated.


Notes on operating safety




vehicle whilst paying attention to roadand traffic conditions and operate theequipment with the vehicle stationary.

& WARNING Risk of an accident fromoperating mobile communication equip‐ment while the vehicle is in motion

Mobile communications devices distract thedriver from the traffic situation. This could

also cause the driver to lose control of thevehicle.# As the driver, only operate mobile com‐

munications devices when the vehicle isstationary.

# As a vehicle occupant, only use mobilecommunications devices in the areasintended for this purpose, e.g. in therear passenger compartment.


If objects in the vehicle interior are stowedincorrectly, they can slide or be thrownaround and hit vehicle occupants. In addi‐tion, cup holders, open stowage spaces andmobile phone receptacles cannot alwaysretain all objects they contain.There is a risk of injury, particularly in theevent of sudden braking or a sudden changein direction.

# Always stow objects so that they can‐not be thrown around in such situa‐tions.




For your own safety, always observe the follow‐ing points when operating mobile communica‐tions equipment and especially your voice con‐trol system:R Observe the legal requirements for the coun‐

try in which you are driving.R While driving, only operate mobile communi‐

cations equipment and your voice controlsystem when the traffic conditions permit it.You may otherwise be distracted from thetraffic conditions and cause an accident,injuring yourself and others.

LINGUATRONIC 309

R If you use the voice control system in anemergency your voice can change and yourtelephone call, e.g. an emergency call, canthereby be unnecessarily delayed.R Familiarise yourself with the voice control

system functions before starting the journey.R Comply with the loading guidelines

(/ page 126).

OperationOverview of operating the multifunctionsteering wheel

LINGUATRONIC is operational approximatelythirty seconds after the ignition is switched on.

1 Press the rocker switch up:£ starts thedialogue

2 Press the control knob:8 switches thesound off or on (ends the dialogue)Turn the control knob up/down: increases/decreases the volume

3 Press the rocker switch down:~ rejects/ends a call (ends the dialogue)

Conducting a dialogue

For the dialogue with LINGUATRONIC, you canuse complete sentences of colloquial languageas voice commands, such as, for example,"Please show me the list of the last calls" or"How warm is it outside?". It is not necessary tofirst change to the relevant application such as"Telephone" or "Vehicle function".# To activate or continue dialogue by using

a keyword: say "Hello Mercedes" to activateLINGUATRONIC. Voice activation must beswitched on in the multimedia system(/ page 312). For this, it is not necessary topress up the£ rocker switch on the mul‐tifunction steering wheel.Voice activation can also be directly com‐bined with a voice command, e.g. "HiMercedes, how fast can I drive?".

or# Press the£ rocker switch up on the mul‐

tifunction steering wheel.You can say a voice command after anacoustic signal.

310 LINGUATRONIC

# To correct an entry: say the Correctionvoice command.

# To select an entry from the selection list:say the line number or the contents.

# To browse the selection list: say the Nextor Back voice command.

# To interrupt the dialogue: say the Pausevoice command.The dialogue can be continued with the"Hello Mercedes" voice command or bypressing up the£ rocker switch on themultifunction steering wheel.

# To jump to the preceding dialogue: say theBack voice command.

# To jump back to the top dialogue level:say the Home voice command.

# To cancel the dialogue: say the Close voicecommand or press the8 or~ buttonon the multifunction steering wheel.

# To interrupt a voice output: speak in themiddle of a voice dialogue when the systemis still answering.The voice output is shortened and the con‐clusion is reached more quickly.

% The Voice barge-in option must be switchedon in the multimedia system for this(/ page 312).

Overview of operable functions in LINGUA‐TRONIC

You can use the LINGUATRONIC voice controlsystem to operate the following functionsdepending on the vehicle equipment:R TelephoneR Text message and e-mailR NavigationR Address bookR RadioR MediaR Vehicle functionsR Weather

Full functionality is only available for you withactivation of online voice control (/ page 312).

Notes on the language setting

You can change the language of LINGUATRONICvia the system language settings. If the set sys‐tem language is not supported by LINGUA‐TRONIC, English will be selected.LINGUATRONIC is available in the following lan‐guages:R GermanR EnglishR FrenchR ItalianR DutchR PolishR PortugueseR RussianR SwedishR SpanishR Czech

LINGUATRONIC 311

R Turkish

Setting LINGUATRONIC (multimedia system)

Requirements:R For online voice control: your vehicle is

connected with your Mercedes me useraccount (/ page 451).R There is an Internet connection

(/ page 459).R For online use of contacts: online voice

control is activated.

Multimedia system:4© 5 Settings 5 System5 LINGUATRONIC

Switching voice activation of LINGUATRONICon/off# Select Voice activation "Hi Mercedes".


When the function is active, the "HiMercedes" voice command can activate thedialogue.

Activating/deactivating online voice control# Activate Online recognition.

% Online voice control is activated at the fac‐tory.

# Select Online recognition subscrip..You will be connected with the Mercedes meportal.

# Activate online voice control in the Mercedesme portal.

Activating contacts for online use# Select Contact upload for online recognition.

When the function is active, contacts will befound more easily and accurately using voiceinput. The quality of the enunciation of con‐tact names by the system will also beimproved.

Switching on voice interruption# Select Voice barge-in.

If the function is active, a command can beinterjected during voice output of the sys‐tem.

Using LINGUATRONIC effectivelyLINGUATRONIC audible help functions

Using the corresponding voice commands youreceive the following information and assistancein the following cases:R For optimal operation: say the Voice con-

trol tutorial voice command or call up theDigital Owner's Manual with Could you go tothe LINGUATRONIC tutorial please?, forexample. The full extent of the Digital Own‐er's Manual is available when the vehicle isstationary. Here you can also find explana‐tory videos which introduce you to the func‐tions of LINGUATRONIC.R Current application: on the multifunction

steering wheel, press the£ rocker switchup and say the Help voice command. You will

312 LINGUATRONIC

receive suggestions and information aboutoperation of LINGUATRONIC for the currentapplication.R Continued dialogue: say the Help voice

command during a voice dialogue. For everystep of the dialogue you receive matchinginformation.R Specific function: say the voice command

for the desired function, e.g. with "HelloMercedes, I need help with the radio" or afterpressing the£ rocker switch on the multi‐function steering wheel up, say the Help forthe telephone voice command, for example.

Notes on optimal use of LINGUATRONIC

Notes on how to improve recognition:R Activate online voice control (/ page 312).R Only operate LINGUATRONIC from the driv‐

er's seat.R Say the voice commands coherently and

clearly, but do not exaggerate the words.R Avoid loud noises that cause interference

while making a voice command entry, e.g.

the entertainment in the rear-passengercompartment.R For telephone or address book entries:

- Only create sensible address book entriesin the system/mobile phone, e.g. entersurname and first name in the correctfield.

- Do not use any abbreviations, unneces‐sary spaces or special characters.

R For radio programme names: say the Readout station list voice command and say thedesired station name in the way the voiceoutput reads aloud to you.

% To improve recognition, depending on theoutside temperature, either the blowers forventilation or heating are reduced when LIN‐GUATRONIC is started.

Notes on online voice control

Online voice control improves recognition andmakes additional results available as a result ofexternal information, e.g. information about POIs

and about the weather. We therefore recom‐mend that you activate online voice control.You will need a Mercedes me user account forthis. If you do not yet have a user account youhave to create one and connect it with your vehi‐cle (/ page 451).Then call up your Mercedes me user account.The Mercedes me services are shown and canbe activated (/ page 451).In addition, online voice control must be activa‐ted (/ page 312).

Essential voice commandsNotes on the voice commands

Aside from the exact voice commands (see the"Voice command" column in the following tables)to call up specific functions, in most cases LIN‐GUATRONIC also understands a great many par‐aphrases from daily usage. Examples of theseare listed in the "Colloquial examples" column.For some languages however these examplesare only available to a limited extent.

LINGUATRONIC 313

% Content in angled brackets, e.g. <POI> or<contact>, is a placeholder which has to becompleted by you with the desired term. Thevoice command Set <POI> as intermediate

destination could, for example, be completedwith: Set Mercedes-Benz Arena as intermedi-ate destination.

Overview of switch voice commands

Switch voice commands can be used to opencertain applications.

Switch voice commands

Voice command Colloquial example Function

Switch to navigation I would like to go to navigation Switches to navigation

Switch to address book I would like to switch to theaddress book

Switches to the address book

Switch to telephone I would like to switch to the phone Switches to the telephone

Switch to messages Can you switch to messagesplease?

Switches to the text message application.

Switch to e-mail I would like to go to the e-mailapplication

Switches to the e-mail application

Switch to radio I would like to switch to the radio Switches to radio

Switch to media I would like to switch to the mediaapplication

Switches to media

314 LINGUATRONIC


Switch to comfort I would like to go to the comfortapplication

Switches to the comfort settings

Switch to vehicle info I would like to go to the vehicleapplication

Switches to vehicle information

Switch to settings I would like to go to the settingsmenu

Switches to the menu with the setting options

% It is not necessary to first call up a menu inorder to operate a function it contains withLINGUATRONIC. You can operate the func‐tion directly using voice input, e.g. call acontact or enter a destination for navigation.

You can find further information in the over‐view tables for voice commands.

Overview of navigation voice commands

Using the navigation voice commands you canenter POIs and conventional addresses or navi‐

gate to your own contacts. You can also carryout important navigation settings directly. Thefollowing list offers just a small selection of thepossible navigation commands. You will receiveadditional suggestions if you say Help for naviga-tion.

LINGUATRONIC 315

Navigation voice commands


Navigate to <address> Navigate to Cambridge in the KingStreet

Starts route guidance to the desired address.

Navigate to <contact> Drive/bring me to the contactaddress of John Smith

Starts route guidance to a contact from the address book.

Navigate to <3 word address> The example is for the German lan‐guage:Drive to Tapfer.Gebäude.Verliehen

Starts route guidance to a 3 word address from what3words.The example mentioned navigates you to the Brandenburg Gate.Observe the following information:R 3 word addresses are language dependent.R Searching for a destination using 3 word addresses is not possible in

all countries and in all languages. Additional information on 3 wordaddresses from what3words can be found in the Navigation sectionunder "Entering the destination as a 3 word address".

The Brandenburg Gate, for example, has the following 3 word addresses:R German: tapfer.gebäude.verliehenR English: that.lands.winningR French: posteaux.bobineur.ombrant

316 LINGUATRONIC


Home I would like to go home/I want todrive to my home address

Starts route guidance to the home address.

Work I would like to navigate to work Starts route guidance to work.

Enter POI Take me to a POI Enters a POI, e.g. Brandenburg Gate.

Navigate to <POI> Navigate to "McDonald's" Starts route guidance to a POI.

Navigate to the online POI <POI> Navigate to online POI "McDonald's Searches online for a POI and starts route guidance.

Start route guidance Begin route guidance/Can youstart route guidance?

Starts route guidance to a destination.

Cancel route guidance Can you quit route guidance? Cancels route guidance.

Restart route guidance I would like to resume route guid-ance

Continues route guidance after a break.

Set <address> as intermediate des-tination

Set "Stratton Road in Swindon" asan intermediate destination

Selects an intermediate destination for the route.

Set <contact> as intermediate des-tination

Set "John Smith" as intermediatedestination

Selects an intermediate destination from the contacts for the route.

LINGUATRONIC 317


Set <POI> as intermediate destina-tion

Set "Buckingham Palace" as anintermediate destination

Selects a POI as an intermediate destination for the route.

Enter address in <country> I would like to enter a new addressin "France"

Selects a destination in another country.

Enter postcode Start route guidance to a new post-code

Enters a postcode.

Last destinations Show the previous destinations Selects a destination from the previous destinations.

Show alternative routes Search for alternative routes Shows one of the alternative routes calculated.

Driving recommendations on Switch on driving recommendations Switches on voice output for route guidance.

Driving recommendations off Mute the driving instructions Switches off voice output for route guidance.

Show traffic map Switch on traffic jam info Displays traffic information on the map.

Hide traffic map Switch off the traffic jam messages Hides the traffic information.

POI icons on Show me point of interest icons onthe map please

Displays the POI symbols on the map.

Hide POI icons I would like to hide all POI symbols Hides the POI symbols.

318 LINGUATRONIC

Overview of telephone voice commands

You can use the telephone voice commands tomake phone calls or search through the address

book. The following list offers just a small selec‐tion of the possible telephone commands. You

will receive additional suggestions if you sayHelp for phone.

Telephone voice commands


Call <telephone number> I would like you to dial 0171xxxxxxx Makes a telephone call by entering the telephone number directly.

Call <contact> Call Jane Smith on her mobile Makes a telephone call directly by entering a name from the addressbook.

Call Mercedes-Benz emergencycall centre

Could you call the Mercedes-Benzemergency centre?

Triggers an emergency call to the Mercedes-Benz emergency call centre.

Call Mercedes me I’d like you to call the MB break-down assistance please

Places a call with Mercedes-Benz breakdown assistance.

Latest calls Show me the list of missed calls Shows the list of missed calls.

Previous calls Show me the last calls The list shows all outgoing, incoming and missed calls.

Incoming calls Show me the calls received Shows the list of incoming calls.

Outgoing calls Show me the list of outgoing calls Shows the list of outgoing calls.

LINGUATRONIC 319


Search for <contact> Could you open the contact "JohnSmith"?

Opens the contact data of a contact in the address book.

Redial Redial/Call last phone number Makes a call to the last telephone number dialled.

Change phone Could you please switch to the sec-ond phone?

Changes the primary telephone

Overview of radio voice commands

Radio voice commands can also be used whenthe radio application runs in the background and

another application is visible in the foreground.The following list offers just a small selection ofthe possible radio voice commands. You will

receive additional suggestions if you say Helpfor radio.

Radio voice commands


Station <station name> I would like to select station "CoolFM"

Selects the radio station.

Radio frequency <Frequency> Go to station/radio frequency"eighty seven point five mega-hertz".

Enters a radio frequency, e.g. in the FM waveband.

Next radio station Call up the next radio station Calls up the next radio station from the station list.

320 LINGUATRONIC


Previous station Switch to the last radio station/tothe previous program

Switches to the previous radio station.

Save radio station Save the radio station, please Saves the radio station currently playing.

Show station list Please show me the list of all radiostations

Shows the radio list with the radio stations that can currently be received.

Read out radio station list Please read out the radio program Reads out the radio list with the radio stations that can currently bereceived.

Traffic information on Switch on the traffic info Switches on traffic announcements.

Traffic information off I'd like to switch off traffic info Switches off traffic announcements.

Radio info on I want you to turn on additionalradio station text

Switches on the radio text information for the radio station currently play‐ing.

Radio info off I want you to turn off additionalradio station text

Switches off the radio text information for the radio station currently play‐ing.

Change to radio favourites Please show me the list of allfavourite radio stations

Shows the favourites with the saved radio stations.

LINGUATRONIC 321

Overview of media player voice commands

Media player voice commands can also be usedwhen the media player application runs in the

background and another application is visible inthe foreground. The following list offers just asmall selection of the possible media player

voice commands. You will receive additional sug‐gestions if you say Help for media or Help forplayer.

Media player voice commands


Play <track/albums/artists/composers/music genres>

Play "Yellow Submarine" The names of all available tracks, albums, artists, composers or genresare accepted during the search. In the case of a clear search result thetrack found is played back immediately.

Play track <track> Play song "So What" The available tracks are played back.

Play album <album> Play album "A Night at the Opera" The available albums are played back.

Play artist <artist> I want to listen to the artist"Madonna"

The available artists are played back.

Play composer <composer> I'd like to hear the composer "Lud-wig van Beethoven"

The available composers are played back.

Play music genre <music genre> I'd like to hear the music genre"Bebop"

The available music genres are played back.

322 LINGUATRONIC


Search for track <track> I would like to search for the song"Sailing"

The names of all available tracks are accepted during the search. A selec‐tion list appears from which you can select the desired music. If you wishto play all the tracks in a selection list, say "Play all tracks".

Search for album <album> Search for album "A Night at theOpera"

The names of all available albums are accepted during the search. Aselection list appears from which you can select the desired music. If youwish to play all the tracks in a selection list, say "Play all tracks".

Search for artist <artist> I would like to search for the artist"Elton John"

The names of all available artists are accepted during the search. A selec‐tion list appears from which you can select the desired music. If you wishto play all the tracks in a selection list, say "Play all tracks".

Search for composer <composer> Search for composer "Beethoven" The names of all available composers are accepted during the search. Aselection list appears from which you can select the desired music. If youwish to play all the tracks in a selection list, say "Play all tracks".

Search for music genre <musicgenre>

Search for music genre "Pop" The names of all available music genres are accepted during the search. Aselection list appears from which you can select the desired music. If youwish to play all the tracks in a selection list, say "Play all tracks".

Next track Start the next song/video clip/film Plays back the next track.

Previous track Play the last song/track/clip again Plays back the previous track.

Repeat this track I'd like to listen to this track again The current track is played back from the beginning.

LINGUATRONIC 323


Play similar music I'd like to hear similar music Plays back similar tracks.

Play random music Play me a random track Plays back random tracks.

Random playback on Turn random playback on Switches to random mode.

Random track list off Switch off shuffle mode Switches off random mode.

What am I listening to? Which music is currently playing? The information about the track currently playing is read aloud.

Overview of message voice commands

Messages can be created, edited and listened tousing the message voice commands. The follow‐

ing list offers just a small selection of the possi‐ble message commands. You will receive addi‐tional suggestions if you say Help for messaging.

Message voice commands


Text message to <Name> I would like to write a new text to"John Smith's mobile number"

Creates a text message. All address book names are available.

Text message to <Name> <Text> I would like you to write a new textto "Jane Smith" with the followingtext: "I am running late"

Writes a text message to the person mentioned. The content of the textcan be spoken immediately if online voice control has been activated.

324 LINGUATRONIC


Read out new text messages I would like you to read out thenew text messages

Reads out new text messages.

Read out the last text messagefrom <Name>

I would like you to read out the lasttext message from "John Smith"

Reads out the last text message from the person mentioned.

E-mail to <Name> I would like to write a new e-mailto "John Smith, office"

Creates an e-mail.

E-mail to <Name><Text> I would like to write an e-mail to"John Smith, private" with the fol-lowing text: "Running late".

Writes an email message to the person mentioned. The content of the textcan be spoken immediately if online voice control has been activated.

Forward e-mail to I would like you to forward this e-mail to "John Smith"

Forwards the selected or open e-mail.

Read out new e-mails I would like you to read out thenew email

Reads out the new e-mails.

Read out the last e-mail from<Name>

I would like you to read out the lastemail from my wife

Reads out the last e-mail from the person mentioned.

E-mail in English to <Name> Write a mail in English to JohnSmith

Writes an email in English to the person mentioned.

LINGUATRONIC 325

Overview of vehicle voice commands

You can use the vehicle voice commands todirectly call up the corresponding menus for thevehicle settings and operate vehicle functions.

The following list offers just a small selection ofthe possible vehicle voice commands. You willreceive additional suggestions if you say Helpfor vehicle settings or Help for vehicle functions.% If no seat or side is mentioned for com‐

mands that relate to a seat or side of vehicle

then all actions are carried out automaticallyfor the driver's seat.

Vehicle voice commands


Temperature colder I would like to reduce the tempera-ture

Lowers the temperature of the air conditioning system.

Air recirculation on I would like to activate the air circu-lation

Switches on air recirculation mode for the air conditioning system.

Automatic climate control driver on I would like to switch on the auto-matic climate control for the driv-er's seat

Switches on automatic climate control for the driver's or front passengerside.

Ambient light blue I would like to set the interior light-ing to blue

Switches the ambiance light, e.g. to blue.

Wave massage driver on I would like to switch on the wavemassage for the driver's seat

Switches on the wave massage for the driver's or front passenger seat.

326 LINGUATRONIC


Massage driver's seat off Switch the driver's side massageoff

Switches off the massage function for the driver's or front passenger seat.

Seat heating driver on I would like to switch on the seatheating for the driver's seat

Switches on the seat heating for the driver's or front passenger seat.

Seat heating front passenger level2

Seat heating front-passenger onlevel 2

Sets the seat heating for the driver's or front passenger seat to level 2.

Current speed limit I would like to hear the speed limit Calls up the current speed limit.

Outside temperature I would like to find out what thetemperature outside is like

Calls up the outside temperature.

Average consumption What is the current average con-sumption?

Calls up average consumption.

Vehicle data Can you please display the vehicledata menu?

Calls up the vehicle data.

Range Tell me the current range Calls up the current range data.

Assistance menu Show me the driver assistance set-tings

Displays the assistance settings.

LINGUATRONIC 327


Climate control menu I would like to see the climate con-trol menu

Displays the climate control settings.

Light menu I would like to change the light set-tings

Displays the light settings.

Seats menu I would like to switch to seat menu Displays the seat adjustment settings.

Massage menu I would like to switch to the mas-sage seat menu

Displays the massage settings.

Next service Tell me my next service appoint-ment

Calls up the next service due date.

328 LINGUATRONIC

Overview and operationOverview of the MBUX multimedia system





You must observe the legal requirements for thecountry in which you are currently driving whenoperating the multimedia system.

1 Touch Control and control panel for theMBUX multimedia systemOperating Touch Control(/ page 332)

2 Media display with touch functionalityHome screen overview(/ page 331)Operating the touchscreen (/ page 333)

3 TouchpadOperating the touchpad(/ page 334)

4 Control knobPress and hold: switches the multimedia sys‐tem or media display on or offPress briefly: switches the mute functionon/offTurn: adjusts the volume

5 Buttons for navigation, radio/media andtelephoneCalling up applications (/ page 342)

6 Buttons for vehicle functions/system set‐tings and favourites/themesCalling up applications (/ page 342)

You can operate the MBUX multimedia systemwith these control elements:R Touch Control1 and touchpad3

The operation for both control elements isachieved by cursor control.R Media display2

% Alternatively, you can conduct a dialoguewith LINGUATRONIC (/ page 310).

Numerous application, online services, servicesand apps are available for you. You can call

MBUX multimedia system 329

these up using the home screen or using buttons5 and6 next to the touchpad.You can conveniently call up and add favouritesusing theß rocker switch on the steeringwheel or using theß button next to thetouchpad. Quick-access in the home screen andin the applications serve to select functionsmore quickly.If you use the learn function of the multimediasystem, you will receive suggestions during oper‐ation of the most probable navigation destina‐tions, radio stations and contacts. The configu‐ration of the suggestions takes place in your pro‐file. You can compile your profile from variousvehicle settings and settings of the multimediasystem. You can create themes for various driv‐ing situations in the home screen as well asusing theß rocker switch or theß but‐ton.The Notifications Centre collects incoming notifi‐cations, e.g. about an available software update.Depending on the type of notification it offersvarious actions. You can call up the NotificationsCentre on the home screen and in the applica‐tion menus.

With the global search in the vehicle you cansearch on-board across many categories as wellas online in the Internet. You can use the globalsearch in the home screen and in the notifica‐tions.

Anti-theft protectionThis device is equipped with technical provisionsto protect it against theft. More detailed informa‐tion about anti-theft protection can be obtainedat a qualified specialist workshop.

Notes on the media display

Observe the notes on caring for the interior(/ page 499).Automatic temperature-controlled switch-off feature: if the temperature is too high, thebrightness is initially reduced automatically. Themedia display may then switch off completely fora while.% If you are wearing polarised sunglasses, it

may be difficult to read the multimedia sys‐tem display.

330 MBUX multimedia system

Home screen overview

1 On the home screen: displays the first threeapplicationsIn other displays: calls up the home screen

2 Calls up the profile3 Calls up the global search4 SOS NOT READY display only when the

Mercedes-Benz emergency call system is notavailable

5 Displays, for example network display, bat‐tery status of the mobile phone connected,signal strength of the mobile phone network,time

6 Calls up the Notifications CentreThe star indicates new notifications.

7 Calls up an application using the symbol

8 Name of the application, beneath the currentselection or information

9 Quick-access (in the example: calls up desti‐nation entry, enters the destination addressfor home)

A Number of applications and currently selec‐ted display area


B Calls up the air conditioning menu(/ page 177)

C Calls up SUGGESTIONS, THEMES andFAVOURITES

Central control elements overview

1 Touch Control2 Media display with touch functionality3 Touchpad

Touch Control

Operating Touch Control (MBUX multimediasystem)

1© buttonShows the home screen and calls up appli‐cations


Shows suggestions, themes and favourites:when the home screen is shown, swipedown on Touch Control2.

2 Touch Control3G button

Pressing briefly: returns to the previous dis‐play

4 Control panel for MBUX multimedia system:ß rocker switchPress down briefly: shows favouritesPress down and hold: adds favourites andthemesControl knobTurn: adjusts the volume VOLPress: switches off the sound86 rocker switchPress up: makes or accepts a call~ rocker switchPress down: rejects or ends a call

You can navigate in menus and lists via thetouch-sensitive surface of Touch Control2 byusing a single-finger swipe.

# To select the menu item or entry: swipeup, down, left or right.

# Press Touch Control2.# To enter a character: enter a character

using the keyboard.# To move the digital map: swipe in any

direction.

Setting the sensitivity for the Touch ControlMultimedia system:4© 5 Settings 5 System5 Controls 5 Touch Control sensitivity# Select Fast, Medium or Slow.

Setting acoustic operating feedback for theTouch ControlMultimedia system:4© 5 Settings 5 System5 ControlsThe function is supported by the selection in alist.# Select Acoustic operating feedback.

# Set Normal, Loud or Off.If the function is activated you will hear aclicking sound when scrolling in a list. Whenthe beginning or end of the list is reachedyou will hear another clicking sound.

Touchscreen

Operating the touchscreen

Tapping# To select a menu item or entry: tap on a

symbol or an entry.# To increase the map scale: tap twice

quickly with one finger.# To reduce the map scale: tap with two fin‐

gers.# To enter characters with the keypad: tap

on a button.

Single-finger swipe# To navigate in menus: swipe up, down, left

or right.


# To move the digital map: swipe in anydirection.

# To use handwriting to enter characters:write the character with one finger on thetouchscreen.

Two-finger swipe# To zoom in and out of the map: move two

fingers together or apart.# To enlarge or reduce the size of a section

of a website: move two fingers together orapart.

# To turn the map: turn anti-clockwise orclockwise using two fingers.

Touching, holding and moving# To move the map: touch the touchscreen

and move your finger in any direction.# To set the volume on a scale: touch the

touchscreen and move the finger to the leftor right.

Touching and holding# To save the destination in the map: touch

the touchscreen and hold until a message isshown.

# To call up a global menu in the applica‐tions: touch the touchscreen and hold untilthe OPTIONS menu appears.

Setting acoustic operation feedback for thetouchscreenMultimedia system:4© 5 Settings 5 System5 ControlsThe function is supported by the selection in alist.# Select Acoustic operating feedback.# Set Normal, Loud or Off.

If the function is activated you will hear aclicking sound when scrolling in a list. Whenthe beginning or end of the list is reachedyou will hear another clicking sound.

Touchpad

Operating the touchpad

1G buttonPressing briefly: returns to the previous dis‐play

2~ buttonPressing: calls up the control menu of thelast active audio source


Swiping to the left of right across~:selects the previous or next radio station/music track

3© buttonPressing: shows the home screen and callsup applications

4 Touchpad

% Calls up suggestions, themes and favourites:when the home screen is shown, swipedown on touchpad4.

You can navigate in menus and lists via thetouch-sensitive surface of touchpad4 by usinga single-finger swipe.# To select the menu item or entry: move

the selection by swiping up, down, left orright.

# Confirm the selection by pressing on touch‐pad4.

or# If Touchpad tap is activated, tapping is suffi‐

cient (/ page 335).

# To enter a character: select a character onthe keyboard (/ page 357).

or# Write a character on the touchpad with hand‐

writing input.# To move the digital map: when the digital

map is shown with the navigation menu,swipe up with one finger.

# Press the touchpad.The digital map can be moved.

# Swipe in all directions.

Use the following functions with a two-fingerswipe:# To call up the Notifications Centre: swipe

down with two fingers.# To close the Notifications Centre: swipe

up with two fingers.# To call up the control menu of the last

active audio source: swipe up with two fin‐gers.

# To zoom in and out of the map: move twofingers together or apart.

# To enlarge or reduce the size of a sectionof a website: move two fingers together orapart.

Setting the sensitivity for the touchpadMultimedia system:4© 5 Settings 5 System5 Controls 5 Touchpad sensitivity# Select Fast, Medium or Slow.# To set the pressure sensitivity: switch

Touchpad tap on or off.If the function is switched on, a tap on thetouchpad is enough to select a menu item.

Switching the read-aloud function for hand‐writing recognition on/offRequirements:R The multimedia system is equipped with a

voice control system.R The read-aloud function is available for the

selected system language.


Multimedia system:4© 5 Settings 5 System 5 Audio# Switch Read out handwriting recognition on

or off.If the function is activated, characters areread aloud as they are written on the touch‐pad.

Activating/deactivating haptic operatingfeedback for the touchpadMultimedia system:4© 5 Settings 5 System5 ControlsThe function supports you when making entrieson the touchpad and when selecting menus.# Switch Haptic operating feedback on or off.

When the function is activated, a tactile feed‐back in the form of a vibration is effectedwhen the touchpad is operated.

Setting acoustic operating feedback for thetouchpadMultimedia system:4© 5 Settings 5 System5 ControlsThe function is supported by the selection in alist.# Select Acoustic operating feedback.# Set Normal, Loud or Off.

If the function is activated you will hear aclicking sound when scrolling in a list. Whenthe beginning or end of the list is reachedyou will hear another clicking sound.

Selecting a station and track using thetouchpad# Swipe to the left or right over the~ but‐

ton.Radio: the previous or next station is set.Media source: the previous or next track isselected.

or

# To show the control menu: press the~button on the touchpad.

or# Swipe upwards using two fingers on the

touchpad.The control menu appears for the audiosource that was last selected.

# Swipe left or right using one finger.Radio: the previous or next station is set.Media source: the previous or next track isselected.

# To hide the control menu: swipe down onthe touchpad using two fingers.

MBUX Interior Assistant

Notes on lasers and laser classification

& WARNING Risk of injury from laser radi‐ation from the camera

This product uses a laser system. If the hous‐ing is opened or damaged, invisible laser


beams can escape in an uncontrolled man‐ner.Laser radiation can damage your retina.# Do not open the housing.# Always have maintenance work and

repairs carried out by a qualified spe‐cialist workshop.

This device is a class 1 laser product in accord‐ance with DIN EN 60825-1:2014


If you operate information and communica‐tion equipment integrated in the vehicle

when driving, you will be distracted from thetraffic situation. This could also cause you tolose control of the vehicle.# Only operate this equipment when the




Overview of the MBUX Interior AssistantIf the vehicle is fitted with the MBUX InteriorAssistant, selected functions of the multimedia

system can be operated contact-free. In addi‐tion, the reading light or search light can beswitched on or off contact-free.The MBUX Interior Assistant can differentiatebetween driver and front passenger interactions.The MBUX Interior Assistant recognises certainhand positions (poses).


The MBUX Interior Assistant supports the following interactions:

Interaction area Interaction Description

In front of the media display/above the touch‐pad

Proximity to the control element The MBUX Interior Assistant recognises the approach of thehand towards a control element.Depending on the active application, the display will beadjusted in the media display. Some functions differentiatebetween driver and front passenger.No specific hand position is required.

Above the centre console Defined poses With defined poses a function is triggered depending on theapplication active.

Below the inside rearview mirror Brief up and down movements With brief vertical up and down movements below the insiderearview mirror the reading light for the driver or the frontpassenger is switched on and off.

Front passenger seat Stretching out the hand above thefront passenger seat

By stretching out the hand above the front passenger seatthe search light is switched on. If the hand is withdrawn fromthis area, the search light is switched off again.

Operating functions by proximity of the handto the touchscreen and touchpadRequirements:

R One of the following applications appears inthe media display:

- Seat settings with displays for the driverand front passenger seat, e.g. Seat com-fort

- Home screen


- Radio menu or media menu- Map in the navigation- Active Parking AssistR Recognition occurs as the hand approaches

to approximately 10 cm from the touchpad orthe touchscreen.

Seat adjustments by the driver or frontpassengerIn the seat settings menu, the MBUX InteriorAssistant detects proximity to various controlelements of the multimedia system. In addition,the MBUX Interior Assistant detects from whichseat the action emanates.

Hand approaching the touchscreen

Hand approaching the touchpad

# With the seat setting display active, move thehand towards the touchscreen or touchpad.The seat of the person operating, driver'sseat or front passenger seat, is enlarged inthe media display.The appropriate control elements are pre-selected automatically.

# Depending on the function, the person oper‐ating can either switch the function on or offdirectly or make other settings.

Highlighting an application on the homescreenThe MBUX Interior Assistant detects in whicharea the hand is in front of the touchscreen. Thedisplay of objects shown is adjusted to improveorientation.# Move a hand towards the touchscreen.

The symbol for the application is enlarged.The quick-access applications will be high‐lighted.

# Continue operation, e.g. select a quick-access application.

% Further information about the home screen(/ page 331).


Activating cover change in the radio menuand media menuThe MBUX Interior Assistant reduces the numberof operating steps.# Move a hand towards the touchscreen or

touchpad.The current information, e.g. about the radiostation, track and artist are hidden. Coverchange is activated.

# Continue operation and select a cover.# As the hand is moved away from the

touchscreen or touchpad, the current infor‐mation is shown again.

% Further information on the radio menu(/ page 478) and the media menu(/ page 471).

Showing the navigation menu on the mapThe MBUX Interior Assistant shows the naviga‐tion menu.# Move a hand towards the touchscreen or

touchpad.The navigation menu is shown.

# Continue operation and select a symbol.

# As the hand is moved away from thetouchscreen or touchpad, the media displayhides the navigation menu.

% Further information on the navigation menu(/ page 378).

Showing operating symbols in the ActiveParking Assist camera image (only from driv‐er's seat)The MBUX Interior Assistant facilitates quick-access for the driver to various camera views.# With the Active Parking Assist display active,

move the hand in the direction of thetouchscreen.The camera operation symbols are displayed.

# Continue operation and display the desiredfront, rear, left and right camera views.

% Further information on Active Parking Assistfunctions (/ page 270).

Operating a function with the favouritesposeRequirements:R To call up favourites: there is at least one

favourite.

R The area for recognition of the favourite'spose is above the centre console at theheight of the climate control vents and themedia display. The hand should have a dis‐tance of at least 10 cm from the media dis‐play.R The pose is held for a brief time.

Calling up favouritesA pose calls up a favourite.The driver and front passenger can connect twodifferent favourites with the V pose.% If a favourite has not yet been saved and

connected with the MBUX Interior Assistant,the multimedia system will assist you.


Carrying out the V pose

# Position the hand above the centre consoleand in the direction of the media display. Theback of the hand is facing upwards. In doingso the index and middle finger are extendedwith the other fingers bent inwards.The favourite is called up.

Switching the reading light for the driver andfront passenger on/off using gesture modeRequirements:R The function is available when it is dark.R The gesture is carried out in the interaction

area (under the inside rearview mirror).

Briefly moving the hand up and down under theinside rearview mirror switches the reading lightspecifically for the driver or front passenger onor off.

Carrying out operation of the reading light

# Move the hand up and down vertically underthe reading light.The reading light is switched on or off.

Switching the search light for the driveron/off using gesture modeRequirements:R The front passenger seat is not occupied.R The function is available when it is dark.

R The gesture is completed in the interactionarea (front-passenger seat).R The seat belt on the front passenger seat

must not be inserted in the seat belt buckle.

Stretching out with the hand over the frontpassenger seat when unoccupied switches asearch light on for the driver when it is dark.Pulling the hand back switches the search lightoff again.

Interaction area for operating the search light

# To switch on: reach across the frontpassenger seat with your hand.The search light is switched on for the driver.


# To switch off: take your hand back awayfrom the front passenger seat.The search light is switched off again.

Settings for the MBUX Interior AssistantMultimedia system:4© 5 Settings 5 System5 Interior assistant# To switch on full functionality of the

MBUX Interior Assistant: select On.The option is activated #.

# To activate additional functions for read‐ing and search lights: select Including read-ing light.When the option is switched on, the displaybutton is activated.The functions for the reading and searchlights are activated in addition to the proxim‐ity functions.

# To switch off the MBUX Interior Assis‐tant: select Off.The option is activated #.

Main functions

Calling up applications

1y buttonCalls up vehicle functions

2z buttonCalls up navigation

3| buttonCalls up radio or media

4 % buttonCalls up the telephone

5ß button

Press briefly: calls up favourites(/ page 350)Press and hold: adds a favourite(/ page 350) or creates a new theme(/ page 347)

Alternatively in the home screen: when youstart the vehicle the home screen is shown inthe media display.# Select the application by swiping and tap‐

ping.or# In any display: press the© button on the

Touch Control or on the touchpad.or# Tap on the© symbol on the touchscreen.

The applications are displayed.# Select the application by swiping and tap‐

ping.

Changing the arrangement of applications onthe home screen# Call up the home screen.


# Touch and hold an application on thetouchscreen until symbols appear.

# Tap on= or; and move the applica‐tion in the menu.

# Tap onø.

Profile

Notes on profiles

& WARNING Risk of becoming trappedduring adjustment of the driver's seatafter calling up a driver profile

Selecting a profile may trigger an adjustmentof the driver's seat to the position savedunder the profile. You or other vehicle occu‐pants could be injured in the process.# Make sure that when the position of

driver's seat is being adjusted using themultimedia system, no people or bodyparts are in the seat's range of move‐ment.

If there is a risk of someone becoming trap‐ped, stop the adjustment process immedi‐ately:# a) Tap the warning message on the

media display.or# b) Press a memory position button or a

seat adjustment switch on the driver'sdoor.The adjustment process is stopped.

The driver's seat is equipped with an anti-entrap‐ment feature.If the driver's door is open, the driver's seat willnot be set after calling up the driver's profile.

Overview of profilesUsing the multimedia system up to seven pro‐files can be created in the vehicle.Profiles store your personal vehicle settings andsettings for the multimedia system.If the vehicle is used by several drivers, thedriver can select their profile before the journey,without changing the settings of other drivers.

You can select the profile:R When entering (/ page 346)R Using the home screen (/ page 331)

The profile settings are activated as soon as aprofile is selected.% If you call up your profile when driving then

the driver's seat position will not be adjus‐ted.You can cancel the setting process with thefollowing actions:R Tap on the Positioning seat and steering

wheel. Please tap to cancel. warning onthe media display.R Press one of the seat operating buttons

in the driver's door.

Profile contentDepending on the vehicle equipment, the follow‐ing settings can be stored in your profile, forexample:R Driver's seat memoryR Radio (including station list)


R Last destinationsR Climate controlR Ambient lightingR DYNAMIC SELECT I (individual)R Instrument Display, Head-up Display and

style (display style of the multimedia system)R Themes, suggestions and favourites

% Settings for driver assistance systems can‐not be saved in the profile.

Mercedes me connect profileIf you use a profile from Mercedes me connect,the following online functions are available, forexample:R You can configure the settings in the vehicle

using the Mercedes me app and theMercedes me portal.R You can synchronise your profile on

Mercedes me connect with the profile in thevehicle (/ page 345).R You can add a personal profile photo that is

shown in the vehicle.

R You can take your profile and some of yoursettings with you in new vehicles.

Requirements for using Mercedes me con‐nect profiles:For the vehicle owner:R You have a Mercedes me user account.R The vehicle has been connected with the

user account.R The personalisation service is activated.

For additional users of the vehicle:R You have a Mercedes me user account.R The vehicle owner has invited you to connect

your user account on Mercedes me with thatof his vehicle.R You have accepted the invitation.

Creating a new profileMultimedia system:4© 5f Profiles# SelectW Create profile.# Select an avatar.

# Enter the name and confirm witha.# Select Continuer.# To save the current settings in a profile:

select Current settings.# Select Save.or# To adopt the factory settings: select Fac-

tory settings.# Select Save.% Further information on setting a user profile

(/ page 345).# Activate Bluetooth® and select Connect

phone, to connect a mobile phone with theuser profile (/ page 426).

You can also set up a user profile without regis‐tering a mobile phone.# Select Finished.

The user profile is saved.


Selecting profile optionsMultimedia system:4© 5f Profiles# Select Ä for a profile.# To edit a profile: select Edit profile.# Select an avatar.# Change the name, if necessary.# Select Save.# To configure suggestions: select Sugges-

tions settings (/ page 349).# To reset favourites or themes: select

Reset favourites to factory settings or Resetthemes to factory settings.

# Select Yes.# To reset a profile: select Reset profile to

factory settings.# Select Yes.# To delete a profile: select Delete profile.# Select Yes.% The guest profile cannot be deleted.

Protecting profile contentTo protect your profile content and settings youcan create a PIN in the Mercedes me portal foryour profile. When PIN protection is active, youhave to enter the PIN to select your profile.# Select Protect content.# Select Mercedes me portal.

The browser opens and you are transferredto the Mercedes me portal.

Selecting a profileMultimedia system:4© 5f Profiles% You can cancel the setting process with the

following actions:R Tap on the Positioning seat and steering

wheel. Please tap to cancel. warning onthe media display.R Press one of the seat operating buttons

in the driver's door.# Select a profile.# Press thea button to confirm the mes‐

sage.The profile is loaded and activated.

% Alternatively, the profile can already beselected when the vehicle is entered(/ page 346).

Synchronising a profileRequirements:R You have a Mercedes me user account.R The vehicle is connected with your Mercedes

me user account.R The personalisation service is activated on

Mercedes me connect.

Multimedia system:4© 5f Profiles5 General settingsSynchronisation enables the following:R You can configure the vehicle settings using

the Mercedes me app.R The profile on Mercedes me connect and the

profile in the vehicle are aligned (profile man‐agement).

# Activate Synchronise profiles automatically.The profiles in the vehicle are automaticallysynchronised with the profiles on Mercedes


me connect when the ignition is switched onand off.

or# Select Synchronise profiles now.

After selecting this option, the profiles in thevehicle are synchronised with the profiles onMercedes me connect.

% During synchronisation the profile list andthe profile functions are blocked.

% Note on data protection: if you do not wishto share your data with Mercedes me, makesure that the automatic synchronisation isswitched off and do not select Synchroniseprofiles now.

Showing the profile selection when enteringRequirements:R At least one profile has been created.

Multimedia system:4© 5f ProfilesIf the option is activated, you can see a profile assoon as you get in.# Select General settings.

# Activate Show profile selection when enter-ing.When the vehicle is started, the media dis‐play shows the active profile.

Themes

Overview of themesYou can configure the vehicle settings accordingto your preferences and save as a theme. Atheme can be called up any time via the homescreen. There is then no need to make thedesired settings again.There are pre-defined themes available, e.g.Journey, Efficiency and Lounge.

Example for the use of themesFor recurring driving situations, such as longdrives on the motorway, you can save your pre‐ferred settings in a theme in the vehicle.You can save the following settings in a theme,for example:R Displays (e.g. navigation map or tachometer)R Preferred radio station

R Favoured drive program

These settings are saved under the name youwish when setting up a theme (/ page 347). Onthe next motorway journey you can select thistheme and thereby restore your settings.

Content of a themeDepending on vehicle equipment the followingsettings can be saved in a theme:R Setting of the Instrument Display

(/ page 294)R Setting of the Head-up Display (/ page 306)R Setting of the ambient lighting (/ page 164)R Active audio source, e.g. radio or USBR Starting screen for the media displayR Visual style (/ page 363)R DYNAMIC SELECT drive program

(/ page 199)R Eco start/stop setting (/ page 197)R Navigation system settings

% A theme contains the currently active set‐tings in the vehicle.


Calling up themesMultimedia system:4©

# When the home screen is shown, swipe upuntil THEMES appears.

# Select a theme.

Creating new themesRequirements:R The settings which are to be saved in the

theme are active.The overview shows the settings which canbe saved in a theme (/ page 346).

Multimedia system:4© 5 THEMES# SelectW Set theme.

The settings which are saved in the themeare shown.

# Select Continuer.# Select additional settings which are to be

saved in the theme.R Select Audio, to save the active audio set‐

tings in the theme.

R Select Navigation (Navigation), to savethe active navigation settings in thetheme.

# Select Continuer.# Select an entry screen.# Select Continuer.# Select an image.# Enter the names into the entry field and con‐

firm witha.# To save a theme: select Save.

When the maximum number that can besaved is reached:# Selecta from the prompt.# Select a theme that should be overwritten.


# Select Continuer.# Select additional settings which are to be

saved in the theme.R Select Audio, to save the active audio set‐

tings in the theme.

R Select Navigation (Navigation), to savethe active navigation settings in thetheme.

# Select Continuer.# Select an entry screen.# Select Continuer.# Select an image.# Enter the names into the entry field and con‐


Creating using theßß rocker switch or but‐ton# Press and hold the bottom section of theß rocker switch on the steering wheel.

or# Press and hold theß button next to the

touchpad.# SelectW Set theme.


# Select Continuer.


# Select additional settings which are to besaved in the theme.R Select Audio, to save the active audio set‐

tings in the theme.R Select Navigation (Navigation), to save

the active navigation settings in thetheme.

# Select Continuer.# Select an image.# Enter the names into the entry field and con‐


Modifying themesMultimedia system:4©


# Press on a theme until the OPTIONS menu isshown.

# Select Rename.# Enter the name.# Select Save✓.

Moving themesMultimedia system:4©



# Select Move.# Tap on= or;.# Tap onø.

Moving the themes menu in the home screen# Select©.# Swipe upwards and select Set new order.# Select Themes.# Tap on9 or:.# Tap onø.

Deleting themesMultimedia system:4©



# Select Delete.# Select Yes.

Suggestions

Suggestions overviewThe vehicle can learn the habits of the driver.Based on previously used functions, the mostlikely navigation destinations, media sources,radio stations or contacts are offered underSUGGESTIONS.Suggestions are shown when the followingrequirements are fulfilled:R A profile has been created (/ page 344).R A profile has been selected.R You have accepted data recording.


R From the beginning of usage, the multimediasystem must analyse the user habits. Whensufficient data is collected then the sugges‐tions are available.

If the requirements mentioned are not fulfilled, apreview with a description of the functionappears in the SUGGESTIONS menu.You can configure data recording (/ page 349)or delete the suggestions recorded(/ page 350).

Calling up suggestionsRequirements:R A profile has been created and is selected

(/ page 345).

# Tap on© in the media display.The home screen is shown.

# Swipe up until the SUGGESTIONS menu isshown.

# Select a navigation destination, a mediasource, a radio station or a contact.If route guidance is already active, you can‐not start a new route guidance or set an

intermediate destination for the existingroute.

Configuring suggestionsRequirements:R To protect settings using a PIN: your pro‐

file is connected with Mercedes me and yourMercedes me account is PIN protected.

Multimedia system:4© 5f Profiles# Selectu for a profile.# Select Suggestions settings.# To switch suggestions display on/off:

switch Allow destination suggestions, Allowmusic suggestions and Allow contact sugges-tions on or off.If an option is switched on, suggestions fornavigation destinations, media sources, radiostations or contacts are shown.If the option is switched off, no suggestionsare shown.

# To deactivate the learn function for oneday: activate Deact. learn. for 24h.For 24 hours no new actions will be trainedand no data recorded for the active profile.Suggestions will continue to be shown. Theremaining time is shown next to Deact.learn. for 24h.Before the time runs out, a message isshown that the multimedia system will con‐tinue the learn function shortly.Example: if the option is switched on and aroute to a new destination has been calcula‐ted, this destination would not be taken intoaccount for the learn function.

# To reset the suggestion history: selectReset suggestion history.

% This process cannot be reversed.# Select Yes.# To protect settings with a PIN: switch on

PIN protection.If PIN protection is switched on, you mustenter the Mercedes me PIN to set the sug‐gestions. This PIN will be set in the Mercedes


me portal for the personalisation service toprotect your personal settings.

Renaming suggestionsOnly navigation destinations can be renamed.# Tap on the© symbol in the media display.

The home screen is shown.# Swipe up until the SUGGESTIONS menu is

shown.# Highlight a navigation destination and press

until the OPTIONS menu is shown.# Select Rename.# Enter the name.# To confirm the entry: select Yes.

Deleting a suggestion# Tap on© in the media display.

The home screen is shown.# Swipe up until the SUGGESTIONS menu is

shown.# Highlight a suggestion and press until the

OPTIONS menu is shown.

# Select Delete.The query as to whether the suggestion isdeleted temporarily or permanently appears.

# If the suggestion should be shown againat a later time: select Not now.

# If the suggestion should not be shownagain: select Never.

Favourites

Overview of favouritesFavourites offer you quick access to frequentlyused applications. It is possible to create 20favourites in total.You can select favourites from categories or youadd favourites directly from an application.

Calling up favourites

In the media display# Tap on©.

The home screen is shown.# Swipe up until FAVOURITES is shown.

On the steering wheel or the touchpad# Press theß rocker switch on the steering

wheel down.or# Press theß button next to the touchpad.

Adding favourites

Selecting favourites from categories# Tap on© in the media display.

The home screen is shown.# Swipe up until FAVOURITES is shown.# SelectW Create favourite.

The categories are displayed.# Select the category.

The favourites are displayed.# Select a favourite.

The favourite is stored at the next availableposition.

# All positions in the favourites are taken:confirm the message shown with OK.A list shows all the favourites.

# Select a favourite which should be overwrit‐ten.


Adding a favourite from an applicationExamples of adding from an application are:R Saving a contact.R Storing a radio station.R Adding a media source.R Saving a navigation destination.R Adding an ENERGIZING comfort program (if

available).

# To save a contact as a global favourite:select a contact (/ page 432).The details are displayed.

# Press on a telephone number until theOPTIONS menu is shown.

# Select Save as favourite.The contact is added as a favourite.

# To store a radio station as a global favour‐ite: set a radio station (/ page 478).

# Press on the radio station until the OPTIONSmenu is shown.

# Select Save as favourite.The radio station is added as a favourite.

Renaming favourites# Tap on© in the media display.

The home screen is shown.# Swipe up until FAVOURITES is shown.# Press on a favourite until the OPTIONS menu

is shown.# Select Rename.# Enter the name.# Select OK.

Moving favourites

Moving favourites in the favourites menu# Tap on© in the media display.


is shown.# Select Move.# Move the favourite to the new position.# Tap onø.

Moving the favourites menu in the personali‐sation# Tap on© in the media display.

The home screen is shown.# Swipe up until Set new order is shown.# Select Set new order.# Move Favourites to the new position.# Tap onø.

Deleting favourites# Tap on© in the media display.


is shown.# Select Delete.# Select Yes.


Notifications Centre

Overview of the Notifications CentreThe following communications are collected inthe Notifications Centre:R Communications which are generated by the

vehicle or from multimedia system.R Communications which are received through

the use of services.

The following notification types are available foryou:R Navigable destinations and routesR Messages (text messages)R Calendar entries and reminders, e.g. from In-

Car OfficeThis function is not available in all countries.R System information, e.g. Important software

update available.R Other notifications, e.g. from additional

online services that can be subscribed to

The3 Notifications Centre can be found onthe home screen, in menus and at the top rightof the navigation map (/ page 331).Newly received messages will be indicated witha star in the3 symbol.Notifications are normally briefly shown as theyare received. This occurs for nearly every appli‐cation that you are currently using. If you takeno action, these are stored for future access inthe Notifications Centre.The notifications are sorted chronologically. Themost recent notifications are at the top.

A notification shows the following information:R Symbol or image1 for the applicationR Title2, which contains the name, a tele‐

phone number or a navigation destination,for exampleR The service and additional information3R A time stamp5R If several actions are available, symbol4 to

open or close the notification.

Depending on the type of notification, up to fourdifferent actions6 are available.Examples of actions include:R Read aloudR Placing a callR ReplyR Calling up a web pageR Navigation

Some notifications, e.g. a navigation destination,are stored longer. Therefore, it is not necessaryto carry out available actions directly on the


receipt of the notifications. A route guidance canbe started at a later time.% You can start a global search in the Notifica‐

tions Centre (/ page 354).

Calling up notifications

Opening the Notifications Centre# On the touchpad: swipe down with two fin‐

gers.or# On the touchscreen: tap on the3 sym‐

bol for the Notifications Centre.or# On the Touch Control and on the touch‐

pad: mark the3 symbol for the Notifica‐tions Centre by swiping.

# Press on the control element.

Selecting a notification# Swipe up or down.# Tap or press on the control element.

Calling up old notificationsIf notifications have not been called up after fourhours, these are stored in the archive.# Swipe upwards and select Archive.# Select the notification.

Closing the Notifications Centre# On the touchpad: swipe up with two fingers.

Selecting actions for a notificationThe following options are available:R Select the action directly in an application

after a notification is received and shown.R Select the action later after calling up in the

Notifications Centre.

# An action is available: select the action.# Several actions are available: if the notifi‐

cation is not open, select theV symbol.# Select the action.

The notification is still available.

# If Additional information is available, selectthe action.Additional information is shown in a windowas text, image or text and image.

# To close the window: select OK.

Editing notifications# Call up the Notifications Centre

(/ page 353).# To make settings: selectZ.

% If no settings can be made, a messageappears.

# Select the service.# Switch the options on or off.

The following options are available:R Allow notificationsR Display in notification centreR Show notificationsR Acoustic feedback

When Allow notifications is switched on, theother options cannot be selected.


# To delete: touch a message on thetouchscreen and slide to the left or right.

or# SelectE.# Select Delete or Delete all.

Delete deletes a single notification.Delete all deletes all notifications currentlyshown.

# With O you will exit delete mode.

Global search

Global search overviewYou can use the global search in the homescreen and in the notifications.The global search provides search results for thefollowing categories:R NavigationR EntertainmentR Telephone, social media, In-Car Office

In-Car Office is not available in all countries.R User interface and Digital Owner's Manual

R Internet

This enables you to search for towns, roads andtourist attractions with the navigation system,for example.% You can also search for 3 word addresses

(/ page 385).When you enter a 3 word address in theglobal search, separate each of the wordswith a space or a full stop.

During the entry process the most likely sugges‐tions are shown beneath the search field. Whenyou enter "S", "Stuttgart", "Steak" and "Sandra"are shown, for example. If you select "Stuttgart",you receive the suggestions "Starbucks", "Steak"and "City railway", for example.The search results in the list are shown, sortedaccording to category. Next to the category isthe number of results. You will be shown thebest results from each category. Additionalresults can be found after selecting the respec‐tive category.If you confirm an entry with OK, all categoriesand the number of results will be shown in asummary. After selecting a category you can

select the search results within the category.When you select a search result the detailedview opens. In the detailed view you can choosewhether and which actions you want to carry outwith the respective search result. For example,you can start route guidance or place a call tosomebody. The actions are named correspond‐ingly.The search can be carried out with the followinginput methods:R Entering characters using the on-screen key‐

padR Entering characters with handwriting recog‐

nitionR Dictation function

Using the global searchMultimedia system:4©

# Selectª Search.or# Call up the notifications (/ page 353).# Select Search.


# Enter the search term into the search field.During the entry process the three mostlikely suggestions are offered beneath thesearch field.In the list on the right, the top two searchresults are shown for each category.

% Use the character input functionAlternatively, you can use thep dictationfunction for the search.

# To accept a suggestion: select the sugges‐tion.The three most likely suggestions areoffered.

# Continue the search or accept a suggestion.# To accept the second search result: select

the search result.An action starts or a list is shown.

# Select a search result or an action in the list.# To show all categories: select OK.# To show search results for a category:

select a category.# To show details: select a search result.

# To start an action: select an action.After selection of an action, a track is playedback or the route to a destination is calcula‐ted, for example.

Switching the sound on/off

On the multifunction steering wheel

On the multimedia system

# To mute: press volume control1.The8 symbol appears in the status lineof the media display.You will also hear traffic announcements andnavigation announcements even when thesound is muted.


# To switch on: turn volume control1 orchange the media source.

Adjusting the volume

Adjusting with the control knob

On the multifunction steering wheel

On the multimedia system

# Turn volume control1.The volume of the current volume group (e.g.entertainment) is set. The volume of othergroups can be adjusted separately.Adjust the volume in the following situations:R during a traffic announcementR during a navigation announcement

R during a telephone call

Setting in the menu# Press the© button on the Touch Control

or on the touchpad.# Select Settings.# Select System.# Select Audio.# Select a volume setting.# Set the volume.

Entering characters

Using the character input function


If you operate information and communica‐tion equipment integrated in the vehiclewhen driving, you will be distracted from thetraffic situation. This could also cause you tolose control of the vehicle.


# Only operate this equipment when thetraffic situation permits.

# If you cannot be sure of this, stop thevehicle whilst paying attention to roadand traffic conditions and operate theequipment with the vehicle stationary.

You must observe the legal requirements for thecountry in which you are currently driving whenoperating the multimedia system.Requirements:R For the handwriting recognition read-

aloud function: the multimedia system isequipped with a voice control system.R The read-aloud function is available for the

selected system language.R The handwriting recognition read-aloud func‐

tion is activated.

Character entry can be carried out with thesecontrol elements:R Touch Control

R Touchscreen (media display)R Touchpad

Character input can be started with a controlelement and resumed with another.# When the keypad is shown, enter the charac‐

ters on the control element by swiping andpressing or by tapping (touchscreen).

or# Write the characters on the touchpad or the

touchscreen.The touchpad supports character input with thefollowing functions:R Handwriting recognition offers character sug‐

gestions.R If the read aloud function is activated for

handwriting recognition then the enteredcharacters are read aloud.

Examples of character entry:R Renaming a favourite

R Looking for search results in the globalsearch.R Entering a destination address in the naviga‐

tion systemR Entering a web address

Entering characters on the touchpadRequirements:R If you wish to have the character input read

aloud: the read aloud function of the hand‐writing recognition is switched on(/ page 335).R An online connection is required for some

functions.


Using the keyboard1 Input line2 Shows suggestions during input (if available)3 Deletes an entry4 Deletes

Pressing or pressing briefly deletes the lastcharacter enteredPressing and holding deletes the entry

5 Accepts an entry

6 Switches to handwriting input7 Enters a space8 Changes the keyboard language9 Switches to special charactersA Switches to digits and additional special

characters (if available for the current char‐acter set)ABC Switches to letters (level 2)

B Pressing or pressing briefly switchesbetween upper-case and lower-case letters(if available for the current character set)Pressing and holding switches to upper-caseletters permanently

If available, thep symbol allows you tochange to voice input.


% When Touchpad tap is switched onD,tapping is sufficient to select a character oran option (/ page 335).

# Call up the character entry to rename afavourite, for example (/ page 351).

# Select the character by swiping and pressing.The character is entered in input line1.Suggestions are shown in2.

# To select a suggestion: select one of theentries.

# Resume character input.# To enter an alternative character: press

and hold a character.# Select the character.

# To end character input: press theG but‐ton.

% The available editing functions depend onthe editing task, the language set and thecharacter level.

% Entry using the keyboard can also be com‐pleted using the Touch Control.

Using handwriting input 1 Input line 2 Shows suggestions during input


3 Deletes an entry4 Deletes

Pressing or pressing briefly deletes the lastcharacter enteredPressing and holding deletes the entry

5 Enters a space6 Switches to input using the keyboard7 Accepts an entry8 Writes characters on the drawing surfaceIf available, thep symbol allows you tochange to voice input.% When Touchpad tap is switched onD,

tapping is sufficient to select an option(/ page 335).

# Call up the character entry to rename afavourite, for example (/ page 351).

# When the keyboard is displayed, selectv.# Write the character on the touchpad with a

finger.The character is entered in input line1.Suggestions are shown in2.


# Resume character input. The letters can bewritten next to each other or above eachother.

# To end character input: press theG but‐ton.

Entering characters on the touchscreenRequirements:R If you wish to have the character input read

aloud: the read aloud function of the hand‐writing recognition is switched on(/ page 335).R An online connection is required for some

functions.


Using the keyboard1 Input line2 Shows suggestions during input (if available)3 Deletes an entry4 Deletes

Pressing briefly deletes the last characterenteredPressing and holding deletes the entry

5 Accepts an entry

6 Switches to handwriting input7 Enters a space8 Changes the keyboard language9 Switches to special charactersA Switches to digits and additional special

characters (if available for the current char‐acter set)ABC Switches to letters (level 2)

B Pressing or pressing briefly switchesbetween upper-case and lower-case letters(if available for the current character set)Pressing and holding switches to upper-caseletters permanently

If available, thep symbol allows you tochange to voice input.


# Call up the character entry to rename afavourite, for example (/ page 351).The keyboard is shown.

# Briefly press on a character.The character is entered in input line1.Suggestions are shown in2.


# If available, display additional suggestionswithq orr.

# Resume character input.# To enter an alternative character: press

and hold a character.# Select the character.

# To end character entry: press briefly onG.

% The available editing functions depend onthe editing task, the language set and thecharacter level.

Using handwriting input 1 Input line 2 Shows suggestions during input


3 Deletes an entry4 Deletes

Pressing briefly deletes the last characterenteredPressing and holding deletes the entry

5 Enters a space6 Switches to input using the keyboard7 Accepts an entry8 Writes characters on the drawing surfaceIf available, thep symbol allows you tochange to voice input.# Call up the character entry to rename a

favourite, for example (/ page 351).# When the keyboard is displayed, selectv.# Write the character with one finger on the

touchscreen.The character is entered in input line1.Suggestions are shown in2.


# If available, display additional suggestionswithq orr.

# Resume character input. The letters can bewritten next to each other or above eachother.

# To end character entry: press briefly onG.

Setting the keyboard for character entryMultimedia system:4 Settings 5 System 5 Controls5 Keyboards and handwriting# Confirm Select keyboards.

Select the keyboard language in the list.

System settingsDisplay

Configuring display settingsMultimedia system:4© 5 Settings 5 System5 Styles & display

Setting the design# Select Styles.

# Select Classic, Sport or Progressive.The multimedia system display changesdepending on the style selected. If you revertto the factory settings, the Classic style isset.

# To adjust the ambient lighting to a style:select Ambient lighting adjustment.This function adjusts the ambient lighting forthe selected display style.

Setting the display brightness# Select Display brightness.# Select a brightness value.

Switching the display off/on# Off: select Display off.# On: press a button, %, for example.

Selecting the display design# Select Day/night design.# Select Automatic, Day design or Night

design.


Time and date

Setting the time and date automaticallyMultimedia system:4© 5 Settings 5 System5 Time and date# Deactivate Manual time adjustment.

The time and date are set automatically forthe selected time zone and summer timeoption.

% The correct time is required for the followingfunctions:R Route guidance with time-dependent

traffic guidance.R Calculation of expected time of arrival.

Setting the time zoneRequirements:R For the manual time zone: Automatic time

zone is switched off.

Multimedia system:4© 5 Settings 5 System5 Time and date

Setting the time zone manually# Select Time zone:.

The list of countries is displayed.

% If there are several time zones available in acountry, these will be shown after the coun‐try is selected.

# Select a country and, if required, a timezone.The time zone set is displayed after Timezone:.

Setting the time zone automatically# Activate Automatic time zone.

Setting the time and date formatMultimedia system:4© 5 Settings 5 System5 Time and date 5 Set format# Set the date and time format #.

Setting the time and date manuallyRequirements:R The Manual time adjustment function is

switched on.R For setting the date manually: no GPS is

installed in the vehicle.

Multimedia system:4© 5 Settings 5 System5 Time and date

Setting the time (without time zone)# Select Set time.# Set a time.

Setting the time (with time zone)# Select Set time.

If a time zone is set the time is set automaticallyusing the time zone. The time can be adjusted bya maximum of plus or minus 60 minutes.# Adjust the time using the slide control.


Setting the date# Select Set date.# Set a date.% In vehicles with GPS, a date cannot be set

even with active manual time adjustments.The date is then set automatically throughthe selected time zone.

Switching voice amplification to the rearon/off (vehicles with long wheelbase)

Requirements:R Your vehicle is equipped with the Burmester®

surround sound system or the Burmester®high-end 3D surround sound system.R The ignition is switched on.R Doors, side windows and the panorama slid‐

ing sunroof are closed.R At least one seat belt is fastened on the rear

bench seat.

Multimedia system:4© 5 Settings 5 System 5 Audio5 Voice amplificationThe function supports communication betweenthe driver and front passenger with passengersin the rear compartment. When voice amplifica‐tion to rear is activated, the signals picked up bythe microphone are amplified and played backover the speakers in the rear compartment,depending upon vehicle noise levels. An auto‐matic adjustment occurs based on speaker vol‐ume and ambient noise in order to improvespeech intelligibility and maintain the natural‐ness of speech.# Activate or deactivate the function.

Setting the intensity of the voice amplifica‐tion# Select Voice amplification - intensity.# Set the intensity on the control.

Depending on the intensity set, the voiceamplification to the rear is increased orreduced.

Connectivity

Switching transmission of the vehicle posi‐tion on/offRequirements:R a Mercedes me account is available.R at least one service is activated in the

Mercedes me portal which has access to thetransmitted position data.

% The function is country-dependent. For moreinformation, consult a Mercedes-Benzservice centre.

Multimedia system:4© 5 Settings 5 System5 Wi-Fi & Bluetooth# Select Transmit vehicle position.# Activate or deactivate the function.


Bluetooth®

Information about Bluetooth®

Bluetooth® technology is a standard for short-range wireless data transfer up to approximately10 m.

You can use Bluetooth® to connect your mobilephone to the multimedia system and use the fol‐lowing functions, for example:R Hands-free system with access to the follow‐

ing options:- contacts (/ page 431)- call lists (/ page 434)- text message (/ page 435)R Internet connection (/ page 459)R Listening to music via Bluetooth® audio

(/ page 472)R Transferring business cards (vCards) into the

vehicle

Bluetooth® is a registered trademark of Blue‐tooth Special Interest Group (SIG) Inc.

% Internet connection via Bluetooth® is notavailable in all countries.

Activating/deactivating Bluetooth®Multimedia system:4© 5 Settings 5 System5 Wi-Fi & Bluetooth# Switch Bluetooth on or off.

Wi-Fi

Wi-Fi connection overviewYou can use Wi-Fi to establish a connection witha Wi-Fi network and to access the Internet orother network devices.The following connection options are available:R Wi-Fi connection

The Wi-Fi connection to a Wi-Fi-capabledevice, e.g. the customer's mobile phone ora tablet PC is established.R Multimedia system as a Wi-Fi hotspot

Using this function, a tablet PC or notebookcan be connected, for example. The connec‐ted device can use the data tariff of the vehi‐

cle. A maximum of three devices can be con‐nected with the hotspot at the same time.

% The use of the vehicle data tariff by externaldevices is not available in all countries.

To establish a connection, you can use the fol‐lowing methods:R WPS PIN

The connection to a secure Wi-Fi network ismade via a PIN.R WPS PBC

The connection to a secure Wi-Fi network ismade by pressing a button (push button).R Security key

The connection to a secure Wi-Fi network ismade via a security key.

Setting up Wi-FiRequirements:R To set up the Wi-Fi connection of the mul‐

timedia system with new devices: there isno communication module installed.R The device to be connected supports one of

the three means of connection described.


Multimedia system:4© 5 Settings 5 System5 Wi-Fi & Bluetooth

Activating/deactivating Wi-Fi# Select Wi-Fi.

If Wi-Fi is switched on, you can connect themultimedia system with external hotspots. IfWi-Fi is deactivated, communication via Wi-Fito all devices is interrupted. This also meansthat a connection to the communicationmodule cannot be established. Then somefunctions such as dynamic route guidancewith Live Traffic Information are not availa‐ble.

Connecting the multimedia system with anew device via Wi-FiThis function is available if a communicationmodule is not installed.The type of connection established must beselected on the multimedia system and on thedevice to be connected.% The connection procedure may differ

depending on the device. Follow the instruc‐

tions that are shown in the display. Furtherinformation (see the manufacturer's operat‐ing instructions).

# Select Internet settings.# Select Connect via Wi-Fi.# Select Add hotspot.

Connecting using a security key# Select the optionsr of the desired Wi-Fi

network.# Select Connect using security key.# Have the security key displayed on the device

to be connected (see the manufacturer'soperating instructions).

# Enter this security key on the multimedia sys‐tem.

# Confirm the entry with¡.% All devices support a security key as a

means of connection.

Connecting using a WPS PIN# Select the optionsr of the desired Wi-Fi

network.

# Select Connect using WPS PIN input.The multimedia system generates an eight-digit PIN.

# Enter this PIN on the device to be connected.# Confirm the entry.

Connecting using a button# Select the optionsr of the desired Wi-Fi

network.# Select Connect via WPS PBC.# Select "Connect via WPS PBC" in the options

on the device to be connected (see the man‐ufacturer's operating instructions).

# Press the WPS button on the device to beconnected.

# Select Continue in the multimedia system.

Activating automatic connection# Select Connect via Wi-Fi.# Select the optionsr of the desired Wi-Fi

network.# Activate Permanent Internet connection.


Connecting with a known Wi-Fi# Select Connect via Wi-Fi.# Select a Wi-Fi network.

The connection is established again.

Setting up a Wi-Fi hotspotMultimedia system:4© 5 Settings 5 System5 Wi-Fi & Bluetooth

Configuring the multimedia system as a Wi-Fi hotspotThe type of connection established depends onthe device to be connected. The function mustbe supported by the multimedia system and bythe device to be connected. The type of connec‐tion established must be selected on the multi‐media system and on the device to be connec‐ted.# Select Vehicle hotspot.# Select Connect device to vehicle hotspot.

Connecting using WPS PIN generation# Select Connect using WPS PIN generation.

# Enter the PIN shown in the media display onthe device to be connected and confirm.

Connecting using WPS PIN entry# Select Connect using WPS PIN input.# Enter the PIN that is shown on the external

device's display on the multimedia system.

Connecting using a button# Select Connect via WPS PBC.# Press the push button on the device to be

connected (see the manufacturer's operatinginstructions).

# Select Continue.

Connecting using a security key# Select Connect device to vehicle hotspot.

A security key is displayed.# Select the vehicle from the device to be con‐

nected. The vehicle is displayed with the MBHotspot XXXXX network name.

# Enter the security key which is shown in themedia display on the device to be connected.

# Confirm the entry.

Connecting using NFC# Select Connect via NFC.# Activate NFC on the mobile device (see the

manufacturer's operating instructions).# Bring the mobile device into the NFC area of

the vehicle (/ page 428).# Select Finished.

The mobile device is now connected to themultimedia system hotspot via NFC.

Generating a new security key# Select Vehicle hotspot.# Select Generate security key.

A connection will be established with thenewly created security key.

# To save a security key: select Save.When a new security key is saved, all existingWi-Fi connections are then disconnected. Ifthe Wi-Fi connections are being re-estab‐lished, the new security key must be entered.


System language

Notes on the system languageThis function allows you to determine the lan‐guage for the menu displays and the navigationannouncements. The selected language affectsthe characters available for entry. The navigationannouncements are not available in all lan‐guages. If a language is not available, the naviga‐tion announcements will be in English.

Setting the system languageMultimedia system:4© 5 Settings 5 System5 ® Language# Set the language.% If you are using Arabic map data, the text

information can also be shown in Arabic onthe navigation map. To do so, select asthe language from the language list. Naviga‐tion announcements are then also made inArabic.

Setting the distance unit

Multimedia system:4© 5 Settings 5 System 5 Units# Select km or mi.# In the multifunction display of the Instrument

Display, switch the Additional speedometerdisplay on.

Data import and export

Data import/export functionThe following functions are possible:R Transferring data from one system or vehicle

to another system or vehicle.R Creating a backup copy of your personal data

and loading it again.R Protecting your personal data against unwan‐

ted export with PIN protection.

% Please note that the NTFS file system is notsupported. The FAT32 file system is recom‐mended.

Importing/exporting data

* NOTE Loss of data due to prematureremoval

# Do not remove the data storagemedium when data is being exported.

Mercedes-Benz is not liable for any loss ofdata.

Requirements:R The vehicle is stationary.R The ignition is switched on.R A USB device is connected.

Multimedia system:4© 5 Settings 5 System5 System backup# Select Import data or Export data.

Importing# Select a data storage medium.

A prompt appears asking whether you reallywish to overwrite the current data. If data


originates from another vehicle, this is recog‐nised during data reading.

# Confirm the prompt.

The files are imported. The multimedia system isrestarted once the data has been imported.% Current vehicle settings can be edited after

the import.

ExportingIf PIN protection is activated, your PIN is reques‐ted.# Enter the four-digit PIN.# Select a data storage medium.

A prompt appears asking whether you reallywish to carry out the export.

# Confirm the prompt.The data is exported. The data export maytake several minutes.

% After successful export, the data is saved inthe "MyMercedesBackup" directory whichcan be found on the storage medium.

Activating/deactivating PIN protection

Requirements:R To unlock the PIN: there is an Internet con‐

nection.R A Mercedes me account exists at http://

www.mercedes.me.R An individual user profile is active

(/ page 345).

Multimedia system:4© 5 Settings 5 System5 PIN protection

Setting the PIN# Select Set PIN.# Enter a four-digit PIN.# Enter the four-digit PIN again.

If both PINs match, PIN protection is active.

Changing the PIN# Select Change settings.# Enter the current PIN.# Select Change PIN.

# Set a new PIN.

Activating PIN protection for data export# Select Protect data export.

Activate or deactivate the function.

Unblocking the PIN via the Mercedes me por‐talIf the PIN has been entered incorrectly threetimes, the PIN will be blocked. You can have asingle-use password sent to you via theMercedes me connect online portal to reset thePIN protection.# Select Unblock PIN.# Enter the single-use password.

PIN protection is reset, and you can set anew PIN.

Software update

Information on software updatesA software update consists of three steps:R Downloading or copying of the data required

for installationR Installation of the update


R Activation of the update by restarting thesystem

The multimedia system provides a messagewhen an update is available.Depending on the source, you can perform vari‐ous updates:

Software updates

Source of theupdate

Update type

Internet Navigation map, sys‐tem updates, DigitalOwner's Manual

External storagemedium, e.g. USBflash drive

Navigation maps

% Installation can take several minutes andcancellation is not possible. If you do notinstall the software updates then the statusof your vehicle will not be up-to-date. Duringthe installation, individual functions or con‐

trol elements are not available or only availa‐ble to a limited degree.

Advantages of updating softwareSoftware updates ensure your vehicle's technol‐ogy is up-to-date.In order to improve the quality of our servicesyou will receive future updates for your multime‐dia system, the Mercedes me connect servicesand your vehicle's communication module.These will conveniently be sent to you via themobile phone connection in your vehicle and, inmany cases, installed automatically. You canmonitor the status of your updates at any timeon the Mercedes me portal and find informationabout potential innovations.Your advantages at a glance:R conveniently receive software updates via

the mobile phone networkR improves the quality and availability of

Mercedes me connect servicesR keeps your multimedia system and communi‐

cation module up-to-date

Further information about software updates canbe found at https://me.mercedes-benz.com

Performing a software updateRequirements:R For online updates: an Internet connection

is established (/ page 459).R For automatic online updates: your vehicle

has a permanently installed communicationmodule.

Multimedia system:4© 5 Settings 5 System5 Software update

Automatically# Activate Automatic online updates.

The updates will be downloaded and installedautomatically.The current status of the updates is dis‐played.

Manually# Deactivate Automatic online updates.


# Select an update from the list and start theupdate.

Activating the software update# Restart the system.

The modifications from the software updatewill be active.

Function of important system updatesImportant system updates may be necessary forthe security of your multimedia system's data.Install these updates, or else the security of yourmultimedia system cannot be ensured.% If automatic software updates are activated,

the system updates will be downloaded auto‐matically (/ page 371).

As soon as an update is available for download,a corresponding message appears on the mediadisplay.You have the following selection options:R Accept and install

The update will be downloaded in the back‐ground.R Information

Information about the pending systemupdate is displayed.R Later

The update can be downloaded manually at alater time (/ page 371).

Deep system updatesDeep system updates access vehicle or systemsettings and can therefore only be carried outwhen the vehicle is stationary and the ignition isswitched off.If the download of a deep system update is com‐pleted and the update is ready for installation,you will be informed of this after the next igni‐tion cycle, for example.% Park the vehicle safely in a suitable location

before starting the installation.Requirements for the installation:R The ignition is switched off.R Notes and warnings have been read and

accepted.R The electric parking brake is applied.

If all requirements are met, the update will beinstalled. The multimedia system cannot beoperated while the update is being installed andvehicle functions are restricted.If errors should occur during the installation, themultimedia system automatically attempts torestore the previous version. If restoration of theprevious version is not possible, a symbolappears on the media display. Please consult aqualified specialist workshop to resolve theproblem.

Resetting the multimedia system (reset func‐tion)

Multimedia system:4© 5 Settings 5 System 5 ResetPersonal data is deleted, for example:R Station presetsR Connected mobile phonesR individual user profiles

% The guest profile is reset when the settingsare restored to the factory settings.


A prompt appears again asking whether youreally wish to reset.# Select Yes.

The multimedia system is reset to the factorysettings. If you have set a PIN for your sys‐tem, this will also be reset.

Fit & HealthySetting ENERGIZING seat kinetics

Requirements:% These functions are available only for fully

electric seats with a memory function.Multimedia system:4© 5 Comfort 5 Seat comfort# Select Seat kinetics.

ENERGIZING seat kinetics can support backhealth by changing the seat position during ajourney. The muscles and joints are repeatedlystressed and relieved by means of minor move‐ments of the cushion and backrest.

Starting seat kinetics# SelectÌ for the desired seat.# The program will run for the set duration.

Configuring seat kinetics# SelectZ for the desired seat.# Select Backrest or Backrest and seat sur-

face.# Select the desired setting.

Vehicles with a multicontour seat:In addition to the seat backrest and seat cush‐ion, the lumbar region can be activated for thefunction.# Switch Including lumbar on or off.

Setting the duration# SelectZ for the desired seat.

The following running times are available:R Short (16 minutes)R Medium (32 minutes)R Long (96 minutes)

# Select a running time.The selected programme will start.


ENERGIZING COMFORT

Overview of the ENERGIZING COMFORT programmeProgramme overview:

Programme Function

Refresh Can make targeted changes to the interior climate to refresh vehicle occupants. Cooling airflow and ionisa‐tion purify the air. The vehicle interior is illuminated with cool colours and the seats are ventilated.

Warmth Can increase the comfort level of the vehicle occupants. The vehicle's panel, seat and steering wheel heat‐ing produce a cosy warmth. The air is purified using ionisation and a pleasant fragrance is released. Thevehicle interior is illuminated with warm lighting.

Vitality Can counteract diminishing attentiveness in monotonous driving situations. Fast-paced music and a vitalis‐ing massage provide invigorating stimulation for the vehicle occupants. The air is purified using ionisationand a pleasant fragrance is released. The vehicle interior is illuminated in a stimulating hue and the seat isventilated.

Pleasure Can promote a positive mood in the vehicle occupants as well as mental and physical regeneration. Moder‐ately fast music is played and a massage programme is activated. The air is purified using ionisation and apleasant fragrance is released. The vehicle interior is illuminated with amicable lighting.

Well being Can aid the physical and mental relaxation of vehicle occupants. A back massage combined with localwarmth provide relaxation. The air is purified using ionisation and a pleasant fragrance is released. Theaudio player plays selections of calming music and the vehicle interior is illuminated with pleasant lighting.


Programme Function

Training Can counteract the onset of muscle tension, limbs falling asleep or stress with targeted relaxation or stim‐ulation exercises. The exercises are demonstrated in short videos. The air is purified using ionisation and apleasant fragrance is released. The vehicle interior is illuminated with lighting appropriate to the exercise.The training consists of audio content and a brief animation. The audio content is conceived so that it canalso be played back when you are driving. The animation is only shown when the vehicle is driving slowerthan 5 km/h. The animation is hidden at higher speeds. Always observe the traffic conditions if you aretraining when driving.

Tips The system gives tips for possible exercises or measures for improving the comfort level of the vehicleoccupants. Playback is purely aural. By selecting the desired area of the body you can receive targeted tipsfor the comfort level of this area.

% Please note that the available programmesand the associated functions depend on yourvehicle equipment. Depending on yourequipment, fewer functions may be availa‐ble.

Starting the ENERGIZING COMFORT pro‐gramme

& WARNING Increased risk of an accidentwhen using the ENERGIZING COMFORTprogramme Tips and Training

If you use the ENERGIZING COMFORT pro‐gramme Tips and Training when you are driv‐ing, you could be distracted from the trafficsituation.

# Only carry out exercises when the traf‐fic circumstances permit.

# Make sure that you are always aware ofthe traffic situation around you whenlistening to the tips.



Multimedia system:4 Comfort 5 ENERGIZING COMFORT

Starting the ENERGIZING programme# Select a programme.# Select Start.

The selected programme will run for tenminutes.

% If, during an active programme, a functionrequirement is no longer met, a correspond‐ing message appears. The active programmeis cancelled.

Selecting the seat for the ENERGIZING pro‐grammes# Select a programme.# Select Seats.# Select the desired seat.

When the ENERGIZING programme starts, itstarts for the selected seat.

Configuring ENERGIZING programmes# Select a programme.# SelectZ.

# Switch the functions included in the pro‐gramme on or off.

Starting the training programme# Select Training.

The following training programmes are available:R Muscle stimul.R Muscle relax.R Balance# Select a programme.

The programme starts.% The animation for demonstration of the exer‐

cises is only shown when the vehicle is sta‐tionary or when you are driving slower than5 km/h. At higher speeds the picture is hid‐den and you will only be able to hear theinstructions.

Starting tips# Select Tips.

The following categories are available:R Upper body

R Lower backR HeadR ShouldersR Pelvis# Select the desired area of the bodyÌ.

Playback of the tip for this area of the bodystarts.

# SelectÉ to stop playback of the tip.% You receive a tip for each option. To listen to

the next tip, again select a desired category.

ENERGIZING COACH

Function of the ENERGIZING COACHRequirements:R The ENERGIZING COACH (ENERGIZING

COACH) service is activated in the Mercedesme portal or the Mercedes me app.

With ENERGIZING COACH you can evaluate thedriving and driver situation. Depending on thesituation, it offers recommendations for the start


of an appropriate ENERGIZING COMFORT pro‐gramme.The following programs could be suggested:R Vitality

As an activating program in monotonous driv‐ing situations or for long journey times, forexample.Information on the vitality program see(/ page 374).R Joy

As a balancing program in demanding drivingsituations.Information on the pleasure program see(/ page 374).

By connecting a GARMIN fitness tracker, forexample the GARMIN vívosmart® 3, additionalinformation can be entered into the evaluationfor the recommendation of an ENERGIZING com‐fort program. The additional informationincludes the stress level, that is calculated bythe fitness tracker. The stress level is based pri‐marily on the pulse.

Requirements for the integration of additionalinformation via a GARMIN fitness tracker:R Your fitness tracker is connected with your

GARMIN account.R Your GARMIN account is connected with your

Mercedes me account.

If you wear your GARMIN fitness tracker at nightalso, the sleep data is included in the evaluationof the ENERGIZING COACH.Requirement for the integration of the sleepdata:R The GARMIN fitness tracker is synchronised

with the GARMIN account before the begin‐ning of the journey.

% If ATTENTION ASSIST determines an exces‐sive lack of attention, ENERGIZING COACHmakes no further suggestions. Further infor‐mation about ATTENTION ASSIST(/ page 278).

Calling up the ENERGIZING COACH displayMultimedia system:4© 5 Comfort# Select ENERGIZING COACH.

Your current pulse as well as an evaluation ofyour pulse for the last 30 minutes drivingtime are shown.A corresponding error message is shown ifthere is no mobile phone connected or nopulse can be sent to the system for an exten‐ded period.

% Only pulse values in the range of30‑140 bpm are shown on the media display.The pulse values have no medical validity butare only informative in nature and are there‐fore also not required to be accurate.

# In the event of an error message make surethat the following requirements are fulfilled:R The fitness tracker is connected with your

GARMIN account.R Your GARMIN account is connected with

your Mercedes me account on yourmobile phone.


R The mobile phone is connected as themain phone to the multimedia system(/ page 426).

NavigationSwitching navigation on

Multimedia system:4© 5 Navigation (Navigation)# Alternatively: press thez button.

The map appears. The current vehicle posi‐tion is shown. The navigation menu is shown.The navigation menu is hidden if route guid‐ance is active.

Showing/hiding the navigation menu

4© 5 NavigationIf route guidance is not active the map appears.The navigation menu is shown.The navigation menu is hidden if route guidanceis active.# To show: tap on the touchscreen.

or# Press the Touch Control or the touchpad.# To hide: the navigation menu is hidden auto‐

matically.


Navigation overview

Example: digital map with navigation menu1 To enter a POI or address and additional des‐

tination entry options2 To interrupt route guidance (if route guid‐

ance is active)3 To repeat a navigation announcement and

switch navigation announcements on or off4 To call up the ON ROUTE menu

• To show Route overview• To select Alternative routes• Report traffic incident (Car-to-X)• To call up the TRAFFIC menu♢ To show Traffic announcements♢ To show Area announcements♢ To show Live Traffic Subscription Info

• To show Route list• To call up the POSITION menu♢ Store position♢ To show Compass♢ To show Qibla (available in selected coun‐tries)

5 Quick-access and settings


• To show Traffic• To show Parking• To show Motorway information• Via Advanced options to use View,Announcements and Route

% The options are not available in all countries.% You can enter 3 word addresses in the online

search (/ page 385). This option is notavailable in all countries.

Destination entry

Notes on destination entry

& WARNING Risk of distraction from oper‐ating integrated communication equip‐ment while the vehicle is in motion

If you operate communication equipmentintegrated in the vehicle when driving, youwill be distracted from the traffic situation.This could also cause you to lose control ofthe vehicle.




Entering a POI or address


If you operate information and communica‐tion equipment integrated in the vehiclewhen driving, you will be distracted from thetraffic situation. This could also cause you tolose control of the vehicle.



You must observe the legal requirements for thecountry in which you are currently driving whenoperating the multimedia system.Requirements:R For the online search: Mercedes me con‐

nect is available.R You have set up a user account in the

Mercedes me portal.R The vehicle has been activated for use of

Mercedes me connect and you have accep‐ted the terms and conditions for the service.Further information can be found at: http://www.mercedes.meR The service has been activated.


Multimedia system:4© 5 Navigation 5ª Where to?

On-board search with the keypadDestination entry uses the on-board search ofthe database stored in the multimedia system.The country in which the vehicle is located is set1.# Enter the POI or the address using the key‐

board (in the image) or using handwriting

recognition6 in input line2. The entriescan be made in any order.During destination entry, suggestions areoffered in3 by the multimedia system. Des‐tination selection takes place in list3 orwitha5.

If the multimedia system is equipped with asmall display, calling up list3 is carried outusing a list symbol at the top right.The following entries can be made, for exam‐ple:R City, street, house numberR Street, town


R PostcodeR POI nameR POI categories, e.g. Filling stationR Town, POI nameR Telephone number, if this is available for

the POIR Contact name

Example of quick address entry:R If you are searching for Königsstraße in

Stuttgart, for example, you can enterSTUT and KÖN.R If you are searching for a POI in the Uni‐

ted Kingdom, for example, you can enterTHE SHARD.If you would like to try out both examples,you may also need to change the country.

# Alternatively, use voice input8.# To switch to handwriting recognition:

select6.

# Write the character on the touchpad. The let‐ters can be written next to each other orabove each other (/ page 357).

# To return to entry using the keyboard:select_.

or# Press the touchpad.# To delete an entry: select4.

The characters are deleted individually.or# If characters have been entered in2, select£ next to the input line.The complete entry is deleted.

# To switch to upper-case or lower-case let‐ters: selectB.

# To switch to digits, special charactersand symbols: selectA.123 changes to ABC.DisplayB changes to #+=.

# SelectB and switch to additional specialcharacters.

# To enter a space: select7.

# To set the language: select9.# Select the language.

% This function is useful for countries in whichseveral character sets are supported. Anexample is Russia, which uses Cyrillic andLatin characters.

# To change the country: select country indi‐cator1.

# Enter the country indicator, e.g. F for France.The list is filtered.

# Select the country on list3.The destination can be entered.

# To accept a destination: select the destina‐tion in list3.

# If the destination is ambiguous, select thedestination in the list.The destination address is shown. The routecan be calculated.

Using online search% Requirements: there is an Internet connec‐

tion.


Further information on Mercedes me:http://www.mercedes.me

Online search is not available in all countries.Destination entry uses online map services. Ifthe on-board search finds no suitable destina‐tions or if you change countries, the onlinesearch is available.For the destination you can enter an address, aPOI or a 3 word address.% Enter a 3 word address (/ page 385).# Select country indicator1.# Select the provider for the online service

from the countries list.or# If the on-board search delivers no search

results, select Online search.# If the on-board search delivers no results,

enter the destination in the input line. Theentry order is not relevant, e.g. street andtown. Use the functions described for the on-board search.The search results are displayed.

# Select the destination in the list.The detailed view for the route is displayed.

Selecting previous destinationsRequirements:R Previous destinations are stored.R For destination suggestions: you have cre‐

ated a profile (/ page 344).R The Allow destination suggestions option is

switched on (/ page 349).R The multimedia system has already gathered

sufficient data in order to show destinationsuggestions.

Multimedia system:4© 5 Navigation 5ª Where to?5 PREV. DESTINATIONSThe following entries can be selected in the pre‐vious destinations:R Destination suggestions (/ page 403)R DestinationsR Routes

# Select the destination or routeThe destination address is shown. The routecan be calculated.

% You can save a previous destination or a des‐tination suggestion as a favourite(/ page 403).You have fast access to the destinations viathe favourites (/ page 387).

Selecting a POIRequirements:R For use of personal POIs: a USB device is

connected with the multimedia system.R Personal POIs with the GPS Exchange format

(.gpx) have been saved in the "PersonalPOI"folder on the USB device.

Multimedia system:4© 5 Navigation 5ª Where to?5 POIS

Searching using categories (no route guid‐ance)# Select the category.or


# Select All categories.# Select the category and the sub-category (if

available).The search takes place in the vicinity of thevehicle's current position. The search resultare sorted by distance in ascending order.The POIs show the following information:R direction of the linear distance to the POI

(arrow)R name of POIR linear distance to the POI

# To filter according to categories or insearch results: enter a search entry in theª Search text field.

# Select a POI from the list.The destination address is shown. The routecan be calculated.

Searching using categories (route guidanceactive)# Select the category.or# Select All categories.

# Select the category and the sub-category (ifavailable).

# To filter according to categories or insearch results: enter a search entry in theª Search text field.

# Select the search positions In the vicinity,Near destination or Along the route.

# If there are intermediate destinations for theroute and Near destination has been selec‐ted, select the search position in the routeoverview.

# Select a POI from the list.The destination address is shown. The routecan be calculated.

Searching for personal POIs# Select Personal POIs.# Select a category.# If route guidance is active, select a search

position In the vicinity, Near destination orAlong the route.

# Select a personal POI.The destination address is shown. The routecan be calculated.

or# Enter a search entry into the search field and

filter the list.# Select a personal POI.

Editing personal POI categories# Select a personal POI category from the list

s.A menu opens.

# To change a name: select Change name.# Enter the name.# Selecta.# To change a symbol: select Change icon.# Select a symbol.# To delete a personal POI category: select

Delete.# Select Yes.

Configuring categories for quick-accessYou can configure the categories for quick-access.


If you calculate the route, for example, the firstthree of these categories can be selected assymbols.# Select All categories.# Select the category and the sub-category (if

available).# Selectf orß.f adds the category.ß removes the category.

# If all available quick-access positions are full,select the category to be replaced.

Selecting a contact for destination entryRequirements:R A mobile phone is connected to the multime‐

dia system (/ page 426).

Multimedia system:4© 5 Navigation 5ª Where to?5 CONTACTS

Using the contact list# Select a contact.

The contact details are displayed.

# Select the address.

Using search entry# Enter a name or telephone number, for exam‐

ple, into the search field.# Selecta.# Select the contact.# Select the address.

The destination address is shown. The routecan be calculated.

% Route guidance to a contact address is relia‐ble in the following cases:R the contact address is complete.R the contact data matches the map data

in the digital map.

Entering geo-coordinatesMultimedia system:4© 5 Navigation 5ª Where to?5 GEO-COORDINATES# Select Latitude or Longitude.# Select geo-coordinates as latitude and longi‐

tude coordinates in degrees, minutes and

seconds. To do this swipe up or downrespectively.The map shows the position.

# Confirm the entry witha.# To set the destination: select¥ or¦.

# Calculate the route (/ page 388).

Entering the destination as a 3 word addressRequirements:R Searching for a destination using 3 word

addresses is possible in the online search(/ page 380).R The media display shows an Internet connec‐

tion with a double-arrow symbol in the statusline.

% Searching for a destination using 3 wordaddresses is not possible in all countries andin all languages.

Multimedia system:4© 5 Navigation 5ª Where to?# Select the country indicator.


# Select the provider for the online servicefrom the countries list.

or# If the on-board search delivers no search

results, enter the destination address as a 3word address. Separate each of the wordswith a full stop.The search results are displayed.

# Select the destination in the list.The destination address is shown. The routecan be calculated.

% 3 word addresses from what3words are analternative addressing system for multilin‐gual georeferencing of global locations witha resolution of three metres. Using this grid,locations on the Earth's surface are includedwhich do not have a building address suchas street and house number, for example.The Brandenburg Gate has this languagedependent 3 word address:R German: tapfer.gebäude.verliehenR English: that.lands.winningR French: posteaux.bobineur.ombrant

3 word addresses are unique, easy toremember and suffice for most routine appli‐cations.You can convert addresses to 3 wordaddresses and back again:R at the website http://what3words.comR in the what3words apps

Selecting a destination on the mapMultimedia system:4© 5 Navigation# Move the map (/ page 411).# Using the touchscreen: press and hold on

the touchscreen.The destination address is shown.If several destinations are located at theselected position, a list shows the availableroads and POIs.


# Using the touchpad: when the crosshairmarks the destination, press and hold on thecontrol element.The destination address is shown.If several destinations are located around thecrosshair, a list shows the available roadsand POIs.


Showing POIs in the vicinity of the mapIf several destinations are located around thecrosshair, the function is available.# Select Ä.# Select POIs in the vicinity.

The map appears.# Swipe left or right on the control element.

The previous or next POI is highlighted on themap. The name or the address is shown.

# Select the POI symbol.or


# To filter the display according to the POIcategory: scroll on the control element.

# Select the POI category.

Selecting a destination from favouritesRequirements:R Destinations are saved as favourites.

Save a previous destination or a destinationsuggestion as a favourite (/ page 403).

Multimedia system:4© 5 Navigation 5ª Where to?5 FAVOURITES# Select a favourite.


The following options are available in the favour‐ites menu:R Saving addresses for home and workR Creating favouritesR Deleting favourites

# If no address has been saved for homeand work: select Home or Work.

# Confirm the prompt with Yes.# Enter the favourite as a POI or address

(/ page 380).# To save a favourite: select Add favourites.# Enter the favourite as a POI or address

(/ page 380).or# If all the positions in the favourites are full,

first select a favourite which is to be over‐written (/ page 350).

# Follow the instructions provided.# To delete a favourite: selectV for a des‐

tination.# Select Delete.or# Press on a favourite until the OPTIONS menu

is shown.# Select Delete.

Selecting received destinationsRequirements:R There is an Internet connection.R A destination has been sent to the vehicle.

Multimedia system:4© 5 Navigation 5ª Where to?5 RECEIVED DESTINAT.The vehicle can receive destinations from serv‐ices or apps.# Select a destination.


% You can save a received destination in thefavourites (/ page 403).You have fast access to the destinations viathe favourites (/ page 387).

Deleting a received destination# To delete a destination: selectV for a

destination.# Select Delete.# Select Yes.# To delete all destinations: select Ä.# Select Delete all.# Select Yes.


Route

Calculating a routeRequirements:R The destination has been entered.R The destination address is shown.

1¥ No route yet¦ A route has been mapped

# Select¥.The route to the destination is calculated.The map shows the route. Route guidancethen begins.

or

# Select¦.If a route is already mapped, a prompt isshown.

# Select Set as intermediate dest..The selected destination address is set asthe next intermediate destination. Routeguidance begins.If there are already four intermediate destina‐tions, the multimedia system asks whetherintermediate destination 4 should be deleted.Confirm the prompt with Yes.

or# Select Start new route guidance.

The selected destination address is set as anew destination. The previous destinationand the intermediate destinations aredeleted. Route guidance to the new destina‐tion begins.

Searching for POIs in the vicinity of the des‐tination shown% The POI symbols to the right of POIs in the

vicinity show the first three categories forquick-access. You can configure these cate‐gories (/ page 383).

# Select a POI symbol.The search results are displayed.

# Select a POI.The destination address is shown. The routecan be calculated.

or# Select POIs in the vicinityr.# Search using categories, enter a search entry

or search for a personal POI (/ page 383).# Select a POI.


Other menu functions# To save the destination: selectf.# Select an option.

The following options are available:R Save in "Previous destinations"R Save as favouriteR Save as "Home"R Save as "Work"


# To call the destination: if a telephone num‐ber is available, select Call.

# To share the destination using NFC or QRcode: select Share via NFC or QR code.

# Hold the NFC area of the mobile phone (seemanufacturer's operating instructions) on themat or place the mobile phone on it(/ page 428).

or# Hold the mobile phone near to the multime‐

dia system and scan the QR code.# To call up an Internet address: if a web

address is available, select www.# To show on the map: select Display on the

map.

Selecting a route typeMultimedia system:4© 5 Navigation 5Z5 Advanced 5 Route# Select the route type.

If no route has been created, the next routeis calculated on the basis of the new routetype.

If a route has already been created, the routeis calculated on the basis of the new routetype.

The following route types are available:R Fast

A route with a quick journey time is calcula‐ted.R Short

A route with a short driving distance is calcu‐lated.R Eco

An economical route is calculated. The jour‐ney time may be somewhat longer than forquicker routes.R Trailer

The option is available if a trailer has beencoupled with the vehicle.A prompt is shown in the multimedia system.Confirm the prompt.The route is optimised for trailer operationwith a maximum speed of 80 km/h.

Traffic information can be taken into accountfor the route types:# Select Dynamic route guidancer.# Select Automatic, After asking or Off.Explanation of the options:R Automatic

The route is calculated with the currently setroute type.Traffic messages via Live Traffic Informationor FM RDS-TMC are taken into account(/ page 404).Live Traffic Information and FM RDS-TMC arenot available in all countries.R After asking

A prompt appears when a new route is detec‐ted with a shorter journey time based on traf‐fic reports. You can continue to use the cur‐rent route or use the dynamic route instead(/ page 390).R Off

No traffic reports are taken into account forthe route.


Calculating alternative routes# Activate Suggest alternative route.

The display button is activated. Alternativeroutes are calculated for every route.

# Select an alternative route (/ page 393).

Accepting a detour recommendation after apromptRequirements:R After asking is switched on (/ page 389) in

the DYNAMIC ROUTE GUIDANCE menu.R Route guidance is active.R There are traffic reports for the current

route.

If a new route with a shorter driving time isdetermined, the current and new routes will beshown.The notification is shown in another application.Confirm the notification.# To accept the new route: select Accept rec-

ommended detour.# To maintain the current route: select Keep

to current route.

Selecting route optionsMultimedia system:4© 5 Navigation 5Z5 Advanced 5 Route

Avoiding areas# Select Avoid options.# Select Avoid areas (/ page 414).

Avoiding or using motorways, ferries, tun‐nels, motorail trains, unpaved roads# Select Avoid options.# Activate or deactivate the avoid option.

To avoid: the display button is activated. Theroute avoids motorways, for example.To use: the display button is off. The routetakes motorways into consideration, forexample.These route options are not available in everycountry.The selected route options cannot always betaken into account. Therefore, a route mayinclude a ferry, for instance, even though theAvoid ferries avoid option is enabled. A mes‐

sage then appears and you will hear a corre‐sponding message.

Avoiding or using toll roads# Select Avoid options.# Select Toll roads.# Switch Avoid all on or off.

To avoid: the display button is activated. Theroute avoids all toll roads.To use: the display button is off. The routetakes into account all roads that require thepayment of a usage fee (toll).

or# To avoid a type of payment: select Avoid.

The route avoids all toll roads with the selec‐ted method of payment.

# To use a type of payment: select Use.The route takes into account all toll roadswith the selected method of payment.

These route options are not available in everycountry.


Avoiding or using roads requiring a specialtoll sticker# Select Avoid options.# Select Vignette roads.# Switch All on or off.or# Activate or deactivate the countries.

To avoid: the display button is activated. Theroute avoids roads requiring a special tollsticker in the selected countries.To use: the display button is off. The routetakes into account roads in the selectedcountry which require you to pay a time-based fee (vignette). A vignette allows for theuse of a route network for a limited timeperiod.

% These route options are not available inevery country.

Selecting notifications for the routeRequirements:R For an audible indication when approach‐

ing a personal POI: the USB device containspersonal POIs.

R The USB device is connected with the multi‐media system.R The category in which the personal POI

belongs is activated.

Multimedia system:4© 5 Navigation 5Z5 Advanced 5 Announcements# Switch No driving recomm. on or off.

No navigation announcements are issuedwhen the display button is switched on.

# To select a navigation announcement:select an option # under the DRIVING REC-OMMEND. category.The following options are available:R Acoustic signal only

In place of the spoken navigationannouncement you hear a gong. Thegong signals an upcoming drivingmanoeuvre and also sounds during thedriving manoeuvre.R Reduced driving recomm.

If a navigation announcement is available,you hear a brief announcement, e.g. "turnright".R Detailed driving recomm.

If a navigation announcement is availableand the Announce street names option isswitched on, you hear a completeannouncement, e.g. "In 200 m at the endof the street turn right into Station Road".

# To have street names announced duringa driving manoeuvre: switch on Announcestreet names.

# Select Reduced driving recomm. or Detaileddriving recomm..The name of the street into which you shouldturn is announced.

% The options in the DRIVING RECOMMEND.category are not available in every countryand in all languages.

Selecting messages for TRAFFIC# Activate a message.

The display button is activated.


The following options are available:R Traffic incidents

Traffic incidents are announced, e.g.roadworks and road blocks.This function is not available in all coun‐tries and languages.R Announce warnings

Warning messages are announced, e.g.before tailbacks that pose a risk (if availa‐ble).This function is not available in all coun‐tries and languages.

Audible indication when approaching a per‐sonal POI# Select the Personal POIs option in the

ALERTS category.# Activate a category.

The display button is activated. Whenapproaching a personal POI in this categoryan audible indication will be issued.

Showing destination information for therouteRequirements:R A destination is entered.

Multimedia system:4© 5 Navigation 5¡

# Select Route overview.When route guidance is active, the destina‐tion and intermediate destinations areshown, if these have been entered and notyet been passed.The route can include up to four intermediatedestinations.

# Select a destination or an intermediate desti‐nation.The following information is displayed:R Remaining driving distanceR Time of arrivalR Remaining journey timeR Name, destination addressR Phone number (if available)

R Web address (if available)

Planning routesMultimedia system:4© 5 Navigation5¡ 5 Route overview# Select Set intermediate destination.# Enter the intermediate destination as a POI

or address, for example (/ page 380).# Select the intermediate destination.

After selection of an intermediate destina‐tion, the route overview is shown again.

# Calculate the route with intermediate desti‐nations(/ page 393)

% If there are already four intermediate desti‐nations, delete an intermediate destination(/ page 392).

Editing a route with intermediate destina‐tionsRequirements:R The destination and at least one intermediate

destination have been entered.


Multimedia system:4© 5 Navigation5¡ 5 Route overview# To change the sequence of destinations:

selectV for a destination.A menu opens.

# Select Move.ø is highlighted.

# Move the intermediate destination or thedestination with4 ors to the desiredposition.

# Tap onø.# To delete a destination: selectV for an

intermediate destination or destination.# Select Delete.

The destination is deleted.

Calculating a route with intermediate desti‐nationsRequirements:R The destination and at least one intermediate

destination have been entered.

Multimedia system:4© 5 Navigation5¡ 5 Route overview# Select Start route guidance.or# If the route has been edited, select To Navi-

gationG.# Confirm the prompt with Yes.

The route is calculated. Route guidancebegins.

Displaying the route listMultimedia system:4© 5 Navigation 5¡

# Select Route list.The route sections are displayed. The currentvehicle position is marked on the map.The current vehicle position is shown withthe following information:R Thea symbol for the current vehicle

position is displayed.R The name of the road on which you are

currently driving is shown.

R The road number of the road on whichyou are currently driving is shown.

The route list is updated during the journey.# To show route sections: swipe up or down

on the control element.The route section is shown on the map.

Selecting an alternative routeRequirements:R The Suggest alternative route option is

switched on (/ page 389).

Multimedia system:4© 5 Navigation 5¡

# Select Alternative routes.The routes are displayed in accordance withthe setting made in the route settings.The routes are numbered.

# Select the alternative route.# To show the route on the map: select Dis-

play on the map.# Move the map (/ page 411).# Set the map scale (/ page 411).


# To avoid or use route options: select Ä.# Switch the route option, e.g. Motorways, on

or off.To avoid: the display button is activated. Thealternative route avoids motorways.To use: the display button is off. The alterna‐tive route uses motorways.

Activating a commuter routeRequirements:R You have created a profile (/ page 344).R The Allow destination suggestions option is

switched on (/ page 349).R The Activate commuter route option is

switched on.R The multimedia system has gathered suffi‐

cient data in order to show destination sug‐gestions.R Routes have been learned for these destina‐

tion suggestions.

% This commuter route is not available in allcountries.

Multimedia system:4© 5 Navigation 5Z5 Advanced 5 Route# Activate Activate commuter route.

The display button is activated. The naviga‐tion system automatically detects that thevehicle is on a commuter route. It automati‐cally starts a route guidance without voiceoutput.For the daily commuter route, traffic inci‐dents on the route are also reported whendriving without active route guidance.

Switching the automatic filling stationsearch on/offMultimedia system:4© 5 Settings 5 Vehicle# Switch Filling station search on or off.

When the fuel reserve level is reached, andthe display button is switched on, a messageappears to start searching for filling stations.

Starting an automatic filling station searchRequirements:

R The automatic filling station search is activa‐ted (/ page 394) .

Driving situationThe fuel level in the fuel tank reaches thereserve fuel level.The following notification is shown in the mediadisplay Reserve fuel Tap here to search for fill-ing stations.# Confirm the notification.

The automatic filling station search begins.The available filling stations along the routeor in the vicinity of the vehicle's current posi‐tion are displayed.

# Select a filling station.The address of the filling station is displayed.

# Calculate the route (/ page 388).The filling station is set as the destination orthe next intermediate destination.

# If there are already four intermediate des‐tinations: select Yes in the prompt.The filling station is entered in the routeoverview. Intermediate destination 4 isdeleted. Route guidance begins.


Starting the automatic service stationsearchRequirements:R ATTENTION ASSIST and the Suggest rest

area function are activated (/ page 278).R There are service stations along the route

section ahead.

Driving situationThe following notification is shown in the mediadisplay ATTENTION ASSIST Tap here to searchfor rest areas.# Confirm the notification.

The service station search starts. The availa‐ble service stations along the route or in thevicinity of the vehicle's current position aredisplayed.

# Select a service station.The service station address is displayed.

# Calculate the route (/ page 388).The service station is set as the destinationor the next intermediate destination.

# If there are already four intermediate des‐tinations: select Yes in the prompt.The service station is entered in the routeoverview. Intermediate destination 4 isdeleted. Route guidance begins.

Showing a stored route on the mapRequirements:R A USB device with stored routes is connec‐

ted with the multimedia system(/ page 472).R The route is stored in the "Routes" folder

with the GPS Exchange format (.gpx).

Multimedia system:4© 5 Navigation 5ª Where to?5 STORED ROUTES# Select a route.# Select Display on the map.# Move the map (/ page 411).

Starting a saved routeRequirements:

R A USB device with stored routes is connec‐ted with the multimedia system(/ page 472).R The route is stored in the "Routes" folder

with the GPS Exchange format (.gpx).

Multimedia system:4© 5 Navigation 5ª Where to?5 STORED ROUTES# Select a route.# Select Start route guidance from the begin-

ning or Start route guidance from currentlocation.Route guidance starts.

% The route can be saved withf in themenu (/ page 388).

Recording a routeRequirements:R A USB device is connected with the multime‐



Multimedia system:4© 5 Navigation 5ª Where to?5 STORED ROUTES# To start recording: select Start to record

new route.A red recording symbol is shown.The route is stored on the USB device.

# To stop recording: select End recording.

Saving a recorded routeRequirements:R A USB device is connected with the multime‐


Multimedia system:4© 5 Navigation 5ª Where to?5 STORED ROUTES# Select a route.# Selectf.# Select Save in "Previous destinations".

The route is stored in the "Previous destina‐tions" memory and can be called up fromthere for route guidance.

Editing a stored routeRequirements:R A USB device with stored routes is connec‐

ted with the multimedia system(/ page 472).

Multimedia system:4© 5 Navigation 5ª Where to?5 STORED ROUTES# Select a route withV.# To enter a name: select Change name.# Enter the name.# Select OK.or# When the name has been changed, press theG button.

# Select Yes.# To delete a route: select Delete.# Select Yes.

Route guidance

Notes on route guidance


If you operate communication equipmentintegrated in the vehicle when driving, youwill be distracted from the traffic situation.This could also cause you to lose control ofthe vehicle.# Only operate this equipment when the



You must observe the legal requirements for thecountry in which you are currently driving whenoperating the multimedia system.Route guidance begins once a route has beencalculated.


The road and traffic rules and regulations alwayshave priority over multimedia system drivinginstructions.Driving instructions are:R Navigation announcementsR Route guidance displaysR Lane recommendations

If you do not follow the driving instructions or ifyou leave the calculated route, a new route iscalculated automatically.Driving instructions may differ from the actualroad and traffic conditions if:R The route is divertedR The direction of a one-way street has been

changed

For this reason, you must always observe roadand traffic rules and regulations during yourjourney as well as the prevailing traffic condi‐tions.The route may differ from the ideal route due tothe following:R Roadworks

R Incomplete digital map data

Notes on GPS receptionThe correct function of the navigation systemdepends amongst other things on GPS recep‐tion. In certain situations GPS reception can beimpaired, defective or even not possible, e.g. intunnels or in multi-storey car parks.

Changing direction overviewChanges of direction are shown in the followingdisplays:R Detailed image of the junction

The display appears when you drive into ajunction.R 3D image

The display appears when driving on junc‐tion-free, multi-lane roads, for example onmotorway exits and motorway interchanges.

Detailed image of the junction

1 Current distance to the change of direction2 Driving manoeuvre3 Current vehicle position4 Manoeuvre point


3D image

1 Current distance to the change of direction2 Driving manoeuvre3 Current vehicle position4 Manoeuvre point

There are three phases when changing direction:R Preparation phase

If there is enough time between the changesof direction, the multimedia system preparesyou for the upcoming change of direction. Anavigation announcement is issued depend‐ing on the settings for driving recommenda‐tions, e.g. "Prepare to turn right".

Select navigation announcements for drivingrecommendations (/ page 391).The map appears in full-screen mode.The status line shows: the direction informa‐tion or the name of the road which is to beturned into and the distance to the change ofdirection.R Announcement phase

The multimedia system announces theupcoming change of direction depending onthe settings for driving recommendations,e.g. by announcing "In 200 m at the end ofthe street turn right into Station Road".The display is split into two parts. The map isdisplayed on the left; on the right, there is adetailed image of the junction or a 3D imageof the upcoming change of direction.R Change-of-direction phase

The multimedia system announces the immi‐nent change of direction depending on thesettings for driving recommendations, e.g. byannouncing "Now turn right".The display is split into two parts.

The change of direction takes place when thedistance to manoeuvre point4 is shownwith 0 m and the symbol for vehicle position3 has reached manoeuvre point4.When the change of direction is complete,the map appears in full-screen mode.

% Changes of direction are also shown in theInstrument Display.

Lane recommendations overviewThis display appears for multi-lane roads.The multimedia system can show lane recom‐mendations if the digital map contains the rele‐vant data.


1 Recommended lane (white arrow, blue back‐ground)

2 Possible lanes (white arrow)3 Lanes not recommended (grey arrow)

Explanation of the displayed lanes:R Recommended lane1

In this lane, you will be able to complete boththe next change of direction and the oneafter that.R Possible lane2

In this lane, you will only be able to completethe next change of direction.R Lane not recommended3

In this lane, you will not be able to completethe next change of direction without chang‐ing lane.

During the change of direction, new lanes maybe added.Bus lanes are also shown.% Lane recommendations can also be dis‐

played in the Instrument Display and in theHead-up Display.

Using motorway informationRequirements:R The Motorway information option is switched

on (/ page 414).

When driving on the motorway, upcoming motor‐way facilities1 and available service facilities2 are shown in the overview. These include carparks, service stations and motorway exits, forexample.# To open the display: selectr.

The entries are sorted according to increas‐ing distance from the current vehicle posi‐tion.

# To close the display: tap on the map.or# To use motorway information: select an

entry.# If several service facilities are available,

select a service facility from the list.The destination address and the map posi‐tion are shown.

# Calculate the route (/ page 388).or# Search for a POI in the vicinity.or# Use other functions, e.g. save the destination

address of the service facility.


Using quick-access for a destination informa‐tion, alternative route and POIsRequirements:R The POI categories for quick-access are con‐

figured (/ page 383).

# If route guidance is active, select1.The address of the destination or the nextintermediate destination is shown.

Using alternative routes# Select Alternative route.

The routes are displayed in accordance withthe setting made in the route settings.The routes are numbered.

# Select the alternative route.

Setting a POI as an intermediate destination# Select a category symbol, e.g.B for a car

park.# Select a POI from the list.

The selection takes place on the route. Thedestination address is shown. The route canbe calculated.

# To use POI categories for quick-access:select a search position In the vicinity, Neardestination or Along the route.

# Select a POI from the list.or# Enter a search entry into the search field and

filter the list.# Select a POI from the list.


Saving the current vehicle position# Select Store position.

The current vehicle position is saved to the"Previous destinations" memory.

Destination reachedOnce the destination is reached, you will see theÍ chequered flag. Route guidance is finished.The Navigation menu is shown.When an intermediate destination has beenreached, you will see the intermediate destina‐tion flag with the number of yourÎ inter‐mediate destination. Route guidance is contin‐ued.

Switching navigation announcements on/off# To switch off: turn the volume control on

the steering wheel or next to the touchpadduring a navigation announcement(/ page 355).The Spoken driving recommendations havebeen deactivated. message appears.

or# Show the navigation menu (/ page 378).# Select!.

The symbol changes to#.# To activate: select# .

The current navigation announcement isplayed.


The symbol changes to!.% This function can be added and called up

from the favourites within the navigation cat‐egory.

Switching navigation announcements on oroff during a phone call# Press the© button on the steering wheel

or on the touchpad.or# Tap on© in the media display.# Select Settings.# Select System.# Select Audio.# Select Navigation and traffic announce-

ments.# Switch Driving recommendations during call

on or off.When the option is switched on, the displaybutton is activated.

# To leave the menu: selectq.

Adjusting the volume of navigationannouncementsMultimedia system:4© 5 Settings 5 System 5 Audio5 Navigation and traffic announcements# Select Driving recommendation vol..# Set the volume.# To leave the menu: selectq.

Route guidance is active# Turn the volume control on the steering

wheel or next to the touchpad during a navi‐gation announcement.

Switching audio fadeout on or off during nav‐igation announcements# Press the© button on the steering wheel

or on the touchpad.or# Tap on© in the media display.# Select Settings.# Select System.# Select Audio.

# Switch Audio fadeout on or off.When the option is switched on, the displaybutton is activated.

# To leave the menu: selectq.

Repeating navigation announcementsRequirements:R a route has already been created.R route guidance is active.

Multimedia system:4 Navigation (Navigation)# Select!.# Select#.

The current navigation announcement isrepeated.

% This function can be added and called upfrom the favourites within the navigation cat‐egory.

Cancelling route guidanceRequirements:R a route has already been created.R route guidance is active.


# Show the navigation menu.# Select¤ in the navigation menu

(/ page 379).

Overview of route guidance to an off-roaddestinationAn off-road destination is within the digital map.The map contains no roads that lead to the des‐tination.You can enter geo-coordinates or a 3 wordaddress for off-road destinations on the map.Route guidance guides you for as long as possi‐ble with navigation announcements and displayson roads that are known to the multimedia sys‐tem.Shortly before you reach the last known positionon the map, you will hear the "Please follow thedirection arrow" announcement, for example.The display shows a direction arrow and the lin‐ear distance to the destination.

Overview of route guidance from an off-roadlocation to a destinationIn an off-road position, the current vehicle posi‐tion is located within the digital map on roadsthat are not available.

The following displays appear when route guid‐ance begins:R A message appears that the road is not on

the map.R A direction arrow showing the linear direc‐

tion to the POI.

When the vehicle is back on a road known to themultimedia system, route guidance continues asnormal.

Overview of off-road status during routeguidanceDue to roadworks, for example, there may be dif‐ferences between the data on the digital mapand the actual course of the road. In such cases,the multimedia system will temporarily beunable to locate the vehicle's current position onthe digital map. The vehicle is off-road.When the vehicle is off-road, the following dis‐plays are shown:R A message appears that the road is not on

the map.R A direction arrow showing the linear direc‐

tion to the POI.

When the vehicle is back on a road known to themultimedia system, route guidance continues asnormal.

Destination

Saving the current vehicle positionMultimedia system:4© 5 Navigation 5¡ 5 Position# Select Store position.

The current vehicle position is saved to the"Last destinations" memory.

Using quick-access


# If route guidance is active, select1.The address of the destination or the nextintermediate destination is shown.

# Select Store position.

Editing the previous destinationsRequirements:R To edit destination suggestions: the Allow

destination suggestions option is activated(/ page 349).R The multimedia system has gathered suffi‐

cient data in order to show destination sug‐gestions.

Multimedia system:4© 5 Navigation 5ª Where to?5 PREV. DESTINATIONSThe following entries can be edited:R Destination suggestionsR DestinationsR Routes

# To no longer display a destination sugges‐tion: selectV for a destination sugges‐tion.

# Select Do not suggest.

Saving the last destination as a favourite% After saving, the destination can be called

up via the favourites (/ page 350).# SelectV for a destination.# Selectf Save as favourite.# To save as a favourite: select Save as

favourite .# To save as "Home" address: select Save

as "Home" .# To save as "Work" address: select Save as

"Work" .

Deleting a previous destination# To delete a destination: selectV for a

destination.# Select Delete.# Select Yes.

# To delete all destinations: select Ä.# Select Delete all.# Select Yes.

Using external destinations and routesExternal destinations and routes can be receivedfrom the following sources, for example:R Mercedes-Benz AppsR door-to-door navigation

A prompt appears on the media display.Received destinations and routes are saved inthe previous destinations.# A destination has been received: select

Yes.# Calculate the route.# If route guidance is already active, select Set

as intermediate dest. or Start new routeguidance.

or# If a destination was received with photo

information, select Start route guidance.# Calculate the route.


or# If a destination has been received from an

app, select Details.# Calculate the route.# A route has been received: select Yes.# Select Start route guidance from the begin-

ning or Start route guidance from currentlocation.Route guidance starts from the selectedposition.

Route guidance with current traffic reports

Traffic information overview% The services are not available in every coun‐

try.Traffic reports can be received with the followingservices:R Live Traffic InformationR FM RDS-TMC

It is not possible to use both services simul‐taneously.

Live Traffic Information or FM RDS-TMC isdisplayed with a symbol.

% Hazard warnings can be received using theCar-to-X service.

% There may be differences between the trafficreports received and the actual road andtraffic conditions.

Important information on Live Traffic Informa‐tion:R Current traffic reports are received via the

Internet connection (for selected countries).R The traffic situation is updated at short, regu‐

lar intervals.R In selected countries, the subscription

service is available free of charge for a periodof three years from the manufacturing date.Information from the service provider can beshown (/ page 405).

Registering Live Traffic Information:R The service must be registered with

Mercedes me (/ page 405).

This secures the free-of-charge period ofthree years.

Information on the vehicle's position is regularlysent to Daimler AG. The data is immediately ren‐dered anonymous by Daimler AG and forwardedto the traffic data provider. Using this data, traf‐fic reports relevant to the vehicle's position aresent to the vehicle. The vehicle acts as a sensorfor the flow of traffic and helps to improve thequality of the traffic reports.If you do not want to transmit the vehicle posi‐tion, you have the following options:R You deactivate the service in the Mercedes

me portal.R You have the service deactivated at a

Mercedes-Benz service centre.

Useful information on FM RDS-TMC:R A FM RDS-TMC radio station broadcasts traf‐

fic reports alongside the radio programme.R FM RDS-TMC is not available in all countries.


Showing information from the service pro‐vider for Live Traffic InformationRequirements:R The vehicle is equipped with Live Traffic

Information.

Multimedia system:4© 5 Navigation 5¡ 5 Traffic# Select Provider information.

The logo of the service provider for Live Traf‐fic Information is shown.When the subscription for Live Traffic Infor‐mation has expired then in selected coun‐tries FM RDS-TMC is available.

% Further information on Live Traffic Informa‐tion can be called up on the home screenusing Mercedes me & Apps (/ page 451).

Registering Live Traffic InformationRequirements:R The vehicle is equipped with Live Traffic

Information.R You have a user account on the Mercedes

me website.

The Live Traffic Information service must be reg‐istered. This secures the full period of threeyears.# Create a user account at Mercedes me at:

http://www.mercedes.me. A valid emailaddress is required for this.

# Register the vehicle using the vehicle identifi‐cation number (VIN).

# To carry out the registration yourself: con‐nect the vehicle with your Mercedes me useraccount in the Mercedes me portal.A code is sent to the multimedia system.

# Enter the code into the multimedia system.# Accept the general and specific terms of use.# Registration in the Mercedes-Benz

service centre: have the connection carriedout at a Mercedes-Benz service centre.

Extending a Live Traffic Information sub‐scriptionRequirements:R The vehicle is equipped with Live Traffic

Information.

R You have a user account on the Mercedesme website.

# Call up the Mercedes me website.# Call up the Mercedes me user account.# Switch to the Mercedes me connect online

store via the linked vehicle.# Select the Live Traffic Information service.# Select the renewal period.# Add the product to the shopping basket.# Accept the general and specific terms of use.

Live Traffic Information remains activated forthe selected extension period. Activationbegins on the date of extension.

Showing traffic informationRequirements:R The Traffic display is switched on

(/ page 407).R The following traffic displays are switched on

(/ page 407):Traffic incidentsFree-flowing traffic


Delay

Multimedia system:4©

# Select Navigation.The map shows the following traffic information:R traffic incidents, for example:

- roadworks- road blocks- warning messages

When route guidance is active, the symbolsfor traffic incidents will be shown in colouron the route. Off the route they are grey.R warning message symbols:

- symbold- road safety notes, e.g. when approaching

the end of a traffic jamIf the vehicle approaches a danger areaon the route, a warning message is dis‐played on the map. In addition, an audiblenotification can follow a hazard warning.

R traffic flow information:

- traffic jam (red line)- slow-moving traffic (orange line)- heavy traffic (yellow line)- free-flowing traffic (green line)R display for traffic delays on the route lasting

at least one minute

Displaying traffic incidentsRequirements:R The Traffic incidents display is switched on

(/ page 407).

Multimedia system:4© 5 Navigation 5¡ 5 Traffic# Select Traffic announcements.

If there are traffic reports, you will see a list.Traffic reports include accidents and othertraffic events, for example. The list is sortedaccording to distance and shows the trafficreports received both on and off the route.A traffic report shows the following informa‐tion:R Street number

R Traffic incident symbolOn the route: colouredOff the route: greyR CauseR Street symbol for a traffic incident on the

routeR Distance from current vehicle position

# Select a traffic reportr.The detailed information is shown, for exam‐ple the route section.

Showing traffic incidents in the vicinity ofthe map# Select a traffic incident symbol on the map.

The details about the traffic incident are dis‐played.

# Select Ä.# Select Traffic incidents in vicinity.

The map shows the traffic incident symbolsin the vicinity.Traffic incident information is displayed inthe status line:R Traffic incident symbol


R Cause of the traffic incident, e.g. con‐struction workR Warning message (highlighted red)

# To select a traffic incident symbol: selectq orr.

# To select a map section: tap on thetouchscreen.

or# Press the Touch Control or the touchpad.# Move the map.# To return to the navigation map: tap onG.

or# Press theG button on the Touch Control

or on the touchpad.

Switching the traffic information display onMultimedia system:4© 5 Navigation 5Z

# Activate Traffic.The display button is activated.

Activating Incidents, Free Flow and Delay# Select Advanced.# Select View.# Select Map elements.# In the TRAFFIC category, activate the Traffic

incidents, Free-flowing traffic and Delayentries.The display buttons are activated.If traffic information has been received, thentraffic incidents such as roadworks, roadblocks, local area reports (e.g. fog) and warn‐ing messages are displayed.The traffic delay is displayed for the currentroute. Traffic delays lasting one minute orlonger are taken into consideration.

Showing local area messagesMultimedia system:4© 5 Navigation 5¡ 5 Traffic# Select Area announcements.

Local area messages are shown, for examplefog or heavy rain.

# Select a local area message.The details are displayed.

Car-to-X-Communication

Car-to-X-Communication overviewThe following requirements apply for using Car-to-X-Communication:R The vehicle is equipped with a multimedia

system featuring navigation and a communi‐cation module with an activated, integratedSIM card.R Car-to-X-Communication is activated.

% Car-to-X-Communication is available inselected countries.

The communication module automatically estab‐lishes an Internet connection once the ignition isswitched on. If there are any hazard warnings,they will be provided shortly thereafter. Depend‐ing on the mobile phone connection, the provi‐sion takes place from within a second up toabout a minute.


Benefits of Car-to-X-Communication:R Hazards are recognised automatically in the

background by the vehicle or may be repor‐ted by the driver. These are then sent to vehi‐cles with Car-to-X-Communication in theimmediate vicinity.R If available, current details relating to hazard

spots near the vehicle's current position arereceived.This gives you sufficient time to adapt yourdriving style to the traffic conditions.

The use of Car-to-X-Communication requires theregular transmission of vehicle data to DaimlerAG. The data is then immediately pseudony‐mised by Daimler AG. The vehicle data is deletedafter an appropriate amount of time has elapsed(several weeks) and is not stored permanently.% Data which serves as identification is

replaced during the pseudonymisation proc‐ess. In this way, your identity is protectedagainst access by unauthorised third parties.

Displaying hazard warningsMultimedia system:4© 5 Navigation (Navigation)If hazard warnings are available these can beshown as symbols on the map. The displaydepends on the settings for the Traffic and Traf-fic incidents options.# Set the options (/ page 407).The following displays are available:R Show all symbols.

The Traffic and Traffic incidents options areswitched on.R Only show symbols on the expected route.

The Traffic option is switched off, the Trafficincidents option is switched on.R Show no symbols.

The Traffic incidents option is switched off.

The following hazard warnings are shown on themap:R Broken-down vehiclesR Accidents

R Hazardous weatherR General hazardsR Hazard warning lights, when switched onR Crosswind warningR Mobile roadworks

The display is not available in all countriesand regions.In the Federal Republic of Germany the dis‐play is currently available in the Federal Stateof Hesse.

% If the vehicle is approaching a hazard spotwith a vehicle speed of at least the voiceoutput "Traffic incident ahead" is issued60 km/h the voice output "Traffic incidentahead" is issued.The voice output is not issued for hazardousweather.

Sending hazard warningsAutomatically detected hazard warnings are sentby the vehicle.


# To send a hazard warning yourself: tap onthe media display when the map is shown.The navigation menu is shown.

# Select¡.# Select Report traffic incident.

A prompt is shown.# Select Yes.

The Thank you for supporting accident pre-vention. message appears.

Route guidance with augmented reality

Overview of route guidance with augmentedreality

& WARNING Risk of accident and injurycaused by distraction, incorrect image orinterpretation of the display

The distance to other road users or informa‐tion, such as traffic lights, can be incorrectlyassessed from the camera image. The cam‐era image of the augmented reality display isnot suitable to be used for driving.

# Always keep your eyes on the actualtraffic situation. Only glance briefly atthe camera image.

# Be aware that depending on the drivingsituation there may be hazards that arenot captured in the camera image, e.g.when turning. Avoid observing the cam‐era image for extended periods.

During route guidance with augmented reality acamera image with the real traffic scene isshown in the media display before a turningmanoeuvre.

1 Street name2 House number3 Change of direction arrow

Route guidance with augmented reality is notavailable in all countries.Route guidance with augmented reality is cur‐rently not available on motorways.The camera image can contain the followingadditional information:R Change of direction arrowR Street namesR House numbers


Activating route guidance with augmentedreality

& WARNING Risk of accident and injurycaused by inaccurate positioning of addi‐tional information

The additional information indicated with theaugmented reality display can be incorrectlypositioned in the camera image. For this rea‐son, the camera image cannot replace theneed to observe the actual driving situation.# Maintain the actual driving situation in

view for all driving manoeuvres , e.g.when turning and when changing lanes.

Requirements:R Route guidance is active.

Multimedia system:4© 5 Navigation# If the detailed junction view appears during

route guidance, tap on the camera symbol.The display button is activated. The cameraimage is shown in the media display depend‐ing on the situation.The camera image will be shown instead ofthe navigation map before a turning manoeu‐vre and will show the additional information.

# To return to the navigation map: tap onthe camera symbol again.The display button is off.

Showing street names for route guidancewith augmented realityRequirements:R Augmented reality is activated (/ page 410).

Multimedia system:4© 5 Navigation 5Z5 Advanced 5 Augmented Reality# Activate Street names and House numbers.

The display buttons are activated. Duringroute guidance, street names and housenumbers are shown as additional informationin the video image.

Switching on display of traffic lights withaugmented reality for route guidanceRequirements:R Augmented reality is activated (/ page 410).R The Traffic light zoom option is switched on.

When the vehicle is standing in first position at ajunction, the camera image will show anenlarged traffic lights display.% When the vehicle pulls away the navigation

map is shown again.


Multimedia system:4© 5 Navigation 5Z5 Advanced 5 Augmented Reality# Activate Traffic light zoom.

The display button is activated.# Under TRAFFIC LIGHT VIEW select one of the

Off, After asking or Automatic options.If After asking is set, the Traffic light indica-tor available message is shown. The cameraimage is shown after confirmation of themessage.If Automatic is set, the traffic lights display isshown automatically in the camera imagewhen available.

# To return to the navigation map: press theG button.

Map and compass

Setting the map scaleMultimedia system:4© 5 Navigation

Zooming in# When the map is shown, tap twice quickly

with one finger on the media display or thetouchpad.

or# Move two fingers apart on the media display

or on the touchpad.

Zooming out# Tap with two fingers on the media display or

the touchpad.or# Move two fingers together on the media dis‐

play or on the touchpad.% You can set the unit of measurement of the

map scale (/ page 369).

Moving the mapMultimedia system:4© 5 Navigation

# On the touchscreen: move the finger in anydirection when the map is shown.

# On the touchpad: call up the navigationmenu by pressing.

# Swipe your finger up.# Press the touchpad.

Crosshair1 appears. The map can bemoved.


# Touch the touchpad and move your finger inany direction.The map moves in the opposite directionunder crosshair1.

When the map has been moved the followinginformation appears in the status line, for exam‐ple:R Distance2 from the vehicle's current posi‐

tion is shown.R Information about the current map position

is shown, e.g. the name of the road.

The following functions are available:R Select a destination on the map

(/ page 386).R Select a POI (/ page 383).R Show traffic incidents on the map

(/ page 406).

# To reset the map to the current vehicleposition: select3.

Rotating the map# With two fingers, rotate anti-clockwise or

clockwise on the media display or the touch‐pad.

Selecting the map orientationMultimedia system:4© 5 Navigation 5Z5 Advanced# Select View.# Select Map orientation.# Select an option.

The # dot indicates the current setting.The following options are available:R 2D heading up option: the 2D map view is

aligned to the direction of travel.R 2D north up option: the 2D map view is

displayed so that north is always at thetop.R 3D option: the 3D map view is aligned to

the direction of travel.or

# Using quick-access: repeatedly tap or presson theÄ compass symbol on the map.The view changes in the sequence 3D, 2Dheading up to 2D north up.If the map is moved, it can switch between3D and 2D north up.

Selecting POI symbols for the map displayMultimedia system:4© 5 Navigation 5Z

POIs include restaurants and hotels, for exam‐ple. These can be displayed as symbols on themap. Not all POIs are available everywhere.Personal POIs are destinations which you havesaved on a USB device, for example.% The display of POI symbols on the map can

be activated or deactivated as a favourite.# To switch on/off using quick-access: if

available, switch POI symbols on or off.The POI symbols for the selected categoriesare shown on the map.

or


# To switch on/off in the menu: selectAdvanced.

# Select View.# Select Map elements.# Select POI symbolsr.

The POI SYMBOLS menu is shown.# Switch Display POIs on or off.

Selecting categories# Selectr in the POI SYMBOLS All catego-

ries menu.# Switch Show all on or off.

When the option is switched on, the POI sym‐bols for all categories are shown on the map.

or# Select the categories and sub-categories (if

available)r.# Activate or deactivate the categories.

The POI symbols for the selected categoriesare shown on the map.

Selecting personal POI categories# Selectr in the POI SYMBOLS Personal

POIs menu.# Select a categoryr.# Switch Display on the map on or off.

When the display is switched on and thevehicle approaches a personal POI in thiscategory, a visual and audible notificationcan be issued.

# To set a notification when approaching:select a category or a personal POIV.

# Switch Visual warning and Acoustic notifica-tion on or off.

Switching display of categories for quick-access on/off# Switch a category on or off in the POI SYM-

BOLS menu.

Resetting the POI symbol display# Select POI SYMBOLS Reset POIs in the

menu.The settings are reset to the standard set‐tings.

Selecting the display of text information inthe mapMultimedia system:4© 5 Navigation 5Z5 Advanced# Select View.# Select Text information.# Select an option in the FOOTER category.

The # dot indicates the current setting.The following options are available:R Current street option

The street you are currently on is shown inthe bottom bar.When the map is moved, the street name,the POI name or the area name appearsunder the crosshair.R The Geo-coordinates option shows the fol‐

lowing information in the bottom bar:- longitude and latitude- elevation

The elevation shown may deviate fromthe actual elevation.


R None optionThe media display shows no text informationin the bottom bar.

Switching motorway information on/offMultimedia system:4© 5 Navigation 5Z

# Using quick-access: switch Motorway infor-mation on or off.The display button is activated or off.

or# Using the menu: select Advanced.# Select View.# Select Text information.# Switch Motorway information on or off.

When the display button is switched on, addi‐tional information about the motorway facili‐ties ahead appears during the motorwayjourney. These include car parks, service sta‐tions and motorway exits, for example.

Displaying the next intersecting streetRequirements:R Route guidance is not active.

Multimedia system:4© 5 Navigation 5Z5 Advanced# Select View.# Select Text information.# Activate Next intersecting street.

The display button is activated. If the optionis switched on and the journey continueswithout route guidance, the name of the nextintersecting street will be displayed at theupper edge of the display.

Displaying the map versionMultimedia system:4© 5 Navigation 5Z5 Advanced# Select View.# Select Map version.

The detail information is displayed.% The online map update service from

Mercedes me connect can be used toupdate the map data (/ page 415).

A message is shown in the media displaywhen a new map version is available.

% Information about new versions of the digitalmap can be obtained from a Mercedes-Benzservice centre.

Overview of avoiding an area for the routeYou can define areas along a route that youwould like to avoid.Motorways or multi-lane expressways, which arerouted through an area to be avoided are takeninto account for the route.

Avoiding a new area for the routeMultimedia system:4© 5 Navigation 5Z5 Advanced 5 Route 5 Avoid options5 Avoid areas# Select Avoid new area.# To start in the map: select Using map.# Move the map (/ page 411).# To start via destination search: select Via

address entry.


# Enter the address (/ page 380).# Select the destination in the list or accept

witha.The map appears.

# To show an area: tap or press on the controlelement.A red rectangle appears. This designates thearea that should be avoided.

# To change the map scale: move two fingersapart or together on the media display or onthe touchpad.The map is zoomed in or out.

# To set an area: selecta.The Avoid area has been set. messageappears. The area is entered into the list.

Changing an area to be avoidedMultimedia system:4© 5 Navigation 5Z5 Advanced 5 Route 5 Avoid options5 Avoid areas# Select an area in the list.# Select Edit.

# To move an area on the map: swipe in anydirection on the control element.

# To change the size of the area: tap or presson the control element.

# Swipe up or down on the control element.# Selecta.

The Avoid area has been set. messageappears. The area is entered into the list.

# To take account of an area for the route:select an area from the list.

# Activate Avoid area.The display button is activated.If route guidance is active, a new route is cal‐culated.If there is no route yet, the setting is carriedover to the next route guidance.The route can include an area that is to beavoided in the following cases:R the destination is located in an area that

is to be avoided.R the route includes motorways or multi-

lane expressways which pass through anarea to be avoided.

R there is no sensible alternative route.

Deleting an areaMultimedia system:4© 5 Navigation 5Z5 Advanced 5 Route 5 Avoid options5 Avoid areas# To delete an area: select an area in the list.# Select Delete.# Confirm the prompt with Yes.# To delete all areas: if at least two areas to

avoid are set, select Delete all.# Confirm the prompt with Yes.

Map data update overview

Updating at the Mercedes-Benz servicecentreThe digital maps generated by the map softwarebecome outdated in the same way as conven‐tional road maps. Optimal route guidance canonly be provided by the navigation system inconjunction with the most up-to-date map data.Information about new versions of the digital


map can be obtained from a Mercedes-Benzservice centre.You can have updates to the digital map imple‐mented there.% Additional costs can be incurred in this con‐

nection.

Online map updateThe online map update service from Mercedesme connect can be used to update the mapdata.Requirements:R Mercedes me connect is available.R You have a user account for the Mercedes

me portal.R The service is available.R The service has been activated.

% The online map update service is not availa‐ble in all countries.

The following options are available for theupdate:R For one region (automatic map update)

If the Automatic online updates system set‐ting is switched off (/ page 371), youreceive a message that a map update is avail‐able. You can confirm the message anddownload the map update.R For several or all regions (manual map

update)The map data will first be downloaded onto astorage medium and then updated on themultimedia system.

Further information on online map updates isavailable here:R At any Mercedes-Benz service centreR Under: https://www.mercedes.me

Further information on updates can be found at:https://manuals.daimler.com/baix/cars/connectme/en_GB/index.html.

Overview of map dataYour vehicle is supplied with map data at the fac‐tory. Depending on the country, map data foryour region is either pre-installed or the mapdata is supplied on a data storage medium.

If the map data on your vehicle has been instal‐led at the factory and you wish to reinstall it, youdo not need to enter the activation code.For map data that you have purchased in theform of a data storage medium, you must enterthe accompanying activation code.% If you save the map data on a data storage

medium with the online map update service,no entry is required. The activation code isstored on the data storage medium duringthe downloading process.

Observe the following when entering the activa‐tion code:R The activation code can be used for one vehi‐

cleR The activation code is not transferableR The activation code has six digits

In the event of the following problems, pleasecontact a Mercedes-Benz service centre:R The multimedia system does not accept the

activation codeR You have lost the activation code


Displaying the compassMultimedia system:4© 5 Navigation 5¡ 5 Position# Select Compass.

The compass display shows the followinginformation:R the current direction of travel with bear‐

ing (360° format) and compass directionR longitude and latitude coordinates in

degrees, minutes and secondsR height (rounded)R number of satellites from which a signal

can be received

The information is not available in every country.

Displaying QiblaMultimedia system:4© 5 Navigation 5¡ 5 Position# Select Qibla.

The arrow on the compass shows the direc‐tion to Mecca in relation to the current direc‐tion of travel.

The number of satellites received is shown.% This function is not available in all countries.

Setting the map scale automaticallyMultimedia system:4© 5 Navigation 5Z5 Advanced# Select View.# Select Map orientation.# Activate Auto zoom.

The display button is activated. The mapscale is set automatically depending on yourdriving speed and the type of road.

% The automatically selected map scale can bechanged manually. After a few seconds, thisis automatically reset.

Displaying the satellite mapMultimedia system:4© 5 Navigation 5Z5 Advanced# Select View.# Select Map elements.

# Switch Satellite map on or off.If the display button is activated, satellitemaps are displayed in map scales from 2 km.If the display button is deactivated, satellitemaps are not displayed in map scales from2 km to 20 km.

% The satellite maps for these map scales arenot available in all countries.

Displaying the rangeRequirements:R The multimedia system supports the func‐

tion.

Multimedia system:4© 5 Navigation 5Z5 Advanced# Select View.# Select Map elements.# Activate Range.

The display button is activated.The range on the map is shown with greendisplay for petrol and diesel vehicles.


When the lower reserve capacity is reached thenthe range display on the map is switched off.% The range display on the map is not available

in all countries.

Displaying weather information and othermap contentsRequirements:R Mercedes me connect is available.R You have a user account for the Mercedes

me portal.R The service is available.R The service has been activated.

Multimedia system:4© 5 Navigation 5Z5 Advanced# Select View.# Select Map elements.

# Scroll up and show the ONLINE MAP CON-TENTS category.The available services are displayed. Theservices are provided by Mercedes me con‐nect.

# Switch on a service, e.g. Weather.Current weather information is displayed onthe navigation map, e.g. temperature orcloud cover. The service information is notshown in all map scales, e.g. weather sym‐bols.

Further information about available services andabout displaying information in the map scalescan be found in the Mercedes me Portal:https://me.secure.mercedes-benz.com% Weather information is not available in all

countries.

Showing map view in the multifunction dis‐play of the instrument clusterMultimedia system:4© 5 Navigation 5Z5 Advanced# Select View.

# Select Map orientation.# Scroll up and show the INSTRUMENT CLUS-

TER VIEW category.# To set the map scale automatically: switch

on Auto zoom.The display button is activated. The mapscale is set automatically depending on yourdriving speed and the type of road.

# To select map orientation: select an option.The # dot indicates the current selection.The following options are available:R 2D heading up option: the 2D map view is

aligned to the direction of travel.R 2D north up option: the 2D map view is

displayed so that north is always at thetop.R 3D option: the 3D map view is aligned to

the direction of travel.


Parking service

Notes on the parking service

& WARNING Risk of accident and injurydue to not observing the maximum per‐mitted access height

If the vehicle height exceeds the maximumpermitted access height for multi-storey carparks and underground car parks, the vehicleroof as well as other vehicle parts could bedamaged.There could be a risk of injury to the vehicleoccupants.# Before driving into a multi-storey car

park or underground car park observethe locally signposted access height.

# If the vehicle height, including any addi‐tional equipment, exceeds the maxi‐mum permitted access height, do notdrive into the multi-storey car park orunderground car park.

This service is not available in all countries.

Selecting parking options

* NOTE Before selecting the parkingoption

The data is based on information provided bythe respective service provider.Mercedes Benz accepts no liability for theaccuracy of the information provided relatingto the multi-storey car park/parking area.# Always observe the local Information

and conditions.

Requirements:R The navigation services option is available,

subscribed to and activated in the Mercedesme portal.R The parking service is within the scope of the

navigation service.R Parking is activated (/ page 420).

Multimedia system:4© 5 Navigation# Tap onj in the map.

# Select a parking option.The map shows the parking options in thevicinity.The following information is displayed (ifavailable):R Destination address, distance from cur‐

rent vehicle position and arrival timeR Information on the multi-storey car

park/car parkFor example, opening times, parkingcharges, current occupancy, maximumparking time,maximum access height.The maximum access height shown bythe parking service does not replace theneed for observation of the actual cir‐cumstances.R Available payment options (Mercedes

pay, coins, bank notes, cards)R Details on parking tariffsR Number of available parking spacesR Payment method (e.g. at the parking

machine)R Services/facilities at the parking option


R Telephone number# Calculate the route (/ page 388).The following functions can also be selected (ifavailable):R Search for POIs in the vicinity.R Save the destination.R Place a call at the destination.R Share the destination using NFC or QR code.R Call up the web address.R Show the destination on the map.

Displaying parking options on the mapRequirements:R The navigation services option is available,

subscribed to and activated in the Mercedesme portal.R The parking service is within the scope of the

navigation service.

Multimedia system:4© 5 Navigation 5Z

# Activate Parking.The display button is activated. The parkingoptions within the vicinity of the current vehi‐cle position are shown.

Paying parking chargesRequirements:R The navigation services option is available

and activated in the Mercedes me portal.The parking service is within the scope of thenavigation service.R You have registered with your payment

details for the payment of parking in theMercedes me portal with Mercedes Pay andthe respective contract partner.R Parking is activated (/ page 420).

Multimedia system:4© 5 NavigationThis option is not available in all countries.# Select a parking option on the map.

# If a car park that can be paid for has beenselected, scroll down in the parking details.

# Select Pay.or# Once the vehicle has reached a parking posi‐

tion with payment function and the ignition isswitched off, a message appears.Using this message you can pay from thevehicle and start the payment process.

# To start the payment process: confirm themessage.

# Please note the maximum parking period dis‐played and any existing additional limitations.If required, a message will inform you aboutthe necessity of displaying information con‐firming the online payment for the parkingspace.

# Select Start the payment process.# If required, enter the personalised PIN.# Pressa to confirm.

The successful start of your parking transac‐tion is shown.

# Complete the booking with OK.


# To cancel the booking: select Cancel whenyou receive the confirmation message.Minimum charges may be incurred.

# To end the booking: stop the active transac‐tion via the Mercedes Me app.You receive a summary of the procedure andthe costs.If an active parking procedure for your vehi‐cle is detected when you continue driving, amessage appears asking if you wish to endthis parking procedure.

# Confirm the message.When the parking procedure is stopped suc‐cessfully, another message appears with thedetails about your completed parking proce‐dure.

Dashcam

Notes on the dashcam

* NOTE Before using the dashcam

Before using any or all functions of the Dash‐cam, please read this Disclaimer carefully. Ifyou do not accept, agree to or understandthis Disclaimer, please do not use the Dash‐cam. By using the Dashcam, you are deemedto have accepted and agreed to the contentsof this Disclaimer.As manufacturer of the vehicle, we provideyou with the device and associated softwaresystem of the Dashcam to provide you withthe functionalities that we consider you maywish to have while using the Dashcam. Weare unable to predict or verify whether anyimage(s) or geographic information capturedor recorded during your use of the Dashcamis legitimate. As such, we are unable to takeresponsibility for any adverse consequencesthat may arise from the actual image(s) orgeographic information captured or recordedduring use of the Dashcam.

Warning: please comply with all applicablelaws and regulations when you use the Dash‐cam. For example, please do not capture orrecord image(s) or geographic informationwhich may be considered as state secretsensitive information (e.g. military areas). Incase of any violations of the relevant lawsand regulations, the actual user will be liablefor the corresponding responsibilities and wewill not take responsibility for any misuse ofthe Dashcam.# Observe the country-specific regula‐

tions.

The dashcam is available in the navigation sys‐tem in combination with the augmented realityfunction.

Selecting a USB device for a video recordingwith the dashcamRequirements:R At least one USB device is connected with

the multimedia system (/ page 472).


Multimedia system:4© 5 Mercedes me & Apps5 Dashcam# Select the USB device.

Starting/stopping video recording with thedashcamRequirements:R A USB device is connected with the multime‐

dia system (/ page 472).R The ignition is switched on.

Multimedia system:4© 5 Mercedes me & Apps5 Dashcam# If several USB devices are connected with

the multimedia system, select the USBdevice (/ page 421).

# Select the Individual recording or Looprecording recording mode.If Individual recording is selected and thememory is full the recording stops. An indi‐vidual recording is automatically protectedagainst being overwritten.

If Loop recording has been selected, severalshort video files are recorded. When thememory limit is reached, the oldest video fileis deleted and recording is continued auto‐matically.

# To start: select Start recording.The length of the recording is shown. ThePlease do not remove the storage medium.message appears. The video file is stored onthe USB device.

# To end: select End recording .A report may appear in the following cases:R For the Individual recording recording mode:

the memory is full or there are only a fewminutes recording time available. The videorecording stops or will be stopped immi‐nently.Change the USB device or delete a video file.R If a video recording has started and a

national border is detected, the National bor-der crossed. Please observe the countryspe-cific regulations regarding video recording.message appears.

This function is not available in all countries.R The camera is not functional, the Camera

unavailable message appears.Have the camera checked in a Mercedes-Benz service centre.

Deleting a dashcam video recordingRequirements:R A USB device with video recordings is con‐

nected with the multimedia system(/ page 472).

% You are legally responsible for operation anduse of the dashcam functions. The legalrequirements relating to operation and useof the dashcam can vary depending on thecountry in which the dashcam is operated.Therefore, observe the legal requirements, inparticular the data protection regulations, inyour country.For this reason, before using the dashcaminform yourself about the regulation detailsfor the respective country.

This function is not permitted in all countries.


Multimedia system:4© 5 Mercedes me & Apps5 Dashcam# Select thep symbol.

The RECORDINGS menu appears.# SelectV for a video file.# Select Delete.# Select Yes.# To delete all video files: select Ä.# Select Delete all entries.

Configuring dashcam settingsRequirements:R A USB device is connected with the multime‐


Multimedia system:4© 5 Mercedes me & Apps5 Dashcam# SelectZ.

# To show messages after passing anational border: switch on National borderalert.The display button is activated.A message appears in the following situa‐tions:R A video is being recorded.R The vehicle has passed a national border.

% This function is not available in all countries.# To start automatic video recording: select

Automatic video recording.# Activate Automatic video recording.

The display button is activated. When thevehicle is started, video recording startsautomatically.

% This function is not available in all countries.

TelephoneTelephony

Notes on telephony


If you operate communication equipmentintegrated in the vehicle when driving, youwill be distracted from the traffic situation.This could also cause you to lose control ofthe vehicle.# Only operate this equipment when the





Mobile communications devices distract thedriver from the traffic situation. This couldalso cause the driver to lose control of thevehicle.# As the driver, only operate mobile com‐



You must observe the legal requirements for thecountry in which you are currently driving whenoperating mobile communication equipment inthe vehicle.


If objects in the vehicle interior are stowedincorrectly, they can slide or be thrownaround and hit vehicle occupants. In addi‐tion, cup holders, open stowage spaces andmobile phone receptacles cannot alwaysretain all objects they contain.There is a risk of injury, particularly in theevent of sudden braking or a sudden changein direction.# Always stow objects so that they can‐

not be thrown around in such situa‐tions.




Observe the additional information on stowingmobile communications devices correctly:R Loading the vehicle (/ page 126)R Stowing and securing the mobile phone

(/ page 152)Further information can be obtained from aMercedes-Benz service centre or at: https://www.mercedes-benz-mobile.com/


Telephone menu overview

1 Bluetooth® device name of the currentlyconnected mobile phone/of the mobilephone

2 Bluetooth® device name of the currentlyconnected mobile phone/of the mobilephone (two phone mode)

3 Battery status of the connected mobilephone

4 Signal strength of the mobile phone network5 Options6 Device manager7 Messages8 Numerical pad9 Contact search

Bluetooth® profile overview

Bluetooth® profileof the mobile phone

Function

PBAP (Phone BookAccess Profile)

Contacts are auto‐matically displayed inthe multimedia sys‐tem


Bluetooth® profileof the mobile phone

Function

MAP (MessageAccess Profile)

Message functionscan be used

Telephony operating modes overviewDepending on your equipment, the following tel‐ephony operating modes are available:R A mobile phone is connected to the multime‐

dia system via Bluetooth® (/ page 426).R Two mobile phones are connected with the

multimedia system via Bluetooth® (twophone mode) (/ page 427).- You can use all the functions of the multi‐

media system with the mobile phone inthe foreground.

- You can receive incoming calls and mes‐sages with the mobile phone in the back‐ground.You can interchange the mobile phone inthe foreground and background any time(/ page 427).

% Irrespective of this, Bluetooth® audio func‐tionality can by used with any mobile phone(/ page 472).

Information on telephonyThe following situations can lead to the callbeing disconnected while the vehicle is inmotion:R there is insufficient network coverage in the

areaR you move from one transmission/reception

station to another and no communicationchannels are freeR the SIM card used is not compatible with the

network availableR a mobile phone with "Twincard" is logged into

the network with the second SIM card at thesame time

The multimedia system supports calls in HDVoice® for improved speech quality. A require‐ment for this is that the mobile phone and themobile phone network provider of the personyou are calling support HD Voice® .

Depending on the quality of the connection, thevoice quality may fluctuate.

Connecting a mobile phoneRequirements:R Bluetooth® is activated on the mobile phone

(see the manufacturer's operating instruc‐tions).R Bluetooth® is activated on the multimedia

system (/ page 366).

Multimedia system:4© 5 Phone

Searching for a mobile phone# Selectí.# Select Connect new device.

Connecting a mobile phone (authorisationusing Secure Simple Pairing)# Select a mobile phone.# A code is displayed in the multimedia system

and on the mobile phone.# If the codes match: confirm the code on

the mobile phone.


% For older mobile phone models, enter a oneto sixteen-digit number code on the mobilephone and on the multimedia system forauthorisation.

% Up to 15 mobile phones can be authorisedon the multimedia system.Authorised mobile phones are reconnectedautomatically.

% The connected mobile phone can also beused as Bluetooth® audio equipment(/ page 472).

Connecting a second mobile phone (twophone mode)Requirements:R At least one mobile phone is already connec‐

ted to the multimedia system via Bluetooth®.

Multimedia system:4© 5 Phone# Selectí.# Select Connect new device.# Select the mobile phone.

# Select Device name 1 + Device name 2.The selected mobile phone is connected tothe multimedia system.

Interchanging mobile phones (two phonemode)Multimedia system:4© 5 PhoneBoth mobile phones are shown individually inseparate tabs.# Select the tab with the desired mobile

phone.The mobile phone in the selected tab is themobile phone in the foreground.With the exception of telephone settings, thesubmenus in the telephone menu relate tothe mobile phone in the foreground. In thetelephone settings, settings can be made forboth mobile phones.

Changing the function of a mobile phoneRequirements:R At least one mobile phone is connected to

the multimedia system via Bluetooth®(/ page 426).


Activating a function# Select theí device manager.# Select a grey symbol in the line of a mobile

phone.The corresponding function is activated.

Deactivating a function# Select theí device manager.# One function is active: select the coloured

symbol in the line of a mobile phone.The mobile phone is disconnected from themultimedia system.

# Several functions are active: select a col‐oured symbol in the line of a mobile phone.The corresponding function is deactivated.

Replacing mobile phonesMultimedia system:4© 5 Phone# Selectí.


# No authorised mobile phone available:select Connect new device.

# Select a mobile phone.# Newly authorised mobile phone: confirm

the number code on the mobile phone.

Using in single telephone mode# Select Device name.

A newly authorised mobile phone is connec‐ted in single telephone mode.If the mobile phone has already been author‐ised and connected in single telephonemode, it is connected again in single tele‐phone mode.If a mobile phone has already been author‐ised and connected in two phone mode withanother mobile phone, it will be connected infuture in single telephone mode.

Using in two phone mode# Select Device name 1 + Device name 2.

A newly authorised mobile phone is connec‐ted with the selected mobile phone in twophone mode.

If the mobile phone has already been author‐ised and connected in single telephonemode, it will be connected in future with theselected mobile phone in two phone mode.If the mobile phone was previously connec‐ted with another mobile phone, this connec‐tion is cancelled.

Disconnecting/de-authorising a mobilephoneMultimedia system:4© 5 Phone# Selectí.# Select Ä in the line of the mobile phone.# To disconnect: select Disconnect.

If applicable, the mobile phone will be auto‐matically reconnected when the vehicle isnext started.

# To de-authorise: select Deauthorise.

Information on Near Field Communication(NFC)NFC enables short-range wireless data transferor (re)connection of a mobile phone with themultimedia system.

The following functions are available withouthaving authorised a mobile phone:R Transferring a URL or a contact to be viewed

in the multimedia system (see the manufac‐turer's operating instructions).R Setting up the vehicle's Wi-Fi access data via

the system settings (/ page 368).

Further information can be obtained at: https://www.mercedes-benz-mobile.com/

Using the mobile phone with Near Field Com‐munication (NFC)Requirements:R NFC is activated on the mobile phone (see

the manufacturer's operating instructions)R The mobile phone's screen is switched on

and unlocked (see the manufacturer's oper‐ating instructions)


# To connect a mobile phone: hold the NFCarea of the mobile phone (see manufactur‐er's operating instructions) on mat1 orplace the mobile phone on it.

# Follow the additional prompts on the mediadisplay to connect the mobile phone. Con‐nect the mobile phone in single telephonemode (/ page 426). Connect the mobilephone in two phone mode (/ page 427).

# To replace a mobile phone: hold the NFCarea of the mobile phone (see manufactur‐er's operating instructions) on mat1 orplace the mobile phone on it.

# Follow the additional prompts on the mediadisplay to replace the mobile phone in one ortwo phone mode (/ page 427).

# If required, confirm the prompts on yourmobile phone (see the manufacturer's oper‐ating instructions).

% If your mobile phone supports wirelesscharging, it will be automatically charged viaNFC when it is connected or replaced. Arequirement for this is that the mobile phoneis on the mat (/ page 152).

If you want to charge a mobile phone withoutconnecting it to the multimedia system, lay it onthe mat without beforehand unblocking thescreen.Further information can be found at: https://www.mercedes-benz-mobile.com/

Setting the reception and transmission vol‐umeRequirements:R A mobile phone is connected (/ page 426).

Multimedia system:4© 5 Phone 5 <device name>5Z

This function ensures optimal language quality.% Please note that the respective mobile

phone must be selected for adjustment ofthe reception and transmission volume.

# Select Volume.# Set the reception and transmission volume

using Reception and Transmission.

Further information on the recommended recep‐tion and transmission volume: http://www.mercedes-benz.com/connect

Setting the ringtoneMultimedia system:4© 5 Phone 5 <device name>5Z

# Select Ringtones.# Set the ringtone.


% If the mobile phone supports the transfer ofthe ringtone, you will hear the ringtone ofthe mobile phone instead of that of the vehi‐cle audio system.

Starting/stopping mobile phone voice recog‐nitionRequirements:R The mobile phone in the foreground is con‐

nected with the multimedia system(/ page 426).

Starting mobile phone voice recognition# Press and hold the£ button on the multi‐

function steering wheel for more than onesecond.You can use mobile phone voice recognition.

Stopping mobile phone voice recognition# Press the8 or~ button on the multi‐

function steering wheel.% If a mobile phone is connected via Smart‐

phone Integration, the voice recognition ofthis mobile phone is started or stopped.

Calls

Telephone operationMultimedia system:4© 5 Phone

Making a call by entering the numbers# Select_.# Enter a number.# SelectR.

The call is made.

Accepting a call# SelectR Accept.

Rejecting a call# Selectk Reject.

Ending a call# Selectk.

Activating functions during a callThe following functions are available during acall:k End call

m Microphone off_ Numerical keypad (show to send DTMF

tones)W Add callh Transfer to phone (an active call in hands-

free mode is transferred over to the tele‐phone)

# Select a function.

Conducting calls with several participantsRequirements:R There is an active call (/ page 430).R Another call is being made.

Switching between calls# Select the contact.

The selected call is active. The other call ison hold.

Activating a call on hold# Select the contact of the call on hold.


Conducting a conference call# Selecti Create conferen. call.

The new participant is included in the confer‐ence call.

Ending an active call# Selectk End call.% On some mobile phones, the call on hold is

activated as soon as the active call is ended.

Accepting/rejecting a waiting callRequirements:R There is an active call (/ page 430).

If you receive a call while already in a call, amessage is displayed.Depending on the mobile phone and mobile net‐work operator you will hear a call-waiting sound.In addition, in two phone mode you will hear anacoustic signal when the call goes through to theother (not yet active) mobile phone.# SelectR Accept.

The incoming call is active.

If only one mobile phone is connected withthe multimedia system, the previous call willbe put on hold.If during a call you accept a call with theother mobile phone when in two phone modethen the existing call is ended.

# Selectk Reject.% This function and behaviour depends on your

mobile phone network provider and themobile phone (see the manufacturer's oper‐ating instructions).

Contacts

Information about the contacts menuThe contacts menu contains all contacts fromexisting data sources, e.g. mobile phone or datastorage medium.Depending on the data source, it is possible tosave/load the following number of contacts:R Permanently saved contacts: 3,000 entriesR Contacts loaded from the mobile phone:

5,000 entries per mobile phone

From the contacts menu, you can perform thefollowing actions:R Make a call, for example call a contact

(/ page 433)R Navigation (/ page 385)R Compose messages (/ page 436)R Additional options (/ page 433)

If a mobile phone is connected to the multimediasystem (/ page 426) and automatic calling up(/ page 431) is activated, the mobile phone'scontacts are displayed in the address book.The multimedia system can show suggestionsbased on frequently used contacts as well asincoming and outgoing calls (/ page 349).These are shown at the top of the contact list.

Downloading mobile phone contactsMultimedia system:4© 5 Phone 5 <device name>5Z

# Select Contacts & call list.


Automatically# If the Synchronise contacts automatically

function is not active: activate the functionby pressing once.

Manually# If the Synchronise contacts automatically

function is active: deactivate the function bypressing once.

# Select Synchronise contacts.

You can see from the status of controller to theright of the Synchronise contacts automaticallydisplay text whether the function is active.

Calling up contactsMultimedia system:4© 5 Phone 5g

The following options can be used to search forcontacts:R searching by initialsR searching by nameR searching by phone number

# Enter characters into the search field.# Select the contact.A contact can contain the following details:R phone numbersR navigation addressesR geo-coordinatesR Internet addressR e-mail addressesR voice tag (if set)R relation (if set)

Editing the format of a contact's nameMultimedia system:4© 5 Phone 5Z

# Select General.# Select Name format.The following options are available:R Surname, First nameR Surname First nameR First name Surname# Select an option.

Overview of importing contacts

Contacts from various sources

Source Requirements:

ò USB device The USB device isconnected with theUSB port.

ñ Bluetooth® con‐nection

If the sending ofvCards via Bluetooth®is supported, vCardscan be received onmobile phones or net‐books, for example.

Bluetooth® is activa‐ted in the multimediasystem and on therespective device(see the manufactur‐er's operating instruc‐tions).


Importing contacts into the contacts menuMultimedia system:4© 5 Phone 5Z 5 General5 Import contacts# Select a mobile phone <device name>, from

which the contacts should be imported.# Select an option.

Saving a mobile phone contactMultimedia system:4© 5 Phone 5g

# Selectór in the line of the mobilephone contact.

# Select Ä.# Select Save in vehicle.# Select Yes.

The contact saved in the multimedia systemis identified by theq symbol.

Calling a contactMultimedia system:4© 5 Phone 5g

# Selectª Search contacts.

# Enter characters into the search field.# Select the contact.# Select the telephone number.

The number is dialled.

Selecting further options in the contactsmenuMultimedia system:4© 5 Phone 5g

# Selectr in the line of the contact.# Select Ä.

Depending on the stored data, the followingoptions are available:R Add voice tag/Delete voice tagR Set relation/Remove relationR Send DTMF tones (for a number with DTMF

tones)The function is available when a call is active.

# Select an option.

Selecting options for suggestions in the con‐tacts menuRequirements:R A profile has been created (/ page 344).R The Allow contact suggestions setting is


Multimedia system:4© 5 Phone# Select+ Call list.# SelectV in the line of a suggested con‐

tact.The following options are available:R Save as favourite

The suggestions are saved as globalfavourites and do not appear on the homescreen.R Do not suggest

# Select an option.

Deleting contactsRequirements:R The contacts are saved in the vehicle.


R To delete an individual contact, this has beenimported manually into the vehicle.


Deleting all contacts# SelectZ.# Select General.# Select Delete contacts.# Select an option.

Deleting a contact# Selectg.# Selectr in the line of the contact.# Select Ä.# Select Delete contact.# Select Yes.

Saving a contact as a favouriteMultimedia system:4© 5 Phone 5 f Add favourites# Select a contact.

# Selectr in the line of the contact.# Select the telephone number.

The contact is stored as a favourite in thetelephone menu overview.

Deleting favourites in the telephone menuoverviewMultimedia system:4©

# Select a favourite in the telephone menuoverview (/ page 434).

# Press and hold the favourite.# Select Delete.# Select Yes.

Deleting all favourites# Tap on© in the media display.# Select Phone.# SelectZ.# Select the connected telephone.# Select Contacts & call list.

# Select Delete all favourites.A pop-up window appears: Do you want todelete all favourites?

# Select Yes.

Call list

Overview of the call listDepending on whether your mobile phone sup‐ports the PBAP Bluetooth® profile or not, thiscan have different effects on the presentationand functions of the call list.

If the PBAP Bluetooth® profile is supported, theeffects are as follows:R The call lists from the mobile phone are dis‐

played in the multimedia system.R When connecting the mobile phone, you may

have to confirm the connection for the PBAPBluetooth® profile.


If the PBAP Bluetooth® profile is not supported,the effects are as follows:R The multimedia system generates a call list

independently as soon as calls are made inthe vehicle.R The call list is not synchronised with the call

lists in the mobile phone.

The multimedia system can show suggestionsbased on frequently used contacts as well asincoming and outgoing calls (/ page 349).These are shown at the top of the call list.

Making a call from the call listMultimedia system:4© 5 Phone# Select+ Call list.# Select an entry.

The call is made.

Calling up additional options in the call listMultimedia system:4© 5 Phone# Select+ Call list.

# For previously stored contacts: selectrin the line of an entry.The search results are displayed.

# For contacts who have not been stored:selecti.

Selecting options for suggestions in the calllistRequirements:R A profile has been created (/ page 344).R The Allow contact suggestions setting is


Multimedia system:4© 5 Phone# Select+ Call list.# SelectV in the line of a suggested entry.

The following options are available:R Save as favouriteR Do not suggest

# Select an option.

Deleting the call listMultimedia system:4© 5 Phone 5 <device name>5Z

# Select Contacts & call list.# Select Delete call list.# Select Yes.% This function is only available if your mobile

does not support the PBAP Bluetooth® pro‐file.

Text messages

Overview of message functionsIn the messages menu you can receive and sendtext messages.If the connected mobile phone supports theBluetooth® MAP profile, the message functioncan be used on the multimedia system.You can obtain further information about set‐tings and supported functions of Bluetooth®-capable mobile phones from a Mercedes-Benz


service centre or at: https://www.mercedes-benz-mobile.com/Some mobile phones require further settingsafter being connected to the multimedia system(see manufacturer's operating instructions).

Setting message displaysMultimedia system:4© 5 Phone 5 <device name>5Z

# Select Message display.The following options are available:R All messagesR New and unread messagesR Messages while the vehicle is in motionR Off (the message function is no longer

available.)# Select a setting.

Reading messagesMultimedia system:4© 5 Phone 5 <device name>5l

Using the read-aloud function# Select a contact.# Select¬ to read aloud.

The message is read aloud.

Dictating and sending a new messageRequirements:R There is an Internet connection.

Multimedia system:4© 5 Phone 5 <device name>5l

# Select a new message usingr.

Adding a recipient# Selectf.# Select a contact.

Dictating text# Selectp.

The dictating function is started.# Say the message.

After the voice message has been processed,it is shown as text.

Sending a message# Select Send.% When the vehicle is stationary you can use

the keyboard to write a message. No Inter‐net connection is required to use the key‐board.

Replying to a message in the messaging his‐toryMultimedia system:4© 5 Phone 5 <device name>5l

A message list is shown.# Selectr next to a contact.

The messaging history with this contact isshown.


# Selectp.The dictating function is started.

# Say the message.After the voice message has been processed,it is shown as text.

# Select Send.

Using message templatesMultimedia system:4© 5 Phone 5 <device name>5l

Using a template as a new message# Selectr to write a new message.# Add a recipient usingf.# Select a0 template.

Answering a message with a template# Select a message sequence with a contact.# Select aª template.# Select a0 template.

Forwarding a messageMultimedia system:4© 5 Phone 5 <device name>5l



# Press and hold on a message.# To forward a message: select Forward.

Calling a message senderMultimedia system:4© 5 Phone 5 <device name>5l



# Select Ä.# Select Call.

Using telephone numbers or URLs from atext messageRequirements:R An Internet connection is available to call up

a URL.

Multimedia system:4© 5 Phone 5 <device name>5l



# Select a telephone number or a URL in themessage.If a URL is selected the web browser opens.If a telephone number is selected the follow‐ing options are available:R CallR New message

# Select an option.


Deleting a messageMultimedia system:4© 5 Phone 5 <device name>5l

# Select a contact.# Press and hold on a message.# To delete the message: select Delete.

In-Car Office

In-Car Office functionsUsing In-Car Office, you can connect your onlineservices with the multimedia system.The following functions are available:R Display of the upcoming appointments in the

calendar.R Start navigation to an appointment. It is a

requirement that the appointment contains anavigable destination for the location.R Display the appointment.R Display and selection of tasks and calls to

complete.

% Please note that certain functions are onlyavailable when the vehicle is stationary.

Calling up In-Car OfficeRequirements:R A mobile phone is connected as the main

phone to the multimedia system.R You have a user account in the Mercedes me

portal: https://me.secure.mercedes-benz.comR The In-Car Office service is activated in the

Mercedes me portal.R You have a user account with an online

service, e.g. with Office 365, and have con‐nected this with In-Car Office via theMercedes me portal.

Multimedia system:4© 5 Mercedes me & Apps# Select In-Car Office.

You will see an appointments overview forthe current day.

You can find the following displays in theappointments overview:R All-day appointments: All dayR Appointments with a limited duration, e.g.

four-hour appointment with starting andcompletion time details.

Selecting a calendar entry function in In-CarOfficeMultimedia system:4© 5 Mercedes me & Apps5 In-Car Office 5 Calendar# Select an appointment.

The following functions are available:

Read aloudR CallZ Navigate

Delete# Select a function.


% Some functions are only available whenadditional information about the appoint‐ment is entered. Functions which are notavailable are not shown.The Call function is only available if a num‐ber for the appointment has been saved.The Navigate function is only available, if anavigable location for the appointment hasbeen saved in the associated online account.

Selecting the functions of Tasks & CallsMultimedia system:4© 5 Mercedes me & Apps5 In-Car Office 5 Tasks & calls# Select an entry.

The following functions are available:R Read aloudR Call

This option is only available for tasks if atelephone number has been saved.R Delete

# Select an option.

Marking an entry as completed in Tasks &CallsMultimedia system:4© 5 Mercedes me & Apps5 In-Car Office 5 Tasks & calls# Select the Tasks & calls symbol.

An overview of the tasks and calls appears.# Individual task or call: mark the selected

entry as completed O.

Noting an incoming callWhen you receive an incoming call a promptappears asking whether the call should beaccepted, rejected or noted.# Select Reminder.

The call is declined and added to the In-CarOffice Tasks & calls automatically.

Managing e-mailsMultimedia system:4© 5 Mercedes me & Apps5 In-Car Office 5 E-mail

Showing/reading e-mail# Select an e-mail.

The e-mail is opened.Additional functions are available:R Creating e-mail.(/ page 439)R Answering e-mail (/ page 440)R Forwarding e-mail(/ page 440)

Writing new e-mailRequirements:R A mobile phone with e-mail contacts is

already connected to the multimedia systemvia Bluetooth®.


Multimedia system:4© 5 Mercedes me & Apps5 In-Car Office 5 E-mail

Using the keyboard# SelectW.# Add recipients usingf.# Enter the subject and text of the e-mail in the

corresponding fields with the keypad.# Select Send.

Using the dictation function% The dictation function is not available every‐

where nor without limitation. For initial acti‐vation of the function it may be necessary toselect the terms of use in the Mercedes meportal.

# Selectp.The dictating function is started.

# Dictate the subject and text of the e-mail.After the voice entry has been processed, itis shown as text.

# Select Send.

Using voice control# Use the LINGUATRONIC Write an e-mail voice

command.You are guided by the dialogue.

% Additional information on operation of LIN‐GUATRONIC (/ page 310).

Answering e-mailRequirements:R A mobile phone with e-mail contacts is con‐

nected to the multimedia system via Blue‐tooth®.


Using the keyboard# Select an e-mail.# Select Reply.# Enter the e-mail text in the corresponding

field.# Select Send.

Using the dictation function% The dictation function is not available every‐

where nor without limitation. For initial acti‐vation of the function it may be necessary toselect the terms of use in the Mercedes meportal.

# Select an e-mail.# Select Reply.# Selectp.

The dictating function is started.# Dictate the text of the e-mail.

After the voice entry has been processed, itis shown as text.

# Select Send.

Using voice control# Use the LINGUATRONIC Answer e-mail voice

command.You are guided by the dialogue.

% Additional information on operation of LIN‐GUATRONIC (/ page 310).

Forwarding e-mailRequirements:


R A mobile phone with e-mail contacts is con‐nected to the multimedia system via Blue‐tooth®.


Using the keyboard# Select an e-mail.# Select Forward.# To forward with attachment: select

Forward with attachment.# To forward without attachment: select

Forward without attachment.# Enter the e-mail text in the corresponding

field using the keypad.# Select Send.

Mercedes-Benz link

Overview of Mercedes-Benz Link





You must observe the legal requirements for thecountry in which you are currently driving whenoperating the multimedia system.With Mercedes-Benz Link you can use mobilephone functions via the multimedia system. It isoperated using the touchscreen or the voice-

operated control system. You can activate thevoice-operated control system by pressing andholding the£ button on the multifunctionsteering wheel.When using Mercedes-Benz Link via the voice-operated control system, the multimedia systemcan still be operated via LINGUATRONIC(/ page 310).The Mercedes-Benz Link control box supplemen‐tary equipment is required for this. This is availa‐ble at a Mercedes-Benz service centre.Only one mobile phone at a time can be connec‐ted via Mercedes-Benz Link to the multimediasystem.When a mobile phone is connected withMercedes-Benz Link, only one additional mobilephone can be connected using Bluetooth® withthe multimedia system when in two phonemode.% The Mercedes-Benz Link control box uses

the Android operating system.% The service provider is responsible for these

apps and the services and content connec‐ted to it.


Notes on Mercedes-Benz LinkIf a mobile phone is used with Mercedes-BenzLink, USB access using the media menu is possi‐ble for this mobile phone.% Only one route guidance can be active at a

time. If route guidance is active on the multi‐media system, it is closed when route guid‐ance is started on the mobile phone.

Connecting Mercedes-Benz Link with themultimedia systemRequirements:R The vehicle is fitted with the Mercedes-Benz

Link control box.R The Mercedes-Benz Link app is installed on

the mobile phone.R The mobile phone is switched on.R Mercedes-Benz Link is connected to the mul‐

timedia system via theç USB port usinga suitable cable (/ page 472).

% The first activation of Mercedes-Benz Linkon the multimedia system must be carriedout when the vehicle is stationary for safetyreasons.

Multimedia system:4© 5 Mercedes me & Apps5 Smartphone 5 Mercedes-Benz Link5 Start Mercedes-Benz Link

Accepting/rejecting the data protection reg‐ulationsFor the initial start of the application: a messagewith the data protection provisions appears.# Select Accept & start.

Quitting Mercedes-Benz Link# Press theò button.% Mercedes-Benz Link starts automatically

when it is connected with the system using acable. If Mercedes-Benz Link was not dis‐played in the foreground before disconnect‐ing, the application starts in the backgroundwhen reconnected. You can call upMercedes-Benz Link using the main menu.

You can find more information in the Mercedes-Benz Link control box operating instructions.

Calling up Mercedes-Benz Link sound set‐tingsMultimedia system:4© 5 Mercedes me & Apps5 Smartphone 5 Mercedes-Benz Link5Z

# Select sound settings.

Ending Mercedes-Benz Link# Disconnect the connecting cable between

Mercedes-Benz Link and the multimedia sys‐tem.

% Mercedes-Benz recommends disconnectingthe connecting cable only when the vehicleis stationary.


Apple CarPlay®

Overview of Apple CarPlay®





You must observe the legal requirements for thecountry in which you are currently driving whenoperating the multimedia system.iPhone® functions can be used via the multime‐dia system using Apple CarPlay®. They are oper‐ated using the touchscreen, touchpad, Touch

Control or the Siri® voice-operated control sys‐tem. You can activate the voice-operated controlsystem by pressing and holding the£ buttonon the multifunction steering wheel.

When using Apple CarPlay® via the voice-oper‐ated control system, the multimedia system canstill be operated via LINGUATRONIC(/ page 310).

Only one iPhone® at a time can be connected viaApple CarPlay® with the multimedia system.

Also for use of Apple CarPlay® with two phonemode, only one additional mobile phone can beconnected using Bluetooth® with the multimediasystem.

The availability of Apple CarPlay® may varyaccording to the country.The service provider is responsible for this appli‐cation and the services and content connectedto it.

Apple CarPlay® is a registered trademark ofApple Inc.

Information on Apple CarPlay®

When Apple CarPlay® is being used, the iPod®media source is not available for the respectiveiPhone®.Only one route guidance can be active at a time.If route guidance is active on the multimedia sys‐tem, it is closed when route guidance is startedon the mobile phone.

Connecting an iPhone® via Apple CarPlay®(cable)Requirements:R The current version of your device's operat‐

ing system is being used (see the manufac‐turer's operating instructions).R There is an Internet connection for the full

range of functions for Apple CarPlay®.R The iPhone® is connected to the multimedia

system via the USB portç using a suita‐ble cable (/ page 472).


Multimedia system:4© 5 Mercedes me & Apps5 Smartphone 5 Apple CarPlay5 Start Apple CarPlay# Alternative: If an Apple CarPlay® application

is active (e.g. when music is being played orroute guidance is active), you can call up theactive application using the|,z or% application buttons (/ page 342).

% Control using the application buttons can beswitched on or off (/ page 444).


Exiting Apple CarPlay®

# Press theò button.% Apple CarPlay® starts automatically when

the iPhone® is connected with the systemusing a cable. If Apple CarPlay® was not dis‐played in the foreground before disconnect‐

ing, the application starts in the backgroundwhen reconnected. You can call up AppleCarPlay® in the main menu.

Calling up Apple CarPlay® tone settingsMultimedia system:4© 5 Mercedes me & Apps5 Smartphone 5 Apple CarPlay 5Z


Setting control of the application buttons(Apple CarPlay®)Multimedia system:4© 5 Mercedes me & Apps5 Smartphone 5 Apple CarPlay 5Z5 General# To switch on Control via application buttons:

activate the display button.# To switch off Control via application buttons:

deactivate the display button.

Ending Apple CarPlay®# To end the connection of Apple Car‐

Play®(with cable): disconnect the connec‐

tion via the connecting cable between themobile phone and multimedia system.


Android Auto

Android Auto overview






You must observe the legal requirements for thecountry in which you are currently driving whenoperating the multimedia system.Mobile phone functions can be used withAndroid Auto using the Android operating sys‐tem on the multimedia system. It is operatedusing the touchscreen or the voice-operatedcontrol system. You can activate the voice-oper‐ated control system by pressing and holding the£ button on the multifunction steering wheel.When using Android Auto via the voice-operatedcontrol system, the multimedia system can stillbe operated via LINGUATRONIC (/ page 310).Only one mobile phone at a time can be connec‐ted via Android Auto with the multimedia sys‐tem.Also for use of Android Auto with two phonemode, only one additional mobile phone can beconnected using Bluetooth® with the multimediasystem.The availability of Android Auto and Android Autoapps may vary according to the country.

The service provider is responsible for this appli‐cation and the services and content connectedto it.

Information on Android AutoIf a mobile phone is used with Android Auto,USB access using the media menu is not possi‐ble for this mobile phone.Only one route guidance can be active at a time.If route guidance is active on the multimedia sys‐tem, it is closed when route guidance is startedon the mobile phone.

Connecting a mobile phone via Android Auto(wired)Requirements:R The mobile phone supports Android Auto

from Android 5.0.R The Android Auto app is installed on the

mobile phone.R In order to use the telephone functions, the

mobile phone must be connected to the mul‐timedia system via Bluetooth®(/ page 426).

If there was no prior Internet connection, thisis established with the use of the mobilephone with Android Auto.R The mobile phone is connected to the multi‐

media system via the USB portç using asuitable cable (/ page 472).R There is an Internet connection for the full

range of functions for Android Auto.

Multimedia system:4© 5 Mercedes me & Apps5 Smartphone 5 Android Auto5 Start Android Auto# Alternative: If an Android Auto application is

active (e.g. when music is being played orroute guidance is active), you can call up theactive application using the|,z or% application buttons (/ page 342).

% Control using the application buttons can beswitched on or off (/ page 446).

% The first activation of Android Auto on themultimedia system must be carried outwhen the vehicle is stationary for safety rea‐sons.



Exiting Android Auto# Press theò button.% Android Auto starts automatically when the

mobile phone is connected with the systemusing a cable. If Android Auto was not dis‐played in the foreground before disconnect‐ing, the application starts in the backgroundwhen reconnected. You can call up AndroidAuto in the main menu.

Calling up the Android Auto sound settingsMultimedia system:4© 5 Mercedes me & Apps5 Smartphone 5 Android Auto 5Z


Setting control of the application buttons(Android Auto)Multimedia system:4© 5 Mercedes me & Apps5 Smartphone 5 Android Auto 5Z5 General# To switch on Control via application buttons:

activate the display button.# To switch off Control via application buttons:

deactivate the display button.

Ending Android Auto# To end the connection of Android Auto

(with cable): disconnect the connection viathe connecting cable between the mobilephone and multimedia system.


Transferred vehicle data with Android Autoand Apple CarPlay®

Overview of transferred vehicle dataWhen using Android Auto or Apple CarPlay®, cer‐tain vehicle data is transferred to the mobilephone. This enables you to get the best out ofselected mobile phone services. Vehicle data isnot directly accessible.The following system information is transmitted:R Software release of the multimedia systemR System ID (anonymised)

The transfer of this data is used to optimisecommunication between the vehicle and themobile phone.To do this, and to assign several vehicles to themobile phone, a vehicle identifier is randomlygenerated.This has no connection to the vehicle identifica‐tion number (VIN) and is deleted when the multi‐media system is reset (/ page 372).The following driving status data is transmitted:R Transmission position engaged


R Distinction between parked, standstill, rollingand drivingR Day/night mode of the instrument cluster

The transfer of this data is used to alter howcontent is displayed to correspond to the drivingsituation.The following position data is transmitted:R CoordinatesR SpeedR Compass directionR Acceleration direction

This data is only transferred while the navigationsystem is active, in order to improve it (e.g. so itcan continue functioning when in a tunnel).

Mercedes me calls

Making a call via the overhead control panel% Mercedes me calls are not possible in every

country. Find out at a Mercedes-Benzservice centre if these functions are availa‐ble in your country.

1 me button for service, concierge or informa‐tion calls

2 SOS button cover3 SOS button (emergency call system)

# To make a Mercedes me call: press mebutton1.

# To make an emergency call: press SOSbutton cover2 briefly to open.

# Press and hold SOS button3 for at leastone second.

If a Mercedes me call is active, an emergencycall can still be triggered. This has priority overall other active calls.

Information about the Mercedes me callusing the me buttonA call to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Centrehas been initiated via the me button in the over‐head control panel or the multimedia system(/ page 447).Using the voice dialogue system you access thedesired service:R Concierge Service (if the service is activated)R Accident and breakdown management

(/ page 450)R Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre for general

information about the vehicle

You can find information on the following topics:R Activation of Mercedes me connectR Operating the vehicleR Nearest Mercedes-Benz service centre


R Other products and services from Mercedes-Benz

Data is transferred during the connection to theMercedes-Benz Customer Centre (/ page 449).

Calling the Mercedes-Benz Customer Centreusing the multimedia systemRequirements:R Access to a GSM network is available.R The contract partner's GSM network cover‐

age is available in the respective region.R The ignition must be switched on so that

vehicle data can be transferred automati‐cally.

Multimedia system:4© 5 Phone 5g

# Call Mercedes me connect.After confirmation, the multimedia systemsends the required vehicle data. The datatransfer is shown in the media display.

Then, you can select a service and be connectedto a specialist at the Mercedes-Benz CustomerCentre.

Further information on Mercedes me connect,the provided service scope and operation areavailable at: http://manuals.daimler.com/baix/cars/connectme/en_GB/index.html

Arranging a service appointment via aMercedes me callIf you have activated the maintenance manage‐ment service, relevant vehicle data is transferredautomatically to the Mercedes-Benz CustomerCentre. You will then receive individual recom‐mendations regarding the maintenance of yourvehicle.Regardless of whether you have consented tothe maintenance management service, the multi‐media system reminds you after a certainamount of time that a service is due. A promptappears asking if you would like to make anappointment.# To arrange a service appointment: select

Call.After your agreement the vehicle data is sentand a Mercedes-Benz Customer Centreemployee deals with your appointment. The

information is then sent to your desiredservice outlet.This will contact you to confirm the appoint‐ment and if necessary consult about thedetails.

% If you select Later after the service messageappears, the message is hidden and reap‐pears after a certain period of time.

Giving consent to data transfer during aMercedes me callRequirements:R There is an active Mercedes me call via the

multimedia system or the me button in theoverhead control panel .

% The prompt to confirm data transfer doesnot appear in all countries.

If the accident and breakdown service andMercedes me connect Concierge Service are notactivated on Mercedes me, the Do you want totransmit vehicle data and the vehicle's positionto the Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre in orderto improve the processing of your request? mes‐sage appears.


# Select Yes.Relevant identification data is transmittedautomatically.

More information on Mercedes me: http://www.mercedes.me

Transferred data during a Mercedes me callThe data transferred during a Mercedes me calldepends on which service is selected in thevoice control system and whether Mercedes meconnect services are activated.If no Mercedes me connect services are activa‐ted and the data protection prompt has beenconfirmed the following data is transmitted:R Vehicle identification numberR Mercedes me customer identification num‐

berR Reason for the initiation of the callR Language set in the multimedia systemR Confirmation of the data protection prompt

If a call is made for a service appointment viathe service reminder, the following data may betransmitted:R Current mileage and maintenance data

Transfer is possible assuming the requireddata transfer technology is supported by themobile service operator and the quality ofthe mobile connection is sufficient.

If Accident and Breakdown Management iscalled via the voice control system and noservice has been activated, but the data protec‐tion query has been confirmed, the followingdata can also be called up from the vehicle bythe Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre:R Current vehicle location

% At the time of going to press, this function istechnically not yet available but can be sup‐ported in the future.

If the data protection prompt has been rejectedthe following data is transmitted:R Reason for the initiation of the callR Rejection of the data protection prompt

Mercedes me connect

Notes on Mercedes me connect% Mercedes me connect is not available in

every country. Find out at a Mercedes-Benzservice centre if these functions are availa‐ble in your country.

Mercedes me connect consists of multiple serv‐ices.Depending on whether the services are activatedand on the vehicle equipment, you can use thefollowing services via the multimedia system andthe overhead control panel, for example:R Accident and breakdown management (me

button)R If the service is activated: Concierge Service

(me button)R Mercedes-Benz emergency call system (auto‐

matic emergency call or SOS button)

Mercedes me connect accident and breakdownmanagement, the Mercedes me connect Con‐cierge Service (if service is activated) and theMercedes-Benz emergency call centre are availa‐ble for you around the clock.


The me button and the SOS button can be foundon the vehicle's overhead control panel(/ page 447).You can also call the Mercedes-Benz CustomerCentre using the multimedia system(/ page 448).Please note that Mercedes me connect is aMercedes-Benz service. In emergencies, alwayscall the national emergency services first usingthe standard national emergency service phonenumbers. In emergencies, you can also use theMercedes-Benz emergency call system(/ page 453).Observe the conditions of use for Mercedes meconnect and other services. These can beobtained in the Mercedes me portal: https://me.secure.mercedes-benz.comFurther information on Mercedes me connect,the provided service scope and operation:http://manuals.daimler.com/baix/cars/connectme/en_GB/index.html

Information on Mercedes me connect acci‐dent and breakdown managementThe accident and breakdown management caninclude the following functions:R Supplement to the Mercedes-Benz emer‐

gency call system (/ page 453)If necessary, the contact person at theMercedes-Benz emergency call centre for‐wards the call to Mercedes me connectbreakdown and accident management. For‐warding the call is however not possible in allcountries.R Breakdown assistance by a mechanic on

location and/or the towing away of the vehi‐cle to the nearest Mercedes-Benz servicecentreYou may be charged for these services.

More information about Mercedes me connectservices can be obtained in the Mercedes meportal: https://me.secure.mercedes-benz.com

Data transferred during Mercedes me con‐nect call servicesThe data transferred during a Mercedes me con‐nect call depends on the reason the call was ini‐tiated, which service is selected in the voicecontrol system and which Mercedes me connectservices are activated.Which data is transferred for the services can betaken from the currently valid terms of use.These can be obtained in the Mercedes me por‐tal: https://me.secure.mercedes-benz.com

Mercedes me and apps

Information about Mercedes meWhen you log in with a user account to theMercedes me portal, then services and offersfrom Mercedes-Benz will be available to you.Availability is country-dependent.For more information consult a Mercedes-Benzservice centre or visit the Mercedes me portal:http://me.secure.mercedes-benz.com% Make sure you always keep the Mercedes

me apps updated.


Calling up the Mercedes me user accountMultimedia system:4© 5 Mercedes me & Apps

Your vehicle is connected with a useraccount# Select Mercedes me.

Information about the connected useraccount appears.

Your vehicle is not yet connected with a useraccount# Select Mercedes me.# The instructions for creating a user account

and connecting the vehicle with this followon the media display.

% If the Mercedes me app is available on amobile phone, the vehicle connection can beaccomplished using the QR code shown.

Calling up the Mercedes me servicesRequirements:R The vehicle is connected with the user

account.

Multimedia system:4© 5 Mercedes me & Apps# Select Services.

Within the various categories you can see theMercedes me services you have already pur‐chased and also those still available to pur‐chase.To activate or deactivate the services, log into your user account in the Mercedes meportal.

Deleting a connection between a useraccount and the vehicleRequirements:R The (vehicle) profile of the user account that

was first connected with the vehicle is selec‐ted.R The profile is synchronised (/ page 345).R A PIN has been set.

Multimedia system:4© 5 Mercedes me & Apps5 Mercedes me# Select Delete vehicle assignment.

# Enter the PIN of the connected user account.% Only the user, whose user account was first

connected with the vehicle can delete theconnection between all user accounts andthe vehicle.

Mercedes-Benz emergency call system

Information on available emergency call sys‐temsTwo types of emergency call system are availa‐ble to you in the vehicle:R Mercedes-Benz emergency call systemR 112 emergency call system (EU eCall)

The following applies for both emergency callsystems:R The transfer of specific data is required for

the intended function of both emergency callsystems. This will be explained in the "Datatransfer" section (/ page 455).R Both emergency call systems are included as

standard equipment in your vehicle and areactivated at the factory.


R The use of both emergency call systems isexempt from charges.R Both emergency call systems only function in

areas in which the wireless service providersoffer mobile phone coverage.

For both systems, insufficient network cover‐age from the wireless service providers canresult in an emergency call not being trans‐mitted.

Differences between the Mercedes-Benz emergency call system and 112 emergency call system (EU eCall)

Mercedes-Benz emergency call system 112 emergency call system (EU eCall)

R The Mercedes-Benz emergency call system is permanently logged in tothe mobile phone network.R Automatic and manual Mercedes-Benz emergency calls are transmit‐

ted to a Mercedes-Benz emergency call centre.In the event that the emergency call centre of the Mercedes-Benzemergency call system cannot be reached (e.g. due to a lack of net‐work coverage), the 112 emergency call is carried out automatically.

R If you decide on the 112 emergency call system (EU eCall), then thesystem only logs in to the mobile phone network after the triggering ofa manual or automatic emergency call.R The 112 emergency call system (EU eCall) transmits automatic and

manual emergency calls directly to public coordination centres.

% The 112 emergency call system (EU eCall) inyour vehicle meets the delegated regulationEU 2017/79. Proper and full functionality ofthe 112 emergency call system (EU eCall)depends on circumstances beyond the influ‐ence of Daimler AG. This includes mobile

network coverage and the technical infra‐structure of the public reception centres inthe respective countries.

% Please observe that in the event of a repairgenuine Mercedes-Benz batteries must beused which have been certified pursuant to

the delegated regulation EU 2017/79(Appendix I). Other manufacturers are alsopermitted provided their batteries are certi‐fied according to the delegated regulationEU 2017/79.


You can find more information on the regionalavailability of the Mercedes-Benz emergency callsystem at: https://www.mercedes-benz-mobile.com/extra/ecall/There is the option of deactivating theMercedes-Benz emergency call system andusing only the 112 emergency call system (EUeCall). Contact address for carrying out deacti‐vation of the Mercedes-Benz emergency call sys‐tem are the local dealers.Mercedes-Benz recommends the activation ofthe Mercedes-Benz emergency call system forthe following reasons:R In emergency situations when abroad, you

can also get support in a language youspeak.R Several transmission technologies are used

to accelerate the transfer of the accidentdata and improve reliability of the transmis‐sion.R The Mercedes-Benz emergency call system is

permanently logged in to the mobile phonenetwork, which ensures faster placement of

the emergency call and faster transfer of theaccident data.Measures for rescue, recovery or towingaway can then be initiated in quickly.R With a Mercedes-Benz emergency call, the

accident data is only transferred to the pub‐lic coordination centre with the approval ofthe customer.In the event of an automatically triggeredemergency call in which there is no voicecontact, the accident data is transmittedimmediately to the public emergency callcentre.R Should the Mercedes-Benz emergency call

centre not be available, the 112 emergencycall is carried out automatically.

Overview of emergency call systemsBoth the Mercedes-Benz emergency call systemas well as the 112 emergency call system (EUeCall) can help to reduce the time between anaccident and the arrival of emergency servicesat the site of the accident. They help locate anaccident site in places that are difficult toaccess.

Both emergency call systems can initiate anemergency call automatically (/ page 454) ormanually .Only make emergency calls if you or others arein need of rescue. Do not make an emergencycall in the event of a breakdown or a similar sit‐uation.

Messages on the displayThe following messages appear in the media dis‐play of both emergency call systems:R SOS NOT READY: the ignition is not on or

there is a malfunction with the emergencycall system. This does not necessarily indi‐cate complete failure of the emergency callsystem. Emergency calls call still be trans‐mitted.The display only refers to the vehicle anddoes not take account of the availability ofmobile phone networks and the Mercedes-Benz emergency call centre.The functional readiness of the emergencycall system on the vehicle can be seen when


the SOS NOT READY display disappears oncethe ignition is switched on.R G: The icon appears in the display during

an active emergency call.

% If there is a malfunction in the emergencycall system (e.g. a fault with the speaker,microphone, airbag, SOS button), a corre‐sponding message appears in the multifunc‐tion display of the instrument cluster.

Triggering an automatic emergency callRequirements:R The ignition is switched on.R The starter battery is sufficiently charged.

Both the Mercedes-Benz emergency call systemas well as the 112 emergency call system (EUeCall) automatically initiate an emergency call inthe following situations:R After activation of the restraint systems such

as airbags or seat belt tensioners after anaccident.R After an automatically initiated emergency

stop by Active Emergency Stop Assist.

The emergency call has been made:R A voice connection is established with the

emergency call centre.R A message with accident data is transmitted

to the emergency call centre.

The SOS button in the overhead control panelflashes until the emergency call is finished.If no connection can be made to the publicemergency services, a corresponding messageappears in the display.# Dial the 112 emergency number or an appro‐

priate local emergency call number on yourmobile phone.

If an emergency call has been initiated:R Remain in the vehicle if the road and traffic

conditions permit you to do so until a voiceconnection is established with the emer‐gency call centre.R On the basis of the call, the emergency call

centre decides whether it is necessary to callrescue teams and/or the police to the acci‐dent site.

R If no vehicle occupant answers, an ambu‐lance is sent to the vehicle immediately.

Triggering a manual emergency call# To use the SOS button in the overhead

control panel: press the SOS button at leastone second long (/ page 447).

# To use voice control: use the LINGUA‐TRONIC voice commands (/ page 319).

The emergency call has been made:R A voice connection is established with an

emergency call centre.R Remain in the vehicle if the road and traffic

conditions permit you to do so until a voiceconnection is established with the emer‐gency call centre.R On the basis of the call, the emergency call

centre decides whether it is necessary to callrescue teams and the police to the accidentsite.R A message with accident data is transmitted

to the emergency call centre.


If no connection can be made to the publicemergency services, a corresponding messageappears in the media display.# Dial the 112 emergency number or an appro‐

priate local emergency call number on yourmobile phone.

Emergency call system data transmissionFor both the Mercedes-Benz emergency call sys‐tem as well as the 112 emergency call system(EU eCall) data is transferred to the Mercedes-Benz emergency call centre or the public emer‐gency call centre.

Depending on the emergency call system activa‐ted (/ page 451) different data is transmittedto the appropriate emergency call centre.


Transferred data according to activated emergency call system:

Mercedes-Benz emergency call 112 emergency call

R GPS position data of the vehicleR GPS position data on the route (a few hundred metres before the acci‐

dent)R Direction of travelR Vehicle identification numberR Drive type of the vehicle (e.g. petrol, diesel, CNG, LPG, electric or

hydrogen)R Number of people determined to be in the vehicleR Whether the emergency call was initiated manually or automaticallyR Time of the accidentR Language setting on the multimedia systemR Whether Mercedes me connect is available or not

This is a requirement for the option of forwarding the call to theMercedes-Benz Customer Centre if necessary.

R Vehicle's GPS position dataR GPS position data on the route (a few hundred metres before the acci‐

dent)R Direction of travelR Vehicle identification numberR Drive type of the vehicle (e.g. petrol, diesel, CNG, LPG, electric or

hydrogen)R Number of people determined to be in the vehicleR Whether the emergency call was initiated manually or automaticallyR Time of the accident

% If only the 112 emergency call system (EUeCall) is activated in the vehicle, the acci‐dent data is transmitted directly to the pub‐lic emergency call centre.


For accident clarification purposes, the followingmeasures can be taken up to an hour after theemergency call has been initiated:R The current vehicle position can be called up.R A voice connection to the vehicle occupants

can be established.R Emergency call data as described above can

be called up.

% For Russia: various functions, e.g. receivingtraffic information, cannot be performed forup to two hours after sending an emergencycall.

Function of the emergency call system self-diagnosis (Russia)Your car verifies the operability of the emer‐gency call system each time the ignition is ON.In case of system failure, you will be informedwith text message on the instrument cluster andwith red indicator SOS NOT READY on the mediadisplay.Please, make sure, that during 30 seconds afterswitching ignition ON the red indicator SOSNOT READY in the upper right corner of the

media display is switched OFF, this means theemergency call system passed diagnostics suc‐cessfully. If necessary, switch ON the media dis‐play, if it was switched OFF before.

Starting/ending ERA-GLONASS test mode(Russia)Requirements:R The starter battery is sufficiently charged.R The ignition is switched on.R The vehicle has been stationary for at least

one minute.

# To start the test mode: press and hold the~ button on the multifunction steeringwheel for at least five seconds.The test mode is started and automaticallyends after the language test has been per‐formed.

# To end the test mode manually: switch offthe ignition.The test mode is ended.

Information on data processing

Processing of personal data via theMercedes-Benz emergency call systemAll processing of personal data via theMercedes-Benz emergency call system corre‐sponds with the specifications in the EU Regula‐tion 2016/679 "on the protection of individualswith regard to the processing of personal data(GDPR)".The data is solely used by the Mercedes-Benzemergency call system for rescue and recoveryin the event of an accident.The owner of a vehicle, that is equipped with aMercedes-Benz emergency call system in addi‐tion to the 112 emergency call system (EU eCall),has the right to use the 112 emergency call sys‐tem instead of the Mercedes-Benz emergencycall system.Contact address for carrying out deactivation ofthe Mercedes-Benz emergency call system arethe local dealers.


Processing of personal data via the 112emergency call system (EU eCall)All processing of personal data via the 112 emer‐gency call system (EU eCall) corresponds withthe specifications in the EU Regulation2016/679 "on the protection of individuals withregard to the processing of personal data(GDPR)" and is based particularly on the neces‐sity of upholding the vital interests of the affec‐ted person in accordance with Article 6, Clause1, Letter d of the GDPR.The processing of this type of data is strictlylimited to the purpose of operating the emer‐gency calls to the standard European emergencycall number 112.

Data recipientThe recipients of data that is processed usingthe 112 emergency call system (EU eCall) are therelevant emergency call inquiry terminals thatare specified to first receive and handle emer‐gency calls to the standard European emergencycall number 112 by the respective countryauthorities in whose territory you are located.

Arrangements for data processingBoth emergency call systems are designed sothat the following requirements are fulfilled:R The data contained in the system memory is

not accessible outside the system prior tothe initiation of an emergency call.R Both emergency call systems cannot be

traced and there is no continuous tracking innormal operation.R The data in the system's internal memory is

automatically and continuously deleted.R The location data of the vehicle is continu‐

ously overwritten in the system's internalmemory, so that no more than the last threecurrent locations required for the normalfunction of the system are available.R The record of the activity data of both emer‐

gency call systems is only kept for as long asis required to fulfil the purpose of handlingthe emergency call, and under no circum‐stances for more than 13 hours after thetime that an emergency call is initiated.

Rights of persons affected by the data pro‐cessingThe person affected by the data processing (thevehicle owner) has the right to access the dataand if applicable can demand the correction,deletion or barring of data that affects him orher and that the processing of which does notcorrespond with the GDPR regulations. Each cor‐rection, deletion or barring carried out accordingto this regulation must be shared with the thirdparty to which the data has been transmitted,provided this does not prove to be infeasible anddoes not incur disproportionate expenditure.The person affected by the data processing hasthe right to complain to the appropriate dataprotection authority should they be of the opin‐ion that their rights have been infringed by theprocessing of their personal data.Responsible contact point for the processing ofaccess rights: Authorised company representa‐tive for data protection, Daimler AG, HPC G353,D-70546 Stuttgart, Germany


Online and Internet functionsInternet connection

Information on connecting to the Internet







Mobile communications devices distract thedriver from the traffic situation. This couldalso cause the driver to lose control of thevehicle.# As the driver, only operate mobile com‐



You must observe the legal requirements for thecountry in which you are currently driving whenoperating mobile communication equipment inthe vehicle.

Depending on the vehicle's equipment, you canestablish an Internet connection in the followingways:R Vehicles with a communication module:

Internet use including Mercedes me connectservices and data roaming (/ page 459).R Vehicles without a communication mod‐

ule:- via Wi-Fi with a data-enabled mobile

phone (/ page 460)- via Bluetooth® with a data-enabled

mobile phone (/ page 460)R via car telephony

The Internet functions can only be used to a limi‐ted degree whilst driving.

Function of the communication moduleOn vehicles with a built-in communication mod‐ule, the Internet connection is established via anintegrated SIM card.


To use Internet access via the communicationmodule the following conditions must be met:R Mercedes me connect is active and ready for

operation.R Mercedes me connect is activated for Inter‐

net access.R In some countries: data volume via Mercedes

me connect is available.

In some countries: if the data volume limit isreached, the availability of Mercedes me con‐nect services is limited. The data volume mustbe purchased via Mercedes me connect.% Contact a Mercedes-Benz service centre to

find out whether it is possible to purchasedata volume in your country.

Setting up an Internet connection via Wi-FiRequirements:R the Wi-Fi function is activated on the multi‐

media system (/ page 366).R the Wi-Fi function is activated on the mobile

phone (see the manufacturer's operatinginstructions).

R Internet access via Wi-Fi is activated (see themanufacturer's operating instructions).

The Internet connection via Wi-Fi is restricted ordoes not function if:R the mobile phone is switched offR mobile data use is deactivated on the mobile

phoneR the Wi-Fi function is deactivated on the multi‐

media systemR the Wi-Fi function is deactivated on the

mobile phoneR Internet access via Wi-Fi is deactivated on

the mobile phone

Multimedia system:4© 5 Settings 5 System5 Wi-Fi & Bluetooth 5 Internet settings5 Connect via Wi-Fi# Select the network.# Log in to the Wi-Fi network (/ page 366).

Setting up an Internet connection via Blue‐tooth®Requirements:R The mobile phone supports the Bluetooth®

profile PAN (Personal Area Network).R The mobile phone is connected to the multi‐

media system via Bluetooth® (/ page 426).If a mobile phone is connected to the multi‐media system for the first time via Blue‐tooth®, you will be assisted through the proc‐ess of setting up an Internet connection.The Internet connection can also be config‐ured manually.

Multimedia system:4© 5 Settings 5 System5 Wi-Fi & Bluetooth 5 Internet settings5 Connect via Bluetooth# Select the mobile phone.

The Internet connection is established.

The Internet connection via Bluetooth® is restric‐ted or does not function in the following cases:R the mobile phone is switched off


R the mobile phone is connected a an addi‐tional mobile phoneR the mobile phone network coverage is insuf‐

ficientR mobile data use is deactivated on the mobile

phoneR the Bluetooth® function on the multimedia

system is switched off and the mobile phoneis to be connected via Bluetooth®

R the Bluetooth® function is switched off onthe mobile phone and the mobile phone is tobe connected via Bluetooth®

R neither the mobile phone network nor themobile phone allow simultaneous use of atelephone and an Internet connectionR the mobile phone has not been enabled for

Internet access via Bluetooth®

Establishing an automatic Internet connec‐tionMultimedia system:4© 5 Settings 5 System5 Wi-Fi & Bluetooth 5 Internet settings# Highlight the mobile phone.# Selectr.# Activate Permanent Internet connectionD.

Cancelling Internet access permission for amobile phoneMultimedia system:4© 5 Settings 5 System5 Wi-Fi & Bluetooth 5 Internet settings# Selectr in the line of the mobile phone.# Select Delete configuration.# Select Yes.

Displaying mobile phone detailsMultimedia system:4© 5 Settings 5 System5 Wi-Fi & Bluetooth 5 Internet settings# Selectr in the line of the mobile phone.# Select Details.

Establishing an Internet connectionMultimedia system:4© 5 Mercedes me & Apps# For example, selectz Browser.% The multimedia system usually establishes

the Internet connection automatically. If themultimedia system is not connected to theInternet, the Internet connection is estab‐lished when an Internet application is used.

% The availability of the function is dependenton the country.


Setting automatic disconnection of the Inter‐net connectionMultimedia system:4© 5 Settings 5 System5 Wi-Fi & Bluetooth 5 Internet settings# Selectr in the line of the mobile phone.# Select Disconnect when inactive.

The following options are available:R 5 minutesR 10 minutesR 20 minutesR Unlimited# Select an option.

Connection status

Connection status overview

1 Display of existing connection (double arrow)and reception field strength of the communi‐cation module or of the connected Blue‐tooth® device

% The function is country-dependent.

Displaying the connection statusMultimedia system:4© 5 Settings 5 System5 Wi-Fi & Bluetooth# Select Internet status.R When connected via Wi-Fi or a Bluetooth®

device, the approximate data volume trans‐mitted is displayed. The exact values can berequested from your mobile phone networkprovider.R In the case of a connection via the communi‐

cation module the following status informa‐tion is shown:- Type of network- Status online/offline


Web browser

Calling up a web page






Multimedia system:4© 5 Mercedes me & Apps5z Browser

Calling up a new web page# Selectä.# Entering a web address# Select ¬.% The function is country-dependent.% Websites cannot be shown while the vehicle

is in motion.

Calling up a website from the browser his‐tory# To call up the previous or next page from the

history: select X or Y.


Web browser overview

1 URL entry2 Bookmarks3 Web page, back4 Web page, forwards5 To refresh/stop6 Options

Calling up web browser optionsMultimedia system:4© 5 Mercedes me & Apps5z Browser 5ZThe following functions are available:R BookmarksR Options with the settings:

- Browser settings- Delete browser data

# Select an option.# Change the settings.


Calling up the web browser settingsMultimedia system:4© 5 Mercedes me & Apps5z Browser 5Z 5 Browser settingsThe following functions are available:R Block popupsR Enable JavascriptR Enable cookies# To switch a function on: activate the dis‐

play button.# To switch a function off: deactivate the dis‐

play button.

Deleting Internet historyMultimedia system:4© 5 Mercedes me & Apps5z Browser 5Z5 Delete browser dataThe following options are available:R AllR CacheR Cookies

R HistoryR Entered URLsR Form data# Select an option.# Select Yes.

Managing bookmarksMultimedia system:4© 5 Mercedes me & Apps5z Browser# Select?.

Selecting a bookmark# Select an entry.

Creating a bookmark# Select Add current site to bookmarks.

The bookmark is created.

Editing a bookmark# Selectr after a bookmark.# Select Edit.# Enter the name.

# Selecta.

Deleting a bookmark# Selectr after a bookmark.# Select Delete.# Select Yes.

Closing the browserMultimedia system:4© 5 Mercedes me & Apps5z Browser# Select©.

TuneIn radio

Calling up TuneIn radioRequirements:R A Mercedes me account is available.R The vehicle is connected with the Mercedes

me account.R The TuneIn radio service is activated in the

Mercedes me portal.R The data volume is available.


Depending on the country, data volume mayneed to be purchased.R A fast Internet connection for data transmis‐

sion free of interference.

% New data volumes can be purchased in theMercedes me portal

% The functions and services are country-dependent. For more information, consult aMercedes-Benz service centre.

Multimedia system:4© 5 Radio# Select TuneIn radio.

The TuneIn menu appears. The last stationset starts playing.

% The connection quality depends on the localmobile phone reception.


Overview of TuneIn radio

1 Additional information on the current station2 Display (if connected to private user

account)3 Data transfer rate4 Options5 Favourites6 To start/end

7 To browse8 Search9 Selected categoryA Internet Radio provider

Selecting and connecting to a TuneIn radiostationMultimedia system:4© 5 Radio 5 TuneIn radio# Select=.# Select a category.


# Select a station.The connection is established automatically.

or# Select the search field.# Enter a station name.% A relatively large volume of data can be

transmitted when using TuneIn radio.

Saving/deleting a TuneIn radio station as afavouriteMultimedia system:4© 5 Radio 5 TuneIn radio# Select a station.# Selectß.

The list of saved favourite stations appears.# Select Add to favourites.or# Create an account for the online provider

(TuneIn radio) and then log in on the multi‐media system.Your favourites are imported to the multime‐dia system.

Deleting favourites# Select a station.# Selectß.# Select Delete favourite.

Setting the TuneIn radio optionsMultimedia system:4© 5 Radio 5 TuneIn radio 5Z5 TuneIn radioThe following options are available:R Select stream: select the stream quality.R Login to TuneIn account: log in to your

TuneIn user account.R Log out of account: log out of your TuneIn

user account.

# Select an option.

Showing the station list for the last categoryselectedMultimedia system:4© 5 Radio 5 TuneIn radio# Press the cover of the current station.

Depending on how the station was selected,a station list is shown.

MediaInformation about media mode

Information about supported formats anddata storage media

& WARNING Risk of distraction when han‐dling data storage media

If you handle a data storage medium whiledriving, your attention is diverted from thetraffic conditions. This could also cause youto lose control of the vehicle.# Only handle a data storage medium

when the vehicle is stationary.


The multimedia system supports the follow‐ing formats and data media:

Permissiblefile systems

FAT32, exFAT, NTFS

Permissibledata carriers

USB devices, iPod®/iPhone®,MTP devices, Bluetooth®audio equipment

Supportedaudio formats

MP3, WMA, AAC, WAV, FLAC,ALAC

Supportedvideo formats

MPEG, AVI, DivX, MKV, MP4,M4V, WMV

% Observe the following notes:R The multimedia system supports a total

of up to 50,000 files.R Data storage media up to 2 TB are sup‐

ported (32‑bit address space).R Due to the large variety of available

music and video files regarding encod‐ers, sampling rates and data transferrates, playback cannot be guaranteed.

R Due to the wide range of USB devicesavailable on the market, playback cannotbe guaranteed for all USB devices.R Videos up to FullHD (1920x1080) are

supported.R Copy-protected music and video files or

DRM (Digital Rights Management)encrypted files cannot be played back.R MP3 players must support Media Trans‐

fer Protocol (MTP).

Information on copyright protection andtrademarksAudio files which you create yourself (e.g. copiesof data storage media you make yourself) aregenerally subject to copyright protection. Inmany countries, reproductions are not permittedwithout the prior consent of the copyrightholder, even for private use. Make sure that youknow about the applicable copyright regulationsand that you comply with these.

Manufactured under licence from Dolby Labora‐tories. Dolby, Dolby Audio and the double-D sym‐bol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.


Gracenote, the Gracenote logo and logotype,"Powered by Gracenote", MusicID and PlaylistPlus are either registered trademarks or trade‐marks of Gracenote, Inc. in the United Statesand/or other countries.

TIDAL and TIDAL logo are registered trademarkof Aspiro AB in the European Union and othercountries.


Overview of the media menu

1 Previous track or fast rewind2 Next track or fast forward3 Album cover4 Active media source5 Track and artist6 Current track number/track in playback list

and active data storage medium

7 Repeat8 Settings9 Additional optionsA Controls playbackB TimelineC CategoriesD Music search

E Random playback


Connecting the data storage medium to themultimedia system

Connecting USB devices

* NOTE Damage caused by high tempera‐tures

High temperatures can damage USB devices.# Remove the USB device after use and

take it out of the vehicle.

The multimedia connection unit is found in thestowage compartment under the armrest andhas two type C USB ports. Depending on thevehicle's equipment, additional USB ports canbe found in the stowage compartment of thecentre console or rear folding compartment.# Connect the USB device to the USB port.% USB hubs cannot be connected with the

multimedia system.

% When connecting several Apple® devicessimultaneously, pay attention to the order inwhich the devices are connected. The multi‐media system only connects with the devicethat is connected first. Additional Apple®devices that are connected at the same timeare only supplied with power.

Searching for and authorising a Bluetooth®audio deviceRequirements:R Bluetooth® is activated on the multimedia

system and audio equipment.R The audio equipment supports the Blue‐

tooth® audio profiles A2DP and AVRCP.R The audio equipment is "visible" for other

devices.


Multimedia system:4© 5 Media 5 Bluetooth 5 ª

Authorising a new Bluetooth® audio device# Select Connect new device.

Detected equipment is displayed in thedevice list.

# Select an audio device.Authorisation starts. A code is displayed onthe multimedia system and on the mobilephone.

# If the codes are identical, confirm on theaudio equipment.

# Select Only as Bluetooth audio device.The Bluetooth® audio equipment is connec‐ted with the multimedia system.

Connecting previously authorised Bluetooth®audio equipment# Select a Bluetooth® audio device from the

list.The connection is established.

Starting media playback

Requirements:R A data storage medium is connected to the

multimedia system.

Multimedia system:4© 5 Media# Select USB or Bluetooth as the media

source.

Controlling media playback

Multimedia system:4© 5 Media# To pause playback: select8.# To continue playback: select6.# To repeat a track: select:.

For the repeat function there are the follow‐ing settings:R Select once: the active playlist is repea‐

ted.

R Select twice: the current track is repea‐ted.R Select three times: the repeat function

is deactivated.# To play back tracks in random order:

select9.# To wind a track forwards or backwards:

tap on the desired point on the timeline.# To select the next track: select ü.# To select the previous track: select û.# To scroll through tracks quickly: press and

hold û or ü.# To show the current track list: select the

track image shown.


Additional options for setting media play‐back

Multimedia system:4© 5 Media

Calling up additional options# Selectß.

The additional options are shown.

The following options are available:R Play similar tracks

Select during playback of a track in order tocreate a playlist with similar tracks.R Surprise mix

A playlist with randomly selected tracks iscreated.R Add to favourite songs

The current track is added to the favouritesongs.R Delete from favourite songs

The current track is removed from the favour‐ite songs.

# Select an option.

Music online

Calling up music onlineRequirements:R A Mercedes me account is available.R The vehicle is connected with the Mercedes

me account.R The online music service is activated in the

Mercedes me portal.R There is an account for the music streaming

service.R A subscription for the music streaming

service has been obtained.R The data volume is available.

Depending on the country, data volume mayneed to be purchased.R A fast Internet connection for data transmis‐

sion free of interference.

% New data volumes can be purchased via theMercedes me portal.

% The functions and services are country-dependent. For more information, consult aMercedes-Benz service centre.

Multimedia system:4© 5 Media# Select Online music.

With Online music you can listen to music viaa streaming service.

% The online music menu is only shown if theonline music service is activated in theMercedes me portal and an account for themusic streaming service is connected. Theservices in the Mercedes me portal have tobe activated seperately for each vehicle.

Music playback can be controlled with the TouchControl, the touchscreen, the touchpad or usingthe media application.

Searching for music in online musicMultimedia system:4© 5 Media 5 Online music

Searching for categories in online musicThe media content of the streaming provider canbe scanned through in the category search. The


available categories depend on the streamingprovider.# Select5.

The list of available categories appears.# Select a category.

Keyword search in online musicYou can look for content using the keywordsearch with free text input.# Selectª.

A keyboard for character entry appears.# Enter the term searched for.

% The search begins from the first three char‐acters entered. The more characters enteredthe more concrete the search resultsbecome.

# Select the desired entry from the result list.If the selected result is an album, song or aplayback list then playback is started. If theselected result is a new category then this isopened in the search.

Configuring online music optionsMultimedia system:4© 5 Media 5 Online music# During media playback, pressß in the

Media menu.Three options appear:R Add the song to your own favouritesR Add the song to a playback listR The Title Radio option

# Select one of the three options.% If Title Radio is selected, a playback list with

similar music tracks is created.The available options depend on what isoffered by the provider of the streamingservice.

Media search

Notes about the search function in catego‐riesUnder5 you can search through all availablemedia files. There are several categories availa‐

ble for selection. The categories shown dependon the connected device and data format.

Available categories with Bluetooth® audio:R Current tracklist

The folders and categories of the connecteddevice are shown.

Available categories with audio files:R Current tracklistR PlaylistsR FolderR AlbumsR ArtistsR TracksR Favourite songsR Frequently playedR Most recently addedR Mood (/ page 476)R Music genresR YearR Composers


R Select by coverR Podcasts (Apple® devices)R Audiobooks (Apple® devices)

Available categories with video files:R FolderR Videos

% The categories are available as soon as theentire media content has been read in andanalysed.

Starting a search in categoriesMultimedia system:4© 5 Media 55

# Select a category.# Selectª and enter a search term.

Sorting results shown or playing back allmedia found# Select Ä.

# To play back all results found in the cate‐gory: select Play all.If, for example, the Albums category isactive, all albums found by the desired artistwill be played back.

# To sort results alphabetically: select Sortfrom A-Z.

# To sort results in reverse alphabeticalorder: select Sort from Z-A.

% The available options depend on the selec‐ted category and the connected device.

Using the keyword searchMultimedia system:4© 5 MediaYou can look for content using the keywordsearch with free text input.# Selectª.

A keyboard for character entry appears.# Enter the term searched for.

% The search begins with the first characterentered. The more characters entered themore concrete the search results become.

# Select the desired entry from the result list.If the selected result is an album, song or aplayback list then playback is started. If theselected result is a new category then this isopened in the search.

Searching for a track according to moodMultimedia system:4© 5 Media 55

By searching in categories, you can find musictracks suitable for a mood.# Select Mood.

A grid with the following moods appears:R PositiveR CalmR DarkR Energetic

# Pull the controller to the desired position.The system searches for tracks that are suit‐able for the mood entered.


Making video settings

Multimedia system:4© 5 Media 5Z 5 General# Select Video settings.# Select an aspect ratio.

Setting full screen# SelectG.

RadioSwitching on the radio

Multimedia system:4© 5 Radio# Alternatively: press the| button.

The radio display appears. You will hear thelast station played on the last frequencyband selected.


Radio overview

1 Active frequency band2 Station name or set frequency3 Artist, title, album and radio text4 Options5 Full screen/DAB slideshow6 Mute function7 Station list

8 Search

Setting the frequency band

Multimedia system:4© 5 Radio# Select a frequency band.

Selecting a radio station

Multimedia system:4© 5 Radio# Swipe to the left or right on the control ele‐

ment.


Calling up the radio station list

Multimedia system:4© 5 Radio# Select4.

The station list appears.# Select a station.

Searching for radio stations using stationnames or frequency entry

Multimedia system:4© 5 Radio# Selectè.# Enter a station name or frequency.# Select a station.

Storing radio stations

Multimedia system:4© 5 Radio# Select a radio station.

Memory slots are available in station presets# Selectf.or# Press and hold on the radio station.

Replacing an entry in the station presets# Press and hold on an entry in the station pre‐

sets.# Select Yes.

Editing station presets

Multimedia system:4© 5 Radio

Moving stations# Press and hold a stored station.# Select Move.# Move the station to the new position.

Deleting stations# Press and hold a station.# Select Delete.

Replacing a station# Press and hold a station.# Select Replace radio station.

Calling up a slide show (FM/DAB radio mode)

Multimedia system:4© 5 RadioThe slide show displays additional informationprovided by the station as an image. This caninclude logos, album covers, music tracks, pro‐grammes, news or service information, for exam‐ple.# Select2.

Activating/deactivating the frequency fixfunction

Multimedia system:4© 5 Radio 5Z 5 General# Switch Frequency fix on or off.

If the function is activated, the set frequencyis kept even if the reception is poor.


Activating/deactivating traffic announce‐ments

Multimedia system:4© 5 Radio 5Z 5 General# Switch Traffic announcements (TA) on or off.

Setting the traffic information service vol‐ume increase

Multimedia system:4© 5 Settings 5 Audio# Select Navigation and traffic announce-

ments.# Select Traffic announc. vol. increase.# Set a level between 0 and 10.# Accept the value withq.

Displaying radio text

Multimedia system:4© 5 Radio 5Z 5 General# Switch Radio text information on or off.

SoundTone settings

Information about the sound systemThe sound system has a total output of 100 Wand is equipped with six speakers. It is availablefor all functions in the radio and media modes.

Calling up the sound menuMultimedia system:4© 5 Media 5Z 5 SoundThe following functions are available:R EqualiserR Balance and FaderR Volume# Select a function.

Adjusting treble, mid-range and bass set‐tingsMultimedia system:4© 5 Media 5Z 5 Sound5 Equaliser# Set TREBLE, MID or BASS.

Activating/deactivating automatic volumeadjustmentMultimedia system:4© 5 Media 5Z 5 Sound5 VolumeAutomatic volume adjustment compensates fordiffering volumes when changing between audiosources and within an audio source.# Switch Automatic adjustment on or off.

Adjusting the balance/faderMultimedia system:4© 5 Media 5Z 5 Sound5 Balance and Fader

Adjusting the balance# Move the volume distribution between the

right and left sides of the vehicle in the gridshown.The volume is distributed between the speak‐ers on the left and right sides in the vehicle.


Adjusting the fader# Move the volume distribution between the

front and rear of the vehicle in the gridshown.The volume is distributed between the speak‐ers in the front and rear of the vehicle.

Burmester® surround sound system

Information about the Burmester® surroundsound systemThe Burmester® surround sound system has atotal output of 590 W and is equipped with 12speakers. It is available for all functions in theradio and media modes.

Calling up the sound menu in theBurmester® surround sound systemMultimedia system:4© 5 Media 5Z 5 BurmesterThe following functions are available:R EqualiserR Balance and FaderR Sound focus

R Sound profilesR Volume# Select a function.

Adjusting the treble, mid and bass settingson the Burmester® surround sound systemMultimedia system:4© 5 Media 5Z 5 Burmester5 Equaliser# Set TREBLE, MID or BASS.

Activating/deactivating volume adjustmentin the Burmester® surround sound systemMultimedia system:4© 5 Media 5Z 5 Burmester5 VolumeAutomatic volume adjustment compensates fordiffering volumes when changing between audiosources and within an audio source.# Switch Automatic adjustment on or off.

Adjusting the balance/fader in theBurmester® surround sound systemMultimedia system:4© 5 Media 5Z 5 Burmester5 Balance and Fader






Selecting a sound profile in the Burmester®surround sound systemMultimedia system:4© 5 Media 5Z 5 Burmester5 Sound profilesThe following profiles are available:R PureR Surround# Select a sound profile.

Adjusting the sound focus in the Burmester®surround sound systemMultimedia system:4© 5 Media 5Z 5 Burmester5 Sound focus# Select a position for the sound focus or All

seats.

Advanced sound system

Information about the Advanced sound sys‐temThe Advanced sound system has a total outputof 225 W and is equipped with ten speakers. It isavailable for all functions in the radio and mediamodes.

Calling up the sound menu in the Advancedsound systemMultimedia system:4© 5 Media 5Z 5 SoundThe following functions are available:R EqualiserR Balance and FaderR Volume# Select a function.

Adjusting treble, mid-range and bass set‐tings in the Advanced sound systemMultimedia system:4© 5 Media 5Z 5 Sound5 Equaliser# Set TREBLE, MID or BASS.

Switching volume adjustment in theAdvanced sound system on/offMultimedia system:4© 5 Media 5Z 5 Sound5 VolumeAutomatic volume adjustment compensates fordiffering volumes when changing between audiosources and within an audio source.# Switch Automatic adjustment on or off.


Setting the balance/fader in the Advancedsound systemMultimedia system:4© 5 Media 5Z 5 Sound5 Balance and Fader






ASSYST PLUS service interval displayFunction of the ASSYST PLUS service intervaldisplay

The ASSYST PLUS service interval display on theinstrument display provides information on theremaining time or distance before the nextservice due date.You can hide this service display using the backbutton on the left-hand side of the steeringwheel.Depending on how the vehicle is used, theASSYST PLUS service interval display mayshorten the service interval, e.g. in the followingcases:R mainly short-distance drivingR when the engine is often left idling for long

periodsR in the event of frequent cold start phasesR vehicles with a diesel particulate filter: in

the event of frequently interrupted regenera‐tion of the diesel particulate filter

Mercedes-Benz recommends avoiding suchoperating conditions.You can obtain information concerning the serv‐icing of your vehicle from a qualified specialistworkshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.

Displaying the service due date

On-board computer:4 Service 5 ASSYST PLUSThe next service due date is displayed.# To exit the display: press the back button

on the left-hand side of the steering wheel.Be sure to also pay attention to the followingrelated topic:R Operating the on-board computer

(/ page 296).

Information on regular maintenance work

* NOTE Premature wear through failure toobserve service due dates

Service work which is not carried out at theright time or incompletely can lead toincreased wear and damage to the vehicle.# Always observe the prescribed service

intervals.# Always have the prescribed service

work carried out at a qualified specialistworkshop.

Special service requirements

The prescribed service interval is based on nor‐mal operation of the vehicle. Maintenance workwill need to be performed more often if the vehi‐cle is operated under arduous conditions orincreased loads.The ASSYST PLUS service interval display is onlyan aid. The driver of the vehicle bears responsi‐bility as regards to whether maintenance workneeds to be performed more often than speci‐

484 Maintenance and care

fied based on the actual operating conditionsand/or loads.Examples of arduous operating conditions:R regular city driving with frequent intermedi‐

ate stopsR mainly short-distance drivingR frequent operation in mountainous terrain or

on poor road surfacesR when the engine is often left idling for long

periodsR operation in particularly dusty conditions

and/or if air-recirculation mode is frequentlyused

In these or similar operating conditions, have theinterior air filter, engine air cleaner, engine oiland oil filter etc. changed more frequently. Thetyres must be checked more frequently if thevehicle is operated under increased loads. Fur‐ther information can be obtained at a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

Battery disconnection periods

The ASSYST PLUS service interval displaycan only calculate the service due date whenthe battery is connected.# Note down the service due date displayed on

the instrument display before disconnectingthe battery (/ page 484).

Engine compartmentActive bonnet (pedestrian protection)

Operation of the active bonnet (pedestrianprotection)In certain accident situations, the risk of injuryto pedestrians can be reduced by the actuationof the active bonnet. The rear area of the enginebonnet is raised by approximately 70 mm.For the drive to the workshop, reset the trig‐gered active bonnet yourself. After the activebonnet has been triggered, pedestrian protectionmay be limited.A qualified specialist workshop must re-instatethe full functionality of the active bonnet.

The active bonnet is not available in all coun‐tries.

Resetting the active bonnet

& WARNING Risk of burns from hot com‐ponent parts in the engine compartment

Certain components in the engine compart‐ment can be very hot, e.g. the engine, theradiator and parts of the exhaust system.# Allow the engine to cool down and only

touch component parts described inthe following.

Maintenance and care 485

# With your hand flat, push down active bonnet1 in the area around the hinges on bothsides (arrows).In doing so, the actuator is depressurisedand you may hear a hissing sound.The engine bonnet must engage in position.

# If active bonnet1 can be raised slightly atthe rear in the area of the hinges, repeat thestep until it engages correctly.

Opening/closing the bonnet

& WARNING Risk of accident due to driv‐ing with the engine bonnet unlocked

An unlocked engine bonnet may open upwhen the vehicle is in motion and block yourview.# Never unlock the engine bonnet when

driving.# Before every trip, ensure that the

engine bonnet is locked.

& WARNING Risk of accident and injurywhen opening and closing the enginebonnet

When opening or closing the engine bonnet,it may suddenly drop into the end position.There is a risk of injury for anyone in theengine bonnet's range of movement.# Only open or close the engine bonnet

when there are no persons in theengine bonnet's range of movement.



engine to cool down.

# In the event of a fire in the engine com‐partment, keep the engine bonnetclosed and call the fire service.

& WARNING Risk of injury due to movingparts

Certain components in the engine compart‐ment may continue to move or suddenlymove again even after the ignition has beenswitched off, e.g. the cooler fan.Make sure of the following before performingtasks in the engine compartment:# Switch the ignition off.# Never touch the danger zone surround‐

ing moving component parts, e.g. therotation area of the fan.

# Remove jewellery and watches.# Keep items of clothing and hair away

from moving parts.


& WARNING Risk of injury from touchingcomponent parts under voltage

The ignition system and the fuel injectionsystem work under high voltage. If you touchcomponent parts which are under voltage,you could receive an electric shock.# Never touch components of the ignition

system or the fuel injection systemwhen the ignition is switched on.




& WARNING Risk of injury from using thewindscreen wipers while the engine bon‐net is open

When the engine bonnet is open, and thewindscreen wipers are set in motion, you canbe trapped by the wiper linkage.# Always switch off the windscreen wip‐

ers and ignition before opening theengine bonnet.

# To open: pull lever1 to release the bonnet.


# Push yellow handle1 on the bonnet catchto the left as far as it will go (palm down‐wards). Lift the bonnet until it is automati‐cally raised by the pneumatic strut.

# To close: lower the bonnet and let it fall froma height of approximately 20 cm.

# If the bonnet can still be lifted slightly, openthe bonnet again and close it with a littleforce until it engages correctly.

Engine oil

Checking the engine oil level using the on-board computerRequirements:R The engine has warmed up.R The vehicle is parked on a level surface.R The engine is running at idle speed.

The engine oil level is determined during driving.Determining the engine oil level can take up to30 minutes with a normal driving style and evenlonger with an active driving style.On-board computer:4 Service 5 Engine oil levelYou will see one of the following messages onthe multifunction display:R Engine oil level Measuring now: measure‐

ment of the oil level is not yet possible.

# Repeat the request after a maximum of30 minutes driving.R Engine oil level OK and the bar display for

indicating the oil level on the multifunction

display is green and is between "min" and"max": the oil level is correct.

R Engine oil level Add 1,0 l and the bar displayfor indicating the oil level on the multifunc‐tion display is orange and is below "min":

# Add 1 l of engine oil.R Reduce engine oil level and the bar display

for indicating the oil level on the multifunc‐tion display is orange and is above "max":

# Drain off any excess engine oil that has beenadded. To do so, consult a qualified specialistworkshop.R For engine oil level turn on ignition:# Switch on the ignition to check the engine oil

level.R Engine oil level System inoperative: sensor

faulty or not inserted.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.R Engine oil level System currently unavail.:# Close the bonnet.


Topping up engine oil




& WARNING Risk of fire and injury fromengine oil

If engine oil comes into contact with hotcomponent parts in the engine compart‐ment, it may ignite.# Make sure that no engine oil is spilled

next to the filler opening.# Allow the engine to cool off and thor‐

oughly clean the engine oil from compo‐nent parts before starting the vehicle.

* NOTE Engine damage caused by anincorrect oil filter, incorrect oil or addi‐tives

# Do not use engine oils or oil filterswhich do not correspond to the specifi‐cations explicitly prescribed for theservice intervals.

# Do not alter the engine oil or oil filter inorder to achieve longer change intervalsthan prescribed.

# Do not use additives.# Follow the instructions in the service

interval display regarding the oilchange.

* NOTE Damage caused by topping up toomuch engine oil

Too much engine oil can damage the engineor the catalytic converter.# Have excess engine oil removed at a

qualified specialist workshop.

# Turn cap1 anti-clockwise and remove it.# Top up the engine oil.# Replace cap1 and turn it clockwise as far

as it will go.# Check the oil level again (/ page 488).


Checking the coolant level




& WARNING Risk of scalding from hotcoolant

The engine cooling system is pressurised,particularly when the engine is warm. If youopen the cap, you could be scalded by hotcoolant spraying out.# Let the engine cool down before open‐

ing the cap.# When opening the cap, wear protective

gloves and safety glasses.# Open the cap slowly to release pres‐

sure.

# Park the vehicle on a level surface.# Check the coolant temperature display in the

instrument cluster.The coolant temperature must be below70 °C.

# Slowly turn cap1 anti-clockwise to relieveoverpressure.

# Continue turning cap1 anti-clockwise andremove it.

The coolant level is correct in the followingcases:R if the engine is cold, the coolant is up to

marker bar2.R if the engine is warm, the coolant is up to

1.5 cm over the marker bar2.

# If necessary, top up with coolant that hasbeen approved for Mercedes-Benz.R Further information on coolant

(/ page 559).

Topping up the windscreen washer system


Certain components in the engine compart‐ment can be very hot, e.g. the engine, theradiator and parts of the exhaust system.


# Allow the engine to cool down and onlytouch component parts described inthe following.



engine to cool down.# In the event of a fire in the engine com‐

partment, keep the engine bonnetclosed and call the fire service.

& WARNING ‑ Risk of fire and injury due towindscreen washer concentrate

Windscreen washer concentrate is highlyflammable. It could ignite if it comes intocontact with hot engine component parts orthe exhaust system.

# Make sure that no windscreen washerconcentrate spills out next to the filleropening.

# Remove the cap1 by the tab.# Top up the washer fluid.

Keeping the air-water duct free

# Keep the area between the bonnet and thewindscreen free of deposits, e.g. ice, snowand leaves.

Cleaning and careInformation on washing the vehicle in a carwash

& WARNING Risk of an accident due toreduced braking power after washing thevehicle

Braking efficiency is reduced after washingthe vehicle.# After the vehicle has been washed,

brake carefully while paying attention tothe traffic conditions until brakingpower has been fully restored.


* NOTE Damage due to unsuitable carwash

# Before driving into a car wash makesure that the car wash is suitable forthe vehicle dimensions.

# Ensure there is sufficient ground clear‐ance between the underbody and theguide rails of the car wash.

# Ensure that the clearance width of thecar wash, in particular the width of theguide rails, is sufficient.

To avoid damage to your vehicle when using acar wash, ensure the following beforehand:R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC and the

HOLD function are deactivated.R the side windows and sliding sunroof are

completely closed.R the blower for the ventilation/heating is

switched off.R the windscreen wiper switch is in position

g.

R the key is at a minimum distance of 3 maway from the vehicle, otherwise the tailgatecould open unintentionally.R in car washes with a conveyor system: neu‐

trali is engaged.

% In car washes with a conveyor system: if youwould like to leave the vehicle while it isbeing washed, make sure the key is locatedin the vehicle. The park positionj is other‐wise automatically engaged.

% If, after the car wash, you remove the waxfrom the windscreen and wiper rubbers, thiswill prevent smearing and reduce wipernoise.

Information on using a high-pressure cleaner

& WARNING Risk of an accident whenusing high-pressure cleaners with circu‐lar jet nozzles

The water jet of a circular jet nozzle (dirtgrinder) can cause externally invisible dam‐age to the tyres or chassis parts.

Components damaged in this way may unex‐pectedly fail.# Do not use high-pressure cleaners with

circular jet nozzles to clean the vehicle.# Have damaged tyres or chassis parts

replaced immediately.

To avoid damage to your vehicle, observe the fol‐lowing when using a high-pressure cleaner:R keep the key at least 3 m away from the vehi‐

cle. Otherwise the tailgate could open unin‐tentionally.R maintain a distance of at least 30 cm to the

vehicle.R vehicles with decorative foil: parts of your

vehicle are covered with a decorative foil.Maintain a distance of at least 70 cmbetween the foil-covered parts of the vehicleand the nozzle of the high-pressure cleaner.Move the high-pressure cleaner nozzlearound whilst cleaning. The water tempera‐ture of the high-pressure cleaner must notexceed 60 °C.


R observe the information on the correct dis‐tance in the equipment manufacturer's oper‐ating instructions.R do not point the nozzle of the high-pressure

cleaner directly at sensitive parts such astyres, slits, electrical components, batteries,light bulbs and ventilation slots.

Washing the vehicle by hand

Observe the legal requirements, e.g. in a numberof countries, washing by hand is only permittedin specially designated wash bays.# Use a mild cleaning agent, e.g. car shampoo.# Wash the vehicle with lukewarm water using

a soft car sponge. When doing so, do notexpose the vehicle to direct sunlight.

# Carefully hose the vehicle off with water anddry using a chamois. Take care not to pointthe water jet directly towards the air inletgrille below the bonnet.


Notes on paintwork/matt finish paintwork care

Observe the following information:

Cleaning and care Avoiding paintwork damage

Paintwork R Insect remains: soak with insect remover and rinse off thetreated areas afterwards.R Bird droppings: soak with water and rinse off afterwards.R Tree resin, oils, fuels and greases: remove by rubbing gen‐

tly with a cloth soaked in petroleum ether or lighter fluid.R Coolant and brake fluid: remove with a damp cloth and

clean water.R Tar stains: use tar remover.R Wax: use silicone remover.

R Do not attach stickers, films or similar materials.R Remove dirt immediately, where possible.


Cleaning and care Avoiding paintwork damage

Matt finish Only use care products approved for Mercedes-Benz. R Do not polish the vehicle and light-alloy wheels.R Only use car washes that correspond to the latest engi‐

neering standards.R Do not use car wash programmes with a final hot wax

treatment.R Do not use paint cleaners, buffing or polishing products,

gloss preservers, e.g. wax.R Always have paintwork repairs carried out at a qualified

specialist workshop.

Notes on cleaning decorative foils

Observe the notes on matt finish care in thechapter "Notes on paintwork/matt finish paint‐

work care" (/ page 494). They also apply tomatt decorative foils.



Cleaning Avoiding damage to the decorative foil

R For cleaning, use plenty of water and a mild cleaning agent withoutadditives or abrasive substances, e.g. a car shampoo approved forMercedes-Benz.R Remove dirt immediately, where possible, whilst avoiding rubbing

too hard. There is otherwise a risk of damaging the decorative foilirreparably.R If there is dirt on the finish or if the decorative foil is dull: use the

Paint Cleaner recommended and approved for Mercedes-Benz.R Insect remains: soak with insect remover and rinse off the treated

areas afterwards.R Bird droppings: soak with water and rinse off afterwards.R To prevent water stains, dry a foil-wrapped vehicle with a soft,

absorbent cloth after every car wash.

R The service life and colouring of decorative foils are impaired by:- sunlight- temperature, e.g. hot air blower- weather conditions- stone chippings and dirt- chemical cleaning agents- oily productsR Do not use polish on matt decorative foil. Polishing will have the effect of

shining the foil-wrapped surface.R Do not treat matt or structured decorative foils with wax. Permanent

stains may occur.

Scratches, corrosive deposits, areas affected bycorrosion and damage caused by incorrect carecannot always be completely repaired. In suchcases, visit a qualified specialist workshop.You can obtain more information on care andcleaning products from the manufacturer.

In the case of foil-wrapped surfaces, optical dif‐ferences may occur between the surfaces thatwere not protected by a decorative foil afterremoving a decorative foil.

% Have work or repairs to decorative foils car‐ried out at a qualified specialist workshop,e.g. in a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.


Notes on care of car parts

& WARNING Risk of entrapment if thewindscreen wipers are switched on whilethe windscreen is being cleaned

If the windscreen wipers are set in motionwhile you are cleaning the windscreen orwiper blades, you can be trapped by thewiper arm.

# Always switch off the windscreen wip‐ers and the ignition before cleaning thewindscreen or wiper blades.

& WARNING Risk of burns from the tail‐pipe and tailpipe trims

The exhaust tailpipe and tailpipe trims canbecome very hot. If you come into contact

with these parts of the vehicle, you couldburn yourself.# Always be particularly careful around

the tailpipe and the tailpipe trims andsupervise children especially closely inthis area.

# Allow vehicle parts to cool down beforetouching them.


Notes on cleaning and care Avoiding vehicle damage

Wheels/rims Use water and acid-free wheel cleaners. R Do not use acidic wheel cleaners to remove brake dust.This could damage wheel bolts and brake components.R To avoid corrosion of the brake discs and brakepads, drive

the vehicle for a few minutes after cleaning before parkingit. The brake discs and brakepads warm up and dry out.

Windows Clean windows inside and outside with a damp cloth and witha cleaning agent recommended for Mercedes-Benz.

Do not use dry cloths or abrasive or solvent-based cleaningagents to clean the inside of windows.

Wiper blades Fold out the wiper blades and clean them using a damp cloth. Do not clean the wiper blades too often.


Notes on cleaning and care Avoiding vehicle damage

Exterior lighting Clean the lenses with a wet sponge and mild cleaning agent,e.g. car shampoo.

Only use cleaning agents or cleaning cloths that are suitablefor plastic lenses.

Sensors Clean the sensors in the front and rear bumper and in theradiator grille with a soft cloth and car shampoo.

When using a high-pressure cleaner, maintain a minimum dis‐tance of 30 cm.

Reversing cameraand 360° Camera

Use clean water and a soft cloth to clean the camera lens. Do not use a high-pressure cleaner.

Tailpipes Clean with a cleaning agent recommended for Mercedes-Benz, especially in the winter and after washing the vehicle.

Do not use acidic cleaning agents.

Trailer hitch R Remove traces of rust on the ball, e.g. with a wire brush.R Remove dirt with a lint-free cloth.R After cleaning, oil or grease the ball head lightly.R Observe the notes on care in the trailer hitch manufactur‐

er's operating instructions.

Do not clean the ball neck with a high-pressure cleaner or sol‐vent.


Notes on care of the interior

& WARNING Risk of injury from plasticparts breaking off after the use of sol‐vent-based care products

Care and cleaning products containing sol‐vents can cause surfaces in the cockpit tobecome porous.

When the airbags are deployed, plastic partsmay break away.# Do not use any care or cleaning prod‐

ucts containing solvents to clean thecockpit.

& WARNING Risk of injury or death frombleached seat belts

Bleaching or dyeing seat belts can severelyweaken them.This can, for example, cause seat belts totear or fail in an accident.# Never bleach or dye seat belts.


Cleaning and care Avoiding vehicle damage

Seat belts Clean with lukewarm and soapy water. R Do not use chemical cleaning agents.R Do not dry seat belts by heating them to over 80 °C or

exposing them to direct sunlight.

Display Clean the surface carefully with a microfibre cloth and a suit‐able display care product (TFT/LCD).

R Switch off the display and let it cool down.R Do not use any other agents.

Plastic trim R Clean with a damp microfibre cloth.R For heavy soiling: use a care product recommended for

Mercedes-Benz.

R Do not attach stickers, films or similar materials.R Do not allow cosmetics, insect repellent or sun cream to

come in contact with the plastic trim.


Cleaning and care Avoiding vehicle damage

Real wood/trim ele‐ments

R Clean with a microfibre cloth.R Black piano-lacquer look: clean with a damp cloth and

soapy water.R For heavy soiling: use a care product recommended for

Mercedes-Benz.

Do not use solvent-based cleaning agents, polishes or waxes.

Roof lining Clean with a brush or dry shampoo.

Carpet Use a carpet and textile cleaning agent recommended forMercedes-Benz.

Genuine leatherseat covers

R Clean with a damp cloth and then wipe with a dry cloth.R Leather care: use a leather care agent that has been rec‐

ommended for Mercedes-Benz.

R Do not allow the leather to become too damp.R Do not use a microfibre cloth.

DINAMICA seat cov‐ers

Clean with a damp cloth. Do not use a microfibre cloth.

Imitation leatherseat covers

Clean with a damp cloth and 1% soapy water. Do not use a microfibre cloth.

Cloth seat covers Clean with a damp microfibre cloth and 1% soapy water andallow to dry.


EmergencyRemoving the safety vest

The safety vests are located in the safety vestcompartments in the driver's and frontpassenger door stowage compartments.

# To remove: pull out safety vest bag1 byloop2.

# Open safety vest bag1 and pull out thesafety vest.

% There are also safety vest compartments inthe rear door stowage compartments inwhich safety vests can be stored.

1 Maximum number of washes2 Maximum wash temperature3 Do not bleach4 Do not iron5 Do not tumble dry6 Do not dry clean7 Class 2 safety vest

The requirements defined by the legal standardare only fulfilled if the safety vest is the correctsize and is fully closed.The safety vest must be replaced in the followingsituations:R the reflective strips are damaged or dirtyR the maximum permissible number of washes

is exceededR the fluorescence has faded

Warning triangle

Removing the warning triangle

Breakdown assistance 501

# Open the load compartment floor.# Remove warning triangle1.

Setting up the warning triangle

# Fold side reflectors1 upwards to form a tri‐angle and attach at the top using upperpress-stud2.

# Fold legs3 down and out to the side.

First-aid kit (soft-sided) overview

First-aid kit (soft sided)1 is under the loadcompartment floor.

Removing the fire extinguisher

& WARNING Risk of accident due to anincorrectly secured fire extinguisher inthe driver's footwell

A fire extinguisher in the driver's footwellmay impede pedal travel or block adepressed pedal.

This jeopardises the operating and roadsafety of the vehicle.Moreover, the fire extinguisher can bethrown about in the driver's footwell andinjure the driver or other vehicle occupants.# Always store and secure the fire extin‐

guisher in the bracket.# Do not remove the fire extinguisher

while driving.

# Left-hand drive vehicle: pull tab1upwards.

502 Breakdown assistance

# Right-hand drive vehicle: pull tab1 down‐wards.

# Remove fire extinguisher2.

Flat tyreNotes on flat tyres

& WARNING Risk of accident due to a flattyre

A flat tyre severely affects the driving charac‐teristics as well as the steering and brakingof the vehicle.Tyres without run-flat characteristics:# Do not drive on with a flat tyre.# Change the flat tyre immediately with

an emergency spare wheel or sparewheel. Alternatively, consult a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

Tyres with run-flat characteristics:

# Observe the information and warningnotes on MOExtended tyres (run-flattyres).

In the event of a flat tyre, the following optionsare available depending on your vehicle's equip‐ment:R Vehicles with MOExtended tyres: it is pos‐

sible to continue the journey for a shortperiod of time. Make sure you observe thenotes on MOExtended tyres (run-flat tyres)(/ page 503).R Vehicles with a TIREFIT kit: you can repair

the tyre so that it is possible to continue thejourney for a short period of time. To do this,use the TIREFIT kit (/ page 505).R Vehicles with Mercedes me connect: you

can make a call for breakdown assistance viathe overhead control panel in the case of abreakdown (/ page 447).R All vehicles: change the wheel

(/ page 539).

% The emergency spare wheel is only availablein certain countries.

Notes on MOExtended tyres (run-flat tyres)

& WARNING Risk of accident when drivingin emergency mode

When driving in emergency mode, the han‐dling characteristics are impaired. e.g. whencornering, when accelerating strongly andwhen braking.# Do not exceed the permissible maxi‐

mum speed.# Avoid any abrupt steering and driving

maneuvers as well as driving overobstacles (curbs, pot holes, off-road).This applies, in particular, to a loadedvehicle.

# Stop driving in the emergency mode ifyou notice:R banging noiseR vehicle vibration


R smoke which smells like rubberR continuous ESP® interventionR cracks in tire side walls

# After driving in emergency mode havethe rims checked by a qualified special‐ist workshop with regard to their furtheruse.

# The defective tire must be replaced inevery case.

With MOExtended tyres (run-flat tyres), you cancontinue to drive your vehicle even if there is atotal loss of pressure in one or more tyres. How‐ever, the tyre affected must not show any clearlyvisible damage.You can recognise MOExtended tyres by theMOExtended marking which appears on the sidewall of the tyre.Vehicles with tyre pressure loss warning sys‐tem: MOExtended tyres may only be used inconjunction with an activated tyre pressure losswarning system.

Vehicles with tyre pressure monitoring sys‐tem: MOExtended tyres may only be used inconjunction with an activated tyre pressure mon‐itoring system.If a pressure loss warning message appears inthe multifunction display, proceed as follows:R Check the tyre for damage.R If driving on, observe the following notes.

Driving distance possible in emergencymode after the pressure loss warning:

Load condition Driving distance pos‐sible in emergency

mode

Partially laden 80 km

Fully laden 30 km

The driving distance possible in emergencymode may vary depending on the driving style.Observe the maximum permissible speed of80 km/h.

If a tyre has gone flat and cannot be replacedwith an MOExtended tyre, you can use a stand‐ard tyre as a temporary measure.

TIREFIT kit storage location

The TIREFIT kit is located under the load com‐partment floor.

1 Tyre inflation compressor2 Tyre sealant bottle


% You can find information on the power cate‐gory (LK) and/or electrical data on the backof the tyre inflation compressor:R LK2 – 12 V/15 A, 180 W, 0.8 kg

At a distance of approximately 1 m to thetyre inflation compressor and approximately1.6 m above the ground, the following soundpressure levels apply:R Emission sound pressure level LPA

83 dB (A)R Sound power level LWA 91 dB (A)

The tyre inflation compressor is mainte‐nance-free. If there is a malfunction, pleasecontact a qualified specialist workshop.

Using the TIREFIT kit

Requirements:Required tools:R Tyre sealant bottleR TIREFIT sticker

R Sticker with details of the maximum permis‐sible speedR Tyre inflation compressorR Gloves

TIREFIT kit storage location: (/ page 504)You can use TIREFIT tyre sealant to seal perfora‐tion damage of up to 4 mm, particularly those inthe tyre contact surface. You can use TIREFIT inoutside temperatures down to -20 °C.

& WARNING Risk of accident when usingtyre sealant

In the following situations in particular, thetyre sealant is unable to provide sufficientbreakdown assistance, as it is unable to sealthe tyre properly:R there are cuts or punctures in the tyre

larger than those previously mentioned.R the wheel rim is damaged.R you have driven at very low tyre pres‐

sures or on a flat tyre.

# Do not drive on.# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

& WARNING Risk of injury and poisoningfrom tyre sealant

Tyre sealant is hazardous to health and cau‐ses irritation. Do not allow it to come intocontact with your skin, eyes or clothing, anddo not swallow it. Do not inhale any vapours.Keep the tyre sealant away from children.Observe the following if you come into con‐tact with the tyre sealant:# Rinse off the tyre sealant from your skin

using water immediately.# If tyre sealant gets into your eyes, thor‐

oughly rinse them using clean waterimmediately.

# If tyre sealant has been swallowed,thoroughly rinse out your mouth imme‐diately and drink plenty of water. Do notinduce vomiting and seek medicalattention immediately.


# Change out of clothing which has comeinto contact with tyre sealant immedi‐ately.

# If an allergic reaction occurs, seek med‐ical attention immediately.

* NOTE Overheating due to the tyre infla‐tion compressor running too long

# Do not run the tyre inflation compres‐sor for longer than ten minutes withoutinterruption.

Comply with the manufacturer's safety notes onthe sticker on the tyre sealant bottle.Have the tyre sealant bottle replaced in a quali‐fied specialist workshop every five years.# Do not remove any foreign objects which

have entered the tyre.

# Remove sticker1 from the tyre inflationcompressor housing and affix it to the instru‐ment cluster within the driver's field ofvision.

# Remove sticker2 from the tyre sealant bot‐tle and affix it near the valve on the wheelwith the defective tyre.

# Pull plug7 with the cable and filler hose3out of the tyre inflation compressor housing.

# Insert tyre sealant bottle9 in socket6 ofthe tyre inflation compressor in such a waythat the red arrow on tyre sealant bottle9


matches the red arrow on the tyre inflationcompressor.

# Then turn tyre sealant bottle9 a quarterturn clockwise.

# Insert the plug of filler hose3 in socket5of tyre sealant bottle9.

# Then turn filler hose3 a quarter turn clock‐wise.

# Remove the valve cap from valveA on thefaulty tyre.

# Screw union nut4 of filler hose3 ontovalveA.

# Insert plug7 into a 12 V socket in yourvehicle.

# Turn the key to position1 in the ignitionlock.

# Press on and off switch8 on the tyre infla‐tion compressor.The tyre inflation compressor is switched on.The tyre is inflated. First, tyre sealant is pum‐ped into the tyre. The pressure may brieflyrise to approximately 500 kPa (5 bar/73 psi).

Do not switch off the tyre inflation compres‐sor during this phase!# Let the tyre inflation compressor run for a

maximum of ten minutes.The tyre should then have attained a tyrepressure of at least 200 kPa (2.0 bar/29 psi).

If tyre sealant leaks out, make sure you clean theaffected area as quickly as possible. It is prefera‐ble to use clean water.If you get tyre sealant on your clothing, have itcleaned as soon as possible with perchloroethy‐lene.

If, after ten minutes, a tyre pressure of200 kPa (2.0 bar/29 psi) has not been ach‐ieved:# Switch off the tyre inflation compressor.# Unscrew the filling hose from the valve of the

defective tyre.

Please note that tyre sealant may leak out whenunscrewing the filling hose.# Drive forwards or reverse very slowly for

approximately 10 m.# Pump up the tyre again.

After a maximum of ten minutes the tyrepressure must be at least 200 kPa (2.0 bar/29 psi).

& WARNING Risk of accident due to thespecified tyre pressure not being ach‐ieved

If the specified tyre pressure is not achievedafter the specified time, the tyre is too badlydamaged. The tyre sealant cannot repair thetyre in this instance.


Damaged tyres and a tyre pressure that istoo low can significantly impair braking andhandling characteristics.# Do not drive on.# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

* NOTE Staining from leaking tyre sealant

After use, excess tyre sealant may leak outfrom the filling hose.# Therefore, place the filling hose in the

plastic bag that contained the TIREFITkit.

If, after ten minutes, a tyre pressure of200 kPa (2.0 bar/29 psi) has been achieved:# Switch off the tyre inflation compressor.# Unscrew the filling hose from the valve of the

defective tyre.

Please note that tyre sealant may leak out whenunscrewing the filling hose.

& WARNING Risk of accident from drivingwith sealed tyres

A tyre temporarily sealed with tyre sealantimpairs driving characteristics and is notsuitable for higher speeds.# Adapt your driving style accordingly and

drive carefully.# Do not exceed the maximum speed

limit with a tyre that has been repairedusing tyre sealant.

# Observe the maximum permissible speed fora tyre sealed with tyre sealant 80 km/h.

# The sticker with details of the maximum per‐missible speed must be affixed to the instru‐ment cluster where it can be easily seen bythe driver.

* NOTE Staining from leaking tyre sealant

After use, excess tyre sealant may leak outfrom the filling hose.

# Therefore, place the filling hose in theplastic bag that contained the TIREFITkit.

+ ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmentalpollution caused by environmentally irre‐sponsible disposal

Tyre sealant contains pollutants.# Have the tyre sealant bottle disposed of

professionally, e.g. at a Mercedes-BenzService Centre.

# Stow the tyre sealant bottle, the tyre inflationcompressor and the warning triangle.

# Pull away immediately.# Stop driving after approximately ten minutes

and check the tyre pressure using the tyreinflation compressor.The tyre pressure must now be at least130 kPa (1.3 bar/19 psi).


& WARNING Risk of accident due to thespecified tyre pressure not being ach‐ieved

If the specified tyre pressure is not achievedafter a brief drive, the tyre is too badly dam‐aged. The tyre sealant cannot repair the tyrein this instance.Damaged tyres and a tyre pressure that istoo low can significantly impair braking andhandling characteristics.# Do not drive on.# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Countries that have Mercedes-BenzService24h: you will find a sticker with the tele‐phone number, e.g. on the B‑pillar on the driver'sside.# Correct the tyre pressure if it is still at least

130 kPa (1.3 bar/19 psi). See the tyre pres‐sure table on the fuel filler flap for values.

# To increase the tyre pressure: switch onthe tyre inflation compressor.

# To reduce the tyre pressure: remove thetyre sealant bottle from the tyre inflationcompressor.

# Insert the filler hose in the socket of the tyreinflation compressor and turn it a quarterturn clockwise.

# Press pressure release buttonC next tomanometerB.

# When the tyre pressure is correct, unscrewthe filling hose from the valve of the sealedtyre.

# Screw the valve cap onto the valve of thesealed tyre.

# Stow the tyre sealant bottle and the tyreinflation compressor.

# Drive to the nearest qualified specialist work‐shop and have the tyre, tyre sealant bottleand filling hose replaced there.

Battery (vehicle)Notes on the 12 V battery

& WARNING Risk of an accident due towork carried out incorrectly on the bat‐tery

Work carried out incorrectly on the batterycan, for example, lead to a short circuit. Thiscan lead to function restrictions in safety-rel‐evant systems, e.g. the lighting system, ABS(anti-lock braking system) or ESP® (Elec‐tronic Stability Program). The operatingsafety of your vehicle may be restricted.You could lose control of the vehicle in thefollowing situations:R when braking


R in the event of abrupt steering manoeu‐vres and/or when the vehicle's speed isnot adapted to the road conditions

# In the event of a short circuit or a simi‐lar incident, contact a qualified special‐ist workshop immediately.

# Do not continue driving.# Always have work on the battery carried

out at a qualified specialist workshop.

R Further information on ABS (/ page 226)R Further information on ESP® (/ page 227)For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recommendsthat you only use batteries which have been tes‐ted and approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz. These batteries provide increased impactprotection to prevent vehicle occupants fromsuffering acid burns should the battery be dam‐aged in the event of an accident.

& WARNING Risk of explosion due to elec‐trostatic charge

Electrostatic charge can cause sparks whichmay ignite the highly flammable gas mixturein the battery.# To discharge any electrostatic charge

that may have built up, touch the metalvehicle body before handling the bat‐tery.

The highly flammable gas mixture is createdwhile the battery is charging and during startingassistance.

& WARNING Danger of chemical burnsfrom the battery acid

Battery acid is caustic.# Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or

clothing.# Do not lean over the battery.# Do not inhale battery gases.# Keep children away from the battery.

# Immediately rinse battery acid off thor‐oughly with plenty of clean water andseek medical attention immediately.


Batteries contain pollutants. It isillegal to dispose of them with the householdrubbish.#

Dispose of batteries in anenvironmentally responsible manner.Take discharged batteries to a qualifiedspecialist workshop or to a collectionpoint for used batteries.

If you have to disconnect the 12 V battery, con‐tact a qualified specialist workshop.


Comply with safety notes and take protectivemeasures when handling batteries.

Risk of explosion.

Fire, naked flames and smoking areprohibited when handling the battery.Avoid creating sparks.

Electrolyte or battery acid is corro‐sive. Avoid contact with the skin, eyesor clothing. Wear suitable protectiveclothing, in particular gloves, anapron and a face mask. Immediatelyrinse electrolyte or acid splashes offwith clean water. Consult a doctor ifnecessary.Wear safety glasses.

Keep children away.

Observe this Owner's Manual.

If you do not intend to use the vehicle over anextended period of time:R activate standby mode, orR connect the battery to a battery charger

approved by Mercedes-Benz, orR consult a qualified specialist workshop to

disconnect the battery

Notes on starting assistance and on charg‐ing the 12 V battery

When charging the battery and during startingassistance, always use the jump-start connec‐tion point in the engine compartment.

* NOTE Damaging the battery throughovervoltage

When using a battery charger without a maxi‐mum charging voltage, the battery or thevehicle electronics may be damaged.# Only use battery chargers with a maxi‐

mum charging voltage of 14.8 V.

& WARNING Risk of explosion from hydro‐gen gas igniting

A battery generates hydrogen gas during thecharging process. If there is a short circuit orsparks start to form, there is a danger of thehydrogen gas igniting.# Make sure that the positive terminal of

the connected battery does not comeinto contact with vehicle parts.

# Never place metal objects or tools on abattery.

# When connecting and disconnecting thebattery, you must observe the descri‐bed order for the battery clamps.


# When giving starting assistance, alwaysmake sure that you only connect bat‐tery terminals with identical polarity.

# During starting assistance, you mustobserve the described order for con‐necting and disconnecting the jumplead.

# Do not connect or disconnect the bat‐tery clamps while the engine is running.

& WARNING Risk of explosion duringcharging process and starting assistance

During the charging process and startingassistance, the battery may release an explo‐sive gas mixture.# Avoid fire, naked flames, creating

sparks and smoking.# Make sure that there is sufficient venti‐

lation during the charging process andduring starting assistance.

# Do not lean over a battery.

& WARNING Risk of explosion from a fro‐zen battery

A discharged battery may freeze at tempera‐tures slightly above or below freezing point.During starting assistance or battery charg‐ing, battery gas can be released.# Always allow a battery to thaw before

charging it or performing starting assis‐tance.

If the indicator/warning lamps in the instrumentcluster do not light up at low temperatures, it isvery likely that the discharged battery has fro‐zen. In this case you may neither jump-start thevehicle nor charge the battery.The service life of a battery that has beenthawed may be dramatically shortened. Thestarting characteristics may be impaired, espe‐cially at low temperatures.It is recommended that you have a thawed bat‐tery checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

* NOTE Damage caused by numerous orextended attempts to start the engine

Numerous or extended attempts to start theengine may damage the catalytic converterdue to non-combusted fuel.# Avoid numerous and extended attempts

to start the engine.

Observe the following points during startingassistance and when charging the battery:R Only use undamaged jump lead/charging

cables with a sufficient cross-section andinsulated terminal clamps.R Non-insulated parts of the terminal clamps

must not come into contact with other metalparts while the jump lead/charging cable isconnected to the battery/jump-start connec‐tion point.R The jump lead/charging cable must not

come into contact with any parts which maymove when the engine is running.R Always make sure that neither you nor the

battery is electrostatically charged.


R Keep away from fire and naked flames.R Do not lean over the battery.

Observe the additional following points whencharging the battery:R Only use battery chargers tested and

approved for Mercedes-Benz.R Read the battery charger's operating instruc‐

tions before charging the battery.

Observe the additional following points duringstarting assistance:R For starting assistance, only use batteries

with a nominal voltage of 12 V.R The vehicles must not touch.R Petrol engine: only accept starting assis‐

tance if the engine and exhaust system arecold.

Starting assistance and charging the 12 Vbattery

Requirements:

R The vehicle is secured with the electric park‐ing brake.R Automatic transmission: the transmission

is in positionj.R Manual transmission: the transmission is in

neutral.R The ignition and all electrical consumers are

switched off.R The bonnet is open.

# Slide cover1 of positive clamp2 on thejump-starting connection point in the direc‐tion of the arrow.

# Connect positive clamp2 on your vehicle tothe positive pole of the donor battery usingthe jump lead/charging cable. Always beginwith positive clamp2 on your own vehiclefirst.


# During starting assistance: start theengine of the donor vehicle and run at idlespeed.

# Connect the negative pole of the donor bat‐tery and earth point3 of your own vehicleby using the jump lead/charging cable. Beginwith the donor battery first.

# During starting assistance: start theengine of your own vehicle.

# During the charging process: start thecharging process.

# During starting assistance: let the enginesrun for several minutes.

# During starting assistance: before discon‐necting the jump lead, switch on an electricalconsumer in your own vehicle, e.g. the rearwindow heater or lighting.

When the starting assistance/charging processis complete:# First, remove the jump lead/charging cable

from earth point3 and the negative pole ofthe donor battery, then from positive clamp2 and the positive pole of the donor bat‐

tery. Begin each time with the contacts onyour own vehicle first.

# After removing the jump lead/chargingcable, close cover1 of positive clamp2.

Further information can be obtained at a quali‐fied specialist workshop.

Replacing the 12 V battery

# Observe the notes on the 12 V battery(/ page 509).

Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the12 V battery replaced at a qualified specialistworkshop, e.g. at a Mercedes-Benz ServiceCentre.Observe the following notes if you want toreplace the battery yourself:R Always replace a faulty battery with a battery

which meets the specific vehicle require‐ments.The vehicle is equipped with an AGM technol‐ogy battery (Absorbent Glass Mat). Full vehi‐cle functionality is only guaranteed with an

AGM battery. For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use batter‐ies which have been tested and approved foryour vehicle by Mercedes-Benz.R Carry over detachable parts, such as vent

hoses, elbow fittings or terminal covers fromthe battery being replaced.R Make sure that the vent hose is always con‐

nected to the original opening on the side ofthe battery.Fit any existing or supplied cell caps.Otherwise, gases or battery acid couldescape.R Make sure that detachable parts are recon‐

nected in the same way.

Tow-starting or towing awayPermitted towing methods

Mercedes-Benz recommends transporting yourvehicle in the case of a breakdown, rather thantowing it away.


For towing, use a tow rope or tow bar with bothaxles on the ground. Do not use tow bar sys‐tems.

& WARNING Risk of accident when towingwith steering wheel lock

You will no longer be able to steer the vehicleif the steering wheel lock is engaged.

# Always switch on the ignition when tow‐ing the vehicle with a tow cable or a towbar.

* NOTE Damage to the vehicle due to tow‐ing away incorrectly

# Observe the instructions and notes ontowing away.

Permitted towing methods

Vehicle equipment/towingmethod

Both axles on the ground Front axle raised Rear axle raised

Vehicles with manual transmission Yes, maximum 50 km at 50 km/h Yes, maximum 50 km at 50 km/h Yes, maximum 50 km at 50 km/h

Vehicles with automatic transmis‐sion

Yes, maximum 50 km at 50 km/h Yes, maximum 50 km at 50 km/h Yes, maximum 50 km at 50 km/h

4MATIC vehicles Yes, maximum 50 km at 50 km/h No No


Towing with a raised axle: towing should beperformed by a towing company.

Towing the vehicle with both axles on theground

# Observe the notes on the permitted towingmethods (/ page 514).

# Make sure that the battery is connected andcharged.

Observe the following points when the battery isdischarged:R the engine cannot be startedR the electric parking brake cannot be released

or appliedR vehicles with automatic transmission: the

automatic transmission cannot be shifted topositioni orj.

% Vehicles with automatic transmission: ifthe automatic transmission cannot be shif‐ted to positioni, or the multifunction dis‐play in the instrument cluster does not showanything, have the vehicle transported away

(/ page 517). A towing vehicle with liftingequipment is required for vehicle transporta‐tion.

* NOTE Damage due to towing away atexcessively high speeds or over long dis‐tances

The drivetrain could be damaged when tow‐ing at excessively high speeds or over longdistances.# A towing speed of 50 km/h must not

be exceeded.# A towing distance of 50 km must not be

exceeded.

& WARNING Risk of accident when towinga vehicle which is too heavy

If the vehicle being tow-started or towedaway is heavier than the permissible grossmass, the following situations can occur:R the towing eye may become detached.R the car/trailer combination may swerve

or even overturn.

# If another vehicle is tow-started ortowed away, its weight must not exceedthe permissible gross mass of your ownvehicle.

If a vehicle must be tow-started or towed away,its permissible gross weight must not exceed thepermissible gross weight of the towing vehicle.# Information on the permissible gross weight

of the vehicle can be found on the vehicleidentification plate (/ page 550).

# Vehicles with automatic transmission: donot open the driver's door or front passengerdoor, otherwise the automatic transmissionautomatically shifts to positionj.

# Fit the towing eye (/ page 519).# Fasten the tow bar.

* NOTE Damage due to incorrect connec‐tion of the tow bar

# Only connect the tow rope or tow bar tothe towing eyes.


# Deactivate the automatic locking mechanism(/ page 90).

# Do not activate the HOLD function.# Deactivate tow-away protection

(/ page 108).# Deactivate Active Brake Assist

(/ page 237).# Vehicles with automatic transmission:

shift the automatic transmission to positioni.

# Vehicles with manual transmission: shiftto neutrali.

# Release the electric parking brake.

& WARNING Risk of accident due to limi‐ted safety-related functions during thetowing process

Safety-related functions are limited or no lon‐ger available in the following situations:R the ignition is switched off.

R the brake system or power steering sys‐tem is malfunctioning.R the energy supply or the on-board electri‐

cal system is malfunctioning.

When your vehicle is then towed away, signif‐icantly more effort may be required to steerand brake than is normally required.# Use a tow bar.# Make sure that the steering wheel can

move freely, before towing the vehicleaway.

* NOTE Damage due to excessive tractivepower

If you pull away sharply, the tractive powermay be too high and the vehicles could bedamaged.# Pull away slowly and smoothly.

Loading the vehicle for transport

# Observe the notes on towing away(/ page 516).

# Connect the tow bar to the towing eye inorder to load the vehicle.

% You can also attach the tow bar to the trailerhitch.

# Vehicles with automatic transmission:shift the automatic transmission to positioni.

% Vehicles with automatic transmission:the automatic transmission may be locked inpositionj in the event of damage to theelectrical system. To shift toi, provide theon-board electrical system with power(/ page 513).

# Vehicles with manual transmission: shiftto neutral.

# Load the vehicle onto the transporter.# Vehicles with automatic transmission:

shift the automatic transmission to positionj.


# Vehicles with manual transmission:engage first or reverse gear.

# Use the electric parking brake to secure thevehicle against rolling away.

# Only secure the vehicle by the wheels.

Vehicles with ADS PLUS (Adaptive DampingSystem PLUS)

& WARNING Risk of an accident whentransporting vehicles with AdaptiveDamping System PLUS

The reduced damping forces on the vehiclebeing transported can cause the vehicle/trailer combination to start to swing.As a result, when transporting vehicles withthe Adaptive Damping System PLUS, thevehicle/trailer combination may start to skid.Consequently, you could lose control of yourvehicle.# When transporting, ensure that:R the vehicle has been loaded onto

the transporter correctly

R the vehicle is secured at all fourwheels with suitable tensioningstrapsR the maximum permissible speed of

60 km/h is not exceeded whentransporting

* NOTE Damage to the vehicle from secur‐ing it incorrectly

# After loading, the vehicle must besecured on all four wheels. Otherwise,the vehicle could be damaged.

# A minimum distance of 20 cm upwardsand 10 cm downwards must be kept tothe transport platform.

# Secure the vehicle on all four wheels afterloading.

4MATIC vehicles/vehicles with automatictransmission

# Make sure that the front and rear axles cometo rest on the same transportation vehicle.

* NOTE Damage to the drivetrain due toincorrect positioning

# Do not position the vehicle above theconnection point of the transport vehi‐cle.


Towing eye storage location

Towing eye1 is under the load compartmentfloor.

Installing the towing eye

# Press the mark on cover1 inwards andremove.

# Screw in the towing eye clockwise as far as itwill go and tighten.

Vehicles with a trailer hitch: vehicles with atrailer hitch do not have a rear bracket for the

towing eye. Fasten the tow bar to the trailerhitch.% Make sure that cover1 engages in the

bumper when you remove the towing eye.

* NOTE Damage to the vehicle due toincorrect use of the towing eye

When a towing eye is used to recover a vehi‐cle, the vehicle may be damaged in the proc‐ess.# Only use the towing eye to tow away or

tow start the vehicle.

Tow starting the vehicle (emergency enginestart)

Vehicles with automatic transmission

* NOTE Damage to the automatic trans‐mission due to tow-starting

The automatic transmission may be damagedin the process of tow-starting vehicles withautomatic transmission.


# Vehicles with automatic transmissionmust not be tow-started.

# Vehicles with automatic transmission mustnot be tow-started.

Vehicles with manual transmission# Observe the notes on towing away

(/ page 516).# If necessary, allow the engine and exhaust

system to cool down.# Switch the ignition on.# Engage second gear.# Release the electric parking brake.# Tow-start the vehicle while the clutch pedal

is fully depressed.# Slowly release the clutch pedal.# Immediately shift to neutral if the engine

starts.# Pull over and stop the vehicle, paying atten‐

tion to road and traffic conditions.# Remove the tow bar.

# Remove the towing eye.# Have the vehicle checked at a qualified spe‐

cialist workshop.

Electrical fusesNotes on electrical fuses

& WARNING Risk of accident and injurydue to overloaded lines

If you manipulate or bridge a faulty fuse or ifyou replace it with a fuse with a higheramperage, the electric line could be overloa‐ded.This could result in a fire.# Always replace faulty fuses with speci‐

fied new fuses containing the correctamperage.

* NOTE Damage due to incorrect fuses

Electrical components or systems may bedamaged by incorrect fuses, or their func‐tionality may be significantly impaired.

# Only use fuses that have been approvedby Mercedes-Benz and which have thecorrect fuse rating.

Blown fuses must be replaced with fuses of thesame rating, which you can recognise by the col‐our and fuse rating. The fuse ratings and furtherinformation to be observed can be found in thefuse assignment diagram.Fuse assignment diagram: on the fuse box inthe engine compartment (/ page 521).

* NOTE Damage or malfunctions causedby moisture

Moisture may cause damage to the electricalsystem or cause it to malfunction.# When the fuse box is open, make sure

that no moisture can enter the fusebox.

# When closing the fuse box, make surethat the seal of the lid is positioned cor‐rectly on the fuse box.


If the newly inserted fuse also blows, have thecause traced and rectified at a qualified special‐ist workshop.Ensure the following before replacing a fuse:R The vehicle is secured against rolling away.R All electrical consumers are switched off.R The ignition is switched off.

The electrical fuses are located in various fuseboxes:R Fuse box in the engine compartment on the

left-hand side of the vehicle, when viewed inthe direction of travel (/ page 521)R Fuse box in the front passenger footwell

(/ page 522)R Fuse box in the centre of the load compart‐

ment (/ page 523)

Opening and closing the fuse box in theengine compartment

Requirements:R A dry cloth and a screwdriver are available.

Observe the notes on electrical fuses(/ page 520).

Opening

& WARNING Risk of injury from using thewindscreen wipers while the engine bon‐net is open

When the engine bonnet is open, and thewindscreen wipers are set in motion, you canbe trapped by the wiper linkage.# Always switch off the windscreen wip‐

ers and ignition before opening theengine bonnet.

# Open the bonnet.# Remove any existing moisture from the fuse

box using a dry cloth.# Loosen screws1.# Press clamps2 and lift the fuse box lid up

and out.

The fuse allocation chart is in a recess on theside of the fuse box.


Closing# Check whether the seal is positioned cor‐

rectly in the lid.# Place the lid on the fuse box.# Make sure that clamps2 engage.# Tighten screws1.# Close the bonnet.

Opening and closing the fuse box in the frontpassenger footwell

Observe the notes on electrical fuses(/ page 520).

Opening

# Lift carpet1 in the direction of the arrow.

# Loosen screws2 and remove the fuse boxlid from the top.

Closing# Place the lid on the fuse box.# Tighten screws2.# Fold back the carpet.


Opening and closing the fuse box in the loadcompartment

Observe the notes on electrical fuses(/ page 520).# Open the load compartment floor

(/ page 140).

Fuse box1 is located underneath the loadcompartment floor.


Notes on noise or unusual handling charac‐teristicsWhile driving, pay attention to vibrations, noisesand unusual handling characteristics, e.g. pullingto one side. This may indicate that the wheels ortyres are damaged. If you suspect that a tyre isdefective, reduce your speed immediately. Stopthe vehicle as soon as possible to check thewheels and tyres for damage. Hidden tyre dam‐age could also be causing the unusual handlingcharacteristics. If you find no signs of damage,have the tyres and wheels checked at a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

Notes on regularly inspecting wheels andtyres

& WARNING Risk of accident from dam‐aged tyres

Damaged tyres can cause tyre pressure loss.As a result, you could lose control of yourvehicle.

# Check the tyres regularly for signs ofdamage and replace any damaged tyresimmediately.

& WARNING Risk of aquaplaning due toinsufficient tyre tread

Insufficient tyre tread will result in reducedtyre grip. The tyre tread is no longer able todissipate water.This means that in heavy rain or slush therisk of aquaplaning is increased, in particularwhere speed is not adapted to suit the condi‐tions.If the tyre pressure is too high or too low,tyres may exhibit different levels of wear atdifferent locations on the tyre tread.# Thus, you should regularly check the

tread depth and the condition of thetread across the entire width of alltyres.

Minimum tread depth for:R Summer tyres: 3 mmR M+S tyres: 4 mm

# For safety reasons, replace the tyresbefore the legally prescribed limit forthe minimum tread depth is reached.

Carry out the following checks on all wheels reg‐ularly, at least once a month or as required, e.g.prior to a long journey or driving off-road:R Check the tyre pressure (/ page 525).R Visually inspect wheels and tyres for dam‐

age.R Check the valve caps.

The valves must be protected against mois‐ture and dirt by the valve caps approvedespecially for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz.R Visual check of the tyre tread depth and the

tyre contact surface across the entire width.The minimum tread depth for summer tyresis 3 mm and for winter tyres 4 mm.

524 Wheels and tyres

Notes on snow chains

& WARNING Risk of accident due to incor‐rect snow chain fitting

If you fit snow chains to the rear wheels, thesnow chains may grind against the vehiclebody or chassis components.This could cause damage to the vehicle orthe tyres.# Never fit snow chains to the rear

wheels.# Always fit snow chains to the front

wheels in pairs.

* NOTE Damage to components of thevehicle body or chassis due to fittedsnow chains

If you fit snow chains to the front wheels of4MATIC vehicles, you may damage compo‐nents of the vehicle body or chassis.# Only fit snow chains to the rear wheels

of 4MATIC vehicles.

* NOTE Damage to the wheel trim from fit‐ted snow chains

If snow chains are fitted to steel wheels, thewheel trims can be damaged.# Remove the wheel trims of steel wheels

before fitting snow chains.

Observe the following notes when using snowchains:R Snow chains are only permissible for certain

wheel/tyre combinations. You can obtaininformation about this from a Mercedes-BenzService Centre.R For safety reasons, only use snow chains that

have been specifically approved for yourvehicle by Mercedes-Benz, or snow chainswith the same quality standard.R If snow chains are fitted, the maximum per‐

missible speed is 50 km/h.R Vehicles with Active Parking Assist: do

not use Active Parking Assist when snowchains are fitted.

% You can permanently limit the maximumvehicle speed for driving with winter tyres(/ page 241).

% You can deactivate ESP® to pull away(/ page 230). This allows the wheels tospin, achieving an increased driving force.

Tyre pressureNotes on tyre pressure

& WARNING Risk of accident due to insuf‐ficient or excessive tyre pressure

Underinflated or overinflated tyres pose thefollowing risks:R The tyres may burst, especially as the

load and vehicle speed increase.R The tyres may wear excessively and/or

unevenly, which may greatly impair tyretraction.R The driving characteristics, as well as

steering and braking, may be greatlyimpaired.

Wheels and tyres 525

# Comply with the recommended tyrepressure and check the tyre pressure ofall tyres including the spare wheel regu‐larly:R at least once a monthR when the load changesR before embarking on a longer journeyR if operating conditions change, e.g. off-

road driving

# Adjust the tyre pressure as necessary.

Tyre pressure which is too high or too low can:R Shorten the service life of the tyres.R Cause increased tyre damage.R Adversely affect driving characteristics and

thus driving safety, e.g. due to aquaplaning.

& WARNING Risk of accident from repea‐ted tyre pressure drop

If the tyre pressure drops repeatedly, thewheel, valve or tyre may be damaged.

Insufficient tyre pressure can cause the tyresto burst.# Inspect the tyre for signs of foreign

objects.# Check whether the wheel or valve has a

leak.# If you are unable to rectify the damage,

contact a qualified specialist workshop.

Information on the recommended tyre pressurefor the vehicle's factory-fitted tyres can be foundon the tyre pressure table on the inside of thefuel filler flap (/ page 526).Use a suitable pressure gauge to check the tyrepressure. The outer appearance of a tyre doesnot permit any reliable conclusion about the tyrepressure.Vehicles with a tyre pressure monitoring sys‐tem: you can also check the tyre pressure usingthe on-board computer.

Only correct tyre pressures when the tyres arecold. Conditions for cold tyres:R The vehicle has been parked with the tyres

out of direct sunlight for at least three hours.R The vehicle has travelled less than 1.6 km.

A rise in the tyre temperature of 10 °C increasesthe tyre pressure by approx. 10 kPa (0.1 bar/1.5 psi). Take this into account when checkingthe tyre pressure of warm tyres.

Notes on trailer operationAlways inflate the rear axle tyres to the recom‐mended tyre pressures on the tyre pressuretable for increased load.

Tyre pressure table

The tyre pressure table is on the inside of thefuel filler flap.


The tyre pressure table shows the recommendedtyre pressure for all tyres approved for this vehi‐cle. The recommended tyre pressures apply forcold tyres under various operating conditions,i.e. loading and/or speed of the vehicle.If one or more tyre sizes precede a tyre pres‐sure, the tyre pressure information following isonly valid for those tyre sizes.

If the preceding tyre sizes are complemented bythe + symbol, the tyre pressure informationfollowing shows alternative tyre pressures.These tyre pressures may improve your vehicle'sride comfort. Fuel consumption may thenincrease slightly.The load conditions "partially laden" and "fullyladen" are defined in the table for different num‐bers of passengers and amounts of luggage. Theactual number of seats may differ from this.Be sure to also observe the following furtherrelated subjects:R Notes on tyre pressure (/ page 525)

Tyre pressure monitoring system

Function of the tyre pressure monitoring sys‐temThe system checks the tyre pressure and thetyre temperature of the tyres fitted to the vehicleby means of a tyre pressure sensor.New tyre pressure sensors, e.g. in winter tyres,are automatically taught-in during the first jour‐ney they are used.

The tyre pressure and the tyre temperatureappear in the multifunction display(/ page 528).If there is a substantial pressure loss or if thetyre temperature is excessive, you will bewarned in the following ways:R via display messages (/ page 613)R via theh warning lamp in the instrument

cluster (/ page 637)

The tyre pressure monitoring system is only anaid. It is the driver's responsibility to set the tyrepressure to the recommended cold tyre pressuresuitable for the operating situation. Set the tyrepressure for cold tyres using a tyre pressuregauge. Note that the correct tyre pressure forthe current operating situation must first betaught-in to the tyre pressure monitoring sys‐tem.In most cases, the tyre pressure monitoring sys‐tem will automatically update the new referencevalues after you have changed the tyre pressure.You can, however, also update the reference val‐ues by restarting the tyre pressure monitoringsystem manually (/ page 528).


System limitsThe system may be impaired or may not functionin the following situations:R the tyre pressure has been set incorrectlyR there is a sudden pressure loss caused, for

example, by a foreign object penetrating thetyreR there is a malfunction caused by another

radio signal source

Be sure to also pay attention to the followingrelated topic:R notes on tyre pressure (/ page 525)

Checking the tyre pressure with the tyrepressure monitoring systemRequirements:R The ignition is switched on.

On-board computer:4 Service 5 TyresOne of the following displays appears:R Current tyre pressure and tyre temperature

of the individual wheels:

R Tyre pressures will be displayed after a fewminutes of drivingR Tyre pressure monitor active: the teach-in

process of the system is not yet complete.The tyre pressures are already being moni‐tored.

# Compare the tyre pressure with the recom‐mended tyre pressure for the current operat‐ing condition (/ page 526). Observe thenotes on tyre temperature (/ page 525).

% The values displayed in the multifunction dis‐play may deviate from those of the tyre pres‐sure gauge as they refer to sea level. At highaltitudes, the tyre pressure values indicated

by a pressure gauge are higher than thoseshown by the on-board computer. In thiscase, do not reduce the tyre pressure.

Make sure to observe the following further rela‐ted subject:R Notes on tyre pressure (/ page 525)

Restarting the tyre pressure monitoring sys‐temRequirements:R The recommended tyre pressure is correctly

set for the respective operating status oneach of the four wheels (/ page 525).

Restart the tyre pressure monitoring system inthe following situations:R The tyre pressure has changed.R The wheels or tyres have been changed or

newly fitted.


On-board computer:4 Service 5 Tyres# Swipe downwards on Touch Control on the

left-hand side of the steering wheel.The Use current pressures as new referencevalues? message is shown in the multifunc‐tion display.

# To begin restart, press Touch Control on theleft-hand side of the steering wheel.The Tyre press. monitor restarted message isshown in the multifunction display.Current warning messages are deleted andthe yellowh warning lamp goes out.After you have been driving for a fewminutes, the system checks whether the cur‐rent tyre pressures are within the specifiedrange. The current tyre pressures are thenaccepted as reference values and monitored.


Radio-equipment approval of the tyre pres‐sure monitoring system



Argentina

CNC ID: H-20027

Australia


Brazil

MODELO: TSSRE4AANATEL: 05181-17-06643Este equipamento opera emcaráter secundário, isto é, nãotem direito à proteção contrain‐terferência prejudicial, mesmo deestações do mesmo tipo e nãopode causar interferência a siste‐mas operando em caráter pri‐mário.



EuropeanUnion

Hiermit erklärt Huf Hülsbeck &Fürst GmbH & Co. KG, dass derFunkanlagentyp TSSRE4A &TSSSG4G6 der Richtlinie2014/53/EU entspricht.Der vollständige Text der EU-Kon‐formitätserklärung ist unter derfolgenden Internetadresse ver‐fügbar: http://www.huf-group.com/eudocFrequenzband: 433,92 MHzAbgestrahlte maximale Sende‐leistung: <10 mWHersteller:Huf Electronics Bretten GmbHGewerbestr. 40


75015 BrettenGermany

Indonesia 52166/SDPPI/20173533

Israel A. The use of this product doesnot need a wireless operationlicense.B. The product does not includean RF disturbance protection,and should not disturb otherlicensed products.C. It is forbidden to replace theantenna or to make any changein this product.


Jordan Kingdom of Jordan Type approvalfor Tyre Pressure Sensor and ECUManufacturer: Huf ElectronicsBretten GmbHModel: TSSRE4AType Approval Number:TRC/LPD/2017/421Model: TSSSG4G6Type Approval Number:TRC/LPD/2017/422

Malaysia

CIDF17000184Model: TSSRE4A & TSSSG4G6RAQP/57A/0817/S(17-2424)



Morocco AGREE PAR L'ANRT MAROCModele: TSSRE4ANumero d'agrement: MR 14320ANRT 2017Date d'agrement: 07/07/2017Modele: TSSSG4G6Numero d'agrement: MR 14319ANRT 2017Date d'agrement: 07/07/2017

Mexico Model: TSSRE4AIFETEL: RLVHUTS17-0806

Moldova

Oman TRAR/4516/17D100428


Philip‐pines

NTCType ApprovedNo: ESD-1715393C

Russia

Serbia

Singapore Complies with IDA StandardsDA103787


SouthAfrica

TA-2017/1393TA-2017/1391



Taiwan

CCAO17LP0380T4CCAO17LP0390T7經型式認證合格之低功率射頻電機,非經許可,公司、商號或使用者均

不得擅自變更頻率、加大功率或變更原設計之特性及功能。低功率射

頻電機之使用不得影響飛航安全及干擾合法通信;經發現有干擾現象

時,應立即停用,並改善至無干擾時方得繼續使用。前項合法通信,指依


電信法規定作業之無線電通信。低功率射頻電機須忍受合法通信或工

業、科學及醫療用電波輻射性電機設備之干擾。

According to “Administrative Reg‐ulations on Low Power RadioWaves Radiated Devices”.Without permission granted bythe DGT, any company, enter‐prise, or user is not allowed tochange frequency, enhancetransmitting power or alter origi‐nal characteristic as well as per‐formance to a approved lowpower radio-frequency devices.The low power radio-frequencydevices shall not influence air‐craft security and interfere legalcommunications; If found, theuser shall cease operating imme‐


diately until no interference isachieved.The said legal communicationsmeans radio communications isoperated in compliance with theTelecommunications Act.The low power radio-frequencydevices must be susceptible withthe interference from legal com‐munications or ISM radio waveradiated devices.

Thailand This telecommunication equip‐ment conforms to NTC technicalrequirement.

Ukraine

Model: TSSRE4A & TSSSG4G6UA.TR.109.0109-17



UnitedArab Emi‐rates(UAE)

TRARegistered No: ER57806/17Dealer No: DA36976/14TRARegistered No: ER57807/17Dealer No: DA36976/14

Vietnam

Huf Hülsbeck & Fürst GmbH &Co. KGModel: TSSRE4ANo: C0112200717AF04A2

Tyre pressure loss warning system

Function of the tyre pressure loss warningsystemThe tyre pressure loss warning system warns thedriver by means of display messages when thereis a severe tyre pressure loss.After a change in tyre pressure, a wheel rotationor a tyre change, or if you have refitted wheelsor tyres, the tyre pressure loss warning systemhas to be restarted (/ page 533).The tyre pressure loss warning system does notreplace the need to regularly check the tyrepressures.

System limitationsThe system may be impaired or may not functionparticularly in the following situations:R incorrectly set tyre pressureR sudden pressure loss caused, for example,

by a foreign object penetrating the tyreR steady pressure loss in several tyres

The system has a restricted or delayed functionparticularly in the following situations:R poor ground conditions, e.g. snow or gravelR driving with snow chainsR when adopting a very sporty driving style

with high cornering speeds or sudden accel‐erationR driving with a very heavy or large trailerR driving with a high load

Be sure to also observe the following furtherrelated subjects:R Notes on tyre pressure (/ page 525)R Display messages about the tyres

(/ page 613)

Restarting the tyre pressure loss warningsystemRequirements:R The recommended tyre pressure is correctly

set for the respective operating status oneach of the four wheels (/ page 525).


Restart the tyre pressure loss warning system inthe following situations:R The tyre pressure has changed.R The wheels or tyres have been changed or

newly fitted.

On-board computer:4 Service 5 Tyres# Swipe downwards on Touch Control on the

left-hand side of the steering wheel.The Run Flat Indicator activeRestart messageis shown in the multifunction display.

Restart the tyre pressure loss warning system inthe following situations:R The tyre pressure has changed.R The wheels or tyres have been changed or

newly fitted.

# To begin restart, press Touch Control on theleft-hand side of the steering wheel.The Tyre pressure now OK? message isshown in the multifunction display.

# Select Yes.

# To confirm restart, press Touch Control onthe left-hand side of the steering wheel.The Run Flat Indicator restarted message isshown in the multifunction display.After you have driven for a few minutes, thetyre pressure loss warning system monitorsthe set tyre pressures of all the tyres.

Be sure to also observe the following furtherrelated subjects:R Notes on tyre pressure (/ page 525)

Wheel changeNotes on selecting, fitting and replacingtyres

Mercedes-AMG vehicles: observe the notes inthe Supplement. Otherwise, you may fail to rec‐ognise dangers.You can ask for information regarding permittedwheel/tyre combinations at a Mercedes-BenzService Centre.

& WARNING Risk of accident due to incor‐rect dimensions of wheels and tyres

If wheels and tyres of the wrong size areused, the wheel brakes or wheel suspensioncomponents may become damaged.# Always replace wheels and tyres with

those that fulfil the specifications of theoriginal part.

When replacing wheels, make sure to fit thecorrect:R DesignationR Type

When replacing tyres, make sure to fit thecorrect:R DesignationR ManufacturerR Type


& WARNING Risk of injury through exceed‐ing the specified tyre load-bearing capa‐city or the permissible speed rating

Exceeding the specified tyre load-bearingcapacity or the permissible speed rating maylead to tyre damage and to the tyres burst‐ing.# Therefore, only use tyre types and sizes

approved for your vehicle model.# Observe the tyre load-bearing capacity

rating and speed rating required foryour vehicle.

* NOTE Vehicle and tyre damage throughtyre types and sizes that have not beenapproved

For safety reasons, only use tyres, wheelsand accessories which have been speciallyapproved by Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle.

These tyres are specially adapted to the con‐trol systems, such as ABS, ESP® and4MATIC, and marked as follows:R MO = Mercedes-Benz OriginalR MOE = Mercedes-Benz Original Extended

(run-flat tyres only for certain wheels)R MO1 = Mercedes-Benz Original (only cer‐

tain AMG tyres)

Certain characteristics, such as handling,vehicle noise emissions, fuel consumption,etc. may otherwise be adversely affected.Furthermore, other tyre sizes could result inthe tyres rubbing against the body and axlecomponents when loaded. This could resultin damage to the tyre or the vehicle.Only use tyres, wheels and accessories thathave been checked and recommended byMercedes-Benz.

* NOTE Risk to driving safety from retrea‐ded tyres

Retreaded tyres are neither tested nor rec‐ommended by Mercedes-Benz, since previ‐ous damage cannot always be detected onretreaded tyres.For this reason driving safety cannot be guar‐anteed.# Do not use used tyres if you have no

information about their previous usage.

* NOTE Possible damage to wheels ortyres when driving over obstacles

Large wheels have a lower tyre section width.The lower the tyre section width, the greateris the risk of damage to wheels or tyres whendriving over obstacles.# Avoid obstacles or drive particularly

carefully.


* NOTE Damage to electronic componentparts from the use of tyre-fitting tools

Vehicles with a tyre pressure monitoringsystem: electronic component parts arelocated in the wheel. Tyre-fitting tools shouldnot be applied in the area of the valve.The tools could damage the electronic com‐ponent parts.# Have the tyres changed at a qualified

specialist workshop only.

* NOTE Damage to summer tyres at lowambient temperatures

At low ambient temperatures, tears couldform when driving with summer tyres, caus‐ing permanent damage to the tyre.# At temperatures below 7 °C, use M+S

tyres.

Accessory parts that are not approved for yourvehicle by Mercedes-Benz or are not being usedcorrectly can impair the operating safety.

Before purchasing and using non-approvedaccessories, visit a qualified specialist workshopand enquire about:R SuitabilityR Legal stipulationsR Factory recommendations

& WARNING Risk of accident with highperformance tyres

The special tyre tread in combination withthe optimised tyre compound, means thatthe risk of skidding or hydroplaning on wetroads is increased.In addition, the tyre grip is greatly reduced ata low outside temperature and tyre runningtemperature.# Switch on the ESP® and adapt your

driving style accordingly.# Use M+S tyres at outside temperatures

of less than 50 °F.

Observe the following when selecting, fitting andreplacing tyres:R Country-specific requirements for tyre

approval that define a specific tyre type foryour vehicle.Furthermore, the use of certain tyre types incertain regions and areas of operation canbe highly beneficial.R Only use tyres and wheels of the same type

(summer tyres, winter tyres, MOExtendedtyres) and the same make.R Only fit wheels of the same size on one axle

(left and right).It is only permissible to fit a different wheelsize in the event of a flat tyre in order todrive to the specialist workshop.R Only fit tyres of the correct size onto the

wheels.R Do not make any modifications to the brake

system, the wheels or the tyres.The use of shims or brake dust shields is notpermitted and may invalidate the vehicle'sgeneral operating permit.


R Vehicles with a tyre pressure monitoringsystem: all fitted wheels must be equippedwith functioning sensors for the tyre pres‐sure monitoring system.R At temperatures below 7 °C, use winter tyres

or all-season tyres marked M+S for allwheels.Winter tyres bearing thei snowflakesymbol in addition to the M+S marking pro‐vide the best possible grip in wintry roadconditions.R For M+S tyres, only use tyres with the same

tread.R Observe the maximum permissible speed for

the M+S tyres fitted.If this is below the vehicle's maximum speed,this must be indicated by an appropriatelabel in the driver's field of vision.R Run in new tyres at moderate speeds for the

first 100 km.R Replace the tyres after six years at the latest,

regardless of wear.

R When replacing with tyres that do notfeature run-flat characteristics: vehicleswith MOExtended tyres are not equippedwith a TIREFIT kit at the factory. Equip thevehicle with a TIREFIT kit after replacing withtyres that do not feature run-flat characteris‐tics, e.g. winter tyres.

% You can permanently limit the maximumvehicle speed for driving with winter tyres(/ page 241).

For more information on wheels and tyres, con‐tact a qualified specialist workshop.Be sure to also observe the following furtherrelated subjects:R Notes on tyre pressure (/ page 525)R Tyre pressure table (/ page 526)R Notes on the emergency spare wheel

(/ page 544)

Notes on interchanging wheels

& WARNING Risk of injury through differ‐ent wheel sizes

Interchanging the front and rear wheels if thewheels or tyres have different dimensionsmay severely impair the driving characteris‐tics.The disk brakes or wheel suspension compo‐nents may also be damaged.# Rotate front and rear wheels only if the

wheels and tyres are of the samedimensions.

Interchanging the front and rear wheels if thewheels or tyres have different dimensions canrender the general operating permit invalid.The wear patterns on the front and rear wheelsdiffer:R Front wheels wear more on the shoulder of

the tyreR Rear wheels wear more in the centre of the

tyre


Do not drive with tyres that have too little treaddepth. This significantly reduces traction on wetroads (aquaplaning).On vehicles with the same front and rear wheelsize, you can interchange the wheels every5,000 to 10,000 km, depending on the wear.Ensure the direction of rotation is maintained forthe wheels.Observe the instructions and safety notes on"Changing a wheel" when doing so(/ page 539).

Notes on storing wheels

When storing wheels, observe the followingnotes:R After removing wheels, store them in a cool,

dry and preferably dark place.R Protect the tyres from contact with oil,

grease or fuel.

Overview of the tyre-change tool kit

Apart from some country-specific variants, vehi‐cles are not equipped with a tyre-change tool kit.For more information on which tyre-changingtool kits are required and approved for perform‐ing a wheel change on your vehicle, consult aqualified specialist workshop.You require the following tools, for instance, tochange a wheel:R JackR ChockR Wheel wrenchR Centring pin

% The jack weighs approximately 3.4 kg.The maximum load capacity of the jack canbe found on the sticker affixed to the jack.The jack is maintenance-free. If there is amalfunction, please contact a qualified spe‐cialist workshop.

The tyre-change tool kit is located in tool bag1in the load compartment.

Tool bag contains:R JackR GlovesR Wheel wrenchR Centring pinR Folding chockR Ratchet for jack


Setting up the folding chock

Preparing the vehicle for a wheel change

Requirements:R The required tyre-change tool kit is available.

If your vehicle is not equipped with the tyre-change tool kit, consult a qualified specialistworkshop to find out about suitable tools.

R The vehicle is not on a slope.R The vehicle is on solid, non-slippery and level

ground.

# Apply the electric parking brake manually.# Move the front wheels to the straight-ahead

position.# Vehicles with manual transmission:

engage first or reverse gear.# Vehicles with automatic transmission:

shift into positionj.# Switch off the engine.# Make sure that the engine cannot be started.# Place chocks or other suitable items under

the front and rear of the wheel that is diago‐nally opposite the wheel you wish to change.

# Remove the hub caps if necessary(/ page 539).

# Raise the vehicle (/ page 540).

Removing and fitting hub caps

Requirements:

R The vehicle is prepared for a wheel change(/ page 539).

Vehicles with steel wheelsThe wheel trim covers the wheel bolts. Beforeunscrewing the wheel bolts, remove the wheeltrim.

# To remove: using both hands, carefully reachinto two wheel trim openings and remove thewheel trim.

Plastic hub cap# To remove: turn the centre cover of the hub

cap anti-clockwise and remove the hub cap.


# To fit: make sure that the centre cover of thehub cap is turned anti-clockwise.

# Position the hub cap and turn the centrecover clockwise until the hub cap engagesphysically and audibly.

Raising the vehicle when changing a wheel

Requirements:R There are no persons in the vehicle.R The vehicle has been prepared for a wheel

change (/ page 539).R The hub caps have been removed

(/ page 539).

Important notes on using the jack:R Use only a vehicle-specific jack that has

been approved by Mercedes-Benz to raisethe vehicle.R The jack is only designed for raising and

holding the vehicle for a short time while awheel is being changed and not for mainte‐nance work under the vehicle.

R The jack must be placed on a firm, flat andnon-slip surface. If necessary, use a large,flat, load-bearing, non-slip underlay.R The foot of the jack must be positioned verti‐

cally under the jack support point.

Rules of conduct when the vehicle is raised:R Never place your hands or feet under the

vehicle.R Never lie under the vehicle.R Do not start the engine and do not release

the electric parking brake.R Do not open or close any doors or the tail‐

gate.

# Using the wheel wrench, loosen the wheelbolts on the wheel you wish to change byabout one full turn. Do not unscrew the boltscompletely.


Position of jack support points

& WARNING Risk of injury from incorrectpositioning of the jack

If you do not position the jack correctly atthe appropriate jacking point of the vehicle,the jack could tip with the vehicle raised.# Only position the jack at the appropri‐

ate jacking point of the vehicle. Thebase of the jack must be positionedvertically under the jacking point of thevehicle.

* NOTE Vehicle damage from the jack

If you do not position the jack correctly atthe appropriate jack support point of thevehicle, the jack could tip over with the vehi‐cle raised.# The jack is designed exclusively for

jacking up the vehicle at the jack sup‐port points.

# Take the ratchet out of the tyre-change toolkit and place it on the hexagon nut of thejack so that the letters "AUF" are visible.

# Position jack2 at jack support point1.# Turn ratchet3 clockwise until jack2 sits

completely on jack support point1 and thebase of the jack lies evenly on the ground.

# Turn ratchet3 until the tyre is raised a max‐imum of 3 cm from the ground.

# Loosen and remove the wheel (/ page 542).


Removing a wheel

Requirements:R The vehicle is raised (/ page 540).

When changing a wheel, avoid applying any forceto the brake discs, since this could impair thelevel of comfort when braking.

* NOTE Damage to threading from dirt onwheel bolts

# Do not place wheel bolts in sand or ona dirty surface.

# Unscrew the uppermost wheel bolt com‐pletely.

# Screw centring pin1 into the threadinstead of the wheel bolt.

# Unscrew the remaining wheel bolts com‐pletely.

# Remove the wheel and, if necessary, store itin the load compartment.

# Notes on removing an emergency sparewheel (/ page 544).

# Fit the new wheel (/ page 542).

Fitting a new wheel

Requirements:R The wheel is removed (/ page 542).

& WARNING Risk of accident from losing awheel

Oiled, greased or damaged wheel bolt/wheelnut threads or wheel hub/wheel mountingbolt threads can cause the wheel bolts/wheel nuts to come loose.As a result, you could lose a wheel while driv‐ing.# Never oil or grease the threads.# In the event of damage to the threads,

contact a qualified specialist workshopimmediately.

# Have the damaged wheel bolts or dam‐aged hub threads replaced.

# Do not continue driving.

# Observe the information on the choice oftyres (/ page 534).

For tyres with a specified direction of rotation,an arrow on the side wall of the tyre indicatesthe correct direction of rotation. Observe thedirection of rotation when fitting.


# Slide the wheel to be mounted onto the cen‐tring pin and push it on.

# Notes on fitting an emergency spare wheel(/ page 544).

& WARNING Risk of injury from tighteningwheel bolts and nuts

If you tighten the wheel bolts or wheel nutswhen the vehicle is raised, the jack could tip.# Only tighten wheel bolts or wheel nuts

when the vehicle is on the ground.

# Be sure to observe the instructions andsafety notes on "Changing a wheel"(/ page 534).

# For safety reasons, only use wheel boltswhich have been approved by Mercedes-Benz and for the wheel in question.

# Tighten the wheel bolts evenly in a diagonalpattern in the order indicated until they arefinger-tight.

# Unscrew the centring pin.

# Tighten the last wheel bolt until it is finger-tight.

# Lower the vehicle (/ page 543).

Lowering the vehicle after a wheel change

Requirements:R The new wheel has been fitted

(/ page 542).

# Place the ratchet onto the hexagon nut of thejack so that the letters "AB" are visible.

# To lower the vehicle: turn the ratchet of thejack anti-clockwise.

# Tighten the wheel bolts evenly in a diagonalpattern in the order indicated1 to5 witha maximum of 80 Nm.

# Tighten the wheel bolts evenly in a diagonalpattern in the order indicated1 to5 tothe specified tightening torque of 130 Nm.

& WARNING Risk of injury through incor‐rect tightening torque

The wheels could come loose if the wheelbolts or wheel nuts are not tightened to theprescribed tightening torque.# Make sure the wheel bolts or wheel

nuts are tightened to the prescribedtightening torque.

# If you are not sure, do not move thevehicle. Consult a qualified specialistworkshop and have the tightening tor‐que checked immediately.

# Check the tyre pressure of the newly moun‐ted wheel and adjust accordingly.


# Vehicles with tyre pressure loss warningsystem: restart the tyre pressure loss warn‐ing system (/ page 533).Exception: the new wheel is an emergencyspare wheel.

# Vehicles with a tyre pressure monitoringsystem: restart the tyre pressure monitoringsystem (/ page 528).Exception: the new wheel is an emergencyspare wheel.


Emergency spare wheelNotes on the emergency spare wheel

& WARNING Risk of accident caused byincorrect wheel and tyre dimensions

The wheel or tyre size and the tyre type ofthe emergency spare wheel or spare wheeland the wheel to be replaced may differ.

Mounting an emergency spare wheel/sparewheel may severely impair the driving char‐acteristics.To prevent hazardous situations:# Adapt your driving style accordingly and

drive carefully.# Never fit more than one emergency

spare wheel or spare wheel that differsin size.

# Only use an emergency spare wheel orspare wheel of a different size briefly.

# Do not switch off ESP®.# Have the emergency spare wheel or

spare wheel of a different size replacedat the nearest qualified specialist work‐shop. The new wheel must have thecorrect dimensions.

Observe the following notes on removing anemergency spare wheel:R Before stowing the emergency spare wheel,

make sure there is no air left in the tyre.If necessary, allow the air to escape.

R To release air from the tyre: remove thevalve cap of the tyre.R Press down the metal insert in the valve

using a pointed object, e.g. a pen.R Screw the valve cap onto the valve.R Stow the deflated emergency spare wheel in

the emergency spare wheel bag in the lug‐gage compartment (/ page 545).

% Vehicles with adjustable load compart‐ment floor: always stow the deflated emer‐gency spare wheel in the lower position onthe adjustable load compartment floor.

Observe the following notes on fitting an emer‐gency spare wheel:R Fit the emergency spare wheel when it is

deflated (/ page 542).R Inflate the emergency spare wheel after fit‐

ting it (/ page 545).

The maximum permissible speed with an emer‐gency spare wheel fitted is 80 km/h.Do not fit the emergency spare wheel with snowchains.


Replace the emergency spare wheel after sixyears at the latest, regardless of wear.% Vehicles with a tyre pressure loss warn‐

ing system: if an emergency spare wheel isfitted the tyre pressure loss warning systemcannot function reliably. Only restart the sys‐tem again when the emergency spare wheelhas been replaced with a new wheel.Vehicles with a tyre pressure monitoringsystem: if an emergency spare wheel is fit‐ted the tyre pressure monitoring system can‐not function reliably. For a few minutes afteran emergency spare wheel is fitted, the sys‐tem may still display the tyre pressure of theremoved wheel. Only restart the systemagain when the emergency spare wheel hasbeen replaced with a new wheel.

Be sure to also observe the following furtherrelated subjects:R Notes on tyre pressure (/ page 525)R Tyre pressure table (/ page 526)

Removing the emergency spare wheel

The deflated emergency spare wheel is securedin the emergency spare wheel bag in the loadcompartment and is secured to the adjustableload compartment floor in the lower position.# Observe the information on mounting tyres

(/ page 534).# Open the tailgate.# Detach the securing straps.# Unhook the retaining spring hooks of the

securing straps from the brackets.# Remove the emergency spare wheel bag with

the emergency spare wheel.# Open the emergency spare wheel bag and

remove the emergency spare wheel.

Inflating the emergency spare wheel

* NOTE Overheating due to the tyre infla‐tion compressor running too long

# Do not run the tyre inflation compres‐sor for longer than ten minutes withoutinterruption.

Requirements:R Comply with the manufacturer's safety notes

on the sticker of the emergency spare wheeland on the tyre inflation compressor.R Remove the tyre inflation compressor from

the stowage space under the luggage com‐partment floor (/ page 504).


# Remove sticker1 from the tyre inflationcompressor housing and affix it to the instru‐ment cluster within the driver's field ofvision.

# Pull filler hose2 and plug4 out of the tyreinflation compressor housing.

# Insert plug8 of filler hose2 in the socketon the tyre inflation compressor and thenturn it until plug8 engages.

# Unscrew the cap from the valve on the emer‐gency spare wheel.

# Screw union nut3 of filler hose2 onto thevalve.

# Make sure on and off switch5 of the tyreinflation compressor is set to 0.

# Insert plug4 in a socket in your vehicle.R Cigarette lighter socket: (/ page 147)R 12 V socket: (/ page 147)

R Observe the notes on the cigarette lighter:(/ page 147)R Observe the notes on sockets: (/ page 147)

# Turn the key to position1 in the ignitionlock.

# Press on and off switch5 on the tyre infla‐tion compressor to I.The tyre inflation compressor is switched on.The tyre is inflated. The tyre pressure isshown on manometer6.

# Pump the tyre to the specified tyre pressure.The specified tyre pressure is stated on thelabel of the emergency spare wheel.

# When the specified tyre pressure has beenreached, press on and off switch5 on thetyre inflation compressor to 0.The tyre inflation compressor is switched off.

# Turn the key to positiong in the ignitionlock.

# If the tyre pressure is higher than the speci‐fied pressure, press pressure release valvebutton7 until the correct tyre pressure hasbeen reached.

# Unscrew union nut3 of filler hose2 fromthe valve.

# Screw the valve cap of the emergency sparewheel onto the valve again.


# Stow filler hose2 and plug4 in the lowersection of the compressor housing.

# Stow the tyre inflation compressor in thevehicle.


Notes on technical dataMercedes-AMG vehicles: be sure to observethe notes in the Supplement. Otherwise, youmay fail to recognise dangers.The technical data was determined in accord‐ance with EU Directives. The data stated onlyapplies to vehicles with standard equipment. Youcan obtain further information from a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.Only for certain countries: you can find vehi‐cle-specific vehicle data in the EC-Certificate ofConformity (CERTIFICATE OF CONFORMITY).These documents are delivered with your vehi‐cle.

On-board electronicsNotes on tampering with the engine elec‐tronics

* NOTE Premature wear through impropermaintenance

Improper maintenance may cause vehiclecomponents to wear more quickly and thevehicle's operating permit may be invalida‐ted.# Always have work on the engine elec‐

tronics and related components carriedout at a qualified specialist workshop.

Two-way radios

Notes on fitting two-way radios

& WARNING Risk of accident due toimproper work on two-way radios

The electromagnetic radiation from two-wayradios can interfere with the on-board elec‐

tronics if RF transmitters are manipulated orretrofitted incorrectly.This could jeopardise the operating safety ofthe vehicle.# You should have all work on electrical

and electronic components carried outat a qualified specialist workshop.

& WARNING Risk of accident from incor‐rect operation of two-way radios

If you operate two-way radios incorrectly inthe vehicle, the electromagnetic radiationcould interfere with the on-board electronics,e.g.:R if the two-way radio is not connected to

an exterior aerialR if the exterior aerial is not correctly

mounted or is not of low reflection

This could jeopardise the operating safety ofthe vehicle.# Have the low-reflection exterior aerial

fitted at a qualified specialist workshop.

548 Technical data

# When operating two-way radios in thevehicle, always connect them to thelow-reflection exterior aerial.

* NOTE Invalidation of the operating per‐mit due to failure to comply with theinstructions for installation and use

The operating permit may be invalidated ifthe instructions for installation and use oftwo-way radios are not observed.# Only use approved frequency bands.# Observe the maximum permissible out‐

put power in these frequency bands.# Only use approved aerial positions.

1 Front roof area2 Rear roof area3 Rear wings

On vehicles with a panoramic sliding sunroof, fit‐ting an aerial to the front or rear roof area is notpermitted.

On the rear wings, it is recommended that youfit the aerial on the side of the vehicle closest tothe centre of the road.Use Technical Specification ISO/TS 21609 (RoadVehicles – "EMCs for installation of aftermarketradio frequency transmitting equipment") whenretrofitting two-way radios. Comply with thelegal requirements for detachable parts.If your vehicle has fittings for two-way radioequipment, use the power supply and aerial con‐nectors provided in the pre-installation. Be sureto observe the manufacturer's supplementswhen fitting.

Two-way radio transmission outputThe maximum transmission output (PEAK) at thebase of the aerial must not exceed the values inthe following table.

Technical data 549

Frequency band and maximum transmissionoutput

Frequency band Maximum transmis‐sion output

Short wave3 - 54 MHz

100 W

4 m frequency band74 - 88 MHz

30 W

2 m frequency band144 - 174 MHz

50 W

Trunked radio sys‐tem/Tetra380 - 460 MHz

10 W

70 cm frequencyband420 - 450 MHz

35 W

Two-way radio(2G/3G/4G)

10 W

The following can be used in the vehicle withoutrestrictions:R two-way radios with a maximum transmission

output of up to 100 mWR RF transmitters with transmitter frequencies

in the 380 - 410 MHz frequency band and amaximum transmission output of up to 2 W(trunked radio system/Tetra)R mobile phones (2G/3G/4G)

There are no restrictions when positioning theaerial on the outside of the vehicle for somewavebands.This applies to the following wavebands:R trunked radio system/TetraR 70 cm frequency bandR 2G/3G/4G

Vehicle identification plate, VIN and enginenumber overview

Vehicle identification plate

550 Technical data

Vehicle identification plate (example: Kuwait)1 Vehicle manufacturer2 Place of manufacture3 Manufacturing date4 Vehicle model5 VIN

Vehicle identification plate (example: allother countries)

1 Vehicle manufacturer2 EU general operating permit number (only

for certain countries)3 VIN (vehicle identification number)4 Maximum permissible gross vehicle weight

(kg)

5 Maximum permissible gross weight of vehi‐cle combination (kg) (only for specific coun‐tries)

6 Maximum permissible front axle load (kg)7 Maximum permissible rear axle load (kg)8 Paint code

% The data shown in the illustration is exampledata.

Technical data 551

VIN and engine number

1 Engine number stamped into the crankcase2 VIN (vehicle identification number) stamped

into the crossmember3 VIN (vehicle identification number) as a label

at the lower edge of the windscreen

The VIN as a label at the lower edge of wind‐screen3 is only available in some countries.Further information can be obtained at a quali‐fied specialist workshop.

Operating fluidsNotes on operating fluids

Mercedes-AMG vehicles: be sure to observethe notes in the Supplement. Otherwise, youmay fail to recognise dangers.

& WARNING Risk of injury from operatingfluids harmful to your health

Operating fluids may be poisonous and harm‐ful to your health.# Observe the text on the original con‐

tainers when using, storing or disposingof operating fluids.

# Always store operating fluids sealed intheir original containers.

# Always keep children away from operat‐ing fluids.

+ ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmentalpollution caused by environmentally irre‐sponsible disposal

# Dispose of operating fluids in an envi‐ronmentally responsible manner.

Operating fluids include the following:R fuelsR DeNOx agent AdBlue® for exhaust gas after‐

treatmentR lubricantsR coolantR brake fluidR windscreen washer fluidR climate control system refrigerant

Only use products approved by Mercedes-Benz.Damage caused by the use of products that havenot been approved is not covered by theMercedes-Benz warranty or goodwill gestures.You can identify operating fluids approved byMercedes-Benz by the following inscriptions onthe container:

552 Technical data

R MB-Freigabe (e.g. MB-Freigabe 229.51)R MB-Approval (e.g. MB-Approval 229.51)

Further information on approved operating fluidsis available at the following locations:R in the Mercedes-Benz Specifications for

Operating Fluids by entering the designation- at https://bevo.mercedes-benz.com- in the Mercedes-Benz BeVo appR at a qualified specialist workshop

& WARNING Risk of fire or explosion fromfuel

Fuels are highly flammable.# Fire, naked flames, smoking and crea‐

tion of sparks must be avoided.# Switch off the ignition and, if available,

the stationary heater, before and whilerefuelling the vehicle.

& WARNING Risk of injury from fuels

Fuels are poisonous and hazardous to yourhealth.# Do not swallow fuel or let it come into

contact with skin, eyes or clothing.# Do not inhale fuel vapour.# Keep children away from fuel.# Keep doors and windows closed during

the refuelling process.

If you or other people come into contact withfuel, observe the following:# Immediately rinse fuel off your skin with

soap and water.# If fuel comes into contact with your

eyes, immediately rinse them thor‐oughly with clean water. Seek medicalattention immediately.

# If you swallow fuel, seek medical atten‐tion immediately. Do not induce vomit‐ing.

# Change immediately out of clothing thathas come into contact with fuel.

Fuel

Information on fuel grades for vehicles withpetrol enginesObserve the notes on operating fluids(/ page 552).


Even small amounts of the wrong fuel couldresult in damage to the fuel system, theengine and the emission control system.# Only refuel using unleaded, sulphur-free

fuel that conforms to European EN 228,or an equivalent specification.

Fuel of this specification may contain up to10% ethanol by volume. Your vehicle is suita‐ble for use with E10 fuel.

Technical data 553

Never refuel with one of the following fuels:R dieselR regular petrol with an octane number

lower than 91 RONR petrol with more than 10 vol.% ethanol

e.g. E15, E20, E85, E100R petrol with more than 3% methanol by

volume, e.g. M15, M30R petrol with additives containing metal

If you have accidentally refuelled with thewrong fuel:# do not switch the ignition on.# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The following compatibility indications for fuelapply to your vehicle:

1 For petrol with maximum 5% ethanol by vol‐ume

2 For petrol with maximum 10% ethanol by vol‐ume

According to European standard EN 16942 youcan find the compatibility indications at the fol‐lowing locations:R on the vehicle on the information label on the

fuel filler flap (/ page 209).R on the fuel pump or pump nozzle suitable for

your vehicle throughout Europe.

If the available fuel is not sufficiently low in sul‐phur, this can produce unpleasant odours.

The recommended octane number for your vehi‐cle can also be found on the information label inthe fuel filler flap (/ page 209).As a temporary measure, if the recommendedfuel is not available, you may also use regularunleaded petrol with at least 91 RON. This mayreduce engine output and increase fuel con‐sumption.Never refuel using petrol with an even lowerRON.Further information on fuel can be obtained at afilling station or a qualified specialist workshop.

Information on additives in petrolObserve the notes on operating fluids(/ page 552).

* NOTE Damage from use of unsuitableadditives

Even small amounts of the wrong additivemay lead to malfunctions occurring.# Only add cleaning additives recommen‐

ded by Mercedes-Benz to the fuel.

554 Technical data

Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use fuelbrands that have additives.In some countries, the fuel available may nothave sufficient additives. Residue could build upin the fuel injection system as a result. In thiscase, in consultation with a Mercedes-Benzservice centre, the fuel may be mixed with thecleaning additive recommended by Mercedes-Benz. Be sure to observe the notes and mixingratios specified on the container.

Information on fuel grades for vehicles witha diesel engine

General notesObserve the notes on operating fluids(/ page 552).

& WARNING Risk of fire from fuel mixture

If you mix diesel fuel with petrol, the flashpoint of the fuel mixture is lower than that ofpure diesel fuel.While the engine is running, componentparts in the exhaust system may overheatwithout warning.

# Never refuel using petrol in dieselengines.

# Never mix petrol with diesel fuel.


Even small amounts of the wrong fuel couldresult in damage to the fuel system, theengine and the emission control system.# Only refuel using sulphur-free diesel

fuel that conforms to European stand‐ard EN 590, or an equivalent specifica‐tion.In countries without sulphur-free dieselfuel, refuel using only low-sulphur dieselfuel with a sulphur content less than50 ppm.

Never refuel with one of the following fuels:R petrolR marine dieselR heating oilR pure bio-diesel fuel or vegetable oil

R paraffin or kerosene

If you have accidentally refuelled with thewrong fuel:# Do not switch the ignition on.# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The following compatibility indication for fuelapplies to your vehicle:

1 For diesel fuel with a maximum of 7% by vol‐ume bio-diesel (fatty acid methyl ester)

Technical data 555

According to European standard EN 16942 youcan find the compatibility indications at the fol‐lowing locations:R on the information label on the fuel filler flap

(/ page 209)R on the fuel pump or pump nozzle suitable for

your vehicle throughout Europe

Information on low outside temperaturesRefuel your vehicle with as much winter dieselfuel as possible at the beginning of winter.Before changing over to winter diesel fuel, thefuel tank should be empty, if possible. When firstrefuelling with winter diesel fuel, only refuelusing a small amount, e.g. to reserve level. Thefuel tank can be filled as usual when next refuel‐ling.Further information on fuel can be obtained at afilling station or a qualified specialist workshop.

Tank content and reserve fuel

Capacity

Model Total capacity

GLB 180 d 4MATICGLB 200 d 4MATICGLB 220 d 4MATICGLB 250 4MATIC

60.0 litres

All other models 52.0 litres

Model of which reservefuel

All models 6.0 litres

AdBlue®

Notes on AdBlue®Observe the notes on operating fluids(/ page 552).

AdBlue® is a water-soluble fluid for the NOxexhaust gas aftertreatment of diesel engines.

It may be improper or punishable in some coun‐tries to operate a vehicle that uses no AdBlue®or one that does not comply with the specifica‐tions of these operating instructions.

* NOTE Malfunctions due to the dilution ofAdBlue® or the use of additive-enhancedAdBlue®

The function of the NOx exhaust gas after‐treatment can be impaired by the use ofunsuitable denoxification agents.# Only use AdBlue® in accordance with

ISO 22241.# Do not dilute AdBlue® with water.# Do not use additive-enhanced AdBlue®.

* NOTE Damage and malfunctions due toimpurities in AdBlue®

Consequences of impurities in AdBlue®:R increased emission valuesR damage to the catalytic converter

556 Technical data

R NOx exhaust gas aftertreatment malfunc‐tions

# Avoid impurities in AdBlue®.

AdBlue® residues crystallise after a period oftime, and contaminate the surfaces with whichthey come into contact. Clean the dirty surfaceswith water as soon as possible.

When you open the AdBlue® tank, smallamounts of ammonia vapour may escape. Donot inhale any ammonia vapours that may bereleased. Only fill the AdBlue® tank in well-venti‐lated areas.

AdBlue® filling capacity and consumption

Total capacity of AdBlue® tank

Model Total capacity

All models 23.8 litres

AdBlue® consumptionThe average AdBlue® consumption is between1% and 5% of fuel consumption. Like fuel con‐

sumption, AdBlue® consumption is highlydependent upon driving style and operating con‐ditions. For this reason, your vehicle's actualconsumption figures under day-to-day operatingconditions may differ from the consumption fig‐ures calculated. The frequency at which you willhave to top up AdBlue® will also vary. Have theAdBlue® supply checked at a qualified specialistworkshop before making journeys outside ofEurope. Before a longer stay outside of Europe,consult a qualified specialist workshop.

AdBlue® range and fill levelThe AdBlue® fill level and range can be displayedvia the on-board computer. The AdBlue® rangeshown depends strongly on the driving style andoperating conditions. The actual range cantherefore deviate from the range currently dis‐played in the on-board computer. The informa‐tion supplied in the Owner's Manual regardingthe reserve quantity at the first display warningand on the minimum top-up quantity when thetank is empty is also to be understood as guidevalues.

Display the AdBlue® range and level(/ page 300).

Engine oil

Notes on engine oilObserve the notes on operating fluids(/ page 552).

* NOTE Engine damage caused by anincorrect oil filter, incorrect oil or addi‐tives

# Do not use engine oils or oil filterswhich do not correspond to the specifi‐

Technical data 557

cations explicitly prescribed for theservice intervals.

# Do not alter the engine oil or oil filter inorder to achieve longer change intervalsthan prescribed.

# Do not use additives.# Have the engine oil renewed at regular

intervals.

Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have theoil change carried out at a qualified specialistworkshop.Only Mercedes-Benz approved engine oils maybe used in Mercedes-Benz engines.Further information on engine oil and oil filters isavailable at the following locations:R in the Mercedes-Benz Specifications for

Operating Fluids by entering the designation- at https://bevo.mercedes-benz.com- in the Mercedes-Benz BeVo appR at a qualified specialist workshop

Petrol engines: for certain countries, differentengine oils can be used in conjunction withreduced maintenance intervals.% Further information on different engine oils

can be obtained at a qualified specialistworkshop.

Quality and capacity of engine oil

MB-Freigabe or MB-Approval

Petrol engines Engine oil specifica‐tions

All models 229.51, 229.52,229.61229.71*

MB-Freigabe or MB-Approval

Diesel engines Engine oil specifica‐tions

All models 228.51, 229.31,229.51, 229.52,

229.61229.71*

* recommended for lowest possible fuel con‐sumption (lowest SAE viscosity class in eachcase; observe possible restrictions of theapproved SAE viscosity classes)To achieve the lowest possible fuel consumption,it is recommended to use the engine oil specifi‐cations marked in the table for the lowest SAEviscosity class. Possible restrictions of theapproved SAE viscosity classes must beobserved.% If the engine oils listed in the table are not

available, you may add a maximum of1.0 litre of the following engine oils onceonly.

Engine oils for one-time filling only in exceptionalcases:R petrol engines: MB-Freigabe or MB-Approval

229.31 or ACEA C3R diesel engines: MB-Freigabe or MB-Approval

ACEA C3

The following values refer to an oil change,including the oil filter.

558 Technical data

Replacement amount

Model Replacementamount

GLB 200 5.1 litres

GLB 250 4MATIC 5.5 litres

All other models 6.8 litres

Notes on brake fluid


& WARNING Risk of an accident due tovapour pockets forming in the brake sys‐tem

The brake fluid constantly absorbs moisturefrom the air. This lowers the boiling point ofthe brake fluid. If the boiling point is too low,vapour pockets may form in the brake sys‐tem when the brakes are applied hard.This impairs the braking effect.

# Have the brake fluid renewed at thespecified intervals.

Have the brake fluid regularly replaced at aqualified specialist workshop.Only use brake fluid approved by Mercedes-Benzaccording to MB-Freigabe or MB-Approval 331.0.You can obtain further information on brake fluidin the following places:R in the Mercedes-Benz Specifications for

Operating Fluids- at https://bevo.mercedes-benz.com- in the Mercedes-Benz BeVo appR at a qualified specialist workshop

Coolant

Notes on coolantObserve the notes on operating fluids(/ page 552).

& WARNING Risk of fire‑ and injury fromantifreeze

If antifreeze comes into contact with hotcomponent parts in the engine compart‐ment, it may ignite.# Allow the engine to cool down before

you top up the antifreeze.# Make sure that no antifreeze spills out

next to the filler opening.# Thoroughly clean the antifreeze from

component parts before starting thevehicle.

* NOTE Damage caused by incorrect cool‐ant

# Only add coolant that has been pre‐mixed with the required antifreeze pro‐tection.

Technical data 559

Information on coolant is available at the fol‐lowing locations:R in the Mercedes-Benz Specifications for

Operating Fluids 310.1- at https://bevo.mercedes-benz.com- in the Mercedes-Benz BeVo AppR at a qualified specialist workshop

* NOTE Overheating at high outside tem‐peratures

If an inappropriate coolant is used, theengine cooling system is not sufficiently pro‐tected against overheating and corrosion athigh outside temperatures.# Always use coolant approved by

Mercedes-Benz.# Observe the instructions in the

Mercedes-Benz Specifications for Oper‐ating Fluids310.1 .

Have the coolant regularly replaced at a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

The proportion of corrosion inhibitor/antifreezeconcentrate in the engine cooling system shouldbe:R a minimum of 50% (antifreeze protection

down to approximately -37 °C)R a maximum of 55% (antifreeze protection

down to -45 °C)

Notes on windscreen washer fluid


& WARNING ‑ Risk of fire and injury due towindscreen washer concentrate

Windscreen washer concentrate is highlyflammable. It could ignite if it comes intocontact with hot engine component parts orthe exhaust system.# Make sure that no windscreen washer

concentrate spills out next to the filleropening.

* NOTE Damage to the exterior lightingdue to unsuitable windscreen washerfluid

Unsuitable windscreen washer fluids maydamage the plastic surface of the exteriorlighting.# Only use windscreen washer fluids

which are also suitable for use on plas‐tic surfaces, e.g. MB SummerFit or MBWinterFit.

* NOTE Blocked spray nozzles caused bymixing windscreen washer fluids

# Do not mix MB SummerFit and MB Win‐terFit with other windscreen washer flu‐ids.

Do not use distilled or de-ionised water as the filllevel sensor may be triggered erroneously.Recommended windscreen washer fluid:R Above freezing point: e.g. MB SummerFitR Below freezing point: e.g. MB WinterFit

560 Technical data

For the correct mixing ratio, refer to the informa‐tion on the antifreeze container.Mix the washer fluid with the windscreen washerfluid all year round.

Vehicle dataVehicle dimensions

The heights specified may vary as a result of thefollowing factors:R tyresR loadR condition of the suspensionR optional equipment

Height when opened and headroom

Model 11Heightwhenopened

22 Head‐room

All models 2082 mm 1929 mm

Vehicle dimensions

All models

Vehicle length 4634 mm

Vehicle width including out‐side mirrors

2020 mm

All models

Vehicle width excluding out‐side mirrors

1834 mm

Vehicle height 1659 mm

Wheelbase 2829 mm

Weights and loads

Please observe the following notes for the speci‐fied vehicle data:R Items of optional equipment increase the

unladen weight and reduce the payload.R Vehicle-specific weight information can be

found on the vehicle identification plate(/ page 550).

Roof load

All models

Maximum roof load 75 kg

Technical data 561

Off-road driving vehicle data

Fording depth

* NOTE Damage caused by water whenfording

Water can enter the engine compartmentand vehicle interior in the following cases:R the maximum permissible fording depth

when driving through standing water isexceededR a bow wave forms during fordingR water accumulates during fording of flow‐

ing water

# Do not exceed the maximum permissi‐ble fording depth and drive slowlythrough the water.

The specified value indicates the maximum per‐missible fording depth for vehicles that are readyto drive (fuel tank full, all fluids topped up, driverin the vehicle) and for slow driving throughstanding water.

Driving through flowing water reduces the per‐missible fording depth due to the accumulationof water.Observe the notes on off-road driving and ford‐ing (/ page 193).

Missing values were not yet available at the timeof going to press.

Model 11 Fordingdepth

All models

Angle of approach/departureThe specified values are maximum values forvehicles that are ready to drive – fuel tank full,all fluids topped up, with driver. The valuesdepend on the vehicle tyres and vehicle weight.Observe the notes on driving in mountainous ter‐rain (/ page 193).

Model 11 Front 22 Rear

All models 19.4° 24.8°

562 Technical data

Maximum gradient climbing abilityThe vehicle's gradient climbing ability dependson the weight distribution in the vehicle, the ter‐rain conditions and the road surface conditions.The specified value applies in the followingcases:R the vehicle is ready to drive – fuel tank full,

all fluids topped up, driver in the vehicleR the road surface conditions and thus traction

are good

A gradient climbing ability of 100% correspondsto an incline of 45°.Observe the notes on driving in mountainous ter‐rain (/ page 193).Missing values were not yet available at the timeof going to press.

Model Maximum gra‐dient climbing

ability

All models

Trailer hitchGeneral notes on the trailer hitch

Modifications to the engine cooling system maybe necessary, depending on the vehicle model.The retrofitting of a trailer hitch is only permissi‐ble if a towing capacity is specified in your vehi‐cle documents.Further information can be obtained at a quali‐fied specialist workshop.

Mounting dimensions of the trailer hitch

1 Fastening points2 Overhang dimension3 Rear axle centre line

Technical data 563

The overhang dimension and fastening pointsare valid for a trailer hitch installed at the fac‐tory.

Overhang dimension

Model 22 Over‐hang dimen‐

sion

All models 1010 mm

Towing capacity

The tongue weight is not included in the towingcapacity.Missing values were not yet available at the timeof going to press.

Towing capacity, braked (at a minimum start-off gradeability of 8%)

Model Towing capacity,braked

GLB 180 d

GLB 180 d 4MATIC


GLB 200

GLB 200 d

GLB 200 d 4MATIC

GLB 220 d

GLB 220 d 4MATIC

GLB 250

GLB 250 4MATIC

Towing capacity, braked (at a minimum start-off gradeability of 12%)


GLB 180 d

GLB 180 d 4MATIC 1800 kg

GLB 200


GLB 200 d

GLB 200 d 4MATIC

GLB 220 d 2000 kg

GLB 220 d 4MATIC

GLB 250

GLB 250 4MATIC

Towing capacity, unbraked

Model Towing capacity,unbraked

GLB 180 d


GLB 200

GLB 200 d

GLB 200 d 4MATIC

564 Technical data

Model Towing capacity,unbraked

GLB 220 d 750 kg

GLB 220 d 4MATIC

GLB 250

GLB 250 4MATIC

Maximum tongue weight

* NOTE Damage caused by the trailercoming loose

If the tongue weight used is too low, thetrailer may come loose.# The tongue weight must not be below

50 kg.# Use a tongue weight that is as close as

possible to the maximum permissibletongue weight.

Maximum tongue weight

Model Maximumtongueweight

All models 100 kg

Permissible rear axle load (trailer operation)

Missing values were not yet available at the timeof going to press.

Axle load

Model Axle load

GLB 180 d


GLB 200

GLB 200 d

GLB 200 d 4MATIC

GLB 220 d 1160 kg

Model Axle load

GLB 220 d 4MATIC

GLB 250

GLB 250 4MATIC

Technical data 565

Display messagesIntroduction

Notes on display messagesDisplay messages appear on the multifunctiondisplay.Display messages with graphic symbols are sim‐plified in the Owner's Manual and may differfrom the symbols on the multifunction display.The multifunction display shows high-priority dis‐play messages in red. Certain display messagesare accompanied by a warning tone.Please act in accordance with the display mes‐sages and follow the additional notes in theOwner's Manual.For some display messages, a symbol will alsobe shown:R Õ Further informationR¨ Hide display message

You can select the desired symbol by swipingleft or right on the left-hand Touch Control.Press theÕ symbol to show further information

on the multifunction display. Press the¨symbol to hide the display message.You can hide low-priority display messages bypressing theP button or the left-hand TouchControl. The display messages will then bestored in the message memory.Rectify the cause of a display message asquickly as possible.High-priority display messages cannot be hid‐den. The multifunction display shows these dis‐play messages continuously until the cause ofthe display message has been rectified.

Calling up stored display messagesOn-board computer:4 Service 5 1 messageIf there are no display messages, No messageswill appear on the multifunction display.# Scroll through the display messages by swip‐

ing upwards or downwards on the left-handTouch Control.

# To exit the message memory: press theP button.

566 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Occupant safety

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions

6Restraint sys. malfunctionConsult workshop

* The restraint system is malfunctioning (/ page 36).

& WARNING Risk of injury due to malfunctions in the restraint system

If the restraint system is malfunctioning, restraint system components may be triggered unintentionally or maynot deploy as intended during an accident. This may affect the seat belt tensioner or airbag, for example.# Have the restraint system checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.

Recognition of a restraint system fault:R The restraint system warning lamp 6 does not light up when the ignition is switched on.R The restraint system warning lamp 6 lights up continuously or repeatedly during a journey.# Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

6Front left malfunction Con-sult workshop (example)

* The corresponding restraint system is malfunctioning (/ page 36).



Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 567


Recognition of a restraint system fault:R The restraint system warning lamp 6 does not light up when the ignition is switched on.R The restraint system warning lamp 6 lights up continuously or repeatedly during a journey.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

6Left windowbag malfunc-tion Consult work-shop (example)

* The corresponding window airbag is malfunctioning (/ page 36).

& WARNING Risk of injury or fatal injury due to a malfunction in the window airbag

The window airbag might be triggered unintentionally or might not be triggered at all in the event of an accidentwith high deceleration.# Have the window airbag checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

Front-passenger airbag dis-abled See Owner's Manual

* The front passenger airbag has been disabled even though an adult or a person with an adult stature is on the frontpassenger seat. If additional forces are applied to the seat, the weight the system detects may be too low.

& WARNING ‑ Risk of injury or even fatal injury when the front passenger airbag is disabled

If the front passenger airbag is disabled, It will not be deployed in the event of an accident and cannot performits intended protective function.



A person in the front passenger seat could then, for example, come into contact with the vehicle interior, espe‐cially if the person is sitting too close to the dashboard.# Be aware of the status of the front passenger airbag both before and during the journey.

# Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions.# Check the status of the automatic front passenger airbag actuation (/ page 46).# If necessary, consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

Front-passenger airbagenabled See Owner's Man-ual

* The front passenger airbag is enabled while the vehicle is in motion:R even when a child, a small adult or an object weighing less than the system weight threshold is located on the

front passenger seatR even when the front passenger seat is not occupied

The system may detect objects or forces that are adding to the weight applied to the seat.

& WARNING Risk of injury or fatal injury if a child restraint system is used while the front passenger frontairbag is enabled

If you secure a child in a child restraint system on the front passenger seat and the front passenger airbag isenabled, the front passenger airbag can deploy in the event of an accident.The child could be struck by the airbag.# Ensure, both before and during the journey, that the status of the front passenger airbag is correct.



NEVER use a rearward facing child restraint on a seat protected by an ACTIVE AIRBAG in front of it, DEATH orSERIOUS INJURY to the CHILD can occur.

# Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions.# Check the status of the automatic front passenger airbag actuation (/ page 46).# If necessary, consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

PRE-SAFE inoperative SeeOwner's Manual

* The PRE‑SAFE® functions are malfunctioning.# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Key


ÀReplace key See Owner'sManual

* Vehicles with a digital vehicle key : only a few or no authorisations remain for starting the engine.# Make sure that the internet connection is not restricted by certain mobile phone settings.# Open Mercedes me connect https://www.mercedes.me and call up the Digital Vehicle Key service.# Deactivate the service first and then activate it again.# If the display message still appears, contact the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center (CAC).

* Vehicles with a digital vehicle key sticker: only a few or no authorisations remain for starting the engine.


Display messages Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions# Order a new digital vehicle key sticker from a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre or at https://www.mercedes-

benz.com/connect.

ÁReplace key

* The key needs to be replaced.# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

ÁChange key batteries

* The key battery is discharged.# Replace the battery (/ page 84).

ÁKey not detected (whitedisplay message)

* The key is currently undetected.# Change the location of the key in the vehicle.# If the key is still not recognised, place it in the slot for starting with the key (/ page 188).



ÁKey not detected (red dis‐play message)

* The key cannot be detected and may no longer be in the vehicle.The key is no longer in the vehicle and you switch off the engine:R You can no longer start the engine.R You cannot centrally lock the vehicle.

# Ensure that the key is in the vehicle.

If the key detection function has a malfunction due to a strong radio signal source:# Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions.# Place the key in the slot for starting the engine with the key (/ page 188).

Place the key in themarked space See Owner'sManual

* Key detection is malfunctioning.# Change the location of the key in the vehicle.# Place the key in the slot for starting the engine with the key (/ page 188).


Lights


bLeft dipped beam (example)

* The corresponding light source is defective.# Drive on carefully.# Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

or# Check whether you are permitted to replace the light source yourself (/ page 165).% LED light bulbs: the display message for the corresponding lamp appears only when all the light-emitting diodes

in the lamp are faulty.

bMalfunction See Owner'sManual

* The exterior lighting is malfunctioning.# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

* Vehicles with a trailer hitch: a fuse may have blown.# Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions.# Check the fuses and replace them if necessary (/ page 520).

bAutomatic driving lightsinoperative

* The light sensor is malfunctioning.# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.



bActive Light System inoper-ative

* The active headlamps are malfunctioning.# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

bSwitch on headlamps

* You are driving without low-beam headlamps.# Turn the light switch to the L orÃ position.

bSwitch off lights

* You are leaving the vehicle and the lights are still switched on.# Turn the light switch to theÃ position.

bIntelligent Light Systeminoperative

* The Intelligent Light System is faulty. The lighting system continues to function properly without the functions ofthe Intelligent Light System.# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.



Adaptive Highbeam Assistcurrently unavailable SeeOwner's Manual

* Adaptive Highbeam Assist is temporarily unavailable.The system limits have been reached (/ page 160).# Drive on.

Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the system will be available again. The Adaptive HighbeamAssist available again display message will appear.

Adaptive Highbeam Assistinoperative

* Adaptive Highbeam Assist is malfunctioning.# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Adaptive Highbeam AssistPlus currently unavailableSee Owner's Manual

* Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus is temporarily unavailable.The system limits have been reached (/ page 161).# Drive on.

Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the system will be available again. The Adaptive HighbeamAssist Plus available again display message will appear.

Adaptive Highbeam AssistPlus inoperative

* Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus is malfunctioning.# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Hazard warning lamps mal-functioning

* The hazard warning lamp switch is malfunctioning.# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.


Climate control


&inoperative See Owner'sMan.

* The stationary heater is temporarily malfunctioning.# When the vehicle is stationary on a level surface and the engine has cooled down, make up to four attempts to

switch on the stationary heater, waiting several minutes between each attempt.# If the stationary heater does not switch on, consult a qualified specialist workshop.

&inoperative Battery low

* The on-board electrical system voltage is too low.The stationary heater has switched itself off.# Drive an extended distance until the battery has reached a sufficient charge level again.

&inoperative Refuel vehicle

* There is too little fuel in the fuel tank. The stationary heater cannot be switched on.# Refuel the vehicle.


Vehicle


dVehicle is operationalSwitch off ignition beforeexiting

* You are leaving the vehicle when it is in a ready-to-drive state.# When you leave the vehicle, switch off the ignition, secure the vehicle against rolling away and take the key with

you.# If you do not leave the vehicle, switch off the electrical consumers, e.g. the seat heating. Otherwise, the 12 V

battery may discharge and it will then be possible to start the vehicle only with the aid of a second battery(starting assistance).

ïCheck trailer hitchlock (white display mes‐sage)

* The trailer hitch is not operational during a journey with a trailer.# Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions and switch off the engine.# Uncouple the trailer and secure it against rolling away.# To initiate a new swivel movement, press and hold the button on the tailgate until the ball neck engages

beneath the bumper (/ page 288).# When the display message disappears, couple up the trailer and drive on.

& WARNING Risk of an accident if the ball neck is not locked

If the ball neck is not in the locked position, the trailer may come loose.# Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.

Do not continue driving under any circumstances.# Uncouple the trailer and secure it against rolling away.



# Initiate a new swivelling procedure and do not re-couple the trailer until the display message disappears.

If the display message does not disappear, the trailer hitch is malfunctioning and the ball neck is not locked.# Do not couple up the trailer. Drive on without the trailer. Note the reduced ground clearance due to the

unlocked ball neck.# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

* The trailer hitch will not be operational when the vehicle is stationary.# Uncouple the coupled trailer and secure it against rolling away.# If the ball neck is retracted: to initiate a new swivel movement, press and hold the button on the tailgate until

the ball neck engages vertically in the locked position and then engages beneath the bumper (/ page 288).# If the ball neck is extended: press and hold the button on the tailgate until the ball neck engages beneath the

bumper.

If the display message does not disappear, the trailer hitch is malfunctioning and the ball neck is not locked.# Do not couple up the trailer. Drive on without the trailer. Note the reduced ground clearance due to the

unlocked ball neck.# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.



ïOperation only possible intransmission position N

* Vehicles with manual transmission: you attempted to swivel the ball neck and the transmission is not in neutrali.# Shift the transmission to neutrali.

ÙSteering malfunctionIncreased physical effortSee Owner's Manual

* The power steering assistance is malfunctioning.

& WARNING Risk of an accident due to altered steering characteristics

If the power assistance of the steering fails partially or completely, you will need to use more force to steer.# If safe steering is possible, drive on carefully.# Visit or consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

# If safe steering is possible, drive on carefully.# Visit or consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

ÙSteering malfunction Stopimmediately See Owner'sManual

* The steering is malfunctioning. Steering capability is significantly impaired.

& WARNING Risk of accident if steering capability is impaired

If the steering does not function as intended, the vehicle's operating safety is jeopardised.



# Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.Do not continue driving under any circumstances.


# Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions. Do not continue driving.# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

ÙSteering malfunction SeeOwner's Manual

* The electric steering lock is malfunctioning. The steering may be locked by the electric steering lock.


If the steering does not function as intended, the vehicle's operating safety is jeopardised.# Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.

Do not continue driving under any circumstances.# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.




ûBefore starting the engine,turn the steering wheel.

* The electric steering lock could not unlock the steering.# Switch the ignition off.# To unlock the steering, move the steering wheel slightly to the left and right.# Switch the ignition back on.

Active bonnet malfunctionSee Owner's Manual

* The active bonnet (pedestrian protection) is malfunctioning or inoperative after having already been triggered.# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

C* At least one door is open.# Close all doors.

?* The bonnet is open.

& WARNING Risk of accident due to driving with the engine bonnet unlocked

An unlocked engine bonnet may open up when the vehicle is in motion and block your view.# Never unlock the engine bonnet when driving.# Before every trip, ensure that the engine bonnet is locked.

# Stop the vehicle immediately, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.# Close the bonnet.



A* The tailgate is open.


Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. Exhaust gases can enter thevehicle interior if the tailgate is open when the engine is running, especially if the vehicle is in motion.# Always switch off the engine before opening the tailgate.# Never drive with the tailgate open.

# Close the tailgate.

Anti-theft alarm systemMalfunction

* The anti-theft alarm system is malfunctioning.# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

_2nd seat row, left Notlocked

* The left-hand seat or the seat backrest in the second row of seats is not engaged.# Fold the corresponding seat backrest back until it engages and push the row of seats back (/ page 116).# Make sure that the seat is engaged (/ page 116).



_2nd seat row, right Notlocked

* The right-hand seat or the seat backrest in the second row of seats is not engaged.# Fold the corresponding seat backrest back until it engages and push the row of seats back (/ page 116).# Make sure that the seat is engaged (/ page 116).

¥Top up washer fluid

* The washer fluid level in the washer fluid reservoir has dropped below the minimum.# Top up the washer fluid (/ page 490).

Engine


+Top up coolant See Own-er’s Manual

* The coolant level is too low.

* NOTE Engine damage due to insufficient coolant

# Avoid long journeys with insufficient coolant.

# Add coolant (/ page 490).


Display messages Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions# Have the engine cooling system checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

ÿCoolant Stop vehicleSwitch engine off

* The coolant is too hot.# Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions and switch off the engine.

& WARNING Danger of burns when opening the bonnet

If you open the engine bonnet when the engine has overheated or during a fire in the engine compartment, youcould come into contact with hot gases or other escaping operating fluids.# Before opening the bonnet, allow the engine to cool down.# In the event of a fire in the engine compartment, keep the engine bonnet closed and call the fire service.

# Wait until the engine has cooled down.# Make sure that the air supply to the radiator is not impaired.# Avoiding high loads on the engine, drive to the nearest qualified specialist workshop. In doing so, ensure that

the coolant temperature display remains below 120 °C.

ÿ* The fan motor is defective.# Avoiding high loads on the engine, drive to the nearest qualified specialist workshop. In doing so, ensure that

the coolant temperature display remains below 120 °C.



To switch off the engine,press the Start/Stop but-ton for at least 3 secondsor 3 times.

* You have pressed the start/stop button while driving.# Information about switching off the engine while driving (/ page 186).

æReserve fuel level

* The fuel supply has dropped into the reserve range.# Refuel.

!Clean the fuel filter

* Vehicles with diesel engines: the fuel filter is dirty or the water in the fuel filter needs to be drained.# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

¸Replace air cleaner

* Vehicles with diesel engines: the engine air filter is dirty and must be replaced.# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Drive system MalfunctionVisit workshop

* The drive system is malfunctioning.# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.



Drive system MalfunctionStop Switch engine off

* The drive system is malfunctioning.# Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions and switch off the engine.# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Transmission


Apply brake to deselectPark (P) position

* You have attempted to shift the transmission out of park positionj and into another transmission position.# Depress the brake pedal.# Select transmission positionh,k or neutrali.

To shift out of P or N,depress brake and startengine

* You have attempted to shift the transmission out of park positionj or neutrali and into another transmissionposition.# Depress the brake pedal.# Change the transmission position.# Start the engine.

Only select Park (P) whenvehicle is stationary

* Park positionj can be engaged only when the vehicle is stationary.# To stop, depress the brake pedal.# Shift the transmission to park positionj while the vehicle is stationary.



Apply brake to select R * You have attempted to select transmission positionk.# Depress the brake pedal.# Select transmission positionk.

Risk of vehicle rollingDriver door open and trans-mission not in P

* The driver's door is not fully closed and transmission positionh,k or neutrali is selected.# Select park positionj when switching off the vehicle.

N permanently active Riskof vehicle rolling

* While the vehicle is rolling or while you are driving, neutrali has been engaged.# To stop, depress the brake pedal.# Shift the transmission to park positionj while the vehicle is stationary.# To continue driving, select transmission positionh ork.

Without changing gear,consult workshop

* The transmission is malfunctioning. The transmission position can no longer be changed.# When transmission positionh is selected, consult a qualified specialist workshop and do not change the trans‐

mission position.# For all other transmission positions, park the vehicle safely.# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Reversing not poss. Con-sult workshop

* The transmission is malfunctioning. The transmission positionk cannot be selected.# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.



Transmission MalfunctionStop

* The transmission is malfunctioning. The transmission shifts to neutrali automatically.# Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions.# Depress the brake pedal.# Engage park positionj.# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Auxiliary battery malfunc-tion

* The auxiliary battery for the transmission is no longer being charged.# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.# Until then, always select park positionj manually before you switch off the engine.# Before leaving the vehicle, apply the electric parking brake.

Transmission Malfunction * The transmission is malfunctioning. The cause could be an overheated clutch or blocked gears.# Let the transmission cool down.# If the display message still appears following a restart, consult a qualified specialist workshop.

dTrans. oil overheated Driveon with care

* The transmission is overheating. When the display message is active, start-up and driving characteristics may betemporarily impaired.# Drive at low engine speeds.# Avoid sporty driving.# Before pulling away on uphill gradients, let the transmission cool down until the display message disappears.



Parking lock inoperativeApply the parking brake

* The transmission is malfunctioning. The park positionj cannot be selected.# Park the vehicle safely.# Use the electric parking brake to secure the vehicle against rolling away.

Teaching in transmissionOperate selector leverBrake for XX seconds Riskof vehicle rolling

* The transmission is being taught in. There is a risk of the vehicle rolling.# Depress and hold the brake pedal until the teach-in process has been completed.

The electric parking brake is also applied automatically during the teach-in process.# Switch on the ignition.# Select park positionj, transmission positionk or neutrali.

Risk of vehicle rolling awayApply parking brake SeeOwner's Manual

* The transmission position cannot be reliably identified.# Use the electric parking brake to secure the vehicle against rolling away.

Teaching in transmissioncomplete

* The transmission's teach-in process is complete. All transmission positions can be selected again.

Transmission MalfunctionVisit workshop

* The transmission is malfunctioning.Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Depress clutch fully tostart engine

* You have attempted to start the engine without depressing the clutch pedal.# Depress the clutch pedal and then start the engine.

* The engine has stalled while the vehicle was pulling away, e.g. because the clutch pedal was released too quickly.


Display messages Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions# Depress the clutch pedal again.

The engine will start automatically.# Slowly release the clutch pedal to pull away.

Clutch overheated Avoidpulling away for XX:XX mins

* The clutch is under considerable load and is overheating.Avoid frequent pulling away and driving at walking pace over longer distances.# Stop the vehicle, paying attention to road and traffic conditions, and leave the engine running.

The clutch will cool more quickly when the engine is running.or# If possible, continue driving at a steady speed and remove your foot from the clutch pedal. Do not ride the

clutch.The clutch will cool while the vehicle is in motion.When the clutch has cooled down, the display message will disappear.


Brakes


!Parking brake See Owner'sManual

* The yellow! indicator lamp is lit. The electric parking brake is malfunctioning.To apply:# Switch the ignition off and switch it back on.# Apply the electric parking brake manually (/ page 223).

If it is not possible to apply the electric parking brake:# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.# Where necessary, also secure the parked vehicle against rolling away.

* The yellow! indicator lamp and the red! indicator lamp are lit. The electric parking brake is malfunction‐ing.To release:# Switch the ignition off and switch it back on.# Release the electric parking brake manually (/ page 223).or# Release the electric parking brake automatically (/ page 222).If it is still not possible to release the electric parking brake:# Do not continue driving. Consult a qualified specialist workshop.



* The yellow! indicator lamp is lit and the red! indicator lamp is flashing. The electric parking brake is mal‐functioning.The electric parking brake could not be applied or released.# Switch the ignition off and switch it back on.

To apply:# Release and then apply the electric parking brake manually (/ page 223).

To release:# Apply and then release the electric parking brake manually.

If it is not possible to apply the electric parking brake or the red! indicator lamp continues to flash:# Do not continue driving. Consult a qualified specialist workshop.# Where necessary, also secure the parked vehicle against rolling away.

* The yellow! indicator lamp is lit and the red! indicator lamp flashes for approximately ten seconds afterthe electric parking brake has been applied or released. It then remains lit or goes out. The electric parking brake ismalfunctioning.If the battery charge level is too low:# Charge the battery.

To apply:


Display messages Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions# Switch the ignition off.

The electric parking brake will be applied automatically.

If the electric parking brake is not to be applied, e.g. at an automatic car wash or when the vehicle is being towed,leave the ignition switched on. This does not include having the vehicle towed with the rear axle raised.If the electric parking brake is not applied automatically:# Switch the ignition off and switch it back on.# Release and then apply the electric parking brake manually (/ page 223).

If it is still not possible to apply the electric parking brake:# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.# Where necessary, also secure the parked vehicle against rolling away.

To release:# If the conditions for automatic release are fulfilled and the electric parking brake is not released automatically,

release the electric parking brake manually (/ page 223).

If it is still not possible to release the electric parking brake:# Do not continue driving. Consult a qualified specialist workshop.



!Release parking brake

* The red! indicator lamp is flashing.The electric parking brake is applied while you are driving:R A condition for automatic release of the electric parking brake has not been fulfilled (/ page 222).R You are performing emergency braking using the electric parking brake (/ page 223).

# Check the conditions for automatic release of the electric parking brake.# Release the electric parking brake manually.

!Turn on the ignition torelease the parking brake

* The red! indicator lamp is lit.You have attempted to release the electric parking brake with the ignition switched off.# Switch on the ignition.

Risk of vehicle rolling awayParking brake not appliedSee Owner's Manual

* Vehicles with manual transmission: the electric parking brake has not been applied and you open the driver'sdoor.# Apply the electric parking brake.

JBrake immediately

* Vehicles with manual transmission: a malfunction has occurred while the HOLD function was activated.A tone may also sound at regular intervals. If you attempt to lock the vehicle, the tone will become louder.You cannot start the engine.


Display messages Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions# Immediately depress the brake pedal firmly until the display message disappears.

You can restart the engine.

JCheck brake fluid level

* There is insufficient brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir.

& WARNING Risk of an accident due to low brake fluid level

If the brake fluid level is too low, the braking effect and the braking characteristics may be impaired.# Stop the vehicle as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driv‐

ing.# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.# Do not top up the brake fluid.

# Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions. Do not continue driving.# Do not top up the brake fluid.# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

#Check brake pads SeeOwner's Manual

* The brakepads have reached the wear limit.

& WARNING Risk of accident due to restricted braking power

When the brake pads have reached their wear limit, the braking power may be restricted.# Drive on carefully.



# Have the brake system checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.


Driving systems


éATTENTION ASSIST inoper-ative

* ATTENTION ASSIST is malfunctioning.# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

éATTENTION ASSIST: Take abreak!

* ATTENTION ASSIST has detected fatigue or an increasing lack of concentration on the part of the driver(/ page 277).# If necessary, take a break.



äFault Drive at max. 80km/h

* The adjustable damping is malfunctioning. The vehicle's handling characteristics may be affected.# Do not drive at speeds greater than 80 km/h.# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Active Steering Assist cur-rently unavailable See Own-er's Manual

* Active Steering Assist is temporarily unavailable.The ambient conditions are outside the system limits (/ page 249).# Drive on.

As soon as the ambient conditions are within the system limits, the system will become available again.# If necessary, clean the windscreen in the camera's field of vision.# Check the tyre pressure if necessary.

Active Steering Assist inop-erative

* Active Steering Assist is malfunctioning. Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC remains available.# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Ø* Active Steering Assist has reached the system limits(/ page 249).You have not steered independently for a considerable period of time.# Take over the steering and drive on in accordance with the traffic conditions.

Beginning emergency stop * Your hands are not on the steering wheel. An emergency stop is initiated (/ page 253).# Put your hands back on the steering wheel.



You can cancel the deceleration at any time by performing one of the following actions:R steeringR braking or acceleratingR pressing a steering-wheel buttonR operating Touch ControlR deactivating Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC

Active Steering Assist cur-rently unavailable due tomultiple emergency stops

* Active Steering Assist is temporarily unavailable due to multiple emergency stops.# Take over the steering and stop in accordance with the traffic conditions.# Switch the ignition off and switch it back on.

Active Steering Assist is available once more.

Active Lane Keeping Assistcurrently unavailable SeeOwner's Manual

* Active Lane Keeping Assist is temporarily unavailable.The ambient conditions are outside the system limits (/ page 285).# Drive on.

As soon as the ambient conditions are within the system limits, the system will become available again.

Active Lane Keeping Assistinoperative

* Active Lane Keeping Assist is malfunctioning.# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.



Blind Spot Assist currentlyunavailable See Owner'sManual

* Blind Spot Assist is temporarily unavailable.The system limits have been reached (/ page 282).# Drive on.

Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the system will be available again.or# If the display message does not disappear, stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart

the engine.

Blind Spot Assist inopera-tive

* Blind Spot Assist is malfunctioning.# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Blind Spot Assist not availa-ble when towing a trailerSee Owner's Manual

* When you establish the electrical connection to the trailer, Blind Spot Assist is unavailable.# Press the left-hand Touch Control and acknowledge the display message.

Active Blind Spot Assistcurrently unavailable SeeOwner's Manual

* Active Blind Spot Assist is temporarily unavailable.The system limits have been reached (/ page 282).# Drive on.

Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the system will be available again.or# If the display message does not disappear, stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart

the engine.



Active Blind Spot Assistinoperative

* Active Blind Spot Assist is malfunctioning.# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Active Blind Spot Assistnot available when towinga trailer See Owner's Man-ual

* When you establish the electrical connection to the trailer, Active Blind Spot Assist is unavailable.# Press the left-hand Touch Control and acknowledge the display message.

Active Parking Assist andPARKTRONIC inoperativeSee Owner's Manual

* Active Parking Assist and Parking Assist PARKTRONIC are malfunctioning.# Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart the engine.# If the display message continues to be displayed, consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Traffic Sign Assist currentlyunavailable See Owner'sManual

* Traffic Sign Assist is temporarily unavailable.# Drive on.

Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the system will be available again.

Traffic Sign Assist inopera-tive

* Traffic Sign Assist is malfunctioning.# Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart the engine.# If the display message continues to be displayed, consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Speed Limit Assist cur-rently unavailable See Own-er's Manual

* Speed Limit Assist is temporarily unavailable.# Drive on.

Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the system will be available again.



Speed Limit Assist inopera-tive

* Speed Limit Assist is malfunctioning.# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

çðÄ¸Currently unavailableRadar sensors dirty

* The radar sensor system is malfunctioning. Possible causes:R dirt on the sensorsR heavy rain or snowR extended country driving without other traffic, e.g. in the desert

Driving systems and driving safety systems may be malfunctioning or temporarily unavailable.Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the driving systems and driving safety systems will be availableagain.If the display message does not disappear:# Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions.# Clean all sensors (/ page 497).# Restart the engine.



_ðÄàáCurrently unavailable Cam-era view restricted

* The camera view is restricted. Possible causes:R dirt on the windscreen in the camera's field of visionR heavy rain, snow or fogR mist on the windscreen in front of the camera

% Mist detected on the windscreen will be automatically removed with the aid of a built-in heater within approx‐imately 12 minutes.

Driving systems and driving safety systems may be malfunctioning or temporarily unavailable.Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the driving systems and driving safety systems will be availableagain.If the display message does not disappear:# Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions.# Clean the windscreen if necessary.

ëOff

* The HOLD function is deactivated because the vehicle is slipping or a condition for activation is not fulfilled.# Reactivate the HOLD function later or check the activation conditions for the HOLD function (/ page 255).



ç- - - km/h

* Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC cannot be activated as not all activation conditions are fulfilled.# Comply with the activation conditions of Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC (/ page 245).

çsuspended

* If you depress the accelerator pedal beyond the Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC setting, the system will be putinto passive mode (/ page 253).

çOff

* Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC was deactivated. If a warning tone also sounds, Active Distance AssistDISTRONIC has deactivated automatically (/ page 245).

Active Distance Assist cur-rently unavailable See Own-er's Manual

* Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is temporarily unavailable.The ambient conditions are outside the system limits (/ page 243).# Drive on.

As soon as the ambient conditions are within the system limits, the system will become available again.

Active Distance Assist inop-erative

* Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is malfunctioning.Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also be malfunctioning.


Display messages Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Active Distance Assistavailable again

* Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is operational again and can be activated (/ page 245).

îinoperative

* The Downhill Speed Regulation is malfunctioning.# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

îNot in curr. drive prog.

* The Downhill Speed Regulation is not available in the currently selected drive program.# Change the drive program (/ page 198).

îMax. speed 40 km/h

* The maximum speed of 40 km/h for the Downhill Speed Regulation has been exceeded.# Drive more slowly.



¯- - - km/h

* Cruise control cannot be activated as not all activation conditions are fulfilled.# Observe the activation conditions for cruise control (/ page 239).

Cruise control inoperative * Cruise control is malfunctioning.# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Cruise control and Limiterinoperative

* Cruise control and the limiter are malfunctioning.# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Cruise control off * Cruise control has been deactivated.If there is an additional warning tone, cruise control has been deactivated automatically (/ page 237).

Limiter passive * If you depress the accelerator pedal beyond the pressure point (kickdown), the limiter is switched to passive mode(/ page 239).

È- - - km/h

* The limiter cannot be activated as not all activation conditions have been fulfilled.# Observe the activation conditions of the limiter (/ page 239).

Limiter inoperative * The limiter is malfunctioning.# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.



Speed limit (winter tyres)XXX km/h

* You have reached the stored maximum permissible speed for winter tyres. It is not possible to exceed this speed.

ðMaximum speed exceeded

* You have exceeded the maximum permissible speed (for certain countries only).# Drive more slowly.

Driving safety systems


!÷currently unavailable SeeOwner's Manual

* ABS and ESP® are temporarily unavailable.Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also be temporarily unavailable.The brake system will continue to operate normally. Braking distance may increase in an emergency braking situa‐tion.

& WARNING Risk of skidding if ABS and ESP® are malfunctioning

If ABS and ESP® are malfunctioning, the wheels could lock when braking and ESP® cannot carry out vehiclestabilisation.



The steering capability and braking characteristics are thus severely impaired. The braking distance mayincrease in an emergency braking situation. In addition, other driving safety systems are switched off.# Drive on carefully.# Have ABS and ESP® checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.

# Drive carefully on a suitable stretch of road, making slight steering movements at a speed above 30 km/h.# If the display message does not disappear, consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Drive carefully.

!÷inoperative See Owner'sManual

* ABS and ESP® are malfunctioning.Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also be malfunctioning.The brake system will continue to operate normally. Braking distance may increase in an emergency braking situa‐tion.

& WARNING Risk of skidding if ABS and ESP® are malfunctioning

If ABS and ESP® are malfunctioning, the wheels could lock when braking and ESP® cannot carry out vehiclestabilisation.The steering capability and braking characteristics are thus severely impaired. The braking distance mayincrease in an emergency braking situation. In addition, other driving safety systems are switched off.# Drive on carefully.# Have ABS and ESP® checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.


Display messages Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions# Drive on carefully.# Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

÷currently unavailable SeeOwner's Manual

* ESP® is temporarily unavailable.Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also be malfunctioning.

& WARNING Risk of skidding if ESP® is malfunctioning

If ESP® is malfunctioning, ESP® cannot carry out vehicle stabilisation. In addition, other driving safety systemsare switched off.# Drive on carefully.# Have ESP® checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

# Drive carefully on a suitable stretch of road, making slight steering movements at a speed above 30 km/h.# If the display message does not disappear, consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Drive carefully.

÷inoperative See Owner'sManual

* ESP® is malfunctioning.Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also be malfunctioning.The brake system will continue to operate normally. Braking distance may increase in an emergency braking situa‐tion.





# Drive on carefully.# Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

T!÷inoperative See Owner'sManual

* EBD, ABS and ESP® are malfunctioning.Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also be malfunctioning.

& WARNING Risk of skidding if EBD, ABS and ESP® are malfunctioning

If EBD, ABS and ESP® are malfunctioning, the wheels can lock when braking and ESP® cannot carry out vehiclestabilisation.The steering capability and braking characteristics are thus severely impaired. The braking distance mayincrease in an emergency braking situation. In addition, other driving safety systems are switched off.# Drive on carefully.# Have the brake system checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.


Display messages Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions# Drive on carefully.# Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

Active Brake Assist Func-tions currently limited SeeOwner's Manual

* Vehicles with the Driving Assistance Package: Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic function, Evasive SteeringAssist or PRE‑SAFE® PLUS are temporarily unavailable or only partially available.Vehicles without the Driving Assistance Package: Active Brake Assist is temporarily unavailable or only partiallyavailable.The ambient conditions are outside the system limits (/ page 231).# Drive on.

As soon as the ambient conditions are within the system limits, the system will become available again.# If the display message does not disappear, stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart

the engine.

Active Brake Assist Func-tions limited See Owner'sManual

* Vehicles with Driving Assistance Package: Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic function, Evasive SteeringAssist or PRE‑SAFE® PLUS is malfunctioning.Vehicles without Driving Assistance Package: Active Brake Assist is malfunctioning.# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.


Mercedes me connect


Mercedes me connectServices limited See Own-er's Manual

* Service limited.At least one of the main functions of the Mercedes me connect system is malfunctioning.# Observe the notes on the diagnostics connection (/ page 29).# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

GInoperative

* At least one of the main functions of the Mercedes me connect system or of the SOS emergency call system ismalfunctioning.# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Battery


#12 V battery See Owner'sManual

* The engine is off and the charge level is too low.# Switch off electrical consumers that are not required.

To charge the battery:# Leave the engine running for a few minutes, or drive an extended distance.

* If the message appears while the engine is running, this indicates an on-board electrical system malfunction.


Display messages Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

#See Owner's Manual

* The battery is not being charged.

* NOTE Possible engine damage if you continue driving

# Do not continue driving under any circumstances.# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

# Stop the vehicle immediately, paying attention to road and traffic conditions, and switch off the engine.# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

#Stop vehicle See Owner'sManual

* The battery is no longer being charged and the charge level is too low.

* NOTE Possible engine damage if you continue driving

# Do not continue driving under any circumstances.# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

# Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions. Do not continue driving.# Switch off the engine.# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.



#Stop vehicle Leave enginerunning

* The battery charge level is too low.# Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions. Do not continue driving.# Leave the engine running.# Wait until the display message disappears before pulling away.# If the display message does not disappear: consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Tyre pressure monitor


Tyre press. monitor cur-rently unavailable

* There is interference from a powerful radio signal source. As a result, no signals from the tyre pressure sensors arebeing received. The tyre pressure monitor is temporarily unavailable.# Drive on.

The tyre pressure monitor will restart automatically as soon as the cause has been rectified.

Tyre press. monitor inoper-ative

* The tyre pressure monitor is malfunctioning.

& WARNING There is a risk of an accident if the tyre pressure monitoring system is malfunctioning

If the tyre pressure monitoring system is malfunctioning, it is not able to issue a warning if there is pressureloss in one or more of the tyres.



Tyres with insufficient tyre pressure may, for example, affect the vehicle's handling characteristics, steering andbraking. ‑# Have the tyre pressure monitoring system checked at a qualified specialist workshop.


Tyre press. monitor inoper-ative No wheel sensors

* The wheels fitted do not have suitable tyre pressure sensors. The tyre pressure monitor is deactivated.# Fit wheels with suitable tyre pressure sensors.

hWheel sensor(s) missing

* There is no signal from the tyre pressure sensor of one or more wheels. No pressure value is displayed for theaffected tyre.# Have the faulty tyre pressure sensor replaced at a qualified specialist workshop.

hCheck tyre(s)

* The tyre pressure in one or more tyres has dropped significantly. The wheel position is displayed.

& WARNING Risk of an accident due to insufficient tyre pressure

Tyres with insufficient tyre pressure pose the following risks:R The tyres may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speed increase.R The tyres may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatly impair tyre traction.R ‑ The driving characteristics, steering and braking may be greatly impaired.



You could then lose control of the vehicle.# Observe the recommended tyre pressures.# Adjust the tyre pressure if necessary.

# Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions.# Check the tyre pressure (/ page 525) and the tyres.

hRectify tyre pressure

* The tyre pressure is too low in at least one of the tyres, or the difference in tyre pressure between the individualwheels is too great.# Check the tyre pressure and add air, if necessary.# When the tyre pressure is correct, restart the tyre pressure monitor (/ page 528).

hWarning tyre defect

* The tyre pressure in one or more tyres has dropped suddenly. The wheel position is displayed.

& WARNING Risk of an accident from driving with a flat tyre

Flat tyres are dangerous in the following ways:R The tyres can overheat and cause a fire.R ‑ The driving characteristics, steering and braking may be greatly impaired.

You could then lose control of the vehicle.# Do not drive with a flat tyre.



# Observe the notes on flat tyres.

Notes on flat tyres (/ page 503).# Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions.# Check the tyres.

Tyre(s) overheated * At least one tyre is overheating. The affected tyres are displayed in red. At temperatures close to the limit value,the tyres are displayed in yellow.# Drive more slowly.

Reduce speed * At least one tyre is overheating. The affected tyres are displayed in red. At temperatures close to the limit value,the tyres are displayed in yellow.

& WARNING Risk of an accident from driving with overheated tyres

Overheated tyres may burst, particularly at high speeds.# Reduce speed so that the tyres cool down.

# Reduce speed so that the tyres cool down.


Tyre pressure loss warning system


Tyre pressure Check tyres * The tyre pressure loss warning system has detected a significant loss of pressure.


Tyres with insufficient tyre pressure pose the following risks:R The tyres may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speed increase.R The tyres may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatly impair tyre traction.R ‑ The driving characteristics, steering and braking may be greatly impaired.


# Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions.# Check the tyre pressure (/ page 525) and the tyres.# When the tyre pressure is correct, restart the tyre pressure loss warning system (/ page 533).

Check tyre pressures thenrestart Run Flat Indicator

* The tyre pressure loss warning system generated a display message and has not been restarted since.# When the tyre pressure is correct, restart the tyre pressure loss warning system (/ page 533).



Run Flat Indicator inopera-tive

* The tyre pressure loss warning system is malfunctioning.# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Exhaust gas aftertreatment


ÚRefill AdBlue See Owner’sManual

* The AdBlue® level has fallen below the reserve range.# Add at least 5 l of AdBlue® (/ page 213).

ÚTop up AdBlue Emergencyop. in XXX miles See Own-er's Manual

* The low AdBlue® level will lead to limited performance after the remaining distance displayed has been driven.# Add at least 5 l of AdBlue® (/ page 213).



ÚXX,X l Top up AdBlue Emer.op.: max. XXX km/h Startnot poss. in XXX km

* The low AdBlue® level will lead to limited performance from the speed displayed.After the remaining distance displayed has been covered, it will no longer be possible to start the engine.# Add at least the amount of AdBlue® displayed (/ page 213).

ÚXX,X l Top up AdBlueSwitch on ignition, wait 60sec. or eng. start not poss.

* The AdBlue® tank is empty. You can no longer start the engine.# Add at least the amount of AdBlue® displayed (/ page 213).# Switch on the ignition and wait for around 60 seconds.# Start the engine.

¯AdBlue system fault SeeOwner's Manual

* The AdBlue® system is malfunctioning.# Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.



¯AdBlue system fault Emer-gency op. in XXX miles SeeOwner's Manual

* The AdBlue® system is malfunctioning. Performance will be reduced once the remaining distance displayed hasbeen covered.# Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

¯AdBlue system fault Emer.op.: max. XXX km/h Startnot poss. in XXX km

* Power restriction due to the AdBlue® system fault. After the distance displayed has been covered, it will no longerbe possible to start the engine.# Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

¯AdBlue system fault Enginestart not possible

* The AdBlue® system is malfunctioning. You can no longer start the engine.# Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.


Engine oil


5Add 1 litre engine oil whennext refuelling

* Display message only for certain engines:The engine oil level has dropped to the minimum level.

* NOTE Engine damage caused by driving with insufficient engine oil

# Avoid long journeys with insufficient engine oil.

# When next refuelling, add 1 litre of engine oil (/ page 489).

Notes on engine oil (/ page 557).

5Engine oil level Reduce oillevel

* Display message only for certain engines:The engine oil level is too high.

* NOTE Engine damage caused by driving with excess engine oil

# Avoid long journeys with excess engine oil.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately and have the engine oil level reduced.



5Engine oil level Stop vehi-cle Switch engine off

* Display message only for certain engines:The engine oil level is too low.

* NOTE Engine damage caused by driving with insufficient engine oil

# Avoid long journeys with insufficient engine oil.

# Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions. Do not continue driving.# Switch off the engine.# Add 1 l of engine oil (/ page 489).# Check the engine oil level.

Notes on engine oil (/ page 557).

5Engine oil pressure StopSwitch off engine

* Display message only for certain engines:The oil pressure is too low.

* NOTE Engine damage caused by driving with insufficient oil pressure

# Avoid driving with insufficient oil pressure.




5Engine oil level cannot bemeasured

* The electrical connection to the oil level sensor has been interrupted or the oil level sensor is faulty.# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Warning and indicator lampsOverview of indicator and warning lamps

Some systems will perform a self-test when theignition is switched on. Some indicator andwarning lamps may briefly light up or flash. Thisbehaviour is non-critical. These indicator andwarning lamps indicate a malfunction only if theylight up or flash after the engine has been star‐ted or during a journey.

Instrument display (standard) Widescreen cockpit instrument display

Depending on the display setting, the positionsof the indicator lamps on the instrument displaymay differ from the example shown.


Indicator and warning lamps:L Low beam (/ page 155)T Standing lights (/ page 155)K High beam (/ page 157)#! Turn signal light (/ page 157)N Front fog lamps (/ page 155)R Rear fog light (/ page 155)6 Restraint system (/ page 625)ü Seat belt not fastened (/ page 625)J Brakes (yellow) (/ page 631)J Brakes (red) (/ page 631)! Electric parking brake (yellow)

(/ page 631)! Electric parking brake (red)

(/ page 631)! ABS malfunction (/ page 634)÷ ESP® (/ page 634)å ESP® OFF (/ page 634)L Distance warning (/ page 633)

Ù Electric power steering malfunction(/ page 626)

; Engine diagnosis (/ page 628)% Preglow# Electrical fault (/ page 628)æ Fuel reserve with fuel filler cap loca‐

tion indicator (/ page 628)ÿ Vehicles with a widescreen cock‐

pit: coolant too hot or cold(/ page 628)

h Tyre pressure monitor (/ page 637)ï Trailer hitch not operational

(/ page 626)


Occupant safety

Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions

6Restraint system warninglamp

The red restraint system warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.*The restraint system is malfunctioning (/ page 36).



# Drive on carefully.# Note the messages on the multifunction display.# Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

7Seat belt warning lampflashes

The red seat belt warning lamp flashes and an intermittent warning tone sounds.*The driver or front passenger has not fastened their seat belt while the vehicle is in motion.# Fasten your seat belt(/ page 40).

*There are objects on the front passenger seat.# Remove the objects from the front passenger seat.



7Seat belt warning lamplights up

The red seat belt warning lamp will light up once the engine has started.In addition, a warning tone may sound.*The seat belt warning lamp reminds the driver and front passenger to fasten their seat belts.# Fasten your seat belt (/ page 40).

If you have placed objects on the front passenger seat, the seat belt warning lamp may remain lit.

Vehicle


ïTrailer tow hitch warninglamp

The red trailer tow hitch warning lamp is on.*The trailer tow hitch is not operational or is swivelling.

& WARNING Risk of an accident if the ball neck is not locked

If the ball neck is not in the locked position, the trailer may come loose.# Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do

not continue driving under any circumstances.# Uncouple the trailer and secure it against rolling away.# Initiate a new swivelling procedure and do not re-couple the trailer until the display message disappears.


Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions# Note the messages on the multifunction display.

If the trailer hitch is swivelling:# Wait until the ball coupling has reached the operational position.

ÙWarning lamp for electricpower steering

The red electric power steering warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.*The power assistance or the steering itself is malfunctioning.


If the steering does not function as intended, the vehicle's operating safety is jeopardised.# Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do

not continue driving under any circumstances.# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

# Note the messages on the multifunction display.


Engine


ÿCoolant warning lamp

The red coolant warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.*Possible causes:R The temperature sensor is malfunctioningR Coolant level too lowR The air supply to the radiator is obstructedR The radiator fan is faulty

If there is an additional warning tone, the coolant temperature has exceeded 120 °C.

& WARNING Danger of burns when opening the bonnet

If you open the engine bonnet when the engine has overheated or during a fire in the engine compartment, youcould come into contact with hot gases or other escaping operating fluids.# Before opening the bonnet, allow the engine to cool down.# In the event of a fire in the engine compartment, keep the engine bonnet closed and call the fire service.

# Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions and switch off the engine. Do not continuedriving.

# Note the messages on the multifunction display.

If the coolant temperature display is at the lower end of the temperature scale:


Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.or# Exit the vehicle and keep a safe distance from it until the engine has cooled down.# Check the coolant level (/ page 490).# Make sure that the air supply to the radiator is not impaired.# Avoiding high loads on the engine, drive to the nearest qualified specialist workshop. In doing so, ensure that the

coolant temperature display remains below 120 °C.

;Engine diagnosis warninglamp

The yellow engine diagnostics warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.*A malfunction has occurred in the engine, the exhaust system or the fuel system.The emissions limit value may have been exceeded and the engine may be running in emergency operation mode.# Have the vehicle checked as soon as possible at a qualified specialist workshop.*Vehicles with a diesel engine: the fuel tank may have been run dry.# Start the engine three to four times after refuelling.

If the yellow engine diagnosis warning lamp goes out, emergency operation mode is cancelled. The vehicle neednot be checked.



#Electrical fault warninglamp

The red electrical fault warning lamp is lit.* There is a fault in the electrics.# Observe the messages on the multifunction display.

æFuel reserve warning lamp

The yellow fuel reserve warning lamp lights up while the engine is running.* The fuel supply has dropped into the reserve range.# Refuel.


Brakes


!Red indicator lamp, electricparking brake applied

!Yellow electric parkingbrake indicator lamp is mal‐functioning

The red electric parking brake indicator lamp flashes or is lit. The yellow indicator lamp is also lit if the electric parkingbrake malfunctions.* # Observe the messages on the multifunction display.

JBrake system warning lamp(yellow)

The yellow brake system warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.* & WARNING Risk of an accident due to a brake system malfunction

If the brake system is malfunctioning, braking characteristics may be impaired.# Drive on carefully.# Have the brake system checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.

# Adjust your speed and continue to drive carefully, leaving a suitable distance to the vehicle in front.


Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions# If the multifunction display shows a display message, please observe it.# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

JBrake system warning lamp(red)

The red brake system warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.*Possible causes:R The brake force boosting is malfunctioning and the braking characteristics may be affected.R There is insufficient brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir.

& WARNING Risk of accident and injury if brake force boosting is malfunctioning

If brake force boosting is malfunctioning, increased brake pedal force may be necessary for braking. The brakingcharacteristics may be impaired. The braking distance can increase in emergency braking situations.# Stop in a safe location immediately. Do not continue driving!# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

& WARNING Risk of an accident due to low brake fluid level

If the brake fluid level is too low, the braking effect and the braking characteristics may be impaired.# Stop the vehicle as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driv‐

ing.# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.# Do not top up the brake fluid.


Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions# Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions. Do not continue driving.# Note the messages on the multifunction display.# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Driving systems


LWarning lamp for distancewarning function

The red distance warning lamp lights up while the vehicle is in motion.*The distance to the vehicle in front is too small for the speed selected.If there is an additional warning tone, you are approaching an obstacle at too high a speed.# Be prepared to brake immediately.# Increase the distance.

Function of Active Brake Assist (/ page 231).


Driving safety systems


!ABS warning lamp

The yellow ABS warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.*ABS is malfunctioning.If there is an additional warning tone, EBD is malfunctioning.Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also be malfunctioning.

& WARNING There is a risk of skidding if EBD or ABS is malfunctioning

If EBD or ABS is malfunctioning, the wheels may lock when braking.The steering capability and braking characteristics are thus severely impaired. Braking distance may increase inan emergency braking situation. In addition, other driving safety systems are switched off.# Drive on carefully.# Have the brake system checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.

# Drive on carefully.# Note the messages on the multifunction display.# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.



÷ESP® warning lamp flashes

The yellow ESP® warning lamp flashes while the vehicle is in motion.* One or more wheels has reached its grip limit (/ page 227).# Adapt your driving style to suit the road and weather conditions.

÷ESP® warning lamp lightsup

The yellow ESP® warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.*ESP® is malfunctioning.Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also be malfunctioning.



# Drive on carefully.# Note the messages on the multifunction display.# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.



åESP® OFF warning lamp

The yellow ESP® OFF warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.*ESP® is deactivated.

& WARNING Risk of skidding when driving with ESP® deactivated

If ESP® is deactivated, ESP® cannot carry out vehicle stabilisation. The availability of further driving safety sys‐tems is also limited.# Drive on carefully.# Only deactivate ESP® for as long as the situation requires.

If ESP® cannot be activated, ESP® is malfunctioning.# Have ESP® checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.

# Observe the notes on deactivating ESP® (/ page 227).


Tyre pressure monitor


hTyre pressure monitoringsystem warning lampflashes

The yellow tyre pressure monitoring system warning lamp (pressure loss/malfunction) flashes for approximately oneminute and then remains lit.*The tyre pressure monitoring system is faulty.

& WARNING There is a risk of an accident if the tyre pressure monitoring system is malfunctioning

If the tyre pressure monitoring system is malfunctioning, it is not able to issue a warning if there is pressure lossin one or more of the tyres.Tyres with insufficient tyre pressure may, for example, affect the vehicle's handling characteristics, steering andbraking. ‑# Have the tyre pressure monitoring system checked at a qualified specialist workshop.


hTyre pressure monitoringsystem warning lamp lightsup

The yellow tyre pressure monitoring system warning lamp (pressure loss/malfunction) is lit.*The tyre pressure monitoring system has detected tyre pressure loss in at least one of the tyres.


Tyres with insufficient tyre pressure pose the following risks:R The tyres may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speed increase.



R The tyres may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatly impair tyre traction.R ‑ The driving characteristics, steering and braking may be greatly impaired.


# Stop the vehicle, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.# Check the tyre pressure and the tyres.


1, 2, 3 ...4MATIC ..................................................... 208

Function .............................................. 20812 V battery

see Battery (vehicle)12 V socket

see Socket (12 V)115 V socket

see Socket (115 V)230 V socket

see Socket (230 V)360° Camera ........................................... 267

Care .................................................... 497Function .............................................. 267Opening the camera cover (reversingcamera) ............................................... 270Selecting a view .................................. 270Switching automatic operationon/off (reversing camera) ................... 270

AA/C function

Activating/deactivating (multimediasystem) ................................................ 177Switching on/off (control panel) .......... 176

ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) ............. 226Acceleration

see KickdownAccess data

Setting (Bluetooth®) ............................ 460Accident and breakdown manage‐ment

Mercedes me connect ......................... 450Acoustic locking verification signal

Activating/deactivating ......................... 83Activating/deactivating automaticvolume adjustment

Burmester® surround sound system .... 481Active Blind Spot Assist ......................... 282

Activating/deactivating ....................... 285Brake application ................................. 284Function .............................................. 282System limitations ............................... 282

Trailer operation .................................. 284Active bonnet (pedestrian protection) .. 485

Operation ............................................ 485Resetting ............................................. 485

Active Brake AssistFunction/notes ................................... 231Setting ................................................. 237

Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC ........ 243Active Emergency Stop Assist ............. 253Active Lane Change Assist ................... 251Calling up a speed ............................... 245Displays in the instrument display ....... 253Function .............................................. 243Increasing/decreasing speed .............. 245Requirements: ..................................... 245Route-based speed adaptation ............ 247Selecting ............................................. 245Steering wheel buttons ........................ 245Storing a speed ................................... 245Switching off/deactivating .................. 245Switching on/activating ...................... 245System limitations ............................... 243

Active Emergency Stop Assist ............... 253Active headlamps .................................... 158

Index 639

Active Lane Change Assist ..................... 251Activating/deactivating ....................... 253Function ............................................... 251

Active Lane Keeping Assist .................... 285Activating/deactivating ....................... 287Activating/deactivating the warning ... 288Function .............................................. 285Setting the sensitivity .......................... 288System limits ....................................... 285Trailer operation .................................. 285

Active Parking Assist .............................. 270Cross Traffic Alert ................................ 276Drive Away Assist ................................ 275Exiting a parking space ........................ 274Function .............................................. 270Manoeuvring assistance ...................... 276Parking ................................................ 272System limitations ............................... 270

Active Service System PLUSsee ASSYST PLUS

Active Speed Limit Assist ....................... 246Display ................................................. 246Function .............................................. 246

Active Steering Assist ............................. 249Activating/deactivating ....................... 251Active Emergency Stop Assist ............. 253Active Lane Change Assist ................... 251Displays in the instrument display ....... 253Function .............................................. 249System limitations ............................... 249

Adaptive brake lights .............................. 237Adaptive cruise control

see Active Distance Assist DISTRONICAdaptive functions, MULTIBEAM LED

see Intelligent Light SystemAdaptive Highbeam Assist

Function .............................................. 160Switching on/off .................................. 161

Adaptive Highbeam Assist PlusFunction ............................................... 161Switching on/off ................................. 162

AdBlue® .................................................... 556Additives ............................................. 556Capacity .............................................. 557Fill level ............................................... 300Notes ................................................... 212Purity ................................................... 556

Range .................................................. 300Topping up ........................................... 213

Additional door lock .................................. 86Additives .................................................. 557

AdBlue® ............................................... 556Engine oil ............................................. 557Fuel ..................................................... 554

Additives (AdBlue®)see AdBlue®

Additives (engine oil)see Additives

Additives (fuel)see Fuel

Address booksee Contacts

Adjustable load compartment floor ....... 141Adjusting the balance/fader

Advanced sound system ...................... 483Burmester® surround sound system .... 481

Adjusting the bass, mid-range andtreble

Burmester® surround sound system .... 481

640 Index

Adjusting the headlamp range ............... 156Adjusting the mid-range, treble andbass

Burmester® surround sound system .... 481Adjusting the sound focus

Burmester® surround sound system ... 482Adjusting treble, mid-range and basssettings

Advanced sound system ...................... 482Burmester® surround sound system .... 481

Advanced sound systemAdjusting the balance/fader ............... 483Adjusting treble, mid-range and basssettings ............................................... 482Calling up the sound menu .................. 482Information .......................................... 482Switching volume adjustment on/off............................................................. 482

After-sales service centresee ASSYST PLUS

Air conditioning menuCalling up ............................................ 177

Air conditioning systemsee Climate control

Air distributionSetting ................................................. 175Setting (multimedia system) ................ 177

Air inletsee Air-water duct

Air pressuresee Tyre pressure

Air vents ................................................... 183Adjusting (front) .................................. 183Adjusting (rear) .................................... 184

Air ventssee Air vents

Air-recirculation mode ............................ 178Air-water duct .......................................... 491

Keeping free ........................................ 491Airbag ......................................................... 41

Activation .............................................. 36Front airbag (driver, front passenger) ..... 41Installation locations .............................. 41Knee airbag ............................................ 41Overview ................................................ 41

PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamp ..... 46Protection .............................................. 42Reduced protection ............................... 44Side impact airbag ................................. 41Window airbag ....................................... 41

AirflowSetting ................................................. 175

Alarm systemsee ATA (anti-theft alarm system)

All-wheel drivesee 4MATIC

Alternative routesee Route

Ambient lightingSetting (multimedia system) ................ 164

Android Auto ............................................ 444Connecting a mobile phone ................. 445Control using the application buttons............................................................. 446Ending ................................................. 446Information .......................................... 445Overview ............................................. 444Sound settings .................................... 446Transferred vehicle data ...................... 446

Index 641

AnimalsPets in the vehicle ................................. 80

Anti-lock braking systemsee ABS (Anti-lock Braking System)

Anti-skid chainssee Snow chains

Anti-theft alarm systemsee ATA (anti-theft alarm system)

Anti-theft protectionAdditional door lock .............................. 86Immobiliser .......................................... 107

Anti-theft protectionsee ATA (anti-theft alarm system)

Anticipatory occupant protectionsee PRE-SAFE® (anticipatory occu‐pant protection)see PRE-SAFE® PLUS (anticipatoryoccupant protection plus)

Apple CarPlay® ........................................ 443Connecting an iPhone® ....................... 443Control using the application buttons............................................................. 444Ending ................................................. 444

Notes .................................................. 443Overview ............................................. 443Sound settings .................................... 444Transferred vehicle data ...................... 446

AshtrayUsing ................................................... 146

AssistanceMenu (on-board computer) .................. 301

Assistance systemssee Driving safety system

ASSYST PLUS ........................................... 484Battery disconnection periods ............. 485Displaying the service due date ........... 484Function/notes ................................... 484Regular maintenance work .................. 484Special service requirements .............. 484

ATA (anti-theft alarm system) ................. 107Deactivating the alarm ........................ 108Function .............................................. 107Function of interior protection ............. 109Priming/deactivating interior protec‐tion ...................................................... 109Priming/deactivating tow-away pro‐tection ................................................. 108

Tow-away protection function .............. 108ATTENTION ASSIST .......................... 277, 278

Function .............................................. 277Setting ................................................. 278System limitations ............................... 277

Attention assistantsee ATTENTION ASSIST

Augmented realitysee Route guidance with augmented reality

Authorised workshopsee Qualified specialist workshop

Automatic distance controlsee Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC

Automatic driving lights ......................... 156Automatic engine start (ECO start/stop function) .......................................... 196Automatic engine stop (ECO start/stop function) .......................................... 196Automatic front passenger front air‐bag deactivation system

see Automatic front passenger frontairbag shutoff

642 Index

Automatic front passenger front air‐bag shutoff .......................................... 44, 46

Function of the automatic frontpassenger front airbag deactivationsystem ................................................... 44PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamp ..... 46

Automatic mirror folding functionActivating/deactivating ....................... 174

Automatic transmissionDIRECT SELECT lever .......................... 203Drive program display .......................... 199Drive programs .................................... 198DYNAMIC SELECT switch .................... 198Engaging drive position ....................... 205Engaging neutral ................................. 204Engaging park position ........................ 204Engaging reverse gear ......................... 204Kickdown ............................................ 206Manual gear changing ......................... 205Steering wheel gearshift paddles ........ 205Transmission position display .............. 203Transmission positions ........................ 203

Automatic transmission (problem)see Transmission (problem)

Axle loadPermissible .......................................... 550Trailer operation .................................. 565

BBag hook .................................................. 139Ball neck

Folding out/in ..................................... 288BAS (Brake Assist System) ..................... 226Battery

Charging (Remote Online) .................... 189Key ........................................................ 84Remote control (stationary heater) ...... 182

Batterysee Battery (vehicle)

Battery (vehicle) ...................................... 514Charging .............................................. 513Charging (Remote Online) .................... 189Notes .................................................. 509Notes (starting assistance andcharging) .............................................. 511Replacing ............................................. 514Starting assistance .............................. 513

Beltsee Seat belt

Bicycle rackTrailer operation .................................. 291

Blind Spot Assist ..................................... 282Activating/deactivating ....................... 285Function .............................................. 282System limitations ............................... 282

Blowersee Climate control

BlueTECsee AdBlue®

Bluetooth® ............................................... 366Information .......................................... 366Setting up an Internet connection ....... 460Switching on/off ................................. 366

BonnetResetting (active bonnet) .................... 485

Boot lidsee Tailgate

Brake Assist Systemsee BAS (Brake Assist System)

Index 643

Brake fluidNotes .................................................. 559

Brake force distributionEBD (Electronic Brake force Distribu‐tion) ..................................................... 231

BrakesABS (Anti-lock Braking System) ........... 226Active Brake Assist .............................. 231Adaptive brake lights ........................... 237BAS (Brake Assist System) .................. 226Driving tips .......................................... 191EBD (Electronic Brake force Distribu‐tion) ..................................................... 231HOLD function ..................................... 255Limited braking effect (salt-treatedroads) .................................................. 191New/replaced brakepads/brakediscs .................................................... 190Running-in notes .................................. 190

Braking assistancesee BAS (Brake Assist System)

BreakdownOverview of the help functions .............. 18Tow-starting ......................................... 519

Towing away ......................................... 516Transporting the vehicle ....................... 517Wheel change ...................................... 539

Breakdownsee Flat tyre

Burmester® surround sound system ..... 481Adjusting the balance/fader ................ 481Adjusting the sound focus ................... 482Adjusting treble, mid-range and basssettings ................................................ 481Automatic volume adjustment ............. 481Calling up the sound menu .................. 481Information .......................................... 481Selecting the sound profile .................. 482

ButtonsSteering wheel .................................... 295

CCall list

Deleting ............................................... 435Making a call ....................................... 435Overview ............................................. 434Selecting options ................................ 435Selecting options for suggestions ........ 435

Calling up the sound menuAdvanced sound system ...................... 482Burmester® surround sound system .... 481

Calls .......................................................... 430Accepting ............................................ 430Activating functions during a call ........ 430Calls with several participants ............. 430Declining ............................................. 430Ending a call ........................................ 430Incoming call during an existing call .... 431Making ................................................ 430Mercedes me ...................................... 447

Camerasee 360° Camerasee Reversing camera

Car keysee Key

Car washsee Care

Car wash (care) ........................................ 491Car-to-X-Communication

Displaying hazard warnings ................. 408Overview ............................................. 407Sending hazard warnings .................... 408

644 Index

Care .......................................................... 499Air-water duct ...................................... 491Car wash ............................................. 491Carpet ................................................. 499Decorative foil ..................................... 495Display ................................................ 499Exterior lighting ................................... 497High-pressure cleaner ......................... 492Matt finish ........................................... 494Paintwork ............................................ 494Plastic trim .......................................... 499Real wood/trim elements ................... 499Reversing camera ................................ 497Reversing camera/360° Camera ........ 497Roof lining ........................................... 499Seat belt .............................................. 499Seat cover ........................................... 499Sensors ............................................... 497Tailpipes .............................................. 497Trailer hitch ......................................... 497Washing by hand ................................. 493Wheels/rims ....................................... 497Windows .............................................. 497Wiper blades ....................................... 497

Carpet (Care) ........................................... 499

Changing bulbs ........................................ 165Dipped beam ....................................... 166Fitting/removing cover (front wheelarch) .................................................... 166Main beam ........................................... 166Notes ................................................... 165Overview ............................................. 165Reversing lights ................................... 167Turn signal lights (rear) ........................ 167

Changing gears ........................................ 205Manually .............................................. 205

Changing hub caps ................................. 539Changing the lights

Driving abroad (symmetrical lowbeam) .................................................. 155

ChargingBattery (vehicle) ................................... 513USB port .............................................. 150

Child safety lockRear door .............................................. 79Rear side windows ................................. 80

Child seatApproval categories ............................... 58Attaching (notes) ................................... 57

Basic instructions .................................. 50Front passenger seat (notes) ................. 77Front passenger seat (without auto‐matic airbag shutoff) ............................. 76ISOFIX/i-Size (fitting) ............................ 67Notes on risks and dangers ................... 51Recommended child restraint sys‐tems ...................................................... 55Seats suitable for belt-secured childrestraint systems ................................... 72Seats suitable for i‑Size childrestraint systems ................................... 65Seats suitable for ISOFIX childrestraint systems ................................... 61Securing on the front passenger seat .... 78Securing on the rear seat ...................... 75Top Tether .............................................. 70

ChildrenAvoiding dangers in the vehicle .............. 51Basic instructions .................................. 50

Chock ....................................................... 538Storage location .................................. 538

Chocksee Chock

Index 645

Cigarette lighterFront centre console ............................ 147

City lighting ............................................. 159Cleaning

see CareClimate control ........................................ 175

Activating/deactivating the A/Cfunction (control panel) ........................ 176Activating/deactivating the A/Cfunction (multimedia system) .............. 177Activating/deactivating the synchro‐nisation function (control panel) .......... 178Activating/deactivating the synchro‐nisation function (multimedia sys‐tem) ..................................................... 178Air distribution settings ....................... 177Air-recirculation mode ......................... 178Automatic control ................................ 177Calling up the air conditioning menu ... 177Defrosting the windscreen ................... 175Demisting windows .............................. 178Front air vents ..................................... 183Note ..................................................... 175Rear air vents ...................................... 184Residual heat ....................................... 178

Sets the airflow .................................... 175Setting (multimedia system) ................ 177Setting the air distribution ................... 175Setting the temperature ...................... 175Stationary heater/ventilation .............. 178Switching on/off .................................. 176Switching the rear window heateron/off .................................................. 175THERMATIC control panel .................... 175THERMOTRONIC control panel ............ 175Ventilating the vehicle (convenienceopening) .............................................. 100

Coat hook ................................................. 139Coat hook on the tailgate ....................... 139Cockpit ......................................................... 6

Overview ................................................. 6Coffee cup symbol

see ATTENTION ASSISTCombination switch ................................ 157Compass ................................................... 417Computer

see On-board computer

Connection statusDisplaying ............................................ 462Overview ............................................. 462

ConnectivitySwitching transmission of the vehicleposition on/off .................................... 365

Contacts ................................................... 431Calling up ............................................ 432Deleting ............................................... 433Deleting favourites .............................. 434Downloading (from mobile phone) ....... 431Importing ............................................ 433Importing (overview) ........................... 432Information .......................................... 431Making a call ....................................... 433Name format ....................................... 432Options ................................................ 433Saving as a favourite ........................... 434Selecting options for suggestions ........ 433Storing ................................................ 433

Convenience closing ............................... 100Convenience opening .............................. 100Coolant (engine)

Check level .......................................... 490

646 Index

Notes .................................................. 559Cooling

see Climate controlCopyright ................................................... 34Cornering light ......................................... 159Cross Traffic Alert .................................... 276Crosswind Assist

Function/notes ................................... 230Cruise control .......................................... 237

Activating ............................................ 239Buttons ................................................ 239Calling up a speed ............................... 239Deactivating ........................................ 239Function .............................................. 237Requirements ...................................... 239Selecting ............................................. 239Setting a speed ................................... 239Storing a speed ................................... 239System limitations ............................... 237

Cup holder ........................................ 142, 144Fitting/removing (centre console)...................................................... 142, 144Rear ..................................................... 146

DDamage detection (parked vehicle) ....... 223Damping adjustment .............................. 257Dashboard

see CockpitDashboard lighting

see Instrument lightingDashcam

Configuring the settings ...................... 423Deleting a video recording ................... 422Notes ................................................... 421Selecting a USB device ........................ 421Starting/stopping video recording ...... 422

Data acquisitionVehicle ................................................... 31

Data import/export ................................ 369Function/notes ................................... 369Importing/exporting ........................... 369

Data storageElectronic control units .......................... 31Online services ...................................... 33Vehicle ................................................... 31

DateSetting the time and date automati‐cally ..................................................... 364

Deactivating the alarm (ATA) .................. 108Dealership

see Qualified specialist workshopDeclaration of conformity

Electromagnetic compatibility ............... 24Jack ....................................................... 28TIREFIT kit ............................................. 29Wireless vehicle components .......... 24, 28

Decorative foil (cleaning instructions)................................................................... 495DeNOx agent

see AdBlue®

DesignsMenu (on-board computer) .................. 297

Destination .............................................. 402Editing intermediate destinations ........ 392Editing the previous destinations ........ 403External ............................................... 403Quick-access to destination informa‐tion ...................................................... 400

Index 647

Saving (current vehicle position) ......... 402Saving as global favourite .................... 403

Destination entry .................................... 380Entering 3 word addresses .................. 385Entering a POI or address .................... 380Entering an intermediate destination .. 392Entering geo-coordinates .................... 385Notes .................................................. 380Selecting a contact ............................. 385Selecting a POI .................................... 383Selecting a received destination .......... 387Selecting from favourites ..................... 387Selecting from the map ....................... 386Selecting previous destinations ........... 383

Detecting inattentivenesssee ATTENTION ASSIST

Diagnostics connection ............................ 29Diesel

Low outside temperatures ................... 555Notes .................................................. 555

Digital Owner's Manual ............................ 20Digital speedometer ................................ 301

Digital Vehicle Key stickerLocking the vehicle ................................ 88Starting the vehicle .............................. 187Unlocking the vehicle ............................ 88

Dinghy towingsee Tow-bar system

Dipped beamChanging bulbs .................................... 166

DIRECT SELECT lever .............................. 203Engaging drive position ....................... 205Engaging neutral ................................. 204Engaging park position ........................ 204Engaging park position automatically............................................................. 204Engaging reverse gear ......................... 204Function .............................................. 203

Display (Care) .......................................... 499Display (multimedia system) ................. 333

Home screen ....................................... 331Operating ............................................ 333Setting acoustic operating feedback ... 334Settings ............................................... 363

Display (on-board computer)Displays on the multifunction display .. 299

Display contentDisplaying ............................................ 298

Display message ..................................... 566Calling up (on-board computer) ........... 566Notes .................................................. 566

Display messages¯ - - - km/h ................................... 605ç - - - km/h ................................... 603È - - - km/h ................................... 605_ 2nd seat row, left Not locked ..... 582_ 2nd seat row, right Not locked ... 583# 12 V battery See Owner's Man‐ual ........................................................ 611b Active Light System inopera‐tive ....................................................... 574¯ AdBlue system fault Emer. op.:max. XXX km/h Start not poss. inXXX km ............................................... 620¯ AdBlue system fault Emer‐gency op. in XXX miles See Owner'sManual ................................................ 620

648 Index

¯ AdBlue system fault Enginestart not possible ................................ 620¯ AdBlue system fault See Own‐er's Manual .......................................... 6195 Add 1 litre engine oil whennext refuelling ...................................... 621é ATTENTION ASSIST inoperative............................................................. 596é ATTENTION ASSIST: Take abreak! .................................................. 596b Automatic driving lights inoper‐ative .................................................... 573û Before starting the engine, turnthe steering wheel. .............................. 581J Brake immediately ...................... 594Á Change key batteries .................. 571J Check brake fluid level ............... 595# Check brake pads See Owner'sManual ................................................ 595

ï Check trailer hitch lock (whitedisplay message) ................................. 577h Check tyre(s) .............................. 614! Clean the fuel filter ..................... 585ÿ Coolant Stop vehicle Switchengine off ............................................ 584_ Currently unavailable Cameraview restricted ..................................... 602ç Currently unavailable Radarsensors dirty ........................................ 601! currently unavailable See Own‐er's Manual ......................................... 606÷ currently unavailable See Own‐er's Manual ......................................... 6085 Engine oil level cannot bemeasured ............................................ 6235 Engine oil level Reduce oil level .. 6215 Engine oil level Stop vehicleSwitch engine off ................................ 622

5 Engine oil pressure StopSwitch off engine ................................ 622ä Fault Drive at max. 80 km/h ...... 5976 Front left malfunction Consultworkshop (example) ............................ 567& inoperative Battery low ............... 576& inoperative Refuel vehicle ........... 576& inoperative See Owner's Man. .... 576! inoperative See Owner's Man‐ual ....................................................... 607÷ inoperative See Owner's Man‐ual ....................................................... 608T inoperative See Owner's Man‐ual ....................................................... 609G Inoperative .................................. 611î inoperative ................................. 604b Intelligent Light System inoper‐ative ..................................................... 574Á Key not detected (red displaymessage) ............................................. 572

Index 649

Á Key not detected (white dis‐play message) ...................................... 571b Left dipped beam (example) ....... 5736 Left windowbag malfunctionConsult workshop (example) ............... 568b Malfunction See Owner's Man‐ual ....................................................... 573î Max. speed 40 km/h ................. 604ð Maximum speed exceeded ......... 606î Not in curr. drive prog. ............... 604ç Off .............................................. 603ë Off .............................................. 602ï Operation only possible intransmission position N ....................... 579! Parking brake See Owner'sManual ................................................ 591h Rectify tyre pressure ................... 615Ú Refill AdBlue See Owner’sManual ................................................. 618! Release parking brake ................ 594

¸ Replace air cleaner ..................... 585À Replace key See Owner's Man‐ual ....................................................... 570Á Replace key ................................ 571æ Reserve fuel level ....................... 5856 Restraint sys. malfunction Con‐sult workshop ...................................... 567# See Owner's Manual ................... 612Ù Steering malfunction Increasedphysical effort See Owner's Manual .... 579Ù Steering malfunction See Own‐er's Manual ......................................... 580Ù Steering malfunction Stopimmediately See Owner's Manual ....... 579# Stop vehicle Leave engine run‐ning ...................................................... 613# Stop vehicle See Owner's Man‐ual ........................................................ 612ç suspended ................................. 603b Switch off lights .......................... 574

b Switch on headlamps ................. 574Ú Top up AdBlue Emergency op.in XXX miles See Owner's Manual ....... 618+ Top up coolant See Owner’sManual ................................................ 583¥ Top up washer fluid .................... 583d Trans. oil overheated Drive onwith care ............................................. 588! Turn on the ignition to releasethe parking brake ................................ 594Ú ................................................... 619d Vehicle is operational Switchoff ignition before exiting ..................... 577h Warning tyre defect .................... 615h Wheel sensor(s) missing ............. 614Ú XX,X l Top up AdBlue Switch onignition, wait 60 sec. or eng. startnot poss. .............................................. 619Active Blind Spot Assist currentlyunavailable See Owner's Manual ......... 599

650 Index

Active Blind Spot Assist inoperative .... 600Active Blind Spot Assist not availablewhen towing a trailer See Owner'sManual ................................................ 600Active bonnet malfunction See Own‐er's Manual .......................................... 581Active Brake Assist Functions cur‐rently limited See Owner's Manual ...... 610Active Brake Assist Functions limitedSee Owner's Manual ............................ 610Active Distance Assist availableagain ................................................... 604Active Distance Assist currentlyunavailable See Owner's Manual ......... 603Active Distance Assist inoperative ...... 603Active Lane Keeping Assist currentlyunavailable See Owner's Manual ......... 598Active Lane Keeping Assist inopera‐tive ...................................................... 598

Active Parking Assist andPARKTRONIC inoperative See Own‐er's Manual ......................................... 600Active Steering Assist currentlyunavailable due to multiple emer‐gency stops ......................................... 598Active Steering Assist currentlyunavailable See Owner's Manual ......... 597Active Steering Assist inoperative ....... 597Adaptive Highbeam Assist currentlyunavailable See Owner's Manual ......... 575Adaptive Highbeam Assist inopera‐tive ...................................................... 575Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus cur‐rently unavailable See Owner's Man‐ual ....................................................... 575Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus inop‐erative ................................................. 575Anti-theft alarm system Malfunction ... 582

Apply brake to deselect Park (P)position ............................................... 586Apply brake to select R ........................ 587Auxiliary battery malfunction .............. 588Beginning emergency stop .................. 597Blind Spot Assist currently unavaila‐ble See Owner's Manual ...................... 599Blind Spot Assist inoperative ............... 599Blind Spot Assist not available whentowing a trailer See Owner's Manual ... 599Check tyre pressures then restartRun Flat Indicator ................................. 617Clutch overheated Avoid pulling awayfor XX:XX mins .................................... 590Cruise control and Limiter inopera‐tive ...................................................... 605Cruise control inoperative ................... 605Cruise control off ................................ 605Depress clutch fully to start engine ..... 589

Index 651

Drive system Malfunction StopSwitch engine off ................................ 586Drive system Malfunction Visit work‐shop .................................................... 585Front-passenger airbag disabled SeeOwner's Manual .................................. 568Front-passenger airbag enabled SeeOwner's Manual .................................. 569Hazard warning lamps malfunction‐ing ....................................................... 575Limiter inoperative .............................. 605Limiter passive .................................... 605Mercedes me connect Services limi‐ted See Owner's Manual ...................... 611N permanently active Risk of vehiclerolling .................................................. 587Only select Park (P) when vehicle isstationary ............................................ 586Parking lock inoperative Apply theparking brake ...................................... 589

Place the key in the marked spaceSee Owner's Manual ............................ 572PRE-SAFE inoperative See Owner'sManual ................................................ 570Reduce speed ...................................... 616Reversing not poss. Consult work‐shop .................................................... 587Risk of vehicle rolling away Applyparking brake See Owner's Manual ..... 589Risk of vehicle rolling away Parkingbrake not applied See Owner's Man‐ual ....................................................... 594Risk of vehicle rolling Driver dooropen and transmission not in P ........... 587Run Flat Indicator inoperative .............. 618Speed limit (winter tyres) XXX km/h ... 606Speed Limit Assist currently unavail‐able See Owner's Manual .................... 600Speed Limit Assist inoperative ............ 601Teaching in transmission complete ..... 589

Teaching in transmission Operateselector lever Brake for XX secondsRisk of vehicle rolling .......................... 589To shift out of P or N, depress brakeand start engine .................................. 586To switch off the engine, press theStart/Stop button for at least 3 sec‐onds or 3 times. .................................. 585Traffic Sign Assist currently unavaila‐ble See Owner's Manual ...................... 600Traffic Sign Assist inoperative ............. 600Transmission Malfunction .................... 588Transmission Malfunction Stop ........... 588Transmission Malfunction Visit work‐shop .................................................... 589Tyre press. monitor currently unavail‐able ...................................................... 613Tyre press. monitor inoperative ............ 613Tyre press. monitor inoperative Nowheel sensors ...................................... 614

652 Index

Tyre pressure Check tyres .................... 617Tyre(s) overheated ............................... 616Without changing gear, consult work‐shop .................................................... 587

Display on the windscreensee Head-up display

Distance controlsee Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC

Distance recordersee Trip distance

DISTRONICsee Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC

DoorAdditional door lock .............................. 86Child safety lock (rear door) .................. 79Locking (emergency key) ....................... 91Opening (from the inside) ...................... 87Unlocking (emergency key) .................... 91Unlocking (from the inside) ................... 87

Door control panel ..................................... 16Downhill driving assistance

see DSR

Drawbarsee Tow-bar system

Drinks holdersee Cup holder

Drive Away Assist .................................... 275Drive position

Engaging ............................................. 205Drive program display ............................. 199Drive programs

see DYNAMIC SELECTDriver's seat

see SeatDriving abroad

Symmetrical low beam ........................ 155Driving lights

see Automatic driving lightsDriving safety system ............................. 224

ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) ........... 226Active Brake Assist .............................. 231Adaptive brake lights ........................... 237BAS (Brake Assist System) .................. 226EBD (Electronic Brake force Distribu‐tion) ..................................................... 231

ESP® Crosswind Assist ........................ 230ESP® trailer stabilisation ..................... 230Off-road ABS ....................................... 226Off-road ESP® ..................................... 230Overview ............................................. 225Radar and ultrasonic sensors .............. 225Responsibility ...................................... 224STEER CONTROL ................................. 231

Driving systemSuspension with adaptive dampingadjustment .......................................... 257

Driving systemsee 360° Camerasee Active Blind Spot Assistsee Active Distance Assist DISTRONICsee Active Emergency Stop Assistsee Active Lane Change Assistsee Active Lane Keeping Assistsee Active Parking Assistsee Active Speed Limit Assistsee Active Steering Assistsee ATTENTION ASSISTsee Blind Spot Assistsee Cruise controlsee Driving safety system

Index 653

see DSRsee HOLD functionsee Limitersee Parking Assist PARKTRONICsee Reversing camerasee Speed Limit Assistsee Start-off assistsee Traffic Sign Assist

Driving tipsDriving abroad (symmetrical lowbeam) .................................................. 155General driving tips .............................. 191Running-in notes .................................. 190

Drowsiness detectionsee ATTENTION ASSIST

DSR ........................................................... 241Activating/deactivating ....................... 242Changing the target speed .................. 242Function ............................................... 241Notes ................................................... 242

Dynamic handling control systemsee ESP® (Electronic Stability Program)

DYNAMIC SELECT .................................... 198Configuring drive program I ................. 200

Displaying engine data ........................ 200Displaying vehicle data ........................ 200Drive program display .......................... 199Drive programs .................................... 198Function .............................................. 198Operating (DYNAMIC SELECT switch)............................................................. 199Selecting the drive program ................ 199

DYNAMIC SELECT switchDamping adjustment ........................... 257

EE-mails

see In-Car OfficeE10 ............................................................ 553Easy entry feature

Function/notes ................................... 123Setting ................................................. 124

Easy exit featureFunction/notes ................................... 123Setting ................................................. 124

EBD (Electronic Brake force Distribu‐tion)

Function/notes ................................... 231

ECO displayFunction .............................................. 197Resetting ............................................. 302

ECO start/stop function ......................... 196Automatic engine start ........................ 196Automatic engine stop ......................... 196Operation ............................................ 196Switching off/on ................................. 197

Electric parking brake ............................. 221Applying automatically ......................... 221Applying or releasing manually ............ 223Emergency braking .............................. 223Releasing automatically ....................... 222

Electrical fusessee Fuses

Electromagnetic compatibilityDeclaration of conformity ...................... 24

Electronic Stability Programsee ESP® (Electronic Stability Program)

EmergencyFire extinguisher .................................. 502First-aid kit (soft sided) ....................... 502Overview of the help functions .............. 18Removing the warning triangle ............ 501

654 Index

Safety vest ........................................... 501Setting up the warning triangle ........... 502

Emergency braking ................................. 223Emergency braking

see BAS (Brake Assist System)Emergency call system

see Mercedes-Benz emergency call systemEmergency engine start .......................... 519Emergency key

Inserting/removing ............................... 84Locking a door ....................................... 91Unlocking a door ................................... 91Unlocking the tailgate ............................ 97

Emergency operation modeStarting the vehicle ............................. 188

Emergency spare wheel ......................... 544Inflating ............................................... 545Notes .................................................. 544Removing ............................................ 545

ENERGIZING CoachCalling up ............................................ 377Function ............................................... 376

ENERGIZING COMFORT ........................... 373Overview of programmes ..................... 374Starting the programme ...................... 375

ENERGIZING seat kineticsSetting ................................................. 373

ENERGIZING seat kineticssee ENERGIZING COMFORT

EngineECO start/stop function ...................... 196Engine number .................................... 550Starting (Digital Vehicle Key sticker) .... 187Starting (emergency operationmode) .................................................. 188Starting (mobile phone) ....................... 187Starting (Remote Online) ..................... 189Starting (start/stop button) ................ 186Starting assistance .............................. 513Switching off (start/stop button) ......... 215

Engine bonnetFunction (active bonnet) ...................... 485Opening/closing ................................. 486

Engine dataDisplaying ............................................ 200

Engine electronicsNotes ................................................... 548

Engine number ........................................ 550Engine oil ................................................. 489

Additives ............................................. 557Capacity .............................................. 558Checking the oil level using the on-board computer ................................... 488MB-Freigabe or MB-Approval ............... 558Quality ................................................. 558Topping up ........................................... 489

Entering characters ................................ 356Function/notes ................................... 356On the touchpad .................................. 357On the touchscreen (media display) .... 360Setting the keyboard ........................... 363

ERA-GLONASS test modeStarting/ending ................................... 457

ESC (Electronic Stability Control)see ESP® (Electronic Stability Program)

ESP®Crosswind Assist ................................. 230Off-road ............................................... 230Trailer stabilisation .............................. 230

Index 655

ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) ...... 227Activating/deactivating ....................... 230Function/notes ................................... 227

EU general operating permit number .... 550Exterior lighting

Care .................................................... 497Exterior lighting

see Lights

FFatigue detection

see ATTENTION ASSISTFault message

see Display messageFavourites

Adding ................................................. 350Adding a destination ............................ 387Calling up ............................................ 350Deleting ............................................... 351Home address ..................................... 387Moving ................................................. 351Overview ............................................. 350Renaming ............................................. 351Work address ...................................... 387

Fill levelAdBlue® ............................................... 300

Filling station searchStarting automatic search ................... 394Switching automatic search on/off ..... 394

Fire extinguisher ..................................... 502First-aid kit (soft sided) .......................... 502Flat towing

see Tow-bar systemFlat tyre .................................................... 503

MOExtended tyres ............................... 503Notes .................................................. 503TIREFIT kit ........................................... 505Wheel change ...................................... 539

Floor mats ................................................ 153Foil covering

Radar and ultrasonic sensors .............. 225Free software ............................................ 34Frequencies

Mobile phone ...................................... 549Two-way radio ...................................... 549

Frequency bandDialling (on-board computer) ............... 304

Front airbag (driver, front passenger) ...... 41Front passenger seat

see Load compartmentsee Seat

Front wheel arch ..................................... 166Fitting/removing the cover .................. 166

Front wheel arch coverFitting/removing ................................. 166

Fuel ........................................................... 554Additives ............................................. 554Diesel .................................................. 555E10 ...................................................... 553Fuel reserve ........................................ 556Low outside temperatures ................... 555Petrol ................................................... 553Quality (diesel) .................................... 555Quality (petrol) .................................... 553Refuelling ............................................ 209Sulphur content ................................... 553Tank content ....................................... 556

Fuel consumptionOn-board computer ............................. 301

656 Index

Fuel consumption indicatorCalling up ............................................ 201

Function seatsee Door control panel

Fuses ........................................................ 520Before replacing a fuse ........................ 520Fuse assignment diagram ................... 520Fuse box in the engine compartment .. 521Fuse box in the front passenger foot‐well ...................................................... 522Fuse box in the load compartment ...... 523Notes .................................................. 520

GGarage door opener

Clearing the memory ........................... 219Opening or closing the door ................. 218Programming buttons .......................... 216Radio equipment approval numbers .... 219Resolving problems .............................. 218Synchronising the rolling code ............. 217

Gearshift recommendation ............ 202, 206General operating permit number(EU) ........................................................... 550

Genuine parts ............................................ 22Glide mode ............................................... 206Global search

Function .............................................. 354Overview ............................................. 354

Glove compartmentLocking/unlocking .............................. 127

HHandbrake

see Electric parking brakeHandling characteristics (unusual) ....... 524HANDS-FREE ACCESS ................................ 96Hazard warning lights ............................. 158Head restraint

Front (adjusting mechanically) ............. 118Rear (adjusting) .................................... 119Rear (fitting/removing) ........................ 119

Head-up display ....................................... 306Adjusting display elements (on-boardcomputer) ............................................ 306Adjusting the brightness (on-boardcomputer) ............................................ 306

Function .............................................. 307Menu (on-board computer) .................. 306Operating the memory function ........... 124Setting the position (on-board com‐puter) .................................................. 306Switching on/off ................................. 308

Headlamp flasher .................................... 157Heating

see Climate controlHigh beam

Adaptive Highbeam Assist ................... 160Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus ............ 161Switching on/off ................................. 157

High-pressure cleaner (care) ................. 492Hill Start Assist ....................................... 255HOLD function ......................................... 255

Function/notes ................................... 255Switching on/off ................................. 255

Home screen (media display)Overview .............................................. 331

HotspotSetting up (Wi-Fi) ................................. 368

Index 657

Ii-Size child seat securing system

Fitting .................................................... 67Seats suitable for attaching ................... 65

Identification plateEngine ................................................. 550Vehicle ................................................ 550

IgnitionSwitching on (Start/Stop button) ........ 185

Ignition keysee Key

Immobiliser .............................................. 107Implied warranty

Vehicle ................................................... 31In-Car Office .................................... 438, 439

Answering e-mail ................................. 440Calling up ............................................ 438Features .............................................. 438Forwarding e-mail ............................... 440Managing e-mails ................................ 439Marking a task as completed .............. 439Noting an incoming call ....................... 439Selecting functions (calendar entry) .... 438

Selecting functions (Tasks & Calls) ...... 439Writing e-mail ...................................... 439

Increase in traffic information volumeSetting ................................................. 480

Indicator lampssee Warning/indicator lamps

Individual drive programConfiguring .......................................... 200Selecting ............................................. 199

Inspectionsee ASSYST PLUS

Instrument clustersee Instrument display

Instrument display .................................. 294Adjusting the lighting .......................... 300Function/notes ................................... 294Instrument cluster ................................. 10Warning/indicator lamps .................... 623

Instrument lighting ................................. 300Intelligent Light System .......................... 158

Active headlamps ................................ 158Adaptive Highbeam Assist ................... 160Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus ............ 161

City lighting ......................................... 159Cornering light ..................................... 159Motorway mode ................................... 159Overview ............................................. 158Switching on/off ................................. 160

Interior lighting ........................................ 163Ambient lighting .................................. 164Reading light ........................................ 163Setting ................................................. 163Switch-off delay time ........................... 165

Interior protectionFunction .............................................. 109Priming/deactivating ........................... 109

Intermediate destinationCalculating a route with intermediatedestinations ........................................ 393Entering ............................................... 392Modifying ............................................ 392Starting an automatic filling stationsearch ................................................. 394Starting the automatic service sta‐tion search .......................................... 395

InternetCalling up a web page ......................... 463

658 Index

Closing the browser ............................ 465Deleting a bookmark ........................... 465Deleting history ................................... 465Managing bookmarks .......................... 465

Internet connectionCancelling permission (mobilephone) ................................................. 461Communication module function ........ 459Connection status ............................... 462Displaying the connection status ........ 462Establishing ......................................... 461Establishing automatically ................... 461Information .......................................... 459Mobile phone details ........................... 461Restrictions ......................................... 459Setting access data (Bluetooth®) ........ 460Setting automatic disconnection ......... 462Setting up (Bluetooth®) ....................... 460Setting up (Wi-Fi) ................................. 460

iPhone®

see Apple CarPlay®see Mercedes-Benz Link

ISOFIX child seat securing systemFitting .................................................... 67

Seats suitable for attaching ................... 61

JJack

Declaration of conformity ...................... 28Storage location .................................. 538

Jump-start connection ............................ 513General notes ....................................... 511

KKey .............................................................. 82

Acoustic locking verification signal ....... 83Battery .................................................. 84Emergency key ...................................... 84Energy consumption .............................. 84Features ................................................ 82Key ring attachment .............................. 84Overview ............................................... 82Problem ................................................. 86Unlocking setting .................................. 83

Key functionsDeactivating .......................................... 84

KEYLESS-GOLocking the vehicle ................................ 89

Problem ................................................. 90Unlocking setting .................................. 83Unlocking the vehicle ............................ 89

Kickdown ................................................. 206Using ................................................... 206

Knee airbag ................................................ 41

LLamp

see Interior lightingLamps (instrument display)

see Warning/indicator lampsLane detection (automatic)

see Active Lane Keeping AssistLane Keeping Assist

see Active Lane Keeping AssistLanguage ................................................. 369

Notes .................................................. 369Setting ................................................. 369

LED lightsee Intelligent Light System

Light switchOverview ............................................. 155

Index 659

Lightingsee Interior lightingsee Lights

Lights ........................................................ 155Active headlamps ................................ 158Adaptive Highbeam Assist ................... 160Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus ............ 161Adjusting the instrument lighting ........ 300Automatic driving lights ....................... 156Changing bulbs .................................... 165City lighting ......................................... 159Combination switch ............................. 157Cornering light ..................................... 159Driving abroad (symmetrical lowbeam) .................................................. 155Hazard warning lights .......................... 158Headlamp flasher ................................ 157Headlamp range .................................. 156High beam ........................................... 157Intelligent Light System ....................... 158Light switch ......................................... 155Low beam ............................................ 155Motorway mode ................................... 159Off-road light ....................................... 159Parking lights ....................................... 155

Rear fog light ....................................... 155Responsibility for lighting systems ...... 155Setting the exterior lighting switch-off delay time ...................................... 163Standing lights ..................................... 155Switching the surround lightingon/off ................................................. 163Turn signal lights .................................. 157

Limiter ...................................................... 238Activating ............................................ 239Buttons ................................................ 239Calling up a speed ............................... 239Deactivating ........................................ 239Function .............................................. 238Passive mode ...................................... 238Permanent setting ............................... 241Requirements ...................................... 239Selecting ............................................. 239Setting a speed ................................... 239Storing a speed ................................... 239System limitations ............................... 238

Limiting speedsee Limiter

Limiting the opening angle (tailgate) ....... 97

LINGUATRONIC ........................................ 310Audible help functions ......................... 312Improving speech quality ..................... 313Language setting .................................. 311Media player voice commands ............ 322Message voice commands .................. 324Multifunction steering wheel (operat‐ing) ...................................................... 310Navigation voice commands ................ 315Notes on the voice commands ............. 313Online voice control ............................. 313Operable functions ............................... 311Operating safety .................................. 309Radio voice commands ....................... 320Setting (multimedia system) ................ 312Switch voice commands ...................... 314Telephone voice controls ..................... 319Text message voice commands ........... 324Vehicle voice commands ..................... 326Voice prompting .................................. 310

Live Traffic InformationDisplaying the traffic map ................... 405Displaying traffic incidents .................. 406Extending a subscription ..................... 405Provider information ............................ 405

660 Index

Registering on Mercedes me ............... 405Showing local area messages .............. 407Switching the traffic information dis‐play on ................................................. 407

Load compartment .................................. 128Expanding ............................................ 128

Load compartment coverExtending/retracting ........................... 136Notes ................................................... 135Removing/fitting ................................. 136

Load compartment floorAdjustable ............................................ 141Opening/closing ................................. 140

Loading ..................................................... 138Adjustable load compartment floor ..... 141Bag hook ............................................. 139Coat hook ............................................ 139Notes ................................................... 126Roof rack ............................................. 142Stowage space underneath the loadcompartment floor .............................. 140Tie-down eyes ...................................... 138

Loading guidelines .................................. 126

LoadsSecuring .............................................. 126

Locking/unlockingActivating/deactivating the auto‐matic locking feature ............................. 90Additional door lock .............................. 86Digital Vehicle Key sticker ..................... 88Emergency key ...................................... 91KEYLESS-GO .......................................... 89Mobile phone ........................................ 88Opening the tailgate .............................. 92Smartphone .......................................... 88Unlocking/opening the doors fromthe inside ............................................... 87

Low beamSwitching on/off ................................. 155Symmetrical low beam ........................ 155

Lubricant additivessee Additives

LuggageSecuring .............................................. 126

Lumbar supportsee Lumbar support (4-way)

Lumbar support (4-way) .......................... 114

MMain beam

Changing bulbs .................................... 166Maintenance

see ASSYST PLUSMalfunction

Parking Assist PARKTRONIC ................ 260Restraint system ................................... 36

Manual transmissionOperating the gearshift lever ............... 201

Map ................................................... 405, 411Avoiding an area .................................. 414Avoiding an area (overview) ................. 414Changing an area ................................. 415Deleting an area ................................... 415Displaying Qibla ................................... 417Displaying the compass ....................... 417Displaying the map version .................. 414Displaying the next intersectingstreet ................................................... 414Displaying the range ............................ 417Displaying the satellite map ................. 417Displaying the traffic map ................... 405Displaying weather information ........... 418

Index 661

Map data .............................................. 416Moving ................................................. 411Selecting POI symbols ......................... 412Selecting text information .................... 413Selecting the map orientation .............. 412Setting the map scale .......................... 411Setting the map scale automatically .... 417Showing in the multifunction displayof the instrument cluster ..................... 418Switching motorway informationon/off .................................................. 414Updating .............................................. 415

Massage programmesResetting the settings .......................... 120

Massage programsSelecting the front seats ..................... 120

Massage settingsResetting ............................................. 120

Matt finish (cleaning instructions) ........ 494Maximum gross vehicle weight ............. 550Maximum speed

see Limiter

MBUX Interior Assistant (multimediasystem) .................................................... 337

Notes .................................................. 336Operating a function with the favour‐ites pose .............................................. 340Operating functions through proxim‐ity of the hand ..................................... 338Overview ............................................. 337Selecting settings ................................ 342Switching the reading light for thedriver and front passenger on/off ....... 341Switching the search light for thedriver on/off ........................................ 341

Mecca ........................................................ 417Media

Menu (on-board computer) .................. 305Media display

Notes .................................................. 330Media mode

Adding a favourite song ....................... 474Connecting Bluetooth® audio equip‐ment .................................................... 472Connecting USB devices ...................... 472Controlling media playback ................. 473

Copyright and trademarks ................... 469Making video settings .......................... 477Notes about the search function incategories ............................................ 475Overview of the media menu ............... 471Playing back similar music tracks ........ 474Removing a favourite song ................... 474Searching for a music track accord‐ing to mood ......................................... 476Starting a search in categories ............ 476Starting media playback ...................... 473Supported format and data storagemedia .................................................. 468Surprise mix ......................................... 474Using the keyword search .................... 476

Media playbackOperating (on-board computer) ........... 305

Media sourceSelecting (on-board computer) ............ 305

Memory functionHead-up display — Calling up storedsettings ................................................ 124Head-up display — Storing settings ...... 124Operating ............................................. 124

662 Index

Outside mirrors — Calling up storedsettings ................................................ 124Outside mirrors — Storing settings ....... 124Seat — Calling up stored settings ......... 124Seat — Storing settings ........................ 124

Menu (on-board computer)Assistance ........................................... 301Designs ............................................... 297Head-up display ................................... 306Media .................................................. 305Navigation ........................................... 303Overview ............................................. 296Radio ................................................... 304Service ................................................ 300Telephone ............................................ 305Trip ...................................................... 301

Mercedes me appCalling up services ............................... 451Calling up your user account ............... 451Deleting the connection to the useraccount ................................................ 451Information .......................................... 450

Mercedes me callsArranging a service appointment ........ 448

Calling the Mercedes-Benz CustomerCentre ................................................. 448Consenting to data transfer ................ 448Information .......................................... 447Making a call via the overhead con‐trol panel ............................................. 447Transferred data .................................. 449

Mercedes me connectAccident and breakdown manage‐ment .................................................... 450Information .......................................... 449Transferred data .................................. 450

Mercedes-AMG vehiclesNotes ................................................... 185

Mercedes-Benz emergency call sys‐tem ............................................................ 451

Automatic emergency call ................... 454Information .......................................... 451Information on data transfer ....... 455, 457Manual emergency call ........................ 454Overview ............................................. 453Self-diagnosis (Russia) ........................ 457Starting/ending ERA-GLONASS testmode ................................................... 457

Mercedes-Benz Link ................................ 441Connecting .......................................... 442Ending ................................................. 442Note .................................................... 442Overview .............................................. 441Sound settings .................................... 442

Mercedes-Benz service centresee Qualified specialist workshop

Message (multifunction display)see Display message

Message memory .................................... 566Messages ................................................. 435

Calling a message sender .................... 437Composing .......................................... 436Configuring the displayed text mes‐sages ................................................... 436Deleting ............................................... 438Forwarding .......................................... 437Overview ............................................. 435Reading ............................................... 436Replying .............................................. 436Sending ............................................... 436Using a number/URL .......................... 437Using templates .................................. 437

Index 663

Voice commands (LINGUATRONIC) ..... 324Mirrors

see Outside mirrorsMobile phone

Cancelling permission for Internetconnection ........................................... 461Damage detection (parked vehicle) ..... 223Frequencies ......................................... 549Locking the vehicle ................................ 88Starting the vehicle .............................. 187Transmission output (maximum) ......... 549Unlocking the vehicle ............................ 88Wireless charging ................................ 152see Apple CarPlay®

Mobile phonesee Android Autosee Mercedes-Benz Linksee Telephone

Mobile phone voice recognitionStarting ............................................... 430Stopping .............................................. 430

Model seriessee Vehicle identification plate

MOExtended tyres .................................. 503

Motorway mode ....................................... 159MULTIBEAM LED

see Intelligent Light SystemMultifunction display

Overview of the displays ...................... 299Multifunction steering wheel

Overview of buttons ............................ 295Multifunction steering wheel

see Steering wheelMultimedia system

Activating/deactivating DSR ............... 242Activating/deactivating standbymode ................................................... 224Activating/deactivating voice ampli‐fication to rear ..................................... 365Adjusting the volume ........................... 356Central control elements ..................... 332Configuring display settings ................ 363Configuring drive program I ................. 200ENERGIZING COMFORT programme(overview) ............................................ 374ENERGIZING seat kinetics ................... 373Favourites ............................................ 350Main functions .................................... 342

MBUX Interior Assistant (notes) .......... 336Overview ............................................. 329Restoring the factory settings .............. 372Standby mode function ....................... 224Starting the ENERGIZING COMFORTprogramme .......................................... 375Switching the sound on/off ................ 355

Multimedia systemsee Display (multimedia system)see Entering characterssee MBUX Interior Assistant (multi‐media system)see Notifications Centresee Profilesee Suggestionssee Themessee Touch Controlsee Touchpad

Music onlineCalling up ............................................. 474Configuring options ............................. 475Search function ................................... 474

664 Index

NNavigation

Menu (on-board computer) .................. 303Overview ............................................. 379Showing/hiding the menu ................... 378Switching on ........................................ 378Updating the map data ........................ 415Voice commands (LINGUATRONIC) ...... 315

Navigationsee Destinationsee Destination entrysee Mapsee Parking servicesee Routesee Route guidancesee Traffic information

Navigation announcementsActivating/deactivating ....................... 400Adjusting the volume ........................... 401Repeating ............................................ 401Switching audio fadeout on/off ........... 401

Navigation messagesOn-board computer ............................. 303

Near Field Communication (NFC) .......... 428Connecting the mobile phone to themultimedia system .............................. 428General information ............................ 428Locking the vehicle (digital vehiclekey sticker) ............................................ 88Locking the vehicle (mobile phone) ....... 88Starting the vehicle (Digital VehicleKey sticker) .......................................... 187Starting the vehicle (mobile phone) ..... 187Switching mobile phones .................... 428Unlocking the vehicle (digital vehiclekey sticker) ............................................ 88Unlocking the vehicle (mobile phone) .... 88Using a mobile phone .......................... 428

NeutralEngaging ............................................. 204

NFCsee Near Field Communication (NFC)

Non-operational timeActivating/deactivating standbymode ................................................... 224Standby mode function ....................... 224

Notifications Centre ................................ 352Calling up a notification ....................... 353Editing a notification ........................... 353Global search (overview) ..................... 354Notification types ................................ 352Overview ............................................. 352Selecting actions for a notification ...... 353Using the global search ....................... 354

OOccupant safety

Pets in the vehicle ................................. 80Occupant safety

see Airbagsee Automatic front passenger frontairbag shutoffsee PRE-SAFE® (anticipatory occu‐pant protection)see PRE-SAFE® PLUS (anticipatoryoccupant protection plus)see Restraint systemsee Seat belt

Odometersee Total distance

Index 665

Off-road driving ....................................... 193Off-road driving

see Off-road driving

Off-road ESP®Function/notes ................................... 230

Off-road light ........................................... 159Oil

see Engine oilOn-board computer ................................. 296

Assistance menu ................................. 301Displaying the service due date ........... 484Head-up display menu ......................... 306Media menu ........................................ 305Menu designs ...................................... 297Menu overview .................................... 296Multifunction display ........................... 299Navigation menu ................................. 303Operate ............................................... 296Radio menu ......................................... 304Service menu ...................................... 300Telephone menu .................................. 305Trip menu ............................................ 301

On-board diagnostics interfacesee Diagnostics connection

On-board electronicsEngine electronics ............................... 548Notes ................................................... 548Two-way radios .................................... 548

Online servicesData storage .......................................... 33

Online servicessee In-Car Office

Open-source software .............................. 34Opening the tailgate using your foot

see HANDS-FREE ACCESSOperating fluids

AdBlue® ............................................... 556Additives (fuel) .................................... 554Brake fluid ........................................... 559Coolant (engine) .................................. 559Engine oil ............................................. 557Fuel (diesel) ......................................... 555Fuel (petrol) ......................................... 553Notes .................................................. 552Windscreen washer fluid ..................... 560

Operating safetyDeclaration of conformity (electro‐magnetic compatibility) ......................... 24

Declaration of conformity (jack) ............ 28Declaration of conformity (TIREFIT kit) .. 29Declaration of conformity (wirelessvehicle components) ....................... 24, 28Information ............................................ 23

Operating systemsee On-board computer

Outside mirrors ................................ 171, 172Anti-dazzle mode (automatic) .............. 172Automatic mirror folding function ........ 174Folding in/out ...................................... 171Operating the memory function ........... 124Parking position ................................... 173Setting ................................................. 171

Overhead control panelOverview ................................................ 14

Owner's ManualVehicle equipment ................................. 23

Owner's Manual (digital) .......................... 20

PPaint code ................................................ 550Paintwork (cleaning instructions) ......... 494

666 Index

Panoramic sliding sunroofsee Sliding sunroof

Park positionInserting .............................................. 204Selecting automatically ....................... 204

Parkingsee Electric parking brake

Parking aidsee Parking Assist PARKTRONIC

Parking Assist PARKTRONIC .................. 258Activating ............................................ 262Adjusting warning tones ...................... 263Deactivating ........................................ 262Function .............................................. 258Problems ............................................. 260Side impact protection ........................ 261System limitations ............................... 258

Parking assistance systemssee Active Parking Assist

Parking brakesee Electric parking brake

Parking lights ........................................... 155

Parking optionssee Parking service

Parking positionOutside mirrors .................................... 173Storing the position of the passengeroutside mirror using reverse gear ........ 174

Parking service ........................................ 419Notes ................................................... 419Paying parking charges ....................... 420Selecting parking options .................... 419Showing a parking option on themap ..................................................... 420

Parking up ................................................ 224PARKTRONIC

Malfunction ......................................... 260Partitioning net

Attaching ............................................. 137PASSENGER AIR BAG status display

see Automatic front passenger frontairbag shutoff

Pedestrian protectionsee Active bonnet (pedestrian protection)

Permissible axle load .............................. 550

Permitted towing methods ..................... 514Petrol ........................................................ 553Pets in the vehicle ..................................... 80Phone book

see ContactsPIN protection

Switching on/off ................................. 370Plastic trim (Care) ................................... 499POI

Quick access ....................................... 400Selecting ............................................. 383

POI symbolsSelecting .............................................. 412

Power supplySwitching on (Start/Stop button) ........ 185

Power windowssee Side windows

PRE-SAFE® (anticipatory occupantprotection) ................................................. 49

Function ................................................ 49PRE-SAFE® Sound ................................. 49Reversing measures .............................. 49

Index 667

PRE-SAFE® PLUS (anticipatory occu‐pant protection plus) ................................ 49

Function ................................................ 49Reversing measures .............................. 49

Preventative occupant protection sys‐tem

see PRE-SAFE® (anticipatory occu‐pant protection)

Previous destinationsSelecting ............................................. 383

Profile ....................................................... 343Creating a new profile ......................... 344Maximum number of profiles .............. 343Notes .................................................. 343Overview ............................................. 343Selecting a profile ............................... 345Selecting profile options ..................... 345Showing the profile selection whenentering ............................................... 346Synchronising ...................................... 345

Programssee DYNAMIC SELECT

Protection against collisionsee Drive Away Assist

Protection of the environmentNotes ..................................................... 21Take-back of end-of-life vehicles ............ 21

QQibla .......................................................... 417QR code

Rescue card ........................................... 31Qualified specialist workshop ................. 30

RRadar and ultrasonic sensors

Damage ............................................... 225Radio

Activating ............................................ 477Activating/deactivating radio text ....... 480Activating/deactivating trafficannouncements .................................. 480Calling up a slide show ........................ 479Calling up the station list ..................... 479Deleting channels ................................ 479Direct frequency entry ......................... 479Displaying information ......................... 480Displaying radio text ............................ 480

Editing station presets ......................... 479Frequency fix ....................................... 479Menu (on-board computer) .................. 304Moving stations ................................... 479Overview .............................................. 478Searching for stations ......................... 479Setting a channel ................................. 478Setting station tracking ....................... 479Setting the frequency band ................. 478Setting the traffic informationservice volume increase ...................... 480Storing radio stations .......................... 479Voice commands (LINGUATRONIC) ..... 320

Radio stationsDialling (on-board computer) ............... 304

Rain closing functionSliding sunroof .................................... 105

Rain-closing featureSide windows ........................................ 99

RangeAdBlue® ............................................... 300Displaying ............................................ 301

REACH regulation ...................................... 31

668 Index

Reading lightSwitching on/off using poses .............. 341

Reading lightsee Interior lighting

Real wood (Care) ..................................... 499Rear door (child safety lock) .................... 79Rear fog light

Switching on/off ................................. 156Rear seat

see Seatsee Third row of seats

Rear seat beltStatus display ........................................ 41

Rear seat belt status display .................... 41Rear window

Changing the wiper blade .................... 170Rear window heater ................................ 175Rear window wipers

Activating/deactivating ....................... 168Rear-view mirror

see Outside mirrors

Recyclingsee Take-back of end-of-life vehicles

Reducing agentsee AdBlue®

RefuellingRefuelling the vehicle .......................... 209Topping up AdBlue® ............................. 213

RegistrationVehicle .................................................. 30

Remote control (stationary heater/ventilation)

Displays ............................................... 181Problems ............................................. 183Replacing the battery .......................... 182Setting ................................................. 180

Remote OnlineCharging the battery ............................ 189Cooling or heating the vehicle inte‐rior ....................................................... 189Starting the vehicle ............................. 189

Replacing a bulbsee Changing bulbs

Rescue card ............................................... 31

ReserveFuel ..................................................... 556

Reset function (multimedia system) ..... 372Residual heat ........................................... 178Restoring (factory settings)

see Reset function (multimedia system)Restraint system ....................................... 35

Basic instructions for children ............... 50Function in an accident ......................... 36Functionality .......................................... 36Malfunction ........................................... 36Protection .............................................. 35Reduced protection ............................... 35Self-test ................................................. 36Warning lamp ........................................ 36

Reverse gearInserting .............................................. 204

Reversing camera ................................... 263Care .................................................... 497Function .............................................. 263Opening the camera cover (360°Camera) .............................................. 270Switching automatic operationon/off (360° Camera) ......................... 270

Index 669

Reversing lights (changing bulbs) .......... 167Rims (Care) .............................................. 497Roll away protection

see HOLD functionRoof lining (care) ..................................... 499Roof load .................................................. 561Roof load display

Information .......................................... 199Roof rack

Attaching ............................................. 142Loading ................................................ 142

Route ................................................ 388, 393Accepting a detour recommendationafter a prompt ..................................... 390Activating a commuter route ............... 394Alternative route (quick-access) .......... 400Calculating .......................................... 388Displaying destination information ...... 392Displaying the route list ....................... 393Editing a stored route .......................... 396External ............................................... 403Planning .............................................. 392Recording a route ................................ 395

Saving a recorded route ...................... 396Selecting a type .................................. 389Selecting an alternative route ............. 393Selecting notifications ......................... 391Selecting options ................................ 390Showing a stored route on the map .... 395Starting a saved route ......................... 395Starting the automatic service sta‐tion search .......................................... 395Switching the automatic filling sta‐tion search on/off ............................... 394With intermediate destinations ........... 393

Route guidance ....................................... 396Cancelling ............................................ 401Changing direction .............................. 397Destination reached ............................ 400From an off-road location .................... 402Lane recommendations ....................... 398Motorway information ......................... 399Notes .................................................. 396Off-road ............................................... 402To an off-road destination ................... 402

Route guidance with augmented real‐ity .............................................................. 409

Activating ............................................. 410

Displaying street names and housenumbers .............................................. 410Overview ............................................. 409Switching on display of traffic lights .... 410

Route-based speed adaptationDisplays in the instrument display ....... 253Function .............................................. 247

Route-based speed adjustmentSetting ................................................. 249

Run-flat characteristicsMOExtended tyres ............................... 503

Running-in notes ..................................... 190

SSafety systems

see Driving safety systemSafety vest ............................................... 501Satellite map ............................................ 417Search light

Switching on/off using poses .............. 341Seat ................................................... 110, 129

4-way lumbar support .......................... 114Adjusting (electrically) ......................... 114

670 Index

Adjusting (Seat Comfort) ..................... 113Adjusting the backrest (rear) ................ 116Adjusting the rear seat (mechani‐cally) .................................................... 114Adjusting the seat backrest angle(rear) ................................................... 134Adjustment (without Seat ComfortPackage) ............................................... 111Configuring the settings ...................... 120Correct driver's seat position ............... 110ENERGIZING seat kinetics ................... 373Folding the backrest (frontpassenger seat) forwards .................... 128Folding the backrest (rear) back .......... 130Folding the backrest (rear) forwards .... 129Folding the backrest (rear) forwardsto get in (third row of seats) ................. 116Operating the memory function ........... 124Resetting the settings .......................... 120Setting options ...................................... 16

Seat belt ............................................... 37, 41Activating/deactivating seat beltadjustment ............................................ 41Care .................................................... 499Fastening ............................................... 40

Protection .............................................. 37Rear seat belt status display .................. 41Reduced protection ............................... 38Releasing ............................................... 40Seat belt adjustment (function) ............. 40Warning lamp ......................................... 41

Seat belt adjustmentActivating/deactivating ......................... 41Function ................................................ 40

Seat belt tensionersActivation .............................................. 36

Seat belt warningsee Seat belt

Seat cover (Care) ..................................... 499Seat heater

Activating/deactivating ....................... 120Seat kinetics

Setting ................................................. 373Seat kinetics

see ENERGIZING COMFORTSeat ventilation

Switching on/off ................................. 121

Second telephoneConnecting .......................................... 427

Selecting a gearsee Changing gears

Selecting the sound profileBurmester® surround sound system ... 482

Selector leversee DIRECT SELECT lever

Self-testAutomatic front passenger front air‐bag shutoff ............................................ 46

Sensors (Care) ......................................... 497Service

Menu (on-board computer) .................. 300Service

see ASSYST PLUSService centre

see Qualified specialist workshopService interval display

see ASSYST PLUSService station search

Starting automatic search ................... 395

Index 671

Setting a speedsee Cruise control

Setting the date format .......................... 364Setting the distance unit ........................ 369Setting the map scale

see MapShift paddles

see Steering wheel gearshift paddlesShifting gears

Gearshift recommendation ......... 202, 206Short messages

see MessagesSide impact airbag ..................................... 41Side impact protection ............................ 261Side windows ............................................. 98

Automatic function ................................ 99Child safety lock in the rear ................... 80Closing .................................................. 98Closing using the key ........................... 100Convenience closing ............................ 100Convenience opening .......................... 100Opening ................................................. 98Opening with the key ........................... 100

Problem ............................................... 101Rain-closing feature ............................... 99

Sliding sunroof ........................................ 102Automatic functions ............................ 105Closing ................................................ 102Closing using the key ........................... 100Opening ............................................... 102Opening with the key ........................... 100Problem ............................................... 105Rain closing function ........................... 105

SmartphoneLocking the vehicle ................................ 88Unlocking the vehicle ............................ 88

Smartphonesee Android Autosee Apple CarPlay®see Mercedes-Benz Linksee Telephone

Snow chains ............................................ 525Socket (12 V) ............................................ 147

Armrest ............................................... 148Front centre console ............................ 147Load compartment .............................. 150

Socket (115 V) .......................................... 148Rear ..................................................... 148

Socket (230 V) ......................................... 149Rear ..................................................... 149

Software update ...................................... 370Information .......................................... 370Performing ........................................... 371System updates ................................... 372

SoundPRE-SAFE® Sound ................................. 49Wheels and tyres ................................. 524

Soundsee Burmester® surround sound systemsee Tone settings

Sound settingsAdjusting the balance/fader ............... 480Adjusting treble, mid-range and basssettings ............................................... 480Automatic volume adjustment ............. 480

Spare wheelsee Emergency spare wheel

Speech dialogue systemsee LINGUATRONIC

672 Index

Speed Limit Assist .................................. 278Function/notes ................................... 278Setting ................................................. 280System limitations ............................... 278

Speed limitation for winter tyresSetting ................................................. 241

SpeedometerDigital .................................................. 301

Standby modeActivating/deactivating ....................... 224Function .............................................. 224

Standing lights ........................................ 155Start-off assist ......................................... 257

Activating ............................................ 257Function .............................................. 257

Start/stop buttonParking the vehicle .............................. 215Starting the vehicle ............................. 186Switching on the power supply orignition ................................................ 185

Start/stop functionsee ECO start/stop function

Starting assistancesee Jump-start connection

Starting the enginesee Vehicle

Starting-off aidsee Hill Start Assist

StationDeleting ............................................... 479Direct frequency entry ......................... 479Frequency fix ....................................... 479Moving ................................................. 479Searching ............................................ 479Setting ................................................. 478Storing ................................................. 479

Station listCalling up ............................................ 479

Station presetsModifying ............................................. 479

Station trackingSetting ................................................. 479

Stationary heater/ventilationDisplays (remote control) ..................... 181Problems (remote control) ................... 183

Replacing the battery (remote con‐trol) ..................................................... 182Setting (multimedia system) ................ 180Setting (remote control) ...................... 180Switching on/off (control panel) ......... 179

STEER CONTROLFunction/notes ................................... 231

Steering wheel ........................................ 295Adjusting (manually) ............................ 122Buttons ................................................ 295Steering wheel heater .......................... 123

Steering wheel gearshift paddles .......... 205Steering wheel heater

Switching on/off ................................. 123Stowage areas

see Loadingsee Stowage compartment

Stowage compartment ............................ 127Armrest ............................................... 127Centre console .................................... 127Door .................................................... 127Glove box ............................................. 127

Index 673

Stowage compartmentssee Loadingsee Stowage compartment

Stowage space underneath the loadcompartment floor .................................. 140Suggestions ............................................. 348

Calling up ............................................ 349Configuring .......................................... 349Deleting ............................................... 350Overview ............................................. 348Renaming ............................................ 350

Sulphur content ...................................... 553Sun visor

Operating ............................................. 174Surround lighting

Switching on/off ................................. 163Surround View

see 360° CameraSuspension

Adaptive damping adjustment ............. 257Damping characteristics ...................... 257

SVHC (substances of very high con‐cern) ............................................................ 31

Switch-off delay timeExterior ................................................ 163Interior ................................................. 165

Switching volume adjustment on/offAdvanced sound system ...................... 482

Synchronisation functionActivating/deactivating (multimediasystem) ................................................ 178Switching on/off (control panel) .......... 178

System settingsActivating/deactivating PIN protec‐tion ...................................................... 370Activating/deactivating voice ampli‐fication to rear ..................................... 365Reset function (multimedia system) .... 372Setting the distance unit ..................... 369Setting the time and date automati‐cally ..................................................... 364Setting the time zone .......................... 364Setting the time/date format .............. 364Switching transmission of the vehicleposition on/off .................................... 365

System settingssee Bluetooth®

see Data import/exportsee Languagesee Software updatesee Wi-Fi

TTailgate ....................................................... 92

Closing .................................................. 93HANDS-FREE ACCESS ........................... 96Limiting the opening angle .................... 97Opening ................................................. 92Opening dimensions ............................ 561Unlocking (emergency key) .................... 97

Tailpipes (Care) ........................................ 497Take-back of end-of-life vehicles .............. 21

Protection of the environment ............... 21Tank content

AdBlue® ............................................... 557Fuel ..................................................... 556Reserve (fuel) ...................................... 556

Technical dataAxle load (trailer operation) ................. 565Fastening points (trailer hitch) ............. 563Information .......................................... 548

674 Index

Mounting dimensions (trailer hitch) ..... 563Notes (trailer hitch) ............................. 563Overhang dimension (trailer hitch) ...... 563Tongue weight ..................................... 565Towing capacity (trailer operation) ...... 564Vehicle identification plate .................. 550

Telephone ........................................ 305, 425Activating functions during a call ........ 430Calls with several participants ............. 430Changing a function ............................ 427Connecting a mobile phone (NearField Communication (NFC)) ............... 428Connecting a mobile phone (Pass‐key) ..................................................... 426Connecting a mobile phone (SecureSimple Pairing) .................................... 426Disconnecting a mobile phone ............ 428Importing contacts .............................. 433Importing contacts (overview) ............. 432Incoming call during an existing call .... 431Information .......................................... 426Interchanging mobile phones .............. 427Locking the vehicle (mobile phone) ....... 88Menu (on-board computer) .................. 305Mobile phone voice recognition .......... 430

Notes .................................................. 423Operating modes ................................. 426Reception and transmission volume .... 429Replacing mobile phones .................... 427Setting the ringtone ............................ 429Starting the vehicle (mobile phone) ..... 187Switching mobile phones (Near FieldCommunication (NFC)) ........................ 428Telephone menu overview ................... 425Telephone operation ............................ 430Unlocking the vehicle (mobile phone) .... 88Using Near Field Communication(NFC) ................................................... 428Voice commands (LINGUATRONIC) ...... 319Wireless charging (mobile phone) ........ 152

Telephone numberDialling (on-board computer) ............... 305

Telephone operationsee Calls

Telephony operating modesBluetooth® Telephony .......................... 426

Temperature ............................................. 175Text messages

Voice commands (LINGUATRONIC) ..... 324

Text messagessee Messages

Themes ..................................................... 346Calling up ............................................ 347Deleting ............................................... 348Fastening ............................................. 347Modifying ............................................ 348Moving ................................................ 348Overview ............................................. 346

Third row of seats .................................... 131Folding back the backrest on thethird row of seats ................................ 133Folding the backrest on the third rowof seats forwards ................................. 131Getting in/out ...................................... 116Height limit ........................................... 111

Through-loading featuresee Load compartmentsee Seatsee Third row of seats

Tie-down eyes .......................................... 138Time

Manual time setting ............................. 364

Index 675

Setting the time and date automati‐cally ..................................................... 364Setting the time zone .......................... 364Setting the time/date format .............. 364

TIREFIT kit ................................................ 504Declaration of conformity ...................... 29Storage location .................................. 504Using ................................................... 505

Tone settings ........................................... 480Calling up the sound menu .................. 480Information .......................................... 480

Tongue weight ......................................... 565Tool

see Vehicle tool kitTop Tether .................................................. 70Total distance .......................................... 301

Displaying ............................................ 301Touch Control .......................................... 332

On-board computer ............................. 296Operating ............................................ 332Setting acoustic operating feedback ... 333Setting the sensitivity .......................... 333

Touchpad .................................................. 334Activating/deactivating haptic oper‐ating feedback ..................................... 336Operating ............................................ 334Reading the handwriting recognitionaloud ................................................... 335Selecting a station and track ............... 336Setting acoustic operating feedback ... 336Setting the sensitivity .......................... 335

Touchscreen (media display)Entering characters ............................. 360Operating ............................................ 333Setting acoustic operating feedback ... 334

Tow-away protectionFunction .............................................. 108Priming/deactivating ........................... 108

Tow-bar system ....................................... 293Tow-starting ............................................. 519Towing away ............................................. 516Towing eye

Installing .............................................. 519Storage location ................................... 519

Towing methods ....................................... 514

Traffic announcementsActivating/deactivating ....................... 480

Traffic information .................................. 404Car-to-X-Communication ..................... 407Displaying the traffic map ................... 405Displaying traffic incidents .................. 406Extending a Live Traffic Informationsubscription ........................................ 405Live Traffic Information ....................... 405Overview ............................................. 404Registering Live Traffic Information ..... 405Switching on the display ...................... 407

Traffic mapsee Map

Traffic Sign Assist ................................... 280Function/notes ................................... 280Setting ................................................. 282System limitations ............................... 280

Trailer hitchAxle load ............................................. 565Bicycle rack ......................................... 291Care .................................................... 497Coupling up/uncoupling a trailer ........ 290Fastening points .................................. 563

676 Index

Folding the ball neck out/in ................ 288General notes ...................................... 563Mounting dimensions .......................... 563Notes .................................................. 288Overhang dimension ........................... 563Socket ................................................. 290Tongue weight ..................................... 565Towing capacity ................................... 564

Trailer operationActive Blind Spot Assist ....................... 284Active Lane Keeping Assist ................. 285Bicycle rack ......................................... 291Coupling up/uncoupling a trailer ........ 290Folding the ball neck out/in ................ 288Notes .................................................. 288Socket ................................................. 290

Trailer stabilisationFunction/notes ................................... 230

Transferred vehicle dataAndroid Auto ....................................... 446Apple CarPlay® .................................... 446

Transmission (problem) .......................... 208Transmission position display ............... 203

TransportingVehicle ................................................. 517

Trim element (Care) ................................ 499Trip

Menu (on-board computer) .................. 301Trip computer

Displaying ............................................ 301Resetting ............................................. 302

Trip distance ............................................ 301Displaying ............................................ 301Resetting ............................................. 302

Trip metersee Trip distance

TuneInCalling up ............................................ 465Calling up the station list (categorylast selected) ....................................... 468Deleting stations ................................. 468Logging out ......................................... 468Overview ............................................. 467Registering .......................................... 468Saving stations .................................... 468Selecting and connecting to a station............................................................. 467

Selecting stream ................................. 468Setting options .................................... 468Terms of use ........................................ 468

Turn signal indicatorsee Turn signal lights

Turn signal lights ..................................... 157Changing bulbs (rear) .......................... 167Switching on/off ................................. 157

Two-way radiosFrequencies ......................................... 549Notes on installation ........................... 548Transmission output (maximum) ......... 549

Tyre inflation compressorsee TIREFIT kit

Tyre pressure ........................................... 526Checking (tyre pressure monitoringsystem) ............................................... 528Notes .................................................. 525Restarting the tyre pressure losswarning system ................................... 533Restarting the tyre pressure monitor‐ing system ........................................... 528TIREFIT kit ........................................... 505

Index 677

Tyre pressure loss warning system(function) ............................................. 533Tyre pressure monitoring system(function) ............................................. 527Tyre pressure table .............................. 526

Tyre pressure loss warning systemFunction .............................................. 533Restarting ............................................ 533

Tyre pressure monitor ............................ 529Function .............................................. 527

Tyre pressure monitoring systemChecking the tyre pressure ................. 528Checking the tyre temperature ............ 528Restarting ............................................ 528

Tyre pressure table ................................. 526Tyre temperature

Checking (tyre pressure monitoringsystem) ............................................... 528Tyre pressure monitoring system(function) ............................................. 527

Tyre tread ................................................. 524Tyre-change tool kit

Overview ............................................. 538

TyresChanging hub caps .............................. 539Checking ............................................. 524Checking the tyre pressure (tyrepressure monitoring system) ............... 528Fitting .................................................. 542Flat tyre ............................................... 503Interchanging ...................................... 537MOExtended tyres ............................... 503Noise ................................................... 524Notes on fitting ................................... 534Removing ............................................ 542Replacing .................................... 534, 539Restarting the tyre pressure losswarning system ................................... 533Restarting the tyre pressure monitor‐ing system ........................................... 528Selection ............................................. 534Snow chains ........................................ 525Storing ................................................ 538TIREFIT kit ........................................... 505Tyre pressure (Notes) .......................... 525Tyre pressure loss warning system(function) ............................................. 533Tyre pressure monitoring system(function) ............................................. 527

Tyre pressure table .............................. 526Unusual handling characteristics ......... 524

UUnits of measurement

Setting ................................................. 369Unlocking setting ...................................... 83USB port ................................................... 150User profile

see Profile

VVehicle ...................................................... 188

Activating/deactivating standbymode ................................................... 224Additional door lock .............................. 86Correct use ........................................... 30Damage detection (parking) ................ 223Data acquisition ..................................... 31Data storage .......................................... 31Diagnostics connection ......................... 29Equipment ............................................. 23Implied warranty .................................... 31Locking (automatically) ......................... 90

678 Index

Locking (digital vehicle key sticker) ....... 88Locking (from the inside) ....................... 87Locking (KEYLESS-GO) .......................... 89Locking (mobile phone) ......................... 88Locking/unlocking (emergency key) ...... 91Lowering ............................................. 543Parking up ........................................... 224QR code rescue card ............................. 31Qualified specialist workshop ................ 30Raising ................................................ 540REACH regulation .................................. 31Registration ........................................... 30Standby mode function ....................... 224Starting (Digital Vehicle Key sticker) .... 187Starting (emergency operationmode) .................................................. 188Starting (mobile phone) ....................... 187Starting (Remote Online) ..................... 189Starting (start/stop button) ................ 186Switching off (start/stop button) ......... 215Towing ................................................. 293Unlocking (digital vehicle key sticker) .... 88Unlocking (from the inside) ................... 87Unlocking (KEYLESS-GO) ....................... 89Unlocking (mobile phone) ...................... 88Ventilating (convenience opening) ....... 100

Voice commands (LINGUATRONIC) ..... 326Vehicle data

Angle of approach/departure ............. 562Displaying (DYNAMIC SELECT) ............ 200Fording depth ...................................... 562Maximum gradient climbing ability ...... 562Roof load ............................................. 561Transferring to Android Auto ............... 446Transferring to Apple CarPlay® ............ 446Vehicle height ...................................... 561Vehicle length ...................................... 561Vehicle width ....................................... 561Wheelbase ........................................... 561

Vehicle dimensions ................................. 561Vehicle identification number

see VINVehicle identification plate .................... 550

EU general operating permit number .. 550Paint code ........................................... 550Permissible axle load ........................... 550Permissible gross mass ....................... 550VIN ...................................................... 550

Vehicle interiorCooling or heating (Remote Online) ..... 189

Vehicle keysee Key

Vehicle maintenancesee ASSYST PLUS

Vehicle positionSwitching transmission on/off ............ 365

Vehicle tool kit ........................................ 504TIREFIT kit ........................................... 504Towing eye ........................................... 519

VentilatingConvenience opening .......................... 100

Ventilationsee Climate control

Ventssee Air vents

VIN ............................................................ 550Engine compartment ........................... 550Identification plate .............................. 550Windscreen ......................................... 550

VisionDemisting windows .............................. 178

Voice amplification to the rearActivating/deactivating ....................... 365

Index 679

Voice control systemsee LINGUATRONIC

WWarning lamps

see Warning/indicator lampsWarning system

see ATA (anti-theft alarm system)Warning triangle

Removing ............................................. 501Setting up ............................................ 502

Warning/indicator lamp! ABS warning lamp ...................... 634J Brake system warning lamp(red) .................................................... 632J Brake system warning lamp(yellow) ................................................ 631ÿ Coolant warning lamp ................ 628# Electrical fault warning lamp ...... 630; Engine diagnosis warning lamp .. 629

å ESP® OFF warning lamp ............. 636

÷ ESP® warning lamp flashes ........ 635

÷ ESP® warning lamp lights up ...... 635æ Fuel reserve warning lamp ......... 630! Red indicator lamp, electricparking brake applied .......................... 6316 Restraint system warning lamp .. 6257 Seat belt warning lamp flashes .. 6257 Seat belt warning lamp lightsup ........................................................ 626ï Trailer tow hitch warning lamp ... 626h Tyre pressure monitoring sys‐tem warning lamp flashes .................... 637h Tyre pressure monitoring sys‐tem warning lamp lights up ................. 637L Warning lamp for distancewarning function ................................. 633Ù Warning lamp for electricpower steering .................................... 627! Yellow electric parking brakeindicator lamp is malfunctioning .......... 631

Warning/indicator lamps ....................... 623Overview ............................................. 623PASSENGER AIR BAG ............................ 46

Warranty ..................................................... 31Washer fluid

see Windscreen washer fluidWashing by hand (care) .......................... 493Water tank

see Air-water ductWeather information ............................... 418Web browser

Calling up a web page ......................... 463Calling up options ................................ 464Calling up the settings ......................... 465Deleting a bookmark ........................... 465Deleting Internet history ...................... 465Ending ................................................. 465Managing bookmarks .......................... 465Overview ............................................. 464

WebsiteCalling up ............................................ 463

Wheel changeFitting a new wheel ............................. 542

680 Index

Lowering the vehicle ........................... 543Preparation ......................................... 539Raising the vehicle .............................. 540Removing a wheel ............................... 542Removing/fitting hub caps .................. 539

Wheel changesee Emergency spare wheel

Wheel rotation ......................................... 537Wheels

Care .................................................... 497Changing hub caps .............................. 539Checking ............................................. 524Checking the tyre pressure (tyrepressure monitoring system) ............... 528Fitting .................................................. 542Flat tyre ............................................... 503Interchanging ...................................... 537MOExtended tyres ............................... 503Noise ................................................... 524Notes on fitting ................................... 534Removing ............................................ 542Replacing .................................... 534, 539Restarting the tyre pressure losswarning system ................................... 533

Restarting the tyre pressure monitor‐ing system ........................................... 528Selection ............................................. 534Snow chains ........................................ 525Storing ................................................ 538TIREFIT kit ........................................... 505Tyre pressure (Notes) .......................... 525Tyre pressure loss warning system(function) ............................................. 533Tyre pressure monitoring system(function) ............................................. 527Tyre pressure table .............................. 526Unusual handling characteristics ......... 524

Wi-Fi ......................................................... 366Overview ............................................. 366Setting ................................................. 366Setting up a hotspot ............................ 368Setting up an Internet connection ....... 460

Widescreen cockpit instrument dis‐play

Instrument cluster ................................. 12Window airbag ........................................... 41Windows

see Side windows

Windows (Care) ....................................... 497Windscreen .............................................. 175

Defrosting ............................................ 175Windscreen

see Windscreensee Windshield

Windscreen washer fluid ........................ 560Notes .................................................. 560

Windscreen washer systemTopping up ........................................... 490

Windscreen wipersChanging the wiper blades .................. 168Switching on/off ................................. 167

Windshield ............................................... 168Changing the wiper blades .................. 168

Wingsee Front wheel arch

Winter operationSnow chains ........................................ 525

Winter tyresSetting the permanent speed limita‐tion ...................................................... 241

Index 681

Wiper bladesCare .................................................... 497Replacing ............................................. 168

Wireless chargingFunction/notes .................................... 151Mobile phone ....................................... 152

Wireless vehicle componentsDeclaration of conformity ................ 24, 28

Workshopsee Qualified specialist workshop

682 Index

Mercedes-Benz GLB 2019 SUV MBUX Owner's Manual PDF ...

Documents